JP7804028B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state.

Conventionally, gaming machines that are equipped with movable bodies and are capable of executing movable body effects in which the movable bodies are operated while variable symbol display is being performed include those that are capable of executing an initial operation (long initial operation) in which the movable bodies operate in the same manner as the effect operation when the power is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, or an initial operation (short initial operation) in which the movable bodies operate with some of the effect operation omitted (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-113217

There was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines with the functions and configuration described in Patent Document 1.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

(1) A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state,
a transmitting means capable of transmitting start information corresponding to a variable display pattern including a specific variable display pattern capable of performing an operation effect by a performance operation by a player;
receiving means for receiving the start information;
A movable body and
A movable body control means;
A performance control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
A predetermined display relating to the advantageous state can be displayed in a predetermined display area,
A special display whose appearance can be changed during the special state can be displayed in the special display area,
The predetermined display regarding the advantageous state in the predetermined display area does not change in appearance during the special state,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation operation control to operate the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally after power is turned on,
the confirmation operation control is a control for operating the movable body so that an area where the movable body overlaps with the special display area becomes smaller than the predetermined display area,
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part until the operation performance is executed;
a second part that is executed after the first part and that notifies the result of the operation performance;
The invention comprises:
The movable body control means
The confirmation operation control can be performed using a first operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a first period and a second operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a second period that is shorter than the first period,
a first movable body control pattern in which, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display and when the remaining time until the end of the predetermined variable display is shorter than the length of the second period, and when the power is subsequently turned on and the receiving means does not receive start information corresponding to the specific variable display pattern, the confirmation operation control is performed using the first operation control pattern;
a second movable body control pattern in which, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display when the remaining time until the end of the predetermined variable display is shorter than the length of the second period, and thereafter the power is turned on and the receiving means receives start information corresponding to the specific variable display pattern, the confirmation operation control is performed using the second operation control pattern during the execution of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern, and the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation operation control ends before the period corresponding to the second part;
The confirmation operation control can be performed in a plurality of patterns including
During the variable display, it is possible to execute a movable body effect using the movable body, and to display an effect display corresponding to the movable body effect,
When the variable display that executes the movable body performance is started while the confirmation operation control is being performed, the confirmation operation control is continued, and the effect display is displayed without executing the movable body performance during the confirmation operation control ;
The performance control means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can improve the marketability of the product.
Furthermore, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters set forth in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters set forth in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a frame lamp. A diagram to explain the special pattern LED board, the fourth pattern unit, and the relationship between the fourth pattern unit and the game effect lamp. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining various boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. A diagram to explain the types of wins. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining each random number. A diagram to explain the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. A diagram to explain an example of a front fluctuation pattern on the main side. A diagram for explaining an example of a subsequent fluctuation pattern on the main side. This is a diagram to explain the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table when a miss occurs. This is a diagram to explain the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the previous fluctuation pattern determination table. A diagram to explain an example of a total fluctuation pattern on the main side. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lottery for effect patterns on the sub side. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. This is a flowchart showing an example of processing before opening a jackpot. A flowchart showing an example of processing during jackpot release. This is a flowchart showing an example of processing after a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of presentations. This is a diagram to explain the relationship before and after the decision on whether or not a win is made, the SP first half reach A jackpot, and the SP final reach jackpot. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the start part. This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocative part (SP first half Reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenarios of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenarios of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the reel action part (when the SP develops in the second half). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocative part (SP second half Reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenarios of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenarios of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocative part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocative part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the scenarios of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and the losing epilogue part (SP final reach). FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a relief part. A diagram to explain the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving an odd numbered symbol after button operation) and the fanfare part. This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation) and the fanfare part. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to an LED driver. 10 is a diagram for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the presentation mode in the start part. This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the reel operation part (when the SP develops in the second half). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP final reach). 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining the presentation mode in the rescue hit part. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining the presentation mode in the rescue hit part. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-draw part (odd number pattern is derived after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-draw part (odd number pattern is derived after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-draw part (deriving an odd numbered symbol after button operation). FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the fanfare part. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation). FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the fanfare part. FIG. 10 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b11) to (b13). FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a volume level. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a volume level. A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (r24) to (r27). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (r28) to (r31). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (r32) to (r35). A detailed explanatory diagram of the role-playing actions in (b18) to (i1). A detailed explanatory diagram of the role-playing actions in (b18) to (i1). A detailed explanation diagram of the reel operation in (r54) to (s4). A detailed explanation diagram of the reel operation in (r54) to (s4). FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. FIG. 10 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (A1) to (A23). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (A24) to (A46). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b4) to (b6) and a comparison diagram during the jackpot round. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transparency of subtitles for dialogue and sound output. 10 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) and a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitles. FIG. 10 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (B4) to (B11). FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the pattern display. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of a re-lottery. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of a re-lottery. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of a re-lottery. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of a re-lottery. FIG. 10 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the pattern determination period. FIG. 10 is a detailed explanatory diagram of a blackout. FIG. 10 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp when a miss occurs and a diagram to explain modified examples when a miss occurs. FIG. 10 is a detailed explanatory diagram of part (r48). 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used for a start part. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a start part. FIG. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of the SP, Reach A. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of the SP, Reach A. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of the SP, Reach B. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of the SP, Reach B. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the reel operation part during the development of the second half of the SP. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach A. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach A. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach A. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach A. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach B. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach B. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach B. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP final reach. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP final reach. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP final reach. A figure to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach. A figure to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a part per relief. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in a re-lottery part. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (before operation promotion). FIG. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-draw part (pattern promotion after operation promotion). A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-draw part (maintaining the pattern after operation promotion). FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a fanfare part. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for a role lamp and a grandchild table for a left-of-board lamp in a smooth rainbow brightness data table. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for an Attacka lamp in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a reel operation red flashing brightness data table. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze luminance data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a white flicker (white flash) brightness data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a special lamp in a common red cut-in brightness data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a board left lamp in a common red cut-in brightness data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a special feature lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for the left-side lamp in the common green cut-in brightness data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a dimming brightness data table without operation prompting. FIG. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table and the operation prompt brightness data table. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the shutter luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the miss brightness data table. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table per repair; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table per repair; 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a hit determination brightness data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a hit determination brightness data table. FIG. A figure for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a re-lottery effect brightness data table. A figure for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the re-lottery effect brightness data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table in a background luminance data table. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background brightness data table. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a comparison of lamp control when winning and when losing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a comparison of lamp control when winning and when losing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a comparison of lamp control when winning and when losing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the swinging pattern of the pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the re-lottery presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the re-lottery presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the re-lottery presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of a child table. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable display result designation command, and FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating an example of a game state background designation command. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2, (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special pattern), (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table (for the second special pattern), and (E) is an explanatory diagram showing a small jackpot type determination table. An explanatory diagram of the types of jackpots. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a game control data storage area. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. This is a flowchart showing an example of processing during small win release. This is a flowchart showing an example of small win end processing. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initial operation control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an origin placement control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an operation check control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an operation check control process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a switching control table. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams of control during an execution period of confirmation control and control during an execution period of post-confirmation operation control. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A shows a state in which the on-board movable body is located at the origin position, and FIG. 1B shows a state in which the on-board movable body is located at the performance position. 1A shows the state in which the under-board movable body is located at the origin position, and FIG. 1B shows the state in which the under-board movable body is located at the performance position. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the frame-mounted movable body and the chance button are located at the origin position, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which they are located at the performance position. A diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU. (A) is a diagram showing the effects that can be executed during the variable display period of the SP reach, and (B) is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed in the jackpot game state. A diagram showing an example of the operation of the pre-reading movable object announcement. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the start-up notice operation. A diagram showing an example of the operation of movable object preview and pseudo consecutive preview. A figure showing an example of the reach warning and button warning operations. A figure showing an example of the operation of SP reach notice. A diagram showing an example of the operation of a jackpot presentation. A figure showing an example of the operation of a jackpot effect (promotion effect). FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of state transition operation control. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a customer waiting demo performance. 1A is a diagram illustrating the operation of a movable body, and FIG. 1B is a diagram illustrating the manner in which a lamp and sound are emitted in response to the operation of the movable body. 10A to 10J are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the operation check control during cold start processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. This is a timing chart for when a moving body preview is performed after initial operation by cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice during initial operation due to cold start. This is an explanatory diagram showing the situation when a starting win occurs during initial operation due to a cold start. This is an explanatory diagram showing the situation when a starting win occurs during initial operation due to a cold start. This is a timing chart for when a movable body preview is performed after initial operation by hot start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice during initial operation due to cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice after initial operation due to cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting the look-ahead movable body advance notice during the initial operation due to a cold start. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation and variable 2 display that executes a movable body preview is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation and a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs after the initial operation and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation and a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart showing a case where the movable body moves to the performance position as an initial operation, and a case where the movable body does not move to the performance position as an initial operation. As a performance action of the moving object announcement, the moving object may move to the performance position, and as a performance action of the moving object announcement, the moving object may move to the performance position. This is a timing chart of a moving body preview when the moving body stops on its way from the origin position to the performance position as an initial operation. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation due to a cold start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. This is a timing chart of a demonstration effect when a movable body stops midway from the origin position to the effect position during initial operation. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a jackpot fluctuation. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a fanfare performance. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the fanfare performance. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of operation when operation confirmation control is executed for fanfare performance. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round of play. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of one round of play. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval. A diagram showing an example of the operation of operation confirmation control as a modified example when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the start of a round of play in which a promotion effect is executed. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round of play. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on afterwards. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the button notice is executed. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation for which a start-time notice is executed. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-continuous notification is executed. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during normal fluctuation and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on afterwards. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. This figure shows an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during a jackpot and operation confirmation control is initiated based on the power being turned on afterwards. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on afterwards. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an initial operation performed during a cold start. 10A and 10B are timing charts showing an initial operation by a cold start and a timing chart showing an initial operation by a hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of the relationship between an initialization notification image and operation confirmation control. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of the relationship between an initialization notification image and operation confirmation control. 10A to 10D are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the operation check control during cold start processing as a modified example. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing examples of the presentation operation of the win/lose button presentation as a modified example. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of operation when an error occurs in the operation confirmation control.

<Pachinko machine configuration, etc.>
Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. Fig. 1 shows the layout of the main components of a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched into this gaming area by a predetermined ball launching device.

In pachinko gaming machine 1, games are played by variable display of special symbols. "Variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. Variations of special symbols and normal symbols described below involve updating the display of multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols. Variations of decorative symbols described below involve scrolling or updating the display of multiple types of decorative symbols, or transforming or enlarging/reducing one or more decorative symbols. Variations also include flashing the display of a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

There are two types of special symbols that are variably displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also called the "first special symbol" or "first special symbol," and the other special symbol is also called the "second special symbol" or "second special symbol." Also, a special symbol game using the first special symbol is also called a "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also called a "second special symbol game."

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas. Note that the special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed. The pending display and active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to a variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character called Yume Yume-chan is depicted who appears in the effects executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yume Yume-chan is the main character who appears in the content used by the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, on the game board 2 on the lower right side of the image display device 5, a character called Jam-chan is depicted who appears in the effects executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1. Jam-chan is a character who appears in the content used by the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start prize opening (electric chute) that changes between a closed and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 6). The variable prize ball device 6B, for example, comprises an electric tulip-type device with a pair of movable wings. When the solenoid 81 is off, the movable wings are in a vertical position, thereby creating a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is on, the movable wings of the variable prize ball device 6B are in a tilted position, thereby creating an open state in which game balls can enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out, and the second special game can be initiated. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices equipped with an electric tulip-type device.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, three locations at the bottom left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A with a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 6), and the large winning opening door forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as the regular large winning opening) as a specific area that can be switched between an open and closed state.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A has a large prize opening door in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a (see Figure 2) located at the front (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This large prize opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, opening the path for game balls to the regular large prize opening. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large prize opening door slides toward the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, closing the regular large prize opening and preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the regular large prize opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the large prize opening door slides toward the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, opening the regular large prize opening and making it easier for game balls to enter the regular large prize opening.

A gaming ball that enters the regular large prize opening is detected by the count switch 23 as it passes through an area provided inside the regular large prize opening. When the gaming ball is detected by the count switch 23 (see Figure 6), the number of gaming balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 per detection) is paid out to the player as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the regular large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10. Furthermore, when the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches an upper limit (for example, 10), one round ends, and the regular large prize opening is controlled to a closed state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a V-variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V-variable winning ball device 7B has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see Figure 6), and the large winning opening door forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as the V-large winning opening) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is equipped with a large prize opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large prize opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, opening the path for game balls to the V large prize opening. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the off state, the large prize opening door slides toward the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, closing the V large prize opening and preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the V large prize opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the on state, the large prize opening door slides toward the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, opening the V large prize opening and making it easier for game balls to enter the V large prize opening.

A gaming ball that enters the V large prize opening is detected by the V prize opening switch 24 (see Figure 6) as it passes through a specific area (also referred to as the V prize area) provided inside the V large prize opening. When the gaming ball is detected by the V prize opening switch 24, the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V prize occurs when a gaming ball enters the V large prize opening during a round in the jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state. The normal large prize opening and the V large prize opening are collectively referred to as the large prize opening. The large prize opening is also referred to as an attacka.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

Pachinko gaming machine 1 displays a variable display of multiple types of normal symbols as normal identification information, which are different from special symbols. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, there is a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 to play and output sound effects, etc.

A movable body 32 that moves in response to the effects is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming board 2 (above the image display device 5 in Figure 1). The movable body 32 is composed of the character string "POWERFUL II." "POWERFUL II" may be the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or a name representing the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the title of an anime or the name of a singer). The characters attached to the movable body 32 may also represent the name of a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, "Yume Yume" representing the main character, Yume Yume). In this embodiment, the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (Powerful II) is displayed on the movable body 32.

In this embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 and a position where it overlaps (superimposes) the front of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 1. Specifically, the movable body 32 stops at a position where it overlaps (superimposes) the front of the image display device 5 by causing the letters "POWERFUL II" to fall diagonally (so that the "P" is at the bottom and the "II" is at the top). The movable body 32 is also referred to as a gadget.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. The gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area as a control stick that the player can grasp and tilt (forward, backward, left, right, or by pulling it toward the player). A controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 6) that detects tilting of the control stick is provided inside the main body of the stick controller 31A. The stick controller 31A also has a built-in vibrator motor (not shown) that vibrates the stick controller 31A. Because the stick controller 31A can be pulled toward the player, it is also referred to as a "trigger."

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, which the player can press to issue a specific command. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 6).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a special symbol LED board 9020 at the lower left of the gaming board 2. The special symbol LED board 9020 is an LED board controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and indicates the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, etc., by turning on/flashing/off LEDs. In 9, the type of special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the type of special symbol (second special symbol) in the second special symbol game are represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting/flashing/off of multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021. For example, as shown in Figure 4(a) described below, the special symbol LED board 9020 represents the type of first special symbol by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting/flashing/off of multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022, and represents the type of second special symbol by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting/flashing/off of multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9022. In this embodiment, the term "lighting mode" is used to refer to the concept of lighting, flashing, and extinguishing of various lamps, such as the frame lamps described below.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a fourth symbol unit 9050 at the bottom left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 9050 is an LED board controlled by the performance control CPU 120, and indicates special symbol changes, the number of reserved symbols, and right-hit display by turning on, blinking, or off LEDs. The fourth symbol unit 9050 indicates the type of special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the type of special symbol (second special symbol) in the second special symbol game through a combination of lighting modes, such as lighting on, blinking, or off, of multiple LEDs. For example, as shown in FIG. 4(b) below, the fourth symbol unit 9050 indicates the type of first special symbol by a combination of lighting modes, such as lighting on, blinking, or off, of multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 53, and indicates the type of second special symbol by a combination of lighting modes, such as lighting on, blinking, or off, of multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 54.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a plurality of lamps (also called game effect lamps) on the gaming board 2 and the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a device lamp 9A mounted on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B mounted on the left side of the gaming board 2, an attacca lamp 9E mounted near the special variable prize ball device 7B, a V attacca lamp 9F mounted near the special variable prize ball device 7A, a V lamp 9G that indicates a jackpot game round in which the V large prize opening is open and a V prize can occur, or that a V prize has occurred, an electric chute lamp 9H mounted near the variable prize ball device 6B, a stick controller lamp 9J mounted on the stick controller 31A, a push button lamp 9K mounted on the push button 31B, a frame left lamp 9L mounted on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and a frame right lamp 9R mounted on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. The V lamp may also indicate that a jackpot has occurred.

The reel lamp 9A is made up of multiple lamps, namely, reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, the component bearing the letters "POWER II" included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, with reel lamp 9A1 located behind the "P" and "O" parts, reel lamp 9A2 located behind the "W" and "E" parts, reel lamp 9A3 located behind the "R" and "F" parts, and reel lamp 9A4 located behind the "U" and "L" parts. As a result, when reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 light up (emit light) on the back of the component bearing the letters "POWER II," "POWER II" lights up (emits light).

The left board lamp 9B is made up of multiple lamps, such as left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5. The left side of the game board 2 depicts the main character (for example, "Yume Yume," referring to the main character Yume Yume-chan) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1, and the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are each located behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted. As a result, when the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (emit light) behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted, the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted lights up (emits light).

The attacca lamp 9E is located on the back side of the gaming board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, when the attacca lamp 9E lights up (emits light) on the back side of the gaming board 2, it lights up (emits light) the area around the special variable winning ball device 7B. In addition, the V attacca lamp 9F is located on the back side of the gaming board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, when the V attacca lamp 9F lights up (emits light) on the back side of the gaming board 2, it lights up (emits light) the area around the special variable winning ball device 7A.

The V lamp 9G is located behind the part of the gaming board 2 that is marked with a "V". As a result, when the V lamp 9G lights up (emits light) behind the part of the gaming board 2 that is marked with a "V", the part of the gaming board 2 that is marked with a "V" lights up (emits light). The electric chute lamp 9H is located near the variable winning ball device 6B, and when it lights up (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7B.

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when lit (illuminates), it illuminates (lights up) the stick controller 31A. The push button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and when lit (illuminates), it illuminates (lights up) the push button 31B.

The left frame lamp 9L is composed of multiple lamps 9L1-9L12 (described later in Figure 3) located on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. When each lamp is lit (illuminates), the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 is illuminated (lighted). The right frame lamp 9R is composed of multiple lamps 9R2-9L12 (described later in Figure 3) located on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. When each lamp is lit (illuminates), the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 is illuminated (lighted). The left frame lamp 9L and the right frame lamp 9R are collectively referred to as frame lamps. The accessory lamp 9A, left board lamp 9B, attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric chute lamp 9H, stick controller lamp 9J, push button lamp 9K, left frame lamp 9L, and right frame lamp 9R are collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment. The back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11 housed in a board case 201. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching between a setting change state and a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing setting values such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 (see Figure 6).

A display monitor 29 is located in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 (see Figure 6) is located to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and display changeover switch 31 are located directly in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratios, winning combination ratios, and base wins. The consecutive win ratio is the proportion of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning slot (attacka) out of the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the proportion of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning slot (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning slot (attacka) out of the total number of winning balls. The base wins is the proportion of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls that have been shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a with a glass window, which allows the gaming area to be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the circuit board case 201, which includes the setting key 51 and setting switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

Figure 3 is a diagram illustrating the frame lamps. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps, frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12, arranged counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L lights up or flashes each of its multiple lamps (12 lamps in this example), thereby illuminating the area near the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of 11 lamps, frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12, arranged clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R lights up or flashes each of its multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example), thereby illuminating the area near the right side of the gaming machine frame 3.

Figure 4 is a diagram illustrating the special symbol LED board 9020 and the fourth symbol unit 9050. As shown in Figure 4(a), the special symbol LED board 9020 includes a special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 that shows the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 that shows the variable display of the second special symbol, a special symbol 1 memory display unit 9023 that shows the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display unit 9024 that shows the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a regular symbol memory display unit 9025 that shows the number of reserved regular symbols, a regular symbol display unit 9026 that shows the variable display of regular symbols, a right-hit display unit 9030 that prompts the player to hit the right, a probability jackpot display unit 9028 that shows whether or not a probability jackpot state is active, a time-saving display unit 9029 that shows whether or not a time-saving state is active, and a round display unit 9027 that shows the number of jackpot rounds. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special or normal symbols, the results, the current game status, the number of reserved symbols, etc., by lighting or flashing with lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol is being performed in the first special symbol game, and the stopped symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of said variable display, by lighting/flashing/extinguishing with lighting means such as an LED. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol is being performed in the second special symbol game, and the stopped symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of said variable display, by lighting/flashing/extinguishing with lighting means such as an LED.

Furthermore, the special symbol LED board 9020 can prompt the player to make a right hit by lighting/flashing/turning off lighting means such as an LED in the right hit display unit 9030. In this embodiment, when prompting the player to make a right hit, the lighting means such as an LED in the right hit display unit 9030 lights up (emits light), and when not prompting the player to make a right hit, i.e., when prompting the player to make a left hit, the lighting means such as an LED in the right hit display unit 9030 turns off. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 sends a right hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns on the right hit display unit 9030; and after the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, it sends a right hit display off command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right hit display unit 9030. Furthermore, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 may light up the right-hit display unit 9030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end command to the effect control CPU 120 and turns off the right-hit display unit 9030.

Here, right-hand hit refers to operating the ball-hitting handle 30 (hitting style) to launch the game ball toward the second downflow path of the first and second downflow paths through which the game medium can flow in the game area provided on the game board 2. The first downflow path is, for example, a path that passes through the left side of the game area, and beyond which there is a first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, but there is no second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. The second downflow path is, for example, a path that passes through the right side of the game area, and beyond which there is a second start winning hole or a large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. When the player launches the game ball toward the first downflow path, the game ball flows through the first downflow path toward the first start winning hole. When a player launches a game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball travels along the second flow path and flows toward the second start winning hole or the big winning hole (normal big winning hole, V big winning hole).

In this embodiment, during jackpot play after a jackpot has occurred, and during the play state after the jackpot play (time-saving state or probability variable state), the player hits the ball to the right to cause the game ball to enter the second start prize entry slot or the large prize entry slot located on the right side of the play area. During this time, the right-hit display unit 9030 prompts the player to hit the ball to the right. By hitting the ball to the right while the prompt to hit the ball is displayed, the player can cause the game ball to enter the second start prize entry slot, which will pay out a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three balls) and earn the right to play the second special game. Alternatively, the game ball can be caused to enter the regular large prize entry slot, which will pay out a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., ten balls). Furthermore, as will be described in more detail below, during a round of a special jackpot, the V-large prize opening opens. By hitting the ball to the right while the display encouraging the player to hit to the right is displayed, the player can gain the right to enter the V-large prize opening and be controlled into the special jackpot state. Therefore, hitting the ball to the right while the display encouraging the player to hit to the right is displayed can give the player an overall advantage. Note that, unlike hitting to the right, operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the first downflow path (hitting style) is also referred to as hitting to the left.

As shown in Figure 4(b), the fourth symbol unit 9050 includes a special symbol 1 memory display unit 51 that indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display unit 52 that indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a special symbol 1 variable display unit 53 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display unit 54 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a right-hit display unit 55 that prompts the player to hit right. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of a special symbol, the number of reserved symbols, and right-hit instructions by lighting/flashing/turning off using lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 53 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol is being performed in the first special symbol game, and the stopped symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of said variable display, by lighting/flashing/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 54 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol is being performed in the second special symbol game, and the stopped symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of said variable display, by lighting/flashing/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

In the following, the display of the change in the stopped pattern of the first special pattern by lighting means such as an LED in the special pattern 1 variable display unit 9021 or the special pattern 1 variable display unit 53 is also referred to as the change display (variable display) of the first special pattern. Also, the display of the change in the stopped pattern of the second special pattern by lighting means such as an LED in the special pattern 2 variable display unit 9022 or the special pattern 2 variable display unit 54 is also referred to as the change display (variable display) of the second special pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the player is prompted to make a right hit, the lighting means such as an LED in the right hit display unit 55 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 lights up (emits light); when the player is not prompted to make a right hit, i.e., when the player is prompted to make a left hit, the lighting means such as an LED in the right hit display unit 55 turns off. The effect control CPU 120 turns on the right hit display unit 55 based on receiving a right hit display lighting command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined, and turns off the right hit display unit 55 based on receiving a right hit display turning off command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. Note that if the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right hit display unit 55 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right-hit display unit 55 based on receiving a jackpot end command from the CPU 103.

Figure 4(c) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the fourth symbol unit and the game effect lamp. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a front fluctuation pattern command and a rear fluctuation pattern command, or a symbol determination command, among the effect control commands, the fourth symbol unit 9050 and the game effect lamp are controlled to switch between lighting modes such as on, blinking, and off. The front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are commands output from the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, which will be described later, to the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12, and the front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are output as a set from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120. Hereinafter, the front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command will be collectively referred to as fluctuation pattern commands.

Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command from CPU 103, it changes the lighting mode of the LEDs (special symbol 1 variable display 53 and special symbol 2 variable display 54) in the fourth symbol unit 9050. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol game from CPU 103, it switches the lighting mode of the special symbol 1 variable display 53 from off, which indicates that the first special symbol has stopped, to flashing, which indicates that the first special symbol is fluctuating, based on the received variation pattern command. Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol game from CPU 103, it switches the lighting mode of the special symbol 2 variable display 54 from off, which indicates that the second special symbol has stopped, to flashing, which indicates that the second special symbol is fluctuating, based on the received variation pattern command.

On the other hand, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command from the CPU 103, it does not change the lighting state of the LEDs (frame lamps, etc.) in the game effect lamps, but instead maintains the lighting state that existed before the variation pattern command was received.

Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a pattern determination command from CPU 103, it changes the lighting mode of the LEDs (special symbol 1 variable display 53 and special symbol 2 variable display 54) in the fourth symbol unit 9050. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a pattern determination command from CPU 103 specifying that the symbol fluctuations in the first special symbol game are to end, it switches the lighting mode of the special symbol 1 variable display 53 from flashing, which indicates the fluctuations of the first special symbol, to off, which indicates the stop of the first special symbol, based on the received pattern determination command. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a pattern determination command from CPU 103 specifying that the symbol fluctuations in the second special symbol game are to end, it switches the lighting mode of the special symbol 2 variable display 54 from flashing, which indicates the fluctuations of the second special symbol, to off, which indicates the stop of the second special symbol, based on the received pattern determination command.

On the other hand, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103, it does not change the lighting state of the LEDs (frame lamps, etc.) in the game effect lamps, but maintains the lighting state that existed before the pattern determination command was received.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the state of the lamp (LED) in the fourth pattern unit 9050 changes in response to receiving a variation pattern command or a pattern determination command. In contrast, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the state of the lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is maintained before and after receiving a variation pattern command or a pattern determination command, regardless of whether the command is received. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the state of the game effect lamp 9 in response to receiving a variation pattern command. For example, when the game state changes from the normal state to the time-shortened state after a jackpot, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the state of the game effect lamp 9 from the normal state lighting state to the time-shortened state lighting state in response to receiving a variation pattern command that starts the time-shortened state.

Figure 5 is a diagram illustrating the display mode of the screen on the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 is used to display images such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, by scrolling up and down or updating) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The synchronously executed special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The bottom edge of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with a first pending memory display area 5D, which can display the first pending memory number using the number of circular pending displays, a second pending memory display area 5U, which can display the second pending memory number using the number of circular pending displays, and an active display area 5A, which displays the pending display corresponding to the currently running variable display as the active display.

A fourth symbol 5J is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Below the fourth symbol 5J, numbers indicating the first and second reserved memory numbers are displayed. The numbers indicating the reserved numbers indicate the first and second reserved memory numbers on the left and right, respectively. Below the display showing the reserved numbers, small symbols 5M, which are smaller than the decorative symbols, are displayed. The small symbols correspond to the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbols displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, and are arranged horizontally. Furthermore, the small symbols 5M are never hidden during variable display, and are always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 5, the decorative pattern is placed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is placed at the right edge of the screen of the image display device 5 in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than that of the decorative pattern.

As shown in Figure 5(a), the screen of the image display device 5 is rectangular or approximately rectangular, but the game board 2 is fixed so that it covers the edges of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in Figure 5(b), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, part of the screen of the image display device 5 (particularly the edges) cannot be seen or is difficult to see because of the game board 2.

<Board configuration>
Figure 6 is a diagram for explaining the various boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in Figure 6, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also include electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 9020, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23, and V entry switch 24) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, by pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81, solenoid 82, or solenoid 83.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the game's progress. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display device 5 by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the audio control board 13 to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image, and supplies brightness data (a signal that designates the on/off state of the lamp) to the LED driver to turn the game effect lamp 9 on/off. The performance control CPU 120 also supplies a signal that operates the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

As will be explained in more detail below, each game effect lamp has a game effect lamp LED board equipped with an LED (lamp) and an LED driver that supplies current to the LED. The LED driver adjusts the current to each LED (lamp) included in the game effect lamp 9 based on brightness data from the presentation control CPU 120, causing the game effect lamp 9 to light up, blink, or turn off. In this way, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the lighting, blinking, and turning off of the game effect lamp 9.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, and brightness data signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12 and the sound control board 13, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

The fourth symbol unit 9050 is connected to the performance control board 12, and each display unit can be lit (blinked) under the control of the performance control CPU 120.

<Outline of game progress>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-described configuration, the game progresses as follows: The player rotates the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko gaming machine 1, causing the gaming ball to be launched toward the gaming area. When the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started using the normal symbol display 20. Note that if the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 on the special symbol LED board 9020.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 on the special symbol LED board 9020.

In addition, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a specified upper limit (for example, 4).

In a special symbol game, a "jackpot" occurs when the combination of lighting patterns of multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 or the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special symbol LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting patterns that corresponds to a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol; the actual symbol will vary depending on the type of jackpot, as described below). The lighting pattern that corresponds to a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) among the combinations of lighting patterns of multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 or the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special symbol LED board 9020 is also referred to as a "specific display result." Furthermore, a "loss" occurs when the combination of lighting patterns of multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 or the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special symbol LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting patterns that corresponds to a special symbol (losing symbol) that is different from the jackpot symbol. In addition, the lighting pattern corresponding to a special pattern (losing pattern) different from the winning pattern in the combination of lighting patterns of the multiple LEDs provided in the special pattern 1 variable display section 9021 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 9022 of the special pattern LED board 9020 is also referred to as the "losing display result."

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player. It may also be controlled to a small jackpot game state as an advantageous state. Here, a small jackpot is a win in which the large prize opening is allowed to open a smaller number of times than in a jackpot. It should be noted that when the small jackpot game state ends, the game state does not change. In other words, there is no transition from a special jackpot state to a normal jackpot state or vice versa before and after the small jackpot game state. Similar to the jackpot types, small jackpot types may also be set for "small jackpots."

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever comes first. This predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (10 or 7 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Note that a "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of jackpot opening modes (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, probability variable state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is implemented, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for players, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuations, but also makes it easier to win a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability variation state will continue until one of the following conditions is met first: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. A state in which the condition for the end is that a predetermined number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability variation state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability variable state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the displayed result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the displayed result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on).

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big prize slot) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the player of the game's progress or adding excitement to the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are achieved by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of a display, effects may also be achieved by audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, the turning on and off of the game effect lamp 9, the movement of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. When the display result (also called the determined special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the determined decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

Furthermore, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach state being reached during the variable display of the decorative symbols. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, each with a different probability of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the effect state. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach. Super reach also includes the first half of super reach, which ends with the first half of super reach; the second half of super reach, which develops from the first half of super reach; and final reach, which develops from the first half of super reach. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in normal reach. Furthermore, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of super reach. Furthermore, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the final reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach. Note that, below, "Super Reach" will also be referred to as "SP Reach," "the first half of Super Reach" as "SP first half (SP first half reach)," "the second half of Super Reach" as "SP second half (SP second half reach)," and "final reach" as "SP final (SP final reach)."

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "jackpot" (the specific display result described above), a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" in which the game state is controlled to a probability variable state after the jackpot gaming state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line-up, while in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" in which the game state is not controlled to a probability variable state after the jackpot gaming state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line-up. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability variable symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability variable symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with a non-probability variable symbol, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability variable jackpot." As a promotion effect, for example, a non-probability variable symbol (normal symbol) may be temporarily stopped as the jackpot display result, and then a re-lottery effect may be executed to prompt the player to decide whether or not the symbol will be promoted to a probability variable symbol. Furthermore, a round promotion effect may be executed during the jackpot gaming state, in which a non-probability variable jackpot is promoted to a probability variable jackpot.

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "miss" (the miss display result described above), the pattern of the variable display of the decorative patterns does not become a reach pattern, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the pattern of the variable display of the decorative patterns becomes a reach pattern, the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display). Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). Pre-read preview effects may be executed that change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade effect to indicate that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

<Various tables related to jackpots>
Various tables relating to big wins will be explained with reference to Figures 7 and 8.

[Winning type]
7 is a diagram for explaining the types of wins. As shown in Fig. 7, the win type table shows, for each type (kind) of win in a jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the base after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot.

Specifically, there are three types of jackpots: normal jackpots 1 and 2, and special jackpots 1 through 9. In the following, each round will be indicated by the letter "R." For example, the first round will be referred to as the 1st round, and the second round as the 2nd round.

Normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and high base state after the end of three rounds of jackpot gameplay. In normal jackpot 1, this low probability, high base state continues until a variable display (special chart variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

Normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and high base state after the end of three rounds of jackpot play. In normal jackpot 2, this low probability, high base state continues until a variable display (special chart variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of three rounds of jackpot play. In probable jackpot 1, this high probability, high base state continues until a variable display (special chart variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable Jackpot 6 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of five rounds of jackpot play. In Probable Jackpot 6, this high probability, high base state continues until a variable display (special chart variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times).

Probable Jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of seven rounds of jackpot play. In Probable Jackpot 7, this high probability, high base state continues until a variable display (special chart variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of 10 rounds of jackpot play. In probable jackpots 8 and 9, this high probability, high base state continues until a variable display (special chart variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times).

[Each random number]
FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 8, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random 1 is a random counter for determining whether or not a jackpot has been reached. Random 1 is, for example, incremented by one from 1 until it reaches its upper limit of 65,536, and then incremented again from 1. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of jackpot) that determines the type (category) of jackpot.

Random 3 and Random 4 are random counters (for determining the later fluctuation pattern) that determine the fluctuation pattern (hereafter referred to as the later fluctuation pattern) (fluctuation time) that corresponds to the later fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern. Later fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the latter part of the special pattern fluctuation. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the later fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a miss, and for example, is updated by one, increasing from 1 up to its upper limit of 65,519, and then increasing from 1 again. Random 4 is a random counter that determines the later fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a win, and for example, is updated by one, increasing from 1 up to its upper limit of 239, and then increasing from 1 again.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the previous fluctuation pattern) that determines the fluctuation pattern (hereafter referred to as the previous fluctuation pattern) (fluctuation time) that corresponds to the previous fluctuation among the fluctuation patterns. The previous fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the special pattern fluctuation. Random 5 is, for example, incremented by one from 1 up to its upper limit of 251, and then incremented again from 1. Random 6 is a random counter (for determining whether a win based on a normal pattern will occur). Random 6 is, for example, incremented by one from 1 up to its upper limit of 201, and then incremented again from 1.

In this embodiment, whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (Random 1). Then, which of the multiple types of jackpots will occur is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (Random 2). At this time, the jackpot symbol can also be determined based on the value of Random 2.

Furthermore, first, the subsequent fluctuation pattern is determined based on whether the result is a hit or a miss using the random numbers for determining the subsequent fluctuation pattern (Random 3, 4), and then the previous fluctuation pattern is determined using the random number for determining the previous fluctuation pattern (Random 5). In this way, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

[Jackpot Determination Table, Jackpot Type Determination Table]
9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 9(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value that is compared with Random 1 is set. There are two types of jackpot determination tables: a normal (non-probability variable) jackpot determination table used in the normal state (a game state that is not in the probability variable state, i.e., a non-probability variable state), and a probability variable jackpot determination table used in the probability variable state.

The normal jackpot determination table has jackpot determination values set for the number of determination values listed in the upper column of Figure 9(a), and the special jackpot determination table has jackpot determination values set for the number of determination values listed in the lower column of Figure 9(a). The special jackpot determination table has a greater number of jackpot determination values than the normal jackpot determination table, as it is made up of the same jackpot determination values as the normal jackpot determination table, plus jackpot determination values specific to special jackpot states. This means that in special jackpot states, a jackpot is determined with a higher probability than in normal states.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number (Random 1) for determining a jackpot. If the random number value for determining a jackpot matches one of the jackpot determination values shown in Figure 9(a), it determines that the special symbol will result in a jackpot (either a regular jackpot or a special jackpot). Figure 9(a) also shows the probability (percentage) of a jackpot or a miss.

Figures 9(b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams showing jackpot type determination tables. Figure 9(b) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a first special symbol. Figure 9(c) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a second special symbol.

The first special chart jackpot type determination table in Figure 9(b) contains a number of determination values to be compared with the Random 2 value for determining the jackpot type, corresponding to normal jackpots 1 and 2 and special jackpots 1 through 4. For example, as shown in Figure 9(b), for the first special chart, normal jackpot 1 is assigned 25 of the 100 Random 2 values, normal jackpot 2 is assigned 25 of the 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 1 is assigned 5 of the 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 2 is assigned 37 of the 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 3 is assigned 4 of the 100 Random 2 values, and special jackpot 4 is assigned 4 of the 100 Random 2 values.

The second special symbol jackpot type determination table in Figure 9(c) is set with a number of determination values that are compared with the Random 2 value and correspond to each of the probability jackpots 5 to 9. For example, as shown in Figure 9(c), for the second special symbol, probability jackpot 5 is assigned 10 of the 100 Random 2 values, probability jackpot 6 is assigned 5 of the 100 Random 2 values, probability jackpot 7 is assigned 5 of the 100 Random 2 values, probability jackpot 8 is assigned 70 of the 100 Random 2 values, and probability jackpot 9 is assigned 10 of the 100 Random 2 values.

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 2 matches, and also determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 2 matches. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type.

<Performance control commands>
FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a presentation control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the main control board, transmits various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 depending on the game control status. The presentation control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10 is merely an example, and other command formats may also be used. Note that, although "(H)" indicates hexadecimal numbers below, this may be omitted in this specification.

Command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern (previous variation pattern) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns of the decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern (XX corresponds to the number of the previous variation pattern). The previous variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the first half of the variation of the decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. When a unique number is assigned to each of multiple types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command that corresponds to each of the previous variation patterns identified by that number.

Command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the later variation among the variation patterns of decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special patterns (XX corresponds to the number of the post-variation pattern). The post-variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special patterns. When a unique number is assigned to each of multiple types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command that corresponds to each of the post-variation patterns identified by that number.

The front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are sent as a set from CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 cannot identify the fluctuation pattern by receiving only one of the front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command, but can identify the fluctuation pattern by receiving both the front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special symbol. When the performance control CPU 101 receives command 8101 (H) or command 8102 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative symbol.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 specification command (miss specification command) indicating that a miss has been determined. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 specification command (normal jackpot 1 specification command) indicating that a normal jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 specification command (normal jackpot 2 specification command) indicating that a normal jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 specification command (probability variable jackpot 1 specification command) indicating that a probability variable jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 specification command (probability variable jackpot 2 specification command) indicating that a probability variable jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 specification command (probability variable jackpot 3 specification command) indicating that a probability variable jackpot 3 has been determined. Command 8C07(H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability variable jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that probability variable jackpot 4 has been determined. Command 8C08(H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability variable jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that probability variable jackpot 5 has been determined. Command 8C09(H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability variable jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that probability variable jackpot 6 has been determined. Command 8C10(H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability variable jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that probability variable jackpot 7 has been determined. Command 8C11(H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability variable jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that probability variable jackpot 8 has been determined. Command 8C12(H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability variable jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that probability variable jackpot 9 has been determined. The miss specification command, normal jackpot 1, 2 specification command, and special jackpot 1-9 specification command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8C commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol change designation command that indicates the start of variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol change designation command that indicates the start of variable display of the second special symbol. The first symbol change designation command and the second symbol change designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that specifies the end of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization command that specifies initialization (specifying the display of the initial power-on screen) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery command that specifies the restoration of power (specifying the display of the power outage recovery screen) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command that specifies the background for the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state designation command that specifies the background for the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a special-variant state designation command that specifies the background for the special-variant state. The normal state designation command, time-saving state designation command, and special-variant state designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 95-series commands or background designation commands.

Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demo designation command that specifies transition to a customer waiting demonstration display. Upon receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, the presentation control CPU 120 determines that there are no pending balls. Thirty seconds after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a demonstration image on the image display device 5. Thirty seconds after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, the presentation control CPU 120 lights the game effect lamp 9 in a demonstration lamp mode. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 for demonstration is more vibrant (higher brightness, more flashing, rainbow lighting, etc.) than the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 in the normal state. This allows the player to appreciate the appeal of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the customer waiting demonstration display, the normal background (hereinafter also referred to as the normal background) is displayed, and decorative symbols are displayed stationary in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. Additionally, the demonstration display while waiting for customers may display the title of gaming machine 1 (for example, "POWERFUL II") or an introductory image (still image or video) of part of the presentation.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 1. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 2. Command A003 (H) is a special jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 1. Command A004 (H) is a special jackpot start 4 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 2. Command A005 (H) is a special jackpot start 5 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 3. Command A006 (H) is a special jackpot start 6 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 4. Command A007 (H) is a special jackpot start 7 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 5. Command A008 (H) is a special jackpot start 8 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 6. Command A009 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 9 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 7. Command A010 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 10 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 8. Command A011 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 11 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start 1-11 designation commands, or these collectively, are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command specifying when the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A1-series command. A2XX (H) is a command specifying when the large prize opening is closed for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command specifying when the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A2-series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that specifies the end of normal jackpot 1. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that specifies the end of normal jackpot 2. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 1. Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 2. Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 4. Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 5. Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 6. Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command that specifies the end of probability variable jackpot 7. Command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command that specifies the end of probability variable jackpot 8. Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command that specifies the end of probability variable jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1-11 designation commands, or these collectively, are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00 (H) is a probability change determination device passage designation command that specifies that a V win has occurred. The probability change determination device passage designation command is a command sent when a gaming ball that has passed through the V large winning port enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

Command B100(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command B200(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved memory count designation command that specifies that the first reserved memory count has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved memory count designation command is also referred to as a C1-series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second reserved memory designation command that specifies that the second reserved memory count has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserved memory count designation command is also referred to as a C2-series command.

Commands C4XX(H) and C6XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the results of the winning judgment, such as whether or not a jackpot will occur when a ball enters the first or second starting winning slot, the type of jackpot, and the type of variation pattern. Of these, command C4XX(H) is a design specification command that indicates the results of the winning judgment, such as whether or not a jackpot will occur and the type of jackpot.

C7XX(H) is a special prize slot entry command indicating that the game ball has passed through the special prize slot on the round indicated by XX.

A command where MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-hit display off command, which indicates that the right-hit display should be turned off. A command where MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT data is 1 is a right-hit display on command, which indicates that the right-hit display should be turned on. In this embodiment, right-hit display on command is also referred to as an FD-related command.

At the time of the initial winning, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether a jackpot will occur, the type of jackpot, and the range of judgment values within which the value of the random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern falls. It then sets a value specifying a jackpot and a value specifying the type of jackpot in the EXT data of the pattern designation command, and controls transmission of this to the presentation control CPU 120. The game control microcomputer 100 also sets a value specifying the range of judgment values as the determination result of the fluctuation pattern type in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and controls transmission of this to the presentation control CPU 120. The presentation control CPU 120 can recognize whether the display result will be a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the pattern designation command, and can recognize the type of fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type command.

<Fluctuation pattern>
The contents of the fluctuation patterns and how the fluctuation patterns are determined will be explained with reference to Figures 11 to 17.

In this embodiment, multiple types of variation patterns are set by the main game control microcomputer 100. Each variation pattern is managed by a main variation number and is composed of a combination of a front variation pattern that corresponds to a front variation and a back variation pattern that corresponds to a back variation, with each combination containing different content. The front variation pattern corresponds to the front variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described using Figure 10, and the back variation pattern corresponds to the back variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described using Figure 10.

[Main side front fluctuation pattern]
11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a previous fluctuation pattern on the main side. Among the multiple types of previous fluctuation patterns each assigned a previous fluctuation number, previous fluctuation number 1 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8000(H)) that specifies a normal fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 13 seconds). Previous fluctuation number 2 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8001(H)) that specifies a shortened fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 7 seconds). Previous fluctuation number 3 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8002(H)) that specifies a super shortened fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 3 seconds).

Previous variation number 4 is a previous variation pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (normal or SP first half) (a reach that ends in a normal reach or an SP first half reach after entering a reach state). Previous variation number 5 is a previous variation pattern command (8004 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (SP second half development) (a reach that develops into an SP second half reach after entering a reach state). Previous variation number 6 is a previous variation pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (a reach that develops into a final reach after entering a reach state).

Previous variation number 7 is a previous variation pattern command (8006(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (normal or SP first half) will be executed after one pseudo variation. A pseudo variation is a variable display (variable display) in which the variable display of the decorative pattern (variable display) is temporarily stopped and then resumed between the start of the variable display (variable display) and the derived display of the display result of the variable display. This type of repeated pseudo variation is also called a pseudo consecutive display. By executing a pseudo consecutive display, a variable display based on a single reserved memory can be made to appear to the player as if it were multiple variable displays. Note that a variable display that is temporarily stopped and then resumed is also called a "re-variable display." Previous variation number 8 is a previous variation pattern command (8007(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (SP second half development) will be executed after one pseudo variation. Previous variation number 9 is a previous variation pattern command (8008(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo variation.

Previous fluctuation number 10 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8009(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (normal or first half of SP) will be executed after two pseudo-fluctuations. Previous fluctuation number 11 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (800A(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (second half of SP development) will be executed after two pseudo-fluctuations. Previous fluctuation number 12 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (800B(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) after two pseudo-fluctuations.

Each previous variation pattern has a specified variation time, and an animation (video) is displayed on the image display device 5 for each variation time. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes approximately 33.3 msec for one still image (called a frame) that makes up the video. For example, for patterns with previous variation numbers 7 to 9, the variation time is set to 41,500 msec, and the number of frames is approximately 1,246. For patterns with previous variation numbers 10 to 12, the variation time is set to 62,000 msec, and the number of frames is approximately 1,861.

[Main side rear fluctuation pattern]
12 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-fluctuation pattern on the main side. Of the multiple types of post-fluctuation patterns each assigned a post-fluctuation number, post-fluctuation number 1 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8400(H)) that specifies a 13-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 2 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8401(H)) that specifies a 7-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 3 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8402(H)) that specifies a 3-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 4 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8403(H)) that specifies the execution of a pseudo-consecutive false signal. A pseudo-consecutive false signal is a performance that appears to execute a pseudo-consecutive signal but does not actually execute the pseudo-consecutive signal.

Later variation number 5 is a later variation pattern command (8404(H)) that specifies a normal reach (miss) (a decorative pattern variation that results in a reach state but does not develop into an SP reach and results in a miss state). Later variation number 6 is a later variation pattern command (8405(H)) that specifies the first half of the SP (miss) (a decorative pattern variation that develops into an SP reach but results in a miss state in the first half of the SP reach). Later variation number 7 is a later variation pattern command (8406(H)) that specifies the second half of the SP (miss) (a decorative pattern variation that develops into the second half of the SP reach but results in a miss state in the second half of the SP reach). Later variation number 8 is a later variation pattern command (8407(H)) that specifies a final reach (miss) (a decorative pattern variation that develops into a final reach but results in a miss state in the final reach).

Post-change number 9 is a post-change pattern command (8408(H)) that specifies a normal reach (win) (a change in the decorative pattern that becomes a reach state and then a win state). Post-change number 10 is a post-change pattern command (8409(H)) that specifies an SP first half (win) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into an SP reach and then a win state in the first half of the SP reach). Post-change number 11 is a post-change pattern command (840A(H)) that specifies an SP second half (win) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into the second half of the SP reach and then a win state in the second half of the SP reach). Post-change number 12 is a post-change pattern command (840B(H)) that specifies a final reach (win) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into a final reach and then a win state in the final reach).

[Determination of subsequent fluctuation pattern]
The subsequent fluctuation pattern is determined using a different random counter depending on whether the jackpot determination is a jackpot or a miss. Figure 13 is a diagram for explaining the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a miss. As shown in Figure 13, if the jackpot determination is a miss, the subsequent fluctuation pattern is determined using the random 3 described in Figure 8. Furthermore, if the jackpot determination is a miss, the subsequent fluctuation pattern is determined using a different judgment value number depending on the number of reserved memories after consumption, and the subsequent fluctuation number determined is also different.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 13(a), if the number of reserved memories after consumption is 0, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 1, 4, and 5-8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability of determining one of post-change numbers 6-8, which develops into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 6-8), is approximately 1/102.

If there is one reserved memory after consumption, one of the following post-change patterns will be determined: post-change numbers 1, 4, 5-8, with a different judgment value number assigned to each post-change pattern. The probability of determining one of the post-change numbers 6-8, which develops into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 6-8), is approximately 1/102.

If there are two reserved memories after consumption, one of the following patterns will be selected from the following patterns: 2, 4, 5-8, and a different judgment value number will be assigned to each of these patterns. The probability of selecting one of the following patterns, 6-8, which will develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of following patterns 6-8), is approximately 1/102.

If there are three reserved memories after consumption, one of the following change patterns will be determined: change numbers 3, 4, 5-8, and a different judgment value number will be assigned to each change pattern. The probability of determining one of the change numbers 6-8, which will develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of change numbers 6-8), is approximately 1/102.

In this way, the subsequent variation pattern is determined using a different judgment value number depending on the number of reserved memories after consumption, and the subsequent variation number is determined using a different judgment value number depending on the number of reserved memories after consumption.As a result, the type of variation pattern changes depending on the number of remaining reserved memories, which adds variety to the game and increases the enjoyment of the game.

Figure 14 is a diagram illustrating the post-variation pattern determination table for when a jackpot occurs. As shown in Figure 14, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using Random 4, as explained in Figure 8. Furthermore, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using different determination values depending on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14(a), if a normal jackpot 1 or 2 or a special jackpot 1, 2, or 5-8 is determined, one of the post-variation patterns from post-variation numbers 9 to 12 is determined, with a different number of judgment values set for each post-variation pattern. The probability of determining one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12, which develop into an SP reach or final reach (the selection rate of post-variation numbers 10 to 12), is approximately 1/1.1.

If either the probability variable jackpot 3 or 9 is determined, one of the post-variation patterns from post-variation numbers 9 to 12 is determined, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-variation pattern. The probability of determining one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12, which develops into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-variation numbers 10 to 12), is approximately 1 in 1.1.

If a probability variable jackpot 4 is determined, one of the post-variation patterns from post-variation numbers 9 to 12 is determined, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-variation pattern. The probability of determining one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12, which develops into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-variation numbers 10 to 12), is approximately 1 in 1.1.

In this way, the subsequent fluctuation pattern is determined using different judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, so the type of fluctuation pattern changes depending on the type of jackpot, which adds variety to the game and makes it more interesting.

Also, as shown in Figure 13, the probability of being determined to be one of the variable numbers 6 to 8 after developing into an SP reach or final reach is approximately 1/102 when there is a miss, but is higher at approximately 1/1.1 when there is a jackpot, so if there is a development into an SP reach or final reach, the player can be made to look forward to the occurrence of a jackpot.

[Previous fluctuation pattern determination]
15 is a diagram for explaining the previous fluctuation pattern determination table. The previous fluctuation pattern is determined using a different random 5 determination value number depending on the type of the previously determined subsequent fluctuation pattern. Furthermore, the previous fluctuation number determined also differs depending on the type of the previously determined subsequent fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 15(a), if the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined. As shown in Figure 15(b), if the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined. As shown in Figure 15(c), if the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 3 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 3 is determined. As shown in Figure 15(d), if the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 4 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined.

As shown in Figure 15(e), if a subsequent change pattern of subsequent change number 5 or 9 is determined, a subsequent change pattern of subsequent change number 4 or 7 is determined. As shown in Figure 15(f), if a subsequent change pattern of subsequent change number 6 or 10 is determined, a subsequent change pattern of subsequent change number 4, 7, or 10 is determined. As shown in Figure 15(g), if a subsequent change pattern of subsequent change number 7 is determined, a subsequent change pattern of subsequent change number 5, 8, or 11 is determined.

As shown in Figure 15(h), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 11 is determined, the post-change pattern will be one of post-change numbers 5, 8, or 11. As shown in Figure 15(i), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 8 is determined, the post-change pattern will be one of post-change numbers 6, 9, or 12. As shown in Figure 15(j), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 12 is determined, the post-change pattern will be one of post-change numbers 6, 9, or 12.

[Total variation pattern]
Figure 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total fluctuation pattern on the main side. As explained in Figures 13 to 15, when the subsequent fluctuation pattern and the preceding fluctuation pattern are determined, it becomes one of the fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in Figure 16.

Figure 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of the lottery for determining a presentation pattern on the sub-side. As shown in Figure 17, the sub-side presentation control CPU 120 determines a presentation pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern command received from the main-side CPU 103.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to one of the main variation numbers 7 to 9 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach presentations to either the SP first half reach A miss pattern presentation, which will be described below, or the SP first half reach B miss pattern presentation. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to one of the main variation numbers 18 to 20 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach presentations to either the SP first half reach A winning pattern presentation, which will be described below, or the SP first half reach B winning pattern presentation.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to one of the main variation numbers 10-12 from CPU 103, it determines from the multiple types of reach effects to either the SP second half reach A miss pattern described below, or the SP second half reach B miss pattern described below. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to one of the main variation numbers 21-23 from CPU 103, it determines from the multiple types of reach effects to either the SP second half reach A hit pattern described below, or the SP second half reach B hit pattern described below.

<Operation>
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

[Major operations of the main board 11]
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern processing)
18 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started up, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process.

In the game control main processing shown in Figure 18, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is sufficient to determine in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be saved in RAM 102, which serves as backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is sufficient to check or inspect the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc., to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the restoration condition is met (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes restoration processing (step S4) and then executes setting confirmation processing (step S5). Through the restoration processing in step S4, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the special symbol change can be resumed from the state before the power supply was stopped.

If the recovery condition is not met (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process (step S6) and then executes a setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the work area.

The setting confirmation process in step S5 determines whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is pressed ON. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the restoration condition, including the clear signal being in the OFF state, is met in step S3. Therefore, the setting confirmation condition can only be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, so the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set therein can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may enter a game stop state in which the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is halted. In the game stop state, the firing of game balls by operation of the ball-hitting handle 30 and the detection of game balls by various switches may be halted, and control may be exercised so that a missing symbol or the like is displayed as a static display, or a display corresponding to a game stop state other than a missing symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

If the setting change conditions are met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting values set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the values displayed on the display monitor 29 are updated sequentially each time operation of the setting change switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the gaming parlor or the like, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the setting values displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102, and turns off the display monitor 29. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be placed in a play-stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying play-stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being confirmed or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting element such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, allowing control to the setting change state. If the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, allowing control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off when power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the setting change state is not controlled. If the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). The CPU 103 then sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at predetermined intervals (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), allowing the CPU 103 to periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

(Game control timer interrupt processing)
Figure 19 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control timer interrupt process. After executing the game control main process, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of Figure 19. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in Figure 19 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error process to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output process to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots that have occurred, etc.), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings, etc.), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a special state, etc.) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 is able to manage the execution and reservation of special symbol games, control the jackpot game state, control the game state, and so on.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to manage the execution and reservation of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), and to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display unit 26, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting up the normal symbol memory display unit 25.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the presentation control command that has been set to be sent is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. The special symbol process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 19. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send presentation control commands to the presentation control board 12 to specify the results of the determination, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The presentation control command set for the start winning that has been transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 19.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), transmission settings are made to transmit the effect control commands corresponding to each step to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). This normal special symbol processing determines whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines (predetermines) whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and, if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed, based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. The special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of several fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the effects during the variable display of the decorative symbols (such as the type of reach effect), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022, and processes for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes a process for stopping the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022, and setting the special symbol to stop displaying (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." If the display result is a "miss," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0." If the display result is a "miss," and the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed, the game state is also updated. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum opening period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of rounds that open the large prize slot has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the normal special symbol processing of the special symbol process, the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate change by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value consists of six levels, from 1 to 6, with 6 representing the highest probability of winning a jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, a setting value of 6 is most advantageous for the player, and the advantage gradually decreases as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the payout rate may also change according to the setting value. While the probability of winning a jackpot remains constant regardless of the setting value, the number of rounds in a jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set one of several setting values that differ in the degree of advantage to the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The gameplay may change depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (a so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the game state after the jackpot game ends is controlled to the probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (a so-called V probability type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320, and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the high base (during time-shortening control) (a so-called type 1/2 mixed type). When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same; however, a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be won during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the gameplay changes depending on the setting value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a presentation switch (a switch that executes a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch that controls the game state to a probability variable state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The type of jackpot may be determined at different rates depending on the setting value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the type of jackpot may be determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the setting value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value. By varying the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches depending on the setting value, the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to execute any setting suggestion effect at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Starting winning judgment process)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. 20. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting hole switch 22A, which corresponds to the first starting hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on based on a detection signal from the first starting hole switch 22A (step S51). If the first starting hole switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step S52). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved first special symbols by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of a first reserved memory number counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown). If the number of reserved memories for the first special chart is not the upper limit in step S52 (N in step S52), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "1" (step S53).

When the first start opening switch 22A is OFF in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the number of reserved first special symbols has reached the upper limit in step S52 (Y in step S52), the CPU 103 determines whether the second start opening switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is ON (step S54) based on a detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B. If the second start opening switch 22B is ON (Y in step S54), the CPU 103 determines whether the second reserved symbol memory count, which is the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4") (step S55). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved symbol memory count value, which is the stored value of a second reserved symbol memory counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown). If the number of reserved second special symbols is not at the upper limit in step S55 (N in step S55), the value stored in the start buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (step S56).

After executing either step S53 or step S56, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the value stored in the start port buffer, is updated by adding one (step S57). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1," the first reserved symbol count value is added by one, while when the start port buffer value is "2," the second reserved symbol count value is added by one. Thus, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by one when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the first start port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. Furthermore, the second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by one when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the second start port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total reserved symbol count is also updated to increase by one (step S58). For example, the total reserved symbol count value, which is the stored value of a total reserved symbol counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), can be updated to increase by one.

After executing the processing of step S58, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM1 for determining a jackpot, the random number value RANDOM2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number values RANDOM3 and RANDOM4 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown) (step S59). The numerical data indicating each extracted random number value is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol reserved memory unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1," numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM1 to RANDOM4 are stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit (not shown), while when the start port buffer value is "2," numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM1 to RANDOM4 are stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM1 for determining a jackpot and the random number value RANDOM2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special and decorative symbols is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot." The random number values RANDOM3 and RANDOM4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special and decorative symbols. By executing the processing of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of step S59, a start port winning designation command is set to be sent according to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1," the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up the transmission of the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2," the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up the transmission of the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special symbol process processing has ended.

Following the processing of step S60, the CPU 103 stores a random number value in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory (step S61). The CPU 103 then clears the start port buffer, initializing its stored value to "0" (step S62), and ends the start winning determination processing. This ensures that even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid game ball start winning, processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

(Normal processing of special patterns)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. As shown in FIG. 22, in the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 determines whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information for the first special symbol) or the second reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information for the second special symbol) (step S1001). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (N in step S1001), it determines whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (step S1002). If the predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (N in step S1002), the normal special symbol processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the predetermined period has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (Y in step S1002), processing is performed to send a customer waiting demo designation command (step S1003), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is sent, a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set, indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent. Then, when the normal special symbol processing is executed after the next timer interruption after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag is set, and the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag is reset when the next variable display of the special symbol is started.

When there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines whether the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (step S1004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating "second" (i.e., data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets the special pattern pointer (a flag indicating whether special pattern process processing is being performed for the first special pattern or the second special pattern) to data indicating "first" (step S1005). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets the special pattern pointer to data indicating "second" (step S1006).

In this embodiment, the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are performed using a common processing routine, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

Under the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the display of the second special symbol variation based on that second reserved memory data will be executed in priority over the display of the first special symbol variation based on the first reserved memory data.

Next, CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores them in the reserved memory buffer of RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first," CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 and stores them in the reserved memory buffer of RAM 102. Furthermore, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second," CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 and stores them in the reserved memory buffer of RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, if the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Furthermore, if the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1," the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2," the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted will always match the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command indicated by the special pattern pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (step S1009). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first," the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second," the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (step S1010), reads Random R (random number for determining a jackpot) from the reserved memory buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for determining a jackpot that was extracted during the start-up winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes processing to compare a predetermined jackpot determination value (see Figure 8) with the random number for determining a jackpot, and if they match, determines that a jackpot has occurred. In other words, it is a program that executes the jackpot determination process.

The jackpot determination process is configured so that when the game state is in a special probability state (high probability state), the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the game state is not in a special probability state (normal game state or time-saving state). Specifically, there is a special probability state jackpot determination table (a table in which the numbers in the lower column of Figure 9(a) are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and a normal time jackpot determination table (a table in which the numbers in the upper column of Figure 9(a) are set) in which a smaller number of jackpot determination values are set than in the special probability state jackpot determination table. The CPU 103 then checks whether the game state is in a special probability state, and if the game state is in a special probability state, it performs jackpot determination processing using the special probability state jackpot determination table, and if the game state is in a normal state or time-saving state, it performs jackpot determination processing using the normal time jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for determining a jackpot (RANDOM 1) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 9(a), the CPU 103 determines that a jackpot has occurred for the special symbol. If a jackpot has been determined (Y in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012. Note that determining whether or not to determine a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot gaming state, but also determining whether or not to set the stopped symbol among the special symbols as a jackpot symbol.

Whether the current game state is in a high probability state is confirmed by checking whether the high probability state flag is set. The high probability state flag is set when the game state transitions to a high probability state, and is reset when the high probability state ends. Specifically, the high probability state flag is set during the process of ending a jackpot game, and is then reset when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stationary display of the stopped symbol occurs, whichever occurs first: the variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the next jackpot has been determined.

If the value of the random number (Random 1) used to determine a jackpot does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S1011), proceed to step S1015, which will be described later.

If the value of the jackpot determination random number (RANDOM 1) matches one of the jackpot determination values in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step S1012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as the table to use to determine one of multiple jackpot types, the CPU 103 selects either the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(b) or the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(c). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer points to "1," the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(b). When the special symbol pointer points to "2," the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(c). The CPU 103 then reads the random number for determining the type of jackpot extracted during the initial winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and uses the selected jackpot type determination table to determine the jackpot type and jackpot pattern that correspond to the value that matches the value of the random number for determining the type of jackpot (Random 2) stored in the reserved memory buffer (step S1013).

The CPU 103 also sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol to be stopped (step S1015). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, the "-" symbol, which is a losing symbol, is set as the special symbol to be stopped. If the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 is set as the special symbol to be stopped, depending on the jackpot type determination result.

Then, the CPU 103 sends a display result specification command (step S1016) and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
23 is a flowchart showing an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 23, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a subsequent fluctuation pattern based on Random 3 and Random 4 depending on the number of reserved memories and whether or not a jackpot has occurred (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a miss, the CPU 103 selects a subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 depending on the number of reserved memories, and determines a subsequent fluctuation pattern based on the selected subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of Random 3. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the CPU 103 selects a subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 depending on the type of jackpot, and determines a subsequent fluctuation pattern based on the selected subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of Random 4.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the previous fluctuation pattern based on Random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects a previous fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15 according to the subsequent fluctuation pattern determined in S1102, and determines the previous fluctuation pattern based on the selected previous fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of Random 5.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (pre-variation pattern and post-variation pattern) to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). The CPU 103 then controls the transmission of a pattern fluctuation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern fluctuation process (step S112) (step S1106).

(Special pattern variation processing)
24 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 24, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step S1203). If the variation time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the processing ends as is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets an end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and controls the derivation and display of the stopped symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 or the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 (step S1301). If the special symbol pointer is set to data indicating "first," the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 is ended. If the special symbol pointer is set to data indicating "second," the variation of the second special symbol in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 is ended. In addition, a symbol determination command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step S1302). This transmits the symbol determination command to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). If the big hit flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag (step S1304). Next, it sends a jackpot start command and a right-hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1305).

Furthermore, by referencing the opening pattern data stored in ROM 101, data indicating the opening modes for the normal large prize slot and the V large prize slot, such as the number of times the slots are opened (e.g., 5 or 10 times), the opening time (e.g., 29 seconds), and the interval time between rounds (e.g., 0.5 seconds), are set in a predetermined memory area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, an opening mode for opening the normal large prize slot in all 1R through 3R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. In the case of a 5R special jackpot, an opening mode for opening the normal large prize slot in 1R through 3R and 5R, and the V large prize slot in 4R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. Furthermore, in the case of a 10R special jackpot, an opening mode for opening the normal large prize slot in 1R through 8R and 10R, and the V large prize slot in 9R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. The data on the number of times it was opened (5 or 10 times) is set in an opening counter that counts the number of times it was opened.

The jackpot opening control timer is also set to a value equivalent to the fanfare time, which is the jackpot display time (the time during which a jackpot is announced on the image display device 5, for example) (step S1307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the jackpot opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the jackpot opening is opened and the round begins. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and processing ends.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether a time-saving flag indicating the time-saving state is set (step S1309). If the time-saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process proceeds to step S1316. If the time-saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the counter value of the time-saving count counter, which indicates the number of remaining fluctuations in the time-saving state, is decremented by 1 (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time-saving count counter has reached 0 (step S1311). If the value of the time-saving count counter has reached 0 (Y in step S1311), the CPU 103 determines that the duration of the time-saving state has ended and resets the time-saving flag (step S1312). As a result, when a fluctuation display resulting in a miss display has occurred a specific number of times (100 times) in the time-saving state, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. In step S1311, if the value of the time-saving counter is not 0 (N in step S1311), proceed to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether the probability variable flag, indicating that the game is in a probability variable state, is set (step S1313). If the probability variable flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability variable flag is reset (step S1314). Next, in response to the game state transitioning from the time-saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the CPU 103 sends a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1315) and proceeds to step S1316. If the probability variable flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process proceeds to step S1315 without performing the process of step S1314. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step S1316), and the process ends.

(Pre-processing before opening the jackpot)
26 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 26, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the large prize opening control timer by 1 (subtract update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the large prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the processing ends.

If the value of the special prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a special prize opening open command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the regular special prize opening (step S1404). As a result, the regular special prize opening is opened in the first round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the large prize opening control timer to a large prize opening opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) corresponding to the maximum time the large prize opening can be opened (large prize opening opening time) based on the opening pattern data (e.g., data stored in RAM 102 in step S1306) (step S1405). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the large prize opening processing (step S115) (step S1406), and ends the processing.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
27 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process. As shown in FIG. 27, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the jackpot opening control timer by 1 (subtract update) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (step S1502). If the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. If the value of the large prize opening control timer has not reached 0 (N in step S1502), the process determines whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is currently open (step S1503). Whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is currently open can be determined from the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the regular large prize slot or the V large prize slot is not open (N in step S1503), processing ends.

If the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize opening switch 24 is on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V prize opening switch 24 is on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V prize opening switch 24 is on (Y in step S1504), the prize number counter is incremented by 1 (updated) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether the probability change determination flag has been set (step S1506). The probability change determination flag is set when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the probability change state when a V win occurs. If the probability change determination flag has been set (Y in step S1506), processing proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag has not been set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether the V win switch 24 is on (step S1507). If the V win switch 24 is not on (N in step S1507), processing proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V win switch is on (Y in step S1507), the probability change determination flag is set (step S1508), a command to specify passage through the probability change determination device is sent (step S1509), and processing proceeds to step S1510.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the prize count counter has reached a predetermined number (e.g., 10) (step S1510). If the value of the prize count counter has not reached the predetermined number (N in step S1510), the processing ends.

When the value of the prize number counter reaches a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 either drives the solenoid 82 to close the normal large prize opening, or drives the solenoid 83 to close the V large prize opening (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 clears the value of the prize number counter (sets it to 0) (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the post-jackpot opening process (step S116) (step S1513), and ends the process.

(Processing after the jackpot is released)
28 is a flowchart showing an example of post-jackpot release processing. As shown in Fig. 28, in the post-jackpot release processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the release number counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the opening count counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1602), a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (the time at which the end of the jackpot game is announced, for example, on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (step S1603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604), and processing ends.

In step S1601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a command to specify after the large prize opening is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the large prize opening control timer is set to a value equivalent to the interval time from the end of one round to the start of the next round (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the next round is a V-open round (step S1607), i.e., whether it is before the round in which the V-large prize opening is opened (also referred to as the V-open round). If it is not before the V-open round (N in step S1607), the solenoid 82 is activated to open the regular large prize opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V-open round (Y in step S1607), the solenoid 83 is activated to open the V-large prize opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 sends a command to the effect control CPU 120 to specify whether the jackpot opening is in progress (step S1610). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening processing (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the processing.

(Jackpot end processing)
29 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. As shown in FIG. 29, in jackpot termination processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot entry port control timer, which has the jackpot termination time set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the jackpot entry port control timer is 0 (whether the jackpot termination time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the jackpot entry port control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the processing ends. If the value of the jackpot entry port control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the jackpot flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the probability change determination flag, which is set when the ball passes through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. If the probability change determination flag is set in step S1704 (Y in step S1704), the probability change flag indicating that the ball is in a probability change state is set (step S1707). Next, a probability change state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1708), the probability change determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time-saving flag is set to indicate that the time-saving mode is active (step S1710), and the time-saving count counter is set to 100 (step S1711). Then, processing proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set in step S1704 (N in step S1704), then in step S1705, a time-saving flag indicating that the game is in the time-saving state is set (step S1705), the time-saving count counter is set to 100 (step S1706), and processing proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time-saving state designation command is sent to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (step S110) (step S1713), and ends processing. Note that the effect control CPU 120 is able to recognize whether the game is in a special, time-saving, or normal state based on the special symbol state designation command sent from the CPU 103.

[Major operations of the performance control board 12]
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described.

(Main processing for performance control)
When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main processing as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance control main processing. When the performance control main processing shown in Fig. 30 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization processing (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control processing (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example, based on the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to emit an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the presentation control process can confirm which presentation control command was received and the content specified by the presentation control command. Furthermore, if the presentation control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). The performance control process controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving of the movable body 32. In addition, the control content of performance operations using the various performance devices is judged, determined, and set in accordance with the performance control commands sent from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 is updated by software. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

(Performance control process)
Fig. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance control process. The performance control process is the process executed in step S76 of Fig. 30. In the performance control process shown in Fig. 31, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, and settings are made to execute the pre-reading notice performance based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the start winning. In addition, a process is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processing steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of a performance process flag stored in RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution are determined based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." During this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to a command (lamp control data) to the LED driver. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 displays the fixed decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, in a static state, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the static display of the fixed decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol win wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3." In this special symbol win wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. When a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is received, if that command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4." Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving that command has elapsed, the display result in the special symbol game is determined to be a "miss," and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0." Once the value of the presentation process flag has been updated, the special symbol win wait process ends.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S174 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "4." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, for example, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
32 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in FIG. 32, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the result of the variable display has been determined to be a miss (step S7101). If the result has been determined to be a miss, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a command corresponding to a non-reach variable pattern has been received as a variable pattern command (step S7103).

If the effect control CPU 120 determines that it has received a command corresponding to a non-reach fluctuation pattern, it uses the data table for determining losing symbols to determine the display result of a losing symbol that does not result in a reach as the final stop of the effect pattern (step S7105), and proceeds to step S7106.

If the processing in step S7103 determines that the pattern is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern (if it is determined that the pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern), the stopping patterns of the performance patterns that make up the reach pattern combination are determined (step S7104), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Also, if the processing in step S7101 does not determine a miss (if a jackpot is determined), the presentation control CPU 101 determines the stopping symbols of the presentation symbols that make up the jackpot symbol combination according to the type of jackpot (step S7102), and proceeds to step S7106.

Next, the effect setting process (step S7106) is executed to set various effects for the variable display, and then the process proceeds to step S7107. For example, in the effect setting process of step S7106, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute an effect suggesting a jackpot (indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect shown in FIG. 128 (r41), which will be described later, as an effect suggesting a jackpot (indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred). In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a final reach will occur based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command. If a final reach will occur, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the fluctuation pattern. Based on the determined result of whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect, and if so, the type of cut-in effect (red cut-in effect, green cut-in effect). If a cut-in effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 101 sets information for executing the cut-in effect in the effect setting process.

In step S7107, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of multiple effect control patterns. In step S7107, depending on the various effect control (effect operation) patterns specified by the fluctuation pattern command and the effect control pattern of the effect determined in the processing of step S7106, one of the multiple pattern fluctuation control patterns stored in the pattern fluctuation control pattern table that corresponds to the specified various effect operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

The control pattern table stored in ROM 121 stores multiple types of pattern change control patterns that indicate the control details of various performance operations, such as the display operation of the changing performance patterns in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from when the performance patterns start to change until the final stopping pattern is displayed, the display operation of the performance patterns in reach performances, the display operation of pseudo-consecutive performances, and the display operation of the performance patterns in preview performances.

In addition, each symbol change control pattern includes control data for controlling various performance operations in response to the display of the changing symbol, such as a performance control process timer setting value, a performance control process timer judgment value, performance display control data, audio control data, brightness data, and an end code, and the contents of various performance controls and the timing for switching between performance controls are set in chronological order.

Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) for the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the processing of step S7109, control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) is started (step S7110) in accordance with the contents of the process data (display control execution data, brightness data, sound number data). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, a command is output to cause the image display device 5 to display an image (including a performance pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern. Also, a control signal (lamp control data) is output to the LED driver to control the on/off of various light-emitting elements such as LEDs. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step S7112), and the variable display start setting processing ends.

<Details of game progress>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player first uses a left-handed shot to fire a gaming ball toward a first flow path that passes through the left side of the gaming area. When the fired gaming ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game begins. As a result of the first special symbol game, if the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 displays a jackpot symbol, a jackpot occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the first special symbol game are normal jackpots 1 and 2, and special jackpots 1 to 4. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is played, and a right-hit promotion effect is played to encourage the player to make a right hit. The right-hit promotion effect involves displaying text (for example, "right hit") and a graphic image (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage a right hit, and also encouraging a right hit by lighting up lighting means such as LEDs in the right-hit display unit 9030 of the special symbol LED board 9020 and the right-hit display unit 55 of the fourth symbol unit 9050. This encourages the player to make a right hit from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot opening will be opened a predetermined number of times (for example, three times for a 3R regular jackpot, or ten times for a 10R special jackpot). Each opening of the jackpot opening will continue until a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), whichever comes first.

When the ending presentation following a jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times). Furthermore, if a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is controlled to a probability variable state for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) of times while still in the time-saving state.

Even in the probability variable state or time-saving state after a jackpot round, the right-hit promotion effect continues to be executed by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 9030, and right-hit display unit 55. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also called the initial hit) occurs, the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion effect, even in the time-saving state after the jackpot round has ended.

In the time-saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state, control is executed to shorten the average normal symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the normal symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state, and control is executed to improve the probability of a "normal symbol hit" in the normal symbol game compared to the normal state. Also, in the time-saving state, electric chute support control may be executed to increase the frequency at which the variable prize-winning ball device 6B that forms the second start prize-winning port is opened, thereby increasing the frequency at which the game ball enters the second start prize-winning port and making it easier to win in the second start prize-winning port (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time-saving state after a jackpot round, the second special symbol game begins when the launched game ball enters the second start entry hole formed in the variable prize ball device 6B. As a result of the second special symbol game, if the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot (also called a consecutive win) occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the second special game include guaranteed jackpots 5 to 9. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. Note that the right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 9030, and right-hit display unit 55 continues from the first jackpot.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot opening will be opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). Each opening of the jackpot opening will continue until a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), whichever comes first.

Then, once the ending presentation following the jackpot game state has ended, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state and a probability variable state (high probability, high base state) for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), just as it was during the initial hit. Even in the probability variable state after the jackpot round in a series of hits, the right-hit promotion presentation continues to be executed by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 9030, and right-hit display unit 55. Therefore, even if a series of hits occurs in the probability variable state or time-saving state after the jackpot round ends after the initial hit, and even in the probability variable state or time-saving state after the jackpot round of that series of hits ends, the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion presentation.

If the probability variable state or time-saving state ends without a jackpot occurring after the first jackpot round ends, or after consecutive jackpot rounds ends, the game state will be controlled to the normal state (low probability, low base state), and the right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 9030, and right-hit display unit 55 will also end. As a result, the player will again use left-handed hits to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left area of the game area.

<Flow of the production>
Next, the flow of a series of effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of effects. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a notification effect is executed between the start of the variable display and the stop of the variable display. The notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether the fluctuations of the special symbols and decorative symbols will stop in a manner indicating a jackpot, i.e., whether the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The notification effect is composed of multiple effect parts, and in this embodiment, these parts include a start part, a hype part, a win epilogue part, a loss epilogue part, a bonus operation part, a rescue win part, a re-lottery part, and a fanfare part. The re-lottery part is followed by a fanfare part that is executed before transitioning to a jackpot gaming state. The hype part is also referred to as an introduction part. The win epilogue part and the loss epilogue part are collectively referred to as an epilogue part.

[Starting part]
The start part is the part where the effect corresponding to the previous variation pattern is executed. The start part also indicates the period from when the variation starts and when the pseudo-relay or normal reach is executed until the SP reach starts. Note that the start part also includes variations that are not reach misses.

[Inciting part (introduction part)]
The hype part (introduction part) includes the start of the SP reach (also called super reach) (the start timing of the SP reach title display) and the timing when the branch point of whether it will be a jackpot or a miss is reached. The hype part is a part that hypes up whether it will be a jackpot or a miss depending on the performance that is executed. The hype part includes a part corresponding to the SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B that is executed after the start part, and a part corresponding to any of the SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach that develop from the SP first half reach. Note that the SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B are sometimes collectively referred to as the SP first half, and the SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach are sometimes collectively referred to as the SP second half.

[Epilogue part]
The epilogue parts include a winning epilogue part that notifies the player that a jackpot display result will occur after each promotion part, and a losing epilogue part that notifies the player that a losing display result will occur. In the winning epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, a presentation is executed with a story unfolding to notify the player that the currently changing symbols will become a jackpot display result and the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In the losing epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, a presentation is executed with a story unfolding to notify the player that the currently changing symbols will become a losing display result and the game will not be controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the epilogue part, the notification of a jackpot display result can be made by moving the reel device when announcing a win or loss after the introductory part, as in the final reach described below, or by a story unfolding on the LCD (image display device 5) without using a reel device, as in SP reaches other than the final reach. Among the epilogue parts, the winning epilogue part that notifies by moving the reel device is also referred to as a win or loss notification part. Specifically, in SP first half reaches A and B and SP second half reaches A and B, in the epilogue part that is executed after the introductory part, if a jackpot occurs, the winning epilogue part as described above will notify the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the LCD. If a jackpot does not occur, the losing epilogue part will notify the player that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the LCD. The initial story unfolding in the story presentation may also suggest whether or not a win has occurred. Meanwhile, in the final reach, in the epilogue part that is executed after the introductory part, first the hit/miss notification part (device operation part) operates the device, branching into whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state; then, if a jackpot occurs, the hit epilogue part as described above notifies the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the LCD; if no jackpot occurs, the loss epilogue part notifies the player that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot gaming state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the LCD. In this way, the hit epilogue part in the final reach includes the hit/miss notification part and the subsequent hit epilogue or loss epilogue part.

In addition, in response to SP first half reach A, the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A and the losing epilogue part of SP first half reach A are executed. In response to SP first half reach B, the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B and the losing epilogue part of SP first half reach B are executed. In response to SP second half reach A, the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A and the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach A are executed. In response to SP second half reach B, the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B and the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach B are executed. In response to SP final reach, the winning epilogue part of SP final reach and the losing epilogue part of SP final reach are executed.

[Reel movement part]
The role operation part is a part corresponding to the period during which the SP second half develops, during which an effect indicating the development from the SP first half to the SP second half is executed by operating the movable body 32. The role operation part is executed after the provocation part of the SP first half reach A or the provocation part of the SP first half reach B. After the role operation part, either the provocation part of the SP second half reach A, the provocation part of the SP second half reach B, or the provocation part of the SP final reach is executed.

[Relief part]
The rescue hit part is a part where a rescue hit effect is executed that initially appears to be a miss and then suggests a big hit. The rescue hit part can develop from either the miss epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the miss epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, or the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach.

[Re-lottery part]
The re-lottery part is a part executed after the winning epilogue part in which the jackpot display result is displayed. Specifically, the re-lottery effect is executed after the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, and the rescue winning part. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after each winning part (winning epilogue part, rescue winning part), but there may be cases where the re-lottery effect part is not transitioned to. For example, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the rescue part, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the winning epilogue part, or the re-lottery part may not be executed if a probability variable symbol (an odd symbol indicating a probability variable) is derived as the jackpot display result.

[Relationship before and after the decision]
Next, an example will be described in which a series of effects is divided into timings before and after the hit/miss determination. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after the hit/miss determination, the SP first half reach A jackpot, and the SP final reach jackpot. Here, the hit/miss determination refers to a performance that indicates a branch in the final stage of the hype part, indicating whether the display result will be a hit or a miss. As shown in FIG. 34 (A), a series of effects can be divided into parts that are executed before and after the hit/miss determination, from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation, at timings before and after the hit/miss determination. The part before the hit/miss determination includes a start part and a hype part. Furthermore, the part after the hit/miss determination includes an epilogue part (hit, miss), a rescue hit part, and a re-draw part.

In this way, the series of effects from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation is made up of multiple parts. The period from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation can also be divided into before and after the start of the SP reach (start of post-fluctuation). In such cases, the period before the start of the SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the pre-fluctuation described above, and the period after the start of the SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the post-fluctuation described above.

Next, using Figure 34 (B), we will explain the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 20, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot among the various fluctuation patterns. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is from the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (start of later fluctuation). Then, the provocation part (SP first half reach A) is from the start of SP reach (start of later fluctuation) to the determination of whether the win or loss is a win. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the reels do not move at the timing of the determination of whether the win or loss is a win. Then, the epilogue part (SP first half reach A hit) is from the determination of whether the win or loss is a win to the start of the re-lottery performance. Then, the re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery performance to the stop of fluctuation. For example, the variation pattern for an SP first half Reach A jackpot is set so that the start part is 60 seconds, the teaser part (SP first half Reach A) is 20 seconds, the epilogue part (SP first half Reach A hit) is 15 seconds, and the re-draw part is 20 seconds.

Next, using Figure 34 (C), we will explain the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 26, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot among the various fluctuation patterns. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the start part is from the start of fluctuation to the start of the SP reach (start of later fluctuation). Then, the provocation part (SP first half reach A) is from the start of the SP reach (start of later fluctuation) to the development of the second half of the SP. Then, the provocation part (SP final reach) is from the development of the second half of the SP to the determination of whether it is a win or a loss. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the reels do not move at the timing of the determination of whether it is a win or a loss. Then, the epilogue part (SP final reach hit) is from the determination of whether it is a win or a loss to the start of the re-lottery performance. Then, the re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery performance to the stop of fluctuation. For example, the variation pattern for an SP final reach jackpot is set so that the start part is 60 seconds, the hype part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the hype part (SP final reach) is 25 seconds, the epilogue part (SP final reach hit) is 30 seconds, and the re-draw part is 20 seconds.

As shown in Figures 34 (B) and (C), the SP Final Reach, which has higher expectations than the SP First Half Reach A, has a longer fluctuation time. Furthermore, the SP Final Reach, which has higher expectations than the SP First Half Reach A, has a longer total excitement part time and epilogue part time. This means that the higher the fluctuation expectation, the longer the period of excitement for the player, and the longer the afterglow when a win is achieved, thereby enhancing the sense of celebration.

<About the scenario>
Next, the correspondence between the performance contents executed in a series of performances and the game effect lamp 9 will be explained using the scenario for each part. The scenario described here serves as a script summarizing the content of each scene in the series of performances. The scenario for each part corresponds to a diagram for explaining the performance mode corresponding to each part, which will be described later. The content of the performances executed on the screen of the image display device 5 and the mode of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained in detail using a diagram for explaining the performance mode, which will be described later. Below, the correspondence between the diagram for explaining the scenario for each part and the diagram for explaining the performance mode, which will be described later, will be explained.

Figure 35 is a diagram explaining the scenario of the start part. The scenario of the start part corresponding to number 1 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 55 to 61, which will be described later. Figure 36 is a diagram explaining the scenario of the hype part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the hype part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 2 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 62 to 67, which will be described later. Figure 38 is a diagram explaining the scenarios of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 3 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 68 to 69, which will be described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 4 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 70 to 71, which will be described later.

Figure 38 is a diagram explaining the scenario of the provocative part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the provocative part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 5 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 72 to 77, which will be described later. Figure 39 is a diagram explaining the scenarios of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 6 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 78 to 80, which will be described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 7 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 81 to 82, which will be described later. Figure 40 is a diagram explaining the scenario of the reel operation part (when the SP second half develops). The scenario of the reel operation part (when the SP second half develops) corresponding to number 8 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode in Figure 83, which will be described later.

Figure 41 is a diagram explaining the scenario of the provocative part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the provocative part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 9 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 84 to 96, which will be described later. Figure 42 is a diagram explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 10 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 97 to 98, which will be described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 11 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 99 to 100, which will be described later.

Figure 43 is a diagram explaining the scenario of the provocative part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the provocative part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 12 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 101 to 109, which will be described later. Figure 44 is a diagram explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 13 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 110 to 112, which will be described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 14 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 113 to 114, which will be described later.

Figures 45 and 46 are diagrams explaining the scenario of the provocative part (SP final reach). The scenario of the provocative part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 15 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 115 to 132, which will be described later. Figure 47 is a diagram explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and the losing epilogue part (SP final reach). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 16 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 133 to 136, which will be described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 17 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 137 to 138, which will be described later. Figure 48 is a diagram explaining the scenario of the rescue winning part. The scenario of the rescue winning part corresponding to number 18 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 139 to 140, which will be described later.

Figure 49 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving an odd or even symbol after a button operation). The scenario of the re-draw part (deriving an odd or even symbol after a button operation) corresponding to number 19 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 141 to 156, which will be described later. Figure 50 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving an odd symbol after a button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario of the re-draw part (deriving an odd symbol after a button operation) corresponding to number 20 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 157 to 159, which will be described later. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figure 160, which will be described later. Figure 51 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving an even symbol after a button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario for the re-draw part (deriving an even numbered symbol after pressing a button) corresponding to number 21 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 161 to 163, which will be described later. The scenario for the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode in Figure 164, which will be described later.

<Output mechanism to LED driver (lamp driver)>
FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 outputs brightness data to the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver) for turning on, blinking, or extinguishing one or more of the lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9. Hereinafter, the control of turning on, blinking, or extinguishing lamps such as LEDs by the effect control CPU 120 is also referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the effect control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 to turn on, blink, or extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on, blink, or extinguish based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 and RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 store brightness data tables containing brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9. The brightness data tables include an error brightness data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach brightness data table used in each part of the SP reach (such as the hype part, winning epilogue part, losing epilogue part, and role device operation part), and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in the low-probability, low-base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in the fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, a jackpot background brightness data table used during a round in the jackpot gaming state, an ending background brightness data table used in the ending state in which an ending effect is executed to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a probability variable background brightness data table used in the high-probability, high-base state (probability variable state).

The above-mentioned background brightness data tables are used without overlapping, and one of the background brightness data tables is used depending on which of the multiple game states, such as normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, and probability variable state, is controlled. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data based on that background brightness data table to the LED driver. This allows each game effect lamp 9 to be controlled depending on the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, a priority is set for each of the error brightness data table, SP reach brightness data table, and background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in Figure 52, the error brightness data table, SP reach brightness data table, and background brightness data table have the highest priority when used.

For example, if the SP Reach occurs while outputting brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 uses the SP Reach brightness data table corresponding to that SP Reach in preference to the normal background brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on that SP Reach brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, if the SP Reach occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the SP Reach based on the SP Reach brightness data table. Note that while brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. However, when the SP Reach ends and the state returns to normal, brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is output to the LED driver. If a jackpot is hit and the fanfare state occurs, brightness data based on the fanfare background brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the presentation control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state being controlled, while outputting brightness data to the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to that game state being controlled. However, if the game progresses to an SP Reach or similar state, the SP Reach brightness data table corresponding to that SP Reach is used preferentially over the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the background brightness data table. In other words, even while the presentation control CPU 120 is controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP Reach brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table. However, because the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP Reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the SP reach ends, the performance control CPU 120 resumes outputting the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table to the LED driver, starting from the continuation of the brightness data that it had been updating.

Furthermore, for example, if an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table during an SP Reach, the performance control CPU 120 uses the error brightness data table corresponding to the error in preference to the SP Reach brightness data table, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the error brightness data table. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to an SP Reach based on the SP Reach brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error brightness data table. Note that while brightness data based on the error brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver; however, when the error is cleared and the game returns to the SP Reach gaming state, brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the presentation control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the SP Reach being controlled, while outputting brightness data to the LED driver using the SP Reach brightness data table corresponding to that SP Reach. However, if an error occurs, the error brightness data table corresponding to that error is used in preference to the SP Reach brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the SP Reach brightness data table. In other words, even while the presentation control CPU 120 is controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the SP Reach brightness data table. However, because the brightness data contained in the SP Reach brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the error brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the SP Reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the error is resolved, the performance control CPU 120 resumes outputting the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table to the LED driver, starting from the continuation of the brightness data that it had been updating.

<Game effect lamp lighting mode>
In this embodiment, the lighting of each game effect lamp 9 is controlled by the output of brightness data to the LED driver by the performance control CPU 120 as described above. Here, the lighting mode of each game effect lamp 9 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 53 and 54. Figures 53 and 54 are diagrams for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.

In this embodiment, terms such as "off," "almost off," "on," and "flashing" are used to describe the lighting of each game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp, accessory lamp 9A, left panel lamp 9B, attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H. Also, as mentioned above, the "on" and "flashing" states of each game effect lamp 9 are also referred to as "lighting states."

The term "off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and has a brightness of 0. The term "almost off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but has an extremely low brightness (for example, the brightness "1" described below).

For example, as shown in Figure 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the frame lamp is "000," the frame lamp is "off." Also, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the frame lamp is "111," the frame lamp lights up in white at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, for convenience, the state of the frame lamp when the RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off."

As shown in Figure 53 (X1), when the RRRR (Red, Red, Red, Red) data defined as the brightness data of the reel lamp 9A is "0000", the reel lamp 9A is "off". Also, when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the reel lamp 9A is "1111", the reel lamp 9A lights up in red at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the reel lamp 9A when the RRRR data is "1111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in Figure 53 (X1), when the WWWWW (White, White, White, White, White) data defined as the brightness data of the board left lamp 9B is "00000," the board left lamp 9B is "off." Also, when the brightness data (WWWWW data) of the board left lamp 9B is "11111," the board left lamp 9B lights up at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, for convenience, the state of the board left lamp 9B when the WWWWW data is "11111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off."

As shown in Figure 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the attacca lamp 9E is "000", the attacca lamp 9E is "off". Also, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacca lamp 9E is "111", the attacca lamp 9E is lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the attacca lamp 9E when the RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in Figure 53 (X1), when the WWW (White, White, White) data defined as the brightness data of the V attacca lamp 9F is "000", the V attacca lamp 9F is "off". Also, when the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacca lamp 9F is "111", the V attacca lamp 9F lights up at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, for convenience, the state of the V attacca lamp 9F when the WWW data is "111" may be referred to as "almost off".

As shown in Figure 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the electric tube lamp 9H is "000", the electric tube lamp 9H is "off". Also, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric tube lamp 9H is "111", the electric tube lamp 9H is lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the electric tube lamp 9H when the RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

The term "on" includes constant lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, wave lighting, in which the multiple lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in sequence, and hazy lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness. Specifically, "on" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any of "2" to "F." Note that brightness data is hexadecimal data that can be specified from "0" to "F," with "0" being no brightness, "1" being the lowest brightness, and "F" being the highest brightness.

For example, as shown in Figure 53 (X2), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 is "AAA," the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are "lit," and in this particular case, because the brightness is high, the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are lit brightly.

As shown in Figure 53 (X3), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the right frame lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is "AAA," the right frame lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are "lit." In this particular case, because the brightness is high, the right frame lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are brightly lit.

As shown in Figure 54 (X4), when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the reel lamp 9A is "AAAA," the reel lamp 9A "lights up," and in this case, since the brightness is high, the reel lamp 9A lights up brightly.

As shown in Figure 54 (X5), when the brightness data (WWW data) of the left panel lamp 9B is "AAAAA," the left panel lamp 9B is "lit," and in this particular case, since the brightness is high, the left panel lamp 9B lights up brightly.

As shown in Figure 54 (X6), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacca lamp 9E is "AAA," the attacca lamp 9E "lights up," and in this case, the brightness is particularly high, so the attacca lamp 9E lights up brightly. When the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacca lamp 9F is "AAA," the V attacca lamp 9F "lights up," and in this case, the brightness is particularly high, so the V attacca lamp 9F lights up brightly. When the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric tube lamp 9H is "AAA," the electric tube lamp 9H "lights up," and in this case, the brightness is particularly high, so the electric tube lamp 9H lights up brightly.

The term "flashing" refers to a state of the game effect lamp 9 other than the above-mentioned "off" and "on" states, including states in which the brightness of each lamp alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, "flashing" includes repeatedly turning on and off or nearly off. Specifically, "flashing" includes alternating over time between brightness data of "2" to "F" and brightness data of "0" or "1." As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the lamp lighting state includes hazy lighting. However, while hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness, flashing differs from hazy lighting in that all of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 alternate between turning on and off or nearly off.

<Presentation Mode of Pachinko Game Machine 1>
Next, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game will be described with reference to Figures 55 to 164. In this embodiment, the presentation mode when any one of the main variation patterns 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 is selected will be described.

Specifically, when the variation pattern of main variation number 9 is selected, of the multiple routes shown in Figure 33, the presentation will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A hype part (2), and SP first half reach A miss epilogue part (4), or the presentation will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B hype part (5), and SP first half reach B miss epilogue part (7).

When the main variation number 12 variation pattern is selected, the performance will transition in the following order: Start part (1), SP first half Reach A hype part (2), device operation part (8), SP second half Reach A hype part (9), SP second half Reach A miss epilogue part (11), or Start part (1), SP first half Reach A hype part (2), device operation part (8), SP second half Reach B hype part (12), SP second half Reach B miss epilogue part (14) ), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B hype part (5), device operation part (8), SP second half reach A hype part (9), SP second half reach B miss epilogue part (14), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B hype part (5), device operation part (8), SP second half reach B hype part (12), SP second half reach B miss epilogue part (14).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 15 is selected, the performance will transition in the following order: start part (1), SP first half reach A hype part (2), device operation part (8), SP final reach hype part (15), SP final reach miss epilogue part (17), or the performance will transition in the following order: start part (1), SP first half reach B hype part (5), device operation part (8), SP final reach hype part (15), SP final reach miss epilogue part (17).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 20 is selected, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), SP first half reach A winning epilogue part (3), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), SP first half reach B winning epilogue part (6).

When the main variation number 20 variation pattern is selected, the performance will transition in the following order: Start part (1), SP first half Reach A hype part (2), device operation part (8), SP second half Reach A hype part (9), SP second half Reach A winning epilogue part (10), or Start part (1), SP first half Reach A hype part (2), device operation part (8), SP second half Reach B hype part (12), SP second half Reach B winning epilogue part (13) ), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B hype part (5), device operation part (8), SP second half reach A hype part (9), SP second half reach B winning epilogue part (10), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B hype part (5), device operation part (8), SP second half reach B hype part (12), SP second half reach B winning epilogue part (13).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 26 is selected, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A hype part (2), device operation part (8), SP final reach hype part (15), SP final reach winning epilogue part (16), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B hype part (5), device operation part (8), SP final reach hype part (15), SP final reach winning epilogue part (16).

The diagram also shows the state of each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 and the sound effects output from speakers 8L, 8R. Note that in this embodiment, a re-lottery part is always executed after a winning epilogue, but there may also be a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed and the game ends with the winning epilogue part. Also, while the variation pattern corresponding to the rescue winning part has been omitted from the example of the total variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the rescue winning part will also be explained. Note that in the case of a win, the variation time is longer than that of a losing variation pattern, so a rescue winning part that appears to be a losing but is actually a winning part may use that variation time to execute a variation by the rescue winning part.

[Direction in the starting part]
The presentation of the start part will be described with reference to Figures 55 to 61.

As shown in Figure 55 (a1), when variable display (changing display) begins based on one reserved memory, on the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as the background during the variable display. In this embodiment, an image of a flying girl named Yume Yume-chan is displayed as the character that appears in the fluctuation during the normal game state. Yume Yume-chan is a main character that appears as an ally character in the performance executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When the display starts to change, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background. During the variable display, sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R as appropriate, but these are only shown in some of the drawings. The lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background, is referred to as "background yellow lighting." The effect control CPU 120 lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a yellow background lighting pattern based on the normal background brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. Note that "lighting" here includes constant lighting, wave lighting, and hazy lighting, as described with reference to Figures 53 and 54, and the same applies in the following explanations.

As shown in Figure 55 (a2), after the decorative symbols on the left and right enter a reach state where they temporarily stop at the "2" symbol, the "NEXT" symbol stops as a pseudo-consecutive symbol in the center symbol. The stopping of the "NEXT" symbol indicates the start of the second pseudo-variation. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Note that "flashing" here includes the lamp repeatedly turning on and off, as explained with reference to Figures 53 and 54, and this also applies to the following explanation. After that, as shown in Figure 55 (a3), the letters "x2" are displayed, indicating that the second variable display will be performed through the pseudo-consecutive effect. When "x2" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice.

After that, as shown in Figure 56 (a4), a second pseudo-variation occurs. The letters "x2" are displayed in small letters in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that this is the second variable display. During the second variable display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern with a yellow background. After that, as shown in Figure 56 (a5), after the reach state is reached, the "NEXT" symbol stops as a pseudo-consecutive symbol in the center symbol. The stopping of the "NEXT" symbol indicates that the third pseudo-variation has begun. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, as shown in Figure 56 (a6), the letters "x3" are displayed, indicating that the third variable display will occur through the pseudo-consecutive effect. When "x3" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice.

After that, as shown in Figure 57 (a7), a pseudo re-change occurs as the third variable display. The characters "x3" are displayed in small letters in the upper left of the screen, indicating that this is the third variable display. During the re-change, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern with the background lit yellow. Then, as shown in Figure 57 (a8), a "2" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, and a "2" also stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, creating a reach state known as reach tenpai. During reach tenpai, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Then, as shown in Figure 57 (a9), the background begins to darken and the screen goes dark while the center symbol remains variable in the reach tenpai state. When the background starts to darken, the game effect lamp 9 lights up red.

After that, as shown in Figure 58 (a10), an image in the shape of a shutter (hereinafter simply referred to as the shutter) is displayed to hide the decorative pattern and Yume Yume's character image. The shutter layer has a higher priority than the decorative pattern layer and the Yume Yume character layer. High priority means that the image layer is located at the front. As shown in Figure 58 (a10), the shutter is displayed closing from the top and bottom of the screen toward the center of the screen. The shutter image makes it impossible to see the image behind the shutter. Additionally, the screen brightness gradually decreases as the shutter gradually closes. When the shutter is closed as shown in (a10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while gradually decreasing in brightness.

After that, as shown in Figure 58 (a11), the shutter closes further, and the screen brightness decreases compared to the time point (a10). When the shutter is closed at (a11), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 decreases further from the time point (a10), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in Figure 58 (a12), the shutter closes further, and the screen brightness decreases compared to the time point (a11). When the shutter is closed at (a12), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 decreases further from the time point (a11), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. The screen brightness gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12), for example, such that the relationship is (a10) 75% > (a11) 50% > (a12) 25%. The brightness of the game effect lamp 9 also gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12).

Then, as shown in Figure 59 (a13), the shutter closes completely. When the shutter is closed at (a13), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red, with the brightness of the lamp 9 remaining the same as at time (a12). Thereafter, the shutter remains closed from (a14) to (a15) in Figure 59. When the shutter remains closed at (a14) and (a15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red, with the brightness of the lamp 9 remaining the same as at time (a13).

After that, the screen brightness gradually increases as the shutter gradually opens from (a16) to (a18) in Figure 60. When the shutter is open at (a16), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red, maintaining the same brightness as at (a15). After that, as shown in (a17) in Figure 60, the shutter opens further and the screen brightness increases compared to at (a16). When the shutter is open at (a17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red, maintaining the same brightness as at (a16). After that, as shown in (a18) in Figure 60, the shutter opens further and the screen brightness increases compared to at (a17). When the shutter is open at (a18), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red, maintaining the same brightness as at (a17).

The screen brightness gradually increases from (a16) to (a17), for example, so that the relationship is (a16) 25% < (a17) 50% < (a18) 75%. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining its brightness from (a16) to (a18). Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (a19), when the shutter is fully opened, a screen corresponding to SP First Half Reach A is displayed. When the shutter is open at (a19), the screen brightness is 100%. When the shutter is open at (a19), the game effect lamp 9 is off. Note that it may be "almost off" instead of "off." Furthermore, if a transition to SP First Half Reach B has been determined as the shutter opens, a screen corresponding to SP First Half Reach B will be displayed. If SP first half reach A is executed from the (a19) state, the effect will transition to that shown in Figure 62 (b1), and if SP first half reach B is executed from the (a19) state, the effect will transition to that shown in Figure 72 (e1).

[Performance in the provocative part (first half of SP Reach A)]
62 to 67, the presentation of the hype part (SP first half reach A) will be described. The hype part (SP first half reach A) is a part where a story unfolds in which Yume Yume, an ally character, chases after Bakuchu, an enemy character. In the hype part (SP first half reach A), a story unfolds that hypes up the fact that if Yume Yume can catch Bakuchu, it will be a jackpot, but if she cannot catch Bakuchu, it will be a loss.

As shown in Figure 62 (b1), during the promotional part in which SP First Half Reach A is executed, the title "Catch Bakuchu!" corresponding to SP First Half Reach A is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the SP First Half performance that will be executed. When the title display (b1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is off. Then, as shown in Figure 62 (b2), the title display is erased and an image showing an enemy character called Bakuchu landing is displayed. When the title display (b2) is erased, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Furthermore, when the image related to the title display (b2) disappears, background music corresponding to SP First Half Reach A is output. Then, as shown in Figure 62 (b3), an image of the enemy character Bakuchu landing in the center of the screen and striking a pose is displayed. When the enemy character (b3) appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up red.

After that, as shown in Figure 63 (b4), an image of a confrontation between the ally character Yume Yume and the enemy character Bakuchu is displayed in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state of (b4), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side where Yume Yume is displayed lights up green, corresponding to the Yume Yume character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side where Bakuchu is displayed lights up red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (b5), the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I found it" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (b5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes green, corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in Figure 63 (b6), the subtitle "Found" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Found you" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (b6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up green corresponding to Yume Yume's character. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes red corresponding to Bakuchu speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (b7), the ally character Yume Yume is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (b7), the Yume Yume close-up screen displays the subtitle "I'll catch you!" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I'll catch you!". Also, in the Yume Yume close-up state of (b7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking the line. Then, as shown in (b8), an image of Yume Yume chasing Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (b8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume uttering the line "Too." Then, as shown in (b9), an image of Bakuchu running away from Yume Yume is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu running away state of (b9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red corresponding to Bakuchu uttering the line "Hehehe."

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b10), the room background is displayed on the screen. In the room background state of (b10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. Then, as shown in (b11), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the subtitle "Wait~" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Wait~" is displayed on the Yume Yume chasing screen. In addition, the physical sound of Yume Yume's footsteps, "Zzz zazzz," is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Ta ta ta tat," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (b11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes green in response to Yume Yume speaking. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes red in response to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in Figure 65 (b12), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the physical sound of Yume Yume's footsteps, "Zzz zazzz," is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Ta ta ta tat," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (b12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green to correspond to Yume Yume's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red to correspond to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in Figure 66 (b13), Bakuchu's back is displayed, along with part of Yume Yume's hand, and the screen changes to one in which Bakuchu runs away from Yume Yume. As shown in (b13), on the screen in which Bakuchu is running away, a subtitle "I won't get caught!" is displayed, corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I won't get caught!". In addition, the physical sound of Yume Yume's footsteps "Zzz zazzz" is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta ta ta tat" is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the Bakuchu running away state of (b13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to Bakuchu speaking.

After that, as shown in Figure 66 (b14), an image is displayed of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Yume Yume on the left side of the screen. As shown in (b14), the sound of Bakuchu jumping, "Pyoon," is output as an artificial sound (hereinafter referred to as an onomatopoeia) to accompany the image of Bakuchu jumping. Also, in the Bakuchu jump state of (b14), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white to indicate that Bakuchu is jumping. After that, as shown in (b15), the enemy character Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (b15), on the Bakuchu up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red to indicate the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in Figure 67 (b16), the ally character Yume Yume is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (b16), on the Yume Yume close-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up green to correspond to Yume Yume's character. Then, as shown in (b17), an image of Yume Yume jumping and pouncing on the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (b17), Yume Yume's line "Got it!" is output on the Yume Yume Jump screen. Also, in the Yume Yume Jump state of (b17), the background music is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times to correspond to Yume Yume jumping.

After that, as shown in Figure 67 (b18), a screen for determining whether or not the win has been made is displayed, with an enlarged image of Yume Yume. Furthermore, in the scene before the win/loss determination in (b18), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white, corresponding to the scene before the win/loss determination. By muting the sound in the scene before the win/loss determination, it is easy to understand that this is the branching scene for determining whether or not the win has been made. If it has been determined from the state of (b18) that a jackpot will be hit in the SP first half Reach A, the display will transition to the effect of (c1). If it has been determined from the state of (b18) that a loss will be made in the SP first half Reach A, the display will transition to the effect of (d1). If it has been determined from the state of (b18) that the game will develop into the second half of the SP Reach, the display will transition to the effect of (h1).

[Performance in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
The presentation of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be described with reference to Figures 68 and 69. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume catching Bakuchu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 68 (c1), in the winning epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, an image of Yume Yume catching the tail of a Bakuchu in her hand is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu catching state of (c1), the physical sound of Yume Yume catching a Bakuchu, "Bash!", is output in time with the image of Yume Yume catching a Bakuchu. Also, in the Bakuchu catching state of (c1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a white that is brighter than the white of (tb18) that indicates the lighting mode of (b18), in response to catching a Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in Figure 68 (c2), an image of Yume Yume, who has caught the Bakuchu, making a V sign is displayed. As shown in (c2), when the Bakuchu is being caught, the subtitle "Easy win!" is displayed, corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Easy win!" Also, in the (c2) state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors to indicate a jackpot. Hereinafter, the smooth rainbow lighting will also be referred to as "smooth rainbow lighting." Also, in the (c2) state, background music for a win is output. After that, as shown in (c3), a still image in a comic book style is displayed, showing Yume Yume, who has caught the Bakuchu, making a V sign. In the still image state of (c3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in Figure 69 (c4), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222," indicating a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (c4), the symbol "222" is enlarged and highlighted with a converging line. In the symbol display state of (c4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a bright white color. Then, as shown in (c5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed at a smaller size than in the state of (c4). In the symbol display state of (c5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. Then, as shown in (c6), the symbol combination "222" is displayed at a normal size, even smaller than in the state of (c5). In the two-symbol (normal size) state of (c6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains its rainbow (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the failed epilogue part (first half of SP Reach A)]
70 to 71, the presentation of the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be described. The miss epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which the story unfolds in which Yume Yume fails to catch the Bakuchu, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 70 (d1), in the losing epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, an image of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the (d1) state where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the onomatopoeic sound of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu, "Sksk," is output in conjunction with the image of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu. Also, in the (d1) state where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tb18), which indicates the lighting mode of (b18), in response to the failure to catch the Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in Figure 70 (d2), an image is displayed in which Yume Yume, who was unable to catch Bakuchu, kneels in disappointment, while Bakuchu looks happy. As shown in (d2), in the disappointment state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white that is darker than the white of (td1) indicating the lighting mode of (d1). After that, as shown in (d3), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (d3), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in Figure 71 (d4), the symbol "232", which is a losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. When the normal screen of (d4) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1).

[Performance in the provocative part (first half of SP Reach B)]
72 to 77, the presentation of the hype part (SP first half reach B) will be described. The hype part (SP first half reach B) is a part where a story unfolds in which the ally character Yume Yume and the enemy character Boingo face off in hockey. In the hype part (SP first half reach B), a story unfolds that hypes up the fact that if Yume Yume wins against Boingo, it will be a jackpot, and if Yume Yume loses to Boingo, it will be a loss.

As shown in Figure 72 (e1), in the promotional part where SP First Half Reach B is executed, the title corresponding to SP First Half Reach B, "Bilibili Hockey Showdown," is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the SP First Half performance that will be executed. When the title display in (e1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is off. Then, as shown in Figure 72 (e2), an image is displayed in which the screen cracks and the title display is erased. When the screen cracks and the title display is erased in (e2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green. Then, as shown in (e3), an image of the opponent character appearance is displayed, in which the ally character Yume Yume and the enemy character Boingo appear on the screen. When the opponent character appears in (e3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up green.

After that, as shown in Figure 73 (e4), an image of a confrontation between the ally character Yume Yume, who is in the foreground left of the screen, and the enemy character Boingo, who is in the background right of the screen, is displayed. In the confrontation state of (e4), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side where Yume Yume is displayed lights up green, corresponding to the Yume Yume character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side where Boingo is displayed lights up cream, corresponding to the Boingo character. Also, when the title display of (e4) disappears, background music corresponding to the SP first half reach B is output. After that, as shown in (e5), a subtitle display "I won't lose," corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I won't lose," is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (e5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes green, corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up cream, corresponding to the Boingo character.

After that, as shown in Figure 73 (e6), the subtitle "Come on!" corresponding to Boingo's line "Come on!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (e6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up green, corresponding to Yume Yume's character. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes cream, corresponding to Boingo speaking.

After that, as shown in Figure 74 (e7), an image of Yume Yume, an ally character, hitting the puck is displayed. Also, as shown in (e7), on the screen that is Yume Yume's turn, Yume Yume's line "Yaaaa" is output. Also, in the Yume Yume turn state of (e7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Then, as shown in (e8), the puck hit by Yume Yume is displayed in an enlarged form. Also, in the puck display state of (e8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice corresponding to the physical sound "whoosh" that the puck makes when it moves. Then, as shown in (e9), an image of Boingo blocking Yume Yume's puck is displayed. Also, in the Boingo blocking state of (e9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up cream corresponding to the Boingo character.

After that, as shown in Figure 75 (e10), an image of the deflected puck flying through the air is displayed. In the state of (e10) where the puck is flying through the pucks, the physical sound of the puck spinning, "Swirl," is output. Also, in the state of (e10), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up green, corresponding to the Yume Yume character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up cream, corresponding to the Boingo character. After that, as shown in (e11), an image of the enemy character Boingo hitting the puck is displayed. Also, as shown in (e11), on the screen where it is Boingo's turn, Boingo's line, "Yoisho~" is output. Also, in the Boingo turn state of (e11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes cream, corresponding to Boingo speaking. After that, as shown in (e12), the puck hit by Boingo is enlarged and displayed. Additionally, in the puck display state (e12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white, corresponding to the physical sound of the puck moving, "shoo."

After that, as shown in Figure 76 (e13), Yume Yume receives damage by being hit directly by the puck, and an image of electricity running through her bones is displayed, showing her bones through the hole. As shown in (e13), in the Yume Yume damage state, Yume Yume's line "Wow" is output. Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice, corresponding to Yume Yume receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e14), an image of Yume Yume receiving damage, electricity running through her bones is displayed. Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e14), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice, corresponding to Yume Yume receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e15), an image of Yume Yume receiving damage, electricity running through her bones through the hole, similar to (e13), is displayed. Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice, corresponding to Yume Yume receiving damage.

After that, as shown in Figure 77 (e16), an image of Yume Yume receiving damage, with electricity running through her and her bones becoming transparent, is displayed in the same manner as (e14). Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e16), the background music turns off, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice, corresponding to Yume Yume receiving damage. Then, as shown in (e17), the scene shifts to the scene before the win/loss determination, where Yume Yume's state of being damaged is displayed. In the scene before the win/loss determination of (e17), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white, corresponding to the scene before the win/loss determination. The silence in the scene before the win/loss determination makes it easy to understand that this is the scene where the win/loss determination branch occurs. If it is determined that a jackpot will occur in the SP first half reach B from the state of (e17), the display transitions to the effect of (f1). If it is determined that a loss will occur in the SP first half reach B from the state of (e17), the display transitions to the effect of (g1). If it is determined that the situation will develop from (e17) to the second half of the SP Reach, the situation will transition to (h1).

[Performance in the epilogue part (first half of the SP Reach B)]
The presentation of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 78 to 80. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume's victory over Boingo unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 78 (f1), in the winning epilogue part of Reach B in the first half of the SP, an image of Yume Yume hitting back the puck is displayed. Also, in the Yume Yume attack state (f1) where Yume Yume attacks by hitting back the puck, the subtitle "Go!" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Go!" is displayed. Also, in the Yume Yume attack state (f1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a brighter white than the white of (te17) which indicates the lighting mode of (e17), in response to Yume Yume attacking.

After that, as shown in Figure 78 (f2), an image of Boingo being blown away by Yume Yume's attack is displayed. As shown in (f2), when Boingo is being attacked, the subtitle "Wow!" corresponding to Boingo's line "Wow!" is displayed. Also, in the state of (f2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth) to indicate a jackpot. Also, in the state of (f2), background music for a win is output. After that, as shown in (f3), an image of a Yume Yume victory is displayed, with Yume Yume pumping her fist and Boingo falling down. As shown in (f3), when in the Yume Yume victory state, the subtitle "Easy win!" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Easy win!" is displayed. Also, in the state of (f3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth).

After that, as shown in (f4), a cartoon-style still image of the dream victory is displayed. In the still image state of (f4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth). Then, as shown in Figure 79 (f5), a symbol display effect is executed, in which the decorative symbol combination "222," indicating the jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (f5), the symbol "222" is enlarged and emphasized with a converging line. In the symbol display state of (f5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. Then, as shown in (f6), the symbol combination "222" is displayed at a smaller size than in the state of (f5). In the symbol display state of (f6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. Then, as shown in Figure 80 (f7), the symbol combination "222" is displayed at a normal size, further reduced from the state of (f6). When (f7) two symbols (normal size) are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 maintains its rainbow (smooth) illumination.

[Production mode in the failed epilogue part (first half of SP Reach B)]
The presentation of the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 81 and 82. The miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume's defeat by Boingo unfolds, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 81 (g1), in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B, an image is displayed of Yume Yume being blown away by Boingo's attack. As shown in (g1), in the state where Yume Yume is being blown away, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (te17), which indicates the lighting mode of (e17), corresponding to Yume Yume being blown away. Then, as shown in (g2), an image is displayed of Yume Yume being blown away further than in the state of (g1). As shown in (g2), in the state where Yume Yume is being blown away, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (te17), which indicates the lighting mode of (e17), corresponding to Yume Yume being blown away.

After that, as shown in Figure 81 (g3), an image is displayed of Yume Yume, who has been defeated by Boingo, kneeling in disappointment while Boingo smiles. As shown in (g3), in the disappointment state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tg1) and (tg2) which indicate the lighting modes of (g1) and (g2). After that, as shown in Figure 82 (g4), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (g4), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in Figure 82 (g5), the losing symbol combination "232" is displayed on the normal screen. When the normal screen of (g5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) which indicates the lighting mode of (a1).

[Performance in the role action part (later development)]
Referring to Figure 83, the presentation style in the reel action part (later development) will be explained.

As shown in Figure 83 (h1), when the SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B develops into one of the latter half SP reaches among SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, or SP strongest reach, the movable body 32 acting as the reel operates. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the reel falls while tilting diagonally from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in relation to the reel as it starts to fall. The effect image makes the Yume Yume character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern invisible. Also, in the (h1) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in accordance with the fall of the reel.

After that, in state (h2), the reel falls further from state (h1). In state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red as the reel falls. After that, in state (h3), the reel falls further to a position where the "P" character on the reel overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative pattern was displayed. In state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. From state (h3), an effect is executed in which the reel rises. If it has been determined that the reel will develop into SP Second Half Reach A after it rises, the effect shifts to (i1). If it has been determined that the reel will develop into SP Second Half Reach B after it rises, the effect shifts to (n1). If it has been determined that the reel will develop into SP Final Reach after it rises, the effect shifts to (r1).

[Performance in the provocative part (SP second half Reach A)]
With reference to Figures 84 to 96, the presentation of the hype part (SP latter half Reach A) will be described. The hype part (SP latter half Reach A) is a part in which a story unfolds in which the friendly characters Yume Yume and Jam chase the enemy character Bakuchu. In the hype part (SP latter half Reach A), a story unfolds in which if Yume Yume and Jam can catch Bakuchu, it will be a jackpot, but if Yume Yume and Jam cannot catch Bakuchu, it will be a loss.

As shown in Figure 84 (i1), during the promotional part in which SP Second Half Reach A is executed, the title corresponding to SP Second Half Reach A, "Catch Bakuchu!", is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the SP Second Half Reach that will be executed. When the title display (i1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit yellow. Then, as shown in (i2), an image of a confrontation between the ally characters Yume Yume and Jam (the characters on the left) and the enemy character Bakuchu is displayed in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state of (i2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up white on the left side where Yume Yume and Jam are displayed, corresponding to the two characters. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 lights up red on the right side where Bakuchu is displayed, corresponding to the Bakuchu character. Furthermore, when the image related to the title display (i2) disappears, background music corresponding to SP Second Half Reach A is output. After that, as shown in (i3), the subtitle "I won't let you get away!" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I won't let you get away!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes green to indicate that Yume Yume is speaking. Additionally, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up red to indicate that the Bakuchu character is speaking.

After that, as shown in Figure 85 (i4), on the screen where the characters are facing each other, the subtitle "I'll help too!" is displayed, corresponding to Jam's line "I'll help too!" In the confrontation state of (i4), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple, corresponding to Jam's line. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up red, corresponding to Bakuchu's character. After that, as shown in (i5), on the screen where the characters are facing each other, the subtitle "I'll run away again!" is displayed, corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I'll run away again!" In the confrontation state of (i5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes white, corresponding to the two characters, Yume Yume and Jam. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes red, corresponding to Bakuchu's line.

After that, as shown in Figure 85 (i6), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle "I'll catch you!" is displayed, corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I'll catch you!" In the Jam display state of (i6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, corresponding to Jam-chan speaking the line. After that, as shown in Figure 86 (i7), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle "Let's go!" is displayed, corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Let's go!" In the Yume-chan display state of (i7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume-chan speaking the line.

After that, as shown in Figure 86 (i8), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Come on!" is displayed, corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Come on!" In the Bakuchu display state of (i8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, corresponding to Bakuchu speaking. After that, as shown in (i9), when an image of Jam chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" is displayed, corresponding to Jam's line "Wait!" In the Jam chasing state of (i9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, corresponding to Jam speaking.

After that, as shown in Figure 87 (i10), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Jam-chan is displayed, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "tatatap," is output. Also, in the Bakuchu running away state of (i10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, corresponding to Bakuchu's escape. Then, as shown in Figure 87 (i11), the room background is displayed on the screen. In the room background state of (i11), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. Then, as shown in (i12), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu-chan on the right side of the screen is displayed. Also, as shown in (i12), on the screen chasing Jam, the subtitle "Wait!" is displayed, corresponding to Jam-chan's line, "Wait!". As shown in (i12), the physical sound of Jam-chan's footsteps, "Zzz zazzz," is output in time with the image of Jam-chan. Additionally, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "tatatatatap," is output in sync with the Bakuchu image. Also, in the Jam chasing state (i12), the left game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, corresponding to Jam-chan speaking. Also, the right game effect lamp 9 lights up red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in Figure 88 (i13), an image of Jam on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i13), the physical sound of Jam's footsteps, "Zzz zazzz," is output in sync with the image of Jam. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Ta ta ta tat," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Jam chasing state of (i13), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple, corresponding to Jam's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red, corresponding to Bakuchu's character. Then, as shown in (i14), an image of Jam jumping and pounceing on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i14), in the Jam jump state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times, corresponding to Jam's jumping.

After that, as shown in Figure 88 (i15), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i15), the onomatopoeic sound of Bakuchu jumping, "Pyoon," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu jumping. Also, in the Bakuchu jump state of (i15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice, corresponding to Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in Figure 89 (i16), an image of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu not being caught state of (i16), the subtitle "I can't catch it!" is displayed, corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I can't catch it!". Also, in sync with the image of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound of Jam-chan failing to catch it, "Screw!", is output. Also, in the (i16) state where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the left game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, corresponding to Jam-chan speaking. The right game effect lamp 9 lights up red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in Figure 89 (i17), when Yume Yume is displayed, the subtitle "Next is me!" is displayed, corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I'm next!". In the Yume Yume display state of (i17), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. After that, as shown in (i18), an image of Yume Yume chasing a Bakuchu is displayed. In the Bakuchu chasing state of (i18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume Yume taking action.

After that, as shown in Figure 90 (i19), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Yume Yume is displayed, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "tatatatatap," is output. Also, in the Bakuchu running away state of (i19), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, corresponding to Bakuchu's escape. Then, as shown in Figure 90 (i20), the room background is displayed on the screen. In the room background state of (i20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. Then, as shown in (i21), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i21), on the screen where Yume Yume is being chased, the subtitle "Wait!" is displayed, corresponding to Yume Yume's line, "Wait!". Also, as shown in (i21), the physical sound of Yume Yume's footsteps, "Zzz zazzz," is output in time with the image of Yume Yume. Additionally, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "tatatatatap," is output in sync with the Bakuchu image. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state (i21), the left game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the right game effect lamp 9 lights up red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in Figure 91 (i22), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i22), the physical sound of Yume Yume's footsteps, "Zzz zazzz," is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Ta ta ta tat," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (i22), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up green to correspond to Yume Yume's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up red to correspond to Bakuchu's character. Then, as shown in (i23), an image of Yume Yume jumping and pounceing on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i23), in the Yume Yume jumping state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times to correspond to Yume Yume jumping.

After that, as shown in Figure 91 (i24), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i24), the onomatopoeic sound of Bakuchu jumping, "Pyoon," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu jumping. Also, in the Bakuchu jump state of (i24), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice, corresponding to Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in Figure 92 (i25), an image of Yume-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu not being caught state of (i25), the subtitle "I can't catch it," corresponding to Yume-chan's line "I can't catch it," is displayed. Also, in sync with the image of Yume-chan failing to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound of Yume-chan failing to catch it, "Screw it," is output. Also, in the state (i25) where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the left game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the right game effect lamp 9 lights up red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in Figure 92 (i26), two allies, Yume Yume and Jam, are displayed. As shown in (i26), when the two allies are displayed, a subtitle "Two people next!" is displayed, corresponding to the two allies' lines "Two people next!". In the state of (i26) where two allies are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple, corresponding to Jam speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes green, corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. After that, as shown in (i27), Yume Yume is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, in the Yume Yume close-up state of (i27), the game effect lamp 9 lights up green, corresponding to Yume Yume's character.

After that, as shown in Figure 93 (i28), Jam-chan is displayed enlarged on the left side of the screen, and Yume-Yume-chan is displayed enlarged on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i28), when Yume-Yume and Jam-chan are up, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up purple, corresponding to Jam-chan's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up green, corresponding to Yume-Yume-chan's character. After that, as shown in (i29), an image is displayed of Yume-Yume-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i29), when the two are chasing each other, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up white, corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in Figure 30 (i30), images of Yume Yume and Jam on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen are displayed one after the other. In (i30), an image is displayed in which the two characters are closer to Bakuchu than in (i29). As shown in (i30), the physical sound of Yume Yume and Jam's footsteps, "Zzz zazzz," is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume and Jam. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Ta ta ta tat," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the state in (i30) in which the two characters are chasing each other, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white, corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in Figure 94 (i31), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (i31), on the Jam Up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up purple, corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Then, as shown in (i32), an image of Jam-chan jumping and pouncing on the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i32), Jam-chan's line "Wow!" is output on the Jam Jump screen. Also, in the Jam Jump state of (i32), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, corresponding to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in Figure 94 (i33), Yume Yume is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (i33), on the Yume Yume close-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up green, corresponding to Yume Yume's character. Then, as shown in Figure 95 (i34), an image of Yume Yume jumping and pounces on the explosive chocolate is displayed. As shown in (i35), Yume Yume's line "Wow!" is output on the Yume Yume Jump screen. Also, in the Yume Yume Jump state of (i34), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume Yume jumping. Then, as shown in (i35), an image of both Yume Yume and Jam jumping and pounces on the explosive chocolate is displayed. As shown in (i35), in the two-person jump state, the subtitle "Wait!" is displayed, corresponding to the two teammates' lines "Wait!". In the two-person jump state of (i35), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times, corresponding to the two people jumping.

After that, as shown in Figure 95 (i36), an image of Yume Yume and Jam jumping together is displayed as still image 1. In the two-person jumping state of (i36), the background music is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes white to indicate that the two are jumping. After that, as shown in Figure 96 (i37), an image of Yume Yume and Jam jumping together is displayed as still image 2. In the two-person jumping state of (i37), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white to indicate that the two are jumping. After that, as shown in (i38), an image of Yume Yume and Jam jumping together is displayed as still image 3. In the two-person jumping state of (i38), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white to indicate that the two are jumping.

After that, as shown in Figure 96 (i39), the scene shifts to one before the win/loss decision is made, where an image of Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 4. In the scene before the win/loss decision of (i39), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white, corresponding to the scene before the win/loss decision. The sound is muted in the scene before the win/loss decision, making it easy to understand that this is the scene where the win/loss decision will branch off. If it has been determined from the state of (i39) that a jackpot will be hit in the SP second half Reach A, the scene will transition to the effect of (j1). If it has been determined from the state of (i39) that a miss will be made in the SP second half Reach A, or that a rescue win will be made, the scene will transition to the effect of (k1).

[Performance in the epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
The presentation of the winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) will be described with reference to Figures 97 to 98. The winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 97 (j1), in the winning epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image is displayed of Yume Yume and Jam catching the tail of a Bakuchu with their hands. Also, in the Bakuchu catching state of (j1), the physical sound of Yume Yume and Jam catching a Bakuchu, "Bash!", is output in time with the image of Yume Yume and Jam catching a Bakuchu. Also, in the Bakuchu catching state of (j1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a brighter white than the white of (ti39) which indicates the lighting mode of (i39), in response to catching a Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in Figure 97 (j2), Yume Yume, who has caught the Bakuchu, makes a V sign, and an image of Jam riding on top of the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (j2), while the Bakuchu is being caught, the subtitle "Too bad!" is displayed, corresponding to Jam's line "Too bad!" Also, in the (j2) state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth) to indicate a jackpot. Also, in the (j2) state, background music for a win is output. After that, as shown in (j3), Yume Yume, who has caught the Bakuchu, makes a V sign, and an image of Jam riding on top of the Bakuchu is displayed as a comic-style still image. In the still image state of (j3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth).

After that, as shown in Figure 98 (j4), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222", indicating a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (j4), the symbol "222" is enlarged and highlighted with a converging line. In the symbol display state of (j4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. Then, as shown in (j5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed smaller than in the state of (j4). In the symbol display state of (j5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. Then, as shown in (j6), the symbol combination "222" is displayed at a normal size, even smaller than in the state of (j5). In the two-symbol (normal size) state of (j6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains its rainbow (smooth) illumination.

[Production mode in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
99 to 100, the presentation of the miss epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) will be described. The miss epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) is a part in which the story unfolds in which Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan fail to catch the Bakuchu, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 99 (k1), in the losing epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image is displayed in which Yume Yume and Jam fail to catch the Bakuchu. Also, in the (k1) state where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the onomatopoeic sound of "Sksk" is output in conjunction with the image of Yume Yume and Jam failing to catch the Bakuchu. Also, in the (k1) state where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (ti39), which indicates the lighting mode of (i39), in response to the failure to catch the Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in Figure 99 (k2), the Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (k2), the subtitle "Yeeeessss!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Yeeeeessss!" is displayed on the Bakuchu up screen. In the Bakuchu up state of (k2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color of (tk1) indicating the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in (k3), an image of Yume Yume and Jam, who were unable to catch the Bakuchu, kneeling in disappointment is displayed. In the disappointment state as shown in (k3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color of (tk1) indicating the lighting mode of (k1). After that, the screen goes dark as shown in Figure 100 (k4). In the screen black state of (k4), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in (k5), the losing symbol combination "232" is displayed on the normal screen. While the normal screen (k5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background pattern as (ta1), which indicates the lighting mode of (a1). If a rescue win has been determined from the (k5) state, the display transitions to (v1).

[Performance in the provocative part (SP second half Reach B)]
With reference to Figures 101 to 109, the presentation of the hype part (SP latter half reach B) will be described. The hype part (SP latter half reach B) is a part where a story unfolds in which friendly characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan face off against enemy character crab robots. In the hype part (SP latter half reach B), a story unfolds to hype up the fact that if Jam-chan and Nana-chan and the crab robot beat Boingo, it will be a jackpot, and if Jam-chan and Nana-chan lose to the crab robot, it will be a loss.

As shown in Figure 101 (n1), during the promotional part where SP Second Half Reach B is executed, a title corresponding to SP Second Half Reach B, "Shocking Robot Battle," is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the SP Second Half performance that will be executed. Below the title display, the expected probability of a jackpot in this reach is indicated by the number of stars. Note that this indication of the expected probability of a jackpot may also be displayed during other SP reaches. When the title display in (n1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit yellow. Then, as shown in (n2), an image of a confrontation between the ally characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan (the characters on the far left) and the enemy character, a crab robot, is displayed. As shown in (n2), on the screen where the characters are facing each other, a subtitle display "I won't lose!" corresponding to the line spoken by the two allies, "I won't lose!", is displayed. During the confrontation state in (n2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes white, corresponding to the two characters speaking. Additionally, the game effect lamp 9 on the right will light up red, corresponding to the crab character. Additionally, when the image related to the title display (n2) disappears, background music corresponding to the SP second half Reach B will be output.

After that, as shown in Figure 101 (n3), an image of a crab attack in which an enemy crab character shoots a beam is displayed. Also, in the crab attack state of (n3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice in response to the crab's attack. After that, as shown in Figure 102 (n4), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam is displayed. As shown in (n4), on the screen where the two characters are running away, the subtitle "Eeek!" is displayed, corresponding to the lines of the two allies saying "Eeek!" In the state where two characters are running away of (n4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times in response to the action of the two characters running away.

After that, as shown in Figure 102 (n5), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan escape into a depression in the rocks to escape the crab's beam. In the two-person jump state of (n5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. After that, as shown in (n6), an image is displayed in which a beam passes over the rocks. In the beam-passing state of (n6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. After that, as shown in Figure 103 (n7), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan look relieved in the shadow of the rocks. As shown in (n7), the subtitle "Haa haa" corresponding to Jam's line "Haa haa" is displayed on the screen in which the two are feeling relieved. In the confrontation state of (n7), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple, corresponding to Jam-chan speaking. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes pink, corresponding to Nana-chan's character.

After that, as shown in Figure 103 (n8), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (n8), the subtitle "It's your turn!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "It's your turn!" is displayed on the Jam-up screen. Also, in the Jam-up state of (n8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple corresponding to Jam-chan speaking the line. Then, as shown in (n9), an image is displayed of Jam-chan attacking the crab with the technique called Delta Break. Also, in the Jam attack state of (n9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple corresponding to Jam-chan uttering the line "Delta Break."

After that, as shown in Figure 104 (n10), an image is displayed in which the crab is damaged by Jam's attack. Also, in the crab attack state of (n10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, corresponding to the crab uttering the line "Grrr." Then, as shown in (n11), an image of a confrontation between Jam and Nana and the crab is displayed. In the confrontation state of (n11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up white, corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up red, corresponding to the crab character. Then, as shown in (n12), an image of a crab attack in which the enemy crab character fires a beam is displayed. Also, in the crab attack state of (n12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice, corresponding to the crab's attack.

After that, as shown in Figure 105 (n13), an image is displayed of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam. As shown in (n13), on the screen where the two are running away, the subtitle "Eeek!" is displayed, corresponding to the two allies' lines "Eeek!". In the state where the two are running away in (n13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times, corresponding to the two running away. After that, as shown in (n14), an image is displayed of the beam approaching Jam-chan and Nana-chan. In the beam state in (n14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. After that, as shown in (n15), an image is displayed of Jam-chan and Nana-chan being hit by the crab's beam and receiving damage. Furthermore, in the state where the two are receiving damage in (n15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times, corresponding to the damage that the two have received.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (n16), an image of the damaged Jam and Nana standing up is displayed. As shown in (n16), on the screen where the two characters are standing up, the subtitle "Now it's time!" is displayed, corresponding to the two allies' lines "Now it's time!". In the state where the two characters are standing up in (n16), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up purple, corresponding to Jam's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up pink, corresponding to Nana's character. After that, as shown in (n17), Nana is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, in the Nana up state in (n17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up pink, corresponding to Nana's character. After that, as shown in (n18), a screen is displayed in which Nana prays. Nana's prayer action is executed as an effect to confuse the enemy. Additionally, in the Nana Prayer state (n18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes pink in response to Nana's prayer action.

After that, as shown in Figure 107 (n19), an image of the crab becoming confused due to Nana's prayer is displayed. Also, in the crab confused state of (n19), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times in response to the crab's confused behavior. Then, as shown in (n20), an image of the crab becoming angry after recovering from confusion is displayed. In the crab angry state of (n20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up red in response to the crab character. Then, as shown in (n21), an image of the crab swinging its arms to attack is displayed. Also, in the crab attack state of (n21), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to the crab's attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (n22), an image is displayed of Nana being attacked by a crab and receiving damage. Also, in the state where Nana is receiving damage in (n22), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times, corresponding to Nana receiving damage. Then, as shown in (n23), an image is displayed of Jam holding and operating the remote control. As shown in (n23), the subtitle "Leave it to me!" corresponding to Jam's line "Leave it to me!" is displayed on the Jam remote control operation screen. Also, in the Jam remote control operation state in (n23), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, corresponding to Jam speaking. Then, as shown in (n24), an image is displayed of Jam about to press a button on the remote control. As shown in (n24), in the Jam remote control operation state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up purple, corresponding to Jam operating the remote control.

After that, as shown in Figure 109 (n25), a presentation of a hand coming out of the sky is executed. As shown in (n25), while the hand is coming out of the sky, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice. Then, as shown in (n26), an image of a hand reaching out from the sky and reaching out to grab a crab is displayed. As shown in (n26), while the hand is reaching out to grab the crab, the background music is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice. Then, as shown in (n27), the scene before the win/loss determination is displayed, displaying an enlarged image of the crab and hand. In the scene before the win/loss determination of (n27), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit white, corresponding to the scene before the win/loss determination. The silence in the scene before the win/loss determination makes it easy to understand that this is the scene where the win/loss determination branch occurs. If a jackpot has been determined in the SP second half Reach B from the (n27) state, the presentation transitions to the presentation of (o1). From the (n27) state, if it is determined that the SP's second half Reach B will result in a miss or a rescue win, the display will transition to (p1).

[Performance in the epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
The presentation of the winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 110 to 112. The winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) is a part in which the story of Jam-chan and Nana-chan's victory over the crab robot unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 110 (o1), in the winning epilogue part of the SP's second half, Reach B, an image is displayed of a hand reaching out from the sky to catch a crab. Also, as shown in (o1), on the screen where the crab is caught, a subtitle "I got you" is displayed, corresponding to the crab's line "I got you." Also, in the crab-catching state of (o1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a brighter white than the white of (tn27), which indicates the lighting mode of (n27), in response to the crab being caught. Then, as shown in (o2), an image of the caught crab set up as the store's signboard is displayed. Also, in the state of (o2) where the crab has become the store's signboard, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth) to indicate a jackpot. Also, in the state of (o2), background music for a win is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (o3), the screen changes to one in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed in front of a shop with a crab as its signboard. Also, as shown in (o3), the screen of the shop with a crab as its signboard displays the subtitle "Nice sign," corresponding to Jam-chan's line, "Nice sign." Also, in the state of the shop with a crab as its signboard in (o3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow (smooth) pattern. After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (o4), the screen continues to display Jam-chan and Nana-chan in front of the shop with a crab as its signboard. Also, as shown in (o4), the screen of the shop with a crab as its signboard displays the subtitle "Work hard," corresponding to Nana-chan's line, "Work hard." Also, in the state of the shop with a crab as its signboard in (o4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow (smooth) pattern. Then, as shown in (o5), an image of the shop with a crab as its signboard is displayed as a still image in a comic book style. In the still image state of (o5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (o6), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222," indicating a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (o6), the symbol "222" is enlarged and emphasized with a converging line. In the symbol display state of (o6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (o7), the symbol combination "222" is displayed at a smaller size than in the state of (o6). In the symbol display state of (o7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. Then, as shown in (o8), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than in the state of (o7) and displayed at normal size. In the two-symbol (normal size) state of (o8), the game effect lamp 9 maintains its rainbow (smooth) illumination.

[Production mode in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
The presentation of the miss epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 113 and 114. The miss epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) is a part in which the story unfolds in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are defeated by the crab robot, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 113 (p1), in the losing epilogue part of the SP's second half, Reach B, an image is displayed of a hand reaching out from the sky, failing to catch the crab. Also, in the crab-failed state of (p1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white that is darker than the white of (tn27), which indicates the lighting mode of (n27), corresponding to the failure to catch the crab. Then, as shown in (p2), an image of the crab escaping is displayed, showing the crab walking sideways. In the crab-escaping state of (p2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white that is darker than the white of (tp1), which indicates the lighting mode of (p1). Then, as shown in (p3), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who have been let go by the crab, looking down in disappointment is displayed. Also, as shown in (p3), on the disappointment screen, the subtitle "What a shame..." is displayed, corresponding to the lines of the two allies, "What a shame...". Also, as shown in (p3), in the "Unfortunate" state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white that is darker than the white of (tp1) that indicates the lighting mode of (p1).

Then, as shown in Figure 114 (p4), the screen goes dark. In the dark screen state of (p4), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. Then, as shown in (p5), the losing symbol combination "232" is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (p5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1), which indicates the lighting mode of (a1). If it is determined that a rescue win will occur from the state of (p5), the display will transition to the presentation of (v1).

[Performance in the provocative part (SP final reach)]
With reference to Figures 115 to 132, the presentation of the hype part (SP final reach) will be described. The hype part (SP final reach) is a part in which a story unfolds in which six friendly characters, Yume Yume, Jam, Nana, Maid A, Maid B, and AD, chase after the enemy character Bakuchu. In the hype part (SP final reach), a story unfolds in which the player is hyped to win if the six characters can catch Bakuchu, but lose if the six characters cannot. Furthermore, the hype part (SP final reach) is the reach with the highest expectation of a jackpot of all the reaches.

As shown in Figure 115 (r1), during the promotional part where the SP Final Reach is executed, a title corresponding to the SP Final Reach, "Catch Bakuchu with Six People!", is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the SP Final Reach performance that will be executed. When the title display (r1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit yellow. Then, as shown in (r2), an image of a confrontation between the six allied characters AD, Maid A, Maid B, Nana-chan, Jam-chan, and Yume-chan and the enemy character Bakuchu is displayed in the center of the screen. On the screen where the characters are facing each other, the line of the six allied characters, "This is the last," is output. Furthermore, during the confrontation state of (r2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes white, corresponding to the six characters speaking their lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character. Additionally, when the image related to the title display (r2) disappears, background music corresponding to the SP final reach will be output.

After that, as shown in Figure 115 (r3), Bakuchu's line "I'm running away again" is output on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (r3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white, corresponding to the six characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes red, corresponding to Bakuchu speaking. After that, as shown in Figure 116 (r4), when AD is displayed, the subtitle "Leave it to me!" corresponding to AD's line "Leave it to me!" is displayed. In the AD display state of (r4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes orange, corresponding to AD's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r5), when Maid A is displayed, the subtitle "Watch me!" corresponding to Maid A's line "Watch me!" is displayed. In the Maid A display state of (r5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes blue, corresponding to Maid A's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r6), when Maid B is displayed, the subtitle "I'll do my best" is displayed, corresponding to Maid B's line "I'll do my best." When Maid B is displayed as shown in (r6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes Hawaiian blue, corresponding to Maid B speaking the line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (r7), when Nana-chan is displayed, the subtitle "I'm going to catch you!" is displayed, corresponding to Nana-chan's line "I'm going to catch you!" In the Nana-chan display state of (r7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes pink, corresponding to Nana-chan's line. After that, as shown in (r8), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle "No problem!" is displayed, corresponding to Jam-chan's line "No problem!" In the Jam-chan display state of (r8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, corresponding to Jam-chan's line. After that, as shown in (r9), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle "Everybody's going!" is displayed, corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Let's go!" In the Yume-chan display state of (r9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume-chan's line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (r10), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Come on, anyone!" is displayed, corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Come on, anyone!" While Bakuchu is displayed as shown in (r10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, corresponding to Bakuchu speaking. After that, as shown in (r11), when an image of Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" is displayed, corresponding to Maid A's line "Wait!" While chasing Jam as shown in (r11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes blue, corresponding to Maid A speaking. After that, as shown in (r12), when an image of AD and Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait, wait!" is displayed, corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait, wait!" In the AD & Maid A chasing state (r12), the left game effect lamp 9 flashes orange to indicate that the AD character is speaking. The right game effect lamp 9 flashes blue to indicate that the maid A character is speaking.

After that, as shown in Figure 119 (r13), when an image of Bakuchuu escaping is displayed, the subtitle "Will you get caught?" is displayed, corresponding to Bakuchuu's line "Will you get caught?". In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchuu's footsteps, "tatatatatap," is output. In addition, in the Bakuchuu escaping state of (r13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, corresponding to Bakuchuu escaping. After that, as shown in (r14), an image of Bakuchuu escaping and running off the screen is displayed. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchuu's footsteps, "tatatatatap," is output. In addition, in the Bakuchuu escaping state of (r14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up red. After that, as shown in (r15), a city background is displayed on the screen. In the city background state of (r15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r16), when an image of Nana chasing a Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" corresponding to Nana's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the Nana chasing state of (r16), the game effect lamp 9 flashes pink to indicate that Nana is speaking. After that, as shown in (r17), when an image of Maid B and Nana chasing a Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait, wait!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait, wait!" is displayed. In the Maid B & Nana chasing state of (r17), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes Hawaiian blue to indicate that Maid B's character is speaking. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes pink to indicate that Nana's character is speaking.

After that, as shown in Figure 120 (r18), when an image of Bakuchuu escaping is displayed, the subtitle "Whoa!" corresponding to Bakuchuu's line "Whoa!" is displayed. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchuu's footsteps "tatatatatap" is output. Also, in the Bakuchuu escaping state of (r18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, corresponding to Bakuchuu escaping. After that, as shown in Figure 121 (r19), a city background is displayed on the screen. In the city background state of (r19), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (r20), when an image of Yume Yume chasing a Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the Yume Yume chasing state of (r20), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green to indicate that Yume Yume is speaking. After that, as shown in (r21), when an image of Yume Yume and Jam chasing a Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait, wait!" corresponding to the lines of the two allies "Wait, wait!" is displayed. In the Yume Yume & Jam chasing state of (r21), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple to indicate that Jam's character is speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes green to indicate that Yume Yume's character is speaking.

After that, as shown in Figure 122 (r22), a city background is displayed on the screen. In the city background state of (r22), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. After that, as shown in (r23), when an image of Bakuchuu escaping is displayed, the subtitle "Yay!" corresponding to Bakuchuu's line "Oh no!" is displayed. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchuu's footsteps, "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta-ta-ta-ta," is output. In addition, in the Bakuchuu escaping state of (r23), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red to indicate that Bakuchuu is escaping.

After that, as shown in Figure 122 (r24), in a scene where the AD character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange, corresponding to AD. After that, as shown in Figure 123 (r25), in a scene where AD performs a jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in orange. At this time, "Ahh!" is output as AD's audible dialogue, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r26), in a scene where maid A's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue, corresponding to maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), in a scene where maid A performs a jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in blue. At this time, "Too!" is output as maid A's audible dialogue, but no subtitles are displayed.

After that, as shown in Figure 124 (r28), when the character of maid B is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the Hawaiian blue color corresponding to maid B. After that, as shown in (r29), when maid B performs a jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in the Hawaiian blue color. At this time, the same line as maid A, "Too!", is output as maid B's audible dialogue, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r30), when Nana-chan's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink, corresponding to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in Figure 125 (r31), when Nana-chan performs a jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana-chan's audible dialogue, but no subtitles are displayed.

After that, as shown in Figure 125 (r32), in a scene where Jam's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple, corresponding to Jam. After that, as shown in (r33), in a scene where Jam performs a jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple. At this time, "Gotta get it!" is output as Jam's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in Figure 126 (r34), in a scene where Yume Yume's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green, corresponding to Yume Yume. After that, as shown in (r35), in a scene where Yume Yume performs a jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in green. At this time, "Gotta get it!" is output as Yume Yume's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed.

After that, as shown in Figure 126 (r36), an image showing a close-up of the faces of the six characters is displayed on the split screen. As shown in (r36), when the close-up image of the six allies is displayed, the subtitle "This is the last time!" is displayed, corresponding to the lines of the six allies "This is the last time!". Also, in the close-up state of six allies in (r36), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white, corresponding to the six characters speaking. After that, as shown in Figure 127 (r37), the close-up image of the six allies continues to be displayed. Also, in the close-up state of six allies in (r37), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

After that, as shown in Figure 127 (r38), Bakuchu is displayed against the backdrop of the city. Also, in the Bakuchu display state of (r38), the game effect lamp 9 lights up red to correspond to the Bakuchu character. Then, as shown in (r39), Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed. Also, as shown in (r39), when the Bakuchu up image is displayed, the subtitle "Yaaaah!!!" is displayed, corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Yaaaah!!!". Also, in the Bakuchu up state of (r39), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red to correspond to Bakuchu speaking.

After that, as shown in Figure 128 (r40), an image indicating the push button 31B and a time gauge are displayed with a converging line superimposed on the image of the explosive chu-up. Furthermore, in the explosive chu-up + button display state of (r40), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white. If the player then operates the button within the valid button operation period, a cut-in display of Nana-chan, Yume-chan, and Jam-chan, the three main characters of the pachinko gaming machine 1, appears on the screen as shown in (r41). A cut-in display is a presentation in which another image interrupts the displayed image. The color of the cut-in display can also indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, if the cut-in display is red, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than if it is green. Furthermore, in the cut-in state of (r41), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red or green depending on the color of the cut-in display.

After that, as shown in Figure 128 (r42), after the cut-in display ends, an image of six people jumping towards the explosive chocolate is displayed. Also, when the cut-in ends in (r42), the background music turns off and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. After that, as shown in Figure 129 (r43), when the screen displays six allies, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. After that, as shown in (r44), when the screen displays explosive chocolate, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r45), when the six allies are displayed larger than in (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. After that, as shown in Figure 130 (r46), when the explosive chocolate is displayed larger than in (r44), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

Afterwards, as shown in Figure 130 (r47), when the six allies are displayed larger than in (r45), the subtitle "We've got you cornered!" is displayed, corresponding to the six allies' line "We've got you cornered!". Also, in the state of (r47) where six allies are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white, corresponding to the six allies speaking their lines. Afterwards, as shown in (r48), the display of Bakuchu and the display of the six allies are displayed alternately. In the state of (r48), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49), an image is displayed in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathering in the center of the screen. As shown in (r49), a sound corresponding to an operation prompt is output to encourage the player to perform an operation in response to the trigger displays gathering in the center. Also, in the trigger display centered state of (r49), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r50), an image is displayed in which the trigger displays are gathering more in the center of the screen than in (r49). As shown in (r50), a sound corresponding to an operation prompt is output to encourage the player to perform an operation in response to the trigger displays gathering in the center. Also, in the trigger display centered state of (r50), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in Figure 131 (r51), an image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 1. At this time, the words "Pull!" are displayed superimposed on the image of the Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. When the pull indication (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output to encourage the player to operate the trigger. Additionally, when the pull indication (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, as shown in Figure 132 (r52), an image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 2. At this time, the words "Pull!" are displayed superimposed on the image of the Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. The time gauge is lower than it was in (r51). When the pull-out display (still image 2) of (r52) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, as shown in (r53), an image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 3. At this time, the words "Pull!" are displayed superimposed on the image of the Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. The time gauge is lower than it was in (r52). When the pull-out display (still image 3) of (r53) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, as shown in Figure 132 (r54), the scene advances to the pre-decision scene where an image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 4. At this time, the message "Draw!" is displayed superimposed on the image of the Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. The time gauge has decreased compared to (r53). When the "Draw" display (still image 4) is displayed as the pre-decision scene of (r54), a sound corresponding to the prompt to operate is output and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. If it has been determined that a jackpot will occur in the final SP reach from the (r54) state, the scene transitions to the (s1) presentation. If it has been determined that a loss will occur in the final SP reach from the (r54) state, or that a rescue win will occur, the scene transitions to the (u1) presentation.

[Performance in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach)]
The presentation of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) will be described with reference to Figures 133 to 136. The winning epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which the story of six people catching Bakuchu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

As shown in Figure 133 (s1), in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach, as shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in relation to the reel as it begins to fall. This effect image is more flashy than the effect image that appears when the game progresses to the latter half of the SP reach. In addition, this effect image makes the Bakuchu character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern invisible. In addition, in the (s1) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors in relation to the reel falling.

After that, in the state shown in Figure 133 (s2), the reel falls further from the state shown in (s1). In the state shown in (s2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors as the reel falls. Then, in the state shown in (s3), the reel falls further to a position where the "P" character on the reel overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative pattern was displayed. In the state shown in (s3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. A performance is executed in which the reel rises from the state shown in (s3). After that, as shown in Figure 134 (s4), after the reel rises, a scene is displayed in which Yume Yume catches a Bakuchu. Also, as shown in (s4), the subtitle "Uuu, I'm caught" is displayed, corresponding to the Bakuchu's line "Uuu, I'm caught." In the Bakuchu catching state shown in (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth). Additionally, in state (s4), background music for winning is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s5), an image of six people rejoicing after catching a Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s5), a subtitle display "Good job, everyone!" is displayed, corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Good job, everyone!". In the Bakuchu catching state of (s5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth). After that, as shown in (s6), an image of six people rejoicing after catching a Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s6), a subtitle display "Good job, everyone!" is displayed. In the Bakuchu catching state of (s6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth).

After that, as shown in Figure 135 (s7), a cartoon-style still image of six people celebrating after catching a Bakuchu is displayed. In the still image state of (s7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth). Then, as shown in (s8), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222," indicating a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (s8), the symbol "222" is enlarged and emphasized with a converging line. In the symbol display state of (s8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. Then, as shown in (s9), the symbol combination "222" is displayed at a smaller size than in the state of (s8). In the symbol display state of (s9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. Then, as shown in Figure 136 (s10), the symbol combination "222" is displayed at a normal size, further reduced from the state of (s9). In the (s10) two symbol (normal size) state, the game effect lamp 9 maintains its rainbow (smooth) illumination mode.

[Production mode in the failed epilogue part (SP final reach)]
The presentation of the miss epilogue part (SP final reach) will be described with reference to Figures 137 and 138. The miss epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which the story unfolds in which the six players fail to catch the Bakuchu, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 137 (u1), in the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach, an image of the Bakuchu running away is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu escaping state of (u1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white that is darker than the white of (tr54) indicating the lighting mode of (r54), corresponding to the failure to catch the Bakuchu. After that, as shown in (u2), an image is displayed of the Bakuchu running away far away and the six players who were unable to catch it feeling disappointed. Also, as shown in (u2), on the disappointment screen, the subtitle "Sorry..." is displayed, corresponding to the Bakuchu's line "Sorry...". As shown in (u2), in the disappointment state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white that is darker than the white of (tu1) indicating the lighting mode of (u1).

Then, as shown in Figure 137 (u3), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (u3), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. Then, as shown in Figure 138 (u4), the losing symbol combination "232" is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (u4) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) which indicates the lighting mode of (a1). If it is determined that a rescue win will occur from the state of (u4), the display will transition to the presentation of (v1).

[Performance in the rescue part]
The presentation of the rescue winning part will be explained with reference to Figures 139 to 140. The rescue winning part is a part where a story unfolds with rescue presentations that result in a big win after the unfolding of a losing story. In the rescue winning part, a premium character called Drum-kun, who corresponds to rescue (resurrection), appears, and who has not appeared in other reaches.

As shown in Figure 139 (v1), during the rescue win part, a rescue effect is executed in which a character called Drum-kun is displayed on the screen. The appearance of Drum-kun allows the player to recognize that it is a revival win disguised as a loss. During the rescue effect of (v1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a brighter red than (td4, tg5, tp5, tu4). After that, the screen goes white as shown in (v3). During the whiteout of (v2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

After that, as shown in Figure 140 (v3), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222", indicating a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (v3), the symbol "222" is enlarged and emphasized with a converging line. In the symbol display state of (v3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. After that, as shown in Figure 140 (v4), the symbol combination "222" is displayed at a smaller size than in the state of (v3). In the symbol display state of (v4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. After that, as shown in (v5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than in the state of (v4) and displayed at normal size. In the two-symbol (normal size) state of (v5), the game effect lamp 9 maintains its rainbow (smooth) illumination mode.

[Performance in the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation)]
The performance mode in the re-lottery part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation) will be described with reference to Figures 141 to 156. Figures 141 to 156 explain the flow of a series of performances from the detailed performance of the symbol display in the provocative performance to the button operation in the re-lottery performance.

As shown in Figure 141 (A1), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222", indicating a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (A1), in the two-symbol enlargement state, the "222" symbol is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the two-symbol enlargement state of (A1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. Then, as shown in (A2), the symbol combination "222" is displayed larger than in the state of (A1). In the two-symbol enlargement state of (A2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. Then, as shown in (A3), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a reduced size. In the two-symbol reduced state of (A3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white.

After that, as shown in Figure 142 (A4), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a further reduced size. In the two-symbol reduced state of (A4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. After that, as shown in (A5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the two-symbol normal size state of (A5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (A6), the background changes and the re-draw effect starts. In the (A6) state, a period of shaking occurs in which the symbol combination "222" shakes up and down. In (A6), a screen is displayed in which the symbols have risen from their normal position. In the two-symbol shaking state of (A6), the game effect lamp 9 goes out.

Here, the period during which the symbols are shaking is omitted from state (A5) to state (A6). Specifically, the symbols shake when they are normal size. Then, after they reach normal size, the symbol shaking for the re-lottery part continues. At this time, at a timing related to the completion of the symbol release (including, for example, the timing just before the symbol reaches normal size, the timing after the symbol reaches normal size, and the timing when the symbol shaking begins), the game effect lamp 9 switches from flashing white to smoothly lighting up in rainbow colors. This allows for smooth symbol release from symbol release to the re-lottery performance, a smooth transition to the shaking period, and a celebration for the symbols lining up to be executed by the illumination of the screen and lamp. After that, during the symbol shaking period of Figure 143 (A7), the screen displays the symbols lowered from their normal position. During the two-symbol shaking state of (A7), the game effect lamp 9 goes out.

After that, as shown in Figure 143 (A8), during the symbol fluctuation period, a screen with the symbol displayed in the center is displayed. As shown in (A8), in the two-symbol fluctuation state, the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in (A9), during the period when the movement due to the re-draw effect starts, the two symbols are displayed smaller than in the state of (A8). In the two-symbol reduced state of (A9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, as shown in Figure 144 (A10), the two symbols are further reduced from the state of (A9) and displayed. In the two-symbol reduced state of (A10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

Then, from Figure 144 (A11) to Figure 148 (A24), the numbers used as decorative symbols fluctuate rapidly, resulting in a display swap. When the display swap occurs, the decorative symbols that temporarily stopped are sequentially replaced with other symbols, resulting in the decorative symbols being switched one after another. For example, as shown in (A11), symbol 2 is displayed lightly during the rapid fluctuation. In the fluctuation state of (A11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Then, as shown in (A12), symbol 3 is displayed clearly during the rapid fluctuation. In the 3 symbol state of (A12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. From then on, from Figure 145 (A13) to Figure 148 (A23), the symbols fluctuate rapidly and alternate between lightly displayed and clearly displayed, such as symbol 3, symbol 4, symbol 5, symbol 6, symbol 7, and symbol 1. From Figure 145 (A13) to Figure 148 (A23), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

Then, the rapid fluctuation that began with symbol 2 completes one cycle, and symbol 2 is again clearly displayed in Figure 148 (A24). A button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed below symbol 2. Then, as shown in Figure 149 (A25), while symbol 2 is displayed faintly during the rapid fluctuation, the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed. From then on, from Figure 149 (A26) to Figure 156 (A46), the symbols alternate between faint and clearly displayed symbols, fluctuating rapidly: symbol 3, symbol 4, symbol 5, symbol 6, symbol 7, symbol 1, symbol 2, symbol 3, symbol 4, symbol 5, symbol 6, symbol 7, symbol 1, symbol 2, symbol 3, symbol 4, symbol 5, symbol 6, and symbol 6. Furthermore, the time gauge gradually decreases over time. From Figure 148 (A24) to Figure 156 (A46), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Then, when push button 31B is operated from state (A46), if it has been determined that an odd numbered symbol will be drawn, the display will transition to effect (B1). When push button 31B is operated from state (A46), if it has been determined that an even numbered symbol will be drawn, the display will transition to effect (C1).

[Performance in the re-draw part (odd number symbols are derived after button operation)]
The performance mode in the re-lottery part (deriving odd number symbols after button operation) will be described with reference to Figures 157 to 160. In Figures 157 to 160, the flow of a series of performances from when a button is operated in the re-lottery performance until an odd number symbol is derived will be described.

As shown in Figure 157 (B1), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "333", indicating a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (B1), in the three-symbol enlargement state, the background becomes brighter, the "333" symbol is enlarged, and the symbol is emphasized by a converging line. In the three-symbol enlargement state of (B1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. Then, as shown in (B2), the symbol combination "333" is displayed larger than in the state of (B1). In the three-symbol enlargement state of (B2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. Then, as shown in (B3), the symbol combination "333" is displayed in a reduced size. In the three-symbol reduced state of (B3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white.

After that, as shown in Figure 158 (B4), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed. In the three-symbol reduced state of (B4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. After that, as shown in (B5), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed at normal size. In the three-symbol normal size state of (B5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (B6), a period of swinging occurs in which the symbol combination "333" swings up and down. In (B6), a screen is displayed in which the symbols have risen from their normal positions. In the three-symbol swing state of (B6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes rainbow colors. After that, the background changes to the normal background as shown in Figure 159 (B7). The symbol swing period continues even in the normal background of (B7). In the normal background swing state of (B7), a screen is displayed in which the symbols have dropped downward from their normal positions. In the normal background sway state (B7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in Figure 159 (B8), the decorative symbol "333" is fixed and stopped. Also, during the symbol fixing period of (B8), the small symbol is also fixed and stopped at "333." During the symbol fixing period of (B8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. Then, as shown in (B9), the symbol fixing period continues. During the symbol fixing period of (B9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains its lit state of flashing rainbow colors. Then, during the fanfare period of Figure 160 (D1), the same screen as in (B9) is displayed. However, the state of the game effect lamp 9 turns off corresponding to the fanfare. Then, as shown in (D2), with a delay from the state of the game effect lamp 9, the screen switches to a screen displaying the word "FEVER" and Yume Yume-chan, indicating the fanfare state. Also, the state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time maintains its lit fanfare state.

[Performance in the re-draw part (deriving even number symbols after button operation)]
The performance mode in the re-lottery part (deriving an even number symbol after a button operation) will be described with reference to Figures 161 to 164. In Figures 161 to 164, the flow of a series of performances from when a button is operated in the re-lottery performance until an even number symbol is derived will be described.

As shown in Figure 161 (C1), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222", indicating a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (C1), in the two-symbol enlargement state, the background becomes brighter, the "222" symbol is enlarged, and the symbol is emphasized by a converging line. In the two-symbol enlargement state of (C1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. Then, as shown in (C2), the symbol combination "222" is displayed larger than in the state of (C1). In the two-symbol enlargement state of (C2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. Then, as shown in (C3), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a reduced size. In the two-symbol reduced state of (C3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white.

After that, as shown in Figure 162 (C4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the two-symbol reduced state of (C4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. After that, as shown in (C5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed at normal size. In the two-symbol normal size state of (C5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (C6), the background returns to the state of (A46), and a swinging period begins in which the symbol combination "222" swings up and down. In (C6), a screen is displayed in which the symbols have risen from their normal position. In the two-symbol swinging state of (C6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, the background changes to the normal background as shown in Figure 163 (C7). The swinging period continues even in the normal background of (C7). In the normal background sway state (C7), the screen displays the symbols moving downward from their normal position. In the normal background sway state (C7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in Figure 163 (C8), the decorative symbol "222" is fixed and stopped. Also, during the symbol fixing period of (C8), the small symbol is also fixed and stopped at "222." During the symbol fixing period of (C8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. Then, as shown in (C9), the symbol fixing period continues. During the symbol fixing period of (C9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains its smooth rainbow lighting. Then, during the fanfare period of Figure 164 (E1), the same screen as in (C9) is displayed. However, the state of the game effect lamp 9 turns off in response to the fanfare. Then, as shown in (E2), with a delay from the state of the game effect lamp 9, the screen switches to a screen displaying the word "FEVER" and Yume Yume-chan, indicating the fanfare state. Also, the state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time remains lit in the fanfare state.

<Description of Characteristic Parts in the Presentation Mode of the Pachinko Gaming Machine 1>
Next, the characteristics and modifications of the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described in detail.

(Start 5)
The shutter described above is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the effect being performed in the background invisible, and when opened after closing, makes the image of the effect being performed visible. The shutter is also executed at a timing related to the provocative part, that is, before the start of the provocative part. When the shutter is in the closing mode, the screen brightness is reduced as the area in which the effect is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is in the opening mode, the screen brightness is increased as the area in which the effect is visible becomes wider. This makes the closing and opening of the shutter appear more realistic, thereby making the flow of the effect appear more suitable. Note that, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the effect being performed in the background invisible or visible, an image other than a shutter may also be used, and a similar effect may be performed using a special device.

(Start 6)
The shutters described above are designed to close from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. This allows the effect of gradually changing screen brightness to be seen in an optimal manner. The shutters may also be designed to close from both sides of the screen toward the center, like sliding doors. The shutters may also be designed to close from the top edge of the screen toward the bottom edge of the screen.

(Start 7)
Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 58, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. This blurs the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is reduced and the edge of the shutter just before the shutter is fully closed, as shown in Fig. 58(a12), and eliminates the sense of incongruity. Similarly, this also eliminates the sense of incongruity when the shutter begins to open, as shown in Fig. 60(a16).

(Start 8)
60 and 61, the SP first half reach begins after the shutter opens. The SP first half reach effect does not begin until the shutter is fully open, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and the SP first half effect progresses after the shutter is opened. This prevents dissatisfaction by the SP first half reach effect being executed before the shutter opens, as it is an effect that players want to pay attention to.

(Start 10)
Furthermore, as shown in the above-mentioned Figure 57 (a9), the brightness of the screen is first reduced before the shutter starts to close, and the shutter is fully closed in time with the shutter's closing. Here, if the brightness of the screen were reduced in time with the shutter's closing, there is a risk that the speed at which the screen darkens would be too fast. Therefore, by starting to reduce the brightness of the screen in advance, the speed at which the screen darkens can be made appropriate, making the series of effects look good.

(Start 12)
Furthermore, until the shutter is opened, the player is not able to know which SP first half reach will start, which allows the player to have high expectations as to which effect will be executed.

(Start 13)
The shutter effect described above may be executed at a timing other than the timing of development into the first half of the SP. For example, it may be executed at the timing from the second re-fluctuation to the third re-fluctuation in the pseudo-consecutive. Furthermore, when the shutter closes and then opens, an icon image (e.g., a green hold image) indicating a change in the active hold, which is the hold display for that fluctuation, may be displayed, and the active hold may change in response to the icon image (e.g., from blue to green). Furthermore, the shutter effect may be executed at the timing of development from the first half of the SP reach to the second half of the SP reach. This can enhance the interest of the shutter effect.

(Start 15)
In addition to the pattern where the shutter closes and then automatically opens, a pattern may be provided in which a button image is displayed after the shutter closes, and the shutter opens when the button is operated. This provides multiple types of shutter effects, increasing the interest of the shutter effects.

(Teasing 1)
Furthermore, the aforementioned provocation part, which involves provoking whether the player will win or lose, is updated with the development of an alternating battle between friendly and enemy characters (for example, SP First Half Reach B and SP Second Half Reach B). The effects of such provocation parts include scenes in which friendly characters take damage. Furthermore, the effects of such provocation parts have a faster image switching interval and a greater number of image switching times than the epilogue part. This allows the provocation part to be presented in a more favorable light by developing the provocation part more quickly than the epilogue part.

(Teasing 2)
Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 63(b5) and the like, in the provocative part, the lines of the ally character are spoken first, and subtitles corresponding to those lines are displayed, which allows the ally character to be easily recognized in the provocative part.

(Teasing 3)
The subtitle display of the ally character that is displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period of time than the subtitle display in other scenes of the promotional part, thereby allowing the ally character to be clearly recognized.

(Teasing 4)
67(b17) and the like, there are scenes where subtitles are not displayed when an ally character speaks a line. This allows the screen display to be displayed more appropriately than if subtitles were displayed for all lines, while still displaying the subtitles of the ally character that is displayed first.

(Teasing 5)
Furthermore, in the aforementioned provocation part, there were SP First Half Reach A and SP First Half Reach B as the first provocation part executed in the first half, and SP Second Half Reach A, SP Second Half Reach B, and SP Final Reach as the second provocation part executed in the second half. Furthermore, there are scenes in which ally characters play an active role in both the first and second provocation parts. Furthermore, in either provocation part, the ally character's lines are spoken first, and subtitles corresponding to those lines are displayed. This allows the ally characters to be recognized in an appropriate manner in either provocation part.

(Teasing 6)
Furthermore, in the aforementioned hype part, in the hype part corresponding to the SP first half reach B, Yume Yume's character played an active role, and in the hype part corresponding to the SP second half reach B, Jam and Nana's characters played an active role. In the SP first half reach B, Yume Yume, the first ally character to play an active role, spoke lines, and subtitles corresponding to those lines were displayed. In the SP second half reach B, Jam and Nana, the first ally characters to play an active role, spoke lines, and subtitles corresponding to those lines were displayed. This allows the ally characters to be appropriately recognized in both hype parts. Note that the number of characters playing an active role may be one or more. Furthermore, the same character may play an active role in the first hype part and the second half hype part.

(Teasing 11)
Furthermore, as shown in (b5) and (b6) of Figure 63, there are scenes in which friendly and enemy characters are displayed and each character speaks a line. In such a situation, the subtitles for the lines are displayed in a fixed size and at a fixed position. This reduces the chance of bugs and other issues occurring by not changing the display format of the lines for each character.

(Teasing cut-in 2)
127 (r39) to 128 (r42), when a cut-in display is performed, the subtitle display is displayed before the button image promotion display is displayed. This allows the button image to continue to be shown to a player who is watching the screen and paying attention to the subtitle display, so that the button image is not overlooked, and the cut-in display can be performed appropriately.

(Teasing cut-in 3)
As shown in Figures 128 (r41) to 130 (r47) above, the cut-in display is designed so that there are no lines for a predetermined period of time after the cut-in display is over. Then, after the predetermined period of no lines has passed, lines are spoken and subtitles are displayed for those lines. This allows the player to concentrate on the presentation during the period after the cut-in display, resulting in an ideal cut-in display.

(True or False 1)
Also, as shown in the aforementioned Figure 132 (r54), the scene where the winning or losing was determined was between the teaser part and the epilogue part. Then, in the scene where the winning or losing was determined, the player was notified of whether or not they had won the jackpot after operating a trigger as an operating means. Also, in the scene where the winning or losing was determined, if a jackpot was reached, the device would move after operating the trigger. This increases the interest of the presentation by creating a scene where the winning or losing was determined in a favorable manner using the operating means.

(True or False 2)
As shown in Figures 130 (r47) to 132 (r54) above, subtitles are displayed by an ally character before the image corresponding to the operation means is displayed, and then the effect that was being performed becomes invisible on the screen corresponding to the operation means. The effect that was being performed after that then becomes recognizable along with the image of the operation means. This makes it possible to make an impact by displaying the introduction of the operation means on the entire screen, while at the same time displaying the effect that was being performed when the operation means becomes operable, making the progression of the effect look good.

(True or False 3)
130 (r48) to 131 (r51) described above, the presentation is ongoing even while the introductory images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation of the operating means are being displayed. By having the presentation proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image (image (r51)) in which the operating means can be operated, and also to draw attention to the development of the presentation.

(True or False 4)
Furthermore, in the aforementioned Figures 132 (r51) to 132 (r54), when a trigger image is displayed as a prompt, the tail of the Bakuchu image moves slightly with each image change. In this way, the performance may progress while the prompt is displayed. Here, the performance may progress not only by a tail movement, but also by scene changes or character movements. This allows the viewer to pay attention to the development of the performance during the prompt.

(True or False 5)
Furthermore, the effects that progress while the prompting display is displayed progress at a slower rate than the effects that were executed before the prompting display was displayed. This allows the player to focus on the prompting display that prompts the player to operate the operating means, and a balance can be achieved between the prompting display and the progress of the effects. Note that the speed of the effects that progress while the prompting display is displayed can be set to be slower than the speed of the effects that progress while the introductory image is displayed. This allows for a difference in the speed of the effects to progress while the prompting display is displayed and while the introductory image is displayed.

(True or False: 6)
It is also preferable to add echo to the lines spoken before the introductory image shown in Figure 130 (r47) is displayed, which can get the players excited before the introductory image is displayed.

(True or False 7)
130 (r47) to 131 (r49), the introduction image is displayed after the subtitles displayed before the introduction image are deleted, which prevents the introduction image and the subtitles from being displayed at the same time.

(True or false: 14)
Furthermore, from the aforementioned Figure 95 (i36) to Figure 96 (i39), the image displaying the two characters, Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan, is gradually enlarged, and at timing (i39), a single image is displayed still for a predetermined period. After that, if a jackpot is won, the video of the winning epilogue part is played, and if a loss occurs, the video of the losing epilogue part is played. During the period in which a single image is displayed still for a predetermined period, a single image can be reused, thereby reducing data volume and optimizing the winning/losing determination scene. Note that during the period in which the image displaying the two characters is gradually enlarged, more images (e.g., 10 images) may be used, as shown in Figure 95 (i36) to Figure 96 (i39).

(16 correct answers)
Additionally, from the aforementioned Figure 131 (r49) to Figure 132 (r54), there is a display period of an introductory image in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are displayed gathering in the center of the screen. After that, there is a period in which a prompt display for operating the trigger is displayed. During the prompt display period, multiple images are gradually moved to give the appearance of a character moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching point where the win/loss decision is made, if a jackpot is reached, a video of the win epilogue part is played, and if a loss occurs, a video of the loss epilogue part is played. Both of these periods are periods in which dynamic displays are displayed, making the images appear to be moving. This allows a series of presentations to be executed in a dynamic flow, resulting in a favorable presentation flow.

(True or False 18)
Next, we will explain the winning epilogue part and losing epilogue part after the scene where the result is determined as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 133 (s1) to 136 (s10) and Figures 137 (u1) to 138 (u4). In the winning epilogue part, the video corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the role-playing device. In the losing epilogue part, the screen goes dark after the performance corresponding to the losing epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. This allows for a flow of switching between multiple images after the scene where the result is determined, resulting in an ideal flow of performance.

(Epilogue 1)
The aforementioned winning epilogue part is a part that does not transition when a miss occurs, and is a part that includes scenes in which enemy characters are at a disadvantage and scenes in which ally characters are at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display changes in the presentation is less than in the teasing part. This allows appropriate presentation to be executed in each part, and the flow of the series of presentations can be displayed in an optimal manner.

(Epilogue 4)
As shown in the above-mentioned Figure 104 (n10), subtitles are not displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene in which the enemy character receives damage in the hype part. In contrast, as shown in Figure 110 (o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene in which the enemy character receives damage in the winning epilogue part (the scene where the enemy character catches a crab). In this way, subtitles that were not displayed in the hype part are displayed in the winning epilogue part, emphasizing the feeling of celebration.

(Epilogue 6)
As shown in (s5)-(s6) of FIG. 134, the subtitles displayed in the winning epilogue part are designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitles displayed in the teaser part. By displaying the subtitles in the final winning epilogue part for a longer period, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the big win and the sense of celebration can be emphasized. Note that subtitles with a larger number of characters may be displayed for a longer period than those with a smaller number. Even in such a case, if the winning epilogue part and the teaser part have the same number of subtitles (for example, five characters), the winning epilogue part should be designed to have a longer display period.

(Epilogue 15)
As shown in Figures 134 (s6) to 135 (s8) above, the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the pattern revealing effect is executed. This prevents the subtitle display from overlapping with the decorative pattern and from being mistaken for a message in the pattern revealing effect. This allows the effect in the winning epilogue part to be viewed optimally.

(Epilogue 17)
As shown in Figure 136 (s10) above, when the symbol display effect is complete and the player is able to recognize the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols and the characters and other images displayed as background are still images. This prevents the decorative symbols from becoming difficult to see due to the background being animated.

(Epilogue 18)
As shown in Figure 135 (s7) above, the video that was playing in the winning epilogue part becomes a still image just before the symbol revealing effect is executed. This prevents the symbols from becoming difficult to see from the timing when the symbol revealing effect starts.

(Epilogue 19)
As shown in Fig. 135 (s7) above, the still images displayed in the winning epilogue part have a special, comic-like appearance. By adding a special effect to the still image, it is possible to emphasize that the video has stopped and to suggest that the scene has changed, making it a suitable winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 21)
It is desirable not to apply a fade effect, which gradually erases the subtitle display, to the subtitle display before the pattern display shown in Figure 134 (s6) described above. However, a fade effect, which gradually erases the display, may be applied to the subtitle displays displayed at other times. This allows for an effective transition by applying a fade effect to all subtitle displays except the final one, and also prevents the final subtitle display from being covered by a decorative pattern by instantly erasing it, and from being mistaken for a message in the pattern display effect. Therefore, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be displayed in an optimal manner.

(Epilogue 22)
As shown in the aforementioned FIG. 136 (s10), when the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed. An effect image using concentrated lines is added to the decorative pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image, and is displayed in the foreground. This enhances the effect of the effect image for the decorative pattern, while allowing the player to recognize that the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, making it a suitable winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 23)
As shown in the aforementioned FIG. 136 (s10), both the decorative and small symbols are displayed during the symbol display performance. Here, the movement of the decorative and small symbols may be synchronized at the timing when the display of the decorative symbols ends. Specifically, during the symbol swing period when the decorative symbols are swinging up and down after the display of the decorative symbols ends, the small symbols may also swing up and down in the same manner as the decorative symbols. In this way, by synchronizing the movement of the decorative and small symbols, the flow of the performance in the winning epilogue part can be made to look good.

(Epilogue 24)
As shown in the above-mentioned Figures 157 (B1) to 158 (B5), when the symbols are displayed in the re-draw part, both decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed. An effect image using concentrated lines is added to the decorative symbols, but no effect image is added to the small symbols. Furthermore, the decorative symbols have higher priority than the decorative symbols and effect images, and are displayed in the foreground. This enhances the effect of the effect image for the decorative symbols, while allowing the player to recognize that the small symbols are being displayed in a variable manner.

(Epilogue 25)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the symbol is displayed, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol may be displayed in a state where the symbols are aligned. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-lottery part, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol may be changed again. This allows the decorative symbol and the small symbol to be synchronized for optimal display.

(Re-lottery effect 3)
As shown in FIG. 142 (A5) above, in the final state of the symbol display in the winning epilogue part, the decorative symbols are displayed swaying, and a concentrated line effect image is added. When the state switches to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the concentrated line effect image continues to be added. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 switches from a smooth rainbow light to an off state. In other words, from the symbol display to the re-lottery effect, the symbol swaying and effect mode continue, while the background and lamp are switched. This design makes it easy to understand which decorative symbol the re-lottery effect started from.

(Re-draw effect 6)
As shown in the flow of Figs. 144 (A10) to 156 (A46) and Figs. 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery effect, a symbol advance is performed using reduced-sized decorative symbols, and a button operation prompt is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, a symbol release effect is executed in which the symbols are enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative symbol that will ultimately be announced is enlarged and displayed from the moment the symbol is released. In this way, since the symbol that will ultimately be announced begins to expand, it is possible to clearly show the player what the final announcement symbol will be.

(Re-draw effect 16)
The aforementioned symbol display in the FIG. 141 (A1) to FIG. 142 (A5) portions and the symbol display in the FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C5) portions are executed using substantially the same images. Specifically, the same images are used for the symbol display and effect images of the "2" symbol, and the symbol display is executed in a manner in which the background portion is different. This allows the symbol display images to be substantially the same, making it easy to understand for the player that the symbol has not been promoted to a probability variable symbol. Note that the image of the symbol display portion, including the background, may be exactly the same.

(Re-draw effect 17)
In the aforementioned pattern display effect, a series of effects is executed in which the pattern is first enlarged and then returned to its normal size at the center of the screen. This allows the pattern display effect to be displayed in a favorable manner by enlarging and reducing the pattern.

(Re-draw effect 18)
In the aforementioned pattern display effects, common pattern display data may be used for the data of the pattern display effects in the winning epilogue part and the data of the pattern display effects in the re-lottery effect. Then, a series of pattern display effects may be executed using the common pattern display data and a combination of multiple decorative patterns. This makes it possible to reduce data capacity while making the pattern display effects look good. Note that substantially the same data may be used for the data of the pattern display effects in the winning epilogue part and the data of the pattern display effects in the re-lottery effect.

<Detailed explanation of the presentation mode>
Next, with reference to Figures 165 to 191, the following will explain in detail the characteristics and variations of the above-mentioned performance aspects that should be particularly mentioned.

[Regarding provocations 12, 13, and 15]
In Figure 165, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b11) to (b13))
Figure 165 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b11) to (b13) of the aforementioned SP first half Reach A. As shown in Figure 165 (b11), the relationship between Yume Yume and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Yume Yume is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right in the horizontal direction. In accordance with this character arrangement, the left frame lamp lights up green corresponding to Yume Yume, and the right frame lamp lights up red corresponding to Bakuchu. Also, in the (b11) state, Yume Yume's line "Wait~" is output as a spoken sound, Yume Yume's footsteps "Zzz zazz" are output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta ta ta ta ta" are output as a physical sound.

Also, as shown in (b11), the relationship between Yume Yume and Bakuchu on the screen is such that, in the front-to-back direction, Bakuchu is in front and Yume Yume is behind. From the player's perspective, their positions are such that Bakuchu is close by and Yume Yume is far away. In contrast, the relationship in volume is such that Yume Yume's line "Wait~" > Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatatap" > Yume Yume's footsteps "za za za". In this way, the volume data is set so that the line sound of Yume Yume, who is far away, is louder than the footsteps of Bakuchu, who is close by.

In Figure 165 (b12), the relationship between Yume Yume and Bakuchu on the screen is the same as in the state of (b11) in both the left-right and front-back directions. In (b12), no dialogue sounds are output, and the physical sounds of Yume Yume's footsteps, "buzz buzz," and Bakuchu's footsteps, "tatatatat," are output. The volume relationship is "Bakuchu's footsteps, "tatatatat," > Yume Yume's footsteps, "buzz buzz." In this way, when dialogue sounds are not output, the volume data is set so that the closer Bakuchu's footsteps are louder than the farther Yume Yume's footsteps, to match the front-to-back relationship on the screen.

In Figure 165 (b13), the relationship between Yume Yume and Bakuchu on the screen is such that, in the left-right direction, Yume Yume is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right. Also, in the state of (b13), Bakuchu's line "I won't get caught!" is output as a spoken sound, Yume Yume's footsteps "Zzz zazzz" are output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatatap" are output as a physical sound. Also, as shown in (b13), the relationship between Yume Yume and Bakuchu on the screen is such that, in the front-to-back direction, Yume Yume is in front and Bakuchu is behind. From the player's perspective, the positional relationship is such that Yume Yume is close and Bakuchu is far away. In contrast, the relationship in volume is such that Bakuchu's line sound "I won't get caught!" > Yume Yume's footsteps "Zzz zazzz" > Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatatap". In this way, the volume data is set so that Bakuchu's lines, which are far away, are louder than Yume-chan's footsteps, which are closer.

(Teasing 12)
In the hype part, the background music for the SP reach is output, and there are scenes where dialogue sounds and physical sounds (also called action sounds) are output at the same time. When dialogue sounds and physical sounds are output at the same time, the dialogue sounds are output at a louder volume than the physical sounds when output from speakers 8L and 8R. This makes it possible to make the presentation more realistic by outputting the physical sounds as part of the presentation, and to make the content of the presentation more easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds at a louder volume when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. As a result, the presentation in the hype part can be made to look better.

(Teasing 13)
Here, the process for actually creating various effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, images for each effect corresponding to variable times such as SP reach are created in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Sound effects such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue are added one by one using dedicated software to match the images. The completed images and sounds are played, and the volume of the sounds is further adjusted. In this series of processes, sound data is set so that, rather than outputting sounds with a realistic sense of distance based on the actual sense of distance in the images, realism is lost and sounds that ignore the actual sense of distance are output, which is more easily conveyed to the player. This allows the series of effects to be presented in an optimal manner.

(Teasing 15)
Furthermore, when the dialogue sound of a character who is perceived as far away from the player overlaps with a physical sound that is perceived as close to the player, the sound data is set so that the dialogue sound sounds louder than the physical sound. This discards realism and outputs sounds that ignore the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player, making it easier for the content of the presentation to be conveyed to the player.

[Regarding provocations 14 and 16]
In Figures 166 and 167, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Volume level explanation)
Figure 166 is a diagram for explaining volume levels. As shown in Figure 166 (A), the relationship between the volume levels of dialogue sounds, physical sounds (footsteps), and background music for SP reach among the sounds output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. The output volume levels have the relationship dialogue sounds > physical sounds (footsteps) > background music for SP reach. Furthermore, when these three sounds overlap, the way the sounds are output differs between dialogue sounds with subtitles and dialogue sounds without subtitles.

As shown in Figure 166 (B), in the case of dialogue sounds with subtitles, when the dialogue sounds (with subtitles) are output at a timing when they overlap with the physical sounds and BGM for the SP reach, the volume level of the BGM for the SP reach is controlled to be lowered. In contrast, as shown in Figure 166 (C), in the case of dialogue sounds without subtitles, when the dialogue sounds (without subtitles) are output at a timing when they overlap with the physical sounds and BGM for the SP reach, the volume level of either is controlled to be output without changing, while maintaining the relationship dialogue sounds > physical sounds (footsteps) > BGM for the SP reach.

(Teasing 14)
In this way, when the physical sound of a character and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, the dialogue sound is adjusted to be louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, the background music for the SP reach is adjusted to be quieter to match the output period of the dialogue sound, as shown in Figure 166 (B). In this way, the content of the presentation can be more easily conveyed to the player while creating a sense of reality.

(Teasing 16)
166(B) and (C), when the dialogue sounds overlapping with the physical sounds are subtitled and when the dialogue sounds overlapping with the physical sounds are not subtitled, the dialogue sounds with subtitles are adjusted to sound louder by the amount that the volume of the SP Reach BGM is lowered. The dialogue sounds with subtitles are more related to the content of the SP Reach than the dialogue sounds without subtitles. Therefore, by outputting the dialogue sounds with subtitles related to the content of the SP Reach louder, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation.

(Volume level explanation)
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining volume levels. A method for effectively outputting volume that is different from that of FIG. 166 will be described with reference to FIG. 167. The relationship between the output volume levels in FIG. 167 and FIG. 166 is the same: dialogue sounds > physical sounds (footsteps) > SP reach BGM. However, as shown in FIG. 167(B), when the character's physical sounds and dialogue sounds are output overlapping, the dialogue sounds are adjusted to be louder than the physical sounds.

(Teasing 16)
167(B) and (C), when there are subtitles for dialogue sounds overlapping with physical sounds, and when there are no subtitles for dialogue sounds overlapping with physical sounds, the volume is adjusted to be louder only when there are subtitles for dialogue sounds. This makes it easier for players to understand the content of the presentation by outputting the dialogue sounds with subtitles related to the content of the SP Reach louder.

[About provocations 7 and 8]
In Figures 168 to 170, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed diagram of (r24) to (r27))
FIG. 168 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r24) to (r27) portions of the aforementioned final reach. As shown in (r24), when the AD character is in a close-up position, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange, corresponding to the AD. Then, as shown in (r25), when the AD jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes orange. At this time, the AD's line of speech is "Ahhh!", but no subtitles are displayed. Then, as shown in (r25'), when the AD leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times.

After that, as shown in (r26), in a scene where Maid A's character is shown in close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue, corresponding to Maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), in a scene where Maid A performs a jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 flashes blue. At this time, "Too!" is output as Maid A's line of speech, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r27'), in a scene where Maid A leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times.

(Detailed diagram of (r28) to (r31))
FIG. 169 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r28) to (r31) portions of the aforementioned final reach. As shown in (r28), when the Maid B character is shown in close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the Hawaiian blue color corresponding to Maid B. Then, as shown in (r29), when Maid B jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue. At this time, the same line as Maid A, "Too!", is output as Maid B's line sound, but no subtitles are displayed. Then, as shown in (r29'), when Maid B leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times.

After that, as shown in (r30), in a scene where Nana's character is shown in close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink, corresponding to Nana. After that, as shown in (r31), in a scene where Nana jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's spoken line, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r31'), in a scene where Nana leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times.

(Detailed diagram of (r32) to (r35))
FIG. 170 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r32) to (r35) portions of the aforementioned final reach. As shown in (r32), when the Jam character is shown in close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple, corresponding to Jam. Then, as shown in (r32), when Jam jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple. At this time, Jam's voice, "Gotcha!", is output, but no subtitles are displayed. Then, as shown in (r32'), when Jam leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times.

After that, as shown in (r34), in a scene where Yume Yume's character is shown in close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green, corresponding to Yume Yume. After that, as shown in (r35), in a scene where Yume Yume performs a jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 flashes green. At this time, "Oraya!" is output as Yume Yume's line sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r35'), in a scene where Yume Yume leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times.

Here, in scenes such as r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35, the lines output are one-liners that sound motivated. In these specific scenes, the scene changes are faster than in other scenes. Also, in these specific scenes, the subtitles are not directly related to the story development compared to other scenes with subtitles. For these reasons, subtitles corresponding to the lines are not displayed.

(Teasing 7)
As shown in Figures 168 to 170, there are scenes in the promotional section where characters speak lines but no subtitles are displayed (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in these specific scenes, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. In this way, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can emphasize the effect even in scenes where no subtitles are displayed in response to the dialogue. This allows the effect corresponding to the character to be executed appropriately, making the promotional section more appealing to the player.

(Teasing 8)
168 to 170, in scenes in which characters appear (e.g., r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to light up in a color other than the color corresponding to the character in the previous scene. Specifically, before the scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), followed by an orange light corresponding to the AD character. Also, before the scene (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange (r25) or white (r25'), followed by a blue light corresponding to the Maid A character. Also, before the scene (r28), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in blue (r27) or white (r27'), followed by a Hawaiian blue light corresponding to the Maid B character. Furthermore, before the scene (r30), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in Hawaiian blue (r29) or white (r29'), followed by a pink light corresponding to the Nana-chan character. Before the scene (r32), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in pink (r31) or white (r31'), followed by a purple light corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Before the scene (r34), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple (r33) or white (r33'), followed by a green light corresponding to the Yume-chan character. In this way, before a character appears, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to light up in a color different from the color corresponding to the character, and then the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to light up in the color corresponding to the character. Therefore, the change in the displayed character and which character the changed character is can be clearly shown to the player by the lamp, making it a suitable part of the excitement.

[About Starts 1 to 4]
The characteristic parts of Figures 171 and 172 will be numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanation of the role-playing actions in (b18) to (i1))
Figure 171 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the operation of the reel in (b18) to (i1). In the scene before the win/loss determination shown in (b18), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white. Thereafter, when the SP progresses to the latter half of the reach stage, the movable body 32 of the reel operates. Specifically, the reel falls while tilting diagonally from the top of the screen to the front of the screen. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in response to the start of the reel's fall. The effect image obscures the Yume Yume character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern. Also, in the (h1) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red as the reel falls.

After that, in state (h2), the reel falls further so that the "P" of the reel characters overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative pattern was displayed. In state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Additionally, a reel-related sound corresponding to the reel's fall is output as a sound effect. After that, in state (h3), the reel's position is maintained at the position where it fell in state (h2). In state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, as shown in (h4), the reel starts to rise (the reel moves from the advanced position to the retracted position). In the (h4) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes yellow. When the state changes from (h3) to the retracting state (h4), the brightness data table output changes from the brightness data table for the reel operation part to the brightness data table for the SP second half reach A (teasing part). After that, in the (h5) state, the reel rises further. In the (h5) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes yellow.

Figure 172 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the reel operation in (b18) to (i1). After (h5), in state (h6), the reel rises further. In state (h6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes yellow. Then, as shown in (h7), the effect image displayed corresponding to the reel becomes lighter as the reel rises further. As the effect image becomes lighter (its transmittance increases), the background corresponding to SP second half reach A begins to become faintly visible. In state (h7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. In addition, a sound effect corresponding to the second half of the SP, which is background music corresponding to the SP second half reach, is output. Note that sound effects related to the title of the second half of the SP may be output along with the background music. Then, in state (h8), the reel rises further from state (h7). In state (h8), the effect image becomes lighter than in state (h7), making the background display easier to see. In state (h8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow.

After that, in the (h9) state, the reel rises further. In the (h9) state, the effect image is lighter than in the (h8) state, making the background display easier to see. In the (h9) state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the (h10) state, the reel rises further. In the (h10) state, the effect image is lighter than in the (h9) state, making the background display easier to see. In the (h10) state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the (i1) state, the effect image disappears and the title corresponding to the start scene of the SP second half Reach A is clearly displayed. In the (i1) state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

(Start 1)
As shown in Figures 171 and 172, when the reel operates, the effect switches from the SP first half reach A effect to the SP second half reach A effect. Furthermore, an effect image corresponding to the reel operation is displayed in accordance with the falling action of the reel. Thereafter, as the reel rises, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel operation to the screen corresponding to the SP second half reach A. Furthermore, as the reel rises, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table for the reel operation part (child table WD8 shown in Figure 202, which will be described later) to the brightness data table for the SP second half reach A (child table WD9 shown in Figures 204 and 205, which will be described later). Furthermore, as the reel rises, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP (for example, background music for the second half of the SP) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel operation is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look very aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP before the reel has completed its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be prevented from being spoiled. Also, since the brightness data table of the sound effects and game effect lamp 9 is switched to one corresponding to the latter half of the SP while the reel is returning to its initial position, the promotional part of the latter half of the SP can be displayed optimally.

(Start 2)
As shown in Figures 171 and 172, when the reel operates, the effect switches from the SP first half reach A effect to the SP second half reach A effect. Furthermore, before the reel operates, a reduced "2" symbol is displayed in the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the reel operates, the reel falls so that the "P" character of the reel is positioned so that it overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative symbol was displayed. Furthermore, as the reel falls, an effect image corresponding to the reel operation is displayed in a prioritized layer in front of the reduced "2" symbol. Then, after the reel rises from its drop position and the "2" symbol no longer overlaps with the reel, the effect image gradually fades, and the background corresponding to the SP second half reach A and the "2" symbol are faintly displayed. This prevents the display from becoming unsightly due to the reduced decorative symbol being displayed during the reel operation. Furthermore, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position where it is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be prevented from being spoiled. Furthermore, since a reduced decorative pattern is displayed during the reel's rise, it is possible to switch to a suitable effect according to the reel action.

(Start 3)
As shown in Fig. 171, the effect image is displayed before the reel moves and reaches the bottom of the falling position. This allows the reduced decorative pattern to be hidden early, allowing for a suitable change of performance involving the reel.

(Start 4)
In addition, an image related to the reel may be displayed when switching from the effect image to the image of the performance that develops in the latter half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to (h7) to (h10) of FIG. 172, when the reel rises, the word "POWERFUL II" or images of the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan may be displayed. In this way, by linking the performance when switching, it is possible to present a suitable performance change involving the reel.

[Regarding Epilogues 7, 8, 10-14, and 20]
In Figures 173 and 174, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanation of the role-playing actions in (r54) to (s4))
Figure 173 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the reel operation in (r54) to (s4). In the scene before the win/loss determination in (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. At this time, the Bakuchu character and an operation image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are displayed on the screen. A time gauge is also displayed below the operation image as an operation prompt to prompt the player to operate the reel. The movable body 32, which serves as the reel, operates when the player pulls the stick controller 31A within a predetermined period of time, or when the predetermined period of time has elapsed. Specifically, the reel falls while tilting diagonally from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen. Here, the time the reel falls during the win/loss notification scene is longer than the time the reel falls during the scene leading to the latter half of the SP.

As shown in (s1), as the reel starts to fall, a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in relation to the reel. This effect image is more flashy than the effect image that appears when the reel progresses to the latter half of the SP reach. Specifically, the effect image in the win/loss notification scene, such as (s1), is rainbow-colored. Note that the effect image in the scene that progresses to the latter half of the SP is blue or red. Furthermore, the effect image makes the Bakuchu character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern invisible. Furthermore, in the (s1) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors as the reel falls.

After that, in state (s2), the reel falls so that the letter "P" of the reel overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative pattern was displayed. In state (s2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, in state (s3), the reel remains in the position where it fell in state (s2). In state (s3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in (s3-2), the reel starts to rise (the reel moves from the advanced position to the retracted position). In the (s3-2) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. When the state changes from (s3) to the retracting state (s3-2), the brightness data table output changes from the brightness data table for the reel operation in the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part. After that, in the (s3-3) state, the reel rises further. In the (s3-3) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white.

Figure 174 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the reel operation from (r54) to (s4). After (s3-3), in the (s3-4) state, the reel rises further. In the (s3-4) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. Then, as shown in (s3-5), as the reel rises further, the effect image displayed corresponding to the reel fades. As the effect image fades (its transparency increases), the background corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach begins to become faintly visible. In the (s3-5) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. In addition, a winning epilogue part corresponding sound, which is the background music corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, is output as a sound effect. Then, in the (s3-6) state, the reel rises further from the (s3-5) state. In the (s3-6) state, the effect image becomes fainter than in the (s3-5) state, making the background display easier to see. In state (s3-6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white.

After that, in state (s3-7), the reel rises even further. In state (s3-7), the effect image is lighter than in state (s3-6), making the background display easier to see. In state (s3-7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. After that, in state (s3-8), the reel rises even further. In state (s3-8), the effect image is lighter than in state (s3-7), making the background display easier to see. In state (s3-8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. After that, in state (s4), a scene is displayed in which Yume Yume catches Bakuchu. At this time, a sound effect indicating a successful performance is output. In addition, subtitles are displayed along with Bakuchu's line, "Ugh, I've got it." In state (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

(Epilogue 7)
As shown in Figures 173 and 174, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed as the reel falls. After that, the reel moves to its initial position according to a predetermined retreat pattern. As the reel rises, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to a screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position where it is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented from being impaired.

(Epilogue 8)
It is assumed that the reel will perform an action to return to its initial position, and the timing for switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue will be the timing during the ascent related to the timing of the start of the return action. In this way, since the display corresponding to the epilogue is switched to at a timing related to the start of the return action, the display of the effect image corresponding to the reel action ends before the reel returns to its initial position. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the effect image is displayed when the reel returns to its initial position, and does not impair the aesthetic appearance of the presentation. Note that the timing for switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same as the timing when the reel starts to rise. Furthermore, the reel may be configured to perform a rotational action or a movement action at the falling position.

(Epilogue 10)
The device may be configured to output background music corresponding to the epilogue part in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part can be indicated by the background music, allowing the epilogue part to start in an appropriate manner.

(Epilogue 11)
A sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part can be indicated by the sound effect, allowing the epilogue part to start in an appropriate manner.

(Epilogue 12)
The device may be configured to return to its initial position and start displaying the epilogue, and in conjunction with this, background music and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output. By indicating the start of the epilogue part with the background music and sound effects, the epilogue part can be started in an appropriate manner.

(Epilogue 13)
When the reel returns to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and when the epilogue display is performed after the reel returns to its initial position, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitles are displayed. This avoids displaying the subtitles at a time when they are difficult to see, and allows the epilogue part to be executed optimally.

(Epilogue 14)
When the prop returns to its initial position, the dialogue sound is output and subtitles are displayed in the epilogue display. This allows the dialogue to be clearly recognized, and the epilogue part can be executed appropriately.

(Epilogue 20)
As shown in Figures 173 and 174, the performance mode switches from the scene before the win/loss determination in the provocation part to the winning epilogue part as the reel moves. Furthermore, an effect image corresponding to the reel's movement is displayed as the reel falls. Then, as the reel rises, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel's movement to a screen corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach. Also, as the reel rises, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the reel's movement to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, as the reel rises, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Furthermore, during the background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part, which is displayed from (s3-5) to (s3-8) until the reel returns to its initial position, no dialogue sound is output. Then, when the reel's movement to its initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is finished (s4), a dialogue sound is output and subtitles are displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented from being impaired. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the reel is rising, the winning epilogue part can be displayed optimally. Furthermore, by displaying the subtitles after the reel completes its return to its initial position, the winning epilogue part can be displayed optimally.

[About Epilogues 2, 3, and 5]
In FIG. 175, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Relationship between number of subtitles and number of lines)
FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. FIG. 175 shows the number of lines of the character during the performance and the number of subtitles corresponding to the lines for each type of SP reach and the type of epilogue corresponding to each SP reach. For example, in the case of SP first half reach A, there are 8 lines and 5 subtitles. Also, in the case of a winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle. In the case of a losing epilogue part of SP first half reach A, there are no lines and therefore no subtitles.

Also, in the case of SP first half reach B, there are 5 lines and 3 subtitles. Also, in the case of the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B, there are 3 lines and 3 subtitles. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP first half reach B, there are no lines and therefore no subtitles. Also, in the case of SP second half reach A, there are 16 lines and 14 subtitles. Also, in the case of the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach A, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle.

Also, in the case of SP second half reach B, there are 9 lines and 7 subtitles. Also, in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B, there are 3 lines and 3 subtitles. In the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach B, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle. Also, in the case of SP final reach, there are 27 lines and 19 subtitles. Also, in the winning epilogue part of SP final reach, there are 2 lines and 2 subtitles. In the losing epilogue part of SP final reach, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle.

(Epilogue 2)
As shown in FIG. 175, the proportion of subtitles displayed for character dialogue in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in the SP reach part, which is the hype part. By clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying. Furthermore, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can enhance the sense of celebration. Furthermore, since the hype part has more screen changes than the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time may be shorter, which prevents the presentation from being interrupted by auxiliary subtitles. Instead, the primary focus can be on conveying the presentation through image changes. This allows for optimal presentation in the hype part.

(Epilogue 3)
As shown in Figure 175, in the epilogue part, subtitles are always displayed for the dialogue. This makes it possible to emphasize the feeling of celebration by clearly showing what the characters are saying in the epilogue part.

(Epilogue 5)
As shown in Figure 175, there are several types of SP Reach, which is the provocative part, each with a different development of the presentation and number of lines. However, regardless of the SP Reach, the proportion of subtitles displayed for the character's lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for the character during the SP Reach. Therefore, regardless of which SP Reach is executed, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Furthermore, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can enhance the sense of celebration. Furthermore, since the provocative part has more screen changes than the epilogue part, the primary focus is on conveying the presentation through image changes, and auxiliary subtitle display can prevent the presentation from being disrupted. This allows for optimal presentation in the provocative part.

[Regarding re-draw performances 1, 4, 5, 7-18]
In Figures 176 and 177, the characteristic parts of the re-lottery part are numbered and explained.

(Details of the re-draw part)
Fig. 176 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (A1) to (A23) portions in the re-lottery part, and Fig. 177 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (A24) to (A46) portions in the re-lottery part.

When the jackpot display result is derived, the symbols are enlarged as shown in (A1) and (A2), then reduced as shown in (A3) and (A4). Then, as shown in (A5), the symbols return to their normal size. Then, as shown in (A6), the background switches to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect begins. The period during which the symbols oscillate is omitted from the transition from state (A5) to state (A6). Specifically, the symbols oscillate when they are normal size. After they return to normal size, the re-lottery part of the image oscillates. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 switches from flashing white to a smooth rainbow-colored illumination at a timing related to the completion of the symbol display (e.g., just before the symbol becomes normal size, after the symbol becomes normal size, and when the symbol oscillates). This allows for smooth symbol display from the symbol display to the re-lottery effect, a smooth transition to the oscillating period, and a celebration of the symbol alignment to be realized through the illumination of the screen and lamp.

After that, there is a period of fluctuation in which the symbols fluctuate up and down, as shown in (A7) and (A8). Then, as shown in (A9) and (A10), the "2" symbol located in the center is temporarily reduced in size. After that, from (A11) to (A23), the symbols fluctuate at high speed, with all of the "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "7," and "1" used as decorative symbols being displayed. After that, from (A10') to (A23'), the symbols fluctuate at high speed again, with all of the "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "7," and "1" used as decorative symbols being displayed.

After that, as shown in (A24), after all the decorations have completed two cycles, the button image is faintly displayed along with the initially displayed "2" symbol. From (A25) through (A46), the decoration symbols then rapidly change from "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "7," and "1," while the time gauge displayed below the button image decreases as time passes. The time gauge indicates the valid period for button operation. If push button 31B is operated within the valid operation period, or if push button 31B is not operated within the valid operation period and the valid button operation period ends, odd or even symbols are derived and displayed, as shown in Figures 157 through 164, and the game transitions to a jackpot.

(Re-lottery performance 1)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery effect is started using the "2" symbol as is. When the re-extraction effect starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-lottery effect starts changing from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol advance effect is executed in which the symbols are replaced by rapid changes starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed, and when the re-lottery effect starts, the symbol advance effect is executed using the symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed, so it is easy for the player to understand which decorative symbol the re-lottery started from. As a result, the flow of the series of effects can be clearly seen.

(Re-draw effect 4)
When the symbol transfer effect in the re-lottery effect starts, the decorative symbol that has been displayed since the winning epilogue part starts to change from a reduced state. This makes it possible to clearly show the flow of the series of effects without executing a process to change to a different decorative symbol.

(Re-draw effect 5)
In the symbol advance effect, the movement starts with a reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol during movement is a uniform reduced size. This makes the movement during the symbol advance effect look smoother, and the flow of the series of effects can be seen clearly.

(Re-draw effect 7)
As shown in FIG. 176 , in the re-lottery effect, the “2” symbol, which was temporarily displayed as a temporary stop before the re-lottery, is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery effect is initiated using the “2” symbol. When the re-extraction effect begins, the “2” symbol is reduced, and the re-lottery effect begins to change from the reduced “2” symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol advance effect is executed in which the symbols are swapped by rapid change starting from the “2” symbol. During the re-lottery effect, all decorative symbols are advanced in order: “2,” “3,” “4,” “5,” “6,” “7,” and “1,” and then the symbol advance effect is executed in which the “2” symbol is displayed again. In this way, the re-lottery effect is initiated using the decorative symbol that was temporarily displayed as a temporary stop, and after multiple types of decorative symbols are changed, the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily displayed as a temporary stop is displayed again. This allows the flow of the series of effects to be clearly seen by the symbol advance effect, which shows all decorative symbols without immediately displaying the final display result.

(Re-draw effect 8)
In the symbol transfer effect in the re-lottery effect, all the decorative symbols are transferred in order: "2,""3,""4,""5,""6,""7," and "1," and then all the decorative symbols are transferred again in order: "2,""3,""4,""5,""6,""7," and "1." In this way, the numbers of the decorative symbols are transferred in order, which allows the flow of the series of effects to be clearly seen.

(Re-draw effect 9)
In the symbol-sending effect in the re-draw effect, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbol when it was temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during the change. Specifically, the symbols are switched as follows: a "2" symbol with a transparency of 0%, a "2" symbol with a transparency of 50%, a "3" symbol with a transparency of 0%, a "3" symbol with a transparency of 50%, a "4" symbol with a transparency of 0%, and a "4" symbol with a transparency of 50%. This allows all symbols to be displayed precisely with low transparency during the symbol-sending effect, so that it is possible to grasp what symbol is being sent.

(Re-draw effect 10)
In the symbol-transfer effect in the re-lottery effect, all decorative symbols are transmitted in order: "2,""3,""4,""5,""6,""7," and "1," but the time that each symbol is displayed is the same. This allows all symbols to be displayed for a fixed period of time, making the flow of the series of effects look good.

(Re-draw effect 11)
During the symbol advance effect, a promotional display formed of a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotional display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position where the change in the decorative symbol during the symbol advance effect is displayed. In this way, the promotional display does not overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol advance effect, making it easier for the player to see the symbol advance. Note that a part of the promotional display may overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol advance effect.

(Re-draw effect 12)
As shown in Figures 176 and 177, the promotional image begins to be displayed at (A24) and (A25) after all decorative symbols in the symbol advance effect have been displayed twice. In this way, the promotional image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol advance pattern has been repeated twice, allowing the player to clearly recognize the symbol advance effect.

(Re-draw effect 13)
Note that the symbol at the start of the re-draw effect may be other than the symbol 2. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image is displayed as the action prompt is constant. For example, in the case of the symbol 2, the timing at which the action prompt is displayed is the timing at which the symbol 2 is displayed again. Similarly, in the case of the symbol 5, the timing at which the action prompt is displayed may be the timing at which the symbol 5 is displayed again. In other words, regardless of the symbol at which the re-draw effect is started, the number of symbols sent is the same. This allows for constant control, thereby reducing the processing load.

(Re-draw effect 14)
In the lottery presentation, there are provided patterns in which an even number symbol (e.g., symbol 2) is displayed followed by an even number symbol (e.g., symbol 2), and patterns in which an even number symbol (e.g., symbol 2) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., symbol 3). In addition to these, there may be provided a pattern in which an odd number symbol (e.g., symbol 7) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., symbol 7). In presentations in which symbols are transferred from odd number symbols to odd number symbols, it is sufficient that the same odd number symbols are transferred in all symbol transfers. However, regardless of the pattern, the duration of the symbol transfer period in the re-lottery presentation can be designed to be the same. This allows for a suitable re-lottery presentation in either pattern without increasing data capacity.

(Re-draw effect 15)
In the lottery presentation, common data is used regardless of whether the pattern is to display an even number symbol (e.g., 2) followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2), an even number symbol (e.g., 2) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3), or an odd number symbol (e.g., 7) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7). In other words, the presentation data is the same, and the decorative symbol data is changed depending on the pattern. This eliminates the need for dedicated patterns, thereby reducing the amount of data.

[About provocations 21-27]
In Figures 178 to 181, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Fade effect)
Figure 178 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b4) to (b6) in the provocative part and a comparison diagram during the jackpot round. In the provocative part, a fade effect is applied to the subtitles for the dialogue. The fade effect is an effect consisting of a fade-in, in which the display gradually becomes clearer, and a fade-out, in which the display gradually disappears. Figure 178 (A) explains some of the effects with a fade effect in the provocative part, the first half of the SP, Reach A.

In the (b4) state, a screen is displayed in which Yume Yume and Bakuchu are facing each other. After that, as shown in (b4'), the subtitle "I found you" corresponding to Yume Yume's line is displayed with a transparency of 70%. After that, as shown in (b5), the subtitle "I found you" corresponding to Yume Yume's line is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, a fade-in effect is applied when the subtitle corresponding to the line is displayed. Note that in the (b4') state, the sound of the line "I found you" is not output, and the sound of the line is output when the subtitle transparency is 0%, as in the (b5) state.

After that, as shown in (b5'), the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's line is displayed with a fade-in effect at a 70% transparency level in a layer below the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yume Yume's line with a 0% transparency level. After that, as shown in (b5"), the subtitles "I found it" and "I found it" are both displayed with a 40% transparency level. After that, as shown in (b6), the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's line is displayed with a 0% transparency level. In this way, the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yume Yume's line gradually fades out from (b5') to (b6). In contrast, the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's line gradually fades in from (b5') to (b6). Note that in the states of (b5') and (b5"), the sound of the line "I found it" is not output, but is output when the subtitle transparency is 0%, as in the state of (b6).

As shown in Figure 178 (B), during the jackpot round, an effect is executed in which the characters sing along with the music. For example, in Figure 178 (B), subtitles (lyrics) are displayed in time with the song sung by Nana-chan, saying "I'm sure I'll get it someday." Immediately afterwards, subtitles (lyrics) are displayed in time with the song, saying "I'll grab it with these little hands." When subtitles (lyrics) like this are displayed consecutively during the jackpot round, no fade effect is applied. This is because, while the music is playing, the progression of the music can be understood from the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without a fade effect, it is easy to understand the timing of the switch.

(Teasing 21)
In the provocative part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed in response to the character's lines. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the display period of the first subtitle, which is displayed first, and the display period of the second subtitle, which is displayed next, overlap. When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap, a fade effect is applied. The fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters to differ. This makes it easy to see the change in subtitles even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, thereby making it easy to see the change in subtitles.

(Teasing 22)
As shown in Figure 178 (A), in a scene where characters are confronting each other, a first subtitle corresponding to the lines of one character may be displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to the lines of another character. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 70% and overlaps the first subtitle displayed with a transparency of 0%. The first subtitle then fades out, and the second subtitle fades in with a transparency of 0%. This makes it easy to see the transition between subtitles, even when the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, due to the fade effect.

(Variations of subtitle display)
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed at the same time, the fade effect may be applied to only one of the subtitles rather than to both of them. Specifically, a pattern in which the fade effect is not applied to the first subtitle display but is applied to the second subtitle display, or a pattern in which the fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display but is not applied to the second subtitle display, may be considered. Either of these patterns may be applied by replacing the pattern in which the fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and the fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display. Furthermore, when the fade effect is applied, the second subtitle display may be superimposed on the first subtitle display, or the second subtitle display may be superimposed below the first subtitle display.

Also, in the case where the timing of subtitle display overlaps, we have explained subtitles for the lines of a first character and a second character. However, when the same character speaks consecutive lines, the subtitle display for the first line may be overlapped with the subtitle display for the second line. In such cases, a fade effect may be applied to the subtitle display.

(Teasing 24)
As shown in Figure 178 (B), during a jackpot round, a character sings along with the music. Subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as the song progresses. However, during a jackpot round, even if the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously, a fade effect is not applied. This is because, since the progression of the music can be understood by the rhythm while the music is playing, the timing of the change in subtitles (lyrics) is easy to understand even if the fade effect is not applied. Furthermore, since the music during a jackpot round is a representative piece of content installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the next lyrics to be displayed are easy for the player to understand even without the fade effect. This allows the task of applying a fade effect to be omitted during a jackpot round, thereby improving the overall visual appeal of the series of effects.

(Relationship between subtitle transparency and sound output)
Figure 179 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transparency of subtitles for dialogue and sound output. Figure 179 shows the situation when Yume Yume's line "I found it" and Bakuchu's line "I found it" in Figure 178(A) are uttered. In Figure 179, the horizontal axis of the graph represents the number of frames. The subtitle "I found it" is displayed at a transparency of 70% one frame after changing from a transparency of 100%. Then, one frame after that, it is displayed at a transparency of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames. The sound of the dialogue "I found it" is not output during this period.

After that, while the sound of the line "I found it" is being output, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed at 0% transparency. Then, during the three-frame silent period T1 after the output of the sound of the line "I found it" has finished, the subtitle "I found it" continues to be displayed at 0% transparency for two frames. After that, over the remaining one frame period of T1, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed at a transparency between 0% and 100%. This causes the subtitle "I found it" to be displayed with a fade-out effect over the period of one frame.

In addition, during the T1 period, the sound of the line "Found" is not output, but starting one frame after the start of the T1 period, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-in effect. Specifically, the subtitle "Found" is displayed at a transparency of 100% and then at a transparency of 70% one frame later. Then, one frame after that, it is displayed at a transparency of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames.

After that, while the sound of the line "Found it" is being output, the subtitle "Found it" is displayed with a transparency of 0%. Then, during the three-frame silent period T2 after the output of the sound of the line "Found it" has finished, the subtitle "Found it" continues to be displayed with a transparency of 0% for two frames. After that, for the remaining one frame of T2, the subtitle "Found it" is displayed with a transparency ranging from 0% to 100%. As a result, the subtitle "Found it" is displayed with a fade-out effect for the period of one frame.

As shown in Figure 179, the first subtitle "I found it" corresponding to the Yume Yume character and the second subtitle "I found it" corresponding to the Bakuchu character are given the same fade-in and fade-out fade effects. Also, the fade-in is performed over a period of two frames, while the fade-out is performed over a period of one frame.

(Teasing 23)
As shown in Figure 179, the output timing of the sound of the dialogue corresponding to the second subtitle "Found" is such that the first and second subtitles are displayed overlapping each other and are not output during the period when the fade effect is applied. The sound of the dialogue corresponding to the second subtitle is output when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. This makes it easy to see the change in subtitles due to the fade effect, and since the sound of the dialogue is output after the second subtitle is displayed, the content of the presentation can be easily understood both visually and aurally.

(Comparison of subtitles in the promotional and epilogue parts)
Figure 180 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) and portions (o3) to (o5). Figure 180(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) in the provocative part. Figure 180(B) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (o3) to (o5). Figures 180(A) and 180(B) have in common the fact that subtitles are displayed consecutively in response to lines spoken by two characters. However, the period from when the first subtitle is displayed to when the second subtitle is displayed differs between Figures 180(A) and 180(B).

As shown in Figure 180 (A), in sections (b4) to (b7), Yume Yume and Bakuchu are displayed facing each other in (b4). Then, in (b5), a first subtitle corresponding to Yume Yume's line, "I found you," is displayed. Then, in (b6), a second subtitle corresponding to Bakuchu's line, "I found you," is displayed. Then, in (b6'), Yume Yume is enlarged on the screen. Then, a subtitle corresponding to Yume Yume's line, "I'll catch you!" is displayed. The time t1 from the start of (b4) to the end of (b6) is approximately 3 seconds.

As shown in Figure 180 (B), in sections (o3) to (o5), a shop with the crab that Jam and Nana defeated in (o3) as its signboard is displayed, and a first subtitle corresponding to Jam's line, "Nice signboard," is displayed. Then, from (o3') to (o3''), the background of the shop with the crab as its signboard is displayed without subtitles. Then, in (o4), a second subtitle corresponding to Nana's line, "Work hard," is displayed. Then, the background of the shop with the crab as its signboard becomes a still image. The time t1 from the start of (o3) to the end of (o5) is approximately 10 seconds.

As shown in Figures 180(A) and 180(B), in the teaser and epilogue parts, subtitles corresponding to lines may be displayed multiple times in one scene (the period from 0 to t1 or the period from 0 to t2). When subtitles are displayed multiple times, if there is ample time, it may be possible to make the change in subtitle display more noticeable by erasing the subtitle display once. However, if there is not enough time, such as in the period from 0 to t1, it is difficult to take the measure of erasing the subtitle display once. For this reason, as shown in Figures 178 and 179, adding a fade effect to the subtitle display makes it easier to notice the change in subtitles.

In pachinko gaming machine 1, the video is created first, followed by the dialogue and other audio. Subtitles corresponding to each line are then added. If the video were to be re-created with a longer period to temporarily erase the subtitles during the period from 0 to t1, when there is not much time available, it would be time-consuming. Therefore, by adding a fade effect, it is possible to make the change in subtitles easier to understand without having to re-create the video. Furthermore, even in parts where there is ample time, such as the epilogue part where the shop with the crab sign is displayed, adding a uniform fade effect reduces the overall workload and prevents the subtitles from feeling out of place when they change.

(Teasing 26)
As shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in certain scenes in the portions (o3) to (o5) where the first and second subtitles do not overlap. The fade effect may be either a fade-in or a fade-out. For subtitle display created after the video is created, it is time-consuming to apply a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps. Therefore, applying a fade effect uniformly to the subtitle display prevents an increase in the workload.

(Teasing 25)
Although not shown, there are cases where the timing of subtitle display overlaps even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, there are many scenes in the epilogue part where the period between subtitle display and subtitle display is longer than in the teasing part. This is because the performance progresses quickly in the teasing part, while the performance progresses less quickly in the epilogue part. As a result, the teasing part is more likely to be displayed at a timing where the subtitles overlap than in the epilogue part. In such cases, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the subtitles from switching from appearing strangely.

[Regarding Provocation 27]
In Figure 181, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Teasing 27)
FIG. 181 illustrates comparative examples of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 181(A), subtitles for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such cases, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect or blank period, the switch in the subtitle display becomes difficult to distinguish. Furthermore, even for subtitles for long lines or lines that progress quickly, switching subtitles without blank periods may cause a sense of incongruity. In such cases, applying a fade effect to the subtitle display can eliminate the sense of incongruity. As shown in Comparative Example 2 of FIG. 181(B), it is also possible to superimpose "I found it" on the subtitle display for "I found it" and then display "I found it." In such cases, not applying a fade effect would make the subtitle display difficult to see. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 181(C), it is also possible to display the subtitles "I found it" and "I found it" in two rows, one above the other. In such cases, the display area for the effects is reduced by the subtitle display, which interferes with the effects in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. However, this problem can be solved by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, as in the present embodiment.

[About Epilogue 23]
In FIG. 182, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

Figure 182 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (B4) to (B11). Figure 182 explains the correspondence between the effects using decorative symbols and small symbols on the screen and the effects using the game effect lamp 9. As shown in (B4), in the effect of the symbol display in the re-lottery part, the enlarged "3" symbol is reduced. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. Next, as shown in (B5), the "3" symbol is displayed in its normal size. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. Next, as shown in (B6), the "3" symbol is displayed, slightly shaking up and down. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in (B7), the screen changes from the background for re-drawing to the normal background, and the "3" symbol continues to be displayed on this normal background, slightly shaking up and down. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, based on the reception of the symbol determination command, the decorative symbol and small symbol are fixed and stopped, as shown in (B8). At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. As shown in (B9), the symbol determination period continues for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the same display as (B8) is maintained on the screen. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 maintains its rainbow flashing illumination.

After that, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the state of the game effect lamp 9 changes approximately 10 msec later to correspond to the fanfare. Also, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the screen changes approximately 33 msec later to display "FEVER." Specifically, as shown in (D1), during the fanfare period after the fanfare command is received, the screen maintains the state of (B9). In contrast, the state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to correspond to the fanfare earlier than the state of the screen. The state of the game effect lamp 9 in (D1) is off. Next, as shown in (D2), the screen changes to a screen displaying the word "FEVER" and Yume Yume-chan, indicating the fanfare state, after the state of the game effect lamp 9. Also, at this time, the game effect lamp 9 maintains its lit state corresponding to the fanfare.

[About Epilogues 28-31]
In FIG. 183, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

Figure 183 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the pattern display. In this modified example, the pattern display may be performed in the order of (Y1) to (Y7). Specifically, as shown in (Y1), in the scene where the Bakuchu is caught, the reduced decorative patterns (reduced patterns) line up in the upper left corner of the screen in the form of "222". The game effect lamp 9 at this time lights up in a rainbow pattern (smooth). Next, as shown in (Y2), the screen becomes a still image and the reduced patterns fluctuate slightly up and down. The game effect lamp 9 at this time lights up in a rainbow pattern (smooth).

Next, as shown in (Y3), the reduced decorative symbol in the upper left corner of the screen is temporarily erased. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a rainbow (smooth) pattern. Next, as shown in (Y4), the "222" decorative symbol that was erased from the center of the screen is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is flashing white. Next, as shown in (Y5), the "222" decorative symbol is enlarged from the state in (Y4) and displayed. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is flashing white. Next, as shown in (Y6), the "222" decorative symbol is enlarged from the state in (Y5) and displayed. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is flashing white. Next, as shown in (Y7), the "222" decorative symbol is enlarged from the state in (Y6) and displayed. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is flashing white.

In the modified pattern display, the decorative symbols move to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode when the SP reach begins, and the symbols line up during the winning epilogue part as shown in (Y1). Then, after the reduced symbol fluctuation period as shown in (Y2), the reduced symbol is temporarily deleted and enlarged from the center of the screen, and the symbol number 1 performance is executed.

(Epilogue 28)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbols are positioned at the edge of the display area of the screen (the upper left corner of the screen). When the screen becomes still and the winning epilogue video ends, the reduced symbols are erased and a symbol display effect is executed in which the symbols are enlarged using the central area of the screen. Furthermore, when the screen becomes still, the brightness data table switches from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display. By positioning the reduced symbols at the edge of the screen while the winning epilogue video is playing, the images of the winning epilogue part are not obstructed. When the video of the winning epilogue part finishes playing and the symbols are displayed, the decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed continuously using both the edge and the center of the screen, emphasizing the big win symbol and presenting it to the player. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, the scene change can be made to look good, and the epilogue part can be made to look good.

(Epilogue 29)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbols are displayed aligned with "222" at the edge of the display area of the screen (the upper left corner of the screen). This allows the player to recognize that a big win has been displayed due to the reduced decorative symbols, even while the winning epilogue video is playing.

(Epilogue 30)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative pattern is displayed at an edge position in the display area of the screen (at the upper left corner of the screen). Furthermore, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes still and the winning epilogue video ends, the subtitle display displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced pattern in the upper left corner is erased, and the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the central area of the screen. This prevents the subtitle display from overlapping with the decorative pattern, and prevents the user from mistaking the pattern for a message, allowing the winning epilogue part to be viewed in a favorable light.

(Epilogue 31)
In a modified example, the decorative symbol moves to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode when the SP reach begins. By positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid interfering with the development of the presentation even during the SP reach, and the series of presentations can be viewed in a favorable manner.

Figures 184 to 187 are figures explaining modified examples of re-drawing. In this modified example, for example, a case will be explained in which a re-drawing is performed from the symbol release in the order of (F1) to (F12). Specifically, the symbols are enlarged as shown in (F1) and (F2), and then reduced as shown in (F3) and (F4). Thereafter, the symbols return to normal size as shown in (F5). Then, as shown in (F6), the background is switched to a background for the re-drawing effect, and the re-drawing effect begins. After that, as shown in (F7), there is a period in which the symbols shake up and down. Then, from (F8) to (F9), the "3" symbol is displayed in a reduced size.

After that, as shown in (F10), a button image and time gauge are faintly displayed below the "3" symbol. Then, as shown in (F11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "3" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases over time. The time gauge indicates the valid period for button operation.

Figure 185 shows what happens when the player operates the push button 31B from the (F12) state. Figure 185 explains the re-draw effect that is executed from (G1) to (G27). When the player operates the push button 31B from the (F12) state, a rapid change occurs in which all of the "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and "2" used as decorative symbols from (G1) to (G13) are displayed. After that, as shown in (G14), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the rapid change is displayed.

Then, the pattern is enlarged as shown in (G15) and (G16), and then reduced as shown in (G17) and (G18). Then, as shown in (G19), the pattern returns to normal size. Then, the background is switched to a pattern swing background. Here, the pattern swing is performed by rotating the pattern back and forth across the screen. Specifically, the pattern swings back from (G20) to (G21), and then swings forward from (G22) to (G23), returning to its initial position. Then, the pattern swings forward from (G24) to (G25), and then swings back from (G26) to (G27), returning to its initial position.

Figure 186 shows what happens when the player does not operate the push button 31B from the (F12) state. Figure 186 explains the re-draw effect that is executed from (H1) to (H27). If the player does not operate the push button 31B from the (F12) state, the "3" symbol remains displayed from (H1) to (H6), and the time gauge decreases over time. After that, as shown in (H7), the button image is faintly displayed and then erased. After that, from (H8) to (H20), a high-speed fluctuation occurs in which the decorative symbols "3," "4," "5," "6," "7," "1," and "2" are all displayed. After that, as shown in (H21), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

Then, the symbols are enlarged as shown in (H22) and (H23), and then reduced as shown in (H24) and (H25). Then, as shown in (H26), the symbols return to normal size. Then, as shown in (H27), the background changes to the background shown in (G20) to (G27). The movement of the symbols displayed in (H22) to (H26) when push button 31B is not operated is the same as the movement of the symbols displayed in (G15) to (G19) when push button 31B is operated. However, when push button 31B is operated, the time that would have decreased on the time gauge if push button 31B had not been operated is absorbed into the duration of the effect of shaking the three symbols. In other words, regardless of when the button is operated, the time until the button is operated is absorbed into the duration of the effect of shaking the three symbols.

Then, after (G27) or (H27), the effect shown in Figure 187 is executed. Figure 187 explains the re-draw effect executed at (J1) to (J18). After (G27) or (H27), the screen goes white for a moment, as shown at (J1). Then, the "3" symbol rotates once from (J2) to (J9). Specifically, from the (J2) state, it rotates counterclockwise around the vertical axis of the "3" symbol, from (J3), (J4), (J5), (J6), (J7), (J8), to (J9). The rotation is so fast that it appears as if the symbol rotates around in an instant.

After that, as shown at (J10), the "3" symbol is displayed in a reduced size, and then the symbol swings backward from (J11) to (J12), and then swings forward from (J13) to (J14), changing to its initial position. After that, the symbol swings forward from (J15) to (J16), and then swings backward from (J17) to (J18), changing to its initial position. The movement of the symbol swing from (J11) to (J18) is the same as the movement of the symbol swing from (G20) to (G27). Then, at (J18), the symbol stops neatly in its normal position.

[About Losers 1 to 7]
The characteristic parts of the failed epilogue part will be numbered and explained.

(Regarding the design confirmation period)
Figure 188 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the pattern determination period. (X1) in Figure 188 is a diagram showing the timing of the winning/losing determination corresponding to (r54) in Figure 132. Details of the pattern determination period when transitioning from this state to the winning epilogue part are explained using (X2) to (X5). Also, details of the pattern determination period when transitioning from the (X1) state to the losing epilogue part are explained using (X6) to (X9).

When transitioning from state (X1) to the winning epilogue part, an image of the state (s5) where a Bakuchu has been caught is displayed, as shown in (X2). After that, as shown in (X3), control returns to the normal screen, followed by a pattern determination period where a pattern like that shown in (B8) is determined and stopped. The pattern determination period lasts for 0.5 seconds after the pattern determination command is received. After that, as shown in (X4), a fanfare period like that shown in (B11) occurs. After that, as shown in (X5), the jackpot round period begins.

When transitioning from state (X1) to the losing epilogue part, an image of the unfortunate (u2) state where the Bakuchu was not caught is displayed, as shown in (X6). Then, as shown in (X7), the background goes black and a symbol combination indicating the losing display result of "232" is displayed. Then, as shown in (X8), an eye-catching image featuring a character image that has the effect of attracting the player's attention is displayed. After that, control returns to the normal screen, followed by a symbol determination period in which a symbol such as that shown in (X9) is determined and stopped. The symbol determination period lasts for 0.5 seconds after the symbol determination command is received. If there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display after the symbol determination period has ended, the next variable display will begin.

(Detailed explanation of the blackout)
FIG. 189 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the blackout. Details of the blackout will be explained in the order of (X10) to (X22) in FIG. 189. As shown in (X10), an image of the "Unfortunate" (u2) state where the Bakuchu was not caught is displayed. From this state, the blackout background is displayed with gradually decreasing transparency, and the background of the center symbol representing the number "3," one of the decorative symbols displayed in the center, is displayed with gradually decreasing transparency. By decreasing the transparency, the blackout background gradually becomes darker, and the center symbol gradually appears more clearly.

After (X10), as shown in (X11), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 70% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 100%. Then, as shown in (X12), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 60% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 90%. Then, as shown in (X13), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 50% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 80%. Then, as shown in (X14), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 40% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 60%. Then, as shown in (X15), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 30% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 40%. Then, as shown in (X16), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 20% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 20%. Then, as shown in (X17), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 10% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 0%. After that, as shown in (X18), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 0% and the center symbol is displayed with a transparency of 0%.

After that, a pattern fluctuation period occurs in which the center symbol "3" fluctuates up and down from (X19) to (X20). After the pattern fluctuation period, an eye-catching image is displayed as shown in (X21). Then, a pattern determination period begins as shown in (X22). As shown in Figure 189, the background blackout begins earlier than the center symbol fade-in, and the background blackout has more transparency change stages than the center symbol fade-in.

(1 loss)
As shown in FIG. 188, if the result is a loss after the win/loss determination, the loss symbol is displayed against a black background in the loss epilogue part. After that, a transition image is displayed using the eye-catching screen, and then the screen switches to the normal background at the start of the reach. This allows the eye-catching screen to make the transition of the screen when the win is lost look good.

(Loser 2)
As shown in Fig. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the background of the losing lottery gradually blacks out, while the center pattern gradually fades in. This allows the image and center pattern of the losing lottery to be displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, making the display of the losing lottery look good due to the relationship between the two.

(Loser 3)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the number of steps required to black out the background when losing from 100% to 0% transparency is greater than the number of steps required to fade in the center symbol from 100% to 0% transparency. Specifically, the background blackout is in eight steps from (X11) to (X18), while the center symbol fades in in six steps from (X12) to (X17). This means that the image and center symbol when losing are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and the number of steps of the transparency change is different, so the relationship between the two makes the display when losing look good.

(4 losers)
As shown in Fig. 189, the change in the background to black out when a winning combination is lost begins before the change in the center pattern to fade in. In this way, the image and center pattern when a winning combination is lost are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the black out and the fade in, and since the black out is faster than the pattern fade in, the relationship between the two makes the display when a winning combination is lost look favorable.

(5 losers)
In the case of a bad image before a blackout, the displayed image changes, whereas in the case of a blackout, the displayed image remains unchanged. This allows the blackout to be viewed favorably by starting the blackout with an unchanged image. Note that a change in image includes a change in the picture on the screen, a change in the angle of the image, and a change in the displayed scene itself. Furthermore, no change in the image includes the same still image, or even if it is a moving image, the angle of the image does not change, and even if there is movement, only a small movement in a part of the image.

(6 losers)
As the background blacks out and the center symbol fades in when a winning combination is lost, the center symbol with a 0% transparency and the blacked-out background with a 0% transparency are displayed for a predetermined period, as shown in (X18) to (X20). This predetermined period includes a pattern fluctuation period, as shown in (X19) to (X20). The pattern fluctuation period may be repeated for at least two periods, with one period being the period in which the center symbol moves from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and back to the center position. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the center symbol fades in from a transparency of 100% to a transparency of 0%. Furthermore, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye-catching image is displayed. This allows the center symbol to be clearly displayed for a predetermined period of time against a blacked-out background with a transparency of 0%, thereby effectively indicating a loss.

(7 losers)
188 and 189, the eye-catching screen displays the title "POWERFUL II" and images of the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan as information about the pachinko gaming machine 1. This allows the eye-catching image to accurately convey information about the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[About losing numbers 8, 10-17]
The characteristic parts of the failed epilogue part will be numbered and explained.

(About the game effect lamp when you lose)
FIG. 190 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp when a win occurs and a diagram for explaining modified examples when a win occurs. FIG. 190 also describes the lighting mode of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050. (X30) to (X36) of FIG. 190 are detailed explanatory diagrams of the game effect lamp when a win occurs, and (X40) to (X46) are diagrams showing modified examples when a win occurs. Note that while the example shown in FIG. 190 shows the effects when a win occurs in the final SP reach, the technology shown in FIG. 190 may also be applied to the effects when a win occurs in other reaches, such as SP first half reach A and B or SP second half reach A and B.

In this embodiment, the brightness data table for a miss is used from the effect in which the six ally characters look disappointed at (X30) to the effect in which the background image blacks out at (X31). Note that the brightness data table for a miss shown in Figure 190 corresponds to the grandchild table specified by times tu1 to tu3 of child table WD17 in the miss epilogue part shown in Figure 216, which will be described later.

After the background image goes black, an eye-catching image is displayed. An eye-catching image is an image that attracts the player's attention, and in this embodiment, as a result of a series of effects in the SP reach, the eye-catching image is displayed before a losing symbol is derived (temporarily stopped) and the screen returns to the normal screen.

The brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the period when the eye-catching screen is switched to (X32) until the eye-catching screen is displayed (X33). After that, the brightness data table for background is used from the period when the screen is switched to the normal screen (X34) through the period when the pattern is determined (X35) until the next variation (X36) which is executed when a variation pattern command is received when there is a hold. Note that the brightness data table for background shown in Figure 190 corresponds to the grandchild table 26 specified at time tu4 of the child table WD17 in the losing epilogue part shown in Figure 216, which will be described later.

The background brightness data table will also be maintained when a customer waiting command is received after the symbol determination period (X35) when there are no pending balls. In response to receiving a customer waiting command, the performance screen may switch to a demonstration display, and a demonstration brightness data table may be used.

In relation to the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, from (X30) to (X34), the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 flashes. Then, by receiving a symbol confirmation command, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 turns off in the (X35) state. After that, by receiving a variable pattern command when there is a reserved symbol, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 flashes in the (X36) state. Furthermore, if there is no reserved symbol after the symbol confirmation period of (X35), the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 will remain off even if a customer waiting command is received.

As a variation of the loss scenario, the brightness data table for each state may be different from that of this embodiment. Specifically, the brightness data table for a loss is used from the disappointment (X40) to the background blackout (X41). After that, a brightness data table for switching (for the eye-catching) may be used during the eye-catching screen switching period (X42), the eye-catching screen (X43), the normal screen switching period (X44), and the pattern determination period (X45). Then, in the next variation (X36), a brightness data table for the background may be used.

Here, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the final brightness data (off) in the brightness data table before the eye-catching is displayed (when it's a miss). Also, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the initial brightness data in the brightness data table (excluding off) that corresponds to the background at the start of the change.

(8 losers)
The following describes the characteristic features of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 when a win occurs. After the winning/losing display, the display screen switches to the image when a win occurs. After that, a blackout screen showing the loss result is displayed, followed by a switch to the eye-catching screen. After that, the screen switches to the normal screen, and a screen showing the pattern being confirmed and stopped is displayed. The brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table when the win/losing result is determined to the brightness data table when a loss occurs. After that, it is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, it is switched to the brightness data table for the background when the variation starts. Here, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) when the screen switches to the eye-catching screen. Furthermore, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background when the screen switches to the normal screen. The special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 9050 switches from flashing to off when the pattern confirmation command is received, but the brightness data table for the background does not switch even when the pattern confirmation command is received. In addition, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 9050 switches from off to flashing upon receiving the variation pattern command for the next variation, but the brightness data table for the background does not switch even upon receiving the pattern confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background when the eye-catching screen ends, and this brightness data table continues until the next variation, so there is no need to create a separate brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the pattern confirmation command, and the lamp effects can be displayed without any sense of incongruity from the effect at the time of a miss to the next variation, and the series of effects can be displayed appropriately.

(10 losers)
After the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table with the end of the eye-catching screen, the background brightness data table continues to be used even if there is no reserved memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received.In this way, since the same brightness data table can be used continuously after switching to the background brightness data table, the lamp effects can be displayed without any sense of incongruity, and the series of effects can be displayed in an optimal manner.

(11 losers)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 switches from flashing to off upon receiving a symbol determination command, which is the trigger for the effect of the symbol being determined and stopped. This allows the player to easily understand the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 when it loses.

(12 losers)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 switches from off to flashing upon receiving a variation pattern command for the next variation, which is the trigger for the start of the next variation. This allows the player to easily understand the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 when it loses.

(Loser 13)
A modified example for when a win occurs will be described. The brightness data table for when a win occurs is used from the effect of six ally characters expressing disappointment at (X40) to the effect of the background image blacking out at (X41). After the background image blacks out, an eye-catching image is displayed. The brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the period from switching to the eye-catching screen at (X42) to the period for determining the pattern at (X45). Thereafter, when a variation pattern command is received when there is a hold, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for background. In other words, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the time of switching to the eye-catching screen, and this brightness data table is maintained during the period for determining the pattern, and is switched to the brightness data table for background at the time of switching to the next variation. Furthermore, during the period for determining the pattern, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used, which is the light-off data. According to this, after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is maintained until the next variable pattern command is received, making it easier to recognize a miss, and as a result, the miss can be made to look good.

(Loser 14)
The final brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is data for turning off and maintaining the brightness. The brightness data table for background does not use data for maintaining the brightness. As a result, since the brightness data table for background does not use brightness data for maintaining the brightness, turning off when the background is displayed is unique to a failure, making it easier to recognize a failure.

(15 losers)
If there is no reserved memory after the pattern is determined, by receiving a customer waiting designation command, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background. According to this, by receiving a customer waiting designation command, the brightness data table for background is switched to, so it is easy to recognize that it is a miss.

(Loser 16)
The initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the final brightness data (off) in the brightness data table before the eye-catching image is displayed (when a miss occurs). This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated at a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easier to recognize the switch by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

(Loser 17)
The initial brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the initial brightness data of the brightness data table (excluding the off state) corresponding to the background at the start of the variation. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to emit light at high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easy to recognize the switch by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Regarding 8-12]
The characteristic parts related to the decision on whether or not the award is successful will be numbered and explained below.

(Detailed explanation of (r48) part)
Figure 191 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r48) portion. Figure 191 (r48) shows the scene where the final hype is performed before the winner is determined. Figure 191(A) is an explanatory diagram showing screen switching, and Figure 191(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between screen switching and time. As shown in Figure 191(A), in the (r48) portion, a burst of chocolate is displayed as shown in (r48-1), followed by a display of six allies as shown in (r48-2). After that, a burst of chocolate is displayed again as shown in (r48-1), followed by a display of six allies as shown in (r48-2). Thereafter, the still images (r48-1) and (r48-2) are repeatedly switched, and the switching speed gradually increases as shown in Figure 191(B). The images of the allied characters and the enemy characters are gradually enlarged over time.

(True or False: 8)
The scene before the decision on the winner (r48) in the promotional section is a slow-motion period in which the image movement slows down. Furthermore, while the effect before (r48) depicts the character's movements using multiple image data, the effect during (r48) is performed using an image of the explosive chutney and images of six allies. Images of the allied and enemy characters are gradually enlarged over time to make the characters appear to be moving. Creating video during the slow-motion period using the same amount of image data as during periods other than the slow-motion period results in a small amount of data, resulting in jerky movements. On the other hand, using a large amount of data to smooth the movements during the slow-motion period would result in excessive data volume. Therefore, by reducing the number of images used during the slow-motion period and using display switching and enlargement to make the characters appear to be moving, data volume can be reduced. The number of images used during the slow-motion period can be any number, as long as it is smaller than during periods other than the slow-motion period.

(True or False 9)
As shown in Figure 191 (B), the image switching speed between the image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character gradually increases. This allows the player to feel whether a scene in which the ally character has an advantage or an enemy character has an advantage to unfold, thereby increasing the excitement. Furthermore, by alternately switching between images, it becomes difficult to notice that the ally character and the enemy character are each being played using a single image.

(True or false: 10)
The slow motion period effect in (r48) may be executed at the timing when the SP first half reach develops into the SP second half reach or the SP final reach. This allows the effect to be executed appropriately even when the SP first half reach develops.

(True or False 11)
During the slow-motion period in (r48), at least one of the friendly character and the enemy character may be constructed using two or more images. For example, for a friendly character, four images may be repeatedly used: Image 1, Image 2, Image 3, Image 4, Image 1, etc., to make the character's hair and clothes appear to move gradually. This allows the character's data to be reused while only some of the data is changed, reducing the amount of work required for data modification and more faithfully portraying the character's movements.

(True or False 12)
During the slow-motion period in (r48), when a character's hair or clothes are made to appear to move gradually from multiple images, the movement of the hair or clothes may be designed to appear to move at the same speed as during periods other than the slow-motion period. Increasing the number of images to match the slow-motion movement in order to make the movement appear smoother during the slow-motion period would result in a large amount of data. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow-motion period, the movement does not become awkward even if fewer images are used, and the movement can be more faithfully represented while reducing the data volume.

<Explanation about the game effect lamp>
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to Figures 192 to 260.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data tables]
The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation uses a brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 or RAM 122 to control the lamps to turn on/blink/turn off one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9.

Specifically, the display control unit 124 sets the sub-variation time in accordance with the variation pattern command sent from the CPU 105 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by one every frame (33 msec) of the displayed image. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start a display corresponding to each part (for example, various displays (such as reach displays) in each part, such as the opening part or the promotion part), the display control unit 124 controls the display of the image display device 5 based on image data (video data, animation data) stored in ROM 121 or RAM 122. The display control unit 124 sets an extension command corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the display control it is performing, and sends the extension command to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 124, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) whose display is being controlled by the display control unit 124.

For example, Figure 272 is a diagram illustrating an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in Figure 272, when the display control unit 124 performs display control for the winning epilogue of SP first half reach A, it sends an extension command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify the winning epilogue of that SP first half reach A. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 124, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the winning epilogue of SP first half reach A.

The parent table stores information specifying the lamps (illuminated locations) that are subject to lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamps 9, information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each lamp, and information specifying the child table referenced during lamp control for each lamp (the address specified for the child table). Note that the parent table specifies only the lamps that are subject to lamp control; lamps that are not subject to lamp control are not specified. For example, the parent table shown in Figure 192, described below, specifies the frame lamp, the special feature lamp 9A, the left-side panel lamp 9B, the attacca lamp 9E, the V attacca lamp 9F, and the electric chute lamp 9H as the targets of lamp control, and specifies 600,000 msec as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each lamp. In the parent table shown in Figure 192, child table WD1 is specified for the frame lamp, child table YD1 is specified for the special feature lamp 9A, child table LD1 is specified for the left-side panel lamp 9B, and child table AD1 is specified for the attacca lamp 9E, the V attacca lamp 9F, and the electric chute lamp 9H.

Details will be provided later using Figure 206, but as shown in Figure 272, the parent table for the SP first half reach A hit epilogue specifies 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control on the frame lamp, and the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 msec to time this 600,000 msec (10 minutes). In other words, the performance control CPU 120 will have timed 600,000 msec (10 minutes) by performing the counter subtraction process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 will control the lamps using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 msec (10 minutes) has been timed. WD3 is specified as the child table in the parent table for the SP first half reach A hit epilogue.

The child table stores information specifying which lamps (illuminated locations) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are the target of lamp control, and information specifying the grandchild table (designated address of the grandchild table) to be referenced at each time when lamp control is performed. For example, in the child table for the frame lamp shown in Figure 193 (described below), the grandchild tables (W4, W11, W12, W21, etc.) to be referenced for each time, such as ta1 to ta19, are specified.

Details will be given later using Figure 206, but as shown in Figure 272, in child table WD3 for the epilogue of the SP first half reach A hit, 300 msec is specified as the time for lamp control of the frame lamp, and the performance control CPU 120 times 3000 msec by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and performs lamp control using the grandchild table specified by child table WD3 until the time reaches 3000 msec. In child table WD3 for the epilogue of the SP first half reach A hit, W4 is specified as the grandchild table.

The grandchild table stores information specifying which lamps (illuminated locations) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are the target of lamp control, as well as brightness data used at each time the lamp control is performed. For example, grandchild table W4 shown in Figure 230, which will be described later, stores brightness data corresponding to RGB used every 30 msec.

The brightness data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp being controlled. For example, a frame lamp is composed of three LED elements, "R," "G," and "B," and the brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to that element. Specifically, brightness data has 16 current values ranging from 0 to F; when brightness data is 0, the current value is the minimum (e.g., 0), and when brightness data is F, the current value is the maximum. For example, when brightness data "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "A" flows through the "R" element; when brightness data "1" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element; and when brightness data "F" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "F" flows through the "G" element.

The frame lamp can emit light in various colors by passing current corresponding to brightness data through each RGB element. Furthermore, the frame lamp can light up in colors corresponding to each of the aforementioned characters by emitting light based on the brightness data. For example, in a performance in which Yume Yume-chan appears, brightness data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up red. In a performance in which Maid A appears, brightness data "00F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up blue. In a performance in which Maid B appears, brightness data "0AC" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up Hawaiian blue. In a performance in which AD appears, brightness data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up yellow. In an effect where Jam-chan appears, brightness data "A5F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up purple. In an effect where Nana-chan appears, brightness data "F3F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up pink. In an effect where Bakuchu appears, brightness data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up red. In an effect where Boingo appears, brightness data "FEA" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up cream.

Details will be provided later using Figure 230, but as shown in Figure 272, in grandchild table W4, the brightness data (RGB data) for each lamp is specified as "000" and "AAA" alternately at 30 msec intervals. The presentation control CPU 120 counts up the time specified by the child table, 3000 msec, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver at 30 msec intervals based on grandchild table W4 until the count reaches 300 msec. Then, based on the received brightness data, the LED driver passes a current corresponding to the brightness data through the specified LED. This allows the presentation control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 has timers corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and controls the lamps based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table by decrementing the timers at regular intervals (for example, every 10 msec).

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table, and when it has completed outputting brightness data up to the last specified location in that grandchild table, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table still remains, it starts outputting brightness data again from the first specified location in that grandchild table. On the other hand, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table becomes 0 while the performance control CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on a grandchild table, it sets a timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying that child table, and starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table specified by that child table. This switches the grandchild table, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after the switch.

Timer management of child tables by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the diagram. Figure 273 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table with timer management of a child table. As shown in Figure 273, in the child table for the SP first half reach A hit epilogue, 3000 msec is specified as the time for lamp control for the frame lamp, and W4 is specified as the grandchild table. In grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as brightness data (RGB data) for each lamp. For ease of explanation, the data "000" in the first 30 msec will be referred to as data 1, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec will be referred to as data 2, the data "000" in the next 30 msec will be referred to as data 3, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec will be referred to as data 4, the data "000" in the next 30 msec will be referred to as data 5, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec will be referred to as data 6, and the data "000" in the next 30 msec will be referred to as data 7.

The performance control CPU 120 counts the 3000 msec specified by the child table WD3 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec. Until the count reaches 3000 msec, it outputs brightness data 1 through 7 to the LED driver at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4. However, if the count has not yet reached 3000 msec after outputting data 1 through 7, it again outputs brightness data to the LED driver in order, starting with data 1. When the count eventually reaches 3000 msec, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on grandchild table W4 and begins outputting brightness data based on the next grandchild table W1 specified by the child table. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 loops the output of brightness data until the time specified by the child table has elapsed.

As shown in the parent table in Figure 192 (described later), child data is specified over a period of 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and the 10-minute data in this parent table serves as a malfunction countermeasure. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 switches parent tables to control lamps based on performance control commands from CPU 103, but even if a malfunction occurs while lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table and the performance control CPU 120 does not receive a performance control command from CPU 103, lamp control will be performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, preventing different lamp controls from being performed one after another from the point where the malfunction occurred.

Furthermore, as in the child table shown in Figure 193 (described below), grandchild data is specified over 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location. The 10-minute data in this child table serves to prevent lamp control from being resumed from the first specified location in the child table when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table reaches 0, due to the parent table's timer still remaining.

Furthermore, as in the grandchild table shown in Figure 235, which will be described later, brightness data is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location. The 10-minute data in this grandchild table serves to prevent lamp control from being resumed from the first specified location in the grandchild table when the value of the timer corresponding to the grandchild table reaches 0, due to the child table's timer still remaining.

In this way, by specifying 10-minute brightness data at the end of the grandchild table, the lamp will be maintained at a fixed light emission, preventing problems with continuous changes in lamp lighting. Furthermore, by specifying brightness data spanning 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, problems with continuous changes in lamp lighting can be more effectively prevented.

As mentioned above, the brightness data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table. However, in the brightness data tables used in each part described below, only the most distinctive tables among the parent table, child table, and grandchild table are shown, and other tables may be omitted.

[Luminance data table used in the beginning part]
192 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the start part. As shown in FIG. 192, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the start part stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD1, YD1, LD1, AD1) to be referenced during lamp control of each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 193 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for the start part. As shown in Figure 193, the frame lamp child table WD1 subdivides the time of the start part for the frame lamp and specifies the grandchild tables to be referenced for each time period. Note that in this embodiment, only particularly distinctive grandchild tables are described in the child table, and other grandchild tables are marked "omitted" and their description is omitted.

For example, at times ta1, ta4, and ta7, grandchild table W21 is specified. Grandchild table W21 is included in the normal background brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52, and corresponds to grandchild table W21 for the frame lamp in the background brightness data table shown in FIG. 260, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 260, grandchild table W21 specifies "550," "770," or "880" as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W21, causing the frame lamps to light up in yellow (a yellow background lighting pattern) corresponding to the normal background.

At times ta3 and ta6, grandchild table W4 is specified. Grandchild table W4 corresponds to grandchild table W4 for the frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) brightness data table shown in Figure 230, which will be described later. As shown in Figure 230, grandchild table W4 specifies "000" and "AAA" alternating at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to blink in white. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4 for 150 msec (30 msec x 5), causing the frame lamp to blink in white twice.

At times ta10 to ta12, grandchild table W11 is specified. Grandchild table W11 corresponds to grandchild table W11 for the frame lamp in the shutter 1 brightness data table shown in Figure 251, which will be described later. As shown in Figure 251, grandchild table W11 specifies that the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is to gradually decrease in brightness from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W11, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in red while gradually decreasing the brightness, corresponding to the performance of a shutter closing as shown in Figures 58 (a10) to (a12).

At times ta13 to ta18, grandchild table W12 is specified. Grandchild table W12 corresponds to grandchild table W12 for the frame lamp in the shutter 2 brightness data table shown in Figure 251, which will be described later. As shown in Figure 251, grandchild table W12 specifies "600" at 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W12, the performance control CPU 120 lights the frame lamps in red while maintaining a reduced brightness, corresponding to the effect shown in Figures 59 (a13) to (a15) and 60 (a16) to (a18), in which the shutter is maintained fully closed for a predetermined period of time and then gradually opens.

In this way, in child table WD1 of the start part, during times ta1-ta12 before the shutters are fully closed, the brightness data switches so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as a yellow background, flashing red, flashing white, and then solid red, whereas during times ta13-ta18 after the shutters are fully closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. This allows the lighting mode of the frame lamp to add excitement to the presentation of the start part before the shutters close, and by maintaining the lighting mode of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters open, resulting in a better viewing experience for the player in the subsequent excitement part.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 59 (a13), the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness from the timing when the shutter is fully closed, but this is not limited to this. For example, the brightness data may be maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness after a predetermined time (e.g., one second) has elapsed after the shutter is fully closed. Alternatively, the brightness data may be maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness from a timing related to the shutter closing operation (e.g., the timing when the shutter starts to close, the timing immediately before the shutter starts to close, etc.).

At time ta19, which marks the end of the opening part, the frame lamp is turned off, corresponding to the effect of the shutter remaining in a fully open state as shown in Figure 61 (a19). Note that "off" here refers to a state in which the brightness data is "0," as explained with reference to Figure 53, but at time ta19, it may also be a state in which the brightness data is "1," resulting in a state of almost off. Note that in the following explanations, "off" may also refer to "almost off." At time ta19, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp remains off based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD1 reaches 0.

In this way, the frame lamps are turned off when the shutters are fully open, so the lighting state of the frame lamps makes it easy for players to understand when the shutters are fully open. Furthermore, the provocative parts of SP First Half Reach A and SP First Half Reach B, which are executed after the start part, start with the shutters fully open and the frame lamps turned off, and the frame lamps begin to light up or flash based on the brightness data table corresponding to each SP First Half Reach. In this way, after the shutters are fully open and the frame lamps are turned off, the frame lamps begin to light up in accordance with the progress of the SP First Half Reach presentation, making it easy for players to understand that the SP First Half Reach has begun.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach A provocative part]
194 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half Reach A. As shown in FIG. 194, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD2, YD2, LD2, AD2) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 195 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of SP first half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD2 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figure 195, the frame lamp child table WD2 subdivides the time of the provocative part of SP first half reach A for the frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period.

For example, during the 1560 msec period of time tb10, grandchild table W3 is specified. Grandchild table W3 corresponds to grandchild table W3 for the frame lamp in the yellow haze brightness data table shown in Figure 229, which will be described later. As shown in Figure 229, grandchild table W3 sparsely specifies "440," "660," and "880" at 180 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamps to light up in a hazy yellow light that corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

During the 150 msec interval at time tb14 and the 210 msec interval at time tb17, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash in white.

As shown in Figure 230, in grandchild table W4, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is specified as "000" and "AAA" alternating at 30 msec intervals, with the first 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), and the final 30 msec being "000" (off). In other words, the frame lamp alternates between "off" and "on" over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), causing the frame lamp to flash in white (white flash) multiple times. For example, if the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), the frame lamp will flash white three times; if the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 over 150 msec (30 msec x 5), the frame lamp will flash white twice.

At both time tb14 and time tb17, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at time tb14, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at time tb17, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different times for one child table WD2, causing the frame lamp to flash in white at multiple different times. However, by varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different times, the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white can be set to two or three times. This allows the number of white flashes to vary while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control by using a common grandchild table W4 but varying its reference time, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different times. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data volume.

At time tb18, which marks the end of the teasing part of SP first half Reach A, the frame lamps light up in white, corresponding to the effect of teasing whether Yume Yume will catch the Bakuchu before the win/loss decision is made, which is the branching point (jackpot, miss, development of the second half of SP Reach) as shown in Figure 67 (b18). During time tb18, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8. For example, grandchild table W8 corresponds to grandchild table W8 for the frame lamps in the No Operation Prompt Teaser 2 Brightness Data Table shown in Figure 249, which will be described later. As shown in Figure 249, grandchild table W8 specifies "FDC" at 100,000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the frame lamps remain lit in white based on grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD2 reaches 0.

As a result, during the win/loss branch in the provocative part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, the frame lamp remains lit in white with the sound muted, as shown in Figure 67 (b18), making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

In addition, in child table WD2 for the first half of the SP's Reach A provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tb4, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan and lights up the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, corresponding to an effect in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, face off as shown in Figure 63 (b4). At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, corresponding to an effect in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in Figure 63 (b5). At time tb6, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, corresponding to an effect in which Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in Figure 63 (b6).

This means that in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking, the character speaking the lines can be clearly indicated by the frame lamp lighting up/flashing, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative parts in an optimal way.

Furthermore, in child table WD2 for the first half of the SP's Reach A provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tb11, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp corresponding to Yume Yume, located on the left side of the screen, in green, corresponding to Yume Yume, chasing a Bakuchu, as shown in Figure 65 (b11). Furthermore, at times tb8 and tb9, when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, as shown in Figures 63 (b8) and (b9), the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame lamp in the color corresponding to that character.

In this way, as shown in Figures 64 (b8) and (b9), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to effectively show that a character is speaking through the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to effectively see the effects of the provocative part.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A]
Figure 196 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A.

As shown in Figure 196 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD3, YD3, LD3, AD3) to be referenced when lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is performed.

As shown in Figure 196 (a2), the child table WD3 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A subdivides the time of the winning epilogue portion in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A for the frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD3 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52.

For example, at time tc1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in Figure 67 (b18), the frame lamps flash in white, corresponding to the effect of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figure 68 (c1).

As mentioned above, the white light at the win/lose branch (tb18) indicates that the RGB data is "FDC," while the white flashing at tc1 after a win is confirmed indicates that the RGB data is "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch but brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

At times tc2 and tc3, grandchild table W1 is specified. Grandchild table W1 corresponds to grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table shown in Figure 225, which will be described later. As shown in Figure 225, grandchild table W1 sparsely specifies various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, lighting up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, corresponding to the effect of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figures 68 (c2) and (c3).

As shown in Figure 196 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A stores information specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9, and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is performed.

As shown in Figure 196 (b2), the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A subdivides the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A for the frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD0 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. Furthermore, the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols is used in common in the SP reach first half A and B, the SP reach second half A and B, and the SP final reach.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for the 5000 msec interval between times tc4 and tc5. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash in a bright white light corresponding to the pattern being displayed, corresponding to the effect of displaying a winning pattern such as that shown in Figures 69 (c4) and (c5).

At time tc6, which marks the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final effect of the winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen, as shown in Figure 69 (c6). At time tc6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD3 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child tables of the winning epilogue part, grandchild table W1 is specified for times tc2 and tc3, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors to create an effect similar to catching a Bakuchu. Furthermore, grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc6, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors to create an effect in which a winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen. In this way, by using a common grandchild table for the winning epilogue used to notify a win and a grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used to control the lamps to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the frame lamp can be used to better present the effects in the winning epilogue part to the player while reducing data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach A Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 197 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A.

As shown in Figure 197 (a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced when lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is performed.

As shown in Figure 197 (a2), the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP first half reach A subdivides the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP first half A for the frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD4 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. Furthermore, the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue is used in common in the SP reach first half A and B, the SP reach second half A and B, and the SP final reach.

For example, during the 200 msec period of time td1, grandchild table W13 is specified. Grandchild table W13 corresponds to grandchild table W13 for the frame lamp in the Miss 1 Brightness Data Table shown in Figure 252, which will be described later. As shown in Figure 252, in grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W13, the presentation control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in white after the win/lose branch shown in Figure 67 (b18), corresponding to the presentation of missing the Bakuchu as shown in Figure 70 (d1).

As mentioned above, the white light at the win/lose branch (tb18) indicates that the RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white light at td1 after the loss notification indicates that the RGB data is "888" or "444." This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white light at the win/lose branch (tb18), thereby conveniently notifying the player that they have lost.

During the 5,800 msec period of time td2, grandchild table W14 is specified. Grandchild table W14 corresponds to grandchild table W14 for the frame lamp in the Loss 2 Brightness Data Table shown in Figure 252, which will be described later. As shown in Figure 252, grandchild table W14 specifies "444" or "111" at 250 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W14, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in a white light that is darker than td1, corresponding to the performance shown in Figure 70 (d2), in which Yume Yume is disappointed after losing.

As mentioned above, when a win occurs (tc2, tc3), the rainbow lighting alternates between RGB data at 30 msec intervals, whereas when a loss occurs (td2), the dimmer white lighting alternates between RGB data at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than when a win occurs. As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp changes color at shorter intervals than when a loss occurs, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, when a win occurs, the frame lamp lights up more brightly than when a loss occurs, while when a loss occurs, the frame lamp lights up more subdued than when a win occurs. As a result, the contrasting lamp patterns make it easy for the player to understand whether they have won or lost.

At time td3, grandchild table W15 is specified. Grandchild table W15 corresponds to grandchild table W15 for the frame lamp in the Miss 3 Brightness Data Table shown in Figure 253, which will be described later. As shown in Figure 253, in grandchild table W15, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is specified as "444" for the first 10 msec, "111" for the next 550 msec, and "111" for the final 600,000 msec (10 minutes). By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W15, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamps to correspond to the performance shown in Figure 70 (d3), where a miss is announced and the screen goes dark.

At time td4, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W21, lighting the frame lamps in a yellow background pattern to correspond to the performance of displaying the normal screen as shown in Figure 71 (d4). In other words, the grandchild table W21 used when the normal screen is displayed in the event of a loss has a lighting pattern that corresponds to the normal background, and is the same as the grandchild table W21 specified at times ta1, ta4, and ta7 in the start part.

At time td4, lamp control is performed by repeatedly referencing the brightness data contained in the grandchild table W21. Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps while switching between RGB data based on the grandchild table W21 shown in Figure 260 (described below) until it receives a fluctuation pattern command specifying the next fluctuation if there is a hold, or until it receives a customer waiting command over time if there is no hold.If it has performed lamp control based on the final RGB data but has not yet received a fluctuation pattern command or customer waiting command, it again performs lamp control based on the initial RGB data.

As shown in Figure 190, from the time the frame lamps go out at time td3 until the time the frame lamps light up in a yellow background pattern at time td4 in response to the effect of displaying the normal screen, the eye-catching screen is displayed and the frame lamps light up based on the brightness data table corresponding to that eye-catching screen. In this way, when controlling the frame lamps in the event of a loss, the brightness data table (grandchild table) corresponding to the eye-catching screen is used, and then grandchild table W21, which is also used in the start part as the brightness data table corresponding to the normal screen, is used. This eliminates the need to prepare a separate brightness data table to be used after the eye-catching screen is displayed and before the pattern is determined, and by controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W21, which is also used in the start part, the frame lamp effects can be viewed naturally by the player.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach B provocation part]
198 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B. As shown in Fig. 198, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD5, YD5, LD5, AD5) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 199 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD5 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figure 199, the frame lamp child table WD5 subdivides the time of the provocative part of the SP first half reach B for the frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time te8 and for 210 msec at time te12. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash white. While grandchild table W4 is specified at both time te8 and time te12, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 at time te8, which is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice. At time te12, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 at one cycle of 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different times for one child table WD5, causing the frame lamp to flash in white at multiple different times. However, by varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different times, the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white can be set to two or three times. This allows the number of white flashes to vary while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control by using a common grandchild table W4 but varying its reference time, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different times. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data volume.

At time te17, which marks the end of the teasing part of the SP first half Reach B, the frame lamp lights up in white, corresponding to the effect of teasing whether Yume Yume will lose or not in the win/loss branch (jackpot, miss, SP Reach second half development) as shown in Figure 77 (e17). At time te18, lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes.

As a result, during the win/loss branch in the provocative part of Reach B in the first half of the SP, the frame lamp remains lit in white with the sound muted, as shown in Figure 77 (e17), making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

Furthermore, in child table WD5 for the first half of the SP's Reach B provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time te4, the presentation control CPU 120 lights up the left frame lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan and lights up the right frame lamp in cream corresponding to Boingo, corresponding to an effect in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, and Boingo, located on the right side of the screen, face off against each other, as shown in Figure 73 (e4). At time te5, the presentation control CPU 120 flashes the left frame lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, corresponding to an effect in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line, as shown in Figure 73 (e5). At time te6, the presentation control CPU 120 flashes the right frame lamp in cream corresponding to Boingo, corresponding to an effect in which Boingo, located on the right side of the screen, speaks a line, as shown in Figure 73 (e6).

This means that in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking, the character speaking the lines can be clearly indicated by the frame lamp lighting up/flashing, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative parts in an optimal way.

Furthermore, in child table WD5 for the first half of the SP's Reach B provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time te11, the effect control CPU 120 flashes the frame lamp in cream color corresponding to Boingo, in response to the effect of Boingo hitting the puck as shown in Figure 75 (e11). Furthermore, at time te7, the effect control CPU 120 flashes the frame lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume when there is a line from Yume Yume but no subtitles as shown in Figure 74 (e7).

In this way, as shown in Figure 74 (e7), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to effectively show that a character is speaking through the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to effectively see the effects of the provocative part.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the first half of the SP]
Figure 200 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B.

As shown in Figure 200 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD6, YD6, LD6, AD6) to be referenced when lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is performed.

As shown in Figure 200 (a2), the child table WD6 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B subdivides the time of the winning epilogue portion in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B for the frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD6 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52.

For example, at time tf1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in Figure 77 (e17), the frame lamps flash in white to correspond to the effect of Yume Yume hitting the puck back, as shown in Figure 78 (f1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in Figure 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white flashing at tf1 after a win is confirmed has RGB data of "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch but brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

From time tf2 to tf4, grandchild table W1 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamps to smoothly light up in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, corresponding to the effect shown in Figure 78 (f2) to (f4) in which Boingo is attacked and Yume-Yume wins.

As shown in Figure 200 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B stores information specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9, and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is performed.

As shown in Figure 200 (b2), the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B subdivides the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B for the frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for the 5000 msec interval between time tf5 and time tf6. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash in a bright white light corresponding to the pattern being displayed, corresponding to the effect of displaying a winning pattern such as that shown in Figure 79 (f5) and (f6).

At time tf7, which marks the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps smoothly light up in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final effect of the winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen, as shown in Figure 80 (f7). At time tf7, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD6 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, grandchild table W1 is specified for times tf2 to tf4, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the effect of Boingo being attacked and Yume Yume winning. Furthermore, grandchild table W1 is specified for time tf7, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the effect of the winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen. In this way, by using a common grandchild table for the winning epilogue used to notify a win and a grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used to control the lamps to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the frame lamp can be used to make the effects in the winning epilogue part more appealing to players while reducing data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach B Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 201 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B.

As shown in Figure 201 (a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced when lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is performed.

As shown in Figure 200 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during the 200 msec interval between time tg1 and time tg2, grandchild table W13 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in Figure 77 (e17), lights up the frame lamp in white, corresponding to the performance in which Yume Yume is sent flying as shown in Figure 81 (g1).

The white illumination at the win/lose branch (te17) is based on grandchild table W8 shown in Figure 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white illumination at tg1 after a loss is notified is based on grandchild table W13, shown in Figure 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This means that when a loss occurs, the frame lamp can be lit in a dimmer white color while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white illumination at the win/lose branch (te17), thereby effectively notifying the player that they have lost.

During the 5,800 msec period of time tg3, grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W14, lighting the frame lamps in a darker white color than tg1, corresponding to the performance of Yume Yume feeling disappointed after losing, as shown in Figures 70 (g2) and (g3).

The rainbow lighting during a win (tf2-tf4) is based on grandchild table W1 shown in Figure 225, which will be described later, and its RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, while the dimmer white lighting during a loss (tg3) is based on grandchild table W14, shown in Figure 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting is more pronounced than during a loss, while during a loss, the frame lamp's lighting is more subdued than during a win. As a result, the contrasting lamp patterns make it easy for the player to understand whether they have won or lost.

At time tg4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W15, turning off the frame lamps to correspond to the performance shown in Figure 82 (g4) where a miss is announced and the screen goes dark.

At time tg5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, lighting the frame lamp in a pattern with the background lit yellow, corresponding to the performance of displaying the normal screen as shown in Figure 81 (g5). Also, at time tg5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referencing the brightness data contained in grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the character action part during the latter half of the SP]
FIG. 202 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the role operation part during the SP second half development. The grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD8 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 202, the frame lamp child table WD8 specifies the grandchild table to be referenced in the role operation part for the frame lamp. Furthermore, the child table WD8 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the first half (falling part) of the role operation shown in FIGS. 171 (h1) to (h3) (FIG. 83 (h1) to (h3)).

For example, grandchild table W2 is specified for 7000 msec between times th1 and th3. Grandchild table W2 corresponds to grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp in the reel operation red flashing brightness data table shown in Figure 228, which will be described later. As shown in Figure 228, grandchild table W2 specifies "A00" for the first 40 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" for the next 30 msec. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W2, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamps to flash red in response to the performance of a reel falling as shown in Figures 83 (h1) to (h3) after the win/loss branch shown in Figure 77 (e17).

In addition, during the 7000 msec period from th1 to th3 when the reel falls, lamp control is also performed on the reel lamp 9A. For example, during the 7000 msec period from th1 to th3 when the reel falls, the performance control CPU 120 causes the reel lamp 9A to flash in red based on the child table corresponding to the reel falling motion in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by that child table.

This allows the lighting patterns of the frame lamp and the accessory lamp 9A to more effectively draw the player's attention to the effect of the accessory falling.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of the SP Reach A promotion part]
203 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half Reach A. As shown in Fig. 203, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD9, YD9, LD9, AD9) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figures 204 and 205 are diagrams illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of SP second half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD9 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figures 204 and 205, the frame lamp child table WD9 subdivides the time of the provocative part of SP second half reach A for the frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used to control the frame lamps corresponding to the second half (rising portion) of the role action shown in Figure 171 (h4) to Figure 172 (h10). Specifically, from times th4 to th6, the frame lamps flash yellow in response to the role rising, and then from times th7 to th10, based on grandchild table W3, the frame lamps light up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of SP Reach. This allows the frame lamps to gradually change from flashing yellow to lighting up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of SP Reach A, clearly communicating to the player that the game has progressed to SP Reach A.

In addition, during times th4 to th10 when the reel rises, lamp control is also performed on reel lamp 9A. For example, during times th4 to th10 when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of reel lamp 9A so that reel lamp 9A is gradually turned off, based on the child table corresponding to the reel rise movement of reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by that child table.

As a result, the lighting pattern of the accessory lamp 9A prevents the player from being aware of the accessory rising, while the lighting pattern of the frame lamp draws the player's attention to the screen indicating that the game has progressed to the second half of the SP, Reach A.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time ti1, 1330 msec at time ti20, and 1560 msec at time ti11. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamps to light up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background of an SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 229, in grandchild table W3, the brightness data for the frame lamp switches over one cycle of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At times th7 to th10 and ti1, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which exceeds one cycle, causing the frame lamp to light up yellow for 1130 msec. At time ti20, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which exceeds one cycle, causing the frame lamp to light up yellow for 1330 msec. At time ti11, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W3 for 1560 msec, which exceeds two cycles, causing the frame lamp to light up yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different times for one child table WD9, lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different times. However, by varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different times, the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow can be varied. This allows one child table WD9 to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow, corresponding to the background of an SP reach, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W3 but varying its reference time, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different times. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data volume.

Grandchild table W4 is specified for the 150 msec interval between time ti15 and time ti24, and the 210 msec interval between time ti14, ti23, and time ti35. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash in white. At times ti15, ti24, ti14, ti23, and ti35, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at times ti15 and ti24, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at times ti14, ti23, and ti35, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different times for one child table WD9, causing the frame lamp to flash in white at multiple different times. However, by varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different times, the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white can be set to two or three times. This allows the number of white flashes to vary while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control by using a common grandchild table W4 but varying its reference time, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different times. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data volume.

During the 1000 msec period from time ti36 to ti38, grandchild table W7 is specified. Grandchild table W7 corresponds to grandchild table W7 for the frame lamp in the non-operation prompt flash 1 brightness data table shown in Figure 249, which will be described later. As shown in Figure 249, grandchild table W7 specifies "FDC" and "300" alternating at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W7, causing the frame lamps to flash in white.

At time ti39, which marks the end of the hype part of the SP's second half, Reach A, the frame lamps light up in white, corresponding to the effect of teasing whether Yume Yume and Jam will catch the Bakuchu at the win/loss branch (jackpot, miss) as shown in Figure 95 (i39). At time ti39, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8. As shown in Figure 249, grandchild table W8 specifies "FDC" at 100,000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the frame lamps will remain lit in white based on grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD2 reaches 0.

In this way, in child table WD9 in SP latter half Reach A, a reach without operation prompting occurs, and after the frame lamp flashes white based on grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up white based on grandchild table W8. Specifically, for the win/loss branch in the provocative part of SP latter half Reach A where no operation prompting occurs, the brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W8 is designed to use the "FDC" (white lighting), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7. This makes it possible to clearly communicate the win/loss branch (decisive timing) to the player without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 95 (i39), the frame lamp remains lit in white even when the sound is muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 249, the final RGB data in grandchild table W7 used for 1000 msec from time ti36 to ti38 is specified as "FDC," and furthermore, the final RGB data in grandchild table W8 used at the subsequent time ti39 is also specified as "FDC." As a result, the performance control CPU 120 maintains the state in which it outputs "FDC" luminance data to the LED driver based on grandchild table W7, and then continues to output "FDC" luminance data to the LED driver based on grandchild table W8, thereby enabling the timing of the win/loss decision to be optimally determined through simpler lamp control without increasing the amount of data too much.

Furthermore, in child table WD9 for the second half of the SP's Reach A provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time ti2, the performance control CPU 120 lights the left frame lamp in white, corresponding to Yume Yume and Jam, and lights the right frame lamp in red, corresponding to Bakuchu, to correspond to the performance shown in Figure 84 (i2) where Yume Yume and Jam, located on the left side of the screen, face off against Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen. At time ti3, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the left frame lamp in green, corresponding to Yume Yume, to correspond to the performance shown in Figure 84 (i3) where Yume Yume, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line. At time ti4, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the left frame lamp in purple, corresponding to Jam, to correspond to the performance shown in Figure 85 (i4) where Jam, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line. At time ti5, the effect control CPU 120 flashes the right frame lamp in red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character located on the right side of the screen, in response to an effect in which the Bakuchu character speaks a line, as shown in Figure 85 (i5).

This means that in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking, the character speaking the lines can be clearly indicated by the frame lamp lighting up/flashing, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative parts in an optimal way.

Furthermore, in child table WD9 for the second half of the SP's Reach A provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time ti21, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp corresponding to Yume Yume, located on the left side of the screen, in green, to correspond to the performance shown in Figure 90 (i21) as chasing a Bakuchu. Furthermore, at times ti32 and ti34, when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, as shown in Figure 94 (i32) and Figure 95 (i34), the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame lamp in the color corresponding to that character.

In this way, as shown in Figures 94 (i32) and 95 (i34), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to effectively show that a character is speaking through the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to effectively see the effects of the provocative part.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A]
Figure 206 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach A.

As shown in Figure 206 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD10, YD10, LD10, AD10) to be referenced when lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is performed.

As shown in Figure 206 (a2), the child table WD10 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A subdivides the time of the winning epilogue portion in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A for the frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD10 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52.

For example, from time tj1 to tj3, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in Figure 96 (i39), the frame lamps flash in white, corresponding to the effect of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figure 97 (j1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in Figure 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white flashing at tj1 after a win is confirmed has RGB data of "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch but brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

At times tj2 and tj3, grandchild table W1 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamps to smoothly light up in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, corresponding to the effect of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figures 97 (j2) and (j3).

As shown in Figure 206 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half Reach A stores information specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9, and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is performed.

As shown in Figure 206 (b2), the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A subdivides the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A for the frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified between time tj4 and time tj5, which lasts for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash in a bright white light corresponding to the pattern being displayed, in response to an effect in which a winning pattern such as that shown in Figure 98 (j4) and (j5) is displayed.

At time tj6, which marks the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final effect of the winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen, as shown in Figure 98 (j6). At time tj6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp continues to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD10 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child tables of the winning epilogue part, grandchild table W1 is specified for times tj2 and tj3, and based on that grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors to create an effect similar to catching a Bakuchu. Furthermore, grandchild table W1 is specified again for time tj6, and based on that grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors to create an effect in which a winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen. In this way, by using a common grandchild table for the winning epilogue used to notify a win and a grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used to control the lamps to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the frame lamp can be used to better present the effects in the winning epilogue part to the player while reducing data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the second half of the SP when Reach A is missed]
Figure 207 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the SP second half reach A.

As shown in Figure 207 (a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP second half Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced when lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is performed.

As shown in Figure 207 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during the 200 msec period of time tk1, grandchild table W13 is specified. The presentation control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in Figure 96 (i39), the frame lamp lights up in white, corresponding to the presentation of failing to catch the explosive chu as shown in Figure 99 (k1).

The white illumination at the win/lose branch (ti39) is based on grandchild table W8 shown in Figure 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white illumination at tk1 after a loss is notified is based on grandchild table W13, shown in Figure 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This means that when a loss occurs, the frame lamp can be lit in a dimmer white color while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white illumination at the win/lose branch (ti39), thereby effectively notifying the player that they have lost.

During the 5,800 msec interval between times tk2 and tk3, grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W14, lighting the frame lamps in a darker white than tk1, corresponding to the performance shown in Figures 99 (k2) and (k3) in which Yume Yume is disappointed at losing.

The rainbow lighting during a win (tj2, tj3) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in Figure 225, which will be described later, and its RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, while the dimmer white lighting during a loss (tk2, tk3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in Figure 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than the interval during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting is more pronounced than during a loss, while during a loss, the frame lamp's lighting is more subdued than during a win. As a result, the contrasting lamp patterns make it easy for the player to understand whether they have won or lost.

At time tk4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W15, turning off the frame lamps to correspond to the performance shown in Figure 100 (k4), in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark.

At time tk5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, lighting the frame lamp in a pattern with the background lit yellow, corresponding to the performance of displaying the normal screen as shown in Figure 100 (k5). Also, at time tk5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referencing the brightness data contained in grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of the SP, the Reach B promotion part]
208 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach B. As shown in Fig. 208, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD12, YD12, LD12, AD12) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 209 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of SP second half reach B. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD12 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figure 209, the frame lamp child table WD12 subdivides the time of the provocative part of SP second half reach B for the frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used to control the frame lamps corresponding to the second half (rising portion) of the role action shown in Figure 171 (h4) to Figure 172 (h10). Specifically, from times th4 to th6, the frame lamps flash yellow in response to the role rising, and then from times th7 to th10, based on grandchild table W3, the frame lamps light up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of SP Reach. This allows the frame lamps to gradually change from flashing yellow to lighting up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of SP Reach B, clearly informing the player that the game has progressed to SP Reach B.

In addition, during times th4 to th10 when the reel rises, lamp control is also performed on reel lamp 9A. For example, during times th4 to th10 when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of reel lamp 9A so that reel lamp 9A is gradually turned off, based on the child table corresponding to the reel rise movement of reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by that child table.

As a result, the lighting pattern of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the accessory rising, while the lighting pattern of the frame lamp draws the player's attention to the screen indicating that the SP has progressed to the latter half of Reach B.

During the 1130 msec interval at time tn5, the 1330 msec interval at time tn14, and the 1560 msec interval at time tn6, grandchild table W3 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamps to light up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 229, in grandchild table W3, the brightness data for the frame lamp switches over one cycle of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At times th7-th10, tn1, and tn5, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which exceeds one cycle, causing the frame lamp to light up yellow for 1130 msec. At time tn14, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which exceeds one cycle, causing the frame lamp to light up yellow for 1330 msec. At time tn6, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W3 for 1560 msec, which exceeds two cycles, causing the frame lamp to light up yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different times for one child table WD12, lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different times. However, by varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different times, the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow can be varied. This allows one child table WD12 to vary the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different times. This reduces the amount of data used for lamp control, while varying the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow, corresponding to the background of an SP reach. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data volume.

Grandchild table W4 is specified for each of the 150 msec intervals of time tn3, tn12, and tn25, and the 210 msec intervals of time tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash in white. At times tn3, tn12, tn25, tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at times tn3, tn12, and tn25, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice; and at times tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different times for one child table WD12, causing the frame lamp to flash in white at multiple different times. However, by varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different times, the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white can be set to two or three times. This allows the number of white flashes to vary while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using a common grandchild table W4 but varying its reference time, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different times. As a result, a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps can be achieved while reducing data capacity.

At time tn27, which marks the end of the hype part of the SP's second half, Reach B, the frame lamp lights up in white, corresponding to the effect of hyping up whether or not to catch the crab at the win/loss branch (jackpot, miss) as shown in Figure 109 (n27). At time tn27, lamp control is performed for up to 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8.

As a result, during the win/loss branch in the provocative part of Reach B in the second half of the SP, the frame lamp remains lit in white with the sound muted, as shown in Figure 109 (n27), making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

Furthermore, in the child table WD12 for the second half of the SP's Reach B provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tn2, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white, corresponding to Jam-chan and Nana-chan, and lights the frame right lamp in red, corresponding to the crab, to correspond to the performance shown in Figure 101 (n2), in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, face off against the crab, located on the right side of the screen. Furthermore, because Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, are speaking, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white.

This means that in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking, the character speaking the lines can be clearly indicated by the frame lamp lighting up/flashing, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative parts in an optimal way.

Furthermore, in the child table WD12 for the Reach B provocation part in the second half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tn18, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame lamp in pink, corresponding to Nana-chan, to correspond to the performance of Nana-chan praying as shown in Figure 106 (n18). Furthermore, at time tn10, when there is dialogue from a character (crab) but no subtitles as shown in Figure 104 (n10), the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame lamp in red, corresponding to the character (crab).

In this way, as shown in Figure 104 (n10), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to effectively show that a character is speaking through the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to effectively see the effects of the provocative part.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach B]
Figure 210 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B.

As shown in Figure 210 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD13, YD13, LD13, AD13) to be referenced when lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is performed.

As shown in Figure 210 (a2), the child table WD13 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B subdivides the time of the winning epilogue portion in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B for the frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD13 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52.

For example, at time to1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The presentation control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in Figure 109 (n27), the frame lamps flash in white, corresponding to the presentation of catching a crab as shown in Figure 110 (o1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in Figure 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white flashing at to1 after a win is confirmed has RGB data of "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch but brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

At times to2 to to5, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, causing the caught crab shown in Figures 110 (o2) to 111 (o5) to act as the store's signboard, creating a performance that will please Jam-chan and Nana-chan, and smoothly lighting up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win.

As shown in Figure 210 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half Reach B stores information specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9, and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is performed.

As shown in Figure 210 (b2), the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach B subdivides the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach B for the frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for the 5000 msec interval between time to6 and time to7. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash in a bright white light corresponding to the display of winning symbols, such as those shown in Figure 111 (o6) and Figure 112 (o7).

At time to8, which marks the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final effect of the winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen, as shown in Figure 112 (o8). At time to8, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp continues to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD13 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, grandchild table W1 is specified for times to2 through to5. Based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, corresponding to an effect in which the caught crab serves as the store's signboard, delighting Jam and Nana. Furthermore, grandchild table W1 is specified for time to8. Based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, corresponding to an effect in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen. In this way, by using a common grandchild table for the winning epilogue used to notify a win and a grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used to control the lamps to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified feel. As a result, the frame lamp can be used to make the effects in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player while reducing data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the second half of the SP when the reach B is missed]
Figure 211 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach B.

As shown in Figure 211 (a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP second half Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced when lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is performed.

As shown in Figure 211 (a2), the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP second half reach B subdivides the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP second half reach B for the frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period.

For example, during the 200 msec period of time tp1, grandchild table W13 is specified. The presentation control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W13, and after the win/fail branch shown in Figure 109 (n27), the frame lamp lights up in white, corresponding to the presentation of failing to catch the crab as shown in Figure 113 (p1).

The white illumination at the win/lose branch (tn27) is based on grandchild table W8 shown in Figure 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white illumination at tp1 after a loss is notified is based on grandchild table W13 shown in Figure 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This means that when a loss occurs, the frame lamp can be lit in a dimmer white color while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white illumination at the win/lose branch (tn27), thereby effectively notifying the player that they have lost.

During the 5,800 msec interval between times tp2 and tp3, grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W14, lighting the frame lamps in a darker white color than tp1, corresponding to the performance shown in Figures 113 (p2) and (p3) in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are disappointed at losing.

The rainbow lighting during a win (to2-to5) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in Figure 225, which will be described later, and its RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, while the dimmer white lighting during a loss (tp2, tp3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in Figure 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting is more pronounced than during a loss, while during a loss, the frame lamp's lighting is more subdued than during a win. As a result, the contrasting lamp patterns make it easy for the player to understand whether they have won or lost.

At time tp4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W15, turning off the frame lamps to correspond to the effect shown in Figure 114 (p4) in which a loss is announced and the screen goes dark.

At time tp5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, lighting the frame lamp in a pattern with the background lit yellow, corresponding to the performance of displaying the normal screen as shown in Figure 114 (p5). Also, at time tp5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referencing the brightness data contained in grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the SP final reach promotion part]
212 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP final reach. As shown in FIG. 212, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP final reach stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD15, YD15, LD15, AD15) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figures 213 and 214 are diagrams illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of an SP final reach. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD15 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figures 213 and 214, the frame lamp child table WD15 subdivides the time of the provocative part of an SP final reach for a frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used to control the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the role operation shown in Figure 171 (h4) to Figure 172 (h10). Specifically, from times th4 to th6, the frame lamps flash yellow in response to the role rising, and then from times th7 to th10, based on grandchild table W3, the frame lamps light up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach. This allows the frame lamps to gradually change from flashing yellow to lighting up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP final reach, clearly informing the player that the game has progressed to the SP final reach.

In addition, during times th4 to th10 when the reel rises, lamp control is also performed on reel lamp 9A. For example, during times th4 to th10 when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of reel lamp 9A so that reel lamp 9A is gradually turned off, based on the child table corresponding to the reel rise movement of reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by that child table.

As a result, the lighting pattern of the accessory lamp 9A prevents the player from being aware of the accessory rising, while the lighting pattern of the frame lamp draws the player's attention to the screen indicating that the SP final reach has been reached.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time tr1, 1330 msec at times tr19 and tr22, and 1560 msec at time tr15. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamps to light up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 229, in grandchild table W3, the brightness data for the frame lamp switches over one cycle of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At times th7 to th10 and tr1, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which exceeds one cycle, causing the frame lamp to light up yellow for 1130 msec. At times tr19 and tr22, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which exceeds one cycle, causing the frame lamp to light up yellow for 1330 msec. At time tr15, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W3 for 1560 msec, which exceeds two cycles, causing the frame lamp to light up yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different times for one child table WD15, lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different times. However, by varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different times, the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow can be varied. This allows one child table WD15 to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow, corresponding to the background of an SP reach, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W3 but varying its reference time, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different times. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data volume.

Furthermore, for child table WD9 used in the provocative part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the provocative part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the provocative part of SP final reach, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the different timings. This makes it possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach while reducing the data volume used for lamp control in multiple reach performances. Similarly, for child table WD2 used in the provocative part of SP first half reach A and child table WD5 used in the provocative part of SP first half reach B, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the different timings. This makes it possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach while reducing the data volume used for lamp control.

Grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time tr36 and for 210 msec at times tr40 and tr47. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash white. Grandchild table W4 is specified at times tr36, tr40, and tr47, but at time tr36, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 over a period of 150 msec, which is shorter than one cycle, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice. At times tr40 and tr47, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 over one cycle of 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different times in one child table WD15, causing the frame lamp to flash in white at multiple different times. However, by varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different times, the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white can be set to two or three times. This allows the number of white flashes to vary while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control by using a common grandchild table W4 but varying its reference time, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different times. As a result, a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps can be achieved while reducing data volume.

Furthermore, for child table WD2 used in the provocative part of SP first half Reach A, child table WD5 used in the provocative part of SP first half Reach B, child table WD9 used in the provocative part of SP second half Reach A, child table WD12 used in the provocative part of SP second half Reach B, and child table WD15 used in the provocative part of SP final Reach, instead of preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the different timings, by using the common grandchild table W4 but varying its reference time, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control while varying the number of white flashes. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tr41, grandchild table W5 or grandchild table W6 is specified. If information to execute a red cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, grandchild table W5 is specified at time tr41, and if information to execute a green cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, grandchild table W6 is specified at time tr41.

Grandchild table W5 corresponds to grandchild tables W5a to W5e for the frame lamp in the common red cut-in brightness data table shown in Figures 233 to 235, which will be described later. As shown in Figures 233 to 235, grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e) specifies the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp as follows: first, data indicating various brightnesses for only the R data at 30 msec intervals; then, data indicating various brightnesses for only the R data at 20 msec intervals; and finally, data indicating various brightnesses for only the R data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W5, lighting the frame lamps in red in accordance with the cut-in performance (red cut-in performance) shown in Figure 128 (r41).

Grandchild table W6 corresponds to grandchild tables W6a-W6e for the frame lamp in the common green cut-in brightness data table shown in Figures 242-244, which will be described later. As shown in Figures 242-244, grandchild table W6 (W6a-W6e) specifies the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp as follows: first, at 30 msec intervals, data indicating various brightnesses for only the G data; next, at 20 msec intervals, data indicating various brightnesses for only the G data; and finally, alternating between 30 msec and 40 msec, data indicating various brightnesses for only the G data. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W6, lighting the frame lamps in green in accordance with the cut-in performance (green cut-in performance) shown in Figure 128 (r41).

As shown in Figures 128 (r40) and (r41), when push button 31B is displayed and a cut-in effect is executed, the character does not speak and subtitles are not displayed. Furthermore, in the SP final reach, the frame lamps that are subject to lamp control in scenes other than the cut-in effect continue to be subject to lamp control in the cut-in effect.

This prevents the display (button display) prompting the player to operate push button 31B to execute the cut-in effect from overlapping with the subtitle display, preventing overlapping of the two and making either display difficult to recognize or causing the player to misinterpret the content of the display. Furthermore, the brightness data for the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for that cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is designed to use the same frame lamps as the lamp control in the hype part of the SP final reach. This prevents unnecessary lamps from lighting up/flashing, which would spoil the aesthetic, and provides a favorable hype part presentation.

In this embodiment, the button display and cut-in effects and other effects in the final SP reach share the same target of lamp control in that they both use frame lamps, but this is not limited to this. For example, the button display and cut-in effects and other effects in the final SP reach may share the same target of lamp control in that they only use one or more game effect lamps 9, such as the frame lamp, the accessory lamp 9A, and the left-of-board lamp 9B, or they may share the same target of lamp control in that they use all game effect lamps 9.

At 860 msec, at times tr49 and tr50, grandchild table W9 is specified. Grandchild table W9 corresponds to grandchild table W9 for the frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table shown in Figure 250, which will be described later. As shown in Figure 250, grandchild table W9 specifies "D00" at 30 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W9, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in red, corresponding to the performance in which stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center, as shown in Figure 131 (r49) and (r50).

During times tr51 to tr54, which are the last time of the promotion part of the SP final reach, grandchild table W10 is specified. Grandchild table W10 corresponds to grandchild table W10 for the frame lamp in the operation promotion brightness data table shown in Figure 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W10, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is specified as "500" or "D00" at 30 msec intervals. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W10, causing the frame lamps to flash red in response to effects such as those urging the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. 131 (r51) to 132 (r54). During times tr51 to tr54, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10 for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to flash red based on the grandchild table W10 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD15 reaches 0.

As a result, at the win/loss branch in the provocative part of the SP final reach, as shown in Figures 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), sounds corresponding to operation prompts and sounds (BGM) corresponding to reach are output, while the frame lamp switches between flashing white, lit red, and flashing red, in succession, enhancing the presentation of prompting the player to operate at the win/loss branch (decisive moment).

Here, if no operation prompt is given to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger), as with child table WD2 used in the provocative part of the first half of SP Reach A, child table WD5 used in the provocative part of the first half of SP Reach B, child table WD9 used in the provocative part of the second half of SP Reach A, and child table WD12 used in the provocative part of the second half of SP Reach B, the frame lamp will remain lit in white at the final win/loss branch of the provocative part, and then the game will move to the win epilogue part or the miss epilogue part. On the other hand, when an operation is prompted to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger), such as with child table WD15 used in the hype part of the SP final reach, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47), the frame lamp flashes white in an effect that provokes the player into wondering whether or not the ally character will catch the explosive chutney, and then as shown in FIG. 130 (r48), the frame lamp lights up red in correspondence with an effect in which the explosive chutney and the ally character are displayed alternately, and then the table switches to grandchild table W9, and based on that grandchild table W9, the frame lamp lights up red in correspondence with an effect in which the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49) and (r50).

In this way, in an SP reach effect where no prompts are given to encourage the player to take action at the win/loss branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp remains lit in white, making it appear as if the effect has stopped, and the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in an SP reach effect where prompts are given to encourage the player to take action at the win/loss branch, sounds corresponding to prompts and sounds (BGM) corresponding to reach are output, and by switching the grandchild table multiple times to control the frame lamp to a mode corresponding to the prompt, the timing of the decision at the win/loss branch can be appropriately presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision at the win/loss branch can be appropriately presented by using different sound and lamp control when no prompts are given at the win/loss branch and when prompts are given. Furthermore, in the SP final reach, which encourages players to make an operation at the win/loss branch, the brightness data (RGB data) switches sequentially between "500" and "D00" at 30msec intervals based on the grandchild table W10. This allows the timing of the win/loss branch to be optimally represented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach hype part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tr2, the presentation control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white corresponding to the six ally characters and lights the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, corresponding to the presentation of six ally characters located on the left side of the screen facing off against Bakuchu, as shown in Figure 115 (r2). Furthermore, because the six ally characters located on the left side of the screen are speaking, the presentation control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white. Also, at time tr3, the presentation control CPU 120 flashes the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, corresponding to the presentation of Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, speaking a line, as shown in Figure 115 (r3).

This means that in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking, the character speaking the lines can be clearly indicated by the frame lamp lighting up/flashing, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative parts in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach stimulation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tr11, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame lamp in blue corresponding to maid A, corresponding to the performance shown in Figure 118 (r11) in which maid A chases a lollipop. Furthermore, at times tr25, tr27, tr29, tr31, tr33, and tr35, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame lamp in the color corresponding to the character when there is a character speaking but no subtitles, as shown in Figures 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29), 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35).

In this way, as shown in Figures 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29), 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/flashes in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to appropriately indicate that a character is speaking, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and allows the player to appropriately see the effects of the provocative part.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach]
FIG. 215 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in Figure 215 (a1), the parent table for the device operation used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach hit stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD16a, YD16a, LD16a, AD16a) to be referenced when controlling the lamp of each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in Figure 215 (a2), the child table WD16a for the role operation used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach is used to subdivide the time of the role operation portion of the frame lamp in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, and specifies the grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16a for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52.

For example, grandchild table W18 is specified for the 10,000 msec period from time ts1 to ts3. Grandchild table W18 corresponds to grandchild table W18 for the frame lamp in the win determination brightness data table shown in Figure 256, which will be described later. As shown in Figure 256, grandchild table W18 sparsely specifies various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp for the first 40 msec, then specifies "333" for the next 30 msec, with this RGB data being specified repeatedly. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W18, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamps to flash in seven colors after the win/loss branch shown in Figure 132 (r54), corresponding to the performance of the falling reel shown in Figure 133 (s1) to (s3).

As shown in Figure 215 (b1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD16b, YD16b, LD16b, AD16b) to be referenced when lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is performed.

As shown in Figure 215 (b2), the child table WD16b for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach subdivides the time of the winning epilogue portion in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach for the frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16b for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52.

For example, from time ts3-2 to ts3-8, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash in white, corresponding to the rising of the reel, in response to the effect shown in Figure 173 (s3-2) to Figure 174 (s3-8), in which the reel rises and a display that resembles catching a Bakuchu appears.

From time ts4 to ts7, grandchild table W1 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamps to smoothly light up in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, corresponding to the effect of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figure 134 (s4) to Figure 135 (s7).

As shown in Figure 215 (c1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach hit stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is performed.

As shown in Figure 215 (c2), the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach subdivides the time for displaying symbols in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach for the frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified between time ts8 and time ts9, which lasts for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash in a bright white light corresponding to the pattern being displayed, in response to the effect of displaying a winning pattern as shown in Figure 135 (s8) and (s9).

At time ts10, which marks the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, corresponding to the effect of the winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 136 (s10). At time ts10, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp continues to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD16 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, grandchild table W1 is specified for times ts4 to ts7, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors to correspond to the effect of catching a Bakuchu. Furthermore, grandchild table W1 is specified for time ts10, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors to correspond to the effect of a winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen. In this way, by using the same grandchild table for the winning notification and the winning symbol display in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used to control the lamps to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the frame lamp can be used to make the effects in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player while reducing data capacity.

Furthermore, in child table WD16 of the SP final reach hit epilogue part, when a role object falls, the frame lamp is controlled so that it alternates between rainbow chromatic colors and achromatic colors (RGB data of "333"). This allows for an effect that emphasizes the jackpot and congratulates the player by occasionally inserting achromatic colors into the rainbow chromatic colors. Then, when an ally character catches a Bakuchu, a smooth rainbow light without achromatic colors interspersed can be used to congratulate the player on the jackpot in a calm manner. As a result, the effects in the SP final reach epilogue part can be viewed optimally by the player.

[Brightness data table used in the SP final reach miss epilogue part]
Figure 216 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the losing epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in Figure 216 (a1), the parent table for the miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD17, YD17, LD17, AD17) to be referenced when lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is performed.

As shown in Figure 216 (a2), the child table WD17 for the miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach subdivides the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP final reach for the frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD17 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52.

For example, during the 200 msec period of time tu1, grandchild table W13 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W13, and after the win/fail branch shown in Figure 132 (r54), the frame lamps are lit in white, corresponding to the effect of the Bakuchu escaping as shown in Figure 137 (u1).

The red flashing at the win/lose branch (tr54) is based on the grandchild table W10 shown in Figure 250, which will be described later, and its RGB data includes "D00," while the white lighting at tu1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in Figure 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This allows the frame lamp to light up in white, which is dimmer than the red flashing at the win/lose branch (tr54), when a loss occurs, thereby effectively notifying the player that they have lost.

During the 3900 msec period of time tr2, grandchild table W14 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W14, lighting the frame lamps in a darker white than tu1, corresponding to the effect shown in Figure 137 (u2) in which six ally characters are disappointed at having lost.

The rainbow lighting during a win (ts4-ts7) is based on grandchild table W1 shown in Figure 225, which will be described later, and its RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, while the dimmer white lighting during a loss (tu1) is based on grandchild table W14, shown in Figure 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting is more pronounced than during a loss, while during a loss, the frame lamp's lighting is more subdued than during a win. As a result, the contrasting lamp patterns make it easy for the player to understand whether they have won or lost.

Furthermore, in child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, like child table WD17 of SP final reach, the frame lamps are lit in the lighting mode for a loss based on the grandchild table W14. However, while the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 5,800 msec in SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, it controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 3,900 msec in SP final reach. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control in a loss is the same between different reaches, the time for lamp control can be varied by referring to the grandchild table. As a result, instead of preparing a grandchild table specifically for when a win occurs for each of the different reaches, the child tables used for each of the different reaches can use the common grandchild table W4 while changing its reference time, thereby reducing the amount of data used for lamp control and varying the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to a loss. As a result, a loss can be notified to the player in an appropriate manner for each of the different reaches.

At time tu3, grandchild table W15 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W15, turning off the frame lamps to correspond to the effect shown in Figure 137 (u3), in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark.

At time tu4, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, lighting the frame lamp in a pattern with the background lit yellow, corresponding to the performance of displaying a normal screen as shown in Figure 138 (u4). Also, at time tu4, lamp control is performed by repeatedly referencing the brightness data contained in grandchild table W21.

[Luminance data table used in each part of the rescue]
Fig. 217 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a part per repair. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD18 for the frame lamp is included in the brightness data table for SP reach described with reference to Fig. 52. As shown in Fig. 217, in the child table WD18 for the frame lamp, the time of the part per repair is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, at 1980 msec of time tv1, grandchild table W16 is specified. Grandchild table W16 corresponds to grandchild table W16 for the frame lamp in the one brightness data table per rescue shown in Figure 254, which will be described later. As shown in Figure 254, in grandchild table W16, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is specified as "D00" for each lamp for the first 30 msec, and "B00" for each lamp for the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W16, lighting the frame lamps in red in accordance with the rescue performance shown in Figure 139 (v1).

In this way, the frame lamps light up even brighter by switching from the lighting mode based on the grandchild table W21 last specified on each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used when a loss occurs to the lighting mode based on the grandchild table W16 first specified on child table WD18 used when a rescue win occurs. As a result, when a rescue win occurs, the frame lamps light up brighter than they did after a loss notification, so the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 makes the loss notification and the subsequent rescue win notification more easily visible to the player.

In this embodiment, after a loss is announced, the frame lamp lights up in yellow, corresponding to the normal background, and then, upon a rescue hit, the frame lamp lights up even brighter in red, corresponding to the rescue effect. However, this is not limited to this configuration. For example, the grandchild table W15 may be specified at the end of each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used upon a loss, and "111" may be specified as the final brightness data (RGB data). As a result, the frame lamp turns off in a white-based color at the end of a loss. Furthermore, "AAA" may be specified as the initial brightness data (RGB data) for the grandchild table W16 specified first of the child table WD18 used upon a rescue hit. As a result, the frame lamp lights up in a bright white-based color at the beginning of a rescue hit after a loss is announced. In this way, when a rescue win occurs, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (white) as it did after a loss notification, but brighter than it did after the loss notification, so the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the loss notification and the subsequent rescue win notification.

At 700 msec of time tv2, grandchild table W17 is specified. Grandchild table W17 corresponds to grandchild table W17 for the frame lamp in the 2-brightness data table per rescue shown in Figure 255, which will be described later. As shown in Figure 255, grandchild table W17 specifies white-based data such as "AAA" or "DDD" for each lamp at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W17, lighting the frame lamps in white to correspond to the whiteout effect shown in Figure 139 (v2).

During the 5000 msec interval between time tv3 and time tv4, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamps to flash in white in accordance with the pattern display performance shown in Figures 140 (v3) and (v4).

At time tv5, which is the last time of the rescue win part, grandchild table W1 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamps to smoothly light up in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in accordance with the pattern display effect shown in Figure 140 (v5). At time tv5, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps will remain lit in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD18 reaches 0.

[Brightness data table used in the re-lottery part]
218 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part. As shown in FIG. 218, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD19, YD19, LD19, AD19) to be referenced during lamp control of each game effect lamp 9.

(Brightness data table used before operation promotion)
219 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-draw part (before the operation is prompted). As shown in FIG. 219, the child table WD19 for the frame lamp includes a child table used before the symbols start moving and a child table used after the symbols start moving. In each child table in the re-draw part, the time of the re-draw part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

Figure 219 (a) shows the child table used just before the symbols start to move. For example, a grandchild table is specified for turning off the frame lamp from times tA6 to tA8. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the specified grandchild table, and as shown in Figures 142 (A6) to 143 (A8), after the re-draw effect has started, the frame lamp is temporarily turned off before the symbols start to move due to the re-draw effect.

In this way, after the frame lamp goes out, it lights up in a lighting mode that corresponds to the effect of the symbols starting to move due to the re-draw effect. Therefore, the lighting mode of the frame lamp clearly conveys to the player that the symbols will start to move due to the re-draw effect.

Figure 219 (b) shows the child tables used after the symbols start to move. At times tA9 and tA10, grandchild table W19 is specified. Grandchild table W19 corresponds to grandchild table W19 for the frame lamp in the re-draw effect brightness data table shown in Figure 257, which will be described later. As shown in Figure 257, grandchild table W19 specifies "F00" and "700" alternately at 60 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W19, causing the frame lamp to flash in red in response to an effect in which the "2" symbol shrinks, as shown in Figures 143 (A9) and 144 (A10).

From time tA11 to tA46, grandchild table W20 is specified. Grandchild table W20 corresponds to grandchild table W20 for the frame lamp in the re-draw effect brightness data table shown in Figure 258, which will be described later. As shown in Figure 258, grandchild table W20 specifies "F00" and "700" alternately at 30 msec intervals, which is shorter than grandchild table W20, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W20, the effect control CPU 120 causes the frame lamps to flash red rapidly in response to the effects in which the patterns change rapidly while switching, as shown in Figures 144 (A11) to 156 (A46).

(Brightness data table used when the design is promoted after the operation is promoted)
Fig. 220 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-draw part (pattern promotion after operation promotion). The frame lamp child table WD20 shown in Fig. 220 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in Fig. 219. As shown in Fig. 220, the frame lamp child table WD20 subdivides the time of the re-draw part for the frame lamp and specifies grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period.

For example, during the 5000 msec period from time tB1 to tB4, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4, and as shown in Figures 157 (B1) to 158 (B4), after an operation prompt is executed in the re-draw part, the frame lamp flashes in white in response to a pattern presentation in which the "3" symbol is enlarged.

From time tB5 to tB9, grandchild table W18 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W18, causing the "3" symbol shown in Figures 157 (B5) to (B9) to be displayed in a reduced size and then at normal size, and the frame lamp to flash in rainbow colors to correspond to an effect in which the "3" symbol flickers and is then confirmed.

Note that the rainbow flashing caused by lamp control from time tB5 to tB9 is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting caused by lamp control based on grandchild table W1. For example, from time tB5 to tB9, the flashing is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting caused by lamp control based on grandchild table W1. From time tB5 to tB9, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp continues to flash in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD20 reaches 0.

In this way, on child table WD20 in the re-draw part, the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-draw is the same as on child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 in the winning epilogue part, where the frame lamp lights up in rainbow colors. However, when the "2" symbol is upgraded to a "3" through the re-draw, the rainbow flashing from times tB5 to tB9 is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the "2" symbol temporarily stops in the winning epilogue part. This allows the frame lamp to light up more effectively to congratulate the player on the promotion of the winning symbol through the re-draw.

Furthermore, when the symbols start to move and sway due to the re-draw effect after the lights go out, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting pattern different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-draw effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W19). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting pattern of the frame lamp for the winning symbol that was provisionally stopped in the winning epilogue part to have been confirmed.

In addition, the frame lamp is designed to flash in rainbow colors when the effect begins, such as when the "3" symbol flickers and is then confirmed, as shown in Figures 159 (B7) to (B9). This makes it easy for the designer to determine when to start flashing the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the flashing rainbow colors that occur when the "3" symbol is displayed swaying as shown in Figure 159 (B7) continues during the symbol determination period as shown in Figures 159 (B8) and (B9). In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the system is designed to directly control the lamps corresponding to the fanfare part without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no need to increase the data capacity.

(Brightness data table used when the design does not increase after the operation is promoted)
Fig. 221 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (after operation promotion). The frame lamp child table WD21 shown in Fig. 221 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in Fig. 219. As shown in Fig. 221, the frame lamp child table WD21 subdivides the time of the re-lottery part for the frame lamp and specifies grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period.

For example, during the 5000 msec period from time tC1 to tC4, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4, and as shown in Figures 161 (C1) to 162 (C4), after an operation prompt is executed in the re-lottery part, the frame lamp flashes in white in response to a pattern presentation in which the "2" symbol is enlarged.

From time tC5 to tC9, grandchild table W1 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamps to light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the effect shown in Figures 162 (C5) to 163 (C9), in which the "2" symbol flickers and then is confirmed. From time tC5 to tC9, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps will remain lit in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD21 reaches 0.

In this way, in child table WD21 of the re-draw part, grandchild table W1 is used in common with child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for lamp control when the final pattern is determined after the re-draw. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for rainbow color illumination for the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control while allowing the player to see a unified presentation even in different parts (timing). As a result, the presentation in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part can be better viewed by the player while reducing data capacity.

In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, then goes out, and the symbol starts moving due to the re-lottery effect. When the symbol is displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting pattern different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in grandchild tables W19 and W20). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting pattern of the frame lamp for the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed.

In addition, when a "2" symbol is upgraded to a "3" through a re-draw, the rainbow lighting from times tB5 to tB9 is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting from times tC5 to tC9 when the "2" symbol remains the same through a re-draw. This allows the player to be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol through the frame lamp lighting pattern when the winning symbol is upgraded through a re-draw. If the winning symbol is not upgraded through a re-draw, the grandchild table W1 used in the winning epilogue part can be used in common with the grandchild table W1, reducing data volume.

In addition, the frame lamp is designed to light up in rainbow colors when the effect begins, in which the "2" symbol becomes normal size and is confirmed after the "2" symbol has finished being displayed as shown in Figures 163 (C7) to (C9). This makes it easy for the designer to determine the start trigger for lighting up the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the rainbow lighting that occurs when the "3" symbol is displayed swaying as shown in Figure 163 (C7) continues during the symbol determination period as shown in Figures 163 (C8) and (C9). In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the system is designed to perform lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no need to increase the data capacity.

[Luminance data table used in the fanfare part]
Fig. 222 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for the fanfare part. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD22 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Fig. 52. As shown in Fig. 222, the frame lamp child table WD22 subdivides the fanfare part time for the frame lamp and specifies the grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period.

For example, at times tD1 and tE1, a grandchild table is specified for turning off the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the specified grandchild table, and temporarily turns off the frame lamp before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in Figure 160 (D1) or Figure 164 (E1).

At times tD2 and tE2, a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamp in fanfare mode. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the specified grandchild table, thereby lighting the frame lamp in fanfare mode in accordance with the fanfare performance, as shown in Figure 160 (D2) or Figure 164 (E2). At times tD2 and tE2, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp will remain lit in fanfare mode based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD22 reaches 0.

[Smooth Rainbow Luminance Data Table]
223 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in the smooth rainbow brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 223, the parent table in the smooth rainbow brightness data table stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WS1, YS1, LS1, AS1) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 224 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table in the smooth rainbow brightness data table. As shown in Figure 224, in the child table in the smooth rainbow brightness data table, for each game effect lamp 9, a grandchild table (W1, Y1, L1, A1) to be referenced during a specific time period is specified.

Figure 225 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a smooth rainbow brightness data table. As shown in Figure 225, in grandchild table W1 for frame lamps, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamps to light up smoothly in the rainbow colors corresponding to confirmed wins.

Figure 226 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for the reel lamp and a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in a smooth rainbow brightness data table. As shown in Figure 226, in the grandchild table Y1 for the reel lamp, "FFFF" data is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table Y1 to light the reel lamp 9A in red. In the grandchild table L1 for the left panel lamp, "FFFFF" data is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the "WWWWW" data output to the left panel lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table L1 to light the left panel lamp 9B in white.

Figure 227 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in a smooth rainbow brightness data table. As shown in Figure 227, in the grandchild table A1 for the attacca lamp, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table A1, causing the attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H to light up smoothly in the rainbow colors corresponding to confirmed wins.

[Data table for red flashing brightness during special feature operation]
228 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a bonus device operation red flashing brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 228, in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp, "A00" is specified for the first 40 msec as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W2, causing the frame lamp to flash red.

[Yellow Haze Luminance Data Table]
229 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 229, grandchild table W3 sparsely specifies "440,""660," and "880" at 180 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamps to light up in a hazy yellow light.

[White flash brightness data table]
230 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a white blinking (white flash) brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately designated at 30 msec intervals as the "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, with the first 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on white), and the last 30 msec being "000" (off). That is, the frame lamp alternates between "off" and "on" over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), causing the frame lamp to flash in white (white flash) multiple times. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash in white.

[Common red cut-in luminance data table]
231 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in the common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 231, the parent table in the common red cut-in brightness data table stores 3970 msec as the time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WS5, YS5, LS5, AS5) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 232 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table in the common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 232, the child table in the common red cut-in brightness data table specifies the grandchild tables (W5 (W5a-W5e), Y5 (Y5a-Y5e), L5 (L5a-L5e), A5 (A5a-A5e)) that are referenced during a specific time period for each game effect lamp 9.

Figures 233 to 235 are diagrams illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figures 233 to 235, grandchild tables W5a, W5b, and W5c specify data indicating various brightness levels for only the R data at 30 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In grandchild table W5d, specify data indicating various brightness levels for only the R data at 20 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In grandchild table W5e, specify data indicating various brightness levels for only the R data, alternating between 30 msec and 40 msec, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild tables W5 (W5a to W5e) to light the frame lamps in red.

Figure 236 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 236, grandchild tables Y5a, Y5b, and Y5c for the reel lamp specify data indicating various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals as the "RRRR" data to be output to reel lamp 9A. Grandchild table Y5d specifies data indicating various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals as the "RRRR" data to be output to reel lamp 9A. Grandchild table Y5e specifies data indicating various brightnesses alternating between 30 msec and 40 msec as the "RRRR" data to be output to reel lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild tables Y5 (Y5a to Y5e), causing reel lamp 9A to light up or flash in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

Figure 237 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for the left board lamp in a common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 237, grandchild tables L5a, L5b, and L5c for the left board lamp specify data indicating various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals as the "WWWWW" data to be output to the left board lamp 9B. Grandchild table L5d specifies data indicating various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals as the "WWWWW" data to be output to the left board lamp 9B. Grandchild table L5e specifies data indicating various brightnesses alternating between 30 msec and 40 msec as the "WWWWW" data to be output to the left board lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild tables L5 (L5a to L5e), causing the left board lamp 9B to light up or flash in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

Figures 238 and 239 are diagrams illustrating an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figures 238 and 239, grandchild tables A5a, A5b, and A5c for the attacca lamp specify data indicating various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric choke lamp 9H. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric choke lamp 9H specify data indicating various brightnesses for only the R data. In grandchild table A5d, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric choke lamp 9H specify data indicating various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric choke lamp 9H are specified as data that indicates various brightness levels for only the R data. In the grandchild table A5e, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric choke lamp 9H are specified as data that indicates various brightness levels alternating between 30 msec and 40 msec. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric choke lamp 9H are specified as data that indicates various brightness levels for only the R data. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild tables A5 (A5a to A5e), causing the attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric choke lamp 9H to light up or flash in the color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

[Common green cut-in luminance data table]
240 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in the common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 240, the parent table in the common green cut-in brightness data table stores 3970 msec as the time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WS6, YS6, LS6, AS6) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 241 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table in a common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 241, in the child table in the common green cut-in brightness data table, grandchild tables (W6 (W6a-W6e), Y6 (Y6a-Y6e), L6 (L6a-L6e), A6 (A6a-A6e)) that are referenced during a specific time period are specified for each game effect lamp 9.

Figures 242 to 244 are diagrams illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figures 242 to 244, grandchild tables W6a, W6b, and W6c specify data indicating various brightness levels for only the G data at 30 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In grandchild table W6d, specify data indicating various brightness levels for only the G data at 20 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In grandchild table W6e, specify data indicating various brightness levels for only the G data, alternating between 30 msec and 40 msec, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild tables W6 (W6a to W6e) to light the frame lamps in green.

Figure 245 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 245, grandchild tables Y6a, Y6b, and Y6c for the reel lamp specify data indicating various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals as the "RRRR" data to be output to reel lamp 9A. Grandchild table Y6d specifies data indicating various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals as the "RRRR" data to be output to reel lamp 9A. Grandchild table Y6e specifies data indicating various brightnesses alternating between 30 msec and 40 msec as the "RRRR" data to be output to reel lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild tables Y6 (Y6a to Y6e), causing reel lamp 9A to light up or flash in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in.

Figure 246 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for the left board lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 246, grandchild tables L6a, L6b, and L6c for the left board lamp specify data indicating various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals as the "WWWWW" data to be output to the left board lamp 9B. Grandchild table L6d specifies data indicating various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals as the "WWWWW" data to be output to the left board lamp 9B. Grandchild table L6e specifies data indicating various brightnesses alternating between 30 msec and 40 msec as the "WWWWW" data to be output to the left board lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild tables L6 (L6a to L6e) to light or flash the left board lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common 6 cut-in.

Figures 247 and 248 are diagrams illustrating an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figures 247 and 248, grandchild tables A6a, A6b, and A6c for the attacca lamp specify data indicating various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric choke lamp 9H. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric choke lamp 9H specify data indicating various brightnesses for only the G data. In grandchild table A6d, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric choke lamp 9H specify data indicating various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric choke lamp 9H are specified as data that indicates various brightness levels for only the G data. In the grandchild table A6e, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric choke lamp 9H are specified as data that indicates various brightness levels alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric choke lamp 9H are specified as data that indicates various brightness levels for only the G data. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild tables A6 (A6a to A6e), causing the attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric choke lamp 9H to light up or flash in the color corresponding to the common green cut-in.

[Data table of tilt brightness when no operation prompt is given]
249 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a non-prompted illuminance data table. As shown in FIG. 249, grandchild table W7 specifies "FDC" and "300" alternately at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W7, causing the frame lamp to flash in white.

In grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W8, causing the frame lamps to light up in white.

[Droplight brightness data table when operation is prompted]
250 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table and the operation prompt brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W9 to light the frame lamps in red.

In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W10, causing the frame lamps to flash in red.

[Shutter brightness data table]
251 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a shutter brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 251, the grandchild table W11 specifies that the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is gradually decreased in brightness from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W11, thereby lighting the frame lamps in red while gradually decreasing the brightness.

In the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W12, causing the frame lamps to light up in red.

[Failed brightness data table]
252 and 253 are diagrams illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a miss brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W13, thereby lighting the frame lamps in white.

In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W14, causing the frame lamps to light up in a white color darker than td1.

As shown in Figure 253, in the grandchild table W15, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is specified as "444" for the first 10 msec, "111" for the next 550 msec, and "111" for the final 600,000 msec (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp by controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W15.

[Relief Luminance Data Table]
254 and 255 are diagrams illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table per rescue. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, "D00" is designated for each lamp in the first 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "B00" is designated for each lamp in the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W17 to light the frame lamps in red.

As shown in Figure 255, in the grandchild table W17, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is specified as white-based data such as "AAA" or "DDD" for each lamp at 30 msec intervals. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W18, causing the frame lamps to light up in white.

[Hit confirmation brightness data table]
256 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a winning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is sparsely specified for various luminances corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) in the first 40 msec, and then "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, with this RGB data being repeatedly specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W18, causing the frame lamps to flash in seven colors.

[Redraw effect brightness data table]
257 and 258 are diagrams illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a re-lottery effect brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately designated at 60 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W19, causing the frame lamp to flash in red.

As shown in Figure 258, in grandchild table W20, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is alternately specified as "F00" and "700" at 30 msec intervals. The performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash in red. In this way, grandchild table W20 is designed to flash the frame lamp in red while switching the brightness data more quickly than grandchild table W19.

[Background luminance data table]
259 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table in the background brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 259, in the child table in the background brightness data table, for each game effect lamp 9, grandchild tables (W21 (W21a, W21b), Y21 (Y21a, Y21b), L21 (L21a, L21b), A21 (A21a, A21b)) to be referenced in a predetermined time period are designated.

Figure 260 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background brightness data table. As shown in Figure 260, grandchild table W21a specifies "550" or "880" as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W21a, causing the frame lamps to light up in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern).

In the grandchild table W21b, "550," "770," or "880" is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21b, causing the frame lamps to light up in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern).

<About referencing brightness data>
The brightness data table has been explained above, but below, the brightness data table used for lamp control after the winning epilogue part will be explained by organizing it according to the performance content.

Figures 268 to 271 are diagrams for explaining the referencing of the brightness data table. As shown in Figure 268, during times ts1 to ts3 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the operation of the reel during the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W18. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W18, and after the win/loss branch shown in Figure 132 (r54), the frame lamp flashes in seven colors in accordance with the performance of the reel falling as shown in Figure 133 (s1) to (s3).

During times ts3-2 to ts3-8 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue during the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash in white corresponding to the rising of the reel, corresponding to the performance in which the reel rises and a display appears that resembles catching a Bakuchu, as shown in Figures 173 (s3-2) to 174 (s3-8).

During times ts4 to ts7 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue during the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W1. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamps to smoothly light up in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, corresponding to the effect of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figure 134 (s4) to Figure 135 (s7).

As shown in Figure 269, during times tA1 to tA4 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for displaying the symbols during the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color corresponding to the display of symbols, corresponding to the performance of displaying winning symbols as shown in Figures 141 (A1) to 142 (A4).

At time tA5 of the winning epilogue part, the child table used to display the symbols during the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W1. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamps to light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the effect of the winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen, as shown in Figure 141 (A5).

As shown in Figure 270, during times tA6 to tA8 of the re-draw part, the child table before the symbols started to move during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table to turn off the lamps. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and as shown in Figures 142 (A6) to 143 (A8), after the re-draw performance has started, the frame lamp is temporarily turned off before the symbols start to move due to the re-draw performance.

At times tA9 and tA10 of the re-draw part, the child table used after the symbol starts moving during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W19. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W19, causing the frame lamp to flash in red in response to an effect in which the "2" symbol shrinks as shown in Figures 143 (A9) and 144 (A10).

During times tA11 to tA46 of the re-draw part, the child table used after the symbols began to move during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20, causing the frame lamp to flash red rapidly in response to effects in which the symbols change and fluctuate rapidly, as shown in Figures 144 (A11) to 156 (A46).

As shown in Figure 271, during times tC1 to tC4 of the re-draw part, the child table for displaying symbols during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W4. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4, and as shown in Figures 161 (C1) to 162 (C4), after an operation prompt is executed in the re-draw part, the frame lamp flashes in white in response to the effect of displaying symbols such as an enlarged "2" symbol.

During times tC5 to tC9 of the re-draw part, the child table used to display the symbols during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 1. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamp to light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the effect of the "2" symbol flickering and then being confirmed, as shown in Figures 162 (C5) to 163 (C9).

During time tE1 of the fanfare part, the child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is specified. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the specified grandchild table, and temporarily turns off the frame lamp before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in Figure 160 (D1) or Figure 164 (E1).

During time tE2 of the fanfare part, the child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamp in fanfare mode. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the specified grandchild table, lighting the frame lamp in fanfare mode in accordance with the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2).

In this way, a predetermined child table is set at each timing of each performance part, and the performance control CPU 120 references the child table set at each timing of each performance part, and controls the lamps corresponding to the performance using the brightness data (for example, RGB data) contained in the grandchild table (brightness data table) specified by that child table.

Note that Figures 268 to 271 illustrate child tables from the winning epilogue through the re-draw part when the symbol does not upgrade to the fanfare part, but for other paths, such as child tables from the winning epilogue through the re-draw part when the symbol upgrades to the fanfare part, predetermined child tables are set at each timing of each performance part, as shown in Figures 192 to 260.

<Description of Characteristic Parts of Lamp Control in Pachinko Game Machine 1>
Next, the characteristics and modifications of the lamp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described in detail.

(Start 9)
As shown in Figure 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open, so the timing when the shutter is fully open can be clearly communicated to the player by the lighting state of the frame lamp. Also, the prodding parts of SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, start with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp turned off, and the frame lamp begins to light up or flash based on the brightness data table corresponding to each SP first half reach. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp begins to light up in accordance with the progress of the presentation in the SP first half reach, so it is possible to clearly communicate to the player that the SP first half reach has started.

(Start 11, Start 14)
193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during times ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is fully closed, the brightness data switches so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as a yellow background, flashing red, flashing white, and then solid red, whereas during times ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is fully closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. This allows the lighting mode of the frame lamp to enhance the presentation of the start part before the shutter closes, and maintaining the lighting mode of the frame lamp while the shutter is closed can draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutter opens, thereby making the presentation of the subsequent excitement part more enjoyable for the player.

(Teasing 7, Teasing 9)
As shown in Figures 64(b8), (b9), 74(e7), 94(i32), 95(i34), 104(n10), 123(r25), (r27), 124(r29), 125(r31), (r33), and 126(r35), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This allows the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 to suitably indicate that the character is speaking, even in scenes without subtitles, and allows the player to suitably view the effects of the hype part.

(Teasing 10)
When a character appears, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to the character. For example, in response to the effect shown in FIG. 63(b4) of Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, facing off against Bakuchu, the left frame lamp is lit in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, and the right frame lamp is lit in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the effect control CPU 120 flashes the left frame lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, in response to the effect shown in FIG. 63(b5) of Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaking a line. At time tb6, the effect control CPU 120 flashes the right frame lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, in response to the effect shown in FIG. 63(b6) of Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, speaking a line. This allows, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering the lines to be suitably expressed by lighting/flashing the frame lamp, and allows the performance in the provocative part to be suitably shown to the player.

(Teasing 17)
The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W3 at different times in a single child table used in the promotional part, lighting the frame lamp in yellow at different times. The time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow can be varied by varying the time for which the lamp control references the grandchild table W3 between the different times. This allows for a single child table WD9 to use a common grandchild table W3 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the different times. This reduces the amount of data used for lamp control by varying the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow, corresponding to the background of the SP reach. As a result, a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps can be achieved while reducing data volume.

(Teasing 18)
The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W4 at different times in a single child table used in the promotional part, causing the frame lamp to flash white at different times. By varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the different times, the number of times the frame lamp flashes white can be set to two or three times. This allows the number of white flashes to vary while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using a common grandchild table W4 and varying the reference time, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the different times. As a result, a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps can be achieved while reducing data capacity.

(Teasing 19)
In each of the child table WD9 used in the hype part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the hype part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the hype part of the SP final reach, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the different timings, so that in the multiple reach performances, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be varied while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control. Similarly, in the child table WD2 used in the hype part of the SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the hype part of the SP first half reach B, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the different timings, so that the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be varied while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control.

(Teasing 20)
In any of the child table WD2 used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD5 used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD9 used in the provocative part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the provocative part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the provocative part of the SP final reach, it is possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing its reference time without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the different timings.As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing the data capacity.

(Teasing cut-in 1)
The brightness data for the cut-in effects and the lamp control in the button displays for said cut-in effects (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is designed to use the same frame lamps as those used for the lamp control in the hype part of the SP final reach. This prevents unnecessary lighting/flashing of lamps from mixing in and spoiling the aesthetic, and provides a suitable hype part.

(True or False 13)
In an SP reach effect in which no operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp remains lit in white, making it appear to the player that the performance has stopped, and the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in an SP reach effect in which operation prompts are given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, sounds corresponding to operation prompts and sounds (BGM) corresponding to reach are output, and further, by switching the grandchild table multiple times to control the frame lamp so that it corresponds to the operation prompt, the timing of the decision at the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision at the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by different sound control and lamp control when no operation prompt is given at the win/loss branch and when operation prompt is given.

(15 correct answers)
In child table WD9 in SP latter half Reach A, there is no operation prompt, and after the frame lamp flashes in white based on grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the win/loss branch in the provocative part of SP latter half Reach A, where there is no operation prompt, the brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W8 is designed to use "FDC" (white lighting), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, so that the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much.

(True or False 17)
In the child table WD15 in the final SP reach, as shown in Figures 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), sounds corresponding to operation prompts and sounds (BGM) corresponding to reach are output, and the frame lamp switches successively from white flashing to red lighting to red flashing, etc., thereby enhancing the presentation of prompting the player to operate at the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

(20% correct or incorrect)
Similarly to the child table WD17 of the SP final reach, the frame lamps on the child table WD4 of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of the SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of the SP second half reach B are lit in a manner that is lit in the event of a loss based on the grandchild table W14. However, while the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 5,800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, it controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 3,900 msec in the SP final reach. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control in the event of a loss is common between different reaches, the time for lamp control by referring to the grandchild table can be varied. This allows the child tables used in each of the different reaches to be used in different situations to be used in different situations, without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to when a win occurs for each of the different reaches, and by using a common grandchild table W4 but changing its reference time, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control while varying the time for lighting the frame lamp in the lighting mode corresponding to a loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in an appropriate manner for each of the different reaches.

(21 correct answers)
The frame lamps are lit in the same color (yellow) and brighter by switching from the lighting mode of the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W26 last specified on each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used when a loss occurs to the lighting mode of the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W16 first specified on the child table WD18 used when a rescue win occurs. As a result, when a rescue win occurs, the frame lamps are lit in the same color (yellow) as after the loss notification and brighter than after the loss notification, so the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 makes the loss notification and the subsequent rescue win notification easier to understand for the player.

(Epilogue 9)
When the role rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the role lamp 9A so as to gradually turn off the role lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the role rising action in the role lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the lighting mode of the role lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the role rising, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes the player pay attention to the screen indicating that the role has developed into the second half of the SP, Reach A.

(Epilogue 26)
In the winning epilogue part, by using a common grandchild table for the grandchild table used when announcing a win and for the grandchild table used when displaying a winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used to control the lamps to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect.As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the amount of data.

(Epilogue 27)
In the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-draw part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for lamp control when the final symbol is determined after the re-draw. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for rainbow color illumination for the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control while allowing the player to see a unified effect even in different parts (timings). As a result, the effects in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part can be better viewed by the player while reducing data capacity.

(Re-lottery effect 2)
As shown in Figure 142 (tA6), when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow colors in the winning epilogue part, before the re-draw performance is executed, the frame lamp goes out once and then lights up in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-draw performance, so the lighting mode of the frame lamp can clearly inform the player that the re-draw performance is about to begin.

(Re-draw effect 7, re-draw effect 14, re-draw effect 16)
When the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, then goes out, and a re-lottery effect is executed, during which the symbol sways. Based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery effect (e.g., RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp flashes red in a different lighting pattern from the smooth rainbow colors. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been confirmed based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the rainbow lighting when the "3" or "2" symbol sways is continued during the subsequent symbol confirmation period. Thus, during the short symbol confirmation period, the system is designed to directly control the lamps corresponding to the fanfare part without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, thereby eliminating the need for excessive data capacity.

(Re-draw effect 19)
In the child table WD21 of the re-draw part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for lamp control when the final symbol is determined after the re-draw. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control while allowing the player to see a unified effect even in different parts (timings). As a result, the effects in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part can be seen better by the player while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-draw performance 20)
In child table WD20 in the re-draw part, the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-draw is to have the frame lamp light up in the same rainbow colors as child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 in the winning epilogue part, but the rainbow lighting from times tB7 to tB9 when the symbol "2" is upgraded to a "3" through the re-draw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the symbol "2" temporarily stops in the winning epilogue part. This allows the player to be more effectively congratulated on the upgrade of the winning symbol through the re-draw by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

<Detailed explanation of lamp control>
Next, with reference to Figures 261 to 263, the characteristics of the lamp control described above that deserve special mention will be described in detail.

[Comparison of lamp control when winning and losing]
Figures 261 to 263 are diagrams for explaining the comparison of the lamps when you win and when you lose.

First, referring to Figure 261, lamp control during a loss will be explained. As shown in Figure 261, at the end of the provocative part of each of the SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W8, lighting the frame lamps in white in response to the performance of the win/loss branch (decisive moment). Furthermore, at the end of the provocative part of the SP final reach, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W10, causing the frame lamps to flash in red in response to the performance of the win/loss branch (decisive moment).

After that, in the losing epilogue part, which follows the teasing parts of the SP first half reach A and B, SP second half reach A and B, and SP final reach, lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W13. In the grandchild table W13, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is specified as "888" for the first 10 msec, and "444" for the next 190 msec. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the effect control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in white after the win/loss branch, corresponding to an effect in which an ally character is defeated in the reach effect.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W13, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W14. In grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W14, the effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in a dimmer white than the white light based on grandchild table W13, corresponding to the effect of an ally character feeling disappointed.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W14, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W15. In grandchild table W15, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is specified as "444" for the first 10 msec, "111" for the next 550 msec, and "111" for the final 600,000 msec (10 minutes). By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W15, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is announced and the screen goes dark.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W15, as explained with reference to Figure 190, lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching), and then lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W26, which was also used in the start part before the reach. In grandchild table W26, data corresponding to a yellow pattern corresponding to the normal background is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W26, the performance control CPU 120 lights the frame lamps in yellow corresponding to the normal background (yellow background lighting pattern), just as in the start part before the reach.

Next, referring to Figure 262, we will explain the lamp control when a win occurs when transitioning to the winning epilogue part via the teasing part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B.

As shown in Figure 262, at the end of the provocative part of each of the SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W8, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in white in accordance with the performance of the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part after passing through the provocative parts in each of the SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W19. In the grandchild table W19, "FFF" is specified for the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, the effect control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash white in response to an effect in which the ally character wins.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W19, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W1. In grandchild table W1, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as data of various brightness levels corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors). By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W1, the performance control CPU 120 smoothly lights up the frame lamps in the rainbow colors corresponding to confirmed wins.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W1, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W21. In grandchild table W21, "AAA" is assigned to each lamp in turn at 20 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and finally "000" is assigned to each lamp at 600,000 msec (10 minutes). By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in a bright white color corresponding to the pattern, corresponding to the effect of producing a winning pattern.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W21, lamp control is again performed based on grandchild table W1. By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W1, the effect control CPU 120 smoothly lights up the frame lamps in rainbow colors, corresponding to an effect in which the winning symbol is ultimately displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, referring to Figure 263, we will explain lamp control when a win occurs when transitioning from the teasing part to the winning epilogue part during the SP final reach.

As shown in Figure 263, at the end of the provocative part of the SP final reach, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W10, causing the frame lamps to flash red in response to the performance of the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part after passing through the teasing part in the final SP reach, lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W20. In the grandchild table W20, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is sparsely specified with various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) for the first 40 msec, and then "333" is specified for the next 30 msec, with this RGB data being specified repeatedly. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W20, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash in seven colors in response to the performance of a falling reel.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W20, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W1. By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W1, the performance control CPU 120 smoothly lights up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to confirmed wins.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W1, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W21. By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the pattern being displayed, corresponding to the effect of displaying a winning pattern.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W21, lamp control is again performed based on grandchild table W1. By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W1, the effect control CPU 120 smoothly lights up the frame lamps in rainbow colors, corresponding to an effect in which the winning symbol is ultimately displayed in the center of the screen.

The following describes the distinctive features of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 261 to 263.

(True or False 19)
As shown in FIG. 261 , when a transition is made to the loss epilogue part via the provocative part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the provocative part is "FDC," while the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the loss epilogue part is "888" or "444." This allows the frame lamp to be illuminated in a dimmer white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the win/lose branch, thereby conveniently informing the player that a loss has occurred. Furthermore, when a transition is made to the loss epilogue part via the provocative part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the provocative part includes "D00," while the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the loss epilogue part is "888" or "444." As a result, when the SP final reach is a miss, the frame lamp can be lit in white, which is dimmer than the red flashing at the win/loss branch, so that the player can be notified that he has missed in an appropriate manner.

(Reel action 1)
As shown in Figures 262 and 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1, and their RGB data switches every 30 msec. In contrast, as shown in Figure 261, in the case of a loss, the frame lamps light up dimly in white based on the grandchild table W14, and their RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than the interval during a win. As a result, the frame lamps' lighting colors switch more quickly during a win than during a loss, making it easier for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamps. Furthermore, the lighting of the frame lamps during a win is more pronounced than during a loss, while the lighting of the frame lamps during a loss is more subdued than during a win. As a result, the contrasting lamp patterns make it easier for the player to understand whether they have won or lost.

(Reel action 2)
As shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, when a special feature falls, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and lights up alternately between rainbow chromatic and achromatic colors (RGB data of "333"). This allows for the occasional achromatic color to be interspersed with the rainbow chromatic colors, emphasizing the jackpot and congratulating the player. Then, when a friendly character wins, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and lights up in smooth rainbow colors without interspersing achromatic colors, allowing for the player to be calmly congratulated on the jackpot. As a result, the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be viewed favorably by the player.

(Regarding the swinging pattern of the design)
Here, the fluctuation patterns of the symbols will be explained in detail using FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation patterns of the symbols. During the symbol fluctuation period in the aforementioned provocative part and re-lottery part, the decorative symbols move as shown in the first to third modes shown in FIG. 264(a) or as shown in the first to third modes shown in FIG. 264(b). Specifically, the first mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative symbols are located in the center of the screen. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative symbols are located above the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative symbols are located below the first mode.

The first mode shown in Figure 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located in the center of the screen when viewed from the front. The second mode shown in Figure 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated clockwise around the vertical axis, with the center of the decorative pattern facing more left than in the first mode. The third mode shown in Figure 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated counterclockwise around the vertical axis, with the center of the decorative pattern facing more right than in the first mode.

(Variations of re-lottery effects)
FIG. 265 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the re-lottery effect. FIG. 265(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the re-lottery effect using the 7 symbol. FIG. 265(B) is a timing chart of each re-lottery effect. As shown in FIG. 265(A), the symbol is enlarged as shown in (D1) and (D2), and then reduced as shown in (D3) and (D4). Then, as shown in (D5), the symbol returns to its normal size. Then, as shown in (D6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect begins. After that, as shown in (D7), a period of swinging occurs in which the symbol swings up and down. Then, from (D8) to (D9), the "7" symbol is displayed in a reduced size.

After that, as shown in (D10), a button image and time gauge are faintly displayed below the "7" symbol. After that, as shown in (D11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "7" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases over time. The time gauge is a display that indicates the valid period for button operation. If the player operates push button 31B from the state shown in (D12), the "7" will rapidly fluctuate, alternating between a faint display and a clear display, as shown in (D13) to (D20). Similar rapid fluctuations are repeated after (D20).

As shown in Figure 265 (B) and the timing chart for each re-lottery effect, the symbol advance period when a re-lottery effect in which symbols change rapidly in response to button operation is executed is the same for all re-lottery effects. Here, there are three types of re-lottery effects: a first re-lottery effect in which even symbols change to odd symbols; a second re-lottery effect in which even symbols remain unchanged; and a third re-lottery effect in which 7 symbols remain unchanged. For example, in the first re-lottery effect, if the button is operated immediately after it becomes operable and the symbol advance effect is started, there is a period (t1) in which the decorative symbols shake after the symbol advance period ends, and then the symbol is finalized.

Furthermore, in the second re-draw effect, if the button is operated t2 after the button can be operated and the symbol advance effect is initiated, there will be a decorative symbol fluctuation period (t1-t2) after the symbol advance period ends, and then the symbol is finalized. Furthermore, in the third re-draw effect, if the button is operated t1 after the button can be operated and the symbol advance effect is initiated, there will be no decorative symbol fluctuation period after the symbol advance period ends, and the symbol is finalized. In this way, the symbol advance period is constant regardless of the timing of the button operation, and the time from the subsequent symbol fluctuation period to the symbol determination is used to absorb the time up to the button operation. This relationship is the same regardless of whether the button is operated in any of the first through third re-draw effects.

[About re-draw performances 26-28]
The characteristic parts of the re-drawing part will be numbered and explained.

(Variations of re-lottery effects)
FIG. 266 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the re-draw effect. As shown in (K1) to (K3) of FIG. 266, regardless of when the button is pressed during the winning/losing determination scene, the decorative symbols move in the same way after the whiteout. Specifically, if the button is pressed immediately after the prompt display as shown in (K1), the reel moves and the winning epilogue part is executed, and the symbols are displayed in the epilogue part as shown in (K4). After that, 5 seconds into the symbol shaking period, the three symbols face forward as shown in (K5).

Also, as shown in (K2), if the button is pressed one second after the prompt display is displayed when the win or loss is determined, the reel will move and the winning epilogue part will be executed, and the symbol will be displayed in the epilogue part as shown in (K4). After that, four seconds into the symbol fluctuation period, the three symbols will be facing left from the front as shown in (K6). Also, as shown in (K3), if the button is pressed two seconds after the prompt display is displayed when the win or loss is determined, the reel will move and the winning epilogue part will be executed, and the symbol will be displayed in the epilogue part as shown in (K4). After that, three seconds into the symbol fluctuation period, the three symbols will be facing right from the front as shown in (K7).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the symbol will be in a forward position after the symbol shaking period; at the second operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing left after the symbol shaking period; and at the third operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing right after the symbol shaking period. However, even if the symbol orientation differs depending on the operation timing during the symbol shaking period, a common effect is then executed, as shown in (K8) to (K17), in which the symbol is rotated and reduced after a whiteout. Then, after (K17), a symbol advance effect is executed. Note that although Figure 266 was explained using odd-numbered symbols, similar effects are also executed for even-numbered symbols.

(Re-draw effect 26)
As shown in FIG. 266, when an image showing the stick controller 31A and a time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, regardless of the timing of operation, a period of time for the symbols to sway to absorb the weight may be provided during the time until the predetermined timing at which the re-lottery effect is executed (the symbol swaying period from (K4)). Then, when the predetermined timing arrives and the re-lottery effect is executed, a common effect accompanied by a whiteout, as shown in (K8) to (K17), may be executed. In this way, regardless of the timing of operation of the stick controller 31A, the symbols are first displayed swaying, then the common effect accompanied by a whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery effect is executed. This prevents the movement of the symbols at the start of the re-lottery from feeling unnatural, and allows the series of effects to appear favorably.

(Re-draw effect 27)
The time from when the whiteout screen appears until the re-lottery effect is executed may be the same for any of the multiple reach effects. This allows the data volume of the effect data to be reduced.

(Re-draw effect 28)
The movement of the symbols after the whiteout screen may be an extension of the movement of the symbols before the whiteout screen. For example, if the movement of the symbols before the whiteout screen was a swaying movement around an axis centered on the vertical direction of the symbols, the movement after the whiteout screen may be a clockwise rotation around an axis centered on the vertical direction of the symbols while expanding. In this way, by displaying a whiteout between the movements that are an extension of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from feeling unnatural, and to make the series of effects look good.

(Re-draw effect 29)
Among the multiple SP reaches, there are some that do not prompt operation such as button operation at the branch point when determining whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state. In such SP reaches, no time shift occurs due to the operation. However, even in such SP reaches, it is sufficient to execute a re-draw effect similar to that of an SP reach that does cause time shift. In this way, a common effect can be used regardless of whether or not there is time shift, so that there is no sense of incongruity even when there is only one re-draw effect. Furthermore, by limiting the re-draw effect to one, data volume can be reduced.

(Re-draw effect 30)
As shown in FIG. 266, the timing of the movement of the symbols after the whiteout screen is set so that it is an extension of the movement of the symbols before the whiteout screen. For example, the movement of the symbols before the whiteout screen is designed to be one of a series of movements in which the symbols move from the right position (K3) to the front position (K5) and then to the left position (K6). In other words, when the symbols are swinging clockwise in one of a series of movements, the whiteout by the re-lottery effect is executed, and then the symbols expand and continue to rotate clockwise. In this way, the series of clockwise movement of the symbols from the swinging period to the re-lottery effect can prevent the movement of the symbols from feeling unnatural.

[About re-draw performances 21-25]
The characteristic parts of the re-drawing part will be numbered and explained.

(Variations of re-lottery effects)
FIG. 267 illustrates a modified example of the re-draw effect. (L1) illustrates the case where the button is pressed earlier after the action prompt is displayed during the symbol advance period. (L2) illustrates the case where the button is pressed later than (L1) after the action prompt is displayed. (L3) illustrates the case where the button is pressed later than (L2) after the action prompt is displayed. As shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, the symbol appears in the same manner regardless of the timing of button press during the symbol advance period in the re-draw effect. After that, the decorative symbols, sandwiched between whiteouts, move in the same manner and then stop. Specifically, if the button is pressed immediately after the action prompt is displayed as shown in (L1), the symbols appear as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then return to their normal size. Then, as shown in (L6), the symbols begin to sway, and after a predetermined period, the three symbols face rightward rather than forward, as shown in (L7).

Also, as shown in (L2), if the button is operated later than (L1) after the action prompt is displayed, the symbols will be displayed as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the symbols will return to their normal size. Then, as shown in (L6), the symbols will start to shake, and after a shorter symbol shaking period than (L1), the three symbols will be facing to the right rather than forward, as shown in (L8). Also, as shown in (L3), if the button is operated later than (L2) after the action prompt is displayed, the symbols will be displayed as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the symbols will return to their normal size. Then, as shown in (L6), the symbols will start to shake, and after a shorter symbol shaking period than (L2), the three symbols will be facing forward, as shown in (L9).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the symbol will be positioned facing right after the symbol shaking period; at the second operation timing, the symbol will be positioned facing left after the symbol shaking period; and at the third operation timing, the symbol will be positioned facing forward after the symbol shaking period. However, even if the symbol orientation differs depending on the operation timing during the symbol shaking period, a common effect is then executed in which the symbol shrinks while rotating after a whiteout, as shown in (J1) to (J10). Then, the symbol stops after the symbol shaking period, as shown in (J11) to (J17). Note that although Figure 267 uses odd-numbered symbols for explanation, similar effects are also executed for even-numbered symbols.

(Re-draw effect 21)
In a modified example, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, an action prompt display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed while the symbols of the re-lottery effect are being sent. During the period in which the action prompt display is displayed, the player operates the push button 31B, resulting in the execution of a common symbol display effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common symbol display effect involving the expansion and contraction of the symbols, as shown in (L4) to (L5), is executed. Thereafter, the symbols are swayed during a symbol sway period. The symbol sway period differs depending on the timing of the button operation. Thus, after the symbol sway period, for example, the symbols may be positioned facing right at the first operation timing, the symbols may be positioned facing left at the second operation timing, and the symbols may be positioned facing forward at the third operation timing. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is sandwiched between (J1) to (J18) as a common effect thereafter, and an effect in which the symbols rotate, shrink, and then sway is executed. By performing the common effect regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, the symbols can be stopped cleanly, and the series of effects can be viewed in a favorable manner.

(Re-draw effect 22)
When the push button 31B is operated at a first timing during the valid operation period, a notification of whether or not the player will be promoted is made, followed by a display of swaying decorative symbols (an example of no operation in FIG. 267 (L3)). When the push button 31B is operated at a second timing earlier than the first timing during the valid operation period, a notification of whether or not the player will be promoted is made, followed by a display of swaying decorative symbols that is extended by the amount of time that it was earlier than the first timing (an example of operation in FIG. 267 (L2)). When the push button 31B is operated at a third timing earlier than the second timing during the valid operation period, a notification of whether or not the player will be promoted is made, followed by a display of swaying decorative symbols that is extended by the amount of time that it was earlier than the second timing (an example of operation in FIG. 267 (L1)). In this way, regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, the duration of the effect can be absorbed by the duration of the effect due to the swaying of the symbols. By subsequently performing a common effect, the symbols can be stopped cleanly, and the series of effects can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Re-draw effect 23)
As shown in Fig. 267, after a whiteout is executed as a common effect, a different effect from the previous pattern is executed in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once. By doing this, regardless of the position of the pattern in the swaying of the scale absorption pattern, by executing a different mode of effect after the whiteout, it is possible to avoid creating a sense of incongruity in the flow of the effect until the pattern stops.

(Re-draw performance 24)
As shown in FIG. 267, during the symbol swing period, the symbols swing backward from (J10) to (J12), then swing forward from (J13) to (J14), returning to their initial positions. Then, the symbols swing forward from (J15) to (J16), and then swing backward from (J17) to (J18), returning to their initial positions. This series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the symbol determination period, the symbols are designed to always be positioned in their initial positions facing forward, as shown at (J18). This allows the symbols to be fixed and stopped in a manner that does not cause discomfort to the player.

(Re-draw effect 25)
The game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in rainbow colors at the timing of whiteout at (J1) in FIG. 267. The timing at (J1) is an effect that is executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point at which such a common effect is executed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, it is easy for the designer to determine the start trigger. Note that the start trigger may be the timing at (J2) when the common start display starts, rather than the timing at (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed effect.

<Main components and effects>
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are listed individually.

(F2019-116)
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body (for example, a role-playing device, movable body 32),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled (for example, a notification effect that notifies whether or not a jackpot is being won),
The notification performance includes an introductory part (for example, a provocation part) until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a win/loss notification part in which the result of whether or not the game will be controlled is notified (for example, a win/loss notification part in a win epilogue part in which a jackpot is notified by moving a role device), and an epilogue part (for example, a win epilogue part) that is executed after the win/loss notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introductory part, the sound of a character's lines is output, and the first character whose lines are displayed in subtitles in response to the sound of the lines is an ally character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 115 (r2)).
The display means, at the timing of transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing notification part, displays an introduction display of a prompting display that prompts a specific action in relation to the performance display in the introduction part, making it difficult to see the performance display, and then displays the prompting display in a state where the performance display is visible (for example, the examples shown in Figures 131 (r49) to 132 (r54)),
In the winning/losing notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from a first position (for example, a retreated position) to a second position (for example, an advance position) on the front side of the display means (for example, the example shown in FIG. 133),
The display means
When the movable body advances to the second position, an effect display for moving the movable body is performed, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, the effect display is terminated and a display corresponding to the epilogue part is performed (for example, the examples shown in Figures 173 and 174).
In the epilogue part, a final line subtitle is displayed in response to the final line sound uttered by the character, and then, after the display of the final line subtitle is completed, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area (for example, the examples shown in Figures 134 to 136).
In the epilogue part, the proportion of dialogue subtitles displayed for the lines spoken by the characters is higher than the proportion of dialogue subtitles displayed for the lines spoken by the characters in the introduction part (for example, the example shown in Figure 175).

Specifically, the character that speaks first in each SP Reach as a provocative part is an ally character (e.g., Figure 115 (r2)). This allows the player to accurately identify the ally character when the SP Reach begins. Furthermore, when transitioning from the provocative part to the win/loss notification part, the introductory image of the trigger display encouraging the player to operate the trigger is displayed with priority over the display of the provocative part's effects, making the provocative part's effects invisible. The image for operating the trigger button and the effects of the provocative part then become visible (e.g., Figure 131 (r48)-(r51)). This allows the introductory image to create impact, while the transition from the introductory image to the trigger button allows the player to confirm the effects of the provocative part, thereby exciting the player. Furthermore, the aesthetic appeal of the display can be maintained during the flow of effects, as the winning and epilogue parts become background displays until the retraction of the reels is complete. Furthermore, in the winning epilogue part, the image is enlarged after the display of the final dialogue subtitle has finished, preventing the subtitle display from overlapping the image and preventing the image from being mistaken for a message. Furthermore, the aforementioned provocation part, which teases whether the player has won or lost, is updated with a plot in which the friendly and enemy characters alternate in battle (e.g., SP First Half Reach B and SP Second Half Reach B). Such provocation part scenes include scenes in which friendly characters suffer damage. Furthermore, the plot of such provocation parts has a faster image display switching interval and a greater number of image switching times than the epilogue part. This allows the provocation part to be presented more favorably by developing faster in the provocation part than the epilogue part. Furthermore, in the winning epilogue part, which develops more slowly, the subtitles are clearly displayed, making it easier to understand what the characters are saying and emphasizing the sense of celebration. Additionally, in fast-paced promotional sections, the primary focus is on conveying the content through video changes, while supplementary subtitles are displayed without interfering with the video progression. This allows the entire production to be presented optimally.

(F2019-117)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are a time when a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character and a time when a dialogue subtitle is not displayed,
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 175, the proportion of subtitles displayed for character dialogue in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in the SP reach part, which is the hype part. This means that by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is easier to understand what the characters are saying. Furthermore, in a successful epilogue part, subtitles can enhance the feeling of celebration. Furthermore, since there are more screen changes in the hype part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time may be shorter, which prevents the auxiliary subtitle display from interfering with the presentation, and allows the primary focus to be on conveying the presentation through image changes. This allows for optimal presentation in the hype part.

(F2019-118)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success/failure is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the success/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-lottery effect can be executed among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, it is possible to execute a second re-draw effect among the plurality of types of re-draw effects, in which the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
Execute the first re-draw effect or the second re-draw effect using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light emitting mode to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode continuously even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery effect begins using the "2" symbol. When the re-extraction effect begins, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-lottery effect begins to change from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol advance effect is executed in which the symbols are swapped by rapid change from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and when the re-lottery effect begins, the symbol advance effect is executed using the symbol that was temporarily stopped, making it easy for the player to understand which decorative symbol the re-lottery started from. As a result, the flow of the series of effects can be clearly seen.

(F2019-119)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success/failure is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the success/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect can be executed in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery effect can be executed among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the replacement display is performed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the second symbol in the second half part,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the first symbol in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light emitting mode to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode continuously even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare effect, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery effect begins using the "2" symbol. When the re-extraction effect begins, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-lottery effect begins to change from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol advance effect is executed in which the symbols are swapped through rapid changes starting from the "2". During the re-lottery effect, all decorative symbols are advanced in sequence: "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "7," and "1," after which the "2" symbol is displayed again, resulting in a symbol advance effect. In this way, the re-lottery effect begins using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed, and after multiple types of decorative symbols are changed, the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again. This allows the flow of the series of effects to be clearly seen by the symbol advance effect, which shows all decorative symbols without immediately displaying the final display result.

(F2019-120)
(5) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success/failure is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the success/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect can be executed in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-drawing effects, a second re-drawing effect can be executed in which the replacement display is performed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a repeat display is performed in which the second symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is repeatedly displayed, and a third re-lottery performance is executed in which the second symbol is displayed again in the second half part,
The first re-drawing effect, the second re-drawing effect, and the third re-drawing effect are configured to have the same duration,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light emitting mode to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode continuously even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect.

Specifically, there are patterns in which an even number symbol (e.g., symbol 2) is displayed followed by an even number symbol (e.g., symbol 2), and patterns in which an even number symbol (e.g., symbol 2) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., symbol 3). In addition, there may be a pattern in which an odd number symbol (e.g., symbol 7) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., symbol 7). In an effect in which symbols are transferred from odd number symbols to odd number symbols, it is sufficient that the same odd number symbol is transferred in all symbol transfers. However, in either pattern, the length of the symbol transfer period in the re-draw effect can be designed to be the same. This allows for an optimal re-draw effect in either pattern without increasing data capacity.

(F2019-121)
(6) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success/failure is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the success/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-lottery effect can be executed among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, it is possible to execute a second re-draw effect among the plurality of types of re-draw effects, in which the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
When the first symbol is displayed once in the epilogue part and when the first symbol is displayed again in the latter half of the second re-draw performance, the first symbol is displayed with the same or substantially the same animation;
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light emitting mode to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode continuously even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect.

Specifically, the symbol display in the aforementioned Fig. 141 (A1) to Fig. 142 (A5) portions and the symbol display in Fig. 161 (C1) to Fig. 162 (C5) portions are executed using approximately the same images. Specifically, the same images are used for the symbol display and effect images of the "2" symbol, and the symbol display is executed in a manner in which the background is different. This allows the symbol display images to be approximately the same, making it easy for the player to understand that the symbol has not been upgraded to a probability variable symbol. Note that the image of the symbol display portion, including the background, may be exactly the same.

(F2019-122)
(7) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success/failure is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the success/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-lottery effect can be executed among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, it is possible to execute a second re-draw effect among the plurality of types of re-draw effects, in which the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the latter half of the period from when the first pattern is displayed again until a pattern determination period begins, a swinging display is performed in which the first pattern is displayed as if it is swinging by changing the display mode of the first pattern among a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode;
In the latter half part, from when the second pattern is displayed until the pattern determination period begins, a swinging display is performed in which the second pattern is displayed as if swinging by changing the display mode of the second pattern among the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode;
The first mode is a mode in which a player can more easily visually recognize the symbols than either the second mode or the third mode,
The performance execution means
In the re-lottery part, an action prompting display for prompting the player to take an action can be executed,
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-draw performance, if an action is performed at a first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a swinging display while maintaining a swinging speed of the swinging display of the second symbol so that the second symbol will be in the second mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the first re-draw performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-drawing performance, if the action is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a swinging display while maintaining a swinging speed of the swinging display of the second symbol so that the second symbol will be in the third mode when the predetermined timing comes after the performance corresponding to the first re-drawing performance is executed,
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-lottery performance, whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is made from the predetermined timing such that the swaying display of the second symbol is difficult to see, and then the second symbol is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when the symbol determination period begins, the second symbol is displayed stopped in the first mode while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the second symbol,
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-draw performance, if an action is performed at the first timing, the first symbol is displayed in a swinging display while maintaining a swinging speed of the swinging display of the first symbol so that the first symbol will be in the second mode when the predetermined timing comes after the performance corresponding to the second re-draw performance is executed,
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-draw performance, if an action is performed at the second timing, the first symbol is displayed in a swinging display while maintaining a swinging speed of the swinging display of the first symbol so that the first symbol will be in the third mode when the predetermined timing comes after the performance corresponding to the second re-draw performance is executed,
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-lottery performance, whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is performed from the predetermined timing in which the swaying display of the first symbol is made difficult to see, and then the first symbol is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when the symbol determination period begins, the first symbol is displayed stopped in the first mode while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first symbol,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light emitting mode to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode continuously even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of Figure 267, an action prompt display consisting of a button image and a time gauge is displayed while the symbols are being fed in the re-lottery effect. During the period in which the action prompt display is displayed, the player operates push button 31B, resulting in the execution of a common symbol display effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of the timing at which push button 31B is operated, a common symbol display effect involving the expansion and contraction of the symbols, as shown in (L4) to (L5), is executed. Subsequently, the symbols are swayed during the symbol sway period. The symbol sway period differs depending on the timing of the button operation. Thus, after the symbol sway period, for example, the symbols may be positioned facing right at the first operation timing, the symbols may be positioned facing left at the second operation timing, and the symbols may be positioned facing forward at the third operation timing. However, regardless of the operation timing, a common effect is then executed from (J1) to (J18), which is a whiteout effect, followed by a swinging effect after the symbols rotate and shrink. This means that regardless of the timing of push button 31B operation, the common effect can be executed, allowing the symbols to stop cleanly and the series of effects to look optimal.

(F2019-126)
(8) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The introduction part is
a scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed;
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and no dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed is configured so that brightness data using an emission color corresponding to the character is switched in accordance with the action of the character.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 168 to 170, there are scenes in the promotional section where a character speaks lines but no subtitles are displayed (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in these specific scenes, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. In this way, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can emphasize the effect even in scenes where no subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound. This allows the effect corresponding to the character to be executed appropriately, and the promotional section can be viewed appropriately by the player. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 64 (b8), (b9), 74 (e7), 94 (i32), 95 (i34), 104 (n10), 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29), 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to appropriately indicate that a character is speaking, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and allows the player to appropriately view the effects of the provocative part.

(F2019-127)
(9) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to the scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.

Specifically, the operation of the reel may switch the presentation from the start of the reach to the SP first half reach presentation. Furthermore, an effect image corresponding to the reel operation may be displayed as the reel falls. Subsequently, as the reel rises, the display may gradually switch from the effect image corresponding to the reel operation to a screen corresponding to the SP first half reach. Furthermore, as the reel rises, the brightness data table may be switched from the brightness data table for the reel operation part to the brightness data table for the SP first half reach. Furthermore, as the reel rises, a sound corresponding to the SP first half reach may be output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel operation is displayed assuming that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented from being impaired. Additionally, as the reel rises, the brightness data table for the sound effects and game effect lamp 9 is switched to one that corresponds to the first half of the SP, allowing the provocative part of the first half of the SP to be displayed optimally.

(F2019-128)
(10) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means
In the introductory part, a prompt is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in is displayed.
In the introductory part, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output, and a dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means in response to the dialogue sound;
At the timing when the promotion display is performed in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area,
the brightness data table includes a cut-in display brightness data table corresponding to the cut-in display and an introduction part brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part,
The light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for cut-in display includes at least the same portions as the light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for the introduction part.

Specifically, the brightness data for the lamp control in the cut-in effects and button displays for those cut-in effects (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, and W6) is designed to use the same frame lamps as the lamp control in the hype part of the SP final reach. This prevents unnecessary lighting/flashing of lamps from mixing in and marring the aesthetic, and provides an optimal hype part effect.

(F2019-129)
(11) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
During the period before the transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing notification part in the first notification performance,
the display means displays a prompt to prompt a specific action by the player,
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a first notification performance brightness data table,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing notification part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not display the prompting display for prompting the specific action, but displays a win/lose provocation display,
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a second notification performance brightness data table,
The first notification performance brightness data table is configured so that brightness data is switched,
The brightness data table for the second notification performance is configured so that the brightness data does not switch.

Specifically, in an SP reach effect where no prompts are given to encourage the player to take action at the win/loss branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp remains lit in white, making it appear as if the effect has stopped to the player, and the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in an SP reach effect where prompts are given to encourage the player to take action at the win/loss branch, sounds corresponding to prompts and sounds (BGM) corresponding to reach are output, and by switching the grandchild table multiple times to control the frame lamp to correspond to the prompts, the timing of the win/loss branch can be appropriately presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the win/loss branch can be appropriately presented by using different sound and lamp control when no prompts are given at the win/loss branch and when prompts are given.

(F2019-130)
(12) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The introductory part includes a first scene and a second scene that follows the first scene,
First moving image data is used in the first scene;
second moving image data is used in the second scene;
The second scene is slower in progression than the first scene,
the first moving image data is moving image data in which a movement of a specific character is expressed by a plurality of specific character images,
The second video data is video data in which the movement of a specific character is expressed by one specific character image and an effect image.

Specifically, the scene before the winner is decided at (r48) in the provocation section is a slow-motion period in which the image movement slows down. Furthermore, while the effect before (r48) depicts the character's movements from multiple image data, the effect during (r48) is performed using an image of Bakuchu and images of six allies. The images of the allied and enemy characters are gradually enlarged over time, giving the appearance of the characters moving. Creating video during the slow-motion period using the same amount of image data as outside of the slow-motion period results in a small amount of data, resulting in jerky movements. On the other hand, using a large amount of data to smooth out the movements during the slow-motion period results in excessive data volume. Therefore, by reducing the number of images used during the slow-motion period and using display switching and enlargement to make the characters appear to be moving, the data volume can be reduced. The number of images used during the slow-motion period can be any number, as long as it is fewer than during periods outside of the slow-motion period.

(F2019-131)
(13) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
There is a shielding display that makes the effect display invisible by going through a closing operation to a closed state, and makes the effect display visible by performing an opening operation after the closed state,
The occlusion display can be performed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the blocking display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the area in which the effect display is visible becomes smaller,
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area in which the effect display is visible increases.

Specifically, the shutter mentioned above is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the effect being performed in the background invisible, and when opened after closing, makes the image of the effect being performed visible. The shutter is also executed at a timing related to the promotional part, before the start of the promotional part. When the shutter is closing, the screen brightness is reduced as the area in which the effect is visible becomes smaller, and when the shutter is opening, the screen brightness is increased as the area in which the effect is visible becomes larger. This makes the closing and opening of the shutter appear more realistic, making the flow of the effect appear more appropriate. Note that, while the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the effect being performed in the background invisible or visible, it could also be an image other than a shutter, or a similar effect could be performed using a prop.

(F2019-132)
(14) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sounds uttered by the characters and the action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sounds are output louder than the action sounds.

Specifically, during the hype part, the background music for the SP reach is output, and there are scenes where dialogue sounds and physical sounds (also called action sounds) are output at the same time. When dialogue sounds and physical sounds are output at the same time, the dialogue sounds are output at a louder volume than the physical sounds when output from speakers 8L, 8R. This makes it possible to make the effects more realistic by outputting the physical sounds as part of the effect, while making the dialogue sounds louder when they overlap makes it easier for the player to understand the content of the effect. As a result, the effects during the hype part can be made to look better.

(F2019-133)
(15) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success/failure is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the success/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-lottery effect can be executed among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, it is possible to execute a second re-draw effect among the plurality of types of re-draw effects, in which the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the epilogue part, when the first pattern is displayed once, the display mode of the first pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode, so that the first pattern is displayed as if it is swaying,
In the case of transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-drawing part, there are a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-drawing part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the first mode, a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-drawing part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the second mode, and a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-drawing part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode,
The effect execution means performs a specific display that makes the first pattern difficult to see when the epilogue part transitions to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode, when the epilogue part transitions to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the second mode, and when the epilogue part transitions to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the third mode, and displays the first pattern in a common display mode to execute the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect;
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light emitting mode to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode continuously even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when an image showing the stick controller 31A and a time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, regardless of the timing of operation, a period of time for the symbols to shake to absorb the time may be set up during the time until the specified timing at which the re-draw effect is executed (the symbol shaking period from (K4)). Then, when the specified timing arrives and the re-draw effect is executed, a common effect accompanied by a whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. In this way, regardless of the timing at which the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbols are first displayed shaking, then the common effect accompanied by a whiteout is executed, and then the re-draw effect is executed. This prevents the pattern movement at the start of the re-draw from appearing strange, and allows the series of effects to look good.

(F2020-005)
(16) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character,
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocative part, as shown in Figure 178 (A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed in response to the character's lines. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the display period of the first subtitle, which is displayed first, overlaps with the display period of the second subtitle, which is displayed next. When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed overlapping, a fade effect is applied. The fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters to differ. This makes it easy to see the change in subtitles, even when the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, by using the fade effect.

(F2020-006)
(17) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a first epilogue part in which the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified after the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a second epilogue part after the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified,
The display means
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to notify that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, the background is displayed.
After that, the pattern confirmation command is triggered to stop the display of the pattern,
After that, the change command triggers the display of the changing pattern,
The light emission control means
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light-emitting means for effect using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
When the display switching is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display switching, and the light emitting means for effect is controlled;
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and the light emitting means for effect is controlled;
When the stop display of the pattern is performed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the fourth pattern stop, and the light emitting means for the fourth pattern is controlled, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for the performance,
When the display of the changing patterns starts, the brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table for the fourth pattern change to control the light emitting means for the fourth pattern, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for the performance.

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 when a loss occurs will be explained. After the performance of determining whether a win or loss occurs, the performance screen switches to the image when a loss occurs. After that, a blackout screen showing the loss result is displayed, followed by a switch to the eye-catching screen. After that, the screen switches to the normal screen, and a screen showing the pattern being confirmed and stopped is displayed. In addition, the brightness data table switches from the brightness data table when a win or loss is determined to the brightness data table when a loss occurs. After that, it switches to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, it switches to the brightness data table for the background when the fluctuation starts. Here, the brightness data table switches to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) when the screen switches to the eye-catching screen. In addition, the brightness data table switches to the brightness data table for background when the screen switches to the normal screen. The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 switches from flashing to off upon receiving the symbol confirmation command, but the background brightness data table does not switch even upon receiving the symbol confirmation command. The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 switches from off to flashing upon receiving the variation pattern command for the next variation, but the background brightness data table does not switch even upon receiving the symbol confirmation command. In this way, the brightness data table switches to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, and this brightness data table continues until the next variation, so there is no need to create a separate brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command. This allows the lamp effects to be displayed seamlessly from the effect at the time of a loss to the next variation, and the series of effects can be displayed optimally.

[Start 1]
In the winning/losing notification part, the moving body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of scene.
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to the scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 171 and 172, when the reel operates, the effect switches from the SP first half Reach A effect to the SP second half Reach A effect. Furthermore, as the reel falls, an effect image corresponding to the reel operation is displayed. Then, as the reel rises, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel operation to the screen corresponding to SP second half Reach A. Furthermore, as the reel rises, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table for the reel operation part (child table WD8 shown in Figure 202, described later) to the brightness data table for SP second half Reach A (child table WD9 shown in Figures 204 and 205, described later). Furthermore, as the reel rises, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP (for example, background music for the second half of the SP) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel operation is displayed assuming that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image were to remain displayed until the reel returned to its initial position, the display would not look very appealing. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the reel has completed its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be maintained. Also, since the brightness data table for the sound effects and game effect lamp 9 is switched to one corresponding to the second half of the SP while the reel is returning to its initial position, the promotional part of the second half of the SP can be displayed optimally.

[Start 2]
Before the moving body moves, a reduced image is displayed at a specific display position.
The movable body is moved so that the movable body covers a specific display position,
As the movable body moves, an effect corresponding to the movement of the movable body is displayed in a layer that takes priority over the display layer of the reduced-sized image.
After the movable body starts to retreat and is no longer positioned at the specific display position, the effect display is switched to a display corresponding to the post-switching performance in which a reduced pattern is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 171 and 172, when the reel operates, the effect switches from the SP first half reach A effect to the SP second half reach A effect. Furthermore, before the reel operates, a reduced "2" symbol is displayed in the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the reel operates, the reel falls so that the "P" character on the reel is positioned so that it overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative symbol was displayed. Furthermore, as the reel falls, an effect image corresponding to the reel operation is displayed in a prioritized layer in front of the reduced "2" symbol. Then, after the reel rises from its drop position and the "2" symbol no longer overlaps with the reel, the effect image gradually fades, and the background corresponding to the SP second half reach A and the "2" symbol are faintly displayed. This prevents the display of reduced decorative symbols from appearing unsightly during reel operation. Furthermore, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetic of the display can be maintained. Furthermore, because a reduced decorative pattern is displayed as the reel rises, it is possible to switch to an appropriate effect according to the reel action.

[Start 3]
The movable body moves, and an effect display is performed before it reaches the specific display position.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 171, the reel operates and the effect image is displayed before it reaches the bottom of the fall. This allows the reduced decorative pattern to be hidden early, resulting in an ideal transition between effects that incorporate the reel.

[Start 4]
When the effect display is switched to the display of the performance after development, the effect display is switched using an image related to the movable body.

Specifically, an image related to the reel may be displayed when switching from the effect image to the image of the performance that develops in the latter half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to (h7) to (h10) of Figure 172, when the reel rises, the words "POWERFUL II" or images of the main characters Yume Yume, Jam, and Nana may be displayed. In this way, by linking the performance changes, it is possible to present a suitable performance change that incorporates the reel.

[Start 5]
There is a shielding display that makes the effect display invisible by going through a closing operation to a closed state, and makes the effect display visible by performing an opening operation after the closed state,
The occlusion display can be performed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the obscuring display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the area in which the effect display is visible becomes smaller,
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area in which the effect display is visible increases.

Specifically, the shutter mentioned above is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the effect being performed in the background invisible, and when opened after closing, makes the image of the effect being performed visible. The shutter is also executed at a timing related to the promotional part, before the start of the promotional part. When the shutter is closing, the screen brightness is reduced as the area in which the effect is visible becomes smaller, and when the shutter is opening, the screen brightness is increased as the area in which the effect is visible becomes larger. This makes the closing and opening of the shutter appear more realistic, making the flow of the effect appear more appropriate. Note that, while the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the effect being performed in the background invisible or visible, it could also be an image other than a shutter, or a similar effect could be performed using a prop.

[Start 6]
An image corresponding to the shielding display has a shape in which doors close from both ends of the screen in the center of the screen, or a shape in which doors close from one end of the screen to the other end.

Specifically, the shutters described above close from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. This allows for a gradual change in screen brightness to be seen in an ideal way. The shutters may also close from both ends of the screen toward the center, like sliding doors. The shutters may also close from the top edge of the screen toward the bottom edge of the screen.

[Start 7]
In the occlusion display, the edges of the opposing doors that make the performance display invisible are displayed in black.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 58 above, the image of the edge of the shutter is rendered in black. This blurs the boundary between the effect that is executed when the screen brightness is reduced and the edge of the shutter just before the shutter closes completely, as shown in Figure 58 (a12), eliminating any sense of incongruity. A similar sense of incongruity can be eliminated when the shutter begins to open, as shown in Figure 60 (a16).

[Start 8]
After the shielding display has undergone a closing operation and an opening operation, a display corresponding to the introduction part is displayed.
A display corresponding to the introduction part is displayed during the middle stage of the opening operation of the shielding display, and the brightness of the display corresponding to the introduction part increases step by step, while the display corresponding to the introduction part does not progress until the opening operation of the shielding display is completed, and the display corresponding to the introduction part starts to progress after the opening operation of the shielding display is completed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 60 and 61 above, the SP first half reach begins after the shutter opens. The SP first half reach effect does not begin until the shutter is fully open, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and the SP first half effect progresses after the shutter is released. This prevents dissatisfaction by the SP first half reach effect being executed before the shutter opens, as it is an effect that players want to pay attention to.

[Start 9]
When the operation of releasing the shielding display is completed, the light emitting means is turned off;
After the operation of releasing the shielding display is completed and one frame of image is displayed, the display corresponding to the introductory part progresses and the light emitting means starts emitting light.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 193, in child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open, so the timing when the shutter is fully open can be clearly communicated to the player by the lighting state of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the provocative parts of SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, start with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp turned off, and the frame lamp begins to light up or flash based on the brightness data table corresponding to each SP first half reach. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp begins to light up in accordance with the progress of the SP first half reach presentation, so it is possible to clearly communicate to the player that the SP first half reach has begun.

[Start 10]
The effect display starts to darken before the closing operation of the shielding display starts, and the closing operation ends in time with the effect display completely darkening.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 57 (a9) above, the screen brightness is first lowered before the shutter starts to close, and the shutter is fully closed in time to close completely. If the screen brightness were lowered in time with the shutter closing, there is a risk that the screen will darken too quickly. Therefore, by starting to lower the screen brightness in advance, the screen will darken at an appropriate speed, making the series of effects look optimal.

[Start 11] (2019-1944)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be established,
The display means can perform a shielding display in which the effect display becomes invisible by going through a closing operation and then becoming a closed state, and the effect display becomes visible by performing an opening operation after becoming the closed state,
The occlusion display is performed at a timing related to the introduction part,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for the shielding display when performing the shielding display;
The brightness data table for the shielding display is configured so that the brightness data is switched when the shielding display performs a closing operation, and so that the brightness data is not switched during the period from when the shielding display is in a closed state until when it performs an opening operation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in child table WD1 for the start part, during times ta1-ta12 before the shutters are fully closed, the brightness data switches so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as a yellow background, flashing red, flashing white, and then solid red, whereas during times ta13-ta18 after the shutters are fully closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. This allows the lighting mode of the frame lamp to add excitement to the presentation of the start part before the shutters close, and maintaining the lighting mode of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed can draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters open, resulting in a better viewing experience for the player in the subsequent excitement part.

[Start 12]
The production display includes a display before the introductory part starts and a display during the introductory part,
During the start part, a display corresponding to a predetermined effect is displayed, and then the shielding display performs a closing operation, and the introduction part begins when the shielding display performs an opening operation.
There are multiple types of introduction parts, and it is not possible to know which introduction part is being executed until the operation of releasing the shielding display is completed.

Specifically, until the aforementioned shutter opens, the player does not know which SP first half reach will begin. This allows players to anticipate which effect will be executed.

[Start 13]
The occlusion display may also be performed at times other than the transition to the introduction part.

Specifically, the shutter effect described above may be executed at a timing other than the timing of development into the first half of the SP. For example, it may be executed at the timing from the second re-fluctuation to the third re-fluctuation in a pseudo-consecutive. Furthermore, when the shutter closes and then opens, an icon image (for example, a green hold image) indicating a change in the active hold, which is the hold display for that fluctuation, may be displayed, and the active hold may change in response to that icon image (for example, from blue to green). Furthermore, the shutter effect may be executed at the timing of development from the first half of the SP reach to the second half of the SP reach. This can increase the interest of the shutter effect.

[Start 14]
The timing at which the brightness data is maintained is the timing at which the closing operation of the shielding display is completed, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the closing operation of the shielding display is completed, or the timing related to the closing operation of the shielding display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in child table WD1 for the start part, during times ta1-ta12 before the shutters are fully closed, the brightness data switches so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as a yellow background, flashing red, flashing white, and then solid red, whereas during times ta13-ta18 after the shutters are fully closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. This allows the lighting mode of the frame lamp to add excitement to the presentation of the start part before the shutters close, and maintaining the lighting mode of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed can draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters open, resulting in a better viewing experience for the player in the subsequent excitement part.

[Start 15]
The period during which the brightness data is maintained is the period from when the shielding display is in the closed state until the release action is taken, or the period from when the shielding display is in the closed state until a prompting display is taken to encourage the player to take action.

Specifically, in addition to the pattern where the shutter closes and then automatically opens, a pattern where a button image is displayed after the shutter closes and the shutter opens when the button is pressed can also be provided. This allows for multiple types of shutter effects, which can make the shutter effects more interesting.

[Start 16]
At the timing when the blocking display is changed to the closed state and the promotion display is performed, the brightness data is switched from the maintained brightness data to the changing brightness data, and after the promotion display is performed, the brightness data is switched back to the maintained brightness data.

Specifically, in a presentation using a shutter display such as those shown in Figures 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, a prompt is displayed to encourage the player to take an action (e.g., pressing a button or waving a hand over an infrared sensor), and when the player's action corresponding to the prompt is detected, the shutter opens. While the shutter is in a closed state, lamp control is performed based on a brightness data table that maintains the illumination state of the game effect lamp 9 (e.g., a frame lamp). When the shutter is in a closed state and the prompt is displayed, the brightness data table is switched to one that changes the illumination state of the game effect lamp 9, and lamp control is performed based on that brightness data table. After the prompt is displayed (while the prompt is still in progress), lamp control is again performed based on a brightness data table that maintains the illumination state of the game effect lamp 9. The brightness data table used to maintain the illumination state after the prompt is displayed may be the same as or different from the brightness data table used to maintain the illumination state before the prompt is displayed. This keeps the game effect lamp 9 lit while the shutter display is in the closed state, making it easier for the player to focus on the next effect that will be performed after the shutter display switches to the open state.

[Start 17]
The prompting display is a display including a button image and prompting text that prompts the player to take an action.
When a promotion character is displayed, a sound corresponding to the promotion character is output, and brightness data that changes in association with the sound is incorporated.

Specifically, in an effect using a shutter display such as those shown in Figures 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, a prompting display is displayed to encourage the player to take an action (e.g., pressing a button or waving a hand over an infrared sensor), and when the player's action corresponding to the prompting display is detected, the shutter may open. The prompting display may also output a sound (e.g., "push") encouraging the player to take an action, and display text (e.g., the text "push"). Furthermore, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 (e.g., a frame lamp) may be controlled based on a brightness data table that changes the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 in response to the sound encouraging the player to take an action. In this way, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes in response to the sound encouraging the player to take an action, and the text prompting the player to take an action can be emphasized by the sound encouraging the player to take an action and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, more effectively encouraging the player to take an action corresponding to the prompting display.

[Teasing 1]
The introduction part is
This is the part until the result of whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state is announced.
The game includes scenes in which the display is updated as the friendly characters and enemy characters fight, and scenes in which the friendly characters take damage.
The display switching interval is faster than the epilogue part,
The number of display changes is greater than in the epilogue part.

Specifically, the aforementioned provocation part, which involves teasing whether the player will win or lose, is updated with an action in which the ally character and enemy character alternate in their battle (for example, SP First Half Reach B and SP Second Half Reach B). Such provocation part scenes include a scene in which the ally character takes damage. Furthermore, the image display changes at a faster interval than in the epilogue part, and the number of image changes is also greater in such provocation part scenes. This makes the provocation part look better by making the development faster in the provocation part than in the epilogue part.

[Teasing 2]
In the introductory part, first, the sound of a line spoken by an ally character is output, and a line subtitle corresponding to the sound of the line is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 63 (b5) and other figures mentioned above, during the provocative part, the first line spoken by an ally character is displayed, and subtitles corresponding to that line are displayed. This allows the ally character to be easily recognized during the provocative part.

[Teasing 3]
In the introductory part, the display length of the first dialogue subtitles is set to be longer.

Specifically, the subtitles for the first ally character displayed may be set to be displayed for a longer period of time than the subtitles displayed in other scenes in the teasing part. This allows the ally character to be clearly recognized.

[Teasing 4]
There are scenes in which the dialogue sounds of ally characters are output, but the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 67 (b17) and other figures mentioned above, there are scenes where subtitles are not displayed when an ally character speaks a line. This allows for a more appropriate display of the screen than if subtitles were displayed for all lines, while still displaying the subtitles for the ally character that is displayed first.

[Teasing 5]
It may be expanded from the first introduction part to the second introduction part,
In both the first and second introduction parts, the allied characters play an active role.
In the first introductory part, the dialogue sound of the ally character is first output, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.
In the second introductory part, first, the dialogue sound of the ally character is output, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the aforementioned provocation part, there are SP First Half Reach A and SP First Half Reach B as the first provocation part executed in the first half, and SP Second Half Reach A, SP Second Half Reach B, and SP Final Reach as the second provocation part executed in the second half. In both the first and second provocation parts, there are scenes in which ally characters play an active role. In addition, in both provocation parts, the first line of a line from an ally character is spoken, and subtitles corresponding to that line are displayed. This allows ally characters to be easily recognized in both provocation parts.

[Teasing 6]
In the first introductory part, the first character plays an active role.
In the second introductory part, the second character plays an active role.
In the first introductory part, a line sound of the first character is first output, and a line subtitle corresponding to the line sound is displayed;
In the second introductory part, the dialogue sound of the second character is output first, and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.

Specifically, in the aforementioned hype parts, in the hype part corresponding to SP first half reach B, Yume Yume's character plays an active role, while in the hype part corresponding to SP second half reach B, Jam and Nana's characters play an active role. Then, in SP first half reach B, Yume Yume, the first ally character to play an active role, speaks a line, and subtitles corresponding to said line are displayed. Also, in SP second half reach B, Jam and Nana, the first ally characters to play an active role, speak a line, and subtitles corresponding to said line are displayed. This allows the ally characters to be easily recognized in both hype parts. Note that there may be one or more characters playing an active role. Also, the character playing an active role in the first half hype part and the second half hype part may be the same.

[Teasing 7]
The introduction part is
a scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed;
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and no dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed is configured so that brightness data using an emission color corresponding to the character is switched in accordance with the action of the character.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 168 to 170, there are scenes in the promotional section where characters speak lines but no subtitles are displayed (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). In these specific scenes, sounds that are difficult to express in subtitles are output as lines, so subtitles are not displayed. However, even in these specific scenes, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. In this way, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can emphasize the effect even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sounds. This allows the effect corresponding to the character to be executed appropriately, and the promotional section can be viewed appropriately by the player. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 64 (b8), (b9), 74 (e7), 94 (i32), 95 (i34), 104 (n10), 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29), 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to appropriately indicate that a character is speaking, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and allows the player to appropriately view the effects of the provocative part.

[Teasing 8]
In a scene in which a character appears, the light emitting means emits light in a color other than the color corresponding to the character.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 168 to 170, in scenes in which a character appears (e.g., r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to light up in a color other than the color corresponding to the character in the previous scene. Specifically, before scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), and then lights up in orange corresponding to the AD character. Also, before scene (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange (r25) or white (r25'), and then lights up in blue corresponding to the Maid A character. Furthermore, before the scene (r28), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes blue (r27) or white (r27'), followed by a Hawaiian blue light corresponding to the Maid B character. Before the scene (r30), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes Hawaiian blue (r29) or white (r29'), followed by a pink light corresponding to the Nana character. Before the scene (r32), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes pink (r31) or white (r31'), followed by a purple light corresponding to the Jam character. Before the scene (r34), the game effect lamp 9 lights up purple (r33) or white (r33'), followed by a green light corresponding to the Yume Yume character. In this way, before a character appears, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to light up in a color different from the color corresponding to that character, and then the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to light up in the color corresponding to that character. This makes it possible to use the lamp's appearance to clearly indicate to the player that the displayed character is changing and which character has changed, making it a suitable hype part.

[Teasing 9]
The light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on one side of the screen, and the light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on the other side of the screen.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 64 (b8), (b9), 74 (e7), 94 (i32), 95 (i34), 104 (n10), 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29), 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to effectively indicate that a character is speaking, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and allows the player to effectively see the effects of the provocative part.

[Incitement 10] (2019-1930)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be established,
The introduction part is
a first scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed and a line sound uttered by the first character is output;
a second scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed and a line sound uttered by the second character is output;
The light emission control means
In the first scene, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table corresponding to the first scene;
In the second scene, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table corresponding to the second scene;
the luminance data table corresponding to the first scene is configured so that when the luminance data, in which the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means is set to a light emitting color corresponding to the first character and the light-emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means is set to a light emitting color corresponding to the second character, is switched in response to the lines uttered by the first character, the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means is switched, but the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means is not switched;
The luminance data table corresponding to the second scene is configured so that when the luminance data, in which the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means is set to a light emitting color corresponding to the first character and the light-emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means is set to a light emitting color corresponding to the second character, is switched in response to the lines uttered by the second character, the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means does not switch, but the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means is switched.

Specifically, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when a character speaks, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character. For example, to correspond to the effect shown in FIG. 63(b4) in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, face off, the left frame lamp lights up in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, and the right frame lamp lights up in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the effect control CPU 120 flashes the left frame lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, to correspond to the effect shown in FIG. 63(b5) in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks. At time tb6, the effect control CPU 120 flashes the right frame lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, to correspond to the effect shown in FIG. 63(b6) in which Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, speaks. This allows the illuminated/blinking frame lamp to clearly indicate which character is speaking in scenes where multiple characters are displayed, allowing the player to see the exciting parts in a more appropriate manner.

[Teasing 11]
In a state where the first character and the second character are displayed, dialogue subtitles are displayed in each of a scene where the dialogue sound of the first character is output and a scene where the dialogue sound of the second character is output, and the dialogue subtitles are displayed in a fixed font at a fixed position.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 63 (b5) and (b6) above, there are scenes in which friendly and enemy characters are displayed and each character speaks lines. In such situations, the subtitles for the lines are displayed at a fixed size and in a fixed position. This reduces the chance of bugs occurring by not changing the display format of the lines for each character.

[Teasing 12]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sounds uttered by the characters and the action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sounds are output louder than the action sounds.

Specifically, during the hype part, the background music for the SP reach is output, and there are scenes where dialogue sounds and physical sounds (also called action sounds) are output at the same time. When dialogue sounds and physical sounds are output at the same time, the dialogue sounds are output at a louder volume than the physical sounds when output from speakers 8L, 8R. This makes it possible to make the effects more realistic by outputting the physical sounds as part of the effect, while making the dialogue sounds louder when they overlap makes it easier for the player to understand the content of the effect. As a result, the effects during the hype part can be made to look better.

[Teasing 13]
Various sounds such as background music, action sounds, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are output in accordance with the performance in the introductory part.
During the design stage, various sounds are output along with displays corresponding to the performances performed in the introductory part, and the volume of the various sounds is adjusted.

Specifically, the work process used to actually create various effects for the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. First, images for each effect corresponding to variable times such as SP Reach are created for the pachinko gaming machine 1. Sound effects such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue are added one by one to match this image using dedicated software. The completed images and sounds are then played, and the volume of the sound is adjusted. In this series of work processes, rather than outputting the sound with the same realism as the actual distance on the image, the sound data is set to discard realism and output sound that ignores the actual distance, which is easier for the player to understand. This allows the series of effects to be presented in an optimal way.

[Teasing 14]
When the output of an action sound and a dialogue sound corresponding to one character overlap, the volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound is louder than the volume of the action sound.

Specifically, when a character's physical sound and dialogue sound are output together, the dialogue sound is adjusted so that it sounds louder than the physical sound. For example, when a physical sound and dialogue sound are output together, as shown in Figure 166 (B), the background music for the SP reach is adjusted to be quieter to match the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, the content of the presentation can be more easily conveyed to the player while still creating a sense of realism.

[Teasing 15]
When the output of the dialogue sound of a first character who is far away overlaps with the output of the action sound of a second character who is close when viewed from the front of the screen, the volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound is louder than the volume of the action sound.

Specifically, when the dialogue sound of a character that the player perceives as far away overlaps with a physical sound that the player perceives as close, the sound data is set so that the dialogue sound sounds louder than the physical sound. This sacrifices realism and outputs sounds that ignore the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player, making it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation.

[Teasing 16]
In a case where the output of the operation sound and the dialogue sound overlap and the subtitles are not displayed, and in a case where the output of the operation sound and the dialogue sound overlap and the subtitles are displayed, the volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound with the subtitles displayed is larger than the volume of the dialogue sound with the subtitles not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 166 (B) and (C), when dialogue sounds overlapping with physical sounds are accompanied by subtitles, compared to when dialogue sounds overlapping with physical sounds are not accompanied by subtitles, the dialogue sounds with subtitles are adjusted to sound louder by lowering the volume of the SP Reach background music. Dialogue sounds with subtitles are more related to the content of the SP Reach than dialogue sounds without subtitles. Therefore, by outputting dialogue sounds with subtitles that are related to the content of the SP Reach at a louder volume, it is possible to make it easier for players to understand the content of the presentation.

[Incitement 17] (2019-1933)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper level table includes a first upper level table and a second upper level table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be made,
The light emission control means
In a first scene of the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a first upper table and a specific brightness data table;
In a second scene in the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
the specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introductory part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introductory part are a common luminance data table;
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and is configured so that the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data is the specific time;
the first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time period longer than the specific time period;
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data for the specific brightness data table and time data for using the specific brightness data table for a second time period that is longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different times in one child table used in the promotion part, lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different times. However, by varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different times, the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow can be varied. This allows a single child table WD9 to vary the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different times. This reduces the amount of data used for lamp control, while varying the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow, corresponding to the background of an SP reach. As a result, a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps can be achieved while reducing data volume.

[Incitement 18] (2019-1934)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper level table includes a first upper level table and a second upper level table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be established,
The light emission control means
In a first scene of the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a first upper table and a specific brightness data table;
In a second scene in the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and is configured so that the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data is a specific time;
The first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data for using the specific brightness data table for a specific time period,
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data for the specific brightness data table and time data for using the specific brightness data table for a predetermined time period that is shorter than the specific time period.

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different times in one child table used in the promotional part, causing the frame lamp to flash white at multiple different times. However, by varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different times, the number of times the frame lamp flashes white can be set to two or three times. This allows the number of white flashes to vary while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using a common grandchild table W4 but varying its reference time, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different times. As a result, a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps can be achieved while reducing data capacity.

[Incitement 19] (2019-1935)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper level table includes a first upper level table and a second upper level table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be established,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
The light emission control means
In one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a first higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
In one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific brightness data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance and the specific brightness data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance are a common brightness data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and is configured so that the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data is a specific time;
the first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time period longer than the specific time period;
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data for the specific brightness data table and time data for using the specific brightness data table for a second time period that is longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, for child table WD9 used in the provocative part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the provocative part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the provocative part of SP final reach, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the different timings. This makes it possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach while reducing the data volume used for lamp control in multiple reach performances. Similarly, for child table WD2 used in the provocative part of SP first half reach A and child table WD5 used in the provocative part of SP first half reach B, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the different timings. This makes it possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach while reducing the data volume used for lamp control.

[Incitement 20] (2019-1936)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper level table includes a first upper level table and a second upper level table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be made,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
The light emission control means
In one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a first higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
In one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific brightness data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance and the specific brightness data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance are a common brightness data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and is configured so that the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data is the specific time;
The first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data for using the specific brightness data table for a specific time period,
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data for the specific brightness data table and time data for using the specific brightness data table for a predetermined time period that is shorter than the specific time period.

[Teasing 21]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character,
In a specific scene, while a first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, a second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed.
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocative part, as shown in Figure 178 (A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed in response to the character's lines. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the display period of the first subtitle, which is displayed first, overlaps with the display period of the second subtitle, which is displayed next. When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed overlapping, a fade effect is applied. The fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters to differ. This makes it easy to see the change in subtitles, even when the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, by using the fade effect.

[Teasing 22]
In a provocative scene where multiple characters confront each other,
When a line sound of one character is output, a first subtitle corresponding to the line sound is displayed, and thereafter, when a line sound of the other character is output, a second subtitle corresponding to the line sound is displayed;
The second subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 50% so as to overlap the area where the first subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 0%, and then when the second subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 0%, the display of the first subtitle is terminated.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 178 (A), in a scene where characters confront each other, a first subtitle corresponding to the lines of one character may be displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to the lines of another character. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 70% and overlaps the first subtitle displayed with a transparency of 0%. The first subtitle then fades out, and the second subtitle fades in with a transparency of 0%. This makes it easy to tell when the subtitles change, even when they overlap, due to the fade effect.

[Teasing 23]
The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is:
The first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other, and are not output when a fade effect is applied to at least one of them.
It is output when only the secondary subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 179, the timing of output of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle "Found" is such that the first and second subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, and the sound is not output during the period when a fade effect is applied. The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from the time the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. This makes it easy to see when the subtitles change due to the fade effect, and because the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, the content of the presentation can be easily understood both visually and aurally.

[Teasing 24]
In the advantageous state, music is output and lyrics are displayed.
When the display of the lyrics is switched from the first subtitle to the second subtitle, no fade effect is applied to either subtitle display.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance is executed in which the characters sing along to the music. Subtitles (lyrics) are then displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, no fade effect is applied, even when the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously. This is because, while the music is playing, the progression of the music can be understood from the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without a fade effect, the timing of the switch is easy to understand. Also, because the music during the jackpot round is a representative piece of content installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the next lyrics to be displayed are easy for the player to understand even without a fade effect. This means that the task of applying a fade effect can be omitted during the jackpot round, making the series of performances more visible.

[Teasing 25]
In both the introduction and epilogue parts, the characters' lines may overlap.
The dialogue sounds overlap more frequently in the introduction than in the epilogue.

Specifically, although not shown, there are cases where the timing of subtitle display overlaps even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in Figure 180, there are many scenes in the epilogue part where the period between subtitle display and subtitle display is longer than in the teasing part. This is because the presentation progresses quickly in the teasing part, but not as quickly in the epilogue part. As a result, the teasing part is more likely to be displayed at a timing where subtitles overlap than in the epilogue part. In such cases, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to avoid a sense of incongruity when the subtitles switch.

[Teasing 26]
Even in certain scenes where the subtitles do not overlap,
A fade effect is applied when the subtitles are displayed or when the display of the subtitles disappears.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in certain scenes in portions (o3) to (o5) where the first and second subtitles do not overlap. The fade effect may be either a fade-in or a fade-out. When creating subtitle display after the video is created, it is time-consuming to apply fade effects depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps. Therefore, by applying a uniform fade effect to all subtitle display, an increase in the workload can be prevented.

[Teasing 27]
The display of the first subtitle without the fade effect and the display of the second subtitle may be switched.
It is possible to consider providing a blank period in which nothing is displayed between the display of the first subtitle and the display of the second subtitle, but this would create an unnatural feeling when long lines or lines with a fast tempo are output, so such a blank period is not provided.

Specifically, Figure 181 illustrates comparative examples of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of Figure 181(A), subtitles for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such cases, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect or blank period, the switch in the subtitle display becomes difficult to distinguish. Furthermore, even for subtitles for long lines or lines that progress quickly, switching subtitles without blank periods may create an unnatural feeling. In such cases, applying a fade effect to the subtitle display can eliminate this unnatural feeling. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 2 of Figure 181(B), it is possible to superimpose "I found it" on the subtitle display for "I found it" and then display "I found it." In such cases, not applying a fade effect would make the subtitle display difficult to see. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of Figure 181(C), it is also possible to display the subtitles "I found it" and "I found it" in two rows, one above the other. In such cases, the display area for the effects is reduced by the subtitle display, which interferes with the effects outside the area where the subtitle display is displayed. However, this problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display, as in this embodiment.

[Teasing cut-in 1]
The display means is
In the introductory part, a prompt is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in is displayed.
In the introductory part, a sound of a line spoken by a character is output, and a subtitle of the line is displayed in a specific area of the display means in response to the sound of the line;
At the timing when the promotion display is performed in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in a specific area,
the brightness data table includes a cut-in display brightness data table corresponding to the cut-in display and an introduction part brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part,
The light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for cut-in display includes at least the same portions as the light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for the introduction part.

Specifically, the brightness data for the lamp control in the cut-in effects and button displays for those cut-in effects (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, and W6) is designed to use the same frame lamps as the lamp control in the hype part of the SP final reach. This prevents unnecessary lighting/flashing of lamps from mixing in and marring the aesthetic, and provides an optimal hype part effect.

[Teasing cut-in 2]
Dialogue subtitles are displayed in the scene before the button that displays the promotion.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 127 (r39) to 128 (r42) above, when a cut-in display is executed, the subtitle display is displayed before the button image promotion display is displayed. This allows the button image to continue to be shown to players who are watching the screen and paying attention to the subtitle display, preventing them from missing the button image and allowing the cut-in display to be executed optimally.

[Teasing cut-in 3]
At the timing when the cut-in display ends, subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are not displayed, and after a period in which the dialogue sound is not output, the dialogue sound is output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 128 (r41) to 130 (r47) above, the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period of time after the cut-in display has ended. Then, after a predetermined period of no dialogue has elapsed, dialogue is spoken and subtitles are displayed for that dialogue. This allows the player to concentrate on the presentation during the period after the cut-in display, resulting in an ideal cut-in display.

[True or False 1]
In the part where the winner is notified,
The player is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.
A prompt is displayed to encourage a specific action by the player,
It is executed between the introduction and epilogue parts,
After the promotion display is performed, the movable body is moved.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 132 (r54) above, the scene where the result was determined was between the teaser part and the epilogue part. Then, in the scene where the result was determined, the player was notified of whether or not they had won the jackpot, after operating a trigger as an operating means. Also, in the scene where the result was determined, if a jackpot was reached, the device would move after operating the trigger. This increases the excitement of the presentation by creating a scene where the result was determined optimally using the operating means.

[True or False 2]
In the winning/losing notification part that is executed after the introduction part,
When the introduction display of the promotion display is performed while the unfolded display is being performed before the promotion display is performed, the unfolded display becomes invisible, and then the promotion display is performed in a state where the unfolded display is visible.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 130 (r47) to 132 (r54) above, subtitles are displayed by an ally character before the image corresponding to the operation means is displayed, and then the effect that was being performed becomes invisible on the screen corresponding to the operation means. Then, the effect that was being performed after that becomes recognizable along with the image of the operation means. This makes an impact by displaying the introduction of the operation means on the entire screen, while the effect that was being performed is displayed properly when the operation means can be operated, making the progression of the effect look ideal.

[True or False 3]
The deployment display is performed behind the introduction display.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 130 (r48) to 131 (r51) above, the presentation is ongoing even while the introductory images (images (r49) to (r50)) indicating that the operating means are operable are displayed. By having the presentation proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image indicating that the operating means can be operated (image (r51)), as well as the development of the presentation.

[True or False 4]
The expansion display is performed while the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, in the aforementioned Figures 132 (r51) to 132 (r54), when a trigger image was displayed as a promotional display, the tail of the Bakuchu image moved slightly with each image change. In this way, the performance may progress while the promotional display is displayed. Here, the performance may progress not only by a tail movement, but also by scene changes or character movements. This allows the viewer to pay attention to the development of the performance during the promotional display.

[True or False 5]
When an unfolding display is performed during a promotion, it proceeds more slowly than before the promotion.

Specifically, the effects that progress while a prompt is displayed progress at a slower rate than the effects that were running before the prompt was displayed. This allows the player to focus on the prompt, which is intended to prompt the player to operate the operating means, and a balance can be achieved between the prompt and the progress of the effects. Note that the effects that progress while a prompt is displayed can be set to progress at a slower rate than the effects that progress while an introductory image is displayed. This allows for a difference in the speed of the effects to progress while a prompt is displayed and while an introductory image is displayed.

[True or False 6]
Echo is added to the dialogue before the introductory display.

Specifically, it is preferable to add echo to the dialogue spoken before the introductory image, such as that shown in Figure 130 (r47) above, is displayed. This will help get the player excited before the introductory image is displayed.

[True or False 7]
The introduction display is performed after terminating the output of the dialogue sound that was displayed during the development display before the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 130 (r47) to 131 (r49) above, the introductory image is displayed after the subtitles displayed before the introductory image are deleted. This prevents the timing of the introductory image and the subtitles from overlapping.

[True or False 8]
The introductory part consists of a predetermined period and a slow motion period after the predetermined period and before the result is announced.
A character's movement is depicted using a plurality of image data during a predetermined period of time;
During the slow motion period, a single image data is provided with a visual effect to depict the movement of the character.

Specifically, the scene before the winner is decided at (r48) in the provocation section is a slow-motion period in which the image movement slows down. Furthermore, while the effect before (r48) depicts the character's movements from multiple image data, the effect during (r48) is performed using an image of Bakuchu and images of six allies. The images of the allied and enemy characters are gradually enlarged over time, giving the appearance of the characters moving. Creating video during the slow-motion period using the same amount of image data as outside of the slow-motion period results in a small amount of data, resulting in jerky movements. On the other hand, using a large amount of data to smooth out the movements during the slow-motion period results in excessive data volume. Therefore, by reducing the number of images used during the slow-motion period and using display switching and enlargement to make the characters appear to be moving, the data volume can be reduced. The number of images used during the slow-motion period can be any number, as long as it is fewer than during periods outside of the slow-motion period.

[True or False 9]
The game has an introductory part where friendly and enemy characters appear, and a conclusion part after the introductory part.
The introductory part has a set period of time where scenes showing allies and enemies alternate.
When the prompt display is being displayed during a predetermined period, the player can move on to the conclusion part,
During a predetermined period, the speed at which the scenes displaying allies and the scenes displaying enemies alternate is gradually increased, and the promotion display is performed when the speed reaches its fastest;
Even in depictions where scenes showing allies and scenes showing enemies alternate, each of the enemies and allies is reproduced using a single image data.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 191 (B), the speed at which the images of the ally character and the enemy character switch gradually increases. This means that a prompt to operate the trigger is displayed after the image switching speed reaches its fastest, making it possible to tease whether a scene will unfold in which the ally character has an advantage or an enemy character has an advantage, increasing interest. Furthermore, by switching between images alternately, it becomes difficult to notice that the ally character and the enemy character are each being played using a single image.

[True or False 10]
The above-mentioned predetermined period during which the scene in which an ally is displayed and the scene in which an enemy is displayed are alternately switched is also applied to a scene in which one reach effect develops into another reach effect.

Specifically, the slow motion period in (r48) may be performed at the timing when the SP first half reach develops into the SP second half reach or the SP final reach. This allows the performance to be performed optimally even when the SP first half reach develops.

[True or False 11]
An enemy character is depicted using a plurality of image data in order to change a portion of the enemy character, but the image data of the enemy character itself is reused and only that portion is changed.

Specifically, during the slow-motion period in (r48), at least one of the ally character and enemy character may be composed of two or more images. For example, for an ally character, four images may be used repeatedly: Image 1, Image 2, Image 3, Image 4, Image 1, etc., to make the character's hair and clothes appear to move gradually. In this way, by reusing the data for the character itself and only changing some of the data, it is possible to more faithfully express the character's movements while reducing the amount of work required to change the data.

[True or False 12]
During the slow motion period, parts of the character change.

Specifically, during the slow motion period in (r48), when a character's hair or clothes are made to appear to move gradually from multiple images, the movement of the hair or clothes can be designed to appear to move at the same speed as during periods other than the slow motion period. Here, increasing the number of images to match the slow motion movements in order to make the movements appear smoother during the slow motion period would result in a large file size. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, the movements do not become awkward even when fewer images are used, and the movement can be more faithfully represented while reducing the data size.

[True or False 13]
During the period before the transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing part in the first notification performance,
The display means displays a prompt to prompt the player to perform a specific action,
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the first notification performance brightness data table,
During the period before the transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not display a prompt to prompt a specific action, but displays a win/loss provocation display,
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a second notification performance brightness data table,
The first notification performance brightness data table is configured so that brightness data is switched,
The brightness data table for the second notification performance is configured so that the brightness data does not switch.

Specifically, in an SP reach effect where no prompts are given to encourage the player to take action at the win/loss branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp remains lit in white, making it appear as if the effect has stopped to the player, and the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in an SP reach effect where prompts are given to encourage the player to take action at the win/loss branch, sounds corresponding to prompts and sounds (BGM) corresponding to reach are output, and by switching the grandchild table multiple times to control the frame lamp to a mode corresponding to the prompt, the timing of the decision at the win/loss branch can be appropriately presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision at the win/loss branch can be appropriately presented by using different sound and lamp control when no prompts are given at the win/loss branch and when prompts are given.

[True or False 14]
When no promotional display is performed, the display transitions in the order of a first display period consisting of a moving image, a second display period consisting of a still image, and a third display period consisting of a moving image that branches depending on whether the display is correct or not.

Specifically, from the aforementioned Figure 95 (i36) to Figure 96 (i39), the image displaying the two characters, Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan, is gradually enlarged, and at timing (i39), a single image is displayed still for a predetermined period of time. After that, if there is a jackpot, the video of the win epilogue part is played, and if there is a loss, the video of the loss epilogue part is played. During the period in which a single image is displayed still for a predetermined period of time, a single image can be reused, thereby reducing data volume while optimally hyping up the win/loss determination scene. Note that during the period in which the image displaying the two characters is gradually enlarged, more images (for example, 10 images) may be used, as shown in Figure 95 (i36) to Figure 96 (i39).

[True or False 15]
In the case where the promotion display is not performed, the scenario for controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period;
a third scenario corresponding to a third display period,
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple luminance data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which predetermined luminance data is maintained,
The third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in child table WD9 in SP latter half Reach A, a reach with no operation prompt occurs, and after the frame lamp flashes white based on grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up white based on grandchild table W8. Specifically, for the win/fail branch in the provocative part of SP latter half Reach A, where no operation prompt occurs, the brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W8 is designed to use the "FDC" (white light), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7. This makes it possible to clearly communicate the win/fail branch (decisive timing) to the player without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much.

[True or False 16]
When a promotional display is made, the display transitions in the following order: a first display period in which an introductory display is made before the promotional display is made, a second display period consisting of moving images, and a third display period consisting of moving images that branch off depending on whether the display is correct or not.

Specifically, from Figure 131 (r49) to Figure 132 (r54) mentioned above, there is a period in which an introductory image is displayed, in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are displayed gathering in the center of the screen. After that, there is a period in which a prompt display is displayed to encourage the user to operate the trigger. During the prompt display period, multiple images are gradually moved to give the impression that the character is moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching point where it is decided whether or not the player has won, the video of the win epilogue part is played if the player has won, and the video of the loss epilogue part is played if the player has lost. Both of these periods are periods in which the video is displayed dynamically, making it appear as if it is moving. This allows a series of presentations to be executed within a dynamic flow, resulting in an ideal presentation flow.

[True or False 17]
In the case where the promotion display is performed, the scenario for controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period;
a third scenario corresponding to a third display period,
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple luminance data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which multiple brightness data are switched.
The third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, on child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in Figures 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), sounds corresponding to prompts for operation and sounds (BGM) corresponding to reach are output, and the frame lamp switches between flashing white, lit red, and flashing red, in succession, enhancing the presentation of prompts for operation for the player at the win/loss branch (decisive moment).

[True or False 18]
Following the part where the winner is announced,
When it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, a display that indicates that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed, and then a display corresponding to the normal background is displayed.

Specifically, we will explain the winning epilogue part and losing epilogue part that occur after the scene where the win or loss is determined, as shown in Figures 133 (s1) to 136 (s10) and 137 (u1) to 138 (u4) mentioned above. In the winning epilogue part, after the performance of the reel's movements, video corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played. In the losing epilogue part, the screen goes dark after the performance corresponding to the losing epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. This allows for a flow of switching between multiple videos after the scene where the win or loss is determined, which can be an ideal flow of presentation.

[Yes or No 19] (2019-1937)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The brightness data used first in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is set to be lower in brightness than the brightness data used last in the brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 261, when a player transitions to the loss epilogue part via the teasing part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the teasing part is "FDC," while the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the loss epilogue part is "888" or "444." As a result, when a player loses in each of the SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, the frame lamp can be lit in a dimmer white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the win/lose branch, thereby appropriately notifying the player that a loss has occurred. Furthermore, when the SP final reach transitions to the loss epilogue part via the teasing part, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the teasing part includes "D00", while the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the loss epilogue part is "888" or "444". This allows the frame lamp to light up in white, which is dimmer than the red flashing during the win/loss branch, when the SP final reach results in a loss, thereby effectively notifying the player that they have lost.

[Yes or No 20] (2019-1938)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect, and the first notification effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the player is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The first notification effect that notifies the player that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the player is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part that notifies the player that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state.
The second notification performance that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the player is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state.
The second notification effect that notifies the player that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the player is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part that notifies the player that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state.
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
the upper level tables include a first upper level table, a second upper level table, a third upper level table, and a fourth upper level table;
The brightness data table includes a brightness data table for a first notification effect, a brightness data table for a second notification effect, and a specific brightness data table,
The light emission control means
In an introductory part of a first notification performance that notifies that the advantageous state is not being controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a first higher level table and a brightness data table for the first notification performance;
In an introduction part of the second notification performance for notifying that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a second notification performance brightness data table;
In an epilogue part of the first notification performance for notifying that the advantageous state will not be achieved, the light emitting means is controlled using a third higher-level table and a specific brightness data table;
In an epilogue part of the second notification performance for notifying that the advantageous state will not be achieved, the light emitting means is controlled using a fourth higher-level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the first notification performance that notifies the player that the advantageous state will not be achieved and the specific brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the second notification performance that notifies the player that the advantageous state will not be achieved are a common brightness data table,
the third higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time period;
The fourth higher-level table is made up of storage destination data for the specific brightness data table and time data for using the specific brightness data table for a second time period different from the first time period.

Specifically, in child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, the frame lamps are lit in the lighting mode for a loss based on the grandchild table W14, just like child table WD17 of SP final reach. However, while the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 5,800 msec in SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, it controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 3,900 msec in SP final reach. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control in a loss is the same between different reaches, the time for lamp control can be varied by referencing the grandchild table. As a result, instead of preparing a grandchild table specifically for when a win occurs for each of the different reaches, the child tables used for each of the different reaches can use the common grandchild table W4 while changing its reference time, thereby reducing the amount of data used for lamp control and varying the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to a loss. As a result, a loss can be notified to the player in an appropriate manner for each of the different reaches.

[Yes or No 21] (2019-1939)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is:
A first pattern including an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and a first epilogue part in which the fact that the control to the advantageous state is notified is notified;
a second pattern including an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the advantageous state will be achieved, a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved, and a relief notification part that is executed after the second epilogue part and in which it is notified that the advantageous state will be achieved,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
In a second epilogue part of the second pattern of notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
In a relief notification part of the notification performance of the second pattern, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the relief notification part;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the relief notification part is set to be higher in luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

[Loser 1]
Following the part where the winner is announced,
When it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, an image of when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed, and an epilogue part is executed when the game is not won, in which the determination that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is announced by a decorative pattern;
Thereafter, the display is switched to an image corresponding to the background at the start of the reach.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 188, if the result is a loss after the win/loss decision, the losing symbol is displayed against a black background in the loss epilogue part. After that, an eye-catching screen transition image is displayed, and then the screen switches to the normal background at the start of a reach. This allows the eye-catching screen to optimally show the screen transition when a loss occurs.

[Loser 2]
In the epilogue part when a winning combination is lost, an image when it has been determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed in black, and the central pattern of the decorative pattern is displayed in a fade-in manner.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 189, in the losing epilogue part, the background gradually blacks out when a winning combination is lost, while the center pattern gradually fades in. This means that the image and center pattern when a winning combination is lost are displayed in inverse proportion to the blackout and fade-in, making the display when a winning combination is lost look optimal.

[Loser 3] (2020-400)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
the display means displays the decorative pattern in the second epilogue part so that it gradually becomes clearer, and displays the display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part so that it gradually becomes darker, thereby displaying a display that notifies the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
The number of stages by which the display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part is made darker is greater than the number of stages by which the decorative pattern is made clearer.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 189, in the losing epilogue part, the number of steps required to black out the background from 100% to 0% transparency when a winning combination is lost is greater than the number of steps required to fade in the center symbol from 100% to 0% transparency. Specifically, the background blacks out in eight steps from (X11) to (X18), while the center symbol fades in in six steps from (X12) to (X17). This means that the image and center symbol when a winning combination is lost are displayed in inverse proportion to the blackout and fade-in relationship, and because the number of steps in the transparency change are different, the relationship between the two makes the display when a winning combination is lost look optimal.

[Loser 4]
When it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, the image is blacked out before the center pattern of the decorative pattern is faded in.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 189, when a winning combination occurs, the background begins to black out before the center symbol fades in. This means that when a winning combination occurs, the image and center symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to the blackout and fade-in, and because the blackout occurs faster than the symbol fades in, the relationship between the two makes the display look optimal when a winning combination occurs.

[Loser 5]
When it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state before the blackout, the cut of the displayed image will change,
When it is determined that control will not be made to an advantageous state at the time of blackout, the cut of the displayed image does not change.

Specifically, the image displayed changes when the picture is wrong before the blackout, whereas the image displayed when the blackout occurs remains unchanged. This allows the blackout to be viewed optimally by starting the blackout with an unchanged image. Note that a change in image includes a change in the picture on the screen, a change in the angle of the image, or a change in the displayed scene itself. Furthermore, no change in the image includes the same still image, or even if it is a moving image, the angle of the image does not change, and even if there is movement, only a small movement in part of the image.

[Loser 6]
The image when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state goes black, and the center image of the decorative pattern fades in, resulting in the transparency of the center image becoming 0%. The period during which the transparency of the image required for blackout becomes 0% is maintained for a predetermined period.
During a predetermined period, the symbol itself is swayed for at least two periods,
The predetermined period is longer than the period during which the image of the middle pattern changes from a state of 100% transparency to a state of 0% transparency, and is longer than the period during which the switching display is performed.

Specifically, when a winning combination is lost, the background fades out and the center symbol fades in, resulting in a 0% transparency display of the center symbol and the blacked-out background, as shown in (X18) to (X20), for a predetermined period of time. This predetermined period includes a symbol fluctuation period, as shown in (X19) to (X20). The symbol fluctuation period is determined as at least two periods, with one period being the period during which the center symbol moves from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and back to the center position. The predetermined period, including this period, may be set longer than the period during which the center symbol fades in from 100% transparency to 0% transparency. Furthermore, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye-catching image is displayed. This allows the center symbol to be clearly displayed against a blacked-out background with a 0% transparency for a predetermined period of time, effectively signaling a loss.

[Loser 7]
The switching display is a display that includes information about the gaming machine.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 188 and 189, the eye-catching screen displays the title "POWERFUL II" and images of the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan as information about the pachinko gaming machine 1. This allows the eye-catching image to accurately convey information about the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[8 Losers]
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state includes an introductory part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, and a first epilogue part in which the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state is notified after the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state is notified,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a second epilogue part after the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to notify that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state,
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, the background is displayed.
After that, the pattern confirmation command is triggered to stop the display of the pattern,
After that, the change command triggers the display of the changing pattern,
The light emission control means
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means for effect using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
When the display is switched, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display, and the light-emitting means for the effect is controlled;
When a background display is performed, the brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the background display, and the light emitting means for the effect is controlled;
When the stop display of the pattern is performed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for stopping the fourth pattern, and the light emitting means for the fourth pattern is controlled, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for the performance,
When the display of the varying patterns is started, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table for the fourth pattern variation to control the light emitting means for the fourth pattern, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for the performance.

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 when a loss occurs will be explained. After the performance of determining whether a win or loss occurs, the performance screen switches to the image when a loss occurs. After that, a blackout screen showing the loss result is displayed, followed by a switch to the eye-catching screen. After that, the screen switches to the normal screen, and a screen showing the pattern being confirmed and stopped is displayed. In addition, the brightness data table switches from the brightness data table when a win or loss is determined to the brightness data table when a loss occurs. After that, it switches to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, it switches to the brightness data table for the background when the fluctuation starts. Here, the brightness data table switches to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) when the screen switches to the eye-catching screen. In addition, the brightness data table switches to the brightness data table for background when the screen switches to the normal screen. The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 switches from flashing to off upon receiving the symbol confirmation command, but the background brightness data table does not switch even upon receiving the symbol confirmation command. The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 switches from off to flashing upon receiving the variation pattern command for the next variation, but the background brightness data table does not switch even upon receiving the symbol confirmation command. In this way, the brightness data table switches to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, and this brightness data table continues until the next variation, so there is no need to create a separate brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command. This allows the lamp effects to be displayed seamlessly from the effect at the time of a loss to the next variation, and the series of effects can be displayed optimally.

[9 Losers]
The brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of a reach is a table that loops and references brightness data until a change condition is met.
In the introductory part, the luminance data corresponding to the background is not used, but the luminance data corresponding to the background is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, when a specific change condition is met, such as when the game progresses to an SP Reach, lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the SP Reach brightness data table corresponding to the changed SP Reach or other effect, and thereafter lamp control is performed based on that SP Reach brightness data table. In this case, while the SP Reach effect is being executed, the switching of brightness data in the background brightness data table continues without stopping over time in the background of lamp control based on the SP Reach brightness data table. Furthermore, when a specific change condition is met, such as when an error occurs, lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the error brightness data table corresponding to the error state, and thereafter lamp control is performed based on that error brightness data table. In this case, in the error state, the switching of brightness data in the background brightness data table continues without stopping over time in the background of lamp control based on the error brightness data table. This makes the series of effects that are executed look more appealing.

[Loser 10]
After switching to a brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part, the brightness data table corresponding to the background is used even if a pattern determination command is received, and thereafter, when there is no reserved item, the brightness data table corresponding to the background continues to be used even if a customer waiting command is received.

Specifically, once the brightness data table has been switched to the background brightness data table as the eye-catching screen ends, the background brightness data table will continue to be used even if there is no pending memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received. This means that the same brightness data table can be used continuously after switching to the background brightness data table, allowing the lamp effects to be displayed without any sense of incongruity, and the series of effects to be displayed optimally.

[Loser 11]
When the pattern is confirmed, the light emitting means of the special drawing stops,
Upon receiving the symbol determination command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol switches from flashing to being turned off.

Specifically, the variable special symbol display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 switches from flashing to off upon receiving a symbol confirmation command, which triggers the effect of the symbol being confirmed and stopped. This makes it easy for players to understand the flow of the variable special symbol display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 when a miss occurs.

[Loser 12]
When the next fluctuation starts, the light emitting means of the special diagram flashes,
When the next variable command is received, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol changes from off to flashing.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 switches from off to flashing upon receiving the next variation pattern command, which triggers the start of the next variation. This makes it possible to clearly show the player the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 when a loss occurs.

[Loser 13] (2020-401)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to notify that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, the background is displayed.
After that, the pattern confirmation command is triggered to stop the display of the pattern,
After that, the change command triggers the display of the changing pattern,
The light emission control means
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
when the display is switched, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the display is switched;
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is continuously used to control the light emitting means;
When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is continuously used to control the light emitting means;
When the variable display of the pattern is started, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 190, the brightness data table for a miss is used from the effect of six ally characters looking disappointed at (X40) to the effect of the background image blacking out at (X41). After the background image blacks out, the eye-catching image is displayed. The switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is used from the period switching to the eye-catching screen at (X42) to the pattern determination period at (X45). Thereafter, when a variation pattern command is received when there is a hold, the brightness data table switches to the background brightness data table. In other words, the brightness data table switches to the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table when switching to the eye-catching screen, and this brightness data table is maintained during the pattern determination period, and then switches to the background brightness data table when switching to the next variation. Furthermore, during the pattern determination period, the final brightness data of the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table, which is the light-off data, is used. This means that after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data in the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received, making it easier to recognize a miss and, as a result, making the miss look favorable.

[Loser 14]
The final brightness data is light-off data, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part does not include brightness data that maintains the light-off state.

Specifically, the final brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is data for turning off and maintaining the brightness. The brightness data table for the background does not use data for maintaining the brightness off. Because the brightness data table for the background does not use brightness data for maintaining the brightness off, turning off the background while it is displayed is unique to a miss, making it easier to recognize a miss.

[Loser 15]
Upon receiving the customer waiting command, the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the customer waiting command.

Specifically, if there is no reserved memory after the pattern is confirmed, receiving a customer waiting command switches from the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table to the background brightness data table. In this way, receiving a customer waiting command switches to the background brightness data table, making it easier to recognize that the winning combination has been lost.

[Loser 16] (2020-402)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the player is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that notifies the player that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the player is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part that notifies the player that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to notify that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, the background is displayed.
After that, the pattern confirmation command is triggered to stop the display of the pattern,
The light emission control means
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
when the display is switched, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the display is switched;
when a background display is performed, switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
The brightness data used first in the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display is set to a higher brightness than the brightness data used last in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

Specifically, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the final brightness data (off) in the brightness data table before the eye-catching image is displayed (when a miss occurs). This allows the game effect lamp 9 to emit light at a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easier to recognize the switch via the eye-catching screen and game effect lamp 9.

[Loser 17]
The initial luminance data of the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is set to a higher luminance than the initial luminance data of the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part.

Specifically, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the initial brightness data in the brightness data table (excluding off-screen) corresponding to the background at the start of the change. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to emit light at a high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, making the switch easier to recognize via the eye-catching screen and game effect lamp 9.

[Gekimono Action 1] (2019-1940)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be in the advantageous state;
In a first epilogue part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be effected to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to when it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part to when it is switched to the next luminance data.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 262 and 263, during the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1, with the RGB data switching at 30 msec intervals. In contrast, as shown in Figure 261, during a loss, the frame lamps light up dimly in white based on grandchild table W14, with the RGB data switching at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamps' lighting colors switch at shorter intervals than during a loss, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamps. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamps is more pronounced than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamps is more subdued than during a win. As a result, wins and losses can be easily communicated to the player through the contrasting lamp patterns.

[Gekimono Movement 2] (2019-1941)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing informing part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for moving the movable body;
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that luminance data representing chromatic colors and luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used in sequence.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, when a role object falls, the frame lamps are controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and light up in alternating rainbow chromatic and achromatic colors (RGB data of "333"). This allows for the execution of an effect that emphasizes the jackpot and congratulates the player by occasionally interjecting achromatic colors between the rainbow chromatic colors. Then, when an ally character wins, the frame lamps are controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and light up in smooth rainbow colors without interjections of achromatic colors, allowing for the execution of an effect that calmly congratulates the player on the jackpot. As a result, the effects in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be viewed favorably by the player.

[Epilogue 1]
The epilogue part is a congratulatory part that takes place after the decision to control the game to an advantageous state is announced, and includes a scene in which an enemy character is defeated, no scene in which an ally character is damaged, and the number of display changes is less than in the introduction part.

Specifically, the aforementioned winning epilogue part is a part that does not transition when a loss occurs, and is a part that includes scenes in which enemy characters are at a disadvantage and scenes in which ally characters are at an advantage. Furthermore, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display changes in the presentation is fewer than in the teasing part. This allows for appropriate presentation in each part, making the flow of the series of presentations appear optimal.

[Epilogue 2]
In the epilogue part, the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the lines of the character is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the lines of the character in the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 175, the proportion of subtitles displayed for character dialogue in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in the SP reach part, which is the hype part. This means that by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is easier to understand what the characters are saying. Furthermore, in a successful epilogue part, subtitles can enhance the feeling of celebration. Furthermore, since there are more screen changes in the hype part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time may be shorter, which prevents the auxiliary subtitle display from interfering with the presentation, and allows the primary focus to be on conveying the presentation through image changes. This allows for optimal presentation in the hype part.

[Epilogue 3]
Dialogue subtitles are always displayed during the epilogue part.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 175, subtitles are always displayed for dialogue in the epilogue part. This makes it easy to understand what the characters are saying in the epilogue part, emphasizing the sense of celebration.

[Epilogue 4]
In the introductory part, when an enemy character is injured, the dialogue sound is output and the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
In the epilogue part, when a dialogue sound is output in a scene in which an enemy character is damaged, a dialogue subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 104 (n10) above, subtitles are not displayed for the lines spoken by the enemy character in the scene in which the enemy character receives damage in the hype part. In contrast, as shown in Figure 110 (o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines spoken by the enemy character in the scene in which the enemy character receives damage in the winning epilogue part (the scene where the enemy character catches a crab). In this way, subtitles that were not displayed in the hype part are displayed in the winning epilogue part, emphasizing the sense of celebration.

[Epilogue 5]
There are a first introductory part and a second introductory part, each of which has a different development and number of lines, but the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed relative to the output of the character's dialogue sound in the epilogue part is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed relative to the output of the character's dialogue sound in the introductory part.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 175, there are several types of SP Reach, which is the hype part, and each has a different development in the presentation and number of lines. However, regardless of the SP Reach, the proportion of subtitles displayed for the character's lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters during the SP Reach. This means that regardless of which SP Reach is executed, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Furthermore, in a successful epilogue part, subtitles can be used to enhance the sense of celebration. Furthermore, since there are more screen changes in the hype part than in the epilogue part, the primary focus is on conveying the presentation through image changes, and auxiliary subtitle display can be used to prevent the presentation from interfering. This allows for optimal presentation in the hype part.

[Epilogue 6]
The dialogue subtitles that are displayed at the end of the epilogue part are displayed longer than the dialogue subtitles with the same number of characters that are displayed in other scenes.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 134 (s5)-(s6) above, the subtitles displayed in the winning epilogue part are designed to be displayed for a longer period of time than the subtitles displayed in the teaser part. By displaying the subtitles in the final winning epilogue part for a longer period of time, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the big win, emphasizing the sense of celebration. Note that subtitles with a larger number of characters may be displayed for longer than those with a smaller number of characters. Even in such cases, if the winning epilogue part and the teaser part have the same number of subtitles (for example, five characters), the winning epilogue part should be designed to be displayed for a longer period of time.

[Epilogue 7]
When the movable body is located at the advanced position, a background display for the movable body is performed,
The movable body operates according to a retreat pattern in which the movable body retreats, and the background display for the movable body is switched to an epilogue display before the retreat pattern is completed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 173 and 174, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed as the reel falls. The reel then moves to its initial position using a predetermined evacuation pattern. As the reel rises, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to a screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position where it is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be avoided.

[Epilogue 8]
The deformed member performs a storage operation and a return operation.
The timing of switching to the epilogue display is linked to the start of the return movement.

Specifically, the premise is that the reel will return to its initial position, and the timing for switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue will be during the ascent, which is related to the start of the return motion. This means that the display corresponding to the epilogue is switched to at a timing related to the start of the return motion, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the reel motion ends before the reel returns to its initial position. This prevents a situation in which the effect image is displayed when the reel returns to its initial position, and does not impair the aesthetic appeal of the presentation. The timing for switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same as the timing when the reel begins to rise. The reel may also perform a rotation or movement motion when in the falling position.

[Epilogue 9]
During the return movement, the light emitting means of the movable body fades out and approaches extinction.

Specifically, when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so that the reel lamp 9A is gradually turned off, based on the child table corresponding to the reel rising action in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by that child table. As a result, the lighting pattern of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the reel rising, while the lighting pattern of the frame lamp draws the player's attention to the screen indicating that the reel has progressed to Reach A in the latter half of the SP.

[Epilogue 10]
The transition is suggested by the background music that is linked to the image corresponding to the epilogue.
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, background music is output.

Specifically, background music corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the reel returning to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part can be indicated by the background music, allowing the epilogue part to begin in an appropriate manner.

[Epilogue 11]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, a sound effect indicating the change is output.

Specifically, a sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the reel returning to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the sound effect indicates the start of the epilogue part, allowing the epilogue part to begin in an appropriate manner.

[Epilogue 12]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, background music and a sound effect indicating a change are output.

Specifically, background music and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the reel returning to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part can be indicated by the background music and sound effects, allowing the epilogue part to begin in an appropriate manner.

[Epilogue 13]
When the epilogue is displayed during the return movement of the moving body, the dialogue sound is not output.
In the epilogue display after the movable body is stored, a dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, when the reel returns to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, dialogue sounds are not output, and when the epilogue display is performed after the reel returns to its initial position, dialogue sounds are output and subtitles are displayed. This avoids displaying subtitles at a time when they are difficult to see, and allows the epilogue part to be executed optimally.

[Epilogue 14]
A dialogue sound is output when the moving object is retracted.
At the timing when the storage of the movable body is completed, a dialogue sound is outputted and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, when the props return to their initial positions, dialogue sounds can be output in the epilogue display and subtitles can be displayed. This allows the dialogue to be clearly recognized, and the epilogue part can be executed smoothly.

[Epilogue 15]
The display of the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds output at the end of the epilogue part ends at the timing when the image display starts.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 134 (s6) to 135 (s8) above, the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the pattern reveal effect is executed. This prevents the subtitle display from overlapping with the decorative pattern and from being mistaken for a message in the pattern reveal effect. This allows the effect in the winning epilogue part to be displayed optimally.

[Epilogue 17]
The video that was playing during the epilogue becomes a still image when the symbols are finally displayed and the player recognizes the final completed symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 136 (s10) above, when the symbol display effect is complete and the player is able to recognize the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol and the characters and other images displayed as a background are still images. This prevents the decorative symbol from becoming difficult to see due to the decorative symbol having a moving background.

[Epilogue 18]
The video that plays before the pattern starts to appear is treated as a still image.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 135 (s7) above, the video that was playing during the winning epilogue part becomes a still image just before the symbol reveal effect is executed. This prevents the symbols from becoming difficult to see from the moment they start to appear.

[Epilogue 19]
Special effects are applied at the same time as the image stops.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 135 (s7) above, the still images displayed in the winning epilogue part have a special, comic-style appearance. By adding a special effect to the still image, this emphasizes that the video has stopped and suggests that the scene has changed, making it a suitable winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 20] (2019-1931)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the effect display and displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 173 and 174, the presentation switches from the scene before the win/loss decision in the provocative part to the winning epilogue part as the reel moves. Furthermore, an effect image corresponding to the reel's movement is displayed as the reel falls. Then, as the reel rises, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel's movement to a screen corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach. Also, as the reel rises, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the reel's movement to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, as the reel rises, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Furthermore, during the background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part, which is displayed from (s3-5) to (s3-8) until the reel returns to its initial position, no dialogue sound is output. Then, when the reel has completed moving to its initial position and the effect image display has ended (s4), a dialogue sound is output and subtitles are displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetic of the display can be prevented from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the reel is rising, the winning epilogue part can be displayed optimally. Furthermore, by displaying the subtitles after the reel completes its return to its initial position, the winning epilogue part can be displayed optimally.

[Epilogue 21] (2019-1932)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be established,
In the introductory part, a first scene displays dialogue subtitles for the dialogue spoken by the characters;
In the epilogue part, a final line subtitle is displayed in response to the final line sound uttered by the character, and then, after the display of the final line subtitle is completed, a second scene is displayed in which the decorative pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area,
When the display of the final dialogue subtitle is terminated in the second scene, no switching effect is applied, whereas when the display of the dialogue subtitle is terminated in the first scene, a switching effect is applied.

[Epilogue 22]
When the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
Effects are applied to the decorative patterns, but the display layer of the small patterns is displayed with priority, so that the effects do not interfere with the visibility of the small patterns.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 136 (s10) above, when the symbols are displayed, both decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed. An effect image using converging lines is added to the decorative symbols, but no effect image is added to the small symbols. Furthermore, the decorative symbols have higher priority than the decorative symbols and effect images, and are displayed in the foreground. This enhances the effect of the effect image for the decorative symbols, while allowing the player to recognize that the small symbols are being displayed in a changing state, making for a suitable winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 23]
When the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
The movements of the decorative pattern and the small pattern are synchronized at the timing when the display of the decorative pattern is completed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 136 (s10) above, both decorative and small symbols are displayed during the symbol display presentation. Here, the movement of the decorative and small symbols may be synchronized when the display of the decorative symbols ends. Specifically, during the symbol swing period when the decorative symbols have finished displaying and are swinging up and down, the small symbols may also swing up and down in the same manner as the decorative symbols. In this way, by synchronizing the movements of the decorative and small symbols, the flow of the presentation in the winning epilogue part can be made to look optimal.

[Epilogue 24]
When the pattern is displayed in the re-draw part, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
Effects are applied to the decorative patterns, but the display layer of the small patterns is displayed with priority, so that the effects do not interfere with the visibility of the small patterns.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) above, when the symbols are displayed in the re-draw part, both decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed. An effect image using concentrated lines is added to the decorative symbols, but no effect image is added to the small symbols. Furthermore, the decorative symbols have higher priority than the decorative symbols and effect images, and are displayed in the foreground. This makes it possible to enhance the effect of the effect image for the decorative symbols, while letting the player know that the small symbols are being displayed in a changing state.

[Epilogue 25]
Before the redrawing part, the small symbols are in a state indicating that it has been decided that they will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the small symbols change again in conjunction with the transition to the redrawing part.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 136 (s10) above, when the symbols are displayed, both the decorative symbols and the small symbols may be displayed in a aligned state. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-lottery part, both the decorative symbols and the small symbols may change again. This allows the decorative symbols and the small symbols to be synchronized for optimal display.

[Epilogue 26] (2019-1942)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a higher-level table configured with storage destination data indicating a storage destination of a luminance data table and a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be made,
The epilogue part is
The first scene is a story that corresponds to the epilogue part,
a second scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
in a first scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table;
in a second scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table;
in a first scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and at a specific timing, switching from the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part to a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for achieving the rainbow light emitting mode;
In a second scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for enlarged display, and at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for changing the enlarged display to a rainbow light emitting mode from the brightness data table for enlarged display;
the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode used in the first scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode used in the second scene in the epilogue part are a common brightness data table;
the first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part and storage destination data of a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode;
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data for a luminance data table for enlarged display and storage destination data for a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, by using the same grandchild table for the winning notification effect and the grandchild table for the winning symbol display, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used to control the lamps to light up in rainbow colors without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified feel. As a result, the effects in the winning epilogue part can be better viewed by the player using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

[Epilogue 27] (2019-1943)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a higher-level table configured with storage destination data indicating a storage destination of a luminance data table and a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The epilogue part includes a result notification scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area and the result of the notification performance is notified,
The re-lottery part is configured to include a re-lottery result notification scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area and the result of the re-lottery is notified,
The light emission control means
In a result notification scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a first higher-level table;
In a re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher order table;
In the result announcement scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for enlarged display of the result announcement scene, and at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for changing the light emitting mode from the brightness data table for enlarged display of the result announcement scene,
In a re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for enlarged display of the re-lottery result notification scene, and at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for changing the light emitting mode from the brightness data table for enlarged display of the re-lottery result notification scene to a rainbow light emitting mode;
the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode used in the result notification scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode used in the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part are a common brightness data table;
the first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of a luminance data table for enlarged display of the result announcing scene and storage destination data of a luminance data table for a rainbow light-emitting mode,
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data of a luminance data table for enlarged display of the re-lottery result notification scene and storage destination data of a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-draw part, grandchild table W1 is used in common with child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for lamp control when the final pattern is determined after the re-draw. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for rainbow color illumination for the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control while allowing the player to see a unified presentation even in different parts (timing). As a result, the presentation in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part can be better viewed by the player while reducing data capacity.

[Epilogue 28] (2020-399)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be made,
The display means
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed;
After that, the display ends with the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.

Specifically, during the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbols are positioned at the edge of the screen's display area (the upper left corner of the screen). When the screen becomes still and the winning epilogue video ends, the reduced symbols are erased and a symbol display effect is executed in which the symbols are enlarged using the central area of the screen. Furthermore, when the screen becomes still, the brightness data table switches from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display. This allows the reduced symbols to be positioned at the edge of the screen while the winning epilogue video is playing, so as not to interfere with the winning epilogue video. When the winning epilogue video finishes playing and the symbols are displayed, the decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed continuously using both the edge and center of the screen, emphasizing the jackpot symbol and presenting it to the player. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, scene changes can be made to look good. In this way, the epilogue part can be made to look good.

[Epilogue 29]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, the decorative patterns are aligned and positioned at the edge of the display area.

Specifically, during the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbols are displayed aligned with "222" at the edge of the display area on the screen (the upper left corner of the screen). This allows the player to recognize that a jackpot has been displayed due to the reduced decorative symbols, even while the winning epilogue video is playing.

[Epilogue 30]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, a decorative pattern is positioned on the edge of the display area;
In relation to the timing when the display of the image corresponding to the epilogue ends, the output of the displayed dialogue sound ends, the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed on the edge side of the display area ends, and the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the screen's display area (in the upper left corner of the screen). Furthermore, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes still and the winning epilogue video ends, the subtitle display displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced pattern in the upper left corner is erased, and the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the central area of the screen. This prevents the subtitle display from overlapping with the decorative pattern, and prevents the pattern from being mistaken for a message being displayed, allowing the winning epilogue part to be viewed optimally.

[Epilogue 31]
At the start of the introductory part, the decorative pattern is located at the edge of the display area.

Specifically, the decorative pattern may be configured to move to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode when the SP reach begins. By positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid interfering with the development of the effects during the SP reach, allowing the series of effects to be viewed optimally.

[Re-lottery effect 1]
The effect execution means is capable of executing an announcement effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance is configured to include an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success/failure is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the success/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution is
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, it is possible to execute a first re-draw effect of displaying a first symbol in a first half part and then a second symbol in a second half part among a plurality of types of re-draw effects;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, it is possible to execute a second re-draw effect among a plurality of types of re-draw effects, in which the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
Using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part, execute the first re-draw effect or the second re-draw effect,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
in the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow during the subsequent pattern determination period as well;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance is used to control the light emitting means.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery effect begins using the "2" symbol. When the re-extraction effect begins, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-lottery effect begins to change from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol advance effect is executed in which the symbols are swapped by rapid change from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and when the re-lottery effect begins, the symbol advance effect is executed using the symbol that was temporarily stopped, making it easy for the player to understand which decorative symbol the re-lottery started from. As a result, the flow of the series of effects can be clearly seen.

[Re-lottery effect 2]
When an image corresponding to the background where the decorative pattern alignment is temporarily stopped is displayed, the light emitting means is turned off, and when the screen shifts to a re-lottery screen, the light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the re-lottery.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 142 (tA6), when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors during the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp goes out once before the re-draw effect is executed, and then lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the re-draw effect, so the lighting pattern of the frame lamp clearly notifies the player that the re-draw effect is about to begin.

[Re-lottery effect 3]
When moving to the re-draw screen, temporarily stop the decorative pattern alignment,
When the display is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern alignment is displayed with a swaying effect, but the image corresponding to the background and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means are switched to those for re-drawing while the swaying display with the effect is maintained.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 142 (A5) above, in the final state of the symbol release presentation in the winning epilogue part, the decorative symbols are displayed swaying and an effect image using concentrated lines is added. When switching from this state to the background of the re-draw presentation as shown in (A6), the effect image using concentrated lines continues to be added. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 switches from a smooth rainbow light to an off state. In other words, from the symbol release to the re-draw presentation, the symbol swaying and effect mode continue, while the background and lamp are designed to switch. This makes it easy to understand which decorative symbol the re-draw presentation started from.

[Re-lottery effect 4]
When the pattern starts to be sent, the decorative pattern that has been displayed since the epilogue is reduced in size.
The image will start to move after it has been reduced in size.

Specifically, when the symbol shifting effect in the re-draw effect begins, the decorative symbol that has remained displayed since the winning epilogue part begins to change from a reduced state. This allows the flow of the series of effects to be clearly seen without having to execute a process to change to a different decorative symbol.

[Re-lottery effect 5]
The image feed starts at a reduced size, and all other images are reduced to the same size.

Specifically, during the symbol advance effect, the change begins with a reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol during the change is a uniform reduced size. This makes the change during the symbol advance effect appear smoother, and the flow of the series of effects can be clearly seen.

[Re-lottery effect 6]
While a plurality of kinds of decorative patterns are being sent in reduced size, the display changes in the order of an action prompt display, acceptance of the action, display of a decorative pattern slightly larger than the reduced size, and display of the enlarged decorative pattern.

Specifically, as shown in the flow of Figures 144 (A10) to 156 (A46) and Figures 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) above, in the re-lottery presentation, a reduced-sized decorative symbol is advanced and a button operation prompt is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, a symbol release presentation is executed in which the symbol is enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative symbol that will ultimately be announced is enlarged and displayed from the moment the symbol is released. In this way, because the symbol that will ultimately be announced is the one that begins to expand, it is possible to clearly show the player what the final announcement symbol will be.

[Re-lottery effect 7]
The effect execution means is capable of executing an announcement effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance is configured to include an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success/failure is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the success/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution is
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, it is possible to execute a first re-lottery effect among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then a swap display is performed in which the first symbol is swapped with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery effect can be executed among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, in which a replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part;
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-draw effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
in the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow during the subsequent pattern determination period as well;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance is used to control the light emitting means.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery effect begins using the "2" symbol. When the re-extraction effect begins, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-lottery effect begins to change from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol advance effect is executed in which the symbols are swapped through rapid changes starting from the "2". During the re-lottery effect, all decorative symbols are advanced in sequence: "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "7," and "1," after which the "2" symbol is displayed again, resulting in a symbol advance effect. In this way, the re-lottery effect begins using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed, and after multiple decorative symbols have changed, the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again. This allows the flow of the series of effects to be clearly seen by the symbol advance effect, which shows all decorative symbols without immediately displaying the final display result. Furthermore, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped during the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, then goes out, and a re-lottery effect is executed. When the symbol sways, the frame lamp flashes red in a different lighting pattern from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery effect (for example, RGB data in grandchild table W25). This prevents players from mistaking the lighting pattern of the frame lamp for the winning symbol temporarily stopped during the winning epilogue part as having been confirmed. Furthermore, the rainbow lighting when the "3" or "2" symbol sways is continued during the subsequent symbol confirmation period. In this way, during the short symbol confirmation period, the system is designed to directly control the lamps corresponding to the fanfare part without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, thereby eliminating the need for excessive data capacity.

[Re-lottery effect 8]
The symbol transfer according to a predetermined pattern is performed by transferring the symbol from a temporarily stopped symbol to the next symbol in order, and after the last symbol is transferred, returning to the temporarily stopped symbol again, and transferring to the next symbol in order again.
The predetermined pattern is a loop of the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.

Specifically, in the symbol transfer effect during the re-draw effect, all decorative symbols are transferred in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then all decorative symbols are transferred again in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1". In this way, the numbers of the decorative symbols are transferred in order, which allows the flow of the series of effects to be clearly seen.

[Re-lottery effect 9]
While the symbols are being sent in a predetermined pattern, all of the decorative symbols being sent are displayed at the same resolution as when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped.

Specifically, during the symbol advancement in the re-draw performance, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbol when it was temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased while it is changing. Specifically, the symbols switch between the following: "2" symbol with 0% transparency, "2" symbol with 50% transparency, "3" symbol with 0% transparency, "3" symbol with 50% transparency, "4" symbol with 0% transparency, and "4" symbol with 50% transparency. This allows all symbols to be displayed clearly with low transparency during the symbol advancement performance, making it possible to understand what symbol is being advanced.

[Re-lottery effect 10]
After the symbol feed is started, the display time of each of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is the same until notification of whether or not the symbol will be promoted is made.

Specifically, in the symbol-sending effect during the re-draw effect, all decorative symbols are sent in order: "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "7," and "1," but each symbol is displayed for the same amount of time. This allows all symbols to be displayed for a set amount of time, making the flow of the series of effects look better.

[Re-lottery effect 11]
The action prompt is displayed while the pattern is being sent.
The action prompting display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the pattern being fed.

Specifically, during the symbol advance performance, a promotional display consisting of a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position at which the promotional display is displayed does not overlap with the position at which the changing decorative symbols during the symbol advance performance are displayed. In this way, the promotional display does not overlap with the decorative symbols during the symbol advance performance, making it easier for the player to see the symbol advance. Note that a portion of the promotional display may overlap with the decorative symbols during the symbol advance performance.

[Re-lottery effect 12]
The action prompting display is started during the symbol feed, and is started during the second loop of a predetermined pattern.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 176 and 177, the promotional display begins to appear at (A24) and (A25) after the change in display of all decorative symbols during the symbol advance effect has been repeated twice. In this way, the promotional image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol advance pattern has been repeated twice, allowing the player to clearly recognize the symbol advance effect.

[Re-lottery effect 13]
When the symbol feed starts from the symbol "1," the timing at which the action prompt display is performed is, for example, the symbol "5."
When the symbol advancement starts from the symbol "4", the timing at which the action prompting display is displayed is, for example, the symbol "8".

Specifically, the symbol at the start of the re-draw effect may be something other than symbol 2. Even in such cases, the timing at which the button image is displayed as an action prompt is consistent. For example, in the case of symbol 2, the timing at which the action prompt is displayed is when symbol 2 is displayed again. Similarly, in the case of symbol 5, the timing at which the action prompt is displayed should be when symbol 5 is displayed again. In other words, regardless of which symbol starts the re-draw effect, the number of symbols sent is the same. This allows for consistent control, reducing the processing load.

[Re-lottery effect 14]
The effect execution means is capable of executing an announcement effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance is configured to include an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success/failure is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the success/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution is
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, it is possible to execute a first re-lottery effect among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then a swap display is performed in which the first symbol is swapped with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a second re-drawing effect can be executed in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a repeat display is performed in which the second symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is repeatedly displayed, and a third re-lottery performance is executed in which the second symbol is displayed again in the second half part;
The first re-lottery effect, the second re-lottery effect, and the third re-lottery effect are configured to have the same duration,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light emitting mode to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow during the subsequent pattern determination period as well;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance is used to control the light emitting means.

Specifically, there are patterns in which an even number symbol (e.g., symbol 2) is displayed followed by an even number symbol (e.g., symbol 2), and patterns in which an even number symbol (e.g., symbol 2) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., symbol 3). In addition, there may be a pattern in which an odd number symbol (e.g., symbol 7) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., symbol 7). In a pattern transfer effect in which symbols are transferred from odd number symbols to odd number symbols, it is sufficient that the same odd number symbol is transferred for all symbol transfers. However, regardless of the pattern, the duration of the symbol transfer period in the re-lottery effect can be designed to be the same. This allows for an optimal re-lottery effect in either pattern without increasing data capacity. Furthermore, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped during the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, then goes out, and a re-lottery effect is executed. When the symbol sways, the frame lamp flashes red in a different lighting pattern from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery effect (for example, RGB data in grandchild table W25). This prevents players from mistaking the lighting pattern of the frame lamp for the winning symbol temporarily stopped during the winning epilogue part as having been confirmed. Furthermore, the rainbow lighting when the "3" or "2" symbol sways is continued during the subsequent symbol confirmation period. In this way, during the short symbol confirmation period, the system is designed to directly control the lamps corresponding to the fanfare part without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, thereby eliminating the need for excessive data capacity.

[Re-lottery effect 15]
The re-draw performance is displayed by combining display data other than the decorative pattern with display data of various decorative patterns, and reproducing each pattern of multiple types of re-draw performance.
By using common display data in each re-lottery performance, the performance length is common between each re-lottery performance, and only the type of the symbols being sent and the symbols to be displayed by symbol output are different in each re-lottery performance.

Specifically, the lottery presentation uses the same data whether the pattern is to display an even number symbol (e.g., 2) followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2), an even number symbol (e.g., 2) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3), or an odd number symbol (e.g., 7) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7). In other words, the presentation data is the same, and the data related to the decorative symbols changes depending on the pattern. This eliminates the need for dedicated patterns, reducing the amount of data required.

[Re-lottery effect 16]
The effect execution means is capable of executing an announcement effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance is configured to include an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success/failure is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the success/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution is
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, it is possible to execute a first re-draw effect of displaying a first symbol in a first half part and then a second symbol in a second half part among a plurality of types of re-draw effects;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, it is possible to execute a second re-draw effect among the multiple types of re-draw effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
When the first symbol is displayed once in the epilogue part and when the first symbol is displayed again in the latter half of the second re-draw performance, the first symbol is displayed with the same or substantially the same animation;
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
in the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow during the subsequent pattern determination period as well;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance is used to control the light emitting means.

Specifically, the symbol display in the aforementioned Figures 141 (A1) through 142 (A5) and the symbol display in Figures 161 (C1) through 162 (C5) are executed using substantially identical images. Specifically, the same image is used for the symbol display and effect image of the "2" symbol, but the symbol display is executed in a manner that differs in the background. This allows the symbol display images to be substantially identical, making it easy for the player to understand that the symbol did not progress to a probability variable symbol. The image of the symbol display portion, including the background, may also be identical. Furthermore, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, then goes out, and a re-draw effect is executed. When the symbol is displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting pattern different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-draw effect (e.g., RGB data in the grandchild table W25). This prevents players from mistaking the lighting pattern of the frame lamp for the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped during the winning epilogue part to be confirmed. Furthermore, the rainbow-colored lighting that appears when the "3" or "2" symbol is displayed swaying continues during the period in which the symbol is confirmed. In this way, during the short symbol confirmation period, the system is designed to directly control the lamps corresponding to the fanfare part without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, eliminating the need for an excessive increase in data capacity.

[Re-lottery effect 17]
The animation when the first identification information is displayed includes an animation in which the design is displayed, then enlarged, and reaches the first position.

Specifically, in the aforementioned pattern display effect, a series of effects is executed in which the pattern is first enlarged and then returned to normal size in the center of the screen. This allows the pattern display effect to be displayed in an optimal manner by enlarging and reducing the pattern.

[Re-lottery effect 18]
When temporarily stopping the matching of decorative symbols before the re-draw is performed and when informing whether the matching of decorative symbols will be promoted in the notification part, the display means refers to common display data,
The common display data is combined with display data of a plurality of types of decorative patterns to display a plurality of types of patterns.

Specifically, in the aforementioned pattern display effects, the data for the pattern display effects in the winning epilogue part and the data for the pattern display effects in the re-lottery effect may use the same pattern display data. Then, a series of pattern display effects can be executed using the same pattern display data and a combination of multiple decorative patterns. This makes it possible to reduce data volume while still maintaining a favorable appearance for the pattern display effects. Note that substantially the same data may be used for the pattern display effects in the winning epilogue part and the pattern display effects in the re-lottery effect.

[Re-lottery effect 19]
If you are not promoted in the re-draw performance,
The light emission mode in displaying the symbols is the same when the decorative symbol alignment is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed and when a notice is given that the decorative symbol alignment will not be upgraded by the re-lottery.

Specifically, in child table WD21 of the re-draw part, grandchild table W1 is used in common with child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for lamp control when the final symbol is determined after the re-draw. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for rainbow color illumination for the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control while still allowing the player to see a unified presentation even in different parts (timing). As a result, the presentation in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part can be better viewed by the player while reducing data capacity.

[Re-lottery effect 20]
In the case of promotion in the re-draw performance,
The lighting pattern for the pattern display differs when the decorative pattern alignment is temporarily stopped before the re-draw is performed and when a notification is made that the decorative pattern alignment is upgraded by the re-draw.
The light emission mode in the pattern display is more intense when a notice is given that the decorative pattern alignment has been upgraded by the re-lottery than when the decorative pattern alignment is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed.

Specifically, on child table WD20 in the re-draw part, the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-draw is to light up the frame lamp in the same rainbow colors as child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 in the winning epilogue part. However, the rainbow lighting from times tB5 to tB9 when the "2" symbol is upgraded to a "3" through the re-draw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the "2" symbol temporarily stops in the winning epilogue part. This allows the lighting of the frame lamp to more effectively congratulate the player on the promotion of the winning symbol through the re-draw.

[Re-lottery effect 21]
The effect execution means is capable of executing an announcement effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance is configured to include an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success/failure is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the success/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution is
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, it is possible to execute a first re-draw effect of displaying a first symbol in a first half part and then a second symbol in a second half part among a plurality of types of re-draw effects;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, it is possible to execute a second re-draw effect among the multiple types of re-draw effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the latter half of the game, from when the first symbol is displayed again until the symbol determination period begins, a swaying display is performed in which the display mode of the first symbol is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode, so that the first symbol is displayed as if it is swaying;
In the latter half of the game, from when the second pattern is displayed until the pattern determination period begins, a swinging display is performed in which the second pattern is displayed as if it is swinging by changing the display mode of the second pattern among a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode;
The first mode is a mode in which the player can more easily visually recognize the symbols than either the second mode or the third mode,
The means of performance execution is
In the re-lottery part, an action prompting display for prompting the player to take an action can be executed,
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-draw performance, if the action is performed at a first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a swinging display while maintaining a swinging speed of the swinging display of the second symbol so that the second symbol will be in a second mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the first re-draw performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-draw performance, if the action is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the second symbol so that the second symbol will be in a third mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the first re-draw performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-lottery performance, whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is made in which the swaying display of the second symbol is made difficult to see from a predetermined timing, and then the second symbol is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when the symbol determination period begins, the second symbol is displayed stopped in the first mode while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the second symbol,
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-draw performance, if the action is performed at a first timing, the first symbol is displayed in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the first symbol so that the first symbol will be in a second mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-draw performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-draw performance, if the action is performed at a second timing, the first symbol is displayed in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the first symbol so that the first symbol will be in a third mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-draw performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-lottery performance, whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is made in which the swaying display of the first symbol is made difficult to see from a predetermined timing, and then the first symbol is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when the symbol determination period begins, the first symbol is displayed stopped in a first manner while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first symbol,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
in the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow during the subsequent pattern determination period as well;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance is used to control the light emitting means.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of Figure 267, an action prompt display consisting of a button image and a time gauge is displayed while the symbols are being fed in the re-lottery effect. During the period in which the action prompt display is displayed, the player operates push button 31B, resulting in the execution of a common symbol display effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of the timing at which push button 31B is operated, a common symbol display effect involving the expansion and contraction of the symbols, as shown in (L4) to (L5), is executed. Subsequently, the symbols are swayed during the symbol sway period. The symbol sway period differs depending on the timing of the button operation. Thus, after the symbol sway period, for example, the symbols may be positioned facing right at the first operation timing, the symbols may be positioned facing left at the second operation timing, and the symbols may be positioned facing forward at the third operation timing. However, regardless of the operation timing, a common effect is then executed from (J1) to (J18), which is a whiteout effect, followed by a swinging effect after the symbols rotate and shrink. This means that regardless of the timing of push button 31B operation, the common effect can be executed, allowing the symbols to stop cleanly and the series of effects to look optimal.

[Re-lottery effect 22]
When the operation is performed at the first timing of the valid period of the operation, after the notification of whether or not the promotion has been made, the decorative pattern is displayed fluctuatingly until the predetermined timing of the change arrives,
When an action is performed at a second timing earlier than the first timing of the valid period of the action, after notification of whether or not the action is promoted, the decorative pattern is displayed fluctuatingly by the amount by which the action was earlier than the first timing until a predetermined timing of the change arrives, and the time is absorbed.

Specifically, when push button 31B is operated at a first timing during the valid operation period, a notification as to whether or not the promotion will occur is issued, followed by a display of swaying decorative symbols (an example of no operation in Figure 267 (L3)). When push button 31B is operated at a second timing earlier than the first timing during the valid operation period, a notification as to whether or not the promotion will occur is issued, followed by a display of swaying decorative symbols that is extended by the amount that it was earlier than the first timing (an example of operation in Figure 267 (L2)). When push button 31B is operated at a third timing earlier than the second timing during the valid operation period, a notification as to whether or not the promotion will occur is issued, followed by a display of swaying decorative symbols that is extended by the amount that it was earlier than the second timing (an example of operation in Figure 267 (L1)). In this way, regardless of the timing at which push button 31B is operated, the duration of the effect can be absorbed by the duration of the effect due to the swaying of the symbols. By subsequently performing a common effect, the symbols can be stopped cleanly, and the series of effects can be displayed in an optimal manner.

[Re-lottery effect 23]
The predetermined performance starts when the flickering decorative pattern begins to expand and rotate while the white light flashes.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 267, after a whiteout is executed as a common effect, a different effect is executed in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once, which is different from the previous pattern format. In this way, regardless of the pattern position in the swaying pattern of the scale absorption, by executing a different format after the whiteout, it is possible to avoid any sense of incongruity in the flow of the effects up until the pattern stops.

[Re-draw effect 24]
The decorative pattern is displayed swaying around the first position as an axis,
The flickering display is such that the decorative symbols are positioned in the order of the first position, the second position, the third position, the second position, the first position, the fourth position, the fifth position, the fourth position, the first position, and the second position, and the predetermined performance is designed so that when the fixed period begins, the decorative symbols are always flickeringly displayed in the order of the second position, the first position, and so on.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 267, during the symbol swing period, the symbol swings backward from (J10) to (J12), then swings forward from (J13) to (J14), changing to its initial position. After that, the symbol swings forward from (J15) to (J16), then swings backward from (J17) to (J18), changing to its initial position. This series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the symbol determination period, the symbol is designed to always be positioned in its initial position facing forward, as shown at (J18). This allows the symbol to be determined and stopped in a manner that does not cause discomfort to the player.

[Re-lottery effect 25]
The starting point when the light emitting means emits light in rainbow during the second part is when the light emitting means emits light in rainbow at the start of the predetermined performance.

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in rainbow colors at the whiteout timing of (J1) in Figure 267. The timing of (J1) is an effect that is executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point where such a common effect is executed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, it is easy for the designer to decide the start trigger. Note that the start trigger may also be the timing of (J2) when the common start display begins rather than the timing of (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed effect.

[Re-lottery effect 26]
The effect execution means is capable of executing an announcement effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance is configured to include an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success/failure is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the success/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution is
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, it is possible to execute a first re-draw effect of displaying a first symbol in a first half part and then a second symbol in a second half part among a plurality of types of re-draw effects;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, it is possible to execute a second re-draw effect among the multiple types of re-draw effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the epilogue part, when the first pattern is displayed once, the display mode of the first pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode, so that the first pattern is displayed as if it is swaying,
In the case of transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-draw part, there are a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-draw part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the first mode, a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-draw part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the second mode, and a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-draw part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode,
The performance execution means performs a specific display that makes the first pattern difficult to see when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-draw part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode, when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-draw part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the second mode, and when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-draw part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the third mode, and displays the first pattern in a common display mode to execute the first re-draw performance or the second re-draw performance;
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
in the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for making the light emitting mode rainbow during the subsequent pattern determination period as well;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance is used to control the light emitting means.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when an image showing the stick controller 31A and a time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, regardless of the timing of operation, a period of time for the symbols to shake to absorb the time may be set up during the time until the specified timing at which the re-draw effect is executed (the symbol shaking period from (K4)). Then, when the specified timing arrives and the re-draw effect is executed, a common effect accompanied by a whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. In this way, regardless of the timing at which the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbols are first displayed shaking, then the common effect accompanied by a whiteout is executed, and then the re-draw effect is executed. This prevents the pattern movement at the start of the re-draw from appearing strange, and allows the series of effects to look good.

[Re-draw effect 27]
Regardless of which of the multiple types of introductory parts you win, the re-draw performance is the same.

Specifically, the time from when the whiteout screen appears until the re-draw effect is executed can be the same for any of the multiple reaches. This allows the data volume of the effect data to be reduced.

[Re-draw effect 28]
The movement of the decorative pattern after the specific display is an extension of the movement of the decorative pattern that was displayed swaying before the specific display.

Specifically, the movement of the pattern after the white-out screen may be an extension of the movement of the pattern before the white-out screen. For example, if the movement of the pattern before the white-out screen is a swaying movement that rotates around an axis centered on the vertical direction of the pattern, moving forward and backward in place, the movement after the white-out screen may be a movement that expands and rotates once clockwise around an axis centered on the vertical direction of the pattern. In this way, by displaying a white-out in between the movement that is an extension of the same axis, it is possible to prevent the pattern movement from feeling unnatural, and the series of effects can be presented in an optimal manner.

[Re-draw effect 29]
The plurality of types of introduction parts include a predetermined introduction part that is a branch of notification as to whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, and is not notified by operation of the operation means as a trigger;
In the predetermined introduction part, there is no point where the scale is shifted, so if it is determined that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state in the predetermined introduction part, there is no fluctuation in the swaying display of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern until the re-lottery performance is executed, but the same re-lottery performance as in the reach where the scale is shifted is executed.

Specifically, among the multiple SP reaches, there are some that do not prompt for button operation or other operations at the branch point when determining whether or not control will be achieved in an advantageous state. In such SP reaches, no time lag occurs due to the operation. However, even in such SP reaches, it is possible to execute a re-draw effect similar to an SP reach that does cause a time lag. In this way, a common effect can be used regardless of whether or not there is a time lag, so that there is no sense of incongruity even when there is only one re-draw effect. Furthermore, by limiting the re-draw effect to one, data volume can be reduced.

[Re-draw effect 30]
In the flow that goes to the re-draw performance after the swinging display of the decorative pattern at the jackpot in the predetermined introduction part,
The timing of transition to the re-lottery performance is designed so that the movement is an extension of the decorative pattern after the specific display.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 266, the timing of the movement of the symbols after the white-out screen is set so that it is an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen is designed to be one of a series of movements in which the symbols move from the right position (K3) to the front position (K5) and then to the left position (K6). In other words, when the symbols are swinging in a clockwise direction, a white-out is executed with a re-lottery effect, and then the symbols expand and continue to rotate to the right. In this way, the series of clockwise movement of the symbols from the symbol swinging period through the re-lottery effect prevents the symbol movement from feeling unnatural.

<Terminology>
The gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment has been described above. In the following, some terms used in this specification will be explained.

"Variable display" (fluctuating display) includes the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), multiple types of regular symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols.

The "changes" in the patterns include updating the display of multiple types of patterns, such as multiple types of special patterns (special pattern 1, special pattern 2), multiple types of normal patterns, and multiple types of decorative patterns, scrolling the display of multiple types of patterns, transforming one or more patterns, enlarging/reducing one or more patterns, and turning on/flashing/off lamps (such as the fourth pattern unit 9050, special pattern 1 variable display unit 53, special pattern 2 variable display unit 54).

"Decorative symbols" include symbols that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game.

"Reduced symbols" are symbols that are smaller than the decorative symbols. When a reduced symbol is displayed, a number symbol that is the same as the decorative symbol is displayed at the edge of the screen, but smaller than the decorative symbol.

"Small symbols" include symbols corresponding to the changing display of decorative symbols that are displayed in a smaller size than the decorative symbols. The small symbols are arranged horizontally in rows corresponding to the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols displayed in the "center" decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbols displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R.

"Confirmation of symbol" includes the stopping of fluctuations in the fourth symbol unit 9050, special symbol 1 variable display unit 53, special symbol 2 variable display unit 54, and decorative symbols, etc., and the final confirmation of the symbol in that special symbol game. For example, this includes the state in which the fluctuations of the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, and the right decorative symbol display area 5R have all stopped.

The "pattern determination period" includes the period during which the display result is determined by stopping the fluctuations of the fourth pattern unit 9050, special pattern 1 variable display unit 53, special pattern 2 variable display unit 54, and decorative patterns. For example, it includes the state when the fluctuations of the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the right decorative pattern display area 5R all stop, and the display result is definitively displayed.

"Reach" includes the situation where decorative symbols that have stopped and are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a winning combination, and decorative symbols that have not yet stopped and are still displaying in a variable manner. For example, this includes a situation where the decorative symbol "2" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol "2" stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, but the decorative symbol in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C continues to display in a variable manner.

"Off" of the lighting means (light-emitting means) includes a state in which the value of the brightness data for lighting (emitting light) the lamp (lighting means, light-emitting means) is "0" (the value indicating the lowest brightness). Note that "off" of the lighting means (light-emitting means) may also include a state in which the value of the brightness data for lighting (emitting light) the lamp (lighting means, light-emitting means) is close to the brightness data "0" corresponding to off, such as "1" or "2." Note that a state in which the value of the brightness data for lighting (emitting light) the lamp (lighting means, light-emitting means) is close to the brightness data "0" corresponding to off, such as "1" or "2," may be included in "on" or "almost off."

"Turning on" or "emitting light" of a lighting means (light-emitting means) refers to a state in which the brightness data value for turning on (emitting light from) a lamp (lighting means, light-emitting means) is higher than when it is off, and includes a state in which the brightness data value is equal to or greater than the brightness data value ("0") corresponding to "off" described above. "Turning on" includes constant lighting, in which the lamp is always on, wave lighting, in which multiple lamps are switched on and off in sequence, and hazy lighting, in which the lamp is dimly lit while changing brightness.

"Flashing" of a lighting means (light-emitting means) includes a state in which the lamp (lighting means, light-emitting means) is "off," "almost off," or "on," and includes the lamp repeatedly switching between "on" and "off" over time. "Flashing" of a lighting means (light-emitting means) also includes the lamp repeatedly switching between "on" and "almost off" over time.

"Brightness" is a value indicating the brightness of a lamp (lighting means, light-emitting means). In this embodiment, brightness data is expressed in hexadecimal as data corresponding to brightness. For example, when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "0," the lamp is controlled so that the specific lamp is at its lowest brightness (dimest), and when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "F," the lamp is controlled so that the specific lamp is at its highest brightness (brightest). As mentioned above, brightness data corresponds to the value of the current flowing through the lamp; when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "0," the current flowing through the specific lamp is lowest, and when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "F," the current flowing through the specific lamp is highest. Note that "lamp" is not limited to LED (light-emitting diode) lamps, but also includes any type of lamp, such as EL (electroluminescence) lamps and incandescent bulbs.

The "illumination color" or "emission color" of a lamp includes the colors represented by the light emitted by one or more light-emitting elements contained in the lamp. For example, if a lamp is composed of an LED consisting of three light-emitting elements, such as "R" (red), "G" (green), and "B" (blue), the LED will light up in various colors as the three light-emitting elements emit light, depending on the current supplied to the three light-emitting elements, which is adjusted by an LED driver based on brightness data. Note that the "illumination color" of a lamp varies depending on the color of the light-emitting element; for example, if an LED consists only of "W" (white) light-emitting elements, the lamp will light up in white, although the brightness will vary depending on the current flowing through it; if an LED consists only of "R" (red) light-emitting elements, the lamp will light up in red, although the brightness will vary depending on the current flowing through it.

The "rainbow colors" (seven colors) of the lamp's lighting colors include colors made up of seven different colors. For example, "rainbow colors" include red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. Note that "rainbow colors" are not limited to the colors mentioned above, and may be made up of seven other colors. Even with the same "rainbow colors," the lighting pattern of rainbow colors may differ depending on the set brightness data, just as the lighting pattern differs between smooth lighting based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in Figure 225 and flashing based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in Figure 256.

"Colors corresponding to characters" include colors that are predetermined for each character that appears in the effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the color corresponding to the character Yume Yume-chan is green, the color corresponding to Jam-chan is purple, and the color corresponding to Bakuchu is red, and so on.

The "light color corresponding to a character" refers to the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9, and includes colors predetermined for each character appearing in the effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the "light color corresponding to a character" includes the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in green corresponding to the Yume Yume character, the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in purple corresponding to Jam-chan, and the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in red corresponding to Bakuchu.

"Dialogue sounds" include sounds that correspond to words spoken by characters appearing in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are output in time with the words spoken by those characters. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, sounds (dialogue sounds) that correspond to the words spoken by characters appearing in the game are output in time with the image of the character.

"Dialogue subtitles" include characters corresponding to dialogue sounds that are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when dialogue sounds are output. Dialogue subtitles are also referred to as subtitle displays.

"Physical sounds" include physical sounds that are produced by the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the effects. In pachinko gaming machine 1, physical sounds that would be produced by the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the effects are output in accordance with the images of those objects.

"Onomatopoeia" includes simulated sounds that express the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the effects. In pachinko gaming machine 1, simulated sounds (onomatopoeia) that express the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the effects are output in accordance with the images of those objects.

"Character action" includes an action in which a character appearing in the effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs some kind of action. For example, it includes an action in which the Yume Yume character chases the Bakuchu character.

The "re-draw effect" includes a temporary stop display of a normal jackpot pattern (for example, an even number pattern such as a "2") that does not result in a special jackpot in the changing display of decorative patterns, and then an effect that is executed before the pattern is determined to arouse interest in whether the normal jackpot pattern will be upgraded to a special jackpot pattern (for example, an odd number pattern such as a "3").

The "replacement display" is an effect included in the "redraw effect," and includes the display of an image in which a temporarily stopped decorative symbol is sequentially replaced with other symbols, causing the decorative symbols to switch one after another. In this embodiment, the "replacement display" includes a display in which the "2" symbol fluctuates rapidly and is sequentially replaced with other symbols, eventually stopping at either the "2" or "3" symbol.

"Repeated display" refers to the repetition of the same display, and refers to the repetition of a display using the same animation. This is an effect included in "re-lottery effect," and includes a display in which a decorative pattern that has temporarily stopped is displayed multiple times with the same animation. As an example, "repeated display" includes a display in which the "7" pattern rapidly changes and is replaced by other patterns, until the "7" pattern finally stops.

The "swaying display" displays the decorative pattern while swaying, indicating that the change has not ended and is still ongoing.

A "stop display" is when the decorative pattern is displayed still and not moving, indicating that the fluctuation has ended.

"Swing speed" refers to the speed at which the decorative pattern moves from the first position to the second position while swinging.

The "first pattern aspect," "second pattern aspect," and "third pattern aspect" are aspects that indicate the position of the decorative pattern. For example, if the decorative pattern is displayed swinging up and down, and the first pattern is in the center position, the second pattern is in the upper position and the third pattern is in the lower position. Also, if the decorative pattern is displayed swinging back and forth, and the first pattern is in the front position, the second pattern is in the left-facing position and the third pattern is in the right-facing position.

The "fanfare effect" is an effect that is executed at the start of the jackpot game state and notifies players that they have entered the jackpot game state.

"Advancement of a movable object (reel)" refers to the action of the movable object moving from its initial position. The end of the movable area into which the reel moves is the advancement position.

"Retreating" a movable object (reel) refers to the action of the movable object moving from its advanced position to its initial position. The initial position within the movable area through which the reel moves is the retrenched position.

"Effect display for moving movable body" is a display that enhances the visual effect around the movable body on the screen as the movable body moves to the advance position. For example, an effect image is displayed to make the movable body movement stand out in accordance with the movement of the movable body when the reach develops into the latter half or when a jackpot is announced.

"Story development" refers to the progression of a story or a series of events. In other words, the story is presented to the player in a continuous flow, without interruptions such as scene changes.

"Part" and "scene" each refer to a group that makes up a performance, with parts being larger groups than scenes. Parts are divided into roles.

"Scene change"
A scene change mainly refers to a change in the display, and in particular to a change in the background, characters, etc. that are displayed.

A "cut-in display" is an effect in which another image interrupts the displayed image. The color of the cut-in display can also indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, if the cut-in display is red, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than if it is green.

The "switching display (eye-catching display)" is a presentation that is displayed when the scene changes. In this embodiment, the eye-catching display is used when the scene changes from a state indicating a loss to a normal game state. The eye-catching display serves to make it easy to understand that the Super Reach has ended.

"Shielding display (shutter display)" is a display in which the image display device 5 displays an image such as a shutter so that it covers the entire area displayed by the image display device 5, shielding the image that was displayed before the shielding display was displayed. The shielding display may also shield the image by displaying something other than a shutter.

"Switching brightness data" means that the timer for the brightness data defined in the grandchild table reaches 0, and the next brightness data is used. Switching brightness data also changes the lighting pattern of the lamp. Switching the lighting pattern of the lamp gives the player the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene has been updated.

"Brightness data does not switch" means that the timer for the brightness data defined in the grandchild table does not reach 0, and that brightness data continues to be used. By not switching brightness data, the lamp's lighting pattern remains constant. By keeping the lamp's lighting pattern constant, the player gets the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene has stopped and is not being updated.

"Video data" is data for displaying videos, including animations. The images displayed on the image display device 5 are switched at high speed, at a rate of several tens of images per second, to create the illusion of movement. Video data may be stored in a compressed form.

"First video data" is video data created using many images to move a character.

"Second video data" is video data created using fewer images to move characters.

"Specific character movements" refers to movements that correspond to a specific character among the multiple characters that appear in the performance.

"Blackout" is an effect in which a black image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, causing the display area to go dark (black out) so that the image displayed in the display area becomes unrecognizable. The blackout may be configured so that the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot varies depending on the duration of the dark state.

"Whiteout" is an effect in which a white image is displayed (whited out) in the display area of the image display device 5, making the image displayed in the display area unrecognizable. The whiteout may be configured so that the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot varies depending on the duration for which the white image is displayed.

"Specific display that makes it difficult to see" refers to an image displayed on the screen that makes the displayed decorative symbols invisible to the player. For example, by displaying a white image across the entire screen (whiteout), the decorative symbols become invisible to the player.

"Fade effect" refers to fade-in and fade-out used in video technology. Fade-in refers to gradually transitioning from a state where a background image or the like is displayed to a state where a specific image is gradually visible. In this embodiment, for example, from a state where the room background is displayed, an image showing dialogue is gradually displayed. "Gradually displaying" means gradually decreasing the transparency of the image showing dialogue. For example, after displaying the dialogue image at 100% transparency, the transparency is decreased by 10% every 0.1 seconds, and the dialogue image is displayed after 1 second. Furthermore, fade-out, the opposite of fade-in, refers to gradually transitioning from a state where a specific image is visible superimposed on the background image to only the background image. In this embodiment, for example, from a state where an image showing dialogue is displayed on top of the room background, the image showing dialogue is gradually made invisible. "Gradually making it invisible" means gradually increasing the transparency of the image showing dialogue. For example, if a dialogue image is displayed at 0% transparency and the transparency is increased by 10% every 0.1 seconds, the dialogue image will disappear after 1 second. Fade effects also include cross-fading, which simultaneously fades in and out to swap images.

<Description of the invention using multiple configurations>
The invention will be described below that has the above-mentioned multiple characteristic points and that provides a particularly synergistic effect. The multiple characteristic points may be characteristic points within the same part or may be characteristic points in different parts.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (1)] (2020-297)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be established,
The introduction part is
A scene in which the character's lines are output and subtitles for the lines are displayed.
Scenes in which the character's lines are output but the corresponding subtitles are not displayed.
a specific scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character and an action sound corresponding to the character's action are output;
the brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that brightness data using an emission color corresponding to the character is switched in accordance with the action of the character;
In the specific scene, the sound of the lines uttered by the character is outputted louder than the sound of the action corresponding to the character's action.
[Drawings] Figures 165-170, 213, and 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not control has been achieved in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, heightening the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. Within the series of flows in the notification effect, physical sounds are output as part of the effect in the introductory part to make the effect more realistic, and the content of the effect can be more easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds louder when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. Furthermore, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, resulting in a better view of the flow of the series of effects being executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (2)] (2020-298)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to a post-switching scene, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
The sound output means
In a specific scene in the introduction part, a dialogue sound uttered by a character and an action sound corresponding to the character's action are output;
In the specific scene, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is outputted louder than an action sound corresponding to the character's action,
When the movable body advances to the second position, a sound for moving the movable body is output, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, a sound corresponding to the scene after switching is output.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, 171, and 172
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player of whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory section is provided that hypes the player up until the win/loss notification is made, heightening the player's sense of elation. An epilogue section is provided after the win notification to provide a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory section and the sense of celebration in the epilogue section. In the notification effect sequence, physical sounds are output as part of the introductory section to enhance the realism of the effect, and the content of the effect can be more easily conveyed to the player by loudly outputting the dialogue sounds when the dialogue sounds overlap with the physical sounds. Furthermore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the new scene before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be maintained. Furthermore, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the new scene during the reel's rise, the reel moves, and the introduction section appears smoother, resulting in a more visually appealing series of effects.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (3)] (2020-300)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means
In a specific scene in the introduction part, a dialogue sound uttered by a character and an action sound corresponding to the character's action are output;
In the specific scene, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is outputted louder than an action sound corresponding to the character's action,
When the movable body advances to the second position, a sound for moving the movable body is output, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, a sound corresponding to an epilogue part is output.
[Drawings] Figures 165-167, 173, 174
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player of whether or not the game is controlled to a favorable state, an introduction section is provided that hypes up the player until the result is announced, heightening the player's sense of elation. An epilogue section is provided after the win is announced, providing a sense of celebration. The introduction section and the epilogue section combine to create a well-balanced presentation. During the notification effect sequence, physical sounds are output as part of the introduction section to enhance the realism of the effect. By amplifying the dialogue sounds when they overlap, the content of the effect can be more easily conveyed to the player. Furthermore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue section before the reel returns to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be maintained. Furthermore, by switching the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 to those corresponding to the epilogue section during the reel's rise, the reel moves, and the execution of the epilogue section appears smoother. As a result, the execution of the entire sequence of effects can be more clearly visualized.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (4)] (2020-301)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sounds uttered by the characters and the action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sounds uttered by the characters are output louder than the action sounds corresponding to the actions of the characters;
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be in the advantageous state;
In a first epilogue part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be effected to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to when it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part to when it is switched to the next luminance data.
[Drawings] Figures 165-167, 261, 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, thereby providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. Within the series of events in the notification effect, physical sounds are output as part of the effect in the introductory part to make the effect more realistic, and the content of the effect can be more easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds louder when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part that is executed when a win occurs, the color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss occurs, so the player can easily understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when a win occurs, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made more subdued than when a win occurs, thereby making the epilogue part look good, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (5)] (2020-302)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sounds uttered by the characters and the action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sounds uttered by the characters are output louder than the action sounds corresponding to the actions of the characters;
In the winning/losing notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing informing part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for moving the movable body;
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that luminance data representing chromatic colors and luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used in sequence.
[Drawings] Figures 165-167, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of excitement in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of steps in the notification effect, physical sounds are output as part of the effect in the introductory part to make the effect more realistic, and when dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap, the dialogue sounds are output louder to make the content of the effect easier to understand. Furthermore, when a device is used to move to notify the player of a win, The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, resulting in a rainbow that flashes, and then the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, which is used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds, is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without any achromatic colors in between, resulting in a rainbow that flashes in a smooth manner, which intuitively tells the player that they have won through the flashing, and then the smooth manner gives them a sense of celebration without being too emphatic, making the flow from the win/loss notification to the epilogue look good, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of presentations that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (6)] (2020-303)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sounds uttered by the characters and the action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is outputted louder than an action sound corresponding to an action of the character, and the notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are a time when a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character and a time when a dialogue subtitle is not displayed,
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Figures 165-167, Figure 175
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not control has been achieved in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, heightening the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. Within the series of flows in the notification effect, physical sounds are output as part of the effect in the introductory part to make the effect more realistic, and the content of the effect can be more easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds louder when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. Furthermore, by designing the epilogue part to have a higher display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds compared to the introductory part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying and to heighten the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and as a result, it is possible to better visualize the flow of the series of effects being executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (7)] (2020-304)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sounds uttered by the characters and the action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sounds uttered by the characters are output louder than the action sounds corresponding to the actions of the characters;
the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect can be executed in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery effect can be executed among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the replacement display is performed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the second symbol in the second half part,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the first symbol in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light emitting mode to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode continuously even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect.
[Drawings] Figures 165-167, 176, 177, 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, in the introductory part, physical sounds are output as part of the effect to make the effect more realistic, and when dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap, the dialogue sounds are output louder to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the effect. Furthermore, in the re-draw part, when a re-draw effect is performed, all of the symbols that have the potential to be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw effect are By switching the display using this, it is possible to suitably excite the player, and at a specific timing in the re-lottery part (the timing after the pattern is enlarged and displayed), the brightness data table is switched to one that emits rainbow light, and then even when the pattern stops (the timing when the pattern confirmation command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched, and by continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, it is possible to prevent the light emission mode from switching during the short period when the pattern is stopped, which would make the appearance look bad, and to prevent the player from being dissatisfied due to flickering caused by the light emission switching, and it is possible to suitably display the epilogue part and re-lottery part, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (8)] (2020-305)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The introduction part is
A scene in which the character's lines are output and subtitles for the lines are displayed.
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed;
the brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that brightness data using an emission color corresponding to the character is switched in accordance with the action of the character;
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to a post-switching scene, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to the scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.
[Drawings] Figures 168-172, 213, and 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player of whether or not the game is controlled to a favorable state, an introductory section is provided to hype the player up until the win/loss notification is made, and an epilogue section is provided after the win notification to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of excitement in the introductory section and the sense of celebration in the epilogue section. Even in scenes during the notification effect sequence where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the switched scene before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetic of the display can be maintained. Furthermore, because the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the switched scene during the reel's rise, the reel moves, and the introductory section appears smooth, resulting in a better visual presentation of the series of effects being executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (9)] (2020-306)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The introduction part is
A scene in which the character's lines are output and subtitles for the lines are displayed.
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed;
the brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that brightness data using an emission color corresponding to the character is switched in accordance with the action of the character;
In the winning/losing notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.
[Drawings] Figures 168-170, 173, 174, 213, 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player of whether or not the game is controlled to a favorable state, an introductory section is provided to hype the player up until the win/loss notification is made, and an epilogue section is provided after the win notification to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of excitement in the introductory section and the sense of celebration in the epilogue section. Even in scenes during the notification effect sequence where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue section before the reel returns to its initial position, the aesthetic of the display can be maintained. Furthermore, because the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue section during the reel's rise, the reel moves, and the execution of the epilogue section appears smooth, resulting in a better visual presentation of the executed series of effects.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (10)] (2020-307)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
The introduction part is
A scene in which the character's lines are output and subtitles for the lines are displayed.
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed;
the brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that brightness data using an emission color corresponding to the character is switched in accordance with the action of the character;
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be in the advantageous state;
In a first epilogue part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be effected to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to when it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part to when it is switched to the next luminance data.
[Drawings] Figures 168-170, 213, 214, 261, 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not control has been achieved in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and in the series of events in the notification effect, even in scenes in the introductory part where subtitles are not displayed in response to dialogue sounds, the presentation can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and further, in the first epilogue part that is executed when a win occurs, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss occurs, so the player can easily understand that they have won by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when a win occurs, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made more subdued than when a win occurs, thereby making the epilogue part look good, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (11)] (2020-308)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The introduction part is
A scene in which the character's lines are output and subtitles for the lines are displayed.
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed;
the brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that brightness data using an emission color corresponding to the character is switched in accordance with the action of the character;
In the winning/losing notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing informing part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for moving the movable body;
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that luminance data representing chromatic colors and luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used in sequence.
[Drawings] Figures 168-170, 213, 214, 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not a game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype up the player until the result is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a sharp presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, even in scenes in the introductory part where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the presentation can be emphasized by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, a brightness data table for moving a movable body used when moving a device to notify a win can be provided. The color table is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, making it a rainbow that flashes, and then the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, which is used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds, is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without any achromatic colors in between, making it a rainbow that flashes in a smooth manner, so that the player is intuitively informed of the win by the flashing, and then the smooth manner gives a sense of celebration without being too emphatic, making the flow from the win/loss notification to the epilogue look good, and as a result, the flow of the series of presentations that are executed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (12)] (2020-309)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be made,
The introduction part is
A scene in which the character's lines are output and subtitles for the lines are displayed.
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed;
the brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that brightness data using an emission color corresponding to the character is switched in accordance with the action of the character;
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are a time when a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character and a time when a dialogue subtitle is not displayed,
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Figures 168-170, 175, 213, and 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not control has been achieved in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and in the series of flows in the notification effect, even in scenes in the introductory part where subtitles are not displayed in response to the dialogue sounds, the presentation can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and further, by designing the display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds to be higher in the epilogue part compared to the introductory part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying and to enhance the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of effects that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (13)] (2020-310)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The introduction part is
A scene in which the character's lines are output and subtitles for the lines are displayed.
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed;
the brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that brightness data using an emission color corresponding to the character is switched in accordance with the action of the character;
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect can be executed in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery effect can be executed among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the replacement display is performed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the second symbol in the second half part,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the first symbol in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light emitting mode to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode continuously even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect.
[Drawings] Figures 168-170, 176, 177, 182, 213, 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, even in scenes in the introductory part where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, in the re-lottery part, when a re-lottery effect is performed, a replacement display using all the symbols that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery effect is performed, thereby encouraging the player to The brightness data table is switched to one that emits rainbow light at a specific timing in the re-draw part (the timing after the symbols are enlarged and displayed), and then the brightness data table is not switched even when the symbols stop (the timing when the symbol determination command is sent), and by continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, it is possible to prevent the appearance from being poor due to the light emission mode being switched during the short period when the symbols are stopped, and to prevent dissatisfaction among players due to flickering caused by the light emission being switched, and the epilogue part and re-draw part can be displayed favorably, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of presentations that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (14)] (2020-311)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body at the time of scene change when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect for moving the movable body at the time of scene change while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after the scene change;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body at scene changeover when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the brightness data table for moving the movable body at scene changeover to a brightness data table corresponding to the scene after the changeover, and controls the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after the changeover;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body at scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to the scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
In the winning/losing notification part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when announcing whether it is a hit or a miss when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the effect for moving the movable body when announcing whether it is a hit or a miss while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound uttered by the character after the movable body has retreated to the first position,
The light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when announcing whether it is a hit or miss when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the brightness data table for moving the movable body when announcing whether it is a hit or miss to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controls the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when announcing whether it is a win or lose when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to the epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.
[Drawings] Figures 171 to 174
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided that hypes the player up until the win/loss notification is made, heightening the player's sense of elation. An epilogue part is provided after the win notification to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. During the sequence of the notification effect, the background display is switched to correspond to the scene after the switch before the reel completes its return to its initial position, thereby preventing the aesthetic appeal of the display from being marred. Furthermore, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to correspond to the scene after the switch while the reel is rising, the reel moves, allowing the flow of the introduction part to be performed to appear smooth. Furthermore, the background display is switched to correspond to the epilogue part before the reel completes its return to its initial position, preventing the aesthetic appeal of the display from being marred. In addition, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the reel is rising, so that the reel moves and the flow of the epilogue part being executed can be made to look smooth, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects being executed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (15)] (2020-312)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introduction part, the movable body advances from a first position to a second position on the front side of the display means, thereby informing the user of a change of scene;
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after switching;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The light emission control means
When the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for moving the movable body, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to a post-switching scene, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the post-switching scene.
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be in the advantageous state;
In a first epilogue part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be effected to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to when it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part to when it is switched to the next luminance data.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, 261, and 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player of whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the win/loss notification is announced, heightening the player's sense of elation. An epilogue part is provided after the win notification to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. During the sequence of the notification effect, the background display is switched to correspond to the new scene before the reel completes its return to its initial position, thereby preventing the display from being spoiled. Furthermore, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to correspond to the new scene during the reel's rise, allowing the reel to move and the introduction part to be executed smoothly. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part executed when a win occurs, the frame lamp changes color at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part executed when a loss occurs, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the frame lamp's lighting pattern. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when a win occurs, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made more subdued than when a win occurs, thereby making the epilogue part look good, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (16)] (2020-313)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body at the time of scene change when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect for moving the movable body at the time of scene change while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after the scene change;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body at scene changeover when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the brightness data table for moving the movable body at scene changeover to a brightness data table corresponding to the scene after the changeover, and controls the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after the changeover;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body at scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to the scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
In the winning/losing notification part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the winning/losing notification is made;
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The brightness data table for moving the movable body when announcing whether the winning or losing is selected is configured so that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence.
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used in sequence.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, and 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and by switching to a background display corresponding to the scene after the switch during the series of steps in the notification effect before the reels have completed their return operation to their initial position, the beauty of the display can be avoided. In addition, as the reel rises, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after the switch, so the reel moves and the flow of the introductory part is made to look smooth, and the brightness data table for moving the movable body used when moving the reel to notify of a win is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, making it rainbow light that flashes in a flashing manner, and then the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without any achromatic colors in between, making it rainbow light that flashes in a smooth manner, so that the player is intuitively informed of the win by the flashing manner, and then the smooth manner gives a sense of celebration without being too emphatic, making the flow from the win/loss notification to the epilogue look good, and as a result, the flow of the series of performances that are executed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (17)] (2020-314)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to a post-switching scene, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are a time when a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character and a time when a dialogue subtitle is not displayed,
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, and 175
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player of whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, which hypes the player up until the win/loss notification is made, heightening the player's sense of elation. An epilogue part is provided after the win notification, providing a sense of celebration. The sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part provide a well-balanced presentation. During the sequence of the notification effect, the background display corresponding to the new scene is switched to one corresponding to the new scene before the reel completes its return to its initial position, thereby preventing the display from being damaged. Furthermore, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to one corresponding to the new scene during the reel's rise, allowing the reel to move and the introduction part to appear smooth. Furthermore, by designing the epilogue part to display a higher proportion of dialogue subtitles relative to dialogue sounds, it is easier to understand what the character is saying, enhancing the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and ultimately improving the visual quality of the sequence of effects being executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (18)] (2020-315)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success/failure is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the success/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to a post-switching scene, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect can be executed in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery effect can be executed among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the replacement display is performed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the second symbol in the second half part,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the first symbol in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light emitting mode to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode continuously even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, 176, 177, and 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and by switching to a background display corresponding to the scene after the switch during the series of steps in the notification effect before the reels have completed their return operation to their initial position, the beauty of the display can be avoided. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after the switch while the role is rising, the role can be moved and the flow of the introduction part being executed can be made to look smooth. Furthermore, in the re-lottery part, when a re-lottery performance is performed, by performing a swap display using all of the patterns that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery performance, it is possible to suitably excite the player. At a specific timing in the re-lottery part (the timing after the patterns are enlarged and displayed), the brightness data table is switched to one that emits light in rainbow, and thereafter, even when the patterns stop (the timing when the pattern confirmation command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched, and by continuing to use the brightness data table that emits light in rainbow, it is possible to prevent the light emission mode from switching during the short period when the patterns are stopped, which makes the appearance look bad, and to prevent the player from being dissatisfied due to flickering caused by the light emission being switched, and it is possible to make the epilogue part and the re-lottery part look good, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances being executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (19)] (2020-316)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the first epilogue part, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means, thereby informing the player that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to a first epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to a first epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a first epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be in the advantageous state;
In a second epilogue part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be effected to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to when it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part to when it is switched to the next luminance data.
[Drawings] Figures 173, 174, 261, and 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player of whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the win/loss notification is announced, heightening the player's sense of elation. An epilogue part is provided after the win notification to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the sequence of the notification effect, by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be maintained. Furthermore, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the reel is rising, the reel moves, and the flow of the epilogue part execution appears smooth. Furthermore, since the frame lamp's illumination color changes at shorter intervals in the first epilogue part, which is executed when a win occurs, than in the second epilogue part, which is executed when a loss occurs, the player can easily understand that they have won based on the illumination pattern of the frame lamp. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when a win occurs, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made more subdued than when a win occurs, thereby making the epilogue part look good, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (20)] (2020-317)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that luminance data representing chromatic colors and luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used sequentially;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.
[Drawings] Figures 173, 174, and 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and in the series of steps in the notification effect, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be avoided by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the reel has completed its return operation to its initial position in the epilogue part. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the reel is rising, the reel moves and the flow of the epilogue part being executed can be made to look smooth, and furthermore, the brightness data table for moving the movable body used when moving the reel to notify of a win is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, making it a rainbow that emits light in a flashing manner, and then the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without any achromatic colors in between, making it a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, so that the flashing manner intuitively notifies the player that they have won, and then the smooth manner gives a sense of celebration without being too emphatic, making the flow from the win/loss notification to the epilogue look good, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (21)] (2020-318)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are a time when a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character and a time when a dialogue subtitle is not displayed,
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. [Drawings] Figures 173 to 175
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and in the series of steps in the notification effect, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be avoided by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the reel has completed its return operation to its initial position in the epilogue part. In addition, as the reel rises, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part, so the reel moves and the flow of the epilogue part being executed can be made to look smooth.Furthermore, by designing the epilogue part to have a higher display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds than the introduction part, it becomes easier to understand what the characters are saying, and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part can be enhanced, and as a result, the flow of the series of performances being executed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (22)] (2020-319)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A performance execution means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success/failure is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the success/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
In the winning/losing notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect can be executed in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery effect can be executed among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the replacement display is performed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the second symbol in the second half part,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the first symbol in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light emitting mode to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode continuously even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. [Drawings] Figs. 173, 174, 176, 177, 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and in the series of steps in the notification effect, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be avoided by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the reel has completed its return operation to its initial position in the epilogue part. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the role is rising, the role is moved, and the flow of the epilogue part being executed can be made to look smooth. Furthermore, in the re-lottery part, when the re-lottery performance is performed, by performing a swap display using all of the patterns that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery performance, the player can be suitably excited. At a specific timing in the re-lottery part (the timing after the patterns are enlarged and displayed), the brightness data table is switched to one that emits light in rainbow, and thereafter, even when the patterns stop (the timing when the pattern confirmation command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched, and by continuing to use the brightness data table that emits light in rainbow, it is possible to prevent the light emission mode from switching during the short period when the patterns are stopped, which could make the appearance look bad, and to prevent the player from being dissatisfied due to flickering caused by the light emission being switched, and the epilogue part and re-lottery part can be made to look good. As a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (23)] (2020-320)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the first epilogue part, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means, thereby informing the player that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be in the advantageous state;
in the first epilogue part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body, thereafter switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that luminance data representing chromatic colors and luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used sequentially;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to when it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part to when it is switched to the next luminance data.
[Drawings], Figures 261 to 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part.In the series of events in the notification effect, in the first epilogue part that is executed when there is a win, the color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when there is a loss, so the player can easily understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when there is a loss, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made more subdued than when there is a win, making the epilogue part look good.Furthermore, the brightness data table for moving the movable body, which is used when moving the device to notify of a win, is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, making it a rainbow that emits light in a flashing manner, and then the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, which is used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds, is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without any achromatic colors in between, making it a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, so that the flashing manner intuitively notifies the player that there is a win, and then the smooth manner gives a sense of celebration without being too emphatic, making the flow from the win/loss notification to the epilogue look good, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (24)] (2020-321)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be in the advantageous state;
in the first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
an average time from when one luminance data is used to when it is switched to the next luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is set to be shorter than an average time from when one luminance data is used to when it is switched to the next luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are a time when a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character and a time when a dialogue subtitle is not displayed,
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
a rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in a first epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than a rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introduction part of the first notification performance;
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the first epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Figure 175, Figure 261, Figure 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part.In the series of events in the notification effect, in the first epilogue part that is executed when there is a win, the color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when there is a loss, so the player can easily understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. Furthermore, by making the lighting of the frame lamp more emphasized in the first epilogue part than when it is a loss, and by making the lighting of the frame lamp more subdued in the second epilogue part than when it is a win, the epilogue part can be made to look good, and by designing the epilogue part to have a higher display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds in comparison to the introduction part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying, and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part can be enhanced, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.As a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (25)] (2020-322)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether it will be controlled to the advantageous state, a first epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-lottery part executed after the first epilogue part,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be in the advantageous state;
in the first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
an average time from when one luminance data is used to when it is switched to the next luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is set to be shorter than an average time from when one luminance data is used to when it is switched to the next luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect can be executed in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery effect can be executed among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the replacement display is performed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the second symbol in the second half part,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the first symbol in the second half part,
The light emission control means
in the first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light emitting mode to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode continuously even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect.
[Drawings] Figures 176, 177, 182, 261, and 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part.In the series of events in the notification effect, in the first epilogue part that is executed when there is a win, the color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when there is a loss, so the player can easily understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when a loss occurs, while in the second epilogue part the lighting of the frame lamp is made more subdued than when a win occurs, thereby making the epilogue part look good. Furthermore, in the re-lottery part, when a re-lottery performance is performed, all of the symbols that have the potential to be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery performance are displayed in a swapped manner, thereby making it possible to excite the player in a good way. At a specific timing in the re-lottery part (the timing after the symbols are enlarged and displayed), the brightness data table is switched to one that emits light in rainbows, and thereafter, even when the symbols stop (the timing when the symbol determination command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched, and the brightness data table that emits light in rainbows continues to be used, thereby preventing the appearance from being poor due to the switching of the light emission mode during the short period when the symbols are stopped, and preventing the player from being dissatisfied due to flickering caused by the switching of the light emission. This makes it possible to make the epilogue part and the re-lottery part look good, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (26)] (2020-323)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing informing part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for moving the movable body;
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that luminance data representing chromatic colors and luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used sequentially;
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are a time when a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character and a time when a dialogue subtitle is not displayed,
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Figure 175, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced performance with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, the brightness data table for moving the movable body used to move the device to notify the win is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, resulting in a rainbow that flashes, and then corresponds to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds. The brightness data table is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without any achromatic colors in between, and the rainbow lights up in a smooth manner, so that the flashing pattern intuitively conveys to the player that they have won, and then the smooth pattern gives a sense of celebration without being too emphatic, making the flow from the win/loss notification to the epilogue look good.Furthermore, by designing the epilogue part to have a higher display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds than the introduction part, it is easier to understand what the characters are saying, and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part is enhanced, and as a result, the flow of the series of performances that are executed can be better shown.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (27)] (2020-324)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
A display means;
A performance execution means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success/failure is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the success/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
In the winning/losing notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing informing part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for moving the movable body;
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that luminance data representing chromatic colors and luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used sequentially;
the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect can be executed in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery effect can be executed among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the replacement display is performed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the second symbol in the second half part,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the first symbol in the second half part,
The light emission control means
in the first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light emitting mode to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode continuously even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect.
[Drawings] Figures 176, 177, 182, and 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not control has been achieved in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, thereby providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of steps in the notification effect, the brightness data table for moving the movable body used to move the device to notify the player of a win is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, resulting in a rainbow that emits light in a flashing manner, and then the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, which is used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds, is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without any achromatic colors in between, resulting in a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, thereby intuitively notifying the player that there has been a win through the flashing manner, and then the smooth manner gives a sense of celebration without being too emphatic. In this way, the flow from the winning/losing notification to the epilogue can be displayed in a favorable manner, and furthermore, in the re-draw part, when the re-draw performance is performed, all of the symbols that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw performance are displayed in a swapped manner, which can arouse the player favorably, and at a specific timing in the re-draw part (the timing after the symbols are enlarged and displayed), the brightness data table is switched to one that emits light in rainbow, and thereafter, even when the symbols stop (the timing when the symbol determination command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched, and by continuing to use the brightness data table that emits light in rainbow, it is possible to prevent the appearance from being poor due to the light emission mode being switched during the short period when the symbols are stopped, and to prevent the player from being dissatisfied due to flickering caused by the light emission being switched, and the epilogue part and re-draw part can be displayed in a favorable manner, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (28)] (2020-325)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are a time when a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character and a time when a dialogue subtitle is not displayed,
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance,
the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect can be executed in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery effect can be executed among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the replacement display is performed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the second symbol in the second half part,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the first symbol in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light emitting mode to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode continuously even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect.
[Drawings] Figures 175 to 177, Figure 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced performance with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, by designing the display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds to be higher in the epilogue part compared to the introductory part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying, and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part can be enhanced. Furthermore, in the re-draw part, when a re-draw effect is performed, all of the patterns that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw effect are displayed. By switching the display using all the symbols, it is possible to suitably excite the player, and at a specific timing in the re-lottery part (the timing after the symbols are enlarged and displayed), the brightness data table is switched to one that emits light in rainbow, and then, even when the symbols stop (the timing when the symbol determination command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched, and by continuing to use the brightness data table that emits light in rainbow, it is possible to prevent the appearance from being poor due to the switching of the light emission mode during the short period when the symbols are stopped, and to prevent the player from being dissatisfied due to flickering caused by the switching of the light emission, and it is possible to suitably display the epilogue part and re-lottery part, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (29)] (2020-403)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be established,
In the introductory part, there is a first scene in which the dialogue sounds uttered by the character and the action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output,
In the first scene, a line sound uttered by a character is outputted louder than an action sound corresponding to an action of the character;
In the introductory part, there is a second scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character,
In the second scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.
[Drawings] Figures 165-167, Figures 178-181
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not they have been controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, increasing the player's sense of excitement, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of excitement in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part.In the series of flows in the notification effect, physical sounds are output as part of the effect in the introductory part to make the effect more realistic, and the content of the effect can be more easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds louder when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap.Furthermore, even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the changes in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see when the subtitles switch, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects being executed can be better seen.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (30)] (2020-404)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The introduction part is
A scene in which the character's lines are output and subtitles for the lines are displayed.
Scenes in which the character's lines are output but the corresponding subtitles are not displayed.
a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character,
the brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that brightness data using an emission color corresponding to the character is switched in accordance with the action of the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.
[Drawings] Figures 168-170, 178-181, 213, 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not control has been achieved in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, heightening the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part.In the series of flows in the notification effect, even in scenes in the introductory part where subtitles are not displayed in response to the dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.Furthermore, even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the changes in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see the changes in subtitles, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects being executed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (31)] (2020-405)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to a post-switching scene, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character,
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, 178 to 181
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player of whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory section is provided to hype the player up until the win/loss notification is made, heightening the player's sense of elation. An epilogue section is provided after the win notification to provide a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory section and the sense of celebration in the epilogue section. During the sequence of the notification effect, the background display is switched to correspond to the new scene before the reel completes its return to its initial position, thereby preventing the display from being spoiled. Furthermore, as the reel rises, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to correspond to the new scene, allowing the reel to move and the introduction section to be performed smoothly. Furthermore, even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the subtitle changes more noticeable, making the subtitle transitions easier to understand. As a result, the sequence of the effects being performed can be better visualized.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (32)] (2020-406)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character,
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
a fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
In the winning/losing notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. [Drawings] Figures 173, 174, 178 to 181
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player of whether or not the game is controlled to a favorable state, an introduction section is provided to hype the player up until the win/loss notification is made, heightening the player's sense of elation. An epilogue section is provided after the win notification to provide a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction section and the sense of celebration in the epilogue section. During the sequence of the notification effect, the background display corresponding to the epilogue section is switched to one corresponding to the epilogue section before the reel completes its return to its initial position, thereby preventing the display from being spoiled. Furthermore, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to one corresponding to the epilogue section while the reel is rising, the reel moves, and the sequence in which the epilogue section is executed appears smooth. Furthermore, even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the subtitle changes more noticeable, making the subtitle transitions easier to see. As a result, the sequence of the executed effects can be better visualized.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (33)] (2020-407)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character,
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
a fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be in the advantageous state;
in the first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to when it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part to when it is switched to the next luminance data.
[Drawings] Figures 178-181, 261, and 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part.In the series of events in the notification effect, in the first epilogue part that is executed when there is a win, the color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when there is a loss, so the player can easily understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. Furthermore, by making the lighting of the frame lamp in the first epilogue part more emphasized than when a win occurs, and by making the lighting of the frame lamp in the second epilogue part more subdued than when a win occurs, the epilogue part can be made to look good, and even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes it easy to see the changes in the subtitles, making it easy to see the changes in the subtitles, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are being performed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (34)] (2020-408)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character,
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
a fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
In the winning/losing notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing informing part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for moving the movable body;
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that luminance data representing chromatic colors and luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used in sequence.
[Drawings] Figures 178-181, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced performance with the sense of excitement in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of steps in the notification effect, the brightness data table for moving the movable body used to move the device to notify the win is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, resulting in a rainbow that flashes, and then in the epilogue part where the story unfolds, The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in this game is configured to use chromatic colors in sequence without any achromatic colors in between, and by using a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, the flashing pattern intuitively conveys to the player that they have won, and then the smooth pattern gives a sense of celebration without being too emphatic, making it possible to effectively show the flow from the win/loss notification to the epilogue, and even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the changes in the subtitles easy to see, making it easy to see when the subtitles switch, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are being executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (35)] (2020-409)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be established,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character,
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
a fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are a time when a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character and a time when a dialogue subtitle is not displayed,
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Figure 175, Figures 178 to 181
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not control has been achieved in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, heightening the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. Within the series of flows in the notification effect, the epilogue part is designed to have a higher display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds compared to the introduction part, making it easier to understand what the characters are saying and enhancing the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. Furthermore, even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the changes in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see when the subtitles switch, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects being executed can be better seen.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (36)] (2020-410)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success/failure is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the success/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character,
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
a fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect can be executed in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery effect can be executed among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the replacement display is performed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the second symbol in the second half part,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the first symbol in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light emitting mode to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode continuously even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect.
[Drawings] Figures 176 to 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, and an epilogue part is provided after the result is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the hype in the introductory part and the celebratory feeling in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, in the re-draw part, when the re-draw effect is performed, a swap display using all the symbols that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw effect is performed, thereby suitably exciting the player. At a specific timing in the re-draw part (the timing after the symbols are enlarged), the brightness data table is switched to light up in rainbow. Then, even when the pattern stops (when the pattern confirmation command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched, and the brightness data table that emits rainbow light continues to be used, thereby preventing the light emission mode from switching during the short period when the pattern is stopped, which would make the appearance look bad, and preventing flickering caused by the light emission switching from causing dissatisfaction to the player, and making the epilogue part and re-lottery part look good, and furthermore, even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the changes in the subtitles easy to see, making it easy to see the changes in the subtitles, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (37)] (2020-411)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be established,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sounds uttered by the characters and the action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sounds uttered by the characters are output louder than the action sounds corresponding to the actions of the characters;
The display means
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed;
After that, the display ends with the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.
[Drawings] Figures 165-167, Figure 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, a physical sound is output as part of the effect in the introductory part to give the effect a sense of reality, and when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound By outputting the symbols in a larger size, the content of the presentation can be more easily conveyed to the player, and furthermore, by positioning the reduced symbols on the edge of the screen while the video of the winning epilogue part is being played, the video of the winning epilogue part is not obstructed, and when the video of the winning epilogue part finishes playing and the symbols are displayed, the decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and by switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the display of the symbols, the big win symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be viewed in a favorable light. As a result, the flow of the series of presentations that are being executed can be viewed better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (38)] (2020-412)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be established,
The introduction part is
A scene in which the character's lines are output and subtitles for the lines are displayed.
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed;
The brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that brightness data using a light emitting color corresponding to the character is switched in accordance with the action of the character, and the display means
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed;
After that, the display ends with the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.
[Drawings] Figures 168-170, 183, 213, and 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not control has been achieved in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, thereby providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. Within the series of events in the notification effect, even in scenes in the introductory part where subtitles are not displayed in response to the dialogue sounds, the presentation can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, when the image of the winning epilogue part is being played, reduced patterns are positioned on the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the image of the winning epilogue part finishes playing and the pattern is displayed, decorative patterns are enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and by switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the pattern display, the winning pattern can be emphasized and shown to the player, making the winning epilogue part look good. As a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of effects being performed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (39)] (2020-413)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to a post-switching scene, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The display means
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed;
After that, the display ends with the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, and 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and by switching to a background display corresponding to the scene after the switch during the series of steps in the notification effect before the reels have completed their return operation to their initial position, the beauty of the display can be avoided. Furthermore, since the brightness data table of the sound effects and game effect lamp 9 is switched to one corresponding to the new scene while the reel is rising, the reel moves, allowing the flow of the introductory part to be played smoothly. Furthermore, by positioning the reduced symbols on the edge of the screen while the video of the winning epilogue part is playing, the video of the winning epilogue part is not obstructed. When the video of the winning epilogue part finishes playing and the symbols are displayed, the decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and the brightness data table is switched in conjunction with the display of the symbols, allowing the jackpot symbols to be emphasized and shown to the player, making the winning epilogue part look good. As a result, the flow of the series of effects being executed can be better seen.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (40)] (2020-414)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
a sound output means;
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The display means
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed;
After that, the display ends with the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.
[Drawings] Figures 173, 174, and 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and in the series of steps in the notification effect, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be avoided by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the reel has completed its return operation to its initial position in the epilogue part. In addition, since the brightness data table of the sound effects and game effect lamp 9 is switched to one corresponding to the epilogue part while the reel is rising, the reel moves, and the flow of the epilogue part can be smoothly shown. Furthermore, by positioning the reduced symbols on the edge of the screen while the winning epilogue part video is being played, the video of the winning epilogue part is not obstructed. When the video of the winning epilogue part finishes playing and the symbols are displayed, the decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and by switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the symbol display, the big win symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be shown in an optimal manner. As a result, the flow of the series of effects being executed can be better shown.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (41)] (2020-415)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means
In the first epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed on the edge of the display area while the story development corresponding to the first epilogue part is displayed;
After that, the display of the story development corresponding to the first epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the first epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be in the advantageous state;
in the first epilogue part, when a display is made in accordance with the development of a story corresponding to the first epilogue part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part, and thereafter, when the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for enlarged display;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to when it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part to when it is switched to the next luminance data.
[Drawings] Figure 183, Figure 261, Figure 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part.In the series of events in the notification effect, in the first epilogue part that is executed when there is a win, the color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when there is a loss, so the player can easily understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. Furthermore, by making the lighting of the frame lamps in the first epilogue part more prominent than when there is a loss, and by making the lighting of the frame lamps in the second epilogue part more subdued than when there is a win, the epilogue part can be made to look good.Furthermore, by positioning the reduced symbols on the edge of the screen while the image of the winning epilogue part is being played, the image of the winning epilogue part is not obstructed, and when the image of the winning epilogue part finishes playing and the symbols are displayed, the decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and by switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the display of the symbols, the big win symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player, making the winning epilogue part look good.As a result, the flow of the series of effects that are being executed can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (42)] (2020-416)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the winning/losing notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed;
After that, the display ends with the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing informing part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for moving the movable body;
In the epilogue part, when a story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and thereafter, when the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for enlarged display;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that luminance data representing chromatic colors and luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used in sequence.
[Drawings] Figure 183, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced performance with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, the brightness data table for moving the movable body used to move the device to notify the win is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, resulting in a rainbow that flashes, and then the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds, is configured to alternate chromatic colors without any achromatic colors in between. By using the following configuration, the smooth rainbow light can be used to intuitively tell the player that they have won by flashing, and then the smooth light can give a sense of celebration without being too emphatic, making the flow from the win/loss notification to the epilogue look good.Furthermore, while the winning epilogue part video is playing, the reduced symbols are positioned on the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the winning epilogue part video, and when the winning epilogue part video finishes playing and the symbols are displayed, the decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and the brightness data table is switched in conjunction with the symbol display, so that the jackpot symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player, making the winning epilogue part look good.As a result, the flow of the executed series of presentations can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (43)] (2020-417)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be established,
The display means
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed;
After that, the display ends with the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are a time when a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character and a time when a dialogue subtitle is not displayed,
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Figure 175, Figure 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not they have been controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of excitement in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, the display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds is designed to be higher in the epilogue part compared to the introductory part, making it easier to understand what the characters are saying. This makes it easier to understand, enhancing the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and by positioning the reduced symbols on the edge of the screen while the video of the winning epilogue part is playing, it does not interfere with the video of the winning epilogue part, and when the video of the winning epilogue part finishes playing and the symbols are displayed, the decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and by switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the display of the symbols, the big win symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player, making the winning epilogue part look good. As a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of effects that are being executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (44)] (2020-418)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The display means
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed;
After that, the display ends with the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When enlarging and displaying the decorative pattern using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display;
the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect can be executed in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery effect can be executed among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the replacement display is performed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the second symbol in the second half part,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the display of the first symbol in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-lottery part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light emitting mode to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching is made from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode continuously even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect.
[Drawings] Figures 176, 177, 182, and 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not a game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the result is notified to give a sense of celebration, thereby providing a well-balanced presentation with the hype in the introductory part and the celebratory feeling in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, in the re-draw part, when the re-draw effect is performed, a switching display using all the symbols that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw effect is performed, thereby suitably exciting the player. At a specific timing in the re-draw part (the timing after the symbols are enlarged), the brightness data table is switched to one that emits rainbow light, and then, even at the timing when the symbols stop (the timing when the symbol confirmation command is sent), the brightness data is By continuing to use a brightness data table that emits rainbow light without switching the data table, it is possible to prevent the lighting mode from switching during the short period when the symbols are stopped, which would make the display look bad, and to prevent the player from being dissatisfied with the flicker caused by the lighting switching, thereby making the epilogue part and the re-lottery part look good.Furthermore, while the image of the winning epilogue part is being played, the reduced symbols are positioned on the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the image of the winning epilogue part finishes playing and the symbols are displayed, the decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and by switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the display of the symbols, the big win symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player, making the winning epilogue part look good.As a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of effects that are being executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (45)] (2020-419)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
a light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be made,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character,
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
a fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
The display means
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed;
After that, the display ends with the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.
[Drawings] Figures 178 to 181, 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not control has been achieved in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, thereby providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introductory part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. Even if subtitles are displayed overlapping each other during the series of notifications, the fade effect makes it easy to see the changes in the subtitles, making it easy to see when the subtitles change. Furthermore, when the video of the winning epilogue part is playing, the reduced patterns are positioned on the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the video of the winning epilogue part, and when the video of the winning epilogue part finishes playing and the patterns are displayed, the decorative patterns are enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and by switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the pattern display, the winning pattern can be emphasized and shown to the player, making the winning epilogue part look good. As a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of effects being performed look better.

<Example of time-saving control without going through the hit>
Next, we will explain an example of executing time-saving control without going through a win (big win, small win, etc.) as a time-saving state.
(Example of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)

(A1) In the above-mentioned features and variations, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A is activated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7A. In other words, the time-saving state may be controlled in a way that does not pass through a win (big win, small win, etc.).

(A2) The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbols or part of the small winning symbols.

(A3) Furthermore, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using random numbers dedicated to the lottery of time-saving symbols, or the lottery may be performed using random numbers for other lotteries, such as random numbers for lottery of losing symbols, random numbers for lottery of jackpot symbols, random numbers for lottery of small jackpot symbols, random numbers for jackpot lottery determination, and random numbers for lottery of falling symbols.

(A4) Furthermore, these time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in conjunction with combinations of symbols displayed as other symbols, such as small win symbols and losing symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol may determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state. However, if a time-saving symbol is won, no further lottery will be held to determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state, or to determine the number of times the time will be reduced.

(A5) Also, when a lottery is held for a time-saving symbol and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbol does not change depending on the setting value. In other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbol is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

(A6) Furthermore, the timing of obtaining a random number when drawing a time-saving symbol may be when the ball enters the start slot (first start slot, second start slot), regardless of whether a dedicated random number or another random number is used.

(A7) Furthermore, with regard to winning when a lottery for a time-saving symbol is held, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) will be the winning value; if a small win symbol random number is used to draw the time-saving symbol, a specific small win symbol random number value will be the winning value; if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving symbol, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value will be the winning value; and a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area can be set inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the time-saving symbol can be won when the gaming ball passes through the time-saving area.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery for the time-saving symbol is conducted using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable display count for the time-saving state (number of time-saving times) will not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

(A9) Furthermore, when drawing a lottery for a time-saving symbol, if a losing symbol random number is used to draw the time-saving symbol, a specific losing symbol random number value can be the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used to draw the time-saving symbol, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random number values as the winning value, this is only possible for devices whose settings cannot be changed, as performance other than the jackpot probability will differ depending on the settings.

(A10) Furthermore, the timing for determining the results of the lottery for the time-saving symbol may be performed after the jackpot has been determined. Note that the lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is performed only in the low-probability, low-base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already in, the number of time-saving symbols may be reset or the lottery may not be performed, as long as this is determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) Furthermore, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be set to a predetermined number depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. It is also possible to set different conditions for granting the time-saving symbol for each time-saving symbol.

(A12) Also, when the number of time-saving times differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for allocating the time-saving symbols can be changed between Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2.

(A13) Furthermore, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving times awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be predetermined for the game state.

(A14) In addition, the lottery results for time-saving symbols in a low-probability, low-base state can include a lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

(A15) In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end symbol (time-saving end symbol) may be executed, and the number of time-saving attempts may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving feature until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time-saving attempts may not be set, and may, in principle, be unlimited.

(A16) In addition, the number of time-saving periods and the conditions for granting the time-saving period may be different between the time-saving period controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving period controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

(A17) Furthermore, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is entered is when the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is entered is when the small win operation ends.

(A18) In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-shortening state is entered is the timing at which the structure's operation ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

(A19) In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a predetermined number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the gaming machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming parlor opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, the gaming machine may be controlled to a time-saving state.

(A20) Also, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated is updated.

(A21) The time required for the time-saving symbol to be determined may also be different from the time required for the other symbols to be determined.

(Other examples of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)
As other time-saving control using time-saving symbols, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) Game control may be configured to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern with a special pattern in the normal state (special display result), and not to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern with a special pattern in the time-saving state (not to switch game states such that the time-saving state is overwritten (the time-saving state reoccurs) even when a time-saving pattern is displayed). Furthermore, different effects may be displayed when a variable display result of a time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the normal state and when a variable display result of a time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the time-saving state (for example, for decorative patterns, a special pattern may be displayed as a time-saving pattern in the normal state and a general losing pattern may be displayed in the time-saving state). This allows for appropriate control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, interest is enhanced by effects being executed depending on whether or not a state transition occurs).

(B2) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), when the display result of a special symbol is a time-saving symbol, the special symbol may be a time-saving symbol that is common to both the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol may be a different symbol displayed as the display result in the normal state and the time-saving state (for example, the decorative symbol may be a special symbol corresponding to the time-saving symbol in the normal state, but a simple losing symbol may be displayed in the time-saving state, or no symbol corresponding to the time-saving symbol may be displayed). This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative symbol in the time-saving state, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

(B3) In a gaming machine controlled as described in (B1), in the normal state, an effect is executed that suggests whether the display result of the decorative symbol will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol), but in the time-saving state, the effect that suggests whether the display result of the decorative symbol will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol) may not be executed. This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative symbol in the time-saving state, and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(B4) In a gaming machine controlled as described in (B1), the time for which the decorative symbols are displayed (the time for which the displayed state is maintained after the determined face result is displayed) may be controlled to differ between the normal state and the time-saving state. This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the presentation of decorative symbols in the time-saving state, and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(B5) After the first variable display using the first special pattern is performed, and after the second variable display using the second special pattern is performed, the state can be controlled to be advantageous to the player, and game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern (special display result) in the normal state, and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern in the time-saving state (game state switching control may not be performed to overwrite the time-saving state (such that the time-saving state occurs again) even if a time-saving pattern is displayed). The second variable display has a higher probability of displaying the variable display result of the time-saving pattern than the first variable display, and information related to the variable display is stored as reserved memory information. When the time-saving state ends, different effects can be executed depending on whether the reserved memory information is stored (for example, a display indicating that the time-saving control will continue when transitioning to time-saving control is made, or an effect that clearly indicates that time-saving control will not be executed when transitioning to time-saving control is not made). During the time-saving state, right-hit play is performed in response to a right-hit notification (a notification instructing a right hit), and continues until all variable displays based on the reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends. It is also possible to disable a left-hit notification (a notification instructing a left hit). This allows for appropriate control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, excitement is enhanced by executing effects depending on whether the state is transitioning).

(B6) After the first variable display using the first special pattern is performed, and after the second variable display using the second special pattern is performed, it is possible to control the state to be advantageous to the player, and game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern in the normal state (special display result), and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern in the time-saving state (game state switching control may not be performed to overwrite the time-saving state (such that the time-saving state occurs again) even if a time-saving pattern is displayed). The second variable display has a higher probability of displaying the variable display result of the time-saving pattern than the first variable display, and information about the variable display is stored as reserved memory information. When the time-saving state ends, different effects can be executed depending on whether the reserved memory information is stored (for example, a display that indicates that the time-saving control will continue when switching to time-saving control, or an effect that indicates that the time-saving control will not be executed when switching to time-saving control is not performed). During the time-saving state, right-hit play is performed in response to a right-hit notification, and continues until all variable displays based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends. It is also possible to disable left-hit notifications (notifications instructing left-hit play). This allows for appropriate control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, excitement is enhanced by executing effects depending on whether the state is transitioning).

(B7) A left-hand hit notification may be executed in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserve memory information stored when the time-saving state ends has ended. This allows for instructions on how to hit the ball to be displayed appropriately, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(B8) The notification mode of the right-hit notification executed in response to a win may be different between when the display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserve memory information stored when the time-saving state ends and when a win (small win, big win) occurs in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserve memory information is executed. This prevents the player from feeling like they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B9) It may be possible to implement a different effect after implementing a common effect depending on whether the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends contains reserved memory information that displays the display result of a time-saving pattern or whether such reserved memory information does not exist (for example, when the fourth of four remaining reserved memories contains reserved memory information that displays the display result of a time-saving pattern, a common effect suggesting whether or not to return to the time-saving state can be implemented up to the variable display based on the third reserved memory information, and a time-saving state return effect different from the common effect can be implemented with the variable display based on the fourth reserved memory information). This prevents the player from feeling like they have lost out due to the display result of a decorative pattern due to the notification mode of the right-hit notification, and suppresses a decline in interest in the game.

(B10) The notification mode of the right-hit notification that is executed in response to a win may be different between the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserve memory information stored when the time-saving state ends, and the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserve memory information is executed. This allows the presentation to change depending on the game state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(B11) The final display time (the time for which the display state is maintained after the finalized surface result is displayed) of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends may be the same as the final display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This can prevent the increase in control data.

(B12) The right-hit notification may not be executed during the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserve memory information stored when the time-saving state ends is executed, and when the time-saving pattern display result is displayed in the variable display based on the remaining reserve memory information, the right-hit notification may be executed during the initial period at the start of the next variable display. This allows for instructions on how to play to be displayed appropriately, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(B13) When a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving pattern is displayed as a special pattern in the normal state, game control is performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and a common specific effect (reach effect, advance notice effect) can be executed when the variable display result is a winning pattern (specific display result) such as a small win or big win pattern, or when the variable display result is a time-saving pattern (special display result). The rate at which the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed may differ depending on which of multiple common specific effects is executed. Furthermore, when a time-saving pattern display result is displayed in the variable display, a right-hit notification may be executed during the initial period at the start of the next variable display. This allows for optimal effect control depending on the game state when the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B14) After the common specific effect is executed, the display result may be a winning symbol (specific display result) or a time-saving symbol (special display result). This increases the variety of variable display results, making the game more enjoyable.

(B15) The game control CPU 103 can select a common variation pattern for when a winning symbol (specific display result) is obtained, when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, and when a losing symbol (predetermined display result) is obtained, and the presentation control CPU 120 receives a command from the game control CPU 103 specifying the same variation pattern, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute different presentations in the variable display depending on the type of symbol specification command that specifies the display result. This increases the variety of presentations in the variable display, making the game more enjoyable.

(B16) After the common specific effect is executed, a special effect can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained. This makes it possible to increase the excitement of the game by using the special effect after the common specific effect is executed.

(B17) Depending on the type of common specific effect, a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is achieved may or may not be executed (for example, a special effect may not be executed when an effect with a higher probability of winning is executed among multiple types of super reach effects). This prevents effects that excessively stimulate the time-saving state from being executed, and maintains the sense of expectation of winning, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(B18) The expected probability (proportion) of a time-saving symbol (special display result) occurring when the special effect is executed may differ depending on the type of common specific effect. This prevents the execution of effects that excessively emphasize the time-saving state, and maintains the expectation of a win, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(B18) The expected probability (proportion) of a time-saving symbol (special display result) occurring when the special effect is executed may differ depending on the type of common specific effect. This prevents the execution of effects that excessively emphasize the time-saving state, and maintains the expectation of a win, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(B19) The expectation (proportion) of a time-saving symbol (special display result) may be varied depending on the presentation mode of a predetermined presentation different from the common specific presentation (for example, a presentation that displays an active display whose display mode can change depending on the expectation of a win (a display that moves from the display position of a pending display to another display position, and which produces a presentation that can suggest the expectation of a win corresponding to the currently active variable display)). This allows for an increase in the enjoyment of the game, as presentations that excessively emphasize the time-saving state are not executed and the expectation of a win is maintained.

(B20) In a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is achieved, after an effect suggesting that a time-saving symbol (special display result) will be achieved (such as a time-saving suggestion effect), an effect announcing a winning symbol (specific display result) (such as a special jackpot with a higher gaming value than the time-saving state) may be executed. This prevents effects that excessively emphasize the time-saving state from being executed, and maintains the sense of anticipation of a win, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(B21) The game control CPU 103 can control a time-saving state (special state) with different number of time-saving times (duration of time-saving times) depending on the type of time-saving symbol (special display result) from among multiple types provided (for example, first time-saving symbol: 50 time-saving times, second time-saving symbol: 100 time-saving times, etc.), and the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect in which the number of time-saving times (duration) granted when the time-saving symbol stops varies depending on the type of effect executed (for example, the type of reach effect, etc.). This can draw the player's attention to the number of time-saving times that will follow depending on the type of effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(B22) Game control is performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol with a special symbol in the normal state. A command is sent from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command can execute an effect based on the command. The sent command includes a special command that can specify (control) the transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state). When the effect control CPU 120 receives multiple types of commands including a special command, it may limit (such as not executing at all or only occasionally executing) the execution of a pre-read preview effect for pending memory information that occurs after pending memory information that has been identified as executing a variable display that can transition to the time-saving state (special state) based on a pre-read of the pending memory information. This allows effect control to be executed appropriately depending on the game state when the time-saving symbol (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) Based on the pre-reading of the reserved memory information, it is also possible to restrict the execution of pre-reading preview effects for reserved memory information that occurs after it is determined that a variable display capable of transitioning (controlling) to a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) will be executed. Furthermore, it is also possible to enable the execution of a common type of pre-reading preview effect as a pre-reading preview effect during the execution restriction of such pre-reading preview effects. This restricts the execution of effect control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state as the gaming state transitions, thereby preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

(B24) In both cases where the variable display based on the pending memory information for the pre-read target is a variable display that displays a time-saving symbol (special display result) and a variable display that appears to display a time-saving symbol (special display result) but does not, the execution of pre-read preview effects for pending memory information that occurs after the pre-read target may be restricted. This restricts the execution of effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(B25) During the execution restriction of the above-mentioned pre-reading preview performance, the pre-reading preview performance will not execute a performance with a higher expectation level than a specific expectation level (for example, if the expectation level of the color of the hold display is blue < green < red, the color of the hold display will not be changed to red). This restricts the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(B26) During the execution restriction of the above-mentioned pre-reading preview effect, the pre-reading preview effect does not execute a specific type of effect (for example, if the expected color of the hold display is blue < green < red, the color of the hold display will not change to red). This restricts the execution of effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(Example of time-saving control using the number of variable display times resulting in a predetermined display result, such as the number of variable display times of a losing result)
Next, an example of time-saving control using the number of variable displays (the number of times a variable display that has resulted in a miss) that result in a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As described below, the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times a variable display that has resulted in a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) has continued reaches a special number (for example, 1,000 times). Note that the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times a variable display that has resulted in a miss display result has continued reaches a special number.

(C1) After the first variable display using the first special symbol is performed and after the second variable display using the second special symbol is performed, the game can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player based on the variable display result becoming a specific display result. The game can be controlled by updating numerical information on the number of times a variable display that resulted in a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result or a small win display result that does not result in a big win) in the normal state, and transitioning from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state) based on the numerical information when a special condition is met in which the number of times (continuation number) of variable displays that resulted in the predetermined display result reaches a special number (e.g., 1,000 times). The numerical information can be updated both when the predetermined display result is achieved with the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is achieved with the second variable display. This allows the numerical information on the number of times the predetermined display result is achieved to continue updating regardless of whether the first variable display or the second variable display is available, making it easier for the player to be rescued by the time-saving state and increasing the player's motivation to play. This makes it possible to optimally rescue players through time-saving modes.

(C2) The special condition may be met when it is determined, based on the numerical information, that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed a special number of times in succession (e.g., 1,000 times). This allows the player to be rescued by transitioning to a time-saving state (special state) when a series of display results unfavorable to the player are displayed, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when a variable display is executed, even in a state other than the normal state (such as a probability variable state or a time-saving state). This allows the player to be rescued in an appropriate manner when a series of display results that are unfavorable to the player occur.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is met. Such an initialization condition may be met when the game is controlled to the advantageous state. This makes it possible to suppress rescue when there is no longer a need to rescue the player, such as when the game is in an advantageous state that is favorable to the player, and to prevent the player from becoming more gambling than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time-saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to transition to the time-saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition may be met when the special display result is displayed. This makes it possible to suppress rescue when there is no longer a need to rescue the player, such as when the time-saving state (special state) is advantageous to the player, and to prevent the player from becoming more gambling than necessary.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be met when the variable display is executed a special number of times. This effectively makes it possible to control the game to a time-saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs, thereby increasing the degree of relief available to the player.

(C7) In the event of a power outage or other power outage, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and when specific conditions are met, such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on, the backed up data can be initialized, and the numerical information can be initialized when the specific conditions are met. This means that the numerical information backed up in the event of a power outage is initialized and does not remain when the data is initialized, thereby preventing any disadvantage to the gaming center.

(C8) When the numerical information reaches the special count (e.g., 1,000 times), the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled for a period of more than the special count (e.g., another 1,000 times or more). During the time-saving state (special state), the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled again when the numerical information reaches the special count again. Different effects can be executed for the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state). This makes it possible to change the appearance of the effects, such as shortening the variable display time for the second time-saving state compared to the first time-saving state, in a game where the player is in an extremely unfavorable state, such as when the player is controlled to the second time-saving state (special state), thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game. It is also possible to execute similar effects for the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state), without executing such effects. This makes it possible to prevent players from being overly aware that they are in an extremely disadvantageous state, such as being controlled into a second time-saving state (special state), and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(C9) When the value of the special symbol process flag is a first number (0-2), a first process related to variable display is executed; when the value of the special symbol process flag is a second number (4 or higher) different from the first number, a second process related to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed; and when the value of the special symbol process flag is a third number (3) different from the first and second numbers, a third process is executed to control to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition. Furthermore, the game ball can be selectively hit to a first path (left-side game area) or a second path (right-side game area), and in the normal state, the game ball is hit to the first path, and in the time-saving state (special state), the game ball is hit to the second path to play. Furthermore, while the third process is being executed, even though the game is not controlled to the time-saving state (special state), a notification (for example, a right-hit notification by a right-hit lamp) may be issued to indicate that the ball should be fired to the second path. Additionally, during execution of the third process, a notification effect may be displayed indicating that the game will transition to a time-saving state (special state). This allows for optimal control even when new functions are added to the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex. For example, by having the gaming control CPU 103 turn on the right-hit lamp, it is possible to display a notification effect indicating the firing direction early (before the actual time-saving fluctuation begins) when the game actually transitions to the time-saving state (special state).

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in a variable display where the special condition is met, the second process may be executed after the first process is executed, and the third process may not be executed. This gives priority to controlling the game to an advantageous state over controlling the game to a time-saving state (special state) based on the fulfillment of the special condition, so that the result is not more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display begins, and based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special count, control is performed to enter a time-saving state (special state) after the variable display in which the numerical information became a specific value ends (start of next fluctuation, waiting for customers), and when the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special count, the special information (special count reached flag) is changed from a first value to a second value (flag set), and when control is performed to enter the time-saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second value to the first value (flag reset). This makes it possible to preferably execute control to transition to the time-saving state (special state) by managing the special information.

(C12) The game control CPU 103 may select and determine a variation pattern for the variable display, and may select and determine a variation pattern for the symbol determination time that differs when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. This makes it possible to optimally execute effects when the variable display of the special number of times is executed.

(C13) When the value of the special symbol process flag is a first number (0-2), a first process related to variable display is executed; when the value of the special symbol process flag is a second number (4 or higher) different from the first number, a second process related to a favorable state (jackpot game state) is executed; and when the value of the special symbol process flag is a third number (3) different from the first and second numbers, a third process is executed to control to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of a special condition. Furthermore, a command can be sent from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command can execute an effect based on the command. Furthermore, when the special state is in the special state, specific information (background designation, variable pattern) can be sent depending on whether the value of the special symbol process flag is the second number or the third number. This enables optimal control even when new functions are added to the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex. For example, the ability to easily distinguish between different game states makes game control easier. Then, by varying the command depending on the game status identified at that time, the presentation control CPU 120 (presentation control means) can execute presentation control that is appropriate for the game status.

(C14) When the special condition is met during the time-saving state (special state), the value of the special chart process flag may be set to a fourth value different from the first value, the second value, and the third value, thereby enabling control to return to the time-saving state (special state). This allows for optimal control even if new functions are added to the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex.

(C15) During the time-saving state (special state), different effects may be executed depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the specific display result (winning symbol) or the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered because the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count, a time-saving state effect with a shorter variable time than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot game state may be executed). This makes it possible to execute effects for the time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(C16) During the time-saving state (special state), it may be possible to implement the same effects when the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the specific display result (winning symbol) and when the special condition (condition for the number of variable displays) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, the time-saving state effects may have the same variable time when the time-saving state is entered because the number of variable displays is equal to or greater than the special number, and when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot). This avoids the need for new display data, thereby avoiding increased development costs and increasing player interest by not confusing the player.

(C17) During the time-saving state (special state), different effects may be executed depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the special display result (time-saving symbol) or whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered because the special condition (condition for the number of variable displays) is met (for example, when the time-saving state is entered because the number of variable displays is equal to or greater than the special number, a time-saving state effect with a shorter variable time than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot may be executed). This makes it possible to execute effects for the time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(C18) During the time-saving state (special state), it may be possible to implement the same effects when the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the special display result (time-saving symbol) and when the special condition (condition for the number of variable displays) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered because the number of variable displays is equal to or greater than the special number, a time-saving state effect with a shorter variable time than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot may be implemented). This avoids the need for new effect data, thereby not increasing development costs, and increases the player's interest in the game by not confusing them.

(C19) In the event of a power outage or other power outage, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored. When the power is turned on, the game control CPU 103 can send predetermined information (a RAM clear command at cold start, or a command notifying the number of variable displays until the time-saving mode ends at hot start) to the presentation control CPU 120 based on the backed-up data. Based on receiving the predetermined information, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute suggestive presentations regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed within a predetermined period after the power is turned on (such as a different first-in-the-morning result, a different background image, or an effect suggesting whether a 100-spin variation is far or close). This gives players an incentive to play first thing in the morning, increasing the operating rate of the gaming machine while preventing an increase in the processing burden.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 may be capable of transmitting specific information (a command capable of identifying information related to the time-saving state) to the presentation control CPU 120 in connection with the execution of the variable display, and the presentation control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a special presentation (such as a presentation suggesting the end of the time-saving state) related to control to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. The specific information may include first specific information (a first background designation, dedicated countdown presentation information) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is less than or equal to a predetermined value (e.g., 127), and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 spins) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 127). This reduces the risk of players unknowingly incurring losses by periodically suggesting functions, and allows for optimal command processing.

(C21) The effect control CPU 120 can execute a suggestion effect (for time-saving state suggestion effect control) that suggests that control will be made to the time-saving state (special state) when a special condition is met, based on the execution of a first predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 300 times) that are less than the special number of times, and can execute a suggestion effect every time a second predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 100 times) that are less than the first predetermined number are executed, before the execution of the special number of variable displays. This reduces the risk of players unknowingly incurring losses by periodically suggesting functions to them.

(C22) Various data, including the numerical information, can be backed up and stored in the event of a power outage or other power outage. The gaming control CPU 103 can initialize the backed-up data when certain conditions, such as an initialization operation upon power-on, are met. The presentation control CPU 120 executes different presentations (e.g., different presentations when transitioning to the time-shortened state) when the gaming machine is controlled to the time-shortened state (special state) based on the fulfillment of the special condition (condition for the variable number of displays) after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed, and when the gaming machine is controlled to the time-shortened state based on the fulfillment of the special condition after the backup-stored data is initialized and the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed. This enables optimal control even when new functions are added to the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex. Furthermore, players will be able to tell from the different effects whether the backed-up data has been initialized. For example, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the jackpot probability setting to be changed, players will be able to tell that the setting may have been changed, which increases the number of factors for guessing the setting and increases the enjoyment of the game.

(C23) Various data, including the numerical information, can be backed up and stored in the event of a power outage or other power outage. The gaming control CPU 103 can initialize the backed-up data when certain conditions, such as an initialization operation upon power-on, are met. The presentation control CPU 120 executes different presentations after being controlled to the time-saving state (special state) (e.g., different presentations after transitioning to the time-saving state) depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the fulfillment of the special condition (condition for the variable number of displays) after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed, or the special state is entered based on the fulfillment of the special condition after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized. This allows for optimal control even when new functions are added to the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex. Furthermore, players will be able to tell from the different effects whether the backed-up data has been initialized. For example, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the jackpot probability setting to be changed, players will be able to tell that the setting may have been changed, which increases the number of factors for guessing the setting and increases the enjoyment of the game.

(D1) The execution rate of the group preview effect may be different depending on whether the variable display results in a time-saving symbol, a jackpot, or a miss.

The embodiment described below has the same configuration and performs the same control as the embodiment described above.

Furthermore, the following describes an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention with reference to the drawings.

(Feature 132SG form)
[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R);
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means
It is possible to execute a movable body effect using the movable body during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 318, a part where a movable body announcement can be executed in which the on-board movable body 32A vibrates up and down),
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 322, an effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the operation of the on-board movable body 32A),
The sound output means can output a movable body effect sound corresponding to the movable body effect (for example, in the movable body preview shown in FIG. 322, the part where effect sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R),
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 304 and 305, which performs the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 320, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position),
When the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during a predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed at the time of power-on with initialization, when the movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the output of the performance movable control and the movable body performance sound is limited, while the display of the effect display is performed, and when the movable body performance is executed after the predetermined period, at least the performance movable control and the display of the effect display are performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 335, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and based on the start winning, these on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG1 When a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of 01, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the output of the movable body prediction sound corresponding to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R are not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, but the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 334, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start-up winning occurs after the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and when a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started based on the start-up winning, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the effect display 132SG407 are displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body prediction.
When the power is turned on without initialization and the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, the performance movable control is limited when the movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, while the effect display is displayed and the movable body performance sound is output, and when the movable body performance is executed after the predetermined period, the performance movable control, the effect display is displayed, and the movable body performance sound is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 339, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and based on the start winning, during the initial operation period of these on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, When a variable display that executes a movable object prediction is started, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as a movable object prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable object prediction, but the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 and a movable object prediction sound corresponding to the movable object prediction is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and as shown in Figure 338, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, a start-up winning occurs after the initial operation period of the on-board movable object 32A, the below-board movable object 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable object 132SG101, and when a variable display that executes a movable object prediction is started based on the start-up winning, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as a movable object prediction, the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, and the output of a movable object prediction sound corresponding to the movable object prediction are executed during the execution period of the movable object prediction.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a movable body presentation is executed using a variable display that is started during confirmation movable control, a gaming machine can be provided that can indicate to the player that a movable body presentation has been executed by outputting an effect display or movable body presentation sound, while preventing the presentation movable control from interfering with the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 1-2 is
When the movable body performance is executed, the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when it is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 318, the part where the expectation of a jackpot is set higher when the movable body prediction is executed than when the movable body prediction is not executed),
When the power is turned on with initialization, if the movable body effect is executed with a variable display that started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, the effect movable control and the output of the movable body effect sound are limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the effect movable control that is limited during the predetermined period is performed, while the movable body effect sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 335, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and based on the start winning, Based on this, when a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the output of the movable body prediction sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the movable body prediction are not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, while after the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is completed, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is executed again, but the output of the movable body prediction sound in response to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R is not executed.
When the power is turned on without initialization, if the movable body effect is executed with a variable display that started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, the effect movable control is limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the effect movable control that is limited during the predetermined period is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 339, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 If a start winning occurs during the period, and a variable display is started to execute a movable body prediction during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 based on the start winning, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, but the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is executed again after the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 is completed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the effect of the presentation is not reduced by limiting the control of the movable body presentation, which has a high probability of being controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 1-3 is
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
When power is turned on, the movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control to move the first movable body and the second movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally (for example, a part of the performance control CPU 120 that executes the operation confirmation control process shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 305 ).
The confirmation movement control ends based on the completion of the movement of the second movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 334, the initial movements of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 are the last to end upon completion of the initial movement of the under-board movable body 32B).
The movable body effect is an effect using the first movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 322, the movable body notice is an effect that operates the on-board movable body 32A),
When the power is turned on, if the movable body effect is executed with a variable display that is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, the effect movable control is limited, and when the movement of the second movable body due to the confirmation movable control is completed, the effect movable control that is limited during the predetermined period is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 335, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the frame If a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the upper movable body 132SG101, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of these on-board movable body 32A, under-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and frame-top movable body 132SG101 based on the start winning, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, and the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A is executed again after the initial operation of the under-board movable body 32B is completed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which, when the movement of the first movable body by the confirmation movable control is completed, the performance movable control using the first movable body is executed, so that it is not possible to distinguish between the confirmation movable control and the performance movable control.

The gaming machine of form 1-4 is
The presentation control means is capable of executing an initialization notification corresponding to the initialization when power is turned on accompanied by initialization (for example, as shown in Figs. 334 and 335, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification, and an initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
The execution period of the confirmation movable control and the execution period of the initialization notification overlap (for example, as shown in Figures 334 and 335, the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 overlaps with the light emission period in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the initialization notification sound output period from the speakers 8L and 8R).
The execution period of the initialization notification is longer than the execution period of the confirmation movable control (for example, as shown in Figures 334 and 335, the light emission period in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the upper-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the period during which the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R are longer than the initial operation period of the upper-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper-frame movable body 132SG101).
If the movable body effect is executed after the execution period of the confirmation movable control has ended and with the variable display that was started during the execution period of the initialization notification, when the movable body effect is executed during the execution period of the initialization notification, the effect movable control and the display of the effect display are performed, but the movable body effect sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 340, even if the variable display that executes the movable body preview is started during the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101, if the execution period of the movable body preview is after the operation of each movable body has ended, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5 are executed during the execution period of the movable body preview, but the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are not lit in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification, and the initialization notification sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even during the execution period of the initialization response notification, if the confirmation movement control has ended, the performance movement control is executed, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not reduce the performance effect of the movable body performance.

The gaming machine of form 1-5 is
The performance control means is capable of executing a predictive movable body performance that suggests that the movable body performance will be executed in a variable display prior to a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern in which the movable body performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 318, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a predictive movable body notice),
When the pre-reading movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing specific performance movement control to move the movable body by a specific action (for example, as shown in FIG. 320, the performance control CPU 120 controls the on-board movable body 32A to be a part that can move up and down multiple times between an origin position and an intermediate position as a pre-reading movable body notice),
The execution period of the variable display in which the pre-reading movable body performance is executed is shorter than the execution period of the confirmation movable control (for example, the special chart change time of the non-reach miss variable display is 12 seconds or less, and the period of the initial operation is 30 seconds),
When the power is turned on, if the start condition is met multiple times during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, and the predictive movable body performance is executed in a variable display that is started based on the establishment of the start condition, when the predictive movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the specific movable control is limited,
When the variable display in which the pre-reading movable body effect is executed during the specified period ends, the specific movable body control limited to the specified period will not be executed after the end of the specified period (for example, as shown in FIG. 341, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, and the execution of the pre-reading movable body announcement is decided due to the occurrence of multiple variable displays during the confirmation operation of each movable body as initial operation control, if the execution period of the pre-reading movable body announcement overlaps with the confirmation operation period of each movable body or the period of initial operation control, the display of the effect display 132SG407 is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the pre-reading movable body announcement, and after the end of the variable display, the presentation operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the pre-reading movable body announcement is not executed again).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display is crossed, the restricted specific movable control is not executed during the confirmation movable control, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not confuse the player by moving the movable body excessively after the confirmation movable control ends.

The gaming machine of form 1-6 is
The performance control means is capable of executing, in one variable display, as the movable body performance, a first movable body performance (for example, the first movable body preview shown in FIG. 342) and a second movable body performance (for example, the second movable body preview shown in FIG. 342) which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed than the first movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the first movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a first performance movement control (for example, a part where the on-board movable body 32A is moved multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position) that moves the movable body by a first predetermined operation,
When the second movable body performance is executed, a second performance movement control (for example, a part where the on-board movable body 32A is moved multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position) can be performed to move the movable body by a second predetermined operation.
When the power is turned on, if the first movable body performance and the second movable body performance are executed in one variable display that is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the first movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the first performance movable control is limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the first performance movable control that is limited during the predetermined period is performed,
If the second movable body performance is executed before the restricted first performance movable control is performed, the first performance movable control is not performed and the second performance movable control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 342, if the initial operation of the movable body has already been performed during the execution period of the first movable body preview, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview is executed after the initial operation of the movable body is completed, but if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview has already been executed before the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview is not executed and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview continues to be executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the effect of the presentation is not reduced by the movement of the movable body in the first movable body presentation hindering the movement of the movable body in the second movable body presentation.

The gaming machine of form 1-7 is
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, the above-board movable body 32A is provided with the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with the chance button LED 9g).
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control to move the second movable body by a special action to notify that the movable body is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 318, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a final effect of raising the under-board movable body 32B),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to make the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 334, the performance control CPU 120 makes the under-board movable body 9e emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 329(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is initially operated),
It is possible to perform special light emission control to make the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is moved by the special effect movement control, emit light in a special light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 324 (E5), the effect control CPU 120 controls the under-board movable body 9e to emit a predetermined light color (for example, a portion that emits light in a rainbow flash as shown in FIG. 329 (B9)) when the under-board movable body 32B rises),
When the special effect movable control is executed during the specific light emission control, the special light emission control is limited (for example, when the execution period of the deciding effect is reached during the initial operation of each movable body after a hot start, a part that limits the light emission (rainbow flash) of the under-board movable body LED9e in a manner corresponding to the deciding effect during the execution period of the deciding effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 1-8 is
The operation mode of the second movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the second movable body by the special performance movable control are common (for example, the initial operation and performance operation of the under-board movable body 32B are both operations between the origin position and the performance position),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the second movable body is completed (for example, as shown in Fig. 329 (B) and Fig. 334, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the under-board movable body LED 9e to emit light in an initial highlight mode (flashing red)),
It is possible to perform the special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern during a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first special light emission pattern during a second period after the end of the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 329 (B), the effect control CPU 120 causes the under-board movable body LED 9e to flash in rainbows when the under-board movable body 32B advances, and causes the under-board movable body LED 9e to emit light in smooth rainbows when the under-board movable body 32B moves in a contrasting motion).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movable control or special movable control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 1-9 is
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-board movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, a portion where an on-board movable body LED 9d is provided on the on-board movable body 32A and an on-board movable body LED 9e is provided on the below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means can move the second movable body after moving the first movable body as the confirmation movable control (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 operates the above-board movable body 32A as an initial operation and then operates the below-board movable body 32B as shown in FIGS. 334 and 335 ).
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to make the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moving due to the confirmation movement control, emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 334, the performance control CPU 120 makes the under-board movable body 9e emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 329(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is initially operating),
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the specific light emission control is performed on the light emitting means of the first movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 334, during the execution of the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the above-board movable body LED 9d is made to emit light in an initial highlight mode, and the below-board movable body LED 9e is made to emit light in an initialization notification mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a moving object that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 1-10 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position),
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, if the movable body is not positioned at the initial position, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the origin position control process shown in FIG. 303 ).
When the variable display is started, the return control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 303, from the timing when the variable display is started, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the processing of 132SGS410 to 132SGS427).
When the power is turned on, if the variable display is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, the return control is restricted (for example, if a start winning occurs during the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko game machine 1 is started and the variable display based on the start winning occurs, the initial operation of each movable body is executed with priority over the operation of each movable body to its origin position).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movable control is not interrupted by the return control.

The gaming machine of form 1-11 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position),
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, if the movable body is not positioned at the initial position, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the origin position control process shown in FIG. 303 ).
When the variable display ends and the game is put into a standby state, the return control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 303, the part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute the processing of 132SGS410 to 132SGS427 from the start timing of the customer waiting demo performance).
When the power is turned on, the variable display is started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movable control is being performed, and if the variable display ends during the predetermined period and the game is put into the standby state, the return control is restricted (for example, if a customer waiting demo performance starts in response to the end of the variable display, a part that gives priority to the performance operation of the customer waiting demo performance of each movable body over the movement of each movable body to its origin position);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movable control is not interrupted by the return control.

The gaming machine of form 1-12 is
The performance control means can execute the movable body performance multiple times during one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 343, the part where the first variable display notice and the second variable display notice are executed during one variable display),
When the power is turned on, if the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that was started during the specified period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, the performance movable control is restricted when the movable body performance is executed during the specified period (for example, as shown in FIG. 343, if a variable display is executed during the initial operation of each movable body, if a first movable body announcement is executed during the initial operation, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is not executed).
When one of the movable body performances executed multiple times in one variable display is executed and the movement of the movable body by the performance movement control corresponding to that one movable body performance does not end normally, when the next movable body performance is executed, the performance movement control corresponding to the next movable body performance is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 344, even if the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview does not end normally, when the execution period of the second movable body preview begins, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can attempt a retry using the performance movable control corresponding to the next movable body performance even if the performance movable control corresponding to one movable body performance does not end normally.

The gaming machine of form 1-13 is
The performance control means is capable of executing, as the movable body performance, a first movable body performance (e.g., a first movable body announcement) and a second movable body performance (e.g., a second movable body announcement) which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed than the first movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the first movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform first performance movement control that moves the movable body by a first predetermined action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times as a first movable body notice),
When the second movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform second performance movement control that moves the movable body by a second predetermined action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times as a second movable body notice),
When the power is turned on, if the first movable body performance and the second movable body performance are executed in a variable display that is started during a predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the first movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the first performance movable control is restricted, and after the predetermined period ends, the first performance movable control that is restricted during the predetermined period is executed (for example, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement occurs during the initial operation of each movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is not executed during the execution period of the first movable body announcement, and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is executed again after the initial operation of each movable body).
When the first movable body is moving due to the limited first performance movement control, when the second movable body performance is executed, the first performance movement control is interrupted and the second performance movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 345, when the execution period of the second movable body announcement occurs during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement in the initial operation of each movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is interrupted and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement is started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the effect of the presentation is not reduced by the movement of the movable body in the first movable body presentation hindering the movement of the movable body in the second movable body presentation.

The gaming machine of form 1-14 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position),
a first detection means (e.g., origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) capable of detecting that the movable body is placed at an initial position;
Further provided is a second detection means (e.g., performance position sensor 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) capable of detecting that the movable body is positioned at the advanced position,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body toward the advanced position over a first period based on the detection by the first detection means that the movable body is placed at the initial position, and for moving the movable body toward the initial position when the second detection means does not detect that the movable body has been placed at the advanced position during the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 346, the performance control CPU 120 is a part that moves the movable body toward the origin position when the performance position sensor does not detect the movable body during the first period).
The performance movement control is a control that moves the movable body toward the advance position over a second period, and stops the movable body when the second detection means does not detect that the movable body has been placed at the advance position during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 347, the performance control CPU 120 is a part that stops the operation of the movable body when the performance position sensor does not detect the movable body during the second period).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a movable body presentation is executed during play, even if the movement of the movable body corresponding to the movable body presentation is not performed normally, the movement of the movable body based on the confirmation movement control is not performed, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the reduction in the presentation effect of a movable body presentation that was not performed normally.

The gaming machine of form 1-15 is
The movable body control means
If the movable body is unable to operate normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 348, if the performance control CPU 120 determines that an operation error has occurred when the movable body does not reach the performance position as an initial operation, and repeatedly performs the initial operation).
When a predetermined number of operation errors are determined, it is possible to perform error operation control to move the movable body for a longer operation period than the operation period of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation operation control (for example, as shown in FIG. 348, the performance control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation by the fourth operation error determination (dead end determination)),
When the error movement control is performed, when the movable body performance is executed, the performance movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed and the movable body performance sound is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 348, in the movable body performance after a dead end determination, the movement of the movable body is not executed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, the light emission in a manner corresponding to the movable body announcement by the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the sound output corresponding to the movable body announcement from the speakers 8L, 8R are executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents malfunctions caused by forcing the movable body to operate in a situation where the movable body cannot operate normally, while not reducing the presentation effect of the movable body presentation.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 304 and 305, thereby performing the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
The performance control means can perform demo display control to display a demonstration display on the display means when the power is turned on (for example, as shown in FIG. 349, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 displays a customer waiting demo performance on the image display device 5).
When a power outage occurs and the power is turned on, the movable body control means controls the movable bodies so that the confirmation movable control ends before the demo display control is performed (for example, as shown in Figures 349 to 351, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up after a power outage, the initial operation control of each movable body is executed and then the customer waiting demo performance is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not obstructed by the movable body that operates under the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movable control for a predetermined period of time (for example, the performance control CPU 120 requires 30 seconds for the initial operation of each movable body),
The performance control means can perform the demo display control after a period at least as long as the predetermined period has elapsed since the confirmation movement control was completed (for example, a part in which a customer waiting demo performance is executed 30 seconds after the initial movement of each movable body is completed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the demonstration display is not displayed immediately after the confirmation movable control, thereby preventing the visibility of the demonstration display from being hindered.

The gaming machine of type 2-3 is
The effect control means can perform the demo display control at different timings when the power is turned on with initialization and when the power is turned on without initialization (for example, the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo effect is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started up by a cold start or a hot start).
The movable body control means
The confirmation movement control can be performed in common when power is turned on with initialization and when power is supplied without initialization (for example, the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is executed differs between when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start).
When power is turned on with initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is completed before the demonstration display control is performed by the performance control means;
When power is turned on without initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is completed before the demonstration display control is performed by the performance control means (for example, in the case where the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is performed differs between when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start, the customer waiting demo performance is performed after the completion of the initial operation of each movable body).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not obstructed by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control, whether the power is turned on with initialization or without initialization.

The gaming machine of type 2-4 is
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Further provided with an operation means (e.g., a selection button 132SG35),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, the above-board movable body 32A is provided with the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with the chance button LED 9g).
The brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the volume/light intensity adjustment process shown in FIG. 301, and the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g can be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to make the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moving due to the confirmation movement control, emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 334, the performance control CPU 120 makes the under-board movable body 9e emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 329(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is initially operating),
When the operating means is operated during the specific light emission control, at least the light emitting means emitting light by the specific light emission control is restricted so that the brightness is not based on the operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 329(B), when the initial operation of each movable body is performed, the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g cannot be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movement control is not changed, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause any problems in confirming the operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of type 2-5 is
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Further provided with an operation means (e.g., a selection button 132SG35),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, the above-board movable body 32A is provided with the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with the chance button LED 9g).
The brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the volume/light intensity adjustment process shown in FIG. 301, and the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g can be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
The performance control means is capable of displaying a changeable display indicating that the brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 328, a portion of the image display device 5 where a menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed),
The display of the changeable display is limited during the specified period, and the changeable display is displayed after the specified period has ended (for example, as shown in FIG. 328, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is not displayed on the image display device 5 during the initial operation of each movable body, and the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed on the image display device 5 during the initial operation of each movable body).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying the changeable display during the confirmation movable control, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which attention to the confirmation movable control is not lost.

The gaming machine of form 2-6 is
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, a portion where an on-board movable body LED 9d is provided on the on-board movable body 32A and an on-board movable body LED 9e is provided on the below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means, as the confirmation movable control, moves the first movable body and then moves the second movable body (for example, as shown in FIGS. 334 and 335, the performance control CPU 120 moves the above-board movable body 32A as an initial operation and then moves the below-board movable body 32B).
The light emission control means is capable of performing specific light emission control to cause the light emission means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 334, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the under-board movable body 9e to emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 329(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is initially operated),
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control by the light emission control means is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body (for example, as shown in Figures 334 and 335, when the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A is performed, the below-board movable body LED 9e is not illuminated in an initial highlighting mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a moving object that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of type 2-7 is
The performance control means
A movable body effect using the movable body can be executed during the demonstration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 328, a portion capable of executing an effect in which the on-board movable body 32A is moved between the origin position and the effect position during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect),
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 328, the part where the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5),
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a demo-in-motion control that moves the movable body in a motion manner common to the motion manner of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation motion control (for example, a part that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position toward the performance position, and then moves the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position to the origin position).
If the movable body is unable to operate normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 352, if the movable body does not reach the performance position as an initial operation, the performance control CPU 120 determines that an operation error has occurred, and repeatedly performs the initial operation).
When a predetermined number of operation errors are determined, it is possible to perform error operation control to move the movable body for a longer operation period than the operation period of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation operation control (for example, as shown in FIG. 352, the performance control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation by the fourth operation error determination (dead end determination)),
When the error movement control is performed, when the demonstration display is displayed, the movement control during the demonstration is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 352, in the customer waiting demo performance after a dead end is determined, the movement of the movable body is not executed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, and the light emission in a manner corresponding to the movable body announcement by the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents malfunctions caused by forcing the movable body to operate in a situation where the movable body cannot operate normally, while not reducing the presentation effect of the demonstration display.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state in which the game medium cannot enter,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect during the advantageous state before control is exercised to play the round game,
The fanfare performance is as follows:
An introductory part (for example, an introductory part. See FIG. 325 (F2) to (F6)) that notifies the user of the advantageous state;
A launch direction notification part (for example, a right-hit notification part. See Figure 325 (F7) to (F8)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the player of the launch direction of the game medium;
It consists of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power outage occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the launch direction notification part starts (for example, when a power outage occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare effect and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the initial operation ends before the fanfare effect (right hit notification part) involving the operation of the on-board movable body 32A starts. See FIG. 353).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the operation direction notification part in the fanfare performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 3-2 is
There are several types of advantageous states (for example, jackpots A to E),
In the introduction part, it is possible to notify which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is the advantageous state, and as the notification, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (for example, a jackpot type display 132SG421) corresponding to the advantageous state being controlled, and to display an introduction display before the advantageous state name display (for example, an introduction display before the jackpot type display 132SG422) before the advantageous state name display is displayed,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so as to complete an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the advantageous state name display is displayed (for example, in the operation confirmation control, the initial operation is completed before the jackpot type display 132SG421 is displayed in FIG. 325 (F6)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it possible to know which advantageous state the game will be controlled to, even if confirmation movable control is performed during the fanfare performance.

The gaming machine of form 3-3 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the fanfare performance is executed, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance by the confirmation movement control,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movement control even during a fanfare performance by using specific light emission control and fanfare light emission control.

The gaming machine of type 3-4 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is executed, it is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the fanfare performance is executed, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance,
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the light emission control means causes the light emitting means of the first movable body to emit light according to the specific light emission control when the first movable body is moving according to the confirmation movement control, while causing the light emitting means of the second movable body to emit light according to the fanfare light emission control (for example, when the first movable body is moving, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movement control even during a fanfare performance.

The gaming machine of type 3-5 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the fanfare effect is executed, light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light at a first brightness in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control to make the light emitting means emit light at a second brightness in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed (for example, while the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light at a first brightness in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare performance, during the movement confirmation control, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, and the above-frame movable body LED 9f emit light at a second brightness (low brightness) lower than the first brightness (high brightness). See Figure 329 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 3-6 is
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
the movable body control means, as the confirmation movable control, moves the first movable body and then moves the second movable body;
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the specific light emission control is performed on the light emitting means of the first movable body (for example, when the first movable body is operating, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial highlighting mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial highlighting mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a moving object that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 3-7 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the operation direction notification part,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control to move the movable body by a special action when the movable body performance is executed,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the special effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern during a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission pattern different from the first special light emission pattern during a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the movable body LED of the movable body during the initial operation emits light in a common initial highlighting pattern (white lighting) when the movable body advances from the origin position to the effect position and when it retreats from the effect position to the origin position, while the movable body LED of the movable body operated by the effect operation control can emit light in different light emission patterns when the movable body advances from the origin position to the effect position and when it retreats from the effect position to the origin position. See Figure 329 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 3-8 is
Light emitting means;
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R);
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the launch direction notification part,
When the movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movable control, and outputs sound corresponding to the launch direction notification part when the movable body is moved by the special effect movable control (for example, in the movable body effect, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the right hit notification part, which is different from the initial highlight mode (white lighting), and sound output is limited when the movable body moves by the initial operation, and in the movable body effect executed in the right hit notification part, sound corresponding to the right hit notification part is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 3-9 is
Further provided with a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The performance control means
In the launch direction notification part, a movable body performance (see FIG. 325 (F7)) using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform special performance movement control to move the movable body by a special action,
If the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again.
When the confirmation movement control is being performed over the specific period, when the movable body performance is executed, the special effect movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, when a movable body performance is executed in the right-hit notification part in a fanfare performance, the movable body is moved by a special action and an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance can be displayed, and if the action confirmation control cannot be completed normally over the specific period, it can be determined that an action error has occurred and the action confirmation control can be performed again, and when the action confirmation control is being performed over the specific period, when the movable body performance is executed, the special action is restricted, while the effect display is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can show the player that a movable body effect has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special effect movable control.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) that moves the movable body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 329(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect during the advantageous state before control is exercised to play the round game,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect is started by the effect control means and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movement control ends before the end of the execution period of the fanfare effect (for example, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect is started and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the operation confirmation control ends before the round effect corresponding to the round game starts. See FIG. 354).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to glare.Furthermore, if the power is cut off at the same time as the fanfare effect is executed and the power is turned on, the confirmation movement control is terminated within the execution period of the fanfare effect, thereby providing a gaming machine that allows the player to enjoy an advantageous state without worrying about the movable body operating due to the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 4-2 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on;
The light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery, in which the light emission means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on;
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on (for example, a part capable of performing operation confirmation control in two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is not complicated.

The gaming machine of form 4-3 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery that causes the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movement control to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the fanfare effect,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (off) corresponding to the restoration display),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the moving body that moves through the performance movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 4-4 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the execution period of the fanfare effect,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, throughout the execution period of the fanfare effect,
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the fanfare light emission control (for example, during power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance). See FIG. 329 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 4-5 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the execution period of the fanfare effect,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, throughout the execution period of the fanfare effect,
The light emitting mode used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect (for example, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (music during a jackpot)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that power is being restored when the power is turned on, even if a fanfare performance was in progress before the power was cut off.

The gaming machine of form 4-6 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the effect movement control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) are common, and the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the effect movement control (for example, win/lose button effect), emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advance movement period), and emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, retreat movement period). See FIG. 329(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) that moves the movable body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 329(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect during the advantageous state before control is exercised to play the round game,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare presentation and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movement control is completed before the easy-entry state ends (for example, a part that makes it possible to complete the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare presentation and the power is turned on before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends. See FIG. 355).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to the glare; furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the power is cut off just before the fanfare performance ends, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on ends before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends (allowing the attacker to win even after the initial operation).

The gaming machine of form 5-2 is
The effect control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period after the fanfare effect has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 356 and 357 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is
The effect control means can display, in a round of play after the fanfare effect has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit prompt display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area, and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball number display 132SG452, number of balls issued display 132SG453, etc.) regarding the awarded game value in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see Figures 356 and 357).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 5-4 is
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a round-time light-emitting control in which the light-emitting means of the movable body that is not moving is illuminated with a lamp pattern corresponding to the round of play by the confirmation movement control.
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the music (round performance) during the jackpot. See FIG. 329 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that moves by confirmation movement control even during a round of play through specific light emission control.

The gaming machine of form 5-5 is
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during a round, causing the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play.
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the light emitting means of the first movable body is caused to emit light by the specific light emitting control, while the light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light by the in-round light emitting control (for example, when the first movable body is moved by the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in a mode corresponding to the music (round performance) during a jackpot),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that the movable body is moving through confirmation movement control even during a round of play.

The gaming machine of form 5-6 is
The light emission control means
In a round game after the fanfare effect is executed, it is possible to perform a round light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game,
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the light emitting means can be made to emit light by the light emission control during the round.
The light emission control during a round, which is performed when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on thereafter, has lower brightness than the light emission control during a round, which is performed when a power interruption does not occur immediately before the end of the fanfare effect (for example, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) in a round game in which the pachinko game machine 1 has not started up with a hot start after a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect, may be lower brightness than the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machines of types 5-7 are:
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the effect movement control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) are common, and the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the effect movement control (for example, win/lose button effect), emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advance movement period), and emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, retreat movement period). See FIG. 329(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) that moves the movable body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 329(B)).
The game control means is capable of setting the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter during the advantageous state,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power cut occurs at the same time as the easy-entry state is entered and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the easy-entry state ends (for example, a part that makes it possible to end the operation confirmation control when a power cut occurs immediately after the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play and the power is turned on, before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends. See FIG. 358).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to glare; furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the power is cut off as soon as the variable means enters an easy-to-enter state, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on is terminated before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends (allowing the attacker to win even after the initial operation).

The gaming machine of form 6-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on;
The light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery, in which the light emission means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, in the case where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and in the case where a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on,
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on (for example, a part that is capable of performing operation confirmation control in two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs at the same time that the big prize opening is controlled to the open state and then the power is turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is not complicated.

The gaming machine of form 6-3 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the easy-entry state of the variable means and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means enters the easy-to-enter state and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, over the period from when the variable means enters the easy-to-enter state until when the variable means is controlled to enter an inaccessible state in which the game medium cannot enter,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the restoration display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the restoration display (off). See FIG. 329(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that moves through confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 6-4 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the easy-entry state of the variable means and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
In one round of play in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period, it is possible to perform a round of light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play,
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the start of the one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, for a period until the one round of play ends.
The light emission control during the recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the light emission control during the round (for example, during the power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine, while notifying the user that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form 6-5 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during control of the variable means to set the variable means to the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
In one round of play in which the variable means is in the easy-entry state for a specified period of time, it is possible to perform a round of light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play,
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the start of the one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for a period until the one round of play ends.
The light emitting mode used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the round performance (music during the jackpot). See FIG. 329 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the player that power is being restored when the power is turned on, even if a round of play was in progress before the power outage.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a moving body performance in a winning/losing button performance) that moves the moving body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 329(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the easy-entry state in one round of play ends and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the easy-entry state in the next round of play ends (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control period of the large prize opening and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the opening control of the large prize opening in the second round of play ends (see FIG. 325 (F10)). See FIG. 359).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, thereby preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to the glare; furthermore, when the power is cut off just before the end of one round of play and the power is turned on, the confirmation movement control is terminated before the end of the next round of play, thereby providing a gaming machine in which the player can continue playing the round of play even after the confirmation movement control has ended.

The gaming machine of form 7-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period after the fanfare effect has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 356 and 357 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 7-3 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in the next round of play that is started when the first round of play is completed, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit prompt display 132SG430) that indicates the launch direction of the game medium in the specific display area, and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball number display 132SG452, number of balls issued display 132SG453, etc.) regarding the awarded game value in the special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see Figures 356 and 357).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 7-4 is
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state of the variable means in one round of play and the power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the variable means in one round of play to be in the impossible-entry state, and then moves the movable body by the confirmation movement control (see FIG. 359).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 7-5 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the effect movement control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) are common, and the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the effect movement control (for example, win/lose button effect), emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advance movement period), and emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, retreat movement period). See FIG. 329(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) is performed to operate the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a performance movement control (for example, a moving body performance in a winning/losing button performance or a promotion performance) is performed to move the moving body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 329(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs at the same time as control is made to the no-entry state in one round of play and power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the confirmation movable control ends before the no-entry state ends (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, the opening control of the large prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the end of the third special round interval period (see Figure 326 (F21) to (F29)). See Figure 360).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to the glare; furthermore, when the variable means becomes unable to enter during one round of play, the power is cut off at the same time, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on is terminated before the next round of play ends, thereby providing a gaming machine in which the player can continue playing a round of play even after the confirmation movement control has ended.

The gaming machine of form 8-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and then the power is turned on;
The light-emitting control means is capable of performing light-emitting control during recovery, in which the light-emitting means emits light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, in the case where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and in the case where a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and then the power is turned on,
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and then the power is turned on (for example, a part that is capable of performing operation confirmation control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs at the same time that the big prize opening is controlled to an open state and then the power is turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is not complicated.

The gaming machine of form 8-3 is
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (for example, a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and when the power is subsequently turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
In the case where a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for a period from the end of the one round of play until the start of the next round of play,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the restoration display (off). See FIG. 329(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that moves through confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 8-4 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means
In the case where the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play and a power outage occurs at the same time, and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, recovery display 132SG510) on the display means,
When the variable means is controlled to be in an entry-disabled state during one round of play, an interval performance can be executed;
The light emission control means
During the execution period of the interval performance, it is possible to perform interval light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval performance,
In the case where a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for a period from the end of the one round of play until the start of the next round of play,
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the light emission control during the interval (for example, during power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine, while notifying the user that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form 8-5 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means
In the one round of play, when the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and a power outage occurs at the same time, and when the power is turned on after the power outage, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, recovery display 132SG510) on the display means,
When the variable means is controlled to be in an entry-disabled state in the one round game, an interval performance can be executed,
The light emission control means
During the execution period of the interval performance, it is possible to perform interval light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval performance,
In the case where a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for a period from the end of the one round of play until the start of the next round of play,
The light emitting mode used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the interval effect (for example, the mode (off) corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the interval effect (music during a jackpot)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 8-6 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect that notifies whether the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is
Introduction part (see Figure 326 (F21) to (F23)) and
A result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 326) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so as to complete an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the result notification part is started.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the interval presentation is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 8-7 is
sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R);
Further comprising a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect that notifies whether the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is
Introduction part (see Figure 326 (F21) to (F23)) and
A result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 326) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the result notification part,
When the movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body effect when the movable body is moved by the special effect movement control (for example, a movable body effect using the under-board movable body 32B can be executed as a promotion effect in the result notification part (see Figure 326 (F24)), and when the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to control the effect operation in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B that operates by the operation confirmation control, and a part in which sound output is limited when the under-board movable body 32B operates by the operation confirmation control, and a sound corresponding to the movable body effect is output when the under-board movable body 32B operates in the movable body effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 8-8 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect that notifies whether the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 326 (F21) to (F23)) and
A result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 326) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means
In the result notification part, a movable body performance (see FIG. 326 (F24)) using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display (see FIG. 326 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform special performance movable control that moves the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movable control,
If the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again.
In the one round game in which the interval performance is executed, a power outage occurs immediately before the control is made to the inaccessible state, and thereafter, when the confirmation movable control that is started when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined that an operation error has occurred overlaps with the execution period of the movable body performance,
If the movable body presentation is executed during the specific period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the special presentation movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, it can be determined to be an operation error and the operation confirmation control can be performed again; if a power outage occurs just before the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state in one round of play in which an interval presentation is executed, and the operation confirmation control that starts when the power is turned on thereafter does not complete normally, the timing at which it is determined to be an operation error overlaps with the execution period of the promotion presentation, and if the promotion presentation is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body presentation may be restricted, while the effect display may be displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can show the player that a movable body effect has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special effect movable control.

The gaming machine of form 8-9 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the effect operation control (for example, in the case of successful promotion in the promotion effect), emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advancement operation period), and emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, retreat operation period). See FIG. 329(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (e.g., jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (e.g., jackpot B) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The effect control means is capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a promotion effect) that notifies which of the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is in a specific round of play,
The notification performance is
An introduction part (see, for example, Figure 326 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see, for example, (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 326) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
If the first advantageous state is reached, a performance corresponding to the first advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
If the second advantageous state is reached, a performance corresponding to the second advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, if a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part starts (for example, if a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the second round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control of the large prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the result notification part of the promotion effect executed in the third round of play starts; see FIG. 362).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the notification performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 9-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period after the fanfare effect has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 356 and 357).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 9-3 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in the specific round of play, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen), and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball number display 132SG452, number of balls issued display 132SG453, etc.) relating to the awarded game value in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 356 and 357 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 9-4 is
Light emitting means;
light emission control means;
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to perform notification light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moved by the confirmation movement control emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification effect,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the notification effect (for example, the initial highlighting mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part). See FIG. 329 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movable control even during an alarm performance by using specific light emission control and notification light emission control.

The gaming machine of form 9-5 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform notification light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification effect,
The light emission control means causes the light emission means of the movable body to emit light through the specific light emission control when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on, and when the movable body is moving through the confirmation movement control (for example, when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is then turned on, and when the movable body is moving through the movement confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs initial movement emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) rather than in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). See Figure 329 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 9-6 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
In the specific round game, it is possible to perform notification light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern (for example, a rainbow light emission mode) corresponding to the notification effect,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game and the power is turned on after that, the light emitting means can be made to emit light by the notification light emission control,
The notification light emission control that is performed when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on has lower brightness than the notification light emission control that is performed when no power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play (for example, during the second round interval period or the third round of play, the operation confirmation control is started, and the initially operating movable bodies, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light), but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light in the performance operation control (promotion performance). See Figure 329 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 9-7 is
The effect control means is capable of executing an action promotion effect that prompts the player to take an action during the execution period of the notification effect (see FIG. 326 (F23)),
The action prompting performance is executed in the introduction part (see FIG. 326 (F21) to (F23)),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the confirmation movable control ends before the introduction part starts (for example, the operation prompt part of the introduction part of the promotion effect executed in the third round of play, i.e., the part where the initial operation of the movable body ends before the operation prompt effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B starts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the action promotion effect in the introductory part is not obstructed by the movable body that operates by confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 9-8 is
Light emitting means;
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R);
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means can execute a movable body performance using the movable body in the result notification part (see FIG. 326 (F24)),
When the movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs sound corresponding to the movable body effect when the movable body is moved by the special effect movement control (for example, when performing an initial operation, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a manner corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting mode; white light), but the output of background sound (BGM) is limited, and when performing an effect operation in a promotion effect, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect (result notification part) (for example, rainbow mode, etc.), while a sound effect in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect (result notification part) is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 9-9 is
The performance control means
In the result notification part, a movable body effect using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform special performance movable control that moves the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movable control,
If the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again.
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game, and the confirmation movable control that starts when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined that an operation error has occurred overlaps with the execution period of the movable body performance,
If the movable body performance is executed during the specific period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the special performance movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, it can be determined that an operation error has occurred and the operation confirmation control can be performed again; if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the third round performance in which a promotion performance is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is turned on thereafter does not complete normally, the timing at which it is determined that an operation error has occurred overlaps with the execution period of the promotion performance, and if the promotion performance is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body performance can be restricted, while the effect display can be displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can show the player that a movable body effect has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special effect movable control.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then perform a round game multiple times by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The presentation control means can execute an ending presentation after the final round of play has ended (see FIG. 325 (F12) to (F14)),
The ending performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 325 (F12) and Figure 326 (F31)),
A special state notification part (for example, a time-saving state notification part. See Figure 325 (F13), Figure 326 (F32), (F34)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies about the special state that is controlled after the advantageous state;
It consists of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, the confirmation movable control ends before the special state notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the 10th final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the start of the time-shortened state notification part (see Figures 326 (F32) and (F34)) in which information regarding the time-shortened state is notified in the ending period; see Figure 363).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the special state notification part in the ending performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform ending light emission control, which causes the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movement control to emit light in a lamp pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the ending performance (for example, the initial highlighting mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). See FIG. 329(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movable control even during an ending performance by using specific light emission control and ending light emission control.

The gaming machine of form 10-3 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform ending light emission control, which causes the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, when the first movable body is moving due to the confirmation movement control, the light-emitting control means causes the light-emitting means of the first movable body to emit light according to the specific light-emitting control, while causing the light-emitting means of the second movable body to emit light according to the ending light-emitting control (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g of the movable bodies that perform initial movement emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LEDs of the other movable bodies that are not operating emit light in a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). See Figure 329 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that the movable body is moving through confirmation movement control even during the ending presentation.

The gaming machine of form 10-4 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the ending performance is executed, it is possible to perform ending light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, the light emitting means can be made to emit light by the ending light emitting control.
The ending light emission control that is performed when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on has lower brightness than the ending light emission control that is performed when a power outage does not occur immediately before the end of the ending presentation (for example, when the movable body is moving due to the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g that perform the initial operation emit light at low brightness in an initial highlight mode (white light) rather than in a mode corresponding to the ending presentation (introduction part). See Figure 329 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a moving body performance in a winning/losing button performance) that moves the moving body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 329(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then perform a round game multiple times by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
the effect control means is capable of executing an ending effect after the final round of play is completed;
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance by the performance control means and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the end of the execution period of the ending performance (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the start of the time-shortened state notification part (see Figures 326 (F32) and (F34)) in which information regarding the time-shortened state is notified; see Figure 364).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that reduces the load on the gaming machine by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, cuts off the power at the same time as the ending performance is executed, and ends the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on within the execution period of the ending performance (allowing the player to enjoy the high base state without worrying about the moving body operating due to the confirmation movement control).

The gaming machine of form 11-2 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and then the power is turned on;
The light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery, in which the light emission means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery in the case where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and in the case where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and then the power is turned on,
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and then the power is turned on (for example, a part capable of performing operation confirmation control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the large prize opening being controlled to an open state and then the power is turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is not complicated.

The gaming machine of form 11-3 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance by the performance control means and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display throughout the execution period of the ending performance,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the restoration display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the restoration display (off). See FIG. 329(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that moves through confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 11-4 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
During the execution period of the ending performance, it is possible to perform ending light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the ending performance,
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the ending light emission control (for example, during power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance). See FIG. 329 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 11-5 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
During the execution period of the ending performance, it is possible to perform ending light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the ending performance,
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ending presentation (for example, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the ending presentation (ending introduction). See FIG. 329(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on, even if the ending presentation was in progress before the power outage.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The specific identification information includes first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) and second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol),
the normal state is a state in which the variable display of the first identification information is easily executed,
the special state is a state in which the variable display of the second identification information is likely to be executed,
During the special state, information about the advantageous state (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls displayed 132SG454) can be displayed in the first display area of the display means,
During the special state, the second display area of the display means can display hold information (for example, the second hold memory number or the second hold display 132SG002) related to the variable display of the second identification information,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the first display area with respect to the second display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed when a power outage occurs during time reduction, and then the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, each movable body is set to perform an initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display regarding the jackpot (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454). See FIG. 365).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second display area, which is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control and has a greater impact on the game, is not obstructed as much as the visibility of the first display area.

The gaming machine of form 12-2 is
The information relating to the advantageous state displayed in the first display area does not change during the special state, while the reserved information displayed in the second display area can change during the special state (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls played display 132SG454 does not change during the time-saving state, while the second reserved memory count (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 are parts whose display mode can change even during the time-saving state due to changes in the number of winnings or advance notices, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of pending information, which may change due to a movable body operating through confirmation movable control, is not hindered as much as information regarding an advantageous state, which does not change.

The gaming machine of form 12-3 is
The range in which the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movable control overlaps with the first display area is larger than the range in which the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movable control overlaps with the second display area (for example, the range in which the movable body on the board 32A overlaps with the display area of the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls issued display 132SG454 due to the initial operation is larger than the range in which the movable body on the board 32A overlaps with the display area 5SL of the second pending memory number and the second pending display area 132SG012 of the second pending display 132SG002 due to the initial operation).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second display area, which is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control and has a greater impact on the game, is not obstructed as much as the visibility of the first display area.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
the effect control means is capable of performing an action promotion effect that prompts a player to take an action during variable display based on a specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part (for example, the period from (D1) to (D5) of FIG. 323) until the action prompting performance is executed;
A second part (for example, a result notification part of (D6) and (D7) of FIG. 323) that is executed after the first part and notifies the result of the action prompting performance;
The invention comprises:
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific variable display and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the second part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the variation in which the button notice is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the button notice (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 367).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second part in the action promotion performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 13-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning effect designation command that designates button advance notice execution, etc.) to the effect control means,
The effect control means is capable of performing the action prompting effect based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific variation and then the power is turned on (for example, when a variation pattern designation command designating a specific variation pattern (with button advance notice) is received within a specified time (for example, 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the means may interrupt the initial operation currently being performed (approximately 20 seconds) and switch to a shortened initial operation having an operation period shorter than the initial operation currently being performed (for example, 5 seconds, etc.)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control that takes into consideration the start of a specific fluctuation.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
the effect control means is capable of executing a start effect (for example, a start notice) when a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern is started,
The start performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 321 (B2) to (B6)),
A result notification part (see (B3a) to (B6a) of FIG. 321) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of variable display based on the specific variable display pattern and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation before a variation in which a start notice is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the start notice (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 368).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the start-up performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
The game control means can transmit specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning effect designation command that designates the execution of a notice at the start of a game) to the effect control means,
The effect control means is capable of performing the start effect based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power outage occurs immediately before the specific variation is started and the power is then turned on (for example, a part that may be configured so that the performance control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial operation based on a specific performance control command so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part is started as a result of the start-time notice),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control that takes into consideration the start of a specific fluctuation.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The effect control means is capable of executing a variable display of identification information based on a specific variable display pattern, and is capable of temporarily stopping the variable display of the identification information and then executing a variable display notification effect (for example, a pseudo consecutive announcement) that notifies the user that the variable display of the identification information will be executed again.
The reconfigurable display notification performance is
An introductory part (see (C3) to (C5) of FIG. 322) informing whether or not the re-variable display of the identification information will be executed;
A result notification part (see (C6), (C10), and (C9) in FIG. 322) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of variable display of identification information based on the specific variable display pattern and the power is then turned on, the movable body control means ends the confirmation movable control before the result notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation before a variation in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the initial operation ends before the pseudo consecutive announcement (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 369).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the re-variable display notification performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 15-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
The game control means can transmit specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning effect designation command that designates the execution of a pseudo consecutive announcement) to the effect control means,
The presentation control means is capable of performing the re-variable display notification presentation (for example, a pseudo consecutive announcement) based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power outage occurs immediately before the specific variation is started and then the power is turned on (for example, a part that may be configured so that the performance control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial operation based on a specific performance control command so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part of the result of the pseudo-consecutive preview is started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control that takes into consideration the start of a specific fluctuation.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The normal state is a state designed to launch the game medium toward the first game area (e.g., the left game area),
The special state is a state designed to launch the gaming medium toward the second gaming area (e.g., the right gaming area),
The display means, in the normal state, is capable of displaying a first game area side launch promotion display (for example, a left hit promotion display 132SG530) in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen) to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the first game area, and is also capable of displaying a display corresponding to the normal state in a predetermined display area;
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that it does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, and then the machine is started up by hot start and restored, and an initial operation is performed, the part is set so that the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left hit prompt display 132SG530 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shortened. See Figures 370 and 371).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the first game area side promotion notification is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 16-2 is
The display means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) until the variable display ends when a power outage occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on,
When the recovery display is displayed, it is possible to perform the first game area promotion notification (for example, left hit promotion display 132SG530),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately notify the direction in which gaming media are released even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 16-3 is
As the first game area promotion notification, it is possible to display a first game area promotion notification display (for example, a left hit promotion display 132SG530) and output a first game area promotion notification sound,
When the confirmation movable control is performed based on power-on with initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, while the output of the first game area promotion notification sound is limited,
When the confirmation movement control is performed based on power-on without initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, and the first game area promotion notification sound is output (for example, the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, while the left hit operation promotion notification sound is restricted, and when the operation confirmation control is performed based on starting up by hot start after a power outage occurs, the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, while the left hit operation promotion notification sound is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide an appropriate first game area promotion notification that takes into account the situation when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 16-4 is
In the normal state, when a gaming medium enters a predetermined area (for example, a passing gate 41) provided on the second gaming area side, the first gaming area promotion notification (for example, a left-hit promotion display 132SG530) can be performed.
In the normal state, a special first game area promotion notification having a higher priority than the first game area promotion notification can be made based on the entry of a specific number of game media into the predetermined area,
The confirmation movement control makes it possible to issue the special first game area promotion notification for a period longer than the period during which the movable body is movable (for example, in the normal state, it is possible to issue a special left-hit operation promotion notification that has a higher priority than a left-hit operation promotion notification based on the entry of a specific number of game balls (for example, 5 balls) into the gate switch 21, and it is possible to issue a special left-hit operation promotion notification for a period longer than the period during which the movable body is operating (for example, 20 seconds) through the operation confirmation control).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the special first game area promotion notification is not hindered by a movable body that moves through confirmation movable control.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The display means
If a power outage occurs during the round game and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, a recovery display 132SG510) in a predetermined display area,
Thereafter, in the predetermined display area, it is possible to display a display corresponding to the round game (for example, a round number display 132SG451, a winning ball number display 132SG452, a ball number display 132SG453, a consecutive number of games/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.),
When either the display corresponding to the round game or the display during recovery is displayed, a launch direction indication display (for example, a right-hit prompt display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium is displayed in the specific display area,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during a round game in a jackpot game state and then the power is started up by a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so that it does not overlap in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed in front of the predetermined area (see Figure 356 (A)) in which information corresponding to the round game (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed; see Figures 372 and 373).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 17-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
the movable body that is movable by the predetermined movement control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined movable control (for example, after a power outage occurs during variable display in a normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that includes the performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body announcement in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, while after a power outage occurs during variable display in a jackpot or time-saving state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that does not include the performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body announcement that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves under confirmation movement control.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The display means
If a power outage occurs and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510).
As the restoration in progress display, it is possible to display text information indicating that restoration is in progress in a predetermined display area,
Along with the recovery display, it is possible to display a launch direction indication display (for example, a right-hit prompt display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the gaming medium in a specific display area,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during a round game in a jackpot game state, and then the game is started up by a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so that it does not overlap in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed in front of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. See Figures 372 and 373).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication, which has a large impact on the game and is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control, is not obstructed more than the text information indicating that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form 18-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined effect movable control (for example, after a power outage occurs during variable display in a normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that includes the effect operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body preview in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, while after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in a time-saving state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that does not include the effect operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body preview that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves under confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 18-3 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control to move the movable body by a special action when the movable body performance is executed,
the movable body that is movable by the special movable control is superimposed on the predetermined display area,
the confirmation movement control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner including the special action in the special movement control,
When a power outage occurs during the advantageous state and the power is then turned on, the movable body that is moved by the special movable control stays in the predetermined display area for a longer period of time than the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movable control that is performed in such a case (for example, the time that the under-board movable body 32B stays in the performance position that overlaps with the recovery display 132SG510 may be set to be shorter than the performance operation of the movable body performance in the initial operation).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a power outage occurs during an advantageous state and the power is then turned on, the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movable control is not superimposed on the specified display area for a long period of time, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not cause any problems in determining whether or not recovery is in progress.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The display means
If a power outage occurs during the special state and the power is then turned on, a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) can be displayed in a predetermined display area,
Thereafter, a display corresponding to the special state can be displayed in the predetermined display area,
When either the display corresponding to the special state or the restoration display is displayed, a launch direction indication display (for example, a right-hit prompt display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium is displayed in the specific display area,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that it does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during variable display in a time-shortening state and then the initial operation is performed when the power is started by a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A is not superimposed on the front side of the predetermined area (see Figure 374 (B) (C)) where information corresponding to the time-shortening state (for example, the performance mode display 132SG221, the remaining time-shortening display 132SG201, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls issued display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed, but is not overlapped on the front side of the specific area (see Figure 374 (A)) where the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is displayed. See Figure 374).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which is a movable body that moves by confirmation movement control and has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed as much as the recovery in progress display.

The gaming machine of form 19-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined effect movable control (for example, the initial operation is performed in an operation manner that includes the effect operation (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body preview in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, while the initial operation at the time of power-on after a power outage occurs during a jackpot or during variable display in the time-saving state is performed in an operation manner that does not include the effect operation (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body preview that overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves due to confirmation movement control.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A movable body and
A movable body control means;
a display means;
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
the display means is capable of displaying a launch direction indication display indicating a launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area in the special state, and is also capable of displaying information relating to the advantageous state in a predetermined display area;
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
the confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication, which has a large impact on the game and is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control, is not obstructed more than the information regarding the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 20-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means,
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control can move the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined action in the predetermined performance movable control.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves due to confirmation movement control.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 304 and 305, thereby performing the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
The game control means is capable of performing specific identification information light emission control to indicate the result of the variable display of the specific identification information by a plurality of light emitting means (for example, the CPU 103 is a part that can light up a plurality of lamps constituting a special pattern in a combination according to the variable display result when the variable display is stopped),
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 375(D)) when the power is turned on,
When the power is turned on,
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 376(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 376(A), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 376(A), the part where the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started through the startup preparation display, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows confirmation of specific identification light-emitting control, which has a high impact on gameplay, without being distracted by the movable body that operates through the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 21-2 is
When the power is turned on,
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 376(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 376(B), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, when the variable display is started based on the establishment of the start condition while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means displays the restoration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 376(B), the portion where the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 376(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when a display corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the display means (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 21-3 is
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 377(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 377(A), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, when the variable display that was being executed before the power failure is not completed while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means displays a restoration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 377(A), the portion where the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 376(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.
The gaming machine of form 21-4 is
Further provided with a reserve storage means (for example, a special chart reserve storage unit 132SG151 shown in FIG. 282) capable of storing reserve information regarding variable display,
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 377(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 377(B), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, when the variable display that was being executed before the power outage is terminated and the variable display is started based on the hold information that was stored before the power outage, the display means displays the restoration in progress display (for example, as shown in FIG. 377(B), the portion where the restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 377(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when a display corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the display means (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 304 and 305, thereby performing the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
The light emission control means is capable of performing initialization-responsive light emission control, which causes a plurality of light emission means to emit light in a manner corresponding to initialization (for example, as shown in Figures 334 and 335, a portion which causes frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an upper board movable body LED 9d, an under board movable body LED 9e, an upper frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g to emit light in an initialization notification manner).
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 375(D)) when the power is turned on,
When power is turned on with initialization (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 334, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the initialization-compatible light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 334, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in an initialization notification mode).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 334, the initial operations of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board face-line 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started through the startup preparation display, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows confirmation of the initialization-compatible light-emitting control without being distracted by the movable body operating through the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 22-2 is
Further provided with light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 378(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 378(A), the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the state that recovery is in progress).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 378(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control does not begin when the light-emitting means is emitting light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the variable display (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 22-3 is
Further provided with light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 378(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 378(B), the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the state that recovery is in progress).
Thereafter, when the variable display that was being executed before the power outage is completed while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, background display corresponding light emission control is performed, which causes the light emission control means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the background display (for example, as shown in FIG. 378(B), a part that causes the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g to emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 378(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control does not begin when the light-emitting means is emitting light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the variable display (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 22-4 is
Further provided with light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
When a power outage occurs during one of multiple round games and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start after a power outage occurs during a round game),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 379(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 379(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the state of recovery).
Thereafter, if the one round of play that was being executed before the power outage has not ended while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, the light emission control during recovery continues (for example, as shown in FIG. 379(A), if the round of play that was executed before the power outage has not ended while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that they are being restored).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 378(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started (when the light emitting means is emitting light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to round play (which would interfere with the confirmation work)).

The gaming machine of form 22-5 is
Further provided with light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
When a power outage occurs during one of multiple round games and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start after a power outage occurs during a round game),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 379(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 379(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the state of recovery).
Thereafter, when the one round of play that was being executed before the power outage ends and the next round of play is started while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, the light emission control during recovery continues (for example, as shown in FIG. 379(B), when the round of play that was executed before the power outage ends while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that they are being restored).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 379(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when the light-emitting means is emitting light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to round play (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 304 and 305, thereby performing the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
The game control means
When the result of the variable display of the normal identification information is a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the normal variable means to be in an easy-to-enter state (for example, when the result of the variable display of the normal pattern is a win (normal pattern win), an opening control is executed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period),
When a power outage occurs when the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state and the power is turned on, it is possible to perform special control to return the normal variable means to the easy-entry state (for example, if a power outage occurs when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state based on the occurrence of a normal symbol win, a portion controls the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state again based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started by a hot start).
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (e.g., startup preparation display 132SG500) when the power is turned on,
When the power is cut off while the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on (for example, when the power is cut off when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and then the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off and then started up by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 380(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 380(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 380(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started by the start-up preparation display, and when the power is cut off when the normal variable means is in an easy-to-enter state, and when the power is turned on (power outage is restored), it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to quickly confirm that the normal variable means is in the same easy-to-enter state as before the power was cut off, without being distracted by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 23-2 is
When the power is cut off while the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on (for example, when the power is cut off when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and then the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off and then started up by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 380(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 380(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the normal variable means, which is in the easy-entry state due to the special control, while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means displays a recovery display (for example, as shown in FIG. 380(A), the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed after a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B, which is in the open state),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 380(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 23-3 is
When a power outage occurs during the variable display of normal identification information, resulting in a predetermined display result, and the power is then turned on (for example, when the variable display of normal symbols has been executed before the power outage occurs and the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in a hot start mode),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 380(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the normal variable means is controlled to be in the easy-entry state (for example, as shown in FIG. 380(B), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 380(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 304 and 305, thereby performing the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
The game control means
During the advantageous state, it is possible to control the variable means to an easy-entry state in which the game medium is easy to enter (for example, a part that controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state),
When a power interruption occurs while the variable means is in the easy-entry state, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform special control to return the variable means to the easy-entry state (for example, if a power interruption occurs while the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, a portion controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state again based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started by a hot start).
The display means
When the power is turned on, it is possible to display a startup preparation display (for example, the startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 375(D)).
When a power outage occurs during the advantageous state and the power is then turned on, it is possible to display a restoration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 381, the portion where the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed),
When the power is cut off during the advantageous state while the variable means is in the easy-entry state and control is being performed, and then the power is turned on (for example, when a power cut occurs during a jackpot game while the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state as a round game, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 381, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 381, the part that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state),
Thereafter, the restoration in progress display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 381, the restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 381, the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started by the start-up preparation display, and when the power is cut off when the variable means is in an easy-to-enter state, and when the power is turned on (power outage is restored), it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to quickly confirm that the variable means is in the same easy-to-enter state as before the power was cut off, without being distracted by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 24-2 is
In the advantageous state, it is possible to play multiple rounds of games (for example, as shown in FIG. 281, a portion in which 3 to 10 rounds of games can be played as a jackpot game),
In a round game, it is possible to control the variable means to the easy-entry state and control the variable means to the non-entry state (for example, a part that controls the special winning ball device 7 to an open state and a part that controls it to a closed state in a round game).
When the power is cut off while the variable means is in the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on (for example, when a power cut occurs during a jackpot game and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state as a round game, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 381, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 381, the part that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state),
Thereafter, when the special control in one round of play ends and control is performed to make the variable means in the next round of play unable to enter while the start-up preparation display is being displayed, the recovery display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 381, when the round of play ends and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the wall s state while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 381, the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The display means
When power is turned on with initialization (for example, cold start processing), an initialization display (for example, initialization notification display 132SG600) indicating that initialization has been performed can be displayed.
When power is turned on with initialization,
The initialization display is displayed,
Thereafter, the confirmation movable control is performed,
After that, after the confirmation movable control is completed, the display of the initialization display is terminated (see FIGS. 382 and 383).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm that the gaming machine has been initialized without being distracted by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not prevent confirmation of whether the visual initialization notification has been completed by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 25-2 is
The period from power-on with initialization to the confirmation movement control being performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization to the confirmation movement control being performed (for example, the period from power-on with initialization (startup with cold start processing) to the operation confirmation control being performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization (startup with hot start processing) to the operation confirmation control being performed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which, when the power is turned on to initialize the machine, confirmation movement control is immediately performed, so that the display of the initialization display does not become visibly observable.

The gaming machine of form 25-3 is
The initialization display is displayed for a predetermined execution period and is hidden after the end of the predetermined execution period;
Even if the start condition is met while the initialization display is being displayed, the initialization display is not hidden (for example, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (for example, 30 seconds) and is hidden after the predetermined execution period ends, and even if a start winning occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is being displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden and the variable display is not started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 25-4 is
If the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the satisfaction of the start condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the initialization display will continue to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display (for example, if the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the occurrence of a start winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initialization display will continue to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform the operation check control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 25-5 is
If the execution period of the variable display that starts based on the establishment of the start condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the initialization display continues to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display (for example, after power-on without initialization (startup by hot start processing), the initialization notification display 132SG600 is not displayed, and the background display is performed based on the game status background designation command).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A first movable body (for example, the chance button 631B),
A second movable body (for example, the on-board movable body 32A),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The distance between the first movable body and the second movable body is closer when the first movable body is located at the advanced position and the second movable body is located at the advanced position than when the first movable body is located at the initial position and the second movable body is located at the initial position (see FIG. 384 ).
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) that moves the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally,
The confirmation movement control is a control in which the first movable body is moved from the initial position to the advanced position and the second movable body is moved from the initial position to the advanced position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap, and then the first movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position and the second movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap (for example, in the movement confirmation control, the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A simultaneously start moving from the origin position to the performance position so that their respective initial movement periods overlap (see Figure 384 (B)), and then the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position so that their respective initial movement periods do not overlap (see Figure 384 (C)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 384 (D)).).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to simultaneously confirm that the first movable body can operate normally in the advanced position and that the second movable body can operate normally in the advanced position, thereby simplifying the confirmation work, and at the same time, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the movement of the first movable body from the advanced position to the origin position and the movement of the second movable body from the advanced position to the origin position, which are difficult to confirm, to be confirmed individually.

The gaming machine of form 26-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance execution means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the first movable body and the second movable body,
When the movable body performance is executed, the movement control means is capable of performing a performance movement control in which the first movable body is moved from an initial position to an advanced position and the second movable body is moved from the initial position to an advanced position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap, and thereafter the first movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position and the second movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the first movable body and the second movable body in a manner that does not include the movement of the first movable body and the second movable body in the performance movement control (for example, for the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B that perform a performance movement in which the first movable body and the second movable body come into contact (or overlap), in the movement confirmation control, an initial movement is performed in an operation manner that does not include the performance movement described in Figures 385 (B) to (D) (for example, a manner in which the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B are moved forward separately)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 26-3 is
Further provided is a detection means (for example, a performance position sensor 132SG134) capable of detecting that the second movable body is disposed at the advanced position,
The movement of the first movable body arranged at the advance position in the confirmation movement control toward the initial position is performed on the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the advance position by the detection means (for example, a part that causes the movement of the first movable body (e.g., the on-board movable body 32A) arranged at the performance position in the movement confirmation control toward the origin position to be performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., the below-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG134).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 26-4 is
The movable body control means is capable of performing return control to move the movable body, including the first movable body and the second movable body, to the initial position when the movable body is not positioned at the initial position when the power is turned on (for example, before the long initial operation control is started, when the movable body, including the first movable body and the second movable body, is not positioned at the origin position, return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, a part where short initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101) is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A first movable body (for example, the under-board movable body 32B),
A second movable body (for example, a frame-mounted movable body 132SG101),
a movable body control means,
The first movable body is provided on a game board (for example, a game board 2),
The second movable body is provided in a game frame (for example, an opening/closing door frame 3a),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) that moves the first movable body and the second movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally,
As the confirmation movement control, an operation is performed to move the first movable body from the initial position to the advanced position, and while the first movable body is stopped at the advanced position, an operation is performed to confirm that the second movable body is operating normally (for example, while the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position and stops at the performance position (see Figure 330 (F)), the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and then moves from the performance position to the origin position; see Figures 330 (G) to (I)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the first movable body being placed in the advance position during confirmation movable control indicates that the confirmation movable control has not ended, and the operation of the second movable body is started when the first movable body is placed in the advance position, so that the confirmation movable control of the second movable body is not overlooked.

The gaming machine of form 27-2 is
Further provided is a detection means (for example, a performance position sensor 132SG104) capable of detecting that the second movable body is placed in an initial position,
The movement of the first movable body arranged at the advance position in the confirmation movement control toward the initial position is performed on the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the initial position by the detection means (for example, the movement of the first movable body (e.g., the under-board movable body 32B) arranged at the performance position in the operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., the under-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG104).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

An embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following, the front side of Figure 1 will be referred to as the front (front face) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be referred to as the rear (rear face) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side. Note that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment refers to the surface facing the player playing on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, in describing each step in a flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "132SGS1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach" and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach."

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of its main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, serving as gaming media, are launched into this gaming area by a predetermined ball launching device. A door frame 3a with a glass window is provided on the gaming machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable about its left side. The door frame 3a is configured to open and close the gaming area, and the gaming area can be seen through the glass window when the door frame 3a is closed.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variation also includes the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol," and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special symbol." A special symbol game using the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol game." The special symbol display device that variably displays the special symbols may be of one type. The special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of multiple lamps (LEDs). When the variable display is stopped, the CPU 103 can light up these multiple lamps in a combination that corresponds to the variable display result.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed. The pending display and active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to a variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each consisting of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 275). The variable winning ball device 6B, for example, includes a device with a movable piece that can move back and forth. When the solenoid 81 is off, the movable piece is retracted from the game board surface to a retracted position, making it difficult for game balls to flow down the top surface of the movable piece, resulting in a closed state where game balls cannot enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second start winning opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is on, the variable winning ball device 6B has a movable piece that protrudes forward from the game board surface to a protruding position, allowing game balls to flow down the top surface of the movable piece, resulting in an open state where game balls can enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second start winning opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above-mentioned device, as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, three locations at the bottom left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

To the right of the variable prize ball device 6B is a special variable prize ball device 7 with a large prize opening. The special variable prize ball device 7 has a large prize opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 275), and the large prize opening door forms the large prize opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open and closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, the lower left of the play area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

Below the variable winning ball device 6B, a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is played.

A regular symbol pending indicator 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the opening and closing door frame 3a to play and output sound effects, etc. Frame LEDs 9a and 9b are provided at the top and left and right sides of the opening and closing door frame 3a to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker LED 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in Figure 1), there are provided an above-board movable body 32A and an below-board movable body 32B that operate in accordance with the effects. Furthermore, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B are provided with movable body LEDs 9d and 9e, the frame-top movable body 132SG121 is provided with a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with a chance button LED 9g. The movable body LEDs 9d and 9e, the button LED 9g, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, and the attack LED 9c are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position on the opening and closing door frame 3a below the gaming area to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a designated ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

In addition, an operation unit 600 is provided in the center of the bottom of the opening and closing door frame 3a. The operation unit 600 includes a chance button 631B that can be pressed by the player, and a lever body 631A that can be pushed and pulled back and forth by the player and is rotatable. The chance button 631B can move up and down between an origin position and an operation detection position below the origin position, and can also move between the origin position and a protruding position that protrudes upward from the origin position. In addition, a cross key that constitutes the selection button 132SG35 for setting effects such as volume is provided in the upper tray portion of the opening and closing door frame 3a.

The operation unit 600 is provided with a button sensor 635B (see Figure 275) for detecting the player's operation (action) on the chance button 631B, an origin position sensor 635C (see Figure 275) for detecting whether the chance button 631B is located at the origin position, a protruding position sensor 635D (see Figure 275) for detecting whether the chance button 631B is located at the protruding position, a vibration motor 635E (see Figure 275) for vibrating the chance button 631B, an advance/retract motor 635F (see Figure 275) for moving the chance button 631B back and forth between the origin position and the protruding position, a push/pull sensor 625Y (see Figure 275) consisting of a push sensor and a pull sensor for detecting the forward/backward movement of the lever body 631A, and a protruding position sensor 625C for detecting whether the lever body 631A is located at the protruding position. The selection button 132SG35 is also provided with an up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36 (see FIG. 275) consisting of an up sensor, a down sensor, a left sensor, and a right sensor that detects operation of the selection button 132SG35's cross key in the up/down/left/right directions.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a lever body 631A and a chance button 631B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

The opening and closing door frame 3a has three performance units: the first performance unit 132SG100 attached to the upper center, the second performance unit 132SG200 attached to the upper left, and the third performance unit 132SG300 attached to the upper right. The first performance unit 132SG100 is provided with a frame-mounted movable body 132SG121 that can move between the origin position and the performance position, as described below.

The back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11 housed in a board case (not shown). The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52 (see Figure 275). As will be described later, the jackpot probability in this feature section 132SG is set to 1/200, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be placed in a setting change state by operating the setting change switch 52, and the jackpot probability may be changed by operating the setting key 51 in this setting change state.

A display monitor 29 (see Figure 275) is located in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see Figure 275) is located to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and display changeover switch 30 are located directly in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as the consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the proportion of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning slot (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the proportion of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning slot (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning slot (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. The base is the proportion of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls that have been shot out.
The setting key 51 and setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed by the opening and closing door frame 3a.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss." Note that "misses" in this pachinko gaming machine 1 include "misses with time reduction," in which the next variable display is controlled to a high base state (time-reduced state) without going through a jackpot game.

Once the display result in the special game shows "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). This predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and will hereinafter be referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (10 times, 3 times, etc.) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of jackpot opening modes (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

The time-saving state continues until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. When the condition for the time-saving state is met, the predetermined number of special games have been played, this is also called a "time-saving state with a cut-off count" (time-saving with a cut-off count).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on). A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state.

(Progression of the production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the progress of the game or adding excitement to the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. Note that these effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of these displays, they may also be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, the turning on and off of the game effect lamp 9, the movement of the movable body 32, or as effects using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). Pre-read preview effects may be executed that change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade effect to indicate that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing.

In addition, during the jackpot performance, in the first round of a jackpot (first jackpot) in normal mode, the large prize opening is opened in the jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the performance shown in Figure 325 (F8) is performed, and in the first round of a jackpot in time-saving mode, the large prize opening is opened in the small prize opening pattern (repeatedly opening and closing for a short period of time), so the performance shown in Figure 313 (C2) is performed. Also, in the second round of a jackpot during time-saving mode, the large prize opening is opened in the jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the displays, various lamps, and sounds will be different between the first and second rounds.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 276. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a firing control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also include electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on variation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B) and count switches (first count switch 132SG023, second count switch 132SG024) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the opening and closing door frame 3a.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals (signals output when an operation by the player is detected, and which appropriately indicate the content of the operation) from the push/pull sensor 625Y, protruding position sensor 625C, button sensor 635B, origin position sensor 635C, protruding position sensor 635D, up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36, origin position sensors 132SG103, 132SG113, 132SG123, 132SG133, and effect position sensors 132SG104, 132SG114, 132SG124, 132SG134.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays effect images on the image display unit 5 by supplying the image display unit 5 with video signals corresponding to the effect to be executed based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 also supplies sound designation signals (signals designating the sound to be output) to the audio control board 13 and lamp signals (signals designating the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies signals to operate the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG121, and the chance button 631B to the drive circuits that drive each movable body or the vibration motor 635E, the advance/retract motor 635F, and the drive motors 132SG102, 132SG112, 132SG122, and 132SG132 of each movable body.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of sound output, lamp on/off (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, above-frame movable body 132SG121, and chance button 631B (such as supplying signals to operate each movable body).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 286 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 285. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, a transmission setting is made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the determination results, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command for the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 (see FIG. 285).

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings are made to transmit the corresponding effect control command to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). This normal special symbol processing determines whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines (predetermines) whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and, if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed, based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. The special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern, based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes a setting process to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and to stop displaying (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." If the display result is a "miss," the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of rounds that open the large prize slot has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

Figure 276 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature unit 132SG. A performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 276 is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 276, command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern specification command that specifies the variable pattern (variable display time) of decorative symbols and the like that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that the variable pattern specification command sets different EXT data depending on the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. For example, as shown in FIG. 277 (A), the variable display result notification command sets different EXT data depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss," "jackpot," or "minor hit," and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type will be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

For example, as shown in FIG. 277(A), in the variable display result notification commands, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result will be "miss." Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "jackpot A." Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "jackpot B." Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "small hit" and the small hit type will be "small hit A." Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit B."

Command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5.

Command 9000H is a power-on command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cold started (the power was turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed down (step S6 was executed because the recovery condition was not met in step S3 of the game control main processing in Figure 285)).

Command 9200H is a power outage recovery command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine has been hot started (the power was turned on without the clear switch 92 being pressed (step S4 was executed because the recovery condition was met in step S3 of the game control main processing in Figure 285).

Command 95XXH is a game state background designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game state background designation command is also a command that specifies that the background image displayed on the image display device 5 be updated to a background image that corresponds to the game state. With the game state background designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example.

As shown in FIG. 277 (B), as a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state). Command 9501H is a second game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol once after the end of jackpot play of jackpot A (high base state, time-saving state A). Command 9502H is a third game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol up to 685 times after the end of jackpot play of jackpot B (high base state, time-saving state C1). Command 9503H is a fourth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol up to seven times after the end of jackpot play of jackpot C (high base state, time-saving state B). Command 9504H is a fifth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time-saving state B) in which time-saving control is performed on the variable display of the second special chart up to seven times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. Command 9504H is a sixth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time-saving state C2) in which time-saving control is performed on the variable display of the second special chart up to 685 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E.

Command A0XXH is a start-of-win command (also known as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot or small win game state. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot or small win game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot or small win game state. Command A3XXH is a end-of-win command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot or small win game state.

In the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as in the variable display result notification command. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state or small prize game state (for example, "1" to "10").

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies that the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (first start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the first start port formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (second start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first special reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special memory numbers can be identified and displayed in the reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second special reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special memory numbers can be identified and displayed in the reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. The first reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the second start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port. Additionally, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first or second start condition is met (when the pending memory number decreases).

Instead of the first pending memory count notification command or the second pending memory count notification command, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. In other words, the total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that specifies the winning result at the time of the initial winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that specifies the variable category of the winning result at the time of the initial winning.

Command D100H is a V-winning notification command that notifies that a V-winning has occurred, that is, that the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on as a result of the game ball passing through it. Command D2XXH is a remaining second special pattern time-saving count notification command that notifies the number of remaining time-saving controls for the second special pattern in the time-saving state. Command D3XX is a prize ball count notification command that notifies the number of prize balls generated (awarded) as a result of the game ball entering the winning slot. Command E100H is a customer waiting demo specification command that specifies the execution of a customer waiting demo (demo performance).

Figure 278 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 278, in this feature unit 132SG, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so that they can be counted on the main board 11. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the CPU 103 using different random counters updated by software, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip separate from the game control microcomputer 100. These random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

Figure 279 shows the variation patterns in this feature unit 132SG. In this feature unit 132SG, multiple variation patterns are prepared in advance to correspond to the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" or "reach," as well as the cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "small hit." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss." The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

Of these variation patterns, for the jackpot variation pattern, after the same special chart variable display time as the miss variation pattern, an additional 15 seconds of special chart display time is set aside to execute a congratulatory effect to celebrate the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot.

Here, the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the loss fluctuation pattern in this feature unit 132SG have the same period until the variable display result is announced, preventing the player from recognizing in advance whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a loss based on the length of the period until the variable display result is announced.

Note that the jackpot variation pattern in this feature unit 132SG exemplifies a form in which an additional 15-second special chart variable display time is provided for executing a congratulatory effect after the same special chart variable display time as the miss variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special chart variable display time for executing a congratulatory effect provided in the jackpot variation pattern is not limited to 15 seconds and may vary depending on the game status.

As shown in Figures 279(A) and 279(B), this feature section 132SG has multiple different variable patterns pre-set depending on the special symbol that executes the variable display.

As shown in Figure 279 (A), the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol, such as the jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern, include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α or super reach β is executed, and a non-reach fluctuation pattern in which no reach effect is executed. Note that while this feature section 132SG has only one normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to the super reach, multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns may be established, such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. Furthermore, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns may also be established for the super reach fluctuation pattern.

The normal reach variation pattern, super reach α variation pattern, and super reach β variation pattern for the first special symbol also include a variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive effect is executed 1 to 3 times, in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed during variable display. In this feature unit 132SG, the reach effect executed - normal reach, super reach α, or super reach β - differs depending on the number of times the pseudo consecutive effect is executed. For example, if a pseudo consecutive effect is executed once during variable display, a normal reach reach effect is executed afterwards; if a pseudo consecutive effect is executed twice during variable display, a super reach α reach effect is executed afterwards; and if a pseudo consecutive effect is executed three times during variable display, a super reach β reach effect is executed afterwards.

Furthermore, of the reach effects that can be executed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the Super Reach β reach effect is set to have the highest jackpot expectation, while the Super Reach α reach effect is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the Super Reach β reach effect. Furthermore, the normal reach reach effect is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the Super Reach α reach effect (jackpot expectation of reach effects: Super Reach β > Super Reach α > Normal Reach). In other words, in this feature unit 132SG, the more pseudo consecutive effects executed during the variable display, the higher the jackpot expectation of that variable display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 279 (B), the second special symbol fluctuation patterns in this feature unit 132SG include jackpot fluctuation patterns, small jackpot fluctuation patterns, and miss fluctuation patterns, which are non-reach fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns with special symbol variable display times that differ from the first special symbol fluctuation patterns (normal reach fluctuation patterns in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and super reach γ fluctuation patterns in which the reach performance of a super reach γ is executed). Of these second special symbol fluctuation patterns, the super reach γ fluctuation pattern is set to have the highest jackpot expectation, and the non-reach fluctuation pattern is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation (jackpot expectation for second special symbols: super reach γ > normal reach > non-reach).

In addition, as will be described later, in this feature unit 132SG, rather than first determining the type of variation pattern, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, or a super reach type, and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to that determined type, these variation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining the type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the variation pattern type may be provided, and the type of variation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for determining the variation pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to that determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program, enabling it to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only game control programs but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables, such as those shown in Figure 280, which are prepared so that the CPU 103 can make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting multiple control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as a variation pattern judgment table (see Figures 287 to 292) that stores multiple variation patterns that determine the variation modes of each symbol in variable displays such as special and normal symbols.

The determination tables stored in ROM 101 include, for example, display result determination table 1 shown in Figure 280 (A), display result determination table 2 shown in Figure 280 (B), jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in Figure 280 (C), jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) shown in Figure 280 (D), small jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 280 (E), as well as various first special symbol variation pattern determination tables (see Figures 287 and 292), various second special symbol variation pattern determination tables (see Figures 293 to 292), and regular symbol variation pattern determination tables (not shown).

Figures 280(A) and 280(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination table 1 and display result determination table 2. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101, and is a table in which a win determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. Display result determination table 1 sets the determination value for a big win and a small win when the variable display special symbol designation buffer (a value that specifies the special symbol that will be variable displayed and is set by the CPU 103 when normal special symbol processing is executed) is 1 (first), i.e., when the first special symbol is the target of variable display. Display result determination table 2 sets the determination value for a big win and a small win when the variable display special symbol designation buffer (a value that specifies the special symbol that will be variable displayed and is set by the CPU 103 when normal special symbol processing is executed) is 2 (second), i.e., when the second special symbol is the target of variable display.

As shown in Figure 280 (A), when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is set to 1, a judgment value corresponding to a big win is set, but a judgment value corresponding to a small win is not set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is the target of variable display, a big win is possible, but a small win will not occur. Furthermore, the probability of winning a big win when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is set to 1 is approximately 1/200.

Also, as shown in Figure 280 (B), when the variable display special designation buffer is set to the second setting, a judgment value corresponding to a big win and a judgment value corresponding to a small win are set. Furthermore, when the variable display special designation buffer is set to the second setting, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/200, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/7.

In other words, when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the first (when the special symbol that performs the variable display is the first special symbol), if the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot shown in FIG. 280(A), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a jackpot (jackpot A or jackpot B). Also, when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the second (when the special symbol that performs the variably display is the second special symbol), if the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot shown in FIG. 280(B), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a jackpot (jackpot B), and if the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit shown in FIG. 280(B), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a small hit.

The "probabilities" shown in Figures 280(A) and 280(B) indicate the probability (percentage) of a big hit and the probability (percentage) of a small hit. Furthermore, deciding whether to have a big hit means deciding whether to control the game to a big hit gaming state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B a big hit pattern. Furthermore, deciding whether to have a small hit means deciding whether to control the game to a small hit gaming state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B a small hit pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, the CPU 103 determines whether the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination tables shown in Figures 280 (A) and 280 (B), but a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table may be provided separately, and the determination of a big hit may be made using a common table for the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern, regardless of the variable display special pattern designation buffer, and the determination of a small hit may be made using a separate table depending on the variable display special pattern designation buffer.

In addition, with this feature unit 132SG, when the variable display special chart designation buffer is set to first, no judgment values other than those corresponding to big wins are set as judgment values corresponding to small wins, meaning that small wins are not won. However, some of the judgment values other than those corresponding to big wins can be set as judgment values corresponding to small wins, allowing small wins to be won.

Figures 280(C) and 280(D) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Of these, Figure 280(C) is a table used when determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the gaming ball entering the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, Figure 280(D) is a table used when determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the gaming ball entering the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot, either jackpot A or jackpot B, based on the jackpot type determination random number (MR2) when a determination is made that the variable display result will be a jackpot pattern. In this feature unit 132SG, as shown in Figures 280 (C) and (D), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special pattern) has two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while the jackpot type determination table (for the second special pattern) has only one type of jackpot, jackpot B. In other words, when the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the jackpot that occurs will be either jackpot A or jackpot B, while when the second special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, only jackpot B will occur.

Figure 280 (E) is an explanatory diagram showing the small win type determination table stored in ROM 101. The small win type determination table is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result will be a small win pattern, in order to determine the type of small win as small win A or small win B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the win type. Furthermore, in this feature unit 132SG, if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit A, i.e., if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type C will be executed, if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit B, i.e., if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type D or jackpot E will be executed, and if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit B, i.e., if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type E will be executed. In other words, jackpots C to E are not determined by the random number value MR2 used to determine the type of jackpot extracted at the time of the initial winning, but by whether the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during play of small jackpot A or small jackpot B.

Here, referring to Figure 281, the jackpot types in this feature section 132SG are explained. In this feature section 132SG, the jackpot types are set to jackpot A through jackpot E, which execute time-saving control after the jackpot gaming state ends.

Of these jackpots A through E, jackpot A is a jackpot in which the large prize entry port is repeatedly changed to a second state advantageous to the player three times (so-called three rounds). Furthermore, the interval period between each round in jackpot A is set to 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state A until a special game is played once for the variable display of the second special symbol, and up to five times for the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Jackpot B is a jackpot in which the large prize slot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player ten times (so-called 10 rounds). The interval period between each round in Jackpot B is set to 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state C1 until a maximum of 685 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or a maximum of 689 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Jackpot C is a jackpot in which three rounds (so-called three rounds) are repeated, changing the jackpot entry port to a second state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the interval period between each round in Jackpot C is set to 0.5 seconds for the first and second rounds, and 30 seconds for the third round. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state B until a maximum of seven special game games have been played targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or a maximum of 11 special game games have been played targeting the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Jackpot D is a jackpot that is executed nine times (so-called nine rounds) to change the jackpot entry port to a second state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the interval period between each round in jackpot D is set to 0.5 seconds for the first, second, and fourth through ninth rounds, with the interval period for the third round being set to 30 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot game state of jackpot D ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state B until a maximum of seven special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or until a maximum of 11 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the first and second special symbols.

Jackpot E is a jackpot that is executed nine times (so-called nine rounds) to change the jackpot entry port to a second state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the interval period between each round in Jackpot E is set to 0.5 seconds for the first, second, and fourth through ninth rounds, with the interval period for the third round being set to 30 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state of Jackpot E ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state C2 until a maximum of 685 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or until a maximum of 689 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

As such, the interval period between the third round of jackpots C, E, and E is set to 30 seconds, and this feature unit 132SG can execute the promotion effect, described below, as an effect suggesting that the jackpot game will continue through the ninth round over those 30 seconds.

In addition, in each time-saving state, the probability of a "normal hit" increases, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole formed by variable winning ball device 6B. In other words, the occurrence of a second start winning makes it easier for the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed, making small hits more likely to occur than in the normal state. Therefore, in the time-saving state and the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times immediately after the time-saving state ends, a jackpot may occur as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, or a jackpot may occur when the game ball enters a V-shaped hole during a small hit game, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which jackpot game states are more likely to occur consecutively.

Furthermore, in time-saving state A after the end of jackpot play for jackpot A, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to one, and therefore the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot or small jackpot for that one variable display of the second special symbol and any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during that one variable display of the second special symbol (the total of the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot occurring in the total of five variable displays of the second special symbol mentioned above and the probability of a jackpot occurring when the game ball enters a V) is set to approximately 54%.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state after the end of jackpot play for jackpot D, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to seven, so the percentage of variable display results in a jackpot or small jackpot for those seven variable displays of the second special symbol and any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during those seven variable displays of the second special symbol (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small jackpots occurring in the total of 11 variable displays of the second special symbol mentioned above and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball enters a V) is set to approximately 83%.

Furthermore, in time-saving state C2 after jackpot play on jackpot B or jackpot E ends, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to 685, so the percentage of variable display results in a jackpot or small jackpot for those 685 variable displays of the second special symbol and for any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during those 685 variable displays of the second special symbol (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small jackpots occurring in the above total of 685 variable displays of the second special symbol and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball enters a V) is set to nearly 100%.

Note that while this feature section 132SG provides four types of jackpots, jackpot A through jackpot E, the present invention is not limited to this and there may be five or more types of jackpots, or three or fewer types.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 275 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game status, i.e., the control status of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid balls should be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control status of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control status to before the power outage, etc., based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage, etc. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control status and the data indicating the number of unpaid balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such RAM 102 has a game control data holding area 132SG150, as shown in FIG. 282, which is an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 132SG150 shown in FIG. 282 includes a special game reserve memory unit 132SG151, a regular game reserve memory unit 132SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 132SG152, a game control timer setting unit 132SG153, a game control counter setting unit 132SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 132SG155.

The special symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151 stores, in order of winning, reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a start winning (first start winning), but which have not yet started, and reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, resulting in a start winning (second start winning), but which have not yet started.

As an example, the special chart reserve memory unit 132SG151 associates the order of winning (the order of game ball detection) at the first start winning slot or the second start winning slot with a reserve number, and stores numerical data indicating the start slot buffer value, the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 based on the first start condition being met when the game ball passes (enters), the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, as reserve data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "8"). The maximum number of reserve data items stored in response to winning at the first start winning slot and the maximum number of reserve data items stored in response to winning at the second start winning slot are each four.

The reserved data stored in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SG151 thus indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In addition, the hold information (first hold information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start entry port, and the hold information (second hold information) based on the fulfillment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start entry port, may be stored in separate hold memory units in association with hold numbers. Furthermore, when the hold information (first hold information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start entry port, and the hold information (second hold information) based on the fulfillment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start entry port, are stored in separate hold memory units in association with hold numbers, one of the variable display based on the first hold information and the variable display based on the second hold memory information may be executed in priority over the variable display based on the other hold information.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games in which a gaming ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 but which have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151C associates the gaming balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the gaming ball as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 132SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 132SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 132SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 132SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 132SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for calculating count values used to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 may be provided with a random counter that counts some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them using software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software that updates the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or software that updates the random count value by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 275 stores not only performance control programs but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared so that the performance control CPU 120 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data constituting various performance control patterns.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that contains multiple presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, decorative LEDs, presentation models, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content of those operations. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, presentation control patterns for when special charts are variable displayed, preview presentation control patterns, and various other presentation control patterns.

The special symbol variable display effect control pattern corresponds to multiple types of variation patterns and is composed of data indicating the control content of various effect operations, such as the variable display operation of decorative symbols, the effect display operation in reach effects, re-lottery effects, etc., or various effect display operations that do not involve the variable display of decorative symbols, during the period from when the special symbol begins to vary in the special symbol game to when the confirmed special symbol that results in the special symbol display is derived and displayed. The preview effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the preview effect executed in response to, for example, multiple preview patterns prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations executed depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content.

The effect control patterns for variable display of special charts may include, for example, multiple types of reach effect control patterns that differ in the effect mode of each reach effect for each variable pattern that executes the reach effect.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 275 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as a performance control data holding area 132SG190 as shown in Figure 283(A). The performance control data holding area 132SG190 shown in Figure 283(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 132SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 132SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 132SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 132SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated in response to performance operation states, such as the display state of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 132SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 132SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 132SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 132SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 132SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature unit 132SG, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A, as shown in FIG. 283(B), is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A has a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" through "8") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the first and second special symbol reserved memories (e.g., "8"), and a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. When a start winning occurs in the first or second start winning slot, a set of three commands is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12: a start slot winning designation command (first start slot winning designation command or second start slot winning designation command), a symbol designation command, and a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command). The storage area of the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A has a storage area (entry) reserved for associating the start winning designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory count notification command, and storing the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory together.

When the start conditions are met and the variable display of the top-level reserved memory (buffer number "1") begins, the contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one by one, as described below. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "0," which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start conditions are met, are cleared during the decorative pattern change stop process, which is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A of this feature unit 132SG has a memory area reserved for each buffer number for setting a hold display flag value indicating the display mode of the hold display or active display in the advance notice setting process (Fig. 308) described below, and a memory area for setting a panel display flag value indicating the pattern (panel pattern) of the variable display corresponding panel or second special chart hold memory corresponding panel displayed on the image display device 5 in time-saving state A.

When a start win occurs, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands in the start win reception command buffer 132SG194A, starting from the first free entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number). When a start win occurs, commands from the start win designation command to the pending memory count notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when commands are received, the start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and pending memory count notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the end of the buffer numbers corresponding to the pending memories, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of decorative symbols begins, the commands stored in the start winning time receive command buffer 132SG194A shown in Figure 283(B) are deleted from the entry (buffer number "0") corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended, and the contents of the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to begin (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that just began are shifted. For example, when the variable display of decorative symbols ends in the storage state shown in Figure 283(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0," the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1," and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3," "4," "5," etc. are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2," "3," "4," etc. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is currently being variably displayed.

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command, a designation command, or a pending memory count notification command, and if these commands have been received, it stores these commands as pending memories for each special symbol at the beginning of the free space in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A.

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, we will explain the main operations on the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and game control main processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 284 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in Figure 284, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is available, and the backup RAM is normal. When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example, is pressed, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be saved in RAM 102, which serves as backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery conditions can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3: Yes), recovery processing (Step S4) is executed. The recovery processing in Step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored; for example, if a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the power supply was stopped.

If the recovery conditions are not met (Step S3: No), initialization processing (Step S6) is executed. The initialization processing in Step S6 includes clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clearing processing.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being confirmed or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting element such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

After executing the recovery process or initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, it sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). It then enters a loop process. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), allowing the CPU 103 to periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 285. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 285 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error processing to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issue a warning based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output processing to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 is able to manage the execution and reservation of special symbol games, control the jackpot gaming state, control the gaming state, and so on.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to execute the normal symbol game and manage reserves based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), as well as control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reserve display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the presentation control command that has been set to be sent is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 286 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process in this feature unit 132SG. In the special symbol process in this feature unit 132SG, the normal special symbol process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special symbol process, a determination is made as to whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol process, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" or a "small hit," as well as the type of big hit if it is a "big hit," and the type of small hit if it is a "small hit," are determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a miss symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" and the normal special symbol processing ends. This feature unit 132SG stores the order in which the game balls enter the first and second start winning slots, and the conditions for starting the special symbol game are met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result will be "big hit", "small hit", or "miss". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variable pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (variable special symbol display time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and processes for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variable display time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol variable display time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes settings to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B and to stop and display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8." If the display result is a "miss," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0." If the display result is a "small hit" or "miss," the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state and the end of the play count is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of rounds that open the large prize slot has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

Step 132: The pre-processing for opening a small win in SGS118 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "8." This pre-processing for opening a small win includes processing to set the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win." At this time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "9," and the pre-processing for opening a small win ends.

The small win opening process of step 132SGS119 is executed when the value of the special prize process flag is "9." This small win opening process includes measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023, and determining whether game balls have been detected by the second count switch 132SG024. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special prize process flag is updated to "10" and the small win opening process ends.

The small win termination process of step 132SGS120 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "10." This small win termination process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation announcing the end of the small win gaming state is executed has elapsed. Here, if a gaming ball is detected by the second count switch 132SG024 when the small win gaming state ends, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" and the small win processing ends. Furthermore, if a gaming ball is not detected by the second count switch 132SG024 when the small win gaming state ends, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small win gaming state was entered continues. When the waiting time at the end of the small win gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0" and the small win termination processing ends.

Figure 287 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in Figure 286. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting gate switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first starting gate formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on (132SGS101) based on a detection signal from the first starting gate switch 22A. If the first starting gate switch 22A is on (132SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special symbol reserved memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4" as the upper limit memory count) (132SGS102). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved first symbol memories by, for example, reading the first reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154. When the number of reserved first special symbols in 132SGS102 is not the upper limit (132SGS102; N), for example, the value stored in the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is set to "1" (132SGS103).

When the first start opening switch 22A in 132SGS101 is off (132SGS101; N) or when the number of reserved first special symbols in 132SGS102 has reached the upper limit (132SGS102; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second start opening switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is on (132SGS104) based on a detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B. If the second start opening switch 22B is on (132SGS104; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., the upper limit of "4") (132SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved symbol count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved symbol count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154. When the second reserved symbol count in 132SGS105 is not the upper limit (132SGS105; N), for example, the value stored in the start buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is set to "2" (132SGS106).

After executing either of the processes 132SGS103 or 132SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the value stored in the start port buffer, is updated by adding 1 (132SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1," the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2," the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. Furthermore, the second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total reserved symbol count is also updated to increase by 1 (132SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 132SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 (132SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the extracted random numbers and the start opening buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol reserve memory unit (132SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit," and further to determine the type of big hit or small hit when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 132SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 132SGS110, a setting for sending a start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is made (132SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1," the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2," the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 285 after the special symbol process processing is completed.

Following the processing of 132SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (132SGS112). Then, the CPU 103 performs settings for sending a pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (132SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 285 after the special symbol process processing has been completed.

After executing the processing of 132SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (132SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in 132SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS115), and then processing of 2390SGS104 proceeds. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 132SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS116), and then the start winning processing ends. This ensures that processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect valid game ball start winnings.

Figure 288 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed by 132SGS112 in Figure 287 as a random number value determination process at the time of winning. In this feature unit 132SG, when the variable display of special symbols or decorative symbols is initiated, the normal special symbol processing (S110 in Figure 286) determines whether the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) should be controlled as a "big hit" to a big hit game state, or whether it should be controlled as a "small hit" to a small hit game state. In addition, the variable pattern setting processing (S111 in Figure 286) determines the variable pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Separately from these determinations, when a gaming ball is detected in the start winning slot (first winning slot or second winning slot), CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process of S112 to determine whether a big win symbol or a small win symbol will be derived and displayed as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols or decorative symbols based on the detection of the gaming ball entering the start winning slot begins, that is, before the determination of whether a big win or a small win is made at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special symbol display result will be a "big win" or a "small win," and based on this determination result, the presentation control CPU 120 or the like will execute advance warnings such as panel display presentations and hold preview presentations, as described below.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 288, the CPU 103 first determines whether the game state is normal or time-saving (step 132SGS121). It then determines whether the set start opening buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS122a). If the start opening buffer value is 1, display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 280(A) is selected and the process proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122b). If the start opening buffer value is 2, display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 280(B) is selected and the process proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122c).

In step 132SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number value MR1 extracted in step 132SGS109 with the selected display result determination table to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. If the random number value MR1 is outside the jackpot determination range, it determines whether the random number value MR1 is within the small jackpot determination range (step 132SGS123b).

In step 132SGS123b, if the random number value MR1 is outside the small win determination value range, i.e., if the variable display result is a miss, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a pattern designation command corresponding to the miss (step 132SGS126a). Then, it determines whether the start opening buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS126b). If the start opening buffer value is 1, if the game state is normal, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 291 (A). If the game state is either of the time-saving states, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 292 (A), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126c).

Also, if the start port buffer value is 2, if the gaming state is time-saving state A, second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 293 (A) is selected; if the gaming state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2, second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 294 (A) is selected; if the gaming state is time-saving state C2, time-saving state C2, or the eighth or subsequent variable display, second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 291 (A) is selected, and proceed to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126d).

In addition, in step 132SGS123b, if the random number value MR1 is within the small win determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to a small win (step 132SGS127). Then, if the gaming state is time-saving state A, it selects second special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 293(C); if the gaming state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or time-saving state C2, it selects second special symbol variation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. 294(C); or if the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state C2, it selects second special symbol variation pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 291(C), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS128).

Furthermore, in step 132SGS123a, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to a jackpot (step 132SGS129). Then, it determines whether the start port buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS130a). If the start port buffer value is 1, and the game state is normal, it selects first special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 291 (C). If the game state is either a time-saving state, it selects first special symbol variation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 292 (B), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (132SGS130b).

Also, if the start port buffer value is 2, when the game state is normal, if the game state is time-saving state A, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 293 (B) is selected; if the game state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in Figure 294 (B) is selected; if the game state is normal or time-saving state C2, the eighth or subsequent variable display, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table J shown in Figure 295 (B) is selected, and proceed to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS130c).

In step 132SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected fluctuation pattern determination table with the random number value MR3 extracted in step 132SGS109 to determine the fluctuation category from non-reach, super reach, or other (normal reach). Then, it sets up the transmission of a fluctuation category designation command (one of those shown in Figure 288 (B)) according to the determination result, and ends the random number value determination process when winning (step 132SGS132).

The commands set for transmission in steps 132SGS124, 132SGS126a, 132SGS127, 132SGS129, and 132SGS132 are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 285.

Figure 289 is a flowchart showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) shown in Figure 286. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether there is any reserved memory in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SGS151 (step 132SGS541). If there is no reserved memory in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SGS151, demo display settings such as sending settings for a customer waiting demo designation command are made, and the normal special symbol processing ends (step 132SGS572). Note that the customer waiting demo designation command is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing (see Figure 285).

If there is a reserved memory in the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151, the start port buffer value and random number values MR1 to MR3 are read and identified from the reserved number "1" in the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151 (step 132SGS542). The values of the number of reserved special charts to be displayed variably and the total number of reserved special charts are decremented by 1, and the contents of the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151 are shifted (step 132SGS543).

It also determines whether the start opening buffer value identified in step 132SGS542 is 1 (step 132SGS554a). If the start opening buffer value is 1, the variable display special designation buffer value is set to 1 (step 132SGS544b). If the start opening buffer value is 2, the variable display special designation buffer value is set to 2 (step 132SGS544c).

Next, a display result determination table is set according to the variable display special designation buffer value (step 132SGS555). The random number value MR1 read in step 132SGS542 is then compared with the display result determination table set in step 132SGS555 to determine whether the value of random number value MR1 is within the jackpot range (step 132SGS556). If the value of random number value MR1 is outside the jackpot range, it is further determined whether the value of random number value MR1 is within the small jackpot range (step 132SGS557). If the value of random number value MR1 is within the small jackpot range, i.e., if the variable display result is a small jackpot, a small jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS558). Then, a small win type determination table (see Figure 280 (E)) is selected (step 132SGS558a), and the small win type is determined by comparing the selected small win type determination table with the random number value MR2 read in step 132SGS542 (step 132SGS558b). Then, a small win type buffer value corresponding to the determined small win type is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS558c). Note that if the value of the random number value MR1 is outside the range for a small win, that is, if the variable display result is a miss, the process proceeds to step 132SGS570.

Furthermore, if the value of the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot range in step 132SGS556, that is, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS566). Then, a jackpot type determination table (see Figure 280(C) or 280(D)) corresponding to the variable display special chart designation buffer is selected (step 132SGS567), and the jackpot type is determined by comparing the selected jackpot type determination table with the random number value MR1 read in step 132SGS542 (step 132SGS568). Then, a jackpot type buffer value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set, and processing proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS569).

In step 132SGS570, the CPU 103 determines the confirmed special symbol according to the variable display result. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the variable pattern setting process, and the normal special symbol processing is terminated (step 132SGS571).

Figure 290 is a flowchart showing the variable pattern setting process (step S111) shown in Figure 286. In the variable pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special symbol (step 132SGS131). Whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special symbol can be determined, for example, by whether the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 1. If it is the variable display of the first special symbol, a variable pattern determination table is selected from the variable pattern determination tables shown in Figures 291 and 292 according to the variable display result, game status, and number of reserved memories, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS135 (step 132SGS132).

For example, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is two or less, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 291 (A) is selected; if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is three or more, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 291 (B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a jackpot, and the game state is normal, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 291 (C) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is either a time-saving state, the first special symbol variable pattern determination table D shown in Figure 292 (A) is selected, and if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is either a time-saving state, the first special symbol variable pattern determination table E shown in Figure 292 (B) is selected.

Also, if the variable display executed in step 132SGS131 is the variable display of the second special chart, a variable pattern determination table corresponding to the variable display result, game status, value of the time-saving status variable display count counter (number of variable displays in each time-saving status), etc. is selected from Figures 293 to 296, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS135 (step 132SGS134).

For example, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state A, then the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 293 (A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is time-saving state A, then the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 293 (B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is time-saving state A, then the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 293 (C) is selected.

Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display and the 12th to 685th variable display in time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, and time-saving state C2, then variable pattern determination table D for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 294(A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display and the 12th to 685th variable display in time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, and time-saving state C2, then variable pattern determination table E for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 294(B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display and the 12th to 685th variable display in time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, and time-saving state C2, then variable pattern determination table F for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 294(A) is selected.

Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 295(A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table H shown in FIG. 295(A) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 295(A) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table J shown in FIG. 296 (A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big hit and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table K shown in FIG. 296 (B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small hit and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table L shown in FIG. 296 (C) is selected.

After executing step 132SGS132 or step 132SGS134a, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern determination table with the random number value MR3 read in step 132SGS542 of the normal special symbol processing to determine the variation pattern (step 132SGS135). In the processing of step 132SGS135, the CPU 103 identifies a variation pattern that includes the random number value MR3 read in step 132SGS542 of the normal special symbol processing from the variation patterns included in the selected variation pattern determination table, and determines the identified variation pattern as the variation pattern that will execute the variable display.

Then, settings are made to start the variable display of the special symbol (step 132SGS136), and various commands for starting the variable display, such as a variable pattern specification command and a variable display result specification command according to the determined variable pattern, are set for transmission (step 132SGS137), and a variable display time timer according to the variable pattern is set (step 132SGS138). Finally, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the special symbol variable processing, and the variable pattern setting process is terminated (step 132SGS139). The various commands set for transmission in step 132SGS137 are sent to the performance control board 12 in the command control process shown in FIG. 285.

In addition, with regard to the miss variation pattern in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal control state, the allocation of random number value MR3 is set as shown in Figures 291 and 292, so the non-reach variation pattern is most likely to be determined, and the normal reach, Super Reach α, and Super Reach β variation patterns are least likely to be determined. On the other hand, with regard to the jackpot variation pattern in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal control state, the allocation of random number value MR3 is set as shown in Figures 295 and 296, so the Super Reach β variation pattern is most likely to be determined, and the Super Reach α and normal reach variation patterns are least likely to be determined. For this reason, in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state, when the variable display is executed in a non-reach variation pattern, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation probability) is lowest, and the normal reach, Super Reach α, and Super Reach β variation patterns are set to be the most likely to be determined. In other words, the shorter the special chart change time, the lower the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and the longer the special chart change time, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

Furthermore, among the multiple variation patterns, for variation patterns that execute a common reach effect, variation patterns that execute pseudo consecutive effects are set to have a higher jackpot expectation. For example, for variation patterns that execute the reach effect of Super Reach β, variation patterns that execute pseudo consecutive effects and variation patterns that do not execute pseudo consecutive effects are provided, but the variation pattern of Super Reach β that executes pseudo consecutive effects is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of Super Reach β that does not execute pseudo consecutive effects. Similarly, for variation patterns that execute the reach effect of Super Reach α, variation patterns that execute pseudo consecutive effects and variation patterns that do not execute pseudo consecutive effects are provided, but the variation pattern of Super Reach α that executes pseudo consecutive effects is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of Super Reach α that does not execute pseudo consecutive effects. Furthermore, for variation patterns that execute the reach effect of normal reach, variation patterns that execute pseudo consecutive effects and variation patterns that do not execute pseudo consecutive effects are provided, but the variation pattern of normal reach that executes pseudo consecutive effects is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of normal reach that does not execute pseudo consecutive effects.

Figure 297 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing (step S113) shown in Figure 286. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether the symbol determination period timer described below is running (step 132SGS201). If the symbol determination period is not running, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B causes the stopped symbol of the special symbol to be derived and displayed (step 132SGS202), and sets up the transmission of a symbol determination command (step 132SGS203). The symbol determination command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing shown in Figure 285.

The CPU 103 then determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS204). If the jackpot flag is set, if any time-saving flags are set, the time-saving flags and other game state flags are cleared (step 132SGS205), and the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter is cleared (step 132SGS206). Furthermore, depending on the type of jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the transmission settings for the hit start 1 designation command or the hit start 2 designation command, and sets the transmission settings for the game state background designation command indicating that the game state is normal, and then proceeds to step 132SGS242 (steps 132SGS207, step 132SGS208). The hit start designation command and game state background designation command are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 285.

Also, if the symbol determination period timer is running in step 132SGS201, the CPU 103 decrements the symbol determination period timer by 1 (step 132SGS209) and determines whether the symbol determination period timer has timed out (step 132SGS210). If the symbol determination period timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 terminates the special symbol stop processing. If the symbol determination period timer has timed out, the CPU 103 further determines whether the derivatively displayed stopped symbol is a losing symbol (step 132SGS211). If the derivatively displayed stopped symbol is a losing symbol, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing and terminates the special symbol stop processing (step 132SGS212). If the derivatively displayed stopped symbol is not a losing symbol, the CPU 103 determines whether the derivatively displayed stopped symbol is a jackpot symbol (step 132SGS213). If the derived and displayed stopped pattern is a jackpot pattern, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing and the special pattern stop processing is terminated (step 132 SGS214); if the derived and displayed stopped pattern is not a jackpot pattern, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small jackpot release pre-processing and the special pattern stop processing is terminated (step 132 SGS215).

Also, if the jackpot flag is not set in step 132SGS204, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the total time-saving count counter is 1 or greater (step 132SGS216). The total time-saving count counter is set to the sum of the maximum number of time-saving control cycles for the first special symbol and the maximum number of time-saving control cycles for the second special symbol in the time-saving state (either "5," "11," or "689").

If the value of the total time-saving count counter is 1 or greater, the value of the total time-saving count counter is decremented by 1 (step 132SGS217). Furthermore, it is determined whether the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 1, i.e., whether the completed variable display is the variable display of the first special symbol (step 132SGS218). If the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 1, the process proceeds to step 132SGS224. If the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 2 (the completed variable display is the variable display of the second special symbol), the value of the second special symbol time-saving count counter is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS224 (step 132SGS219). The second special symbol time-saving count counter is a counter that is set to the maximum number of time-saving control times for the second special symbol (either "1," "7," or "685") during time-saving mode.

In step 132SGS224, the CPU 103 determines whether any time-saving flags are set (whether the system is controlled to any time-saving state). If no time-saving flags are set, the process proceeds to step 132SGS240. If any time-saving flags are set, the process further determines whether the value of the total time-saving count counter has reached 0, i.e., whether the variable display of the maximum number of time-saving control cycles has ended in the controlled time-saving state (step 132SGS225). If the value of the total time-saving count counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 132SGS240. If the value of the total time-saving count counter is 0, the process clears the set time-saving flag (step 132SGS226), clears the value of the total time-saving count counter, and proceeds to step 132SGS240 (step 132SGS227).

In step 132SGS240, the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit flag is set. If the small hit flag is set, it sets the transmission of the hit start 3 designation command or the hit 4 start designation command according to the type of small hit, and proceeds to step 132SGS242. The hit start 3 designation command and the hit 4 start designation command are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CP 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 285. If the small hit flag is not set, it proceeds to step 132SGS242.

Then, in step 132SGS242, the CPU 103 sets the symbol determination period timer to a value corresponding to the symbol determination period (a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the case of this feature unit 132SG), and sets the transmission of a symbol determination period designation command corresponding to the set value. Furthermore, it sets the transmission of a game state background designation command corresponding to the game state, and ends the special symbol stop processing (step 132SGS243).

The symbol determination period designation command and game status background designation command are sent to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 285.

Figure 298 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S119 of Figure 286 as the small win release processing. In the small win release processing, the CPU 103 first decrements the value of the release time timer by 1 (132SGS281). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the release time timer has timed out (132SGS282).

If the opening timer has timed out, the process proceeds to 132SGS293. If the opening timer has not timed out, the process determines whether it is time to open the large prize opening (132SGS283). If it is time to open the large prize opening, the CPU 103 controls the large prize opening to an open state by activating solenoid 132SG083 (132SGS284). Then, the process sets up the transmission of a command specifying that the large prize opening is open according to the round (132SGS285), and the process proceeds to 132SGS286. The command specifying that the large prize opening is open, set up for transmission in 132SGS285, is sent to the performance control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not time to open the large prize opening, the process proceeds to 132SGS286 without passing through 132SGS284 and 132SGS285.

In 132SGS286, the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to close the large prize opening (132SGS286). If it is time to close the large prize opening, the CPU 103 activates solenoid 132SG083 to control the large prize opening to a closed state (132SGS287). Then, it sets the transmission of a command to specify when the large prize opening is to be opened according to the round (132SGS288), and proceeds to 132SGS289. The command to specify when the large prize opening is open, set for transmission in 132SGS288, is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not time to close the large prize opening, it proceeds to 132SGS289 without passing through 132SGS287 and 132SGS288.

In step 132SGS289, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on (132SGS289). If the second count switch 132SG024 is not on, the small win release process is terminated. If the second count switch 132SG024 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag, which indicates that the second count switch 132SG024 has already been turned on, i.e., that the gaming ball has passed through the second count switch 132SG024, has been set (132SGS290). If the V winning flag is set, the small win release process is terminated. If the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 sets the V winning flag (132SGS291).

Then, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a V winning notification command to the performance control board 12 (132SGS292). Note that the V winning notification command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process described above.

Then, in 132SGS293, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10," which corresponds to the small win end processing (S120) (132SGS293), and ends the small win release processing.

Figure 299 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed by 132SGS120 in Figure 286 as small win end processing. During small win end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the small win end display timer is running (132SGS301). If the small win end display timer is not running (132SGS301; N), the small win flag is cleared (132SGS302) and a win end designation command corresponding to the small win is set to be sent to the performance control board 12 (132SGS303). The win end designation command is sent to the performance control board 12 during the command control processing described above. Then, the small win end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the small win end display time (132SGS304), and the small win end processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the small win end display timer is running, the value of the small win end display timer is decremented by 1 (132SGS305). Then, it is determined whether the small win end display time has elapsed, that is, whether the small win end display timer has timed out (132SGS306). If the small win end display time has not elapsed, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on (132SGS307). If the second count switch 132SG024 has not been turned on, the small win end processing is terminated. If the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on, it determines whether the V winning flag has been set, indicating that the second count switch 132SG024 has already been turned on, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the second count switch 132SG024 (132SGS308). If the V prize flag is set, the small win end process ends; if the V prize flag is not set, the V prize flag is set (132SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (132SGS310) and ends the small win end processing. Note that the V winning notification command is sent to the effect control board 12 during the command control processing described above.

Also, when the small win end display time has elapsed in 132SGS306, CPU 103 determines whether the V prize flag is set (132SGS311). If the V prize flag is set, CPU 103 clears the V prize flag and sets the big win flag (132SGS312, 132SGS313). Then, CPU 103 determines the big win type from "Big Win C" to "Big Win E" based on the type of small win that resulted in the V prize (132SGS314). As shown in FIG. 280(E), if the small win type resulting from the V winning is a "small win A," the jackpot type is determined to be a "jackpot C." If the small win type resulting from the V winning is a "small win B," the jackpot type is determined to be a "jackpot D." If the small win type resulting from the V winning is a "small win C," the jackpot type is determined to be a "jackpot E." The determined jackpot type is stored in accordance with the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value in the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 (132SGS315).

In addition, the time-saving flag and the time-saving state variable display count counter are cleared (steps 132SGS316 and 132SGS317), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4," which corresponds to the pre-big win release processing (S114) (132SGS318), and the small win end processing is terminated.

In other words, this feature unit 132SG allows the game ball to pass through the second count switch 132SG024 not only during small win play, but also during the period after the small win play ends until the small win end display time has elapsed. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the big win slot just before the small win play ends, the game ball will pass through the second count switch 132SG024, and the big win play will be executed after the small win end processing has ended.

If the V prize flag is not set in 132SGS311, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" (132SGS319), which corresponds to the normal special symbol processing (S110), and ends the small win end processing.

Figure 300 is a flowchart of the jackpot end processing shown in Figure 286. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot end display timer is running (step 103SGS321). If the jackpot end display timer is not running, the CPU 103 clears the jackpot flag (step 132SGS322a) and sets the transmission of a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type (step 132SGS322b). The jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control processing described above. The CPU 103 then sets the jackpot end display timer to a value corresponding to the display time during which the jackpot end display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time), and ends the jackpot end processing (step 132SGS322c).

Also, if the jackpot end display timer is running in step 132SGS321, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 132SGS323), and it is determined whether the jackpot end display timer has timed out (step 132SGS324). If the jackpot end display timer has not timed out, the jackpot end processing is terminated. If the jackpot end display timer has timed out, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A (step 132SGS325). If the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A, the second special time-saving count counter is set to "1" and the total time-saving count counter is set to "5" (steps 132SGS326, 132SGS327). Then, the time-saving A flag is set, indicating that the game is in time-saving state A, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339 (step 132SGS327a).

Furthermore, if the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is not jackpot A, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is jackpot B or jackpot E (step 132SGS328). If the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is jackpot B or jackpot E, the second special chart time-saving count counter is set to "685" and the total time-saving count counter is set to "689" (steps 132SGS329, 132SGS330). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is jackpot B (step 132SGS328). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, the time-saving C1 flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is C1, and proceed to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330a). If the jackpot type is jackpot E, the time-saving C2 flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is C2, and proceed to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330b).

Also, if the jackpot type of the jackpot is not jackpot B or jackpot E, the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot D, the second special time-saving count counter is set to "7", and the total time-saving count counter is set to "11" (steps 132SGS335 and 132SGS336). Then, the time-saving B flag is set, indicating that the game is in time-saving state B, and the program proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS336a).

In step 132SGS339b, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a game status background designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot that was executed (step 132SGS339b). The game status background designation command is transmitted to the presentation control board 12 in the command control process described above. The CPU 103 also stores the game status background designation command that has been set up for transmission (step 132SGS340), and terminates the jackpot termination process.

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 301. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 301 begins, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a startup preparation display process (step 132SGS70) to display a startup preparation display on the image display device 5, and then performs a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. The initial operation control process also executes an initial operation control process (step S72). The initial operation control process executes control for initializing the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to its origin position and performing predetermined operation checks.

In this embodiment, the terms "display" and "image" are sometimes used, for example, the "boot preparation display" described in the embodiment is referred to as a "boot preparation image" in the drawings. However, since "display" and "image" are the same thing, "display" may also be referred to as "image" and "image" as "display."

Furthermore, the initialization process of step S71 prevents the startup preparation display displayed by the startup preparation display process of step SGS70 from being initialized. Furthermore, by displaying the startup preparation display, it is possible to quickly know that power has been supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and to confirm that the image display device 5 can display the display normally.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, a power outage recovery display process (step 132SGS75b) is executed to display a power outage recovery display on the image display device 5 based on the power outage recovery designation command received from the CPU 103, and an initial operation control process (step 132SGS75c) is executed to execute the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started.

The startup preparation display process in this characteristic unit 132SG includes processing to set a cold start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up with a cold start when it is determined that a power-on command has been received, and the power outage recovery display process in this characteristic unit 132SG includes processing to set a hot start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up with a hot start when it is determined that a power outage recovery command has been received.

Furthermore, after the initial operation control processing, the performance control process processing is executed (step S76). The performance control process processing controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display operation of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. Furthermore, judgments, decisions, and settings are made regarding the control content of performance operations using various performance devices in accordance with performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random number value update process (step S77), a demo effect control process (step S78) for executing a demo effect on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a volume/light intensity adjustment process (step 132SGS79) for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light intensity of each LED, and a background image update process (step 132SGS80) for updating the background image displayed on the image display device 5 based on the background image designation command received from the CPU 103 to a background image corresponding to the received background image designation command are executed. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to processing of step S73.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer, until the customer waiting demo performance begins based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, and may start the customer waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

As shown in FIG. 302, the initial operation control process broadly includes two processes: an origin placement control process (step 132SGS100) that places the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) provided on the pachinko gaming machine 1 at their respective origin positions, and an operation confirmation control process (step 132SGS200) that confirms the operation of these movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101).

Figure 303 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in the origin placement control processing in Figure 302. In the origin placement control processing shown in Figure 303, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the origin operation period timer is counting (step 132SGS401). If the origin operation period timer is not operating, it further determines whether the startup origin placement control completed flag is set (step 132SGS402). If the startup origin placement control completed flag is not set, it determines whether it is the timing to start a demo performance (step 132SGS403). Whether it is the timing to start a demo performance can be determined by, for example, determining whether the process timer for the demo performance is operating or whether the value of the process timer for the demo performance is a value corresponding to the start timing of the demo performance.

If it is not the start timing of the demo performance, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the variable display (132SGS404). Whether it is the start timing of the variable display can be determined, for example, by determining whether the process timer for the variable display of the decorative pattern is running, and whether the value of the process timer for the variable display of the decorative pattern is a value corresponding to the start timing of the variable display. If it is not the start timing of the variable display, the origin placement control process is terminated.

Then, if the start-up origin placement control completed flag is not set in step 132SGS402, if it is not the start timing of the demo performance in step 132SGS403, or if it is not the start timing of the variable display in step 132SGS404, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the detection status of the origin position sensor (origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of the movable body to be controlled (step 132SGS410), and determines whether there is a movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor (step 132SGS411). If there are any movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor, these movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor (non-detected movable bodies) are identified (step 132SG412), and movement control of the non-detected movable bodies toward the origin is initiated by means such as driving a motor corresponding to the non-detected movable body (step 132SGS413), and the process proceeds to step 132SGS414. Note that if there are no movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor in step 132SGS411, i.e., if all movable bodies are positioned at their respective origin positions, the process proceeds to step 132SGS414 without executing steps 132SGS412 and 132SGS413.

In step 132SGS414, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the detected movable body (the movable body located at the origin position). Then, it sets the detection operation process data for the detected movable body (step 132SGS415), starts the timer count of the detection operation process timer, and starts operation control of the movable body (detected movable body), as well as display control of the image display device 5, sound output control of speakers 8L and 8Rk, and light emission control of each LED (step 132SGS416). Furthermore, it starts the timer count of the origin operation period timer, and ends the origin placement control process (step 132SGS417).

Also, if the origin operation period timer is counting in step 132SGS401, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the values of both the detection operation process timer and the origin operation period timer (step 132SGS420). It then determines whether the subtracted origin operation period timer has timed out (step 132SGS421). If the subtracted origin operation period timer has not timed out, it controls the operation based on the process data corresponding to the subtracted detection operation process timer value, and ends the origin placement control process (step 132SGS422).

Also, if the origin operation period timer has expired in step 132SGS421, the operation of each movable body is stopped (step 132SGS423), and the detection status of the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of each movable body to be controlled is identified (step 132SGS424). It is then determined whether there are any movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensors (step 132SGS425).

If there are any movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor, these movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor (non-detected movable bodies) are identified (step 132SG426), and if the startup origin placement control completed flag is not set, the flag is set and the origin placement control process ends (step 132SGS427). Note that if there are no movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor, the process of step 132SGS427 is executed and the origin placement control process ends.

Figures 304 and 305 are flowcharts showing an example of the processing executed in the operation confirmation control processing in Figure 302. As mentioned above, a cold start in this characteristic section 132SG refers to the pachinko gaming machine 1 being powered on with the clear switch 92 pressed down, i.e., the initialization processing (step S6) being executed in the game control main processing when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up. A hot start in this characteristic section 132SG refers to the pachinko gaming machine 1 being powered on with the clear switch 92 not pressed down, i.e., the recovery processing (step S4) being executed in the game control main processing when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up.

In the operation confirmation control process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the post-confirmation operation execution flag is set (step 132SGS501). If the post-confirmation operation execution flag is not set, it determines whether the operation confirmation execution flag is set (step 132SGS502). If the operation confirmation execution flag is not set, it determines whether the operation confirmed flag is set (step 132SGS503).

If the operation confirmation flag is set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the operation confirmation flag is not set, it is further determined whether the startup origin placement control flag is set (step 132SGS504). If the startup origin placement control flag is not set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the startup origin placement control flag is set, the operation confirmation in progress flag is set (step 132SGS505), and it is determined whether an undetected movable object is stored (step 132SGS506). If an undetected movable object is not stored, proceed to step 132SGS508. If an undetected movable object is stored, the operation of the undetected movable object is restricted before proceeding to step 132SGS508 (step 132SGS507).

In step 132SGS508, the presentation control CPU 120 identifies the startup type (whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started as a cold start or a hot start) and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper order) corresponding to the startup type. Furthermore, in step 132SGS508, it identifies whether the cold start flag or the hot start flag is set, and if the cold start flag is set, it identifies the startup type as a cold start and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper order) corresponding to the cold start; and if the hot start flag is set, it identifies the startup type as a hot start and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper order) corresponding to the hot start.

Then, the operation confirmation process timer (upper) starts counting, and the operation control of the movable body, display control of the image display device 5, sound output control from speakers 8L and 8R, and light emission control of each LED are started, and the operation confirmation control process ends (step 132SGS509).

If the operation confirmation in progress flag is set in step 132SGS502, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the operation confirmation process timer (upper) (step 132SGS510) and identifies the process data corresponding to the value of the operation confirmation process timer after the subtraction (step 132SGS511). It then determines whether the identified process data is completion data (step 132SGS512). If the identified process data is not completion data, it further determines whether the identified process data corresponds to the performance position (step 132SGS513). If the identified process data is not data corresponding to the performance position, it proceeds to step 132SGS515. If the identified process data is data corresponding to the performance position, it stores the performance results of the performance position sensor of the corresponding movable body and then proceeds to step 132SGS515 (step 132SGS514).

In step 132SGS515, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the process switching flag is set. If the process switching flag is set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the process switching flag is not set, the CPU 120 further determines whether it is time to start the target variable display in which the movable body performance will be executed (step 132SGS516). If it is not time to start the target variable display in which the movable body performance will be executed, the CPU 120 controls the operation of the movable body, the display image on the image display device 5, the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the illumination of each LED based on the process data identified in step 132SGS511, and terminates the operation confirmation control process (step 132SGS517).

Furthermore, if it is the start timing of the target variable display in which the movable body effect is executed, the activation type (whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was activated by cold start or hot start) is identified, and the lower-level switching control type associated with the switching control table shown in FIG. 306 is identified according to the identified activation type (step 132SGS518).

For example, as shown in FIG. 306, if the identified startup type is a cold start, image display control on the image display device 5 and LED light emission control are identified as the lower-level switching control types; if the identified startup type is a hot start, image display control on the image display device 5 and sound output control from speakers 8L and 8R are identified as the lower-level switching control types.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to switch the control process data corresponding to the lower-level switching control type to lower-level process data among the process data identified in step 132SGS518 (step 132SGS219) and sets the process switching flag (step 132SGS520). It also executes control based on the non-switched process data among the process data identified in step 132SGS218, and ends the operation confirmation control processing (step 132SGS521).

Also, in step 132SGS512, if the process data identified in step 132SGS511 is not completion data, the performance control CPU 120 stores the detected positions of the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of each movable body (step 132SGS530), and identifies malfunctioning movable bodies from the detection results of the performance position sensors (performance position sensors 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) and the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) and stores them as operation-restricted movable bodies (step 132SGS531). Furthermore, the operation check in progress flag is cleared (step 132SGS532), and it is determined whether the process switching in progress flag is set (step 132SGS533).

If the process switching flag is not set, the operation confirmation flag is set (step 132SGS534), and control is executed to switch all control process data to performance control process data (lower), terminating the operation confirmation control processing (step 132SGS535). If the process switching flag is set, the process switching flag is cleared (step 132SGS536), and if the target type is a cold start, control is executed to switch the sound output control process data to performance control process data (lower) (step 132SGS536a). The chance button and on-board movable objects are identified as the movable objects to be operated, and post-confirmation operation process data (upper) is set (step 132SGS537). The post-confirmation operation process timer (upper) is started to count, and operation control and LED illumination control of the chance button and on-board movable objects are initiated (step 132SGS538). The post-confirmation operation execution flag is set, terminating the operation confirmation control processing (step 132SGS539).

Also, if the post-confirmation operation execution flag is set in step 132SGS501, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the post-confirmation operation process timer (upper) (step 132SGS540) and identifies the process data corresponding to the post-confirmation operation process timer value after the subtraction (step 132SGS541). It then determines whether the identified process data is completed data (step 132SGS542).

If the identified process data is not completion data, it is further determined whether the identified process data corresponds to a presentation position (step 132SGS543). If the identified process data is not data corresponding to a presentation position, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the identified process data is data corresponding to a presentation position, the detection results of the presentation position sensors (protruding position sensor 635D and presentation position sensor 132SG124) of the chance button 631B and on-board movable body 32A are stored, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS544).

Furthermore, if the identified process data is completion data, the performance control CPU 120 stores the detection results of the origin position sensors (origin position sensor 635C and origin position sensor 132SG123) of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A (step 132SGS545), and determines whether the chance button 631B is located at the origin position (step 132SGS546). If the chance button 631B is located at the origin position, the process proceeds to step 132SGS548; if the chance button 631B is not located at the origin position, the process stores the chance button 631B as a movement-restricted movable body and proceeds to step 132SGS548 (step 132SGS547).

In step 132SGS548, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position. If the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, the process proceeds to step 132SGS550. If the on-board movable body 32A is not located at the origin position, the on-board movable body 32A is stored as a movement-restricted movable body and the process proceeds to step 132SGS550 (step 132SGS549).

In step 132SGS550, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to switch the process data for movable body control and LED light emission control to performance control process data (lower level). It then clears the operation check execution flag and terminates the operation check control process (step 132SGS551).

By executing the origin placement control process and operation confirmation control process as described above, as shown in Figure 307 (A), during the execution period of switching control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a cold start, movable body control, sound output control, and LED light emission control are executed based on the operation confirmation process data (higher order), and display control is executed based on the presentation control process data (lower order).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 307 (B), during the execution period of switching control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, movable body control and LED light emission control are executed based on the operation confirmation process data (higher order), and display control and sound output control are executed based on the presentation control process data (lower order).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 307 (C), during the execution period of post-confirmation operation control, operation control of the chance button 631B and on-board movable body (movable body control) and LED light emission control are executed based on post-confirmation operation process data (upper level), and display control and sound output control are executed based on performance control process data (lower level).

Figure 308 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 301 as the presentation control process. In the presentation control process shown in Figure 308, the presentation control CPU 120 first performs the advance notice setting process in this feature unit 132SG, based on the presentation control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the start winning, and executes a hold display notice effect as an advance notice, which suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot based on the display mode of the hold display, and a panel image on the image display device 5 for one variable display of the second special pattern in time-saving state A and four variable displays of the second special pattern immediately thereafter, and executes a panel effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot at different rates depending on the display mode of these panel images. Furthermore, if it is decided to execute a pending display preview effect, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the pending display is set as the pending display flag value corresponding to the pending memory to be executed in the start winning time receiving command buffer 132SGS194A, and if it is decided to execute a panel display effect, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the panel display is set as the panel display flag value corresponding to the pending memory to be executed in the start winning time receiving command buffer 132SGS194A, thereby starting the display of these pending displays and panel displays (see Figure 283 (B)).

The effect control CPU 120 also executes a result effect execution process (step 132SGS162). In the result effect execution process, for example, the number of jackpot games that have occurred and the number of prize balls paid out since the first win occurs are counted, and when the last variable display in the time-saving state (time-saving state A is the four variable displays immediately after the end of the time-saving state) ends and control is returned to the normal state (during the pattern determination period), processing is performed to execute a result effect that displays the number of jackpot games that have occurred and the number of prize balls paid out on the image display device 5. Note that, in this feature unit 132SG, when controlled to time-saving state C2, there are exceptional cases in which a result effect is executed from the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display of the second special chart to the eleventh variable display.

The effect control CPU 120 also executes a break-in effect execution process (step 132SGS163). The break-in effect execution process executes a break-in effect that notifies players that the game has been controlled to a time-saving state, for example, from the ending effect of the jackpot game until the first variable display after the jackpot game.

After executing the processing of step 132SGS163, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processing steps S170 to S175, step 132SGS176, or step 132SGS177, depending on the value of a performance process flag stored in RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution are determined based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 displays the fixed decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, in a static state, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the static display of the fixed decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol hit waiting process of step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3." In this special symbol hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 stops the variable display of the decorative symbol for the symbol fixation period indicated by the symbol fixation command, based on receiving a command (one of the first symbol fixation command, second symbol fixation command, third symbol fixation command, and fourth symbol fixation command) that specifies the static display of the fixed decorative symbol received in the variable display performance process.

Furthermore, at the end of the pattern determination period, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "6", which corresponds to the small win presentation processing. Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is determined that the display result in the special symbol game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0". Once the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special symbol hit waiting process ends.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S174 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "6." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

The small win presentation processing of step 132SGS176 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "6." During this small win presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the small win gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, during the small win presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the small win gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "7," which corresponds to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation processing is terminated.

The small win end presentation processing of step 132SGS177 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "7". In this small win end presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the small win end presentation processing is terminated.

Figure 309 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 308. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command has been received (step 132SGS601). If the variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "1" to "8" of the special chart reserve memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A is shifted up by one buffer number (step 132SGS602). Note that the contents of buffer number "0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased. Furthermore, if the variable display start command reception flag is not set, the variable display start setting process is terminated. After executing step 132SGS602, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 132SGS605) and determines the decorative pattern to be stopped according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 132SGS606).

The effect control CPU 120 then executes a remaining time-saving count display process (step 132SGS608) for displaying on the image display device 5 the remaining number of time-saving controls in the time-saving state (remaining time-saving counts), a time-saving end countdown display process (step 132SGS609) for displaying on the image display device 5 a countdown of the remaining number of times until the time-saving control ends (also called a countdown effect or time-saving end countdown) when the remaining number of time-saving controls in the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number, and a variable display preview effect determination process (step 132SGS610) for executing a variable display preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display.

Then, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern, game status, and variable display result (step 132SGS611) and starts the process timer (step 132SGS612).

In each process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the lever body 631A and chance button 631B are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Note that, as described below, this characteristic unit 132SG illustrates an example in which the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of time-saving plays in the time-saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either time-saving state B, time-saving state C2, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2, and power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to a power outage or the like during variable display, the display of the remaining number of time-saving plays may not resume during the variable display even if power is restored, but may resume at the start of the next variable display (when the value of the time-saving play counter is updated). Also, even when power supply is stopped while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either time-saving state B, time-saving state C2, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2, but there is no reserved memory and variable display is not being executed (during customer waiting mode), the display of the remaining number of time-saving plays may not resume even if power is restored, but may resume at the start of the next variable display or from the variable display after the value of the time-saving play counter is updated.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (chance button 631B, etc.)) in accordance with the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (132SGS613). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the on/off of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this feature section 132SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display so that decorative patterns are variably displayed according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one with the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may also select a variation pattern to use from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern specification command (132SGS614). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (132SGS615). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display status of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (S172) (132SGS616).

In addition, during the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each set to -1. Then, control of the performance device is executed according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped according to the value of the variable display time timer, and the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value according to the special pattern hit waiting processing (S173).

(Flow of the performance)
Next, the flow of the variable display effects in this feature section 132SG will be explained. First, as shown in FIG. 310, when the game state is normal, the progress of the variable display of the first special symbol starts the reach effect of the super reach effect, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, an operation prompt image prompting the player to operate the chance button 631B is displayed on the image display device 5 as part of the reach effect (X1 to X5). At this time, if the variable display result is a jackpot, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, a movable body effect is executed in which the under-board movable body 32B operates as part of the reach effect, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot (X6 to X10). After that, the image display device 5 displays an information image informing the player that the variable display result has become a jackpot, and then a right hit information is displayed to inform the player that the jackpot game state is a state in which the game balls are shot toward the right game area to make them enter the big prize slot, and a round effect during the round game is displayed (X11 to X13).

If the jackpot game is a jackpot A jackpot game, as shown in Figures 311 and 312, when the jackpot game ends, a jackpot ending effect is displayed, followed by a break-in effect A, indicating that the game has been controlled to time-saving state A. While break-in effect A is being executed, if there is a reserved memory of the first special symbol, the variable display based on this reserved memory of the first special symbol is executed in an extremely short special symbol change time (0.5 seconds). In addition to being controlled to time-saving state A, break-in effect A also executes a right-hit notification (A1-A4) to notify the player that time-saving state A is in a state where the game ball is launched toward the right game area, causing the game ball to enter the second start winning slot and causing the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed.

When the player hits the gaming ball toward the right gaming area in accordance with entry effect A, the gaming ball enters the second start winning slot, and the variable display of the second special symbol begins. At this time, a panel image corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel effect. Then, when the player continues to hit the gaming ball toward the right gaming area and the gaming ball enters the second start winning slot, additional panel images corresponding to each reserved memory of the second special symbol are displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel effect. Note that a maximum of five of these panel images are displayed (A5 to A7) based on the variable display of the second special symbol currently being executed and the maximum number of reserved memories for the second special symbol ("4").

When one variable display of the second special symbol in time-saving state A ends, the game state is controlled from time-saving state A to normal state, and the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory of the second special symbol begins. During this variable display, if the decorative symbols stop in a reach combination, an operation prompt image is displayed on the image display device 5 to encourage the player to operate the chance button 631B (A8-A10).

At this time, if the variable display result is a small win, when the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, a movable body effect is executed in which the under-board movable body 32B operates, and then the decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a combination indicating a small win. After that, an image (an image displaying "Aim for V!") instructing the player to shoot the gaming ball toward the right gaming area to have the gaming ball detected by the second count switch 130SG024 is displayed on the image display device 5 (B1-B3).

When the player hits a game ball toward the right game area during a small win game in accordance with the image and one of the game balls is detected by the second count switch 130SG024, the image display device 5 displays an image informing the player that the second count switch 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small win game, i.e., that a V win has occurred, and then displays an image indicating that the game will be controlled to a big win game (B4-B5).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a miss, and it is announced that the variable display result is a miss. After that, in the variable displays corresponding to the second to fourth reserved memories of the second special design, the image display device 5 notifies the player of the remaining number of variable displays for the second special design, and then an image similar to the first reserved memory of the second special design is displayed (B6-B8).

If all of the variable displays corresponding to the reserved memories of the second special symbol are misses, during the final symbol determination period for the variable display of the second special symbol, the image display device 5 displays an image indicating that all of the variable displays corresponding to the reserved memories of the second special symbol have ended (an image displaying "FINAL BATTLE END..."). Thereafter, while the dedicated stage image is displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed 10 times. Furthermore, while the dedicated stage image is displayed, an image instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area is also displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) (B9-B12).

In either of the time-saving states, when the player hits the game ball into the right game area, the game ball enters the second start winning hole, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. After the big win game via the small win of the second special symbol ends, the game is controlled to time-saving state B or time-saving state C2.
As will be described later, if power is interrupted and restored during the period shown in Figures 311(A1) to 311(A4), the image display device 5 displays the "Restoration In Progress" display until Figure 311(A5), and the movable body performs a 26-second initial operation. Also, if power is interrupted and restored immediately before the end of Figure 311(A4) (within 5 seconds of the end), and the display period of the startup preparation display overlaps with the period shown in Figure 311(A5), the image display device 5 displays the "Restoration In Progress" display from Figure 311(A6) onwards (the timing at which the "Restoration In Progress" display disappears is shown in Figures 312(B3) and (B7)), and the movable body performs a 26-second initial operation. Also, if power is interrupted and restored during Figure 311(A5), the image display device 5 displays the "Restoration In Progress" display until the variable display corresponding to the second panel is started, and the movable body performs a 26-second initial operation (the first time-saving variable time is longer than 26 seconds). Also, if the power is cut off and then restored in Figure 311 (A10) (more than 5 seconds until the end of the fluctuation) (miss pattern), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display up to Figure 311 (B7), and the movable body performs the normal initial operation up to Figure 312 (B6), and the shortened initial operation from Figure 312 (B7) (taking into account the button effects). Also, if the power is cut off and then restored in Figure 311 (A10) (win pattern), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display up to Figure 312 (B3), and the movable body performs the normal initial operation up to Figure 312 (B2), and the shortened initial operation from Figure 312 (B3) (taking into account the "Aim for V"). Note that the light emission mode of the under-board movable body LED 9e when the under-board movable body 32B is operating differs between the initial operation and Figure 312 (B1).

Furthermore, if power is cut off and then restored in Figure 312 (B2) (within 5 seconds until the end of the variable display) and the display period of the start-up preparation display overlaps with the period of Figure 312 (B5), the image display device 5 will make "Aim for V" visible after the display period of the start-up preparation display has elapsed, and the movable body will change the initial operation after the start-up preparation display is hidden to a shortened mode based on the main command (small win start command or small win opening command) received in Figure 312 (B3). Furthermore, the large prize opening will begin to open during the display period of the start-up preparation display. Also, if power is cut off at the start of Figure 312 (B3) (2 seconds remaining until the next round) and then restored, the image display device 5 will display a recovery indicator in a special mode (notifying that a small win has occurred) until it receives an opening command (second round) after a V win (round 1), and the movable body will perform the initial operation in a normal mode (which will be completed by the start of the next round), and the large winning opening will begin to open while the start-up preparation indicator is displayed.

When the game is controlled to time-saving state B after the end of a big win game, that is, when the variable display result is a small win and the small win type is small win A or small win B, as shown in Figure 313, first, the decorative symbols are displayed as a combination indicating a small win as a variable display of the second special chart. After that, an image (an image displaying "Aim for V!") is displayed on the image display device 5 instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area to have the game ball detected by the second count switch 130SG024. When the player hits a game ball toward the right game area during a small win game in accordance with the image and one of the game balls is detected by the second count switch 130SG024, the image display device 5 displays an image informing the player that the second count switch 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small win game, i.e., that a V win has occurred, and then displays an image indicating that the game will be controlled to a big win game (the "FEVER" image) (C1-C4).

Next, when the jackpot game via the small jackpot ends, an ending effect is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game. Then, after the entry effect B is executed, in which a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the number of times already controlled in the time-saving state, the first variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state B begins. Furthermore, during the time-saving state B, a variable display of decorative symbols is executed while a background image of a city at night (second background display) is displayed on the image display device 5 (C5-C8).

If seven variable displays (seven variable displays of the second special symbol) end without the variable display result being either a big win or a small win in time-saving state B, a result effect will begin during the symbol determination period of the seventh variable display. The result effect displays a value corresponding to the number of times the game has been controlled to a big win game state since the initial win or one of the time-saving states, as well as the total number of prize balls acquired. Furthermore, if there is a reserved memory of a second special symbol when the result effect begins, the variable display of the second special symbol will be executed up to four times in an extremely short special symbol change time (0.5 seconds) according to the remaining reserved memory of the second special symbol (remaining reserved memory) (C9-C11).

If none of the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reserved memory result in a big win or a small win, the image display device 5 begins displaying a stage background image, and also displays an image instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds). Thereafter, the stage background image is displayed on the image display device 5 until 10 variable displays are completed (C12-C14).

Furthermore, when the time-saving mode C2 is entered after a jackpot game via a small win ends, i.e., when the time-saving mode C2 is entered after a jackpot game of jackpot E ends, the following actions are performed, as when the time-saving mode B is entered: a stop display of a combination of decorative symbols indicating a small win; the display of an image on the image display device 5 displaying "Aim for V!"; the display of an image announcing the occurrence of a V win during the small win game; the display of an image indicating that the game is entering a jackpot game (the "FEVER" image); the display of an image corresponding to the number of balls won in the jackpot game; a break-in effect B in which a portion of the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes depending on the number of times the game has already been entered into the time-saving mode; and the display of seven variable decorative symbols while the second background display is displayed (C1-C9 in Figure 313).

Here, as shown in Figure 314, when the seventh variable display of the decorative pattern (seven variable displays of the second special pattern) ends without the variable display result being either a big hit or a small hit, a result effect begins during the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display. The result effect displays a value corresponding to the number of times the game has been controlled to a big hit game state since the initial hit or one of the time-saving states, as well as the total number of prize balls acquired. Furthermore, during the execution period of the result effect, three variable displays of the decorative pattern (variable display of the second special pattern) are executed in an extremely short special pattern change time (0.5 seconds). If the variable display result is neither a big hit nor a small hit in the three variable displays of the decorative pattern (eighth to tenth variable displays), another variable display of the decorative pattern (eleventh variable display) is executed (D1 to D3).

If the variable display result in the 11th variable display is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the on-board movable body 32A moves and an illumination effect image corresponding to the movement of the on-board movable body 32A is displayed on the image display device 5. After the on-board movable body 32A falls, when the on-board movable body 32A returns to its standby position before falling (the upper position of the image display device 5), the image displayed on the image display device 5 is dimmed (displayed in black). After the dimming ends, an image indicating that the time-saving state has not yet ended is displayed on the image display device 5 (D4 to D6).

Furthermore, the image display device 5 displays an operation prompt image prompting the player to operate the chance button 631B. When the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, the image display device 5 executes a V-stock effect, informing the player that the number of time-saving control cycles in the time-saving state is 685, i.e., that the variable display result during the time-saving state is essentially a big win or a small win. Thereafter, when the V-stock effect ends with the completion of the eleventh variable display, the image display device 5 starts the twelfth and subsequent variable displays while displaying the second background display (D7-D9). In particular, as shown in Figures 314 (D2) to 314 (D8), in the transition from the result effect during time-saving state C2 to the V-stock effect, unlike the result effect corresponding to time-saving state B, the right-hit notification image in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden to prevent the player from noticing in advance that the time-saving control continues even after the result effect ends. The right-hit notification image in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 will resume from the start of the 12th variable display.

[Display screen of image display device 5]
310 to 314, when the game state is the normal game state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided in the lower center of the display screen of the image display device 5, and a first hold display area 132SG011 corresponding to the first hold memory is provided on the left side thereof. For example, in response to the execution of variable display of the first special pattern, an active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013, and in response to the value of the first hold memory count being 4, four first hold displays 132SG001 are displayed horizontally in the first hold display area 132SG011.

Furthermore, when the game state is in the time-saving state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided in the lower left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5, and above that a second hold display area 132SG012 corresponding to the second hold memory is provided (see FIG. 365). For example, in response to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed, active display 132SG003 is displayed in active display area 132SG013 provided at the left edge of the display area, and in response to the value of the second hold memory count being 4, four second hold displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in second hold display area 132SG012.

In this embodiment, in order to consume winnings in order, if a second hold memory is stored in normal game mode, the second hold display 132SG002 is not displayed in the first hold display area 132SG011, and if a second hold memory is stored in time-saving mode, the first hold display 132SG001 is not displayed in the second hold display area 132SG012. However, for example, it may be possible to display both the first hold display 132SG001 and the second hold display 132SG002 in the first hold display area 132SG011.

In addition, a display area 5SL is provided in the upper left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern (for example, an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small pattern is displayed variably in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The above-mentioned first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, reserved display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, remaining time reduction display 132SG201, right-hit prompt display 132SG430, etc. may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) the effect images such as characters to prevent overlapping of the effect images and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, and error display, while the decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer than) the effect images to prevent overlapping of the decorative symbols and reducing the visibility of the effect images.

The small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is being variably displayed, and is variably displayed by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. The variably displayed fourth symbol can be used to perform effects such as a momentary disappearance of the effect content, including the variable display of the decorative symbol, from the screen, or an effect in which the above-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B obscure all or part of the screen of the image display device 5, making it possible to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is currently being variably displayed, even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative symbol. Upon receiving the first variable display start command, the effect control CPU operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Furthermore, upon receiving the second variable display start command, the effect control CPU operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

In addition, the pattern displayed on a fourth pattern display device provided in a location other than the image display device 5 (such as the special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED or second special symbol LED, is also referred to as the fourth symbol.

[Various movable bodies]
Next, each movable body will be explained based on Figures 315 to 317. Figure 315 is a diagram showing (A) a state in which the on-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which it is located at the effect position. Figure 316 is a diagram showing (A) a state in which the under-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which it is located at the effect position. Figure 317 is a diagram showing (A) a state in which the on-frame movable body and chance button are located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which they are located at the effect position.

As shown in Figures 315 and 316, an above-board movable body 32A and an below-board movable body 32B are provided on the front side of the gaming board 2. These above-board movable body 32A and below-board movable body 32B are also referred to as "board-side movable bodies" because they are provided on the gaming board 2. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 317, an above-frame movable body 132SG101 and a chance button 631B are provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a. These above-frame movable body 132SG101 and chance button 631B are also referred to as "frame-side movable bodies" because they are provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a. The board-side movable body is a movable body that is provided so that it cannot be touched by the player when the opening and closing door frame 3a is in the closed state, and the frame-side movable body is a movable body that is provided so that it can be touched by the player when the opening and closing door frame 3a is in the closed state.

As shown in Figure 315, the on-board movable body 32A is formed in a roughly trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and has a performance section 32a with the letters "XXX" displayed on the front, and support sections 32b that support the performance section 32a from the left and right sides. It is movable up and down by a drive mechanism (not shown) that includes a drive motor 132SG122 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG122 to the on-board movable body 32A. In more detail, the on-board movable body 32A is movable between an origin position at the top front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 315(A), and a performance position approximately in the center front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 315(B); at the origin position, a portion (the lower part) overlaps the display area, and at the performance position, the entire area overlaps the display area.

The on-board movable body 32A is detected at the origin position by an origin position sensor 132SG123, and at the performance position by a performance position sensor 132SG124. Multiple on-board movable body LEDs 9d are also provided inside, and these on-board movable body LEDs 9d can emit light from the front.

As shown in Figure 316, the under-board movable body 32B is shaped roughly like a fist when viewed from the front, and has a performance section 32c with decoration displayed on the front, and a support section 32d that supports the performance section 32c from below. It is movable up and down by a drive mechanism (not shown) that includes a drive motor 132SG132 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG132 to the under-board movable body 32B. In more detail, the under-board movable body 32B is movable between an origin position at the lower front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 316(A), and a performance position at approximately the center front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 316(B); at the origin position, a portion (upper portion) overlaps the display area, and at the performance position, the entire area overlaps the display area.

The under-board movable body 32B is detected at the origin position by an origin position sensor 132SG133, and at the performance position by a performance position sensor 132SG134. Multiple under-board movable body LEDs 9e are also provided inside, and these under-board movable body LEDs 9e can emit light from the front.

As shown in Figure 317, the first effect unit 132SG100 has a plate-shaped base member 132SG105 that protrudes upward and forward from the upper edge of the opening and closing door frame 3a, and a frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 that is movable up and down on the front side of the base member 132SG105. The frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 is shaped to resemble a character (not shown) displayed in various effects on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and frame-mounted decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R that are shaped to resemble the character's wings are movably mounted on the back side.

The first performance unit 132SG100 includes a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG102 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG102 to the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101, an origin position sensor 132SG103 for detecting that the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 is located at the origin position, a performance position sensor 132SG104 for detecting that the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 is located at the performance position, and a drive motor 132SG112 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG112 to the frame-mounted decorative part 132SG It has a drive mechanism (not shown) including a power transmission member that transmits power to the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R, an origin position sensor 132SG113 for detecting that the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R are located at the origin position, a performance position sensor 132SG134 for detecting that the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R are located at the performance position, and a frame-top movable body LED 9f for illuminating the front of the frame-top movable body 132SG101 and the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R.

In this way, the frame-top movable body 132SG101 is capable of moving vertically between the origin position shown in Figure 317(A) and the performance position shown in Figure 317(B) at the upper front (above the glass window) of the opening and closing door frame 3a. Furthermore, the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R are capable of changing between a non-deployed state in which they are stored in the origin position on the left and right sides of the back of the frame-top movable body 132SG101 and a deployed state in which they protrude to spread out to the performance positions on the upper left and right sides of the back. They change from the non-deployed state to the deployed state in response to the upward movement of the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and change from the deployed state to the non-deployed state in response to the downward movement of the frame-top movable body 132SG101.

Also, as shown in Figure 317, the chance button 631B consists of a cylindrical member with an operation surface formed on the top, and is arranged so that it can move up and down relative to the base part 600A formed on the top of the operation unit 600. In detail, the chance button 631B is movable up and down between an origin position (see Figure 317 (A)) where the operation surface protrudes slightly upward from the base part 600A, and an operation detection position where the operation surface is lower than the origin position, and is biased upward so that it is always held in the origin position; when the player presses it, it moves from the origin position to the operation detection position, and the pressing operation is detected by the button sensor 635B.

The chance button 631B can be moved up and down between an origin position (see FIG. 317(A)) and an effect position where the operation surface is higher than the origin position, by a drive mechanism (not shown) including an advance/retract motor 635F and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the advance/retract motor 635F to the chance button 631B. In other words, the chance button 631B can be changed by the advance/retract motor 635F between a first operable state in which it is located at the origin position and a second operable state in which it is located at the effect position, and can be pressed up to the operation detection position in either the first operable state or the second operable state.

The chance button 631B is detected by the origin position sensor 635C at the origin position, by the button sensor 635B at the operation detection position, and by the protrusion position sensor 635D at the performance position. Multiple chance button LEDs 9g are also provided inside, and these chance button LEDs 9g allow the operation surface to emit light.

In this embodiment, the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2 is exemplified by the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B, and the frame-side movable body provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a is exemplified by the chance button 631B and the above-frame movable body 132SG101. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the board-side movable body and frame-side movable body are not limited to those described above, and the number, position, shape, and operating mode of each can be changed in various ways.

[Various performances]
Next, various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to Fig. 318 to Fig. 319. Fig. 318 is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU. Fig. 319 (A) is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during the variable display period of SP reach, and (B) is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed in the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 318, the effect control CPU 120 can execute multiple effects. In more detail, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "pre-reading movable object prediction" that suggests the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display (also called target fluctuation) that is the subject of the pre-reading prediction before the variable display begins.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute "start-time announcement," "pseudo consecutive announcement," "moving object announcement," "reach announcement," and "button announcement" as advance announcement effects that indicate that the variable display will be controlled to a jackpot.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a "win/lose button presentation" as a deciding presentation that notifies players whether or not they will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state in a variable display based on a super reach jackpot variation pattern (for example, SP reach A to E, etc.).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the following jackpot effects during jackpot gaming: "fanfare effect," "round effect," "promotion effect," and "ending effect."

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute "time-saving effects" and "result effects" as time-saving effects that can be executed in the special states of time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "customer waiting demo effect" as a standby effect that can be executed in a standby state where no game is being played.

As shown in Figure 319 (A), the "Start Notice," "Moving Object Notice/Pseudo-Continuous Notice," and "Reach Notice/Button Notice" are effects that can be executed, for example, before the variable display mode becomes the N Reach mode and the N Reach effect is executed, or before the variable display mode becomes the SP Reach mode and the SP Reach effect is executed. In addition, the "Win/Loss Button Effect" is an effect that can be executed in the latter half of the SP Reach effect.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 319 (B), the "fanfare effect" is executed during the fanfare period from when control of the jackpot game state begins until the start of round play, when the large prize opening is opened; the "round effect" is executed during the period when control of the large prize opening is being executed during round play, where the large prize opening alternates between open and closed states; the "interval effect" is executed during the period when control of the large prize opening is being executed during round play; and the "ending effect" is executed during the ending period from when round play ends until the jackpot game state ends. These fanfare period, round play period, and ending period are managed by the CPU 103. Note that in the first round of jackpots C, D, and E, the large prize opening is opened in a small prize opening pattern (repeatedly opening and closing for a short period of time).

In addition, the "promotion effect" is executed during the special round interval period from the end of the third round opening period of the large prize slot for jackpots C, D, and E until the start of the fourth round opening period.

(Predictive moving object announcement)
As shown in Figure 318, the "pre-reading movable body announcement" is an effect in which the movable body 32A on the board operates in multiple variable displays corresponding to reserved memories that were not the subject of the pre-reading announcement effect, which are executed before the variable display (hereinafter referred to as target change) of the reserved memory that was the subject of the pre-reading announcement effect is executed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 320 (A1), if a start win occurs when the number of reserved memories for the first special pattern is "2" and the variable display is being executed, and a decision is made to execute a pre-read movable body announcement because the variable display based on the reserved memory prior to the start win is a non-reach miss (i.e., the special pattern change time is 12 seconds or less), then after the variable display is stopped (see Figure 320 (A2)), when the reserved memory is consumed and the variable display starts, the on-board movable body 32A will vibrate up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and effect display 132SG401 emphasizing the on-board movable body 32A will be displayed and sound effects will be output (see Figure 320 (A3)), and it will then return to the origin position before the variable display is stopped (see Figure 320 (A4)). This action is performed when the variable display that is executed before the start of the variable display (target change) based on the reserved memory that is the subject of the preview preview performance starts, and when the variable display (target change) based on the reserved memory that is the subject of the preview preview performance starts (see Figure 320 (A5) to (A7)).

In this embodiment, the pre-reading movable object announcement is shown as an example of a presentation pattern in which it continues across multiple variable displays until the target movement begins, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may also be possible to implement a presentation pattern with a low expectation level in which the pre-reading movable object announcement ends before the target movement begins. It may also be possible to implement multiple presentation patterns with different jackpot expectations depending on the movement speed of the on-board movable object 32A as it descends to the intermediate position and the display color of the effect display 132SG401.

(Notice at the start)
As shown in FIG. 318, the "start notice" is an effect that indicates whether the display color of the active display 132SG003 will change when the variable display starts. The display color of the active display 132SG003 is white as the base color and can change to blue, green, and red, and the display color at the end of the start notice indicates the likelihood of a jackpot. In this embodiment, an effect pattern that ends in white, an effect pattern that ends in blue, an effect pattern that ends in green, and an effect pattern that ends in red are executable, with the effect patterns having the highest likelihood of a jackpot being white, blue, green, and red, in that order.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 321 (B1), when it is decided to execute a start notice upon the start of variable display, the entire display area is turned off or becomes dark with low brightness, and the character display 132SG402 "!!" is displayed approximately in the middle of the display area (see Figure 321 (B2)). Next, the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are displayed in white and become brighter (see Figure 321 (B3)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in white, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings does not change or enlarge, and when a predetermined time has passed since the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are displayed in white in Figure 321 (B3), a "?" character display 132SG403 is displayed above the active display 132SG003, indicating that the final display color will be white (see Figure 321 (B3a)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in blue, the display color of active display 132SG003 and its surroundings changes from white to blue and is enlarged (see Figure 321 (B4)). When a predetermined time has passed since active display 132SG003 and its surroundings were displayed in white in Figure 321 (B3), active display 132SG003 breaks and the character display 132SG404 "!?" is displayed, indicating that the final display color will be blue (see Figure 321 (B4a)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in green, the display color of active display 132SG003 and its surroundings gradually changes from white to blue to green and is enlarged (see Figures 321 (B4) (B5)). After a predetermined time has passed since active display 132SG003 and its surroundings were displayed in white in Figure 321 (B3), active display 132SG003 breaks and the word "heat" 132SG405 is displayed, indicating that the final display color will be green (see Figure 321 (B5a)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in red, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surrounding area gradually changes from white to blue, green, and red in order, and is enlarged (see Figures 321 (B4) to (B6)). After a predetermined time has passed since the active display 132SG003 was displayed in white in Figure 321 (B3), the word "Super Hot" 132SG406 is displayed above the active display 132SG003, indicating that the final display color will be red (see Figure 321 (B6a)).

In this way, the "start notice" includes an introductory part (see Figure 321 (B2) to (B6)) that is a period during which the hold display will change or not, and a result notification part (see Figure 321 (B3a), (B4a), (B5a), (B6a)) that is a period during which the result of the hold display change is notified.

In this embodiment, the example shows how the likelihood of a jackpot is suggested by changing the display mode, such as the display color and size, of the active display 132SG003. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the likelihood of a jackpot may be suggested by changing display modes other than the display color and size. Furthermore, the likelihood of a jackpot may be suggested by changing the display mode of not only the active display 132SG003, but also the first hold display 132SG001 and the second hold display 132SG002. Furthermore, the change patterns for the display color and size are not limited to those described above, and other change patterns may be possible.

(Movable object preview)
As shown in Fig. 318, the "movable object preview" is a presentation in which the on-board movable object 32A vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the chance button 631B vibrates, before the pseudo consecutive presentation described later is executed in the variable display. The presentation patterns of the movable object preview include a "vibration (small) pattern" in which the amplitude of the vertical vibration is small, and a "vibration (large) pattern" in which the amplitude of the vertical vibration is larger than the vibration (small) and the likelihood of a jackpot is high, and either the "vibration (small) pattern" or the "vibration (large) pattern" is determined depending on the result of the variable display.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 322 (C1), when it is decided to execute a movable object preview upon the start of the variable display, at a predetermined timing before the pseudo consecutive performance begins, the on-board movable object 32A vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the chance button 631B vibrates (see Figure 322 (C2)). In addition, an effect display 132SG407 emphasizing the on-board movable object 32A is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and performance sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, an example has been given of a form in which a moving object announcement is made in a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive performance is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a moving object announcement may also be made in a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive performance is not performed (for example, a non-reach variable pattern).

In addition, it is possible to operate the vibration motor 635E (Pattern A) before the start of operation of the chance button 631B during the initial operation described below, or in conjunction with the advancement operation. Furthermore, as a performance during movement, the vibration motor 635E can be operated (Pattern B) to indicate the degree of expectation, or it can be operated (Pattern C) as decoration (entertainment) when a jackpot is hit or when the moving body is moving. Each of these Patterns A, B, and C has a different vibration pattern (strength of movement, rhythm of movement, and movement time), as well as a different lamp pattern (Pattern A: initial emphasis; Pattern B: rapid white flashing, rapid red flashing; Pattern C: rainbow colors, lighting in a color corresponding to the effect displayed when the moving body is moving) and sound output pattern (Pattern A: initialization notification or silence; Pattern B: background music during movement; Pattern C: celebratory sound upon jackpot, moving body performance sound).

As will be described later, the initial highlighting mode is a lighting pattern (brightness, lighting time, etc.) that is dedicated to initial actions, and is therefore not used in any performance action control (see Figure 329 (B)).

(Pseudo consecutive announcement)
As shown in Fig. 318, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" is an effect that suggests whether or not the variable display will resume after temporarily stopping the decorative symbols during the variable display of the decorative symbols, that is, whether or not one variable display will appear to be multiple variable displays. The pseudo consecutive effects include a double pattern in which the variable display resumes twice, and a triple pattern in which the variable display resumes three times, which has a higher probability of winning than the double pattern, and either the double pattern or the triple pattern is determined depending on the variable display result.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 322 (C1), when a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed is initiated, if it is decided to execute a moving object prediction, the moving object prediction is executed (see Figure 322 (C2)). After that, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 322 (C3)), and then a decorative pattern with a number one larger than the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 322 (C4)), and then a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is decelerated and displayed just before the stop display position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see Figure 322 (C5)).

After that, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily displayed at the stopped display position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see Figure 322 (C6)), and then the variable display of decorative patterns is resumed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 322 (C7)). On the other hand, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is not executed, a decorative pattern with a number one larger than the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily displayed at the stopped display position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and a variable display result of a miss is displayed (see Figure 322 (C10)).

Also, in Figure 322 (C7), after the variable display of decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a pseudo-consecutive announcement of a double pattern, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol that was variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 322 (C8)), and a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see Figure 322 (C9)), and the presentation develops into an SP reach mode. Also, in Figure 322 (C7), after the variable display of decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a pseudo-consecutive announcement of a triple pattern, the sequence of Figures 322 (C3) to (C7) is repeated, and then the presentation develops into a reach mode in Figures 322 (C8) and (C9), and the presentation develops into an SP reach mode.

In this way, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" includes an introductory part (see Figure 322 (C3) to (B5)) that serves as a period to tease whether or not the variable display will resume, and a result notification part (see Figure 322 (C6), (C10), (C9)) that serves as a period to notify the result of whether or not the variable display has resumed.

(Reach notice)
As shown in Figure 318, the "Reach Notice" is a presentation that indicates whether or not a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L will be displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative pattern display area 5R after the variable display of the decorative pattern has begun and then the decorative pattern that was displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L has been displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, i.e., whether or not a reach state will occur.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 323 (D1), after the variable display is started, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed stationary (see Figure 323 (D2)), and then a decelerated display of a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed stationary in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is started just before the stationary display position in the variably displayed right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 323 (D3)). Then, if a player's operation is detected within a specified valid operation period after the deceleration display has begun, or if the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected and the game does not enter a reach mode, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L will pass the stopped display position and the next decorative pattern will be displayed in a stopped state (see Figures 323 (D4), (D5), (D7)), and if a reach mode is entered, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L will be displayed in a stopped state at the stopped display position (see Figures 323 (D4), (D5), (D6)).

Note that a reach mode is a mode (also known as a reach effect) in which, from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols (identification information) until the display result is derived and displayed, all decorative symbols (e.g., the left and right symbols) excluding one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) from the combination of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., "333") that make up the jackpot display result are displayed statically, and then the one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) is displayed variably.

(Button preview)
As shown in Figure 318, when the above-mentioned reach prediction is executed, the "button prediction" is executed from the time when the deceleration display of the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L begins in the right decorative pattern display area 5R until the specified operation valid period has elapsed, and is an effect that promotes button operation to determine whether or not the reach state will occur.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figures 323 (D4) to (D5), this is an operation prompt effect that encourages operation of the chance button 631B from the start of the deceleration display of the decorative pattern until the lapse of a specified valid operation period. It begins with the display of an operation prompt display and a button image that resembles the chance button 631B, and ends when operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has lapsed without any operation being detected, and the operation prompt display and button image are no longer displayed.

The button preview presentation patterns (operation prompting modes) include a "long press pattern" that prompts the player to press and hold the chance button 631B for a specified operation period, a "rapid press pattern" that prompts the player to repeatedly press the chance button 631B for a specified operation period, and a "single hit pattern" that prompts the player to press the chance button 631B once. Depending on the variable display result, either non-execution, "long press pattern," "rapid press pattern," or "single hit pattern" is determined. Note that the presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and four or more types may be set, or two or less types may be set. The operation prompting display is "Long press!" for the "long press pattern," "rapid press!" for the "rapid press pattern," and "Press!" for the "single hit pattern."

In this way, the "button announcement" includes an operation promotion part (see Figure 323 (D5)) that serves as a period for promoting the operation of the chance button 631B, and a result notification part (see Figures 323 (D6) and (D7)) that serves as a period for notifying the result of whether or not the operation has resulted in a reach state.

(Win/lose button effect)
As shown in Figure 318, the "Win/Loss Button Presentation" is a presentation that prompts the user to operate a button at the end of the SP Reach presentation in the variable display of the Super Reach fluctuation pattern to determine whether the variable display result will be a jackpot or not, and also notifies the user of the result of whether or not it will be a jackpot.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 324 (E1), a reach title, which is a type of SP reach presentation, is announced in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern, and after the SP reach presentation (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) has begun (see Figures 324 (E2) and (E3)), the presentation begins by displaying an operation prompt display 132SG411 consisting of the words "PRESS!!" to prompt the operation of the chance button 631B, and a button display 132SG412 imitating the chance button 631B, from the time the battle is concluded until a predetermined valid operation period has elapsed (see Figure 324 (E4)).

Then, when operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, the operation prompt display 132SG411 and button display 132SG412 are hidden and the game ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body LED 9e lights up in a predetermined light color, the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the effect position, the effect display 132SG413 highlighting the under-board movable body 32B is displayed, and a predetermined effect sound is output, indicating that the game has been controlled to a jackpot game state (see Figure 324 (E5)). After that, an image (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, and then the jackpot confirmation symbol combination is displayed to indicate that a jackpot has occurred (see Figures 324 (E6) to (E9)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the under-board movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the presentation position, and after a display 132SG414 is displayed indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character, it is announced that the variable display result is a miss (see Figure 324 (E10) to (E12)).

Note that possible presentation patterns include one in which the chance button 631B remains in the origin position and an operation prompt is displayed, and one in which the chance button 631B moves from the origin position to a presentation position and an operation prompt is displayed, resulting in a higher chance of winning than when the chance button 631B is in the origin position. Furthermore, the presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

In this way, the "win/lose button effect" includes an operation promotion part (see Figure 324 (E4)) which is a period during which the operation of the chance button 631B is promoted, and a result notification part (see Figures 324 (E5), (E10)) which is a period during which the under-board movable body 32B notifies the user of whether the variable display result is a jackpot or not.

(Fanfare performance)
As shown in Fig. 318, the "fanfare effect" is an effect that notifies information about the controlled jackpot during the period from when the jackpot game state is controlled to when the round game starts. Note that the information about the jackpot is, for example, information about the type of jackpot, the number of rounds, the number of balls dispensed, the game state after the jackpot ends (time-saving states A, B, C1, C2), etc., and may also include other information.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 325 (F1), after a combination of jackpot confirmation symbols is displayed in a static manner and the variable display result indicates a jackpot, the jackpot gaming state begins, and display 132SG420 indicating that a jackpot has started is displayed (see Figure 325 (F2)). Furthermore, when the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as shown in Figures 327 (A1) and (A2), the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 rises from the origin position to the presentation position, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it is maintained in the presentation position until the time-saving state ends.

Next, information indicating the jackpot type (jackpots A to E) is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 10-round jackpot, the jackpot type display 132SG421 that makes up "BIG BONUS!!" frames in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 a predetermined number of times (for example, one character) and moves to the center of the display screen (see Figure 325 (F3) to (F6)). Also, in the case of a 3-round jackpot, the character images that make up "SMALL BONUS!!" frames in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 a predetermined number of times (for example, one character) and moves to the center of the display screen (not shown).

Next, the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the presentation position and displays a right-hit prompt display 132SG431 that encourages the player to shoot the game ball into the right game area (see Figure 325 (F7)), after which the on-board movable body 32A returns to the origin position and displays a right-hit prompt display 132SG432 that indicates that the player should aim for the big prize slot (see Figure 325 (F8)).

In this way, the "fanfare effect" includes an introductory part that serves as a period during which information regarding a jackpot is announced (see Figure 325 (F2) to (F6)), and an operation direction announcement part that announces the operation direction of the ball-hitting control handle, i.e., an operation to hit to the right (see Figure 325 (F7) and (F8)).

(Round performance)
As shown in Figure 318, the "round effect" is an effect in which winning information during a round is announced after the game is controlled to a jackpot game state and the fanfare period ends, and the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened during the round play.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 325 (F9) to (F11), during round play, the following are displayed: a character display 132SG450; a round number display 132SG451 indicating the number of rounds; a winning ball count display 132SG452 indicating the number of winning balls in that round; a ball count display 132SG453 indicating the number of balls paid out since the start of the jackpot game state to the present; a consecutive jackpot count/total ball count display 132SG454 indicating the number of consecutive jackpots and the total number of balls paid out during the jackpot streak; and a right-hit prompt display 132SG430 which prompts the player to perform a right-hit operation.

Furthermore, if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving mode, the "Aim for V!!" effect shown in Figure 313 (C2) will be executed during the operation direction notification part of Figure 325 (F8). The "Aim for V!!" effect will also continue during the round effect period of Figure 325 (F9).

The images displayed in the round presentation may also be moving images, and each round may include a picture-story presentation to explain the characters, explain the "FINAL BATTLE," or present a story. For example, if an explanation presentation for character A is being shown in the first round, an explanation presentation for character B will be shown in the second round. However, if power is lost during the first round and then restored, a "restoration" message will be displayed until the end of the first round, and then, when the second round begins, the explanation presentation for character A that was shown in the first round will be shown again. In the event of a power outage, the presentation control CPU 120 will not remember what was displayed before the power outage, so by displaying it from the beginning in the second round, consideration can be given to players who want to see character A's explanation presentation to the end.

In addition, a promotional video corresponding to the selected song may be displayed during the round performance. For example, if a promotional video corresponding to selected song A (up to the chorus) was displayed during the first round, and there was no change in the song, the promotional video corresponding to selected song A (chorus portion) would continue during the second round. However, if power is interrupted during the first round and power is restored, a message indicating that the power is being restored (and there is no sound) will be displayed until the end of the first round. After that, when the second round begins, the promotional video corresponding to selected song A (the verse) will be displayed again. Also, if selected song A is changed to selected song B during the first round, a promotional video corresponding to selected song B will be displayed during the first round, and then promotional video corresponding to selected song B will continue during the second round. However, if power is interrupted during the first round and power is restored, a message indicating that the power is being restored (and there is no sound) will be displayed until the end of the first round. After that, when the second round begins, the promotional video corresponding to selected song A will be displayed. If the power is interrupted, the presentation control CPU 120 will not remember what was displayed before the power interruption, so in the second round, a PV presentation based on the default selected song A will be displayed (for example, if the ball output display shows "150" during one round of play and the power is restored after a power interruption, the ball output display displayed during the next round of play will show "0").

(Promotion performance)
As shown in Figure 318, the "promotion effect" is a round promotion effect that notifies whether or not the round play will continue (round promotion) (whether or not the jackpot will be promoted to jackpot D or E (10 rounds), which has a larger number of rounds than jackpot C (3 rounds)) during the round interval in the third round play of jackpot C to E, in other words, when the variable display result of the second special pattern becomes a jackpot display result.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 326 (F21), the background image is switched to the fourth background display 132SG350, and the character display 132SG352 and the planned ball number counter display 132SG351, which indicates the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state, are displayed, and the promotion effect begins.

Next, an image of an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and an additional ball count display 132SG353 (e.g., "+50") is displayed in response to the attack, and the displayed planned number of balls is added to the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 132SG351 (see FIG. 326 (F22)). Then, when the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 132SG351 reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "300"), a button display 132SG354 imitating the chance button 631B, an operation prompt display 132SG355 such as "Press!!", and a gauge display 132SG356 showing the remaining valid operation period are displayed, and an operation prompt effect is executed to encourage a single press of the chance button 631B (see FIG. 326 (F23)).

Next, if the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E, when a press of the chance button 631B is detected before the specified valid operation period has elapsed, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without a press being detected, the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 326 (F24)), the ally character attacks, the counter value of the planned ball output counter display 132SG351 is displayed variably (see FIG. 326 (F24)), and the enemy character is displayed faded out (see FIG. 332 (F25)). Then, the planned ball output counter display 132SG351 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a specified counter value (for example, "1500," the planned number of balls that can be obtained in the case of a "10R jackpot") is displayed as a static value, and it is announced that the jackpot has been upgraded to a 10-round jackpot (see FIG. 326 (F26)).

Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot C, when a press of the chance button 631B is detected before the specified valid operation period has elapsed, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without a press being detected, an image (not shown) is displayed in which the under-board movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position and the enemy character has not been defeated, indicating that it was not a 10-round jackpot, i.e., that promotion to a 10-round jackpot has failed (see Figure 326 (F27)).

In this way, the "promotion effect" includes an introductory part that hypes up whether or not the player will be promoted (see Figure 326 (F21) to (F23)), and a result notification part that notifies the player of whether or not they have been promoted (see Figure 326 (F24) to (F27)).

(Ending performance)
As shown in Figure 318, the "ending presentation" is a presentation in which the end of the jackpot is announced and information about the game state that will be controlled after the jackpot ends.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figures 325 (F12) to (F14), if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot C, when the third round of play ends, a notification is displayed that the "FINAL BATTLE presentation" will begin after the jackpot ends (time-saving state A will be entered), and a right-hit prompting display 132SG430 is displayed, instructing the player to shoot the game ball into the right play area and aim for the variable winning ball device 6B.

Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot B, when the third round of play ends, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state C1 will be entered) (see Figures 325 (F32) and (F34)).Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot C, when the promotion effect (promotion failure) ends, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state B will be entered) (see Figures 326 (F32) and (F34)).Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E, when the ninth round of play ends, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state B or time-saving state C1 will be entered) (see Figures 326 (F32) and (F34)).

In this way, the "ending performance" includes an introductory part as an introductory period (see Figures 325 (F12) and 326 (F31)), a time-saving state notification part in which information regarding the time-saving state is announced (see Figures 325 (F13), 326 (F32), and (F34)), and an operation direction notification part in which the operation direction of the ball-hitting operation handle, i.e., an operation to hit to the right, is announced (see Figure 325 (F14)).

(Performance during time-saving)
As shown in FIG. 318, the "time-saving effect" is an effect that notifies that the "FINAL BATTLE effect" or the "BATTLE RUSH effect" is being executed, that is, that the game is being controlled to a time-saving state (see FIGS. 311 and 313).

(Results presentation)
As shown in Fig. 318, the "result effect" is an effect that notifies the player that the "FINAL BATTLE effect" or the "BATTLE RUSH effect" has ended, that is, that the control of the time-saving state has ended (see Figs. 312 and 313). Also, when the game state is controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state, as shown in Figs. 327 (B1) and (B2), the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 descends from the effect position to the origin position and is maintained at the origin position.

(Customer waiting demonstration)
As shown in Figure 318, the "customer waiting demo effect" is an effect that notifies the user that the device is in a customer waiting (waiting to play) state, and is an effect that starts when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 was received without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 328 (G1), when the power is turned on, the initial operation is initiated in the initial operation control process, and when the initial operation is completed (see FIG. 328 (G2)), the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 328 (G3)). Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on in FIG. 328 (G1) without any variable display, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 is no longer displayed, and a customer waiting demo performance begins (see FIG. 328 (G4)).

In the customer waiting demo performance, after displaying moving images sequentially introducing the multiple ally characters A-D (enemy character images may be included) appearing in various performances and the content itself (see Figure 328 (G4)-(G7)), an image of allied characters A-D gathered together remains displayed (see Figure 328 (G8)), while the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position, and after a predetermined time has passed, it rises back to the origin position (see Figure 328 (G9)-(G10)). The first background display 132SG310, which shows a daytime city corresponding to the normal state as the background image, is displayed as the final image (see Figure 328 (G11)). When the customer waiting demo performance ends, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed (see Figure 328 (G12)).

If a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting demo performance ended without any variable display being performed, the customer waiting demo performance will start again. Even after that, the customer waiting demo performance will be performed periodically as long as the standby state continues. The customer waiting demo performance may be performed multiple times repeatedly while in standby state, or may not be performed after being performed a predetermined number of times.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example has been given of a form in which the various effects shown in Figure 318 can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and effects other than those described above may be executed. Furthermore, the execution mode of each effect can be changed in various ways, and the effect may be executed in a mode other than those described above.

[Initial operation control]
Next, the operation of the movable body, the lamp, and the sound will be described with reference to Fig. 329. Fig. 329 (A) is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing the lamp and sound modes according to the operation of the movable body.

As shown in Figure 329 (A), the performance control CPU 120 is capable of performing initial operation control, which causes the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) to perform their initial operation (initial operation) when the power is turned on (during cold start processing or hot start processing), and performance operation control, which causes the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) to operate in a manner appropriate to the performance during various performances.

"Initial operation control" includes "origin placement control (short initial operation control)," which includes non-detection operation control that returns the movable body to the origin position when it is located other than the origin position, and non-detection operation control that temporarily moves the movable body away from the origin position when it is located at the origin position and then returns it to the origin position from that position away from the origin position; and "operation confirmation control (long initial operation control)," which is a confirmation operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally, in which the movable body is moved from the origin position to the performance position and then moved from the performance position to the origin position.

In more detail, if the movable body is not detected by the origin position sensor when executing the initial operation process, that is, if the movable body is in a position other than the origin position (for example, a specified position between the origin position and the performance position) for some reason (for example, if the movable body has moved from the origin position during transportation or installation on the play area, if it was unable to return to the origin position during the previous operation (for example, if an operation error (abnormal operation) occurs during performance execution, such as the movable body being unable to return to the origin or becoming unable to operate due to a motor out-of-step, malfunction, or jamming), or if it has moved from the origin position due to vibration of the gaming machine), the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control to return the movable body to the origin position. When this non-detection operation control is executed, the movable body is located away from the origin position, so the only operation is to move the movable body toward the origin position.

In addition, if the movable body is detected by the origin position sensor when the initial operation process is executed, the performance control CPU 120 executes detection operation control. For example, in cases where a predetermined range of movement (e.g., play) is set between the time the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor and the time the movement of the movable body toward the origin position is restricted so that the movable body can be reliably detected by the origin detection sensor, the movable body may return to the origin and stop at a position further back than the position detected by the origin position sensor. Therefore, even if the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor, detection operation control is executed to return the movable body to a more accurate origin position.

This detection operation control requires the movable body to be moved away from the origin position to temporarily cancel the detection state by the origin position sensor, and then returned to the origin position. However, since it is not necessary to move it to the performance position, the movable body is moved from the origin position to a detection operation position near the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. In other words, it is moved back and forth over a distance shorter than the long initial operation.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control in the initial operation process, and then executes operation confirmation control processing. The operation confirmation control processing is an operation control to confirm that the movable bodies are operating normally, and therefore it is an operation control to move each movable body from its respective origin position to the performance position farthest from the origin position, and then return it to the origin position. In other words, the movement to the performance position is the maximum advance operation. Furthermore, the operation confirmation control processing for the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B is the same as the performance operation controls 3 and 4 described below, but the operation confirmation control processing for each movable body does not necessarily have to be the same as either of the performance operation controls.

"Performance operation control" is the operation control of movable bodies in various performances, and includes multiple types of operation control with different types of target movable bodies and different operation modes. In more detail, 1. "Prediction" is operation control that vibrates the on-board movable body 32A up and down between the origin position and the intermediate position before the target change begins, such as in the pre-read movable body announcement. 2. "Applicable" is operation control that vibrates the on-board movable body 32A up and down between the origin position and the intermediate position in the applicable change, such as in the movable body announcement, and vibrates the chance button 631B with the vibration motor 635E. 3. "Jackpot notification, round promotion, V promotion" is operation control that moves the under-board movable body 32B from the origin position to the performance position in the case of jackpot notification, round promotion, V promotion, etc., and then returns it to the origin position. 4. "Fanfare right hit, customer waiting demo effect" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the effect position during fanfare right hit, customer waiting demo effect, etc., and then returns it to the origin position. 5. "Jackpot game state transition" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the effect position when the game state transitions from the normal game state to the jackpot game state. 6. "Normal game state transition" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the effect position to the origin position when the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal game state. 7. "Operation promotion" is an operation control that moves the chance button 631B from the origin position to the effect position during the win/lose button effect.

In this embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control as short initial operation control, it controls the movable body so that it always operates at a single (constant) operation speed based on the minimum control speed (low speed) set in the operation confirmation control. Note that these minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the operation confirmation control corresponding to the movable body, and are not common operation speeds when there are multiple movable bodies, so the minimum speed for each movable body may be different.

Specifically, the first movable body and the other second movable body differ in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, and drive mechanism including the drive motor, so even if the same control speed is set, the actual operating speed of the movable body will differ. Furthermore, even if different control speeds are set for each movable body, the actual operating speed of the movable body will also differ. In this way, the minimum speed is an operating speed based on the control speed set for each movable body, and the movable body is controlled to operate at the minimum speed optimal for it, making it possible to reliably detect multiple movable bodies with different modes at the origin position.

In addition, the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the operation confirmation control is the same as the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the performance operation control (for example, the operation control when performing a movable body performance in which a movable body is operated in various performances such as the pre-reading performance, preview performance, deciding performance, and jackpot performance shown in Figure 318), so the maximum speed in the operation confirmation control is the same as the maximum speed in the performance operation control.However, as long as it is possible to check whether the movable body is operating normally, the maximum speed in the operation confirmation control and the maximum speed in the performance operation control do not necessarily have to be the same speed.

(Operation confirmation control (long initial operation control))
Next, an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control executed by the performance control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 330. Fig. 330 (A) to (J) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing.

As shown in Figure 330 (A), when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 begins (when the power is turned on), if the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (cold start process) of step S6 in the game control main process, the presentation control CPU 120 first displays a predetermined startup preparation display 132SG500 on the display screen of the image display device 5.

Then, upon receiving a power-on command from the main board 11 after a predetermined time (e.g., 3000 ms) has elapsed since the power was turned on, an initialization notification is initiated indicating that a cold start process has been performed. Also, upon a predetermined time (e.g., 3000 ms) having elapsed since the initialization notification was initiated, initial operation control of the movable bodies (upper-board movable body 32A, lower-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, upper-frame movable body 132SG101) is initiated (see Figure 330 (B)). During the initialization notification, as will be described later, the various lamps (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper-board movable body LED 9d, lower-board movable body LED 9e, upper-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begin to light up in a predetermined initialization notification manner, and speakers 8L, 8R begin to emit a predetermined initialization notification sound (see Figure 334).

In the initial operation control, first, short initial operation control is performed for each movable body (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101), followed by operation confirmation control. Below, illustrations of the operation modes based on short initial operation control will be omitted, and only the operation modes based on operation confirmation control will be explained.

In the operation confirmation control, first, the chance button 631B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 330(B)), after which the on-board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 330(C)). Next, the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 330(D)), after which the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 330(E)). Next, the below-board movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 330(F)), after which the on-frame movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 330(G)). Next, the frame-top movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 330 (H)), and then the board-bottom movable body 32B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position, and the operation confirmation control ends (see Figure 330 (I)). After that, when a predetermined time (for example, approximately 10 seconds) has passed, the initialization notification ends and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends.

In this way, during operation confirmation control, the initial operation of each movable body is initiated in the order of chance button 631B, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101. However, since the initial operation period of above-board movable body 32A overlaps with part of the initial operation period of chance button 631B, and the initial operation control of above-frame movable body 132SG101 overlaps with part of the initial operation period of below-board movable body 32B, the operation confirmation control period of multiple movable bodies can be shortened.

In addition, when the initial movement control of one movable body is being performed while the movement control of another movable body is being performed, while one movable body (e.g., chance button 631B, below-board movable body 32B) is stopped at the performance position, the other movable body (e.g., above-board movable body 32A, above-frame movable body 132SG101) moves to the performance position or origin position, so even when the initial movement control of two or more movable bodies is being performed in parallel, the movement of each movable body can be confirmed.

In addition, while an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing was explained above based on Figure 330, the operation confirmation control during hot start processing does not issue an initialization notification using a lamp or sound, but the operation confirmation control for the moving body is performed in the same manner as during cold start processing.

Also, as shown in Figure 329 (B), the movable body LED of a movable body that is not operating and is stopped during operation confirmation control flashes red during cold start processing (during initialization notification), is turned off during hot start processing (during recovery), and lights up in a "mode corresponding to the background image" during hot start processing (when variable display is stopped). On the other hand, the movable body LED of a movable body that is not operating and is stopped during performance operation control lights up in a "mode corresponding to the background image". Note that the background image (background display) may have, for example, background images A and B, and if background image A is displayed and there is a power outage and then recovery, background image A will always be displayed, and the lamp will always light up in a mode corresponding to background image A.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body during the advance operation moving from the origin position to the performance position and during the retreat operation moving from the performance position to the origin position lights up in "white" during cold start processing (during initialization notification), hot start processing (during recovery), and hot start processing (when variable display is stopped). On the other hand, during performance operation control (for example, operation control of the under-board movable body 32B in the win/lose button performance), the movable body LED of the movable body during the advance operation moving from the origin position to the performance position lights up in a first light-emitting mode (for example, a rainbow flash mode in which various colors corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are illuminated in sequence at predetermined intervals with extinguishing periods in between), whereas the movable body LED of the movable body during the retreat operation moving from the performance position to the origin position lights up in a second light-emitting mode (for example, a smooth rainbow mode in which various colors corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are illuminated in sequence at predetermined intervals).

In other words, while the operation mode of each movable body is the same for both operation confirmation control and presentation operation control, the movable body LED of each movable body emits light in the same manner (white illumination) for advancing and retreating operations in operation confirmation control (the first and second light emission modes are the same), while it emits light in different manners (rainbow flash and smooth rainbow) for advancing and retreating operations in presentation operation control (the first and second light emission modes are different). This makes it possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that makes it easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or presentation operation control is being performed. In particular, in operation confirmation control, the light color and lighting mode do not constantly change, like rainbow flash or smooth rainbow, making it easier to confirm the operation of the movable body.

Note that in Figure 329 (B), rainbow flash and smooth rainbow are shown as examples of the first and second light emission modes of the movable body LED in performance operation control, but these light emission modes may differ depending on the type of performance.

In addition, the light emission brightness during operation confirmation control is lower than the light emission brightness during performance operation control, which reduces power consumption when the power is turned on and reduces the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the brightness of the movable body LED is set to a low level, preventing the movable body's operation from being difficult to confirm due to glare.

Also, as shown in Figure 329 (B), during cold start processing (during initialization notification) in operation confirmation control, a predetermined initialization notification sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R over the initialization notification period. The predetermined initialization notification sound is a sound that indicates that initialization notification is being executed, and is a different sound from the effect sound output during other effect operation control. Also, during hot start processing (during recovery or when variable display is stopped), no sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R (silent).

In addition, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 (see Figure 328 (G3)) is displayed during the valid operation period when menu display and volume and light intensity adjustment operations are validly accepted. By operating the selection button 132SG35 while the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 is displayed, it is possible to display a specified menu screen (not shown) or adjust the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g.

In this embodiment, during the execution period of operation confirmation control (during cold start processing or hot start processing), the menu display and volume/light intensity adjustment are not controlled during the valid operation period. Therefore, even if the light intensity is adjusted using the selection button 132SG35 during operation confirmation control, the light intensity of the various lamps 9a-9g does not change, and they continue to emit light at the brightness currently being used. More specifically, during operation confirmation control, it is not possible to adjust the brightness of a movable body that is operating while emitting light in "low brightness" "white" (initial highlighting mode).

Furthermore, during hot start processing, it may be possible to adjust the volume and light intensity while the operation confirmation control is being executed, allowing players to quickly adjust to an environment that suits their preferences.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is not possible to display menus or adjust volume and light intensity while the operation confirmation control is being executed. However, after the operation confirmation control is completed, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed, so that if the selection button 132SG35 is operated during the operation confirmation control, it is possible to confirm whether or not brightness adjustment was performed as a result of that operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a command to specify the start of a jackpot or a command to specify the opening of a large prize slot is received while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the display of a fanfare effect or a round effect may begin on a display layer lower than the recovery display 132SG510, and when the start preparation display 132SG500 is no longer displayed, the display of the fanfare effect or round effect may become visible partway through on the lower layer.

Furthermore, if a command to specify the start of a jackpot or a command to specify the opening of a large prize slot is received while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the recovery display 132SG510 may be displayed until the next command (a command related to the start of a round of play) is received.

In addition, as shown in Figures 331 to 333, power outages can occur in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at various times, such as when the variable display is stopped and the machine is in a game standby state, when the variable display is being executed, or when a jackpot game is being executed. Although not shown in detail, at any time a power outage occurs, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may start up using cold start processing or hot start processing, but the operating mode of each movable body, the light emission mode of each movable body LED, background sound, etc. may differ depending on the time the power outage occurred.

[Initial operation control during cold start and hot start]
Next, a description will be given of a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a cold start and a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a hot start. Note that, for a hot start, a description will be given of a case where the gaming state is in a normal state.

Mode 1 (Initial operation control during cold start)
334 and 335, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is started on the image display device 5 from the start timing. When 3 seconds (3000 ms) have elapsed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 started to be displayed, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and based on the fact that the performance control CPU 120 has received a power-on designation command, a first game state background designation command, and a customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the chance button LED 9g, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f start to emit light in an initialization notification mode from the timing of receiving the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command, and the output of an initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R starts.

In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable unit LED 9d, the below-board movable unit LED 9e, the above-frame movable unit LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in this feature unit 132SG light up during initialization notification. After turning off for one second from the time the performance control CPU 120 receives the power-on command, background image command, or customer waiting demo command, they repeatedly turn on and off in red (light emission).

Then, two seconds (2000 ms) after the effect control CPU 120 receives the power-on command, first game state background command, and customer waiting demo command from CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 ends, and the startup preparation display 132SG500 is replaced by a background image showing the variable display stopped in the normal state. From this point on, as initial operation control, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 is started.

First, four seconds after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends (six seconds (6000 ms) after the power-on command, first game state background command, and customer waiting demo command are received), the chance button 631B begins advancing from its home position to its presentation position. The chance button LED 9g begins illuminating (white) in an initial highlighting mode from the start of this advancing motion. Once the chance button 631B has completed its movement to its presentation position, the chance button 631 remains in this presentation position for a predetermined period of time. After remaining in this position for the predetermined period of time, the chance button 631B retreats from its presentation position to its home position. The chance button LED 9g's illumination in the initial highlighting mode ends when the chance button 631's retreating motion ends, and it returns to illuminating in the initialization notification mode (see Figures 336 (A) to (C)).

Furthermore, at the end of the advancement movement of the chance button 631B, the on-board movable body 32A begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position. When the on-board movable body 32A begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position, the on-board movable body LED 9d begins to emit light (white light) in an initial highlighting mode from the start of the advancement movement. Then, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the on-board movable body 32A performs a retreat movement from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the on-board movable body LED 9d ends emitting light in the initial highlighting mode at the end of the retreat movement of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to emitting light in the initialization notification mode.

Furthermore, at the end of the retraction operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B starts advancing from the origin position to the performance position. When the below-board movable body 32B starts advancing from the origin position to the performance position, the below-board movable body LED 9e starts emitting light in the initial highlight mode (white light) from the start of the advancing operation. Then, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the below-board movable body 32B executes the retraction operation from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the illumination of the below-board movable body LED 9e in the initial highlight mode ends at the end of the retraction operation of the below-board movable body 32B, and returns to illumination in the initialization notification mode.

Furthermore, while the under-board movable body 32B is stopped at the performance position, the above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in an initial highlighting mode (illuminated in white) as the above-frame movable body 132SG101 advances from the origin position to the performance position and retreats from the performance position to the origin position. The above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in the initial highlighting mode at the end of the retreating motion of the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and returns to emitting light in the initialization notification mode.

In addition, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 during a cold start in this feature part 132SG ends 20 seconds (20,000 ms) after the start of the advancement operation of the chance button 631B. Furthermore, after the operations (confirmation operations) of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 are completed, 4 seconds (4,000 ms) after the completion of the operations (confirmation operations) of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 are completed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g cease to emit light in the initialization notification mode, and the output of the initialization notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R ceases, and all initial operation control is completed. In other words, the initial operation control during a cold start in this feature part 132SG is executed for 30 seconds (30,000 ms).

Here, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs after initial operation control, and a variable display is initiated in which a movable body prediction is executed based on that starting win. First, as shown in Figure 334, after initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (a background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (e.g., white light emission). Additionally, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state in which sound output is stopped.

When a starting win occurs in the above state and the variable display of the special and decorative symbols begins, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R begin to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

During the period in which the movable object prediction is being performed, the image display device 5 displays an effect image (movable object effect) corresponding to the movable object prediction. Furthermore, the on-board movable object 32A moves back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times, and the chance button 631B vibrates continuously. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable object LED 9d, the below-board movable object LED 9e, and the on-frame movable object LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction, and the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the movable object prediction (movable object prediction sound).

In the example shown in Figure 334, the movable object prediction is exemplified by displaying an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object prediction on the image display device 5, causing the on-board movable object 32A to move back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position, vibrating the chance button 631B, outputting a sound (movable object prediction sound) corresponding to the movable object prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R, and causing the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, and on-frame movable object LED 9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable object prediction may be exemplified by displaying an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object prediction on the image display device 5, and causing the on-board movable object 32A to move back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position. Furthermore, the movable object warning may involve the display of an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object warning on the image display device 5, the reciprocating movement of the on-board movable object 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position, as well as one or more of the following: vibration of the chance button 631B, output of a sound (movable object warning sound) corresponding to the movable object warning from the speakers 8L and 8R, and illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, and on-frame movable object LED 9f in a manner corresponding to the movable object warning.

Next, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs during initial operation control, and a variable display in which a movable body prediction is executed based on that starting win is initiated. First, as shown in Figure 335, when a starting win occurs during the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A (more precisely, when the on-board movable body 32A remains in the performance position), the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols begins from the timing of the starting win. At this time, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R begin to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

Furthermore, after the variable display starts, initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A continues to be executed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, initial operation control of the below-board movable body 32B and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is executed.

If the movable body preview execution period occurs during the initial operation control period of these on-board movable bodies 32A and below-board movable bodies 32B, a movable body effect image will be displayed on the image display device 5 during the movable body preview execution period, while the initial operation control of the on-board movable bodies 32A, below-board movable bodies 32B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 will continue to be executed (see Figures 336 (D) to (E)).

In addition, during the operation of each movable body, the illumination patterns of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will follow the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state) displayed on the image display device 5 or the initial highlighting pattern of each movable body, and will not illuminate in an illumination pattern corresponding to the movable body preview.

Then, when the execution period of the movable object preview in the variable display ends and the operation of all movable objects has finished, from the timing at which the operation ends, the up and down movement of the on-board movable object 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the vibration of the chance button 631B, which would have been executed during the execution period of the movable object preview, are executed (Figures 336 (F)-(J) and 337 (K)-(L)). Note that while the on-board movable object 32A is moving up and down, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, on-frame movable object LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable object preview, but the speakers 8L, 8R output background music corresponding to the background image for the variable display in the normal state, and no sound corresponding to the movable object preview (movable object preview sound) is output.

(Initial operation control during hot start)
As shown in Figures 338 and 339, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 begins on the image display device 5 from the start timing. Three seconds (3000 ms) after the start-up preparation display 132SG500 begins displaying, the performance control CPU 120 receives a power outage recovery designation command, a first game state background designation command, and a customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103. Based on this, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the chance button LED 9g, and the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f each begin emitting light in a manner corresponding to the background image in the normal state from the time of receiving the power outage recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command. Note that no sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R (silence) from the time of receiving the power outage recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command.

In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g in this feature unit 132SG emit light in accordance with the background image in the normal state, and after turning off for one second from the time the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command, background image designation command, or customer waiting demo designation command, they emit light in an emission color (e.g., white) corresponding to the normal state. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start in the time-saving state (low probability high base state) or the probability variable state (high probability high base state), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an emission color or emission pattern different from that in the normal state, corresponding to the background image in the time-saving state or the probability variable state.

Then, two seconds (2000 ms) after the effect control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command, the first game state background command, and the customer waiting demo command from CPU 103, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 ends, and the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is replaced by a background image showing a stopped variable display according to the normal state. From this point on, as initial operation control, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 is started.

First, four seconds after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends (six seconds (6000 ms) after the power-on command, first game state background command, and customer waiting demo command are received), the chance button 631B begins advancing from its home position to its presentation position. The chance button LED 9g begins illuminating in an initial highlight mode (white illumination) from the start of this advancing motion. Once the chance button 631B has completed its movement to its presentation position, the chance button 631 remains in this presentation position for a predetermined period of time. After remaining in this position for the predetermined period of time, the chance button 631B retreats from its presentation position to its home position. The chance button LED 9g's illumination in the initial highlight mode ends when the chance button 631's retreating motion ends, and the chance button LED 9g changes to its default illumination mode (e.g., white illumination).

Furthermore, at the end of the advancement movement of the chance button 631B, the on-board movable body 32A begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position. When the on-board movable body 32A begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position, the on-board movable body LED 9d begins to emit light (white light) in an initial highlighting mode from the start of the advancement movement. Then, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the on-board movable body 32A executes a retreat movement from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the on-board movable body LED 9d's illumination in the initial highlighting mode ends at the end of the retreat movement of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to illumination in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

Furthermore, at the end of the retraction operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position. When the below-board movable body 32B begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position, the below-board movable body LED 9e begins to emit light (white light) in an initial highlighting mode from the start of the advancing operation. Then, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the below-board movable body 32B executes a retraction operation from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the illumination of the below-board movable body LED 9e in the initial highlighting mode ends at the end of the retraction operation of the below-board movable body 32B, and the illumination returns to a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

Furthermore, while the under-board movable body 32B is stopped at the performance position, the above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in an initial highlight mode (illuminated in white) as the above-frame movable body 132SG101 advances from the origin position to the performance position and retreats from the performance position to the origin position. The above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in an initial highlight mode at the end of the retreating movement of the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and returns to emitting light in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

Note that the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 during a hot start in this characteristic part 132SG ends 20 seconds (20,000 ms) after the chance button 631B begins advancing. Note that, unlike when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are not illuminated in the form of an initialization notification, and the speakers 8L, 8R do not output an initialization notification sound. For this reason, the initial operation control during a hot start in this feature part 132SG is such that the operations (confirmation operations) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 are executed over a period of 26 seconds, as shown in Figures 338 and 339.

Here, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs after initial operation control, and a variable display is initiated in which a movable body prediction is executed based on that starting win. First, as shown in Figure 338, after initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (e.g., white light emission). In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state in which sound output has been stopped (silent).

When a starting win occurs in the above state and the variable display of the special and decorative symbols begins, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R begin to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

During the period in which the movable object prediction is being performed, the image display device 5 displays an effect image (movable object effect) corresponding to the movable object prediction. Furthermore, the on-board movable object 32A moves back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times, and the chance button 631B vibrates continuously. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable object LED 9d, the below-board movable object LED 9e, and the on-frame movable object LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction, and the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the movable object prediction (movable object prediction sound).

Next, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs during initial operation control, and a variable display in which a movable body prediction is executed based on that starting win is initiated. First, as shown in Figure 339, when a starting win occurs during the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A (more precisely, when the on-board movable body 32A remains in the performance position), the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols begins from the timing of the starting win. At this time, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R begin to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

Furthermore, after the variable display starts, initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A continues to be executed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, initial operation control of the below-board movable body 32B and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is executed.

If the movable body preview execution period occurs during the initial operation control period of these above-board movable bodies 32A and below-board movable bodies 32B, a movable body effect image will be displayed on the image display device 5 during the movable body preview execution period, while the initial operation control of the above-board movable bodies 32A, below-board movable bodies 32B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 will continue to be executed.

In addition, during the operation of each movable body, the illumination patterns of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will follow the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state) displayed on the image display device 5 or the initial highlighting pattern of each movable body, and will not illuminate in an illumination pattern corresponding to the movable body preview.

Then, when the execution period of the movable body preview in the variable display ends and the operation of all movable bodies ends (initial operation control ends), from the timing at which the operation ends, the up and down movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position and the vibration of the chance button 631B, which would normally be executed during the execution period of the movable body preview, are executed. Note that while the on-board movable body 32A is moving up and down, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable body preview, but the speakers 8L, 8R output background music corresponding to the background image for the variable display in the normal state, and no sound corresponding to the movable body preview (movable body preview sound) is output.

As described above, this feature unit 132SG operates the on-board movable body 32A (and the below-board movable body 32B, the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B) as initial operation control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start. Furthermore, if a start-up win occurs during the confirmation operation of each movable body during the initial operation control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, and a variable display that executes a movable body preview based on the start-up win is initiated, if the execution period of the movable body preview and the confirmation operation period overlap, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R corresponding to the movable body preview are restricted as a performance operation for the movable body preview. Furthermore, if a start-up win occurs during the confirmation operation when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is initiated based on the start-up win, only the movement of the on-board movable body 32A is restricted as a performance operation for the movable body prediction.

By doing this, when a movable object prediction is executed using a variable display that is started during the confirmation operation of each movable object during initial operation control, the initial operation control is not hindered by the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as a performance operation of the movable object prediction, and the player can be notified that a movable object prediction has been executed by the display of a movable object effect on the image display device 5 and by the lighting of each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, on-frame movable object LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) in accordance with the movable object prediction.

In this feature section 132SG, as shown in FIG. 339, a pachinko gaming machine 1 in which an electric step occurs during the execution of a variable display including the execution of a movable body preview is started with a hot start, and if the execution period of the movable body preview occurs during the initial operation of each movable body after the hot start, the operation of the above-board movable body 32A as a movable body preview is not executed during the execution period of the movable body preview. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 in which an electric step occurs during the execution of a variable display including a winning effect (i.e., a variable display of a jackpot) is started with a hot start, and if the execution period of the winning effect occurs during the initial operation of each movable body after the hot start, the operation of the below-board movable body 32B as a winning effect and the light emission (rainbow flash) of the below-board movable body LED 9e in a manner corresponding to the winning effect may be restricted during the execution period of the winning effect. In this way, it is possible to determine whether the below-board movable body 32B is operating as an initial operation or as a winning effect based on the light emission mode of the below-board movable body LED 9e.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 303, this feature section 132SG illustrates an example in which the presentation control CPU 120 executes an origin placement control process at the start of variable display to place each movable body at its respective origin position, but the present invention is not limited to this. If a start win occurs during the initial movement of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and variable display based on this start win is initiated, the initial movement of each movable body may be executed with priority over the movement of each movable body to its origin position. This prevents the initial movement of each movable body from being interrupted by the movement of each movable body to its origin position.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 303, this feature section 132SG illustrates an example in which the effect control CPU 120 executes an origin placement control process at the start of the customer waiting demo effect to place each movable body at its respective origin position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a starting winning occurs during the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and a variable display based on the starting winning occurs, the variable display ends during the initial operation period, and the customer waiting demo effect starts in response to the end of the variable display, the performance operation of the customer waiting demo effect of each movable body may be executed with priority over the movement of each movable body to its origin position. This prevents the operation of the customer waiting demo effect of each movable body from being interrupted by the movement of each movable body to its origin position.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 1)
In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, as shown in FIG. 335, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the operation of the movable body as initial operation control, if the execution period of the movable body prediction overlaps with the operation period of the movable body, only the display of the movable body effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body prediction, and after the initial operation control is completed, the operation of the movable body that is the target of the movable body prediction (in the case of this characteristic part 132SG, the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B), the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, b. An example has been given of a form in which the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable body preview, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in Figure 340, even if a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the operation of a movable body as initial operation control, if the execution period of the movable body preview is after the operation of each movable body has ended, the target movable body (the above-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B) may be operated during the execution period of the movable body preview.

Furthermore, if the initial operation control period (operation control of each movable body and illumination of each LED in an initialization notification mode, and output of initialization notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R) ends during the execution period of the movable body preview, as shown in FIG. 340, from the time when the control of the initial operation ends to the time when the movable body preview ends, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g may be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the movable body preview, and sounds corresponding to the movable body preview may be output from speakers 8L and 8R.

As described above, during the initial operation control period, if the operation control of each movable body has ended but the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in accordance with the initialization notification mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R continue to output an initialization notification sound, and a movable body preview is executed, the operation of the above-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B in accordance with the movable body preview is executed, while the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g do not emit light in accordance with the movable body preview mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in accordance with the movable body preview, thereby making it possible to avoid reducing the dramatic effect of the movable body preview.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 2)
In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, and a variable display is started to execute a movable body prediction that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the confirmation operation of each movable body as an initial operation control, the operation of the movable body (on-board movable body 32A, chance button 631B), the display of movable body effects on the image display device 5, the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R have been described, but as a modified example, as shown in FIG. 341, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the confirmation operation of each movable body as an initial operation control, In the case where a decision is made to execute a pre-read movable body preview due to multiple occurrences of variable display during the moving body confirmation operation, if the execution period of the pre-read movable body preview overlaps with the confirmation operation period or the initial operation control period for each movable body, only the display of movable body effects is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the pre-read movable body preview, and the operation of the target movable body (on-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B), the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g in a manner corresponding to the pre-read movable body preview, and sound output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the pre-read movable body preview are not executed. Furthermore, if the variable display that is the subject of the pre-read movable body prediction is executed after the initial operation control is completed, during the execution period of the movable body prediction during the variable display, the image display device 5 displays a movable body effect image, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable body prediction, and the speakers 8L, 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the movable body prediction.

By doing this, even if the period for executing the pre-read movable object prediction occurs during the confirmation operation of each movable object, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A or chance button 631B as the pre-read movable object prediction will not be executed, making it possible to prevent confusion for the player caused by excessive operation of the on-board movable object 32A or chance button 631B after the initial operation control has ended.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 3)
Furthermore, in this feature section 132SG, an example has been given of a form in which a movable body preview can be executed in which the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the intermediate position as an effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display, a movable body preview (second movable body preview) can be executed again after the movable body preview (first movable body preview) as an effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot varies depending on the number of times the movable body preview is executed during the variable display (for example, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is higher when the second movable body preview is executed in addition to the first movable body preview than when only the first movable body preview is executed).

In addition, in cases where multiple movable body announcements (first movable body announcement and second movable body announcement) can be made during the variable display in this manner, as shown in FIG. 342 as a modified example, when a start winning occurs during the initial motion control and a variable display that makes the first movable body announcement and the second movable body announcement is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement overlaps with the execution period of the initial motion control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement may be executed after the initial motion control ends (the first movable body announcement may be re-executed). However, if the second movable body announcement has already started during the re-execution period of the first movable body announcement, the second movable body announcement that is currently being executed may be executed with priority, and the first movable body announcement may not be re-executed, as shown in FIG. 342.

In this way, if the second movable body announcement is already being executed during the re-execution period of the first movable body announcement, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the second movable body announcement is given priority, and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is not executed even as the first movable body announcement, thereby preventing a decrease in the performance effect of the movable body announcement due to the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the second movable body announcement being hindered by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the first movable body announcement.

In the example shown in Figure 342, a form in which the first movable body preview and the second movable body preview can be executed during one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation modes of the on-board movable body 32A as these first movable body preview and second movable body preview may be the same (for example, the first movable body preview and the second movable body preview both involve the on-board movable body 32A moving multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position), or the operation modes of the on-board movable body 32A as these first movable body preview and second movable body preview may be different (for example, the first movable body preview may involve the on-board movable body 32A moving multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, while the second movable body may involve the on-board movable body 32A moving multiple times between the origin position and the preview position).

(Initial Operation Control Modification 4)
Furthermore, in the case where multiple movable body announcements (first movable body announcement and second movable body announcement) can be made during the variable display as shown in Figure 342, as a modified example, as shown in Figure 343, when a start winning occurs during the initial operation control and a variable display that makes the first movable body announcement and the second movable body announcement is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement overlaps with the execution period of the initial operation control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement can be controlled not to be executed, while only the second movable body announcement after the initial operation control can be controlled to be executed. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 344, when a start winning occurs after the initial operation control and a variable display that performs the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction is started based on the start winning, that is, when the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is executed as the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction during the variable display, if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A stops midway due to a loss of synchronism or the like during the execution period of the first movable body prediction, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A may be controlled to start as the second movable body prediction during the execution period of the second movable body prediction.

In this way, even if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview does not end normally, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the next movable body preview, the second movable body preview, is executed, so that the operation of the on-board movable body 32A can be retried.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 5)
In addition, in Figure 342, when a start winning occurs during the initial operation control and a variable display that performs the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body prediction overlaps with the execution period of the initial operation control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body prediction can be executed after the initial operation control ends, while if the re-execution period of the first movable body prediction is within the execution period of the second movable body prediction, priority is given to the execution of the second movable body prediction and the first movable body prediction is not re-executed.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in Figure 345, if the execution period of the second movable body prediction occurs during the re-execution period of the first movable body prediction, the re-execution of the first movable body prediction may be interrupted at the start of the execution period of the second movable body prediction, and thereafter the on-board movable body 32A may be operated as the second movable body prediction.

In this way, if the execution period for the second movable body announcement begins during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is interrupted and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement is started, thereby preventing a reduction in the presentation effect caused by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement interfering with the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 6)
Furthermore, in the characteristic section 132SG, an example has been given in which the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the performance position as the initial operation control, while the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the intermediate position as the performance operation of the movable body preview, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the on-board movable body 32A may be operated between the origin position and the performance position in both the initial operation control and the performance operation of the movable body preview.

Furthermore, in cases where the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the performance position in both the initial operation control and the movable body preview performance operation, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the initial operation, the initial operation is continuously executed until the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123, whereas when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the on-board movable body preview performance operation, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A may be stopped in accordance with the process data for the movable body preview, regardless of whether the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 346(A) and 346(B) as a modified example, when operating the on-board movable body 32A as initial operation control, the performance control CPU 120 drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the detection of the on-board movable body 32A by the origin position sensor, thereby moving the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position over a first period (1000 ms). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 on the condition that the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 (the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the performance position). Then, based on the detection of the on-board movable body 32A by the performance position sensor 132SG124, drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction to move the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position. Furthermore, when the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123 (when the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the origin position), the reverse rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.

346(B), for example, if a step-out or the like occurs during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A toward the presentation position, causing the on-board movable body 32A to stop between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation control CPU 120 continues the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 beyond the first period because the presentation position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the on-board movable body 32A. At this time, if the presentation position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the on-board movable body 32A for a predetermined period (a period longer than the first period from the start of the initial operation control), the presentation control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A, and operates the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over 6000 ms by driving the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction from the timing of the determination of the operation error. Then, when the origin position sensor 132SG123 detects the on-board movable body 32A, the driving of the driving motor 132SG122 is stopped.
Also, as shown in Figures 347(A) and 347(B), when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as a performance operation of the movable body preview, the performance control CPU 120 drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the process data of the movable body preview, thereby moving the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position over a second period that is longer than the first period. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the performance position by stopping the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body preview. At the same time, the performance position sensor 132SG124 detects the on-board movable body 32A. Then, while the on-board movable body 32A is stopped at the performance position, the performance control CPU 120 drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction based on the process data of the movable body preview, thereby moving the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the origin position by stopping the reverse drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the movable body advance notice process data. At the same time, the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 347 (B), for example, if a step-out occurs while the on-board movable body 32A is moving toward the presentation position and the on-board movable body 32A stops between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to drive the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the movable body preview process data until the second period has elapsed. In other words, at the end of the second period, the presentation control CPU 120 stops the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the movable body preview process data, regardless of whether the on-board movable body 32A has been detected by the presentation position sensor 132SG124.

If the on-board movable body 32A is not detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 for a predetermined period (a period longer than the second period from the start of initial operation control), the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A, and from the timing of the operation error determination, drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction to move the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over a period of 6000 ms. Then, based on the detection of the on-board movable body 32A by the origin position sensor 132SG123, the drive of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.

In this way, if a movable object prediction is executed during gameplay after the initial operation control has ended, even if the operation of the on-board movable object 32A corresponding to the movable object prediction is not performed normally, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as the initial operation control (confirmation operation) is not executed, making it possible to reduce the reduction in the presentation effect of an abnormally performed movable object prediction.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 7)
Furthermore, in the above-mentioned variant example 6, an example was given of a form in which the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A if the on-board movable body 32A is not detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 as part of the initial operation control, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A as part of the initial operation control, it may not operate the on-board movable body 32A during the movable body preview execution period during variable display, but may only display the effect on the image display device 5, light up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the movable body preview.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 348 as variant example 7, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of operating the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position toward the performance position over 1000 ms as initial operation control, and is also capable of operating the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position toward the origin position over 2000 ms.

Furthermore, if the on-board movable body 32A stops between the performance position and the origin position as part of the initial operation control, the performance control CPU 120 will initially determine that this is an operation error, and then be able to execute the initial operation control multiple times.

Here, if the performance control CPU 120 executes four initial motion controls and determines that all of them result in an error, it stores the on-board movable body 32A as a motion-restricted movable body as a result of the fourth initial motion control (dead end determination). Then, as a special initial motion control, the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position toward the performance position over 3000 ms, and then moves the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over 6000 ms.

After that, when a starting winning occurs and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction based on that starting winning is initiated, the performance control CPU 120, based on the fact that the on-board movable body 32A is stored as an operation-restricted movable body, does not operate the on-board movable body 32A during the movable body prediction execution period, and only displays effects on the image display device 5, lights up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and outputs sound corresponding to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L, 8R.

As described above, by not operating the on-board movable object 32A that has been determined to be a dead end as a movable object preview, while displaying effects on the image display device 5, lighting up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, on-frame movable object LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and outputting sound corresponding to the movable object preview from the speakers 8L, 8R, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by operating the on-board movable object 32A as a movable object preview, while minimizing a decrease in the visual effect of the movable object preview.

The configurations described in Modifications 1 to 7 above may be added to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. Alternatively, part of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment may be changed to at least one of the configurations of Modifications 1 to 7. In other words, Modifications 1 to 7 above can be added or changed to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment in any one of multiple forms, or in a combination of multiple forms.

Form 2 (Initial Operation Control Modification 8)
Furthermore, in the characteristic part 132SG, as shown in FIG. 289, when variable display is not executed, the CPU 103 outputs a customer waiting demo designation command to the presentation control board 12, thereby executing a customer waiting demo presentation on the image display device 5, as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 8, as shown in FIGS. 349, 350, and 351, in any of the cases where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start in a low probability low base state (normal state), or where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a high base state (time-shortened state), the presentation control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103 3000 ms after the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the customer waiting demo presentation itself may be started after the control period of the initial operation has ended.

By doing this, it is possible to prevent the movable body (on-board movable body 32A) operating as the initial operation control from obstructing the image of the customer waiting demo performance (demo movies shown in Figures 349, 350, and 351) displayed on the image display device 5, which would reduce the visibility of the image of the customer waiting demo performance.

Note that Figures 349, 350, and 351 illustrate an example in which a customer waiting demo performance is executed after the initial operation of each movable body is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The period from the initial operation of each movable body to the execution of the customer waiting demo performance may be set to 30 seconds or more, which is the period required for the initial operation of each movable body, thereby providing a sufficient period between the initial operation of each movable body and the customer waiting demo performance, and preventing the visibility of the customer waiting demo performance from being obstructed.

Furthermore, the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo effect is executed may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or a hot start. Regardless of whether the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo effect is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or a hot start, the customer waiting demo effect may be executed after the completion of the initial operation of each movable body, thereby preventing the customer waiting demo effect from being interrupted by the movable body operating as an initial operation.

(Initial Operation Control Variation 9)
In the above-described modified example, as shown in FIG. 348, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that the on-board movable body 32A is at a dead end, the on-board movable body 32A is not operated as a movable body notice, but effects are displayed on the image display device 5, LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are turned on, and sounds corresponding to the movable body notice are output from the speakers 8L, 8R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, as shown in Figure 352 as variant example 9, if the performance control CPU 120 determines that the on-board movable body 32A is at a dead end, when the customer waiting demo performance is executed after the special initial operation is completed, the on-board movable body 32A may not be operated, but effects corresponding to the customer waiting demo performance may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) may be lit according to the customer waiting demo performance.

By doing this, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by forcing the on-board movable body 32A to operate excessively as part of the customer waiting demo performance when the on-board movable body 32A is not operating normally, while also reducing the performance effect of the customer waiting demo performance.

Form 3 (power cut just before the big hit fluctuation ends)
Next, the operation confirmation control when the power interruption occurs just before the end of the big win fluctuation will be described based on Figure 353. Figure 353 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when the power interruption occurs just before the end of the big win fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 353, after the variable display based on the jackpot variable pattern has begun, a combination of jackpot confirmation symbols is statically displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and just before the variable display ends (for example, approximately 5,000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as when the variable display resumes and a re-lottery effect is executed after the combination of jackpot confirmation symbols has been temporarily statically displayed, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when decorative symbols are statically displayed in the variable display until the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the next variable display), if a power outage occurs and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), the jackpot variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and control of the jackpot gaming state will begin.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, the power outage recovery command and pattern confirmation command sent based on the recovery of the CPU 103 are received, and then the fanfare effect is started based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving the jackpot start command.

In more detail, until a predetermined time (e.g., approximately 1000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage recovery command and the pattern confirmation command were received, the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the output of background music (BGM), are restricted. In other words, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are turned off, and background music (BGM) is not output.

After that, when a jackpot start command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, the above-frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part), and background music (BGM) corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) will begin to be output. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since the jackpot start command was received, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 will end, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) will begin. Note that the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) will be displayed as a black screen until a predetermined time (e.g., 1500 ms) has elapsed since its start.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is initiated. After that, once the initial operation of each movable body is complete, the fanfare performance (introduction part) ends, and the fanfare performance (right-hit notification part) begins.

As shown in Figures 325 (F7) and (F8), in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare presentation, right-hit prompt indicators 132SG431 and 132SG432 are displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball into the right play area, and a right-hit operation prompt presentation is performed. Therefore, if the initial operation of the movable body is being performed when the right-hit notification part begins, the movable body operating due to the initial operation will obstruct the visibility of the right-hit notification part of the fanfare presentation, such as right-hit prompt indicator 132SG431, and there is a risk that the player will not perform the right-hit operation and will suffer a disadvantage.

Furthermore, in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare effect, as shown in Figure 325 (F7), when the right-hit promotion display 132SG431 is displayed, a movable body effect is executed in which the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position. Therefore, if the initial operation of the movable body is being executed when the right-hit notification part starts, it becomes difficult to determine whether the movable body is operating as the initial operation or the right-hit operation promotion effect.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the fanfare effect is executed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the fanfare effect (right-hit notification part) that involves the operation of the on-board movable body 32A begins. This prevents the movable body performing the initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the right-hit notification part in the fanfare effect, and prevents it from becoming difficult to distinguish whether the initial operation or the right-hit operation promotion effect is operating.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the fanfare effect is executed, the introductory part period and initial movement period of the fanfare effect are set so that the initial movement of the movable body is completed within the period from the start of the fanfare effect to the start of the right-hit promotion effect (see Figure 325 (F1) to (F6)).

In addition, during the introductory part of the fanfare effect, when announcing which of the multiple types of jackpots A to E has occurred, it is possible to display the jackpot type display 132SG421 corresponding to the jackpot type being controlled, and the pre-jackpot type display introduction display 132SG422 before the jackpot type display 132SG421 is displayed.In the operation confirmation control, the initial operation ends before the display of the jackpot type display 132SG421 in Figure 325 (F6), so even if operation confirmation control is performed during the fanfare effect, it is possible to know which type of jackpot has been controlled.

In addition, when the fanfare effect is executed, the above-board movable body LED9d, below-board movable body LED9e, above-frame movable body LED9f, and chance button LED9g, which are performing their initial operation, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), while the above-board movable body LED9d, below-board movable body LED9e, above-frame movable body LED9f, and chance button LED9g, which are not operating under operation confirmation control, will light up in a light highlight mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) (for example, blue-based colors for a 3R jackpot, red-based colors for a 10R jackpot, etc.), but the initial highlight mode (white light) is not used in the light highlight mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part). Therefore, it is possible to indicate that the movable body is under operation confirmation control even during the fanfare effect.

In addition, when the first movable body is moving due to the initial operation, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in an illumination mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part), making it possible to indicate that the movable body is performing its initial operation even during the fanfare performance.

In addition, when a fanfare effect is being performed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light at a first brightness in a lighting pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect, while during operation confirmation control, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, and the above-frame movable body LED 9f emit light at a second brightness (low brightness) lower than the first brightness (high brightness), thereby reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load.

In addition, the duty ratio of all movable body LEDs may be reduced from the time the power is turned on until the initial operation of all movable bodies is completed (until the last movable body to be initialized is placed at the origin position), or the duty ratio may be reduced until a predetermined time has elapsed.

Furthermore, when the first movable body is operating due to the initial operation, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial highlight mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial highlight mode, making it possible to draw attention to the movable body that is operating due to the operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, the movable body LED of a movable body during initial operation emits light in a common initial highlight mode (white light) when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when it retreats from the performance position to the origin position. Meanwhile, the movable body LED of a movable body operated by performance operation control can emit light in different modes when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when it retreats from the performance position to the origin position. Specifically, during an advance operation, the movable body LED emits light in a first mode (e.g., a wave mode in which frame LEDs 9a, 9b, attacca LED 9c, movable body LEDs 9d, 9e, etc., are illuminated in stages from one side to the other at a predetermined cycle), and during a retreat operation, the movable body LED emits light in a second mode (e.g., a flash mode in which the LEDs flash at a fast cycle (e.g., every 30 ms)). This makes it easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed based on the initial highlight mode (white light) and the mode corresponding to the performance.

In addition, in the movable body performance executed in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare performance, the on-board movable body 32A operates in the same operating mode as the initial operation (descending from the origin position to the performance position), and in the initial operation, the movable body LED lights up in an initial highlighting mode (white lighting), and in the movable body performance, it lights up in a mode corresponding to the right-hit notification part that is different from the initial highlighting mode (white lighting), and when the movable body operates in the initial operation, sound output is limited, and in the movable body performance executed in the right-hit notification part, a sound corresponding to the right-hit notification part is output. In this way, it is easy to determine whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed, based on the initial highlighting mode and the mode corresponding to the right-hit notification part.

In this embodiment, an example has been given in which the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the movable body performance executed in the right-hit notification part is the same as the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. The operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the movable body performance and the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the initial operation may only have some of the same operating mode, or may have all of the same operating mode. Furthermore, the operating modes of the two may all be different.

In addition, when a moving object effect is executed in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare effect, the moving object can be operated by a special action and an effect display corresponding to the moving object effect can be displayed. If the action confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period of time, it can be determined to be an action error and the action confirmation control can be performed again. If the action confirmation control has been performed over a specific period of time, the special action can be restricted when the moving object effect is executed, while an effect display can be displayed. In this way, the initial action cannot be interfered with by the special action, and the player can be informed by the effect display that the moving object effect has been executed.

Form 4 (power cut immediately after fanfare begins)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a fanfare effect will be described with reference to Fig. 354. Fig. 354 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a fanfare effect.

As shown in Figure 354, after the variable display based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern ends with the static display of a combination of jackpot confirmed symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the symbol confirmation display period ends and the jackpot start command is received by the effect control CPU 120, which starts the jackpot fanfare effect. After a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect starts, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately after the fanfare effect begins" refers specifically to the timing immediately after CPU 103 begins controlling the jackpot, and immediately after the effect control CPU 120, upon receiving the jackpot start command transmitted based on CPU 103's recovery, begins the fanfare effect (introduction part). However, since only the power outage recovery command is transmitted upon CPU 103's recovery after hot start startup, the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine the current game state (e.g., whether or not it is in the fanfare period) until it receives the jackpot opening command. Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, the above-frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will be in a state corresponding to recovery (e.g., off), and the background music (BGM) will be in a state corresponding to recovery (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, a restoration display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored, please wait" against a black background, indicating that the power is being restored (see FIG. 370), and the fact that the power is being restored is announced until the next command is received, that is, for the remaining period of the fanfare.

In addition, operation confirmation control is initiated during the remaining fanfare period announcing that the power outage is being restored, and ends before the fanfare period ends and the round of play begins. During operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g light up in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but at a lower brightness than when they light up during performance operation control.

After that, when a command specifying that the large prize opening is open is received for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 can determine that the first time has started, and so the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the jackpot music that will be output during the jackpot, and background music (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot music will begin to be output. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner that indicates that the jackpot music can be selected from multiple songs.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect begins and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, during the operation confirmation control that begins during the remaining period of the fanfare, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, which are the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the effect operation control (movable body effect in the win/lose button effect).This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies lower brightness than when the effect operation control is executed, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to confirm due to glare.

Furthermore, upon receiving a command indicating that the large prize opening has opened, effects corresponding to round play (light emission and sound output corresponding to the music played during a jackpot) are initiated. Specifically, during the round play period, the large prize opening is open for an extended period, allowing a large number of game balls to enter. This period is more advantageous to the player than the fanfare period or ending period of a jackpot, and therefore a lively round play effect is provided using images, lights, and sounds. However, by ending the operation confirmation control before the round play effect corresponding to this round play begins, players can enjoy the round play effect without having to worry about the moving body performing its initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect begins and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the fanfare effect period and initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the fanfare effect ends (see Figure 325 (F2) to (F6)).

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the recovery indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare performance and the power is then turned on. It is also capable of performing recovery illumination control to cause the operating upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, and upper frame movable body LED 9f to illuminate in a manner corresponding to the recovery indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white illumination). It is also possible to perform operation confirmation control in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on. This prevents the processing at power-on from becoming too complicated.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable body that is performing initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the brightness of the light emitted by the movable body LEDs during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

Furthermore, the image display device 5 displays a common recovery indicator 132SG510 in both cases: if a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on; and if a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare effect and then the power is turned on. However, for example, if a power outage occurs during variable display in a low base state and then the power is turned on, the right-hit prompt indicator 132SG430 will not be displayed when the recovery indicator 132SG510 is displayed. However, if a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare effect and then the power is turned on, the right-hit prompt indicator 132SG430 will be displayed when the recovery indicator 132SG510 is displayed. Although there are differences, as long as the display mode of at least the recovery indicator 132SG510 is the same, the display modes of the other indicators do not need to be the same.

In addition, if a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a jackpot and the power is then turned on, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed at the same time as the recovery display 132SG510. However, for example, regardless of the game state, only the recovery display 132SG510 may be displayed when the power is turned on after a power outage, and it may not be necessary to determine whether or not to display the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 depending on the game state. Furthermore, the display mode of the recovery display 132SG510 may be different depending on whether a power outage occurs during variable display in a low base state and the power is then turned on, and whether a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a jackpot and the power is then turned on. In this case, it is preferable that the display mode encourages a right-hit operation when a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a jackpot and the power is then turned on.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during a fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and cause the movable bodies that are performing their initial operations, such as the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lit).If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, that are not performing their initial operations, can light up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off in this embodiment) throughout the execution period of the fanfare performance, and the initial highlight mode (white lit) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off).In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating through operation confirmation control, even during recovery.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 causes the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable bodies performing initial operation to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), it controls the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable bodies to light up at a lower brightness than the mode corresponding to the music during a jackpot (see Figure 329 (B)), thereby reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load.

In addition, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the lighting mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (music played during a jackpot), so even if the fanfare effect was playing before the power outage, it is possible to notify the player that restoration is underway when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, the operation mode of each movable body under operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of each movable body under performance operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position), and the movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed under operation confirmation control, and emit light in a rainbow flash mode during the first period (for example, the advance operation period) and in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode during the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). This makes it easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed.

Form 5 (power cut just before the fanfare ends)
Next, the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fanfare effect will be described with reference to Figs. 355 to 357. Fig. 355 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fanfare effect. Fig. 356 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the operation confirmation control is executed during a fanfare effect. Fig. 357 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the below-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in Figure 355, after a power outage occurs just before the jackpot fanfare effect that started upon receiving a jackpot start command ends, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start mode (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately before the end of the fanfare effect" specifically refers to the timing immediately before the end of the fanfare effect (right-hit notification part) started by the effect control CPU 120 based on receiving a jackpot start command, in other words, the timing immediately before the end of the fanfare period during which the CPU 103 waits from the time it starts controlling the jackpot until it starts controlling the round of play (for example, the timing approximately 5000 ms before the end of the fanfare period).

In this case, after starting with a hot start, the presentation control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command sent when the CPU 103 recovers and the large prize opening open command corresponding to the first time. Based on this, throughout the round of play, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, and the upper frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot, the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner suggesting music selection, and background music (BGM) will be output in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot.

When started with a hot start, if there is remaining time in the fanfare period (for example, approximately 1000 ms), the CPU 103 will receive a power outage recovery command based on its recovery, and then after the remaining time of 1000 ms has elapsed, the first corresponding command to specify that the large prize slot is open will be received. During the remaining time in the fanfare period, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attacker LED 9c will be turned off, and background sound (BGM) will not be output. The movable body LEDs may also emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery period.

Furthermore, after operation confirmation control of each movable body begins with the start of the first game, the operation confirmation control ends before the opening control of the large prize opening for that first game ends and the next round of play begins. During operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attacker LED 9c emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control.

After that, after receiving a command specifying after the large prize opening has been opened in the first round, the performance control CPU 120 receives a command specifying while the large prize opening is open in the second round. The frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will then light up in an open mode to emphasize the opening for a predetermined period of time, and then light up in a mode corresponding to the jackpot music that is output during the jackpot, and background music (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot music will begin to be output. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a mode indicating that the jackpot music can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a mode corresponding to the opening.

In this way, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the fanfare effect and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, during the operation confirmation control that begins during the round play period, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, which are the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but they will light up at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control. This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when the performance operation control is executed, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to confirm due to glare.

In addition, the operation confirmation control in the event that the power is cut off and then turned back on just before the fanfare performance ends can be completed before the opening control of the large prize opening for the first round of play ends, so even after the initial operation has ended, players can aim to win at the large prize opening without being obstructed by the moving body.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the special prize opening opening control period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the special prize opening opening control for the first play ends (see Figure 325 (F8) to (F9)).

Also, as shown in Figure 356 (A), in round play where the large prize opening is controlled to be open for a specified period after the fanfare effect has ended, images for the round effect are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and a right-hit promotion display 132SG430 indicating the direction in which the game ball will be shot is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and round play-related displays related to the round game, such as the number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, and number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, are displayed on the upper side of the display screen.

Also, as shown in Figure 356 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Also, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In detail, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where only the support section 32b can overlap, the number of rounds display 132SG451 and the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 are displayed in a position where the presentation section 32a and part of the support section 32b can overlap, and the number of winning balls display 132SG452 and the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453 are displayed in a position where the presentation section 32a can overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the upper and lower movable bodies 32A and 32B perform their initial operations will be explained based on Figures 357(A) and (B).

As shown in Figure 357 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 356 (A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position and passes through the intermediate position, the presentation section 32a overlaps in front of the number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, and number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see these displays. Furthermore, the support section 32b overlaps in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 356 (B)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position and descends to the presentation position, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 becomes visible, but because part of the consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454 overlaps with the presentation section 32a on the front side, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454. However, because the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, and number of balls output display 132SG453 do not overlap with either the presentation section 32a or the support section 32b, the player can see these displays (see Figure 356 (C)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 357 (A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

As shown in Figure 357 (A), when an initial operation is performed during round play, the time during which the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B overlap with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (e.g., number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a significant impact on play, is less likely to be obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In other words, during round play, when the big prize opening is opened and the player has an advantage, if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A or the under-board movable body 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to make the game ball enter the prize by performing a right-hit operation while the big prize opening is open, which may cause the player to suffer a disadvantage. Therefore, it is preferable that the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 maintains high visibility compared to other big prize information displays.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 357 (B), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 356 (A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and even after it reaches the presentation position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figures 356 (D) and (E)). Furthermore, the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps with each display remains the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

As shown in Figure 357 (A), when an initial operation is performed during a round of play, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (e.g., number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a significant impact on play, is less likely to be obstructed by the on-board movable body 32A or below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

Furthermore, while the initial operation is being performed, the under-board movable body 32B does not overlap with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 or the jackpot information display (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.), so it is visible to the player.

In other words, during round play, when the jackpot opening gives the player an advantage, if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the initially operating on-board movable element 32A or the initially operating below-board movable element 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to make the game ball enter the jackpot by operating the right hand while the jackpot opening is open, which could put the player at a disadvantage. However, in this embodiment, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is obscured for a shorter period of time by the initially operating on-board movable element 32A or the initially operating below-board movable element 32B compared to other jackpot information displays, preventing the player from suffering any disadvantages.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of a movable body undergoing initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of a movable body not undergoing initial operation lights up in a mode corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (round performance). However, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (round performance), making it possible to draw attention to movable bodies undergoing initial operation even during round play.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body that is performing its initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white light), while the movable body LED of the second movable body that is not performing its initial operation lights up in a mode that corresponds to the music played during a jackpot (round performance).However, when the first movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body lights up in an initial highlight mode (white light), while the movable body LED of the second movable body lights up in a mode that corresponds to the music played during a jackpot (round performance), making it possible to draw attention to the movable body performing its initial operation even during round play.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation lights up in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) during a round play when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare performance ends is the same as the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation lights up in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) during a round play when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare performance ends. is not limited to this, and in a round of play when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare effect ends, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation lights up in a manner corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (round effect) may be lower than the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation lights up in a manner corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (round effect) in a round of play when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare effect ends. By doing so, it is possible to reduce power consumption when the power is turned on and lighten the load.

Mode 6 (power outage immediately after the start of the first round of play)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round of play will be described with reference to Figure 358. Figure 358 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round of play.

As shown in Figure 358, after the jackpot fanfare has ended, a power outage occurs immediately after the round performance begins based on the reception of a command specifying that the jackpot opening is in progress, indicating that the first round of play (first round) has begun. Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start mode (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately after the round effect has started" specifically includes the timing immediately after the effect control CPU 120 starts the round effect based on the receipt of a command specifying that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the first round of play has started, in other words, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 starts controlling the first round of play (for example, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 starts controlling the opening of the large prize opening in the round of play (for example, approximately 1000 ms later)).

In this case, after the hot start, only the power outage restoration command is sent upon recovery of the CPU 103. Therefore, the presentation control CPU 120 cannot determine the current game state (e.g., whether it is currently in a round of play) until it receives the command to restore the first large prize opening. Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to a restoration in progress (e.g., off), and the background music (BGM) is in a state corresponding to a restoration in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 disappears at the startup timing, a restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 370 ), displaying the words "Power restoration in progress. Please wait" on a black background, indicating that power is being restored. This notification continues until the next command, the command to restore the first large prize opening, is received, i.e., until the first round of play ends.

Furthermore, operation confirmation control is initiated during the first round of play when it is announced that the power outage is being restored, and is completed before the end of the first round of play. During operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control.

After that, when a command specifying that the period during which the large prize opening changed from an open state to a closed state is received, followed by a command specifying that the period during which the large prize opening changed from a closed state to an open state is received, the performance control CPU 120 can determine that the first round of play has ended and the second round of play has begun. As a result, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the jackpot music output during a jackpot, and background music (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot music will begin to be output. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the jackpot music can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the open state.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round performance and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, during the operation confirmation control that begins during that round of play, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, which are the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when performing the performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to see due to glare.

In addition, if the power is cut off and then turned on immediately after the opening control of the large prize opening during the first round of play has begun, the operation confirmation control can be completed before the opening control of the large prize opening during that first round of play ends. This means that even after the initial operation has ended, players can aim to win at the large prize opening without being obstructed by the moving body.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the opening control of the special prize opening in the first round of play has begun and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, the opening control period of the special prize opening in one round of play and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control of the special prize opening in that first round of play ends (see Figure 325 (F9)).

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to an open state and the power is then turned on. It is also capable of performing recovery light emission control, which causes the operating upper board movable element LED9d, lower board movable element LED9e, and upper frame movable element LED9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white light). This allows for operation confirmation control in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to an open state and the power is then turned on. This prevents the processing at power-on from becoming too complicated.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable body that is performing initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the brightness of the light emitted by the movable body LEDs during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, if a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to the open state and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and cause the movable bodies that are performing their initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lit).If a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to the open state and the power is then turned on, the movable bodies that are not performing their initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, can light up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off in this embodiment) for the period during which the large prize opening is controlled to the open state, and the initial highlight mode (white lit) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off).In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating through operation confirmation control, even during recovery.

In addition, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the lighting mode corresponding to the round performance (music played during a jackpot), so it is possible to notify the player that restoration is underway when the power is turned on, even if the round performance was in progress before the power outage.

In addition, in the above-mentioned form 6, if a power outage occurs immediately after the second or subsequent round of play (R2-R10) has started, the operation will be the same as if a power outage occurred immediately after the control of the first round of play (opening of the large prize opening) has started as described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Mode 7 (power outage just before the end of the first round of play)
Next, the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of one round of play will be described with reference to Figure 359. Figure 359 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of one round of play.

As shown in Figure 359, after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the round performance that began based on the reception of a command specifying that the big prize slot is open, indicating that the first round of play (first round) has begun, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the big prize game state resumes.

More specifically, "immediately before the round effect ends" refers to the timing immediately before the round effect started by the effect control CPU 120 based on receiving the large prize opening open command indicating that the first round of play has begun ends, in other words, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the first round of play (for example, the timing immediately before the control of opening the large prize opening in one round of play ends (e.g., approximately 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls reaches one ball before the upper limit (e.g., 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the round interval period in the first round of play, etc.).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, when the CPU 103 recovers, it receives a power outage recovery command and a command to specify when the first large prize opening is complete. The presentation control CPU 120 determines that it is the first round interval, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attack LED 9c enter a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) enters a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 disappears, a recovery in progress display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 370). This notification continues until the next command, the second large prize opening command, is received, i.e., until the first round interval ends.

After that, when a second command to specify that the jackpot opening is in progress is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, and the upper frame movable element LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for the first predetermined time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the music played during the jackpot (round performance), and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the music played during the jackpot will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the music played during the jackpot can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the second round of play and ends before the end of the second round of play period. Note that operation confirmation control may also be initiated during the round interval period of the first round of play. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control will begin during the second round of play that follows that round, and the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies lower brightness than when performing the performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to see.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control period for the special prize opening and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control of the special prize opening in the second round of play is completed (see Figure 325 (F10)).

In addition, in the above-mentioned form 7, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the second or subsequent round of play (R2-R10), the operation will be the same as if a power outage occurred immediately after the control of the first round of play (opening of the large prize opening) began as described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Form 8 (power interruption immediately after the start of a special interval)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval will be described with reference to Fig. 360. Fig. 360 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval.

In this embodiment, if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the round interval period after the opening control of the large prize entry port has ended in all rounds of play is 0.5 seconds, whereas if the jackpot type is jackpot C, jackpot D, or jackpot E, the special round interval period after the opening control of the large prize entry port has ended in the third round of play is 30 seconds (see Figure 281), and during this special round interval period, a promotion effect (see Figures 326 (F21) to (F29)) is performed as a special interval effect.

As shown in Figure 360, after a power outage occurs just before the third round of jackpots C to E ends, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start mode (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately before the end of the third round of jackpots C to E" specifically refers to the timing immediately before the end of the round of jackpots initiated by the presentation control CPU 120 based on the receipt of the large prize opening opening command indicating that the third round of play has begun, in other words, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the opening of the large prize opening in the third round of play (for example, the timing immediately before control of the opening of the large prize opening in the third round of play ends (for example, approximately 5000 ms before), or the timing when the number of winning balls reaches one ball before the upper limit (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, when the CPU 103 recovers, it receives a power outage recovery command and a command to indicate when the third large prize opening has been opened. The presentation control CPU 120 determines that the third special round interval is in progress, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attack LED 9c become active (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) becomes active (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 disappears, a recovery display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 370). This notification continues until the next command, the second large prize opening command, is received, i.e., until the third special round interval ends.

After that, when the fourth command to specify that the jackpot opening is in progress is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, and the upper frame movable element LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for the first predetermined time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the music played during the jackpot (round performance), and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the music played during the jackpot will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the music played during the jackpot can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize slot during the third round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control begins during the third special round interval period and ends before the end of the third special round interval period. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize slot during the third round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, operation confirmation control will begin during the third special round interval, and the initial operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when performing the performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to see.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the special prize opening during the third round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, the opening control of the special prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the end of the third special round interval period (see Figure 326 (F21) to (F29)).

In the above-mentioned form 8, an example was given in which a special round interval is set after the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play has ended, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special round interval may also be set after the opening control of the large prize opening in a round of play other than the third has ended.

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on. It is also capable of performing recovery light emission control, which causes the operating upper board movable element LED9d, lower board movable element LED9e, and upper frame movable element LED9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white light). This allows for operation confirmation control in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on. This prevents the processing at power-on from becoming too complicated.

In addition, if a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and cause the movable bodies that are performing their initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lit).If a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state and the power is then turned on, the movable bodies that are not performing their initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, can light up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off in this embodiment) for the period during which the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state, and the initial highlight mode (white lit) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off).In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating through operation confirmation control, even during recovery.

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable body that is performing initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the brightness of the light emitted by the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (the movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, if a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on, the effect control CPU 120 will display the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and can execute an interval effect when the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state during one round of play.In the interval effect, the movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button 631B, and the attacker LED 9c, can be made to light up in a manner corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (interval effect), and the movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, which are performing their initial operation, can be made to light up in an initial highlighting manner (white light). Then, if a power outage occurs at the same time the big prize opening is controlled to a closed state (special round interval) during the third round of play and the power is then turned on, the movable bodies that have not yet performed their initial operation (the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button 631B, and the attacker LED 9c) can be made to light up in a manner corresponding to the recovery display (turned off in this embodiment) throughout the execution period of the third special round interval control, and the initial highlighting mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the interval presentation (music during a big win). This makes it possible to notify that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a power outage recovery command and a command to specify after the third large prize opening are received upon recovery of the CPU 103, during the third special round interval period, the image display device 5 displays the recovery indicator 132SG510, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are turned on (for example, turned off) in a state corresponding to the recovery state, and the background sound (BGM) is turned on (for example, turned off) in a state corresponding to the recovery state. In the example shown, the display changes to a silent state (for example, silence), and this recovery state continues until the fourth command specifying that the large prize slot is open is received, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the interval presentation is made up of an introduction part (see FIG. 326 (F21) to (F23)) and a result announcement part (see FIG. 326 (F24) to (F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and announces the result of the introduction part, it is preferable that the operation confirmation control be performed before the result announcement part starts. This makes it possible to avoid the movable body performing the initial operation interfering with the visibility of the result announcement part in the interval presentation.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a movable body presentation using the under-board movable body 32B as a promotion presentation in the result notification part (see Figure 326 (F24)), and when the movable body presentation is executed, it is possible to control the presentation operation in a manner that is common to the operation manner of the under-board movable body 32B that operates under operation confirmation control, and it is preferable that sound output is limited when the under-board movable body 32B operates under operation confirmation control, and that when the under-board movable body 32B operates in the movable body presentation, a sound corresponding to the movable body presentation is output. In this way, it is easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or presentation operation control is being performed.

Furthermore, in the movable body presentation in the result notification part, an effect display corresponding to the movable body presentation (see FIG. 326 (F24)) can be displayed. The operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the promotion presentation (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the presentation position). If the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, an operation error can be determined and the operation confirmation control can be performed again. If a power outage occurs just before the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state during a round of play in which an interval presentation is executed, and the operation confirmation control that begins when the power is then turned on does not complete normally, the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion presentation. If a promotion presentation is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body presentation can be restricted while an effect display can be displayed. In this way, the promotion presentation can prevent the operation confirmation control from being interfered with, and the effect display can indicate to the player that the movable body presentation has been executed.

Furthermore, the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the promotion effect (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position), and the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed under operation confirmation control, and in performance operation control (for example, in the case of a successful promotion in the promotion effect), emit light in a rainbow flash mode during the first period (for example, the advancement operation period), and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode during the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). This makes it easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed.

In this embodiment, the movable body effect executed during the special round interval period after the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play has ended is an example in which the under-board movable body 32B rises to perform an advancement effect that notifies the player that the jackpot is a 10-round jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player than a 3-round jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various movable body effects can be applied in addition to the advancement effect described above.

For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine in which the game state after the jackpot ends in a probability variable state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal state) based on the detection of the game ball passing through the second count switch 132SG024 during a specific round of play during a jackpot, as shown in Figure 361, the movable body effect executed during the special round interval period may be such that the under-board movable body 32B rises, thereby performing a V promotion effect that notifies the player that the jackpot in question is a probability variable jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player than a non-probability variable jackpot (a jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot ends is not a probability variable state).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 361, if this V promotion effect is composed of an introductory part and a result notification part that is executed after the introductory part and notifies the result of the introductory part, if a power outage occurs at the same time as the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state, and then the power is turned on, it is preferable that the operation confirmation control ends before the result notification part of the V promotion effect starts.

Form 9 (power interruption immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed) <Modification>
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 362. Fig. 362 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed.

In this embodiment, an example has been given of a form in which a promotion effect (see Figure 326 (F21) to (F29)) is performed as a special interval effect during the special round interval period (30 seconds) after the opening control of the large prize opening has ended in the third round of play. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect described above may also be executable during a specific round of play period (for example, the period during which the opening control and closing control of the large prize opening are being performed in the third round of play), as shown in Figure 362.

In this case, the promotion effect is composed of an introduction part (see Figure 326 (F21) to (F23)) and a result notification part (see Figure 326 (F24) to (F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part. If the jackpot type is jackpot A (3R jackpot), the result notification part will notify the player that it is a jackpot A in a promotion failure manner, and if the jackpot type is jackpot B (10R jackpot), which is more advantageous to the player than jackpot A (3R jackpot), the result notification part will notify the player that it is a jackpot B in a promotion success manner. In other words, it is preferable that the promotion effect be executable when the variable display result of the first special pattern is a jackpot (first hit).

Then, as shown in Figure 362, after a power outage occurs just before the start of the third round of jackpots A and B, which executes the promotion effect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

The timing immediately before the start of the third round effect in which the promotion effect is executed refers, in more detail, to the timing immediately before the end of the round effect started by the effect control CPU 120 based on the receipt of the command specifying that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the second round of play has started; in other words, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the opening of the large prize opening in the second round of play (for example, the timing immediately before the end of control of the opening of the large prize opening in the second round of play (for example, approximately 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls is one ball before the upper limit (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the second round interval period, etc.).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, when the CPU 103 recovers, it receives a power outage recovery command and a command to specify when the second large prize opening is about to begin. The presentation control CPU 120 determines that it is the second round interval, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attack LED 9c enter a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) enters a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, a recovery in progress display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 370). This notification continues until the next command, the third large prize opening opening command, is received, i.e., until the second round interval ends.

After that, when the third command to specify that the large prize opening is open is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for an initial predetermined period of time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part), and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part) will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part) can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize opening during the second round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the second round interval period (during recovery) or the third round of play, and ends before the part announcing the results of the promotion effect executed during the third round of play begins. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during the effect operation control (promotion effect).

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize slot during the second round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, operation confirmation control will begin during the second round interval period or the third round of play, and the initial operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control (promotion effect). This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when performing the performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to see due to glare.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the special prize opening during the second round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control of the special prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the result notification part of the promotion effect executed during the third round of play begins.

In addition, while the above-mentioned form 9 illustrates an example in which the promotion effect is executed during the third round of play, the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect may be executed during a round of play other than the third.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of a movable body performing an initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of a movable body not performing an initial operation lights up in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). However, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part), making it possible to draw attention to the movable body performing an initial operation even during the promotion performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the initially operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light) rather than in a mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part), thereby reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is then turned on, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the initial operation of the movable body will end before the operation prompt part of the introductory part of the promotion effect executed in the third round of play, that is, the operation prompt effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B, begins, so the visibility of the operation prompt effect in the introductory part will not be obstructed by the movable body operating under operation confirmation control.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 ensures that the operating mode (the mode in which the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position) is the same when performing initial operation and when performing performance operation in a promotion performance; when performing initial operation, the under-board movable body LED 9e lights up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlight mode; white light), but the output of background sound (BGM) is limited; and when performing performance operation in a promotion performance, the under-board movable body LED 9e lights up in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part) (for example, rainbow mode), while sound effects in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part) are output. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the initial operation or the promotion performance is being performed.

Furthermore, in the movable body presentation in the result notification part, an effect display corresponding to the movable body presentation (see FIG. 326 (F24)) can be displayed. The operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the promotion presentation (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the presentation position). If the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period of time, an operation error can be determined and the operation confirmation control can be performed again. If a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the third round presentation in which the promotion presentation is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is then turned on does not complete normally, the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion presentation. If the promotion presentation is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body presentation can be restricted while an effect display can be displayed. In this way, the promotion presentation does not interfere with the operation confirmation control, and the effect display can indicate to the player that the movable body presentation has been executed.

Mode 10 (power outage just before the end of the final round of play)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the final round of play will be described with reference to Fig. 363. Fig. 363 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the final round of play.

As shown in Figure 363, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the round performance that began based on the reception of a command specifying that the 10th round of play (final round) for jackpots B, D, and E has begun, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state is resumed.

More specifically, "immediately before the end of the round effect" refers to the timing immediately before the end of the round effect initiated by the effect control CPU 120 based on the receipt of the command specifying that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the 10th round of play has begun, in other words, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the 10th round of play (for example, the timing immediately before the end of control of the opening of the large prize opening in the final round of play (e.g., approximately 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls is one ball before the upper limit (e.g., 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the round interval period in the 10th round of play, etc.).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, when the CPU 103 recovers, it receives a power outage recovery command and a command to indicate when the 10th jackpot opening is complete. The presentation control CPU 120 determines that the 10th round interval is in progress, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attack LED 9c become active (e.g., off), and the background music (BGM) becomes active (e.g., silent). After the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 disappears, the recovery display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 370). This notification continues until the next command, the jackpot end command, is received, i.e., until the 10th round interval ends.

After that, when a jackpot end command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), and background music (BGM) corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part) will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g and attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the default (for example, lit white or off).

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the 10th round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending period and ends before the end of the ending period. Note that operation confirmation control may also be initiated during the round interval period of the 10th round of play. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the 10th and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending period, and the initial operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light). However, since these emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance), power consumption is reduced when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when performing performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from becoming too bright to be easily confirmed.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the tenth and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the start of the time-saving state notification part (see Figure 326 (F32) and (F34)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified during the ending period.

In addition, while the above-mentioned form 10 illustrates examples of operation for jackpots B, D, and E, in which the final round is 10 rounds, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of jackpots A and C, in which the final round is 3 rounds, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the third and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the round play period and initial operation period may be designed so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the start of the time-saving state notification part (Fig. 325 (F13)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified. Furthermore, the final round is not limited to the above-mentioned 3 or 10 rounds, and can be modified in various ways.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of a movable body performing an initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of a movable body not performing an initial operation lights up in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). However, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), making it possible to draw attention to movable bodies performing an initial operation even during the ending performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g of the movable body that is performing the initial operation will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), while the movable body LEDs of the other movable bodies that are not operating will light up in a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), making it possible to indicate that the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control even during the ending performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, will emit light at a low brightness in an initial highlight mode (white light) rather than in a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), thereby reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load.

In addition to the movable body LEDs, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b are also designed to emit light at a lower brightness during the operation confirmation control period than when emitting light in a manner corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). This makes it possible to reduce power consumption and lighten the load when the power is turned on without reducing the decorative effect.

Form 11 (power outage immediately after the beginning of the ending performance)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance will be described with reference to Fig. 364. Fig. 364 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance.

As shown in Figure 364, after the round interval presentation ends in the 10th round (final round) of jackpots B, D, and E, a power outage occurs immediately after the ending presentation begins based on the receipt of a jackpot end command, and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately after the ending presentation has begun" specifically includes the timing immediately after the presentation control CPU 120 has begun the introductory part of the ending presentation based on the receipt of the jackpot end command, that is, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 has begun control of the ending period (for example, immediately after the completion of control over the closure of the jackpot opening in the final round of play (for example, approximately 1000 ms later)).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, only the power outage restoration command is received as the CPU 103 recovers. Therefore, the presentation control CPU 120 cannot determine the current game state (whether it is in the ending period, etc.) until it receives the next command (e.g., a customer waiting demo command). Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c will be in a state corresponding to the restoration in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) will be in a state corresponding to the restoration in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the start-up preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of startup disappears, the restoration in progress display 132SG510 will be displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 370), and the fact that the power outage is being restored will be notified until the next command is received.

After that, when a customer waiting demo designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the high-base music (time-saving performance), and background music (BGM) corresponding to the high-base music (time-saving performance) will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner corresponding to the default (for example, lit white or off), and the attacker LED 9c will be turned off.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending presentation and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending period and ends before the ending period ends. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during presentation operation control (movable body presentation in the win/lose button presentation).

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending period, and the initial operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance). This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, while also preventing the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies from being too bright and making it difficult to confirm their operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending presentation and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the time-saving state notification part (see Figure 326 (F32) and (F34)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified starts during the ending period.

In addition, while the above-mentioned form 10 illustrates examples of operation in jackpots B, D, and E, where the final round is 10 rounds, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of jackpots A and C, where the final round is 3 rounds, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the third and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the round play period and initial operation period may be designed so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed during the ending period before the start of the time-saving state notification part (Fig. 325 (F13)), in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified.

Also, while the ending periods for jackpots B, D, and E (10-round jackpots) were explained above as an example, the same operation applies to the ending periods for jackpots A and C (3-round jackpots), so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the recovery indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of an ending performance and the power is then turned on. It is also capable of performing recovery illumination control to cause the operating upper-board movable body LED 9d, lower-board movable body LED 9e, and upper-frame movable body LED 9f to illuminate in a manner corresponding to the recovery indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white illumination). This allows for operation confirmation control in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of an ending performance and the power is then turned on. This prevents the processing at power-on from becoming too complicated.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and cause the movable bodies that are performing their initial operations, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lit).If a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, the movable bodies that are not performing their initial operations, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, can light up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off in this embodiment) throughout the ending period, and the initial highlight mode (white lit) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off).In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating through operation confirmation control, even during recovery.

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable body that is performing initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the brightness of the light emitted by the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (the movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable bodies performing initial operations. However, this light-emitting mode (turning off) is not used to control the performance operation (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance). By doing this, it is possible to notify that recovery is underway when the power is turned on, even if the ending performance was in progress before the power outage.

Forms 12 and 20 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during time reduction)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during time reduction will be explained based on Figures 365 and 366. Figure 365 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and operation confirmation control is started based on the subsequent power-on. Figure 366 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body on the board and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body below the board and various displays.

As shown in Figure 365 (A), when the time-saving state is B, C1, or C2, a "BATTLE RUSH effect" is executed as a time-saving effect. In the BATTLE RUSH effect, the display screen of the image display device 5 displays a second background display 132SG320 depicting a night cityscape corresponding to the time-saving state, and an image of an ally character and an enemy character facing each other. In addition, a presentation mode display 132SG221 consisting of the words "BATTLE RUSH" is displayed at the top of the screen. Additionally, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a remaining time reduction indicator 132SG201 (in this example, the text "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 685) is displayed in accordance with the remaining variable display number controlled to the low probability/high base state, and in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-hit prompt indicator 132SG430 consisting of the text "right hit" and a right-pointing arrow is displayed, and in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5, a consecutive win count/total ball count indicator 132SG454 is displayed, which indicates the number of consecutive jackpot wins and the total number of balls dispensed during the consecutive wins.

In addition, the display area 5SL at the top left of the screen displays small symbols corresponding to the first and second pending memory counts and decorative symbols, and on the left side of the screen, an active display area 132SG013 and a second pending display area 132SG012 corresponding to the second pending memory are arranged vertically; for example, active display 132SG003 is displayed in active display area 132SG013, and four second pending displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in the second pending display area 132SG012, corresponding to the second pending memory count being 4.

As shown in Figure 365 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Furthermore, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the second hold display area 132SG012, which displays the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and the second hold display 132SG002, is displayed in a position where only the support part 32b of the above-board movable body 32A can overlap, the display area 5SL, which displays the second hold memory count display, is displayed in a position where the effect part 32a and support part 32b can overlap, and the effect mode display 132SG221 is displayed in a position where the effect part 32a can overlap. On the other hand, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 and the remaining time-reduction display 132SG201 are displayed in a position where they can overlap with the effect part 32c and part of the support part 32d of the below-board movable body 32B.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform their initial operations will be explained based on Figures 366(A) and (B). Note that in Figures 366(A) and (B), the performance mode display 132SG221 and the remaining time reduction display 132SG201 are omitted.

As shown in Figure 366 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the following: right-hit prompt display 132SG430, second reserved memory count (display area 5SL), second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, remaining time reduction display 132SG201, and presentation mode display 132SG221, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 366 (A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the effect portion 32a overlaps the front side of the second pending memory count display (display area 5SL), making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the display (see Figure 365 (B)). After that, when the on-board movable body 32A moves to the intermediate position and the second pending memory count display becomes visible, the support portion 32b overlaps the front side of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 365 (C)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes the intermediate position and descends to the presentation position, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 becomes visible; however, because the presentation unit 32a overlaps the front side of part of the second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012), it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the second hold display 132SG002. However, because the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, second hold memory count display, consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, remaining time reduction display 132SG201, and presentation mode display 132SG221 do not overlap with either the presentation unit 32a or the support unit 32b, the player can see these displays (see Figure 365 (D)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 366 (A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 366 (B), when the under-board movable body 32B is located in the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, second reserved memory count (display area 5SL), second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), consecutive game count/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, or remaining time-reduction display 132SG201, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 365 (D)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and even after it reaches the presentation position, it does not overlap with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, second reserved memory count (display area 5SL), second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), or presentation mode display 132SG221, so the player can see these displays. However, because the presentation part 32c and support part 32d overlap with part of the front side of the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 and the remaining time-reduction display 132SG201, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see these displays (see Figures 365 (D) and (E)). The same situation occurs when the under-board movable body 32B overlaps with each display when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if an initial operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage occurs during time-saving mode and the machine is started up with a hot start, each movable body is set to perform its initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second hold memory number (display area 5SL) or second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012) and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454).As a result, the visibility of the second hold memory number (display area 5SL) and second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012), which have a significant impact on gameplay, is less likely to be obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A or below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In other words, in a time-saving mode where the player can benefit from the variable display of the second special symbol by hitting the right button, if the second pending memory count (display area 5SL) or second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012) is covered by the on-board movable body 32A performing its initial operation, the player may miss the opportunity to generate the second start winning by hitting the right button during the period in which it is possible to generate the second start winning, which may be to the player's detriment. Therefore, it is preferable that the second pending memory count (display area 5SL) and second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012) maintain visibility compared to other jackpot information displays.

Furthermore, while the consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454 does not change during the time-saving mode, the display mode of the second reserved memory count (display area 5SL) and second reserved display 132SG002 can change even during the time-saving mode due to changes in the number of winnings or advance notices. Therefore, the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B can prevent the visibility of the second reserved memory, which may change, from being obstructed compared to the unchanged consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454.

In addition, it is preferable that the range in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the number of consecutive games/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 due to the initial operation be larger than the range in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second pending memory number (display area 5SL) or the second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012) due to the initial operation.By doing this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the second pending memory, which may change, from being obstructed more than the visibility of the number of consecutive games/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, which does not change, due to the on-board movable body 32A or the on-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 366 (A) and (B), if an initial operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage occurs during time-saving and the machine is started up with a hot start, each movable body is set to perform its initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls played display 132SG454) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a significant impact on gameplay, is less likely to be obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A or below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In other words, in a time-saving state where the player can benefit from the variable display of the second special symbol by hitting the right button, if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to generate the second start winning by hitting the right button during the period in which it is possible to generate the second start winning, which may be to the player's detriment. Therefore, it is preferable that the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 maintains high visibility compared to other jackpot information displays.

Furthermore, if the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B operate in a manner common to the predetermined performance operation control in the operation confirmation control (for example, moving from the origin position to the performance position), if a power outage occurs during time reduction, and then the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, and an initial operation is performed, the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, while the below-board movable body 32B is displaying jackpot information regarding the jackpot. If the time during which the movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is approximately the same as or longer than the time during which the movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454), the movable body 32A above the board and the movable body 32B below the board may be operated in such a way that the time during which the movable body 32A above the board overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the movable body 32B below the board overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454).

For example, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B can be configured to move from the origin position during initial operation to a position that overlaps with the second pending memory count, second pending display 132SG002, and right-hit prompt display 132SG430, but can be configured to move to an intermediate position and then return to the origin position. This prevents the movable body operating during initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the second pending memory count, second pending display 132SG002, and right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 366 (A) and (B), if an initial operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage occurs during time reduction and the machine is started up with a hot start, the initial operation of each movable body is set so that the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second hold memory number (display area 5SL) or the second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012) and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see. This makes it less likely that the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a greater impact on play than the second hold memory number or the second hold display 132SG002, will be obstructed.

Furthermore, in embodiments 12 and 20, the overlap between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the second hold memory count (display area 5SL), the second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012), and the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454) was explained. In this embodiment, the operation confirmation control compares the total overlap time with the various displays actually displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation. However, regardless of whether the various displays are displayed or not, it is sufficient that the overlap time with the display area in which the various displays are displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation satisfies the above relationship.

Form 13 (power interruption immediately before the end of the change before the button notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation preceding the fluctuation in which the button notice is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 367. Fig. 367 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation preceding the fluctuation in which the button notice is executed.

As shown in Figure 367, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing variable pattern has begun, if a power outage occurs just before the variable display ends when a losing symbol combination is displayed statically in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, during the period when the losing symbol combination is temporarily displayed statically, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when decorative symbols are displayed statically in the variable display until the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the next variable display), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), if there is a pending memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will begin.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after the power outage recovery command and the symbol determination command transmitted based on the CPU 103's recovery are received, and until the next command, the variable display start command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 370), and the fact that power is being restored is notified until the next command is received, i.e., during the symbol determination display period.

Then, based on the reception of the variable display start command and the variation pattern command, the variable display preview effect determination process (step S132SG610) determines whether to execute a reach preview, which suggests whether a reach state will occur, and a button preview, which prompts the player to press a button to determine whether a reach state will occur. The variable display begins in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern and the determined preview effect, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g light up in a manner corresponding to the variation (background), and background sound (BGM) corresponding to the variation (background) begins to be output. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage recovery command was received, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of an effect image corresponding to the variation (background) begins.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is initiated. After that, once the initial operation of each movable body is completed, the result notification part begins, in which the results of the button preview are notified.

As shown in Figures 323 (D6) and (D7), the button preview (result notification part) notifies the player of the result of operating the chance button 631B, indicating whether or not a reach state has been reached. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part begins, the visibility of the result notification part, such as the reach state being reached, will be hindered by the movable body moving due to the initial movement, and the player may misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation that results in the button preview, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the button preview (result notification part) begins, thereby preventing the visibility of the button preview (result notification part) from being obstructed by the movable body performing the initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the variation in which the button notification is executed, the period from the start of the variation to the start of the button notification (result notification part) and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the button notification (result notification part) starts (see Figure 323 (D1) to (D5)).

In this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a specified variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more. Thereafter, when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed to start the next variable display, it is determined that a button preview will be executed in that variable display. If it is determined that a button preview will be executed at the start of the variable display, the time from when the variable display starts to when the result notification part of the button preview is executed is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (e.g., approximately 20 seconds). Therefore, if a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the button preview is executed, the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the button preview (result notification part) begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a start winning occurs and the CPU 103 determines that a specific variation pattern in which a button preview is executed is a specific variation pattern, a specific presentation control command specifying specific information related to the specific variation pattern (e.g., a winning presentation designation command specifying the execution of a button preview) is transmitted. Based on the specific presentation control command, the presentation control CPU 120 may be able to change the execution period of the initial operation so that the initial operation is completed before the result notification part of the button preview begins.

For example, if a start winning occurs during a specified variable display and it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a button preview is executed will be used, a winning performance designation command (specific information) specifying that this is a specific variable pattern (with button preview) will be sent.

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed statically based on the transmission of the performance pattern confirmation designation command, and after the pattern confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern confirmation command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command specifying a specific fluctuation pattern (with button warning) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation currently being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with a shorter operating period (e.g., 5 seconds) than the initial operation currently being performed.

In more detail, the initial operation involves sequentially performing the maximum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (moving back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while the shortened initial operation involves simultaneously performing the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (e.g., returning to the origin immediately after passing through the origin position). Furthermore, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one moving body is in the middle of a maximum extension movement, that movement is interrupted and a retraction movement is performed, and once it returns to the origin position, the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body, including the one moving body, are simultaneously performed. Furthermore, if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation occurs immediately before the end of the initial operation (e.g., 5 seconds before the end), the operation should not switch to the shortened initial operation even if a specific movement pattern designation command is received.

For example, a light gathering effect (light gathering at the center of the screen to form the button image) can be executed immediately before the button image is displayed in the action promotion effect. Because the light gathering effect uses a large portion of the screen (an image that starts from the edge of the screen), it can overlap with the execution period of the initial action, providing an appropriate indication that the button image will be displayed.

For example, when a button image is displayed in the action promotion effect, the button's LED can be illuminated (red ⇔ off in 150 ms cycles), and the illumination pattern in this illumination pattern is not included in the illumination pattern that highlights the moving body performing the initial operation.

In addition, for example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation starts (to check the vibration motor 635E and notify that the initial operation has started), and it is also possible to vibrate the chance button 631B together with the display of a button image in the operation promotion effect (to indicate the expected degree of change), and at least one of the vibration duration, cycle, and light emission pattern of the button LED during vibration differs between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration when the button image is displayed.

Form 14 (power outage immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation for which the start notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation preceding a fluctuation for which a start-time notice is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 368. Fig. 368 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation preceding a fluctuation for which a start-time notice is executed.

As shown in Figure 368, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing variable pattern has begun, if a power outage occurs just before the variable display ends when a losing symbol combination is displayed statically in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, approximately 5,000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as during the period when the losing symbol combination is temporarily displayed statically, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when decorative symbols are displayed statically in the variable display until the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the next variable display), and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), if there is a pending memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will begin.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after the power outage recovery command and the symbol determination command transmitted based on the CPU 103's recovery are received, and until the next command, the variable display start command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 370), and the fact that power is being restored is notified until the next command is received, i.e., during the symbol determination display period.

Then, based on the reception of the variable display start command and the variation pattern command, the variable display preview effect determination process (step S132SG610) determines whether to execute the start preview, and the variable display begins in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern and the determined preview effect. The frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g illuminate in a manner corresponding to the specified display change in the start preview, and background sound (BGM) corresponding to the start preview begins to be output. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage recovery command was received, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of an effect image corresponding to the start preview (introduction part) begins.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is initiated. After the initial operation of each movable body is completed, the result notification part begins, in which the results of the start-up warning are reported.

As shown in Figures 321 (B3a) to (B6a), the start notice (result notification part) notifies the player of results such as whether the pending display has changed and what color it has changed to. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part starts, the movable body, which moves due to the initial movement, will interfere with the visibility of the result notification part, such as whether the pending display has changed, and there is a risk that the player will misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the start notice is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the start notice (result notification part) begins, thereby preventing the movable body performing the initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the start notice (result notification part).

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the variation for which the start notice is executed, the period from the start of the variation to the start of the start notice (result notification part) and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the start of the start notice (result notification part) (see Figures 321 (B2) to (B6)).

In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and then, when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed and the next variable display begins, a decision is made to execute a start notice for that variable display. If a decision is made to execute a start notice at the start of a variable display, the time from when the variable display begins to when the result notification part of the start notice is executed is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (e.g., approximately 20 seconds). Therefore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the variation in which the start notice (result notification part) is executed, the start notice (result notification part) is executed. Although an example has been given in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the notification part begins, the present invention is not limited to this. When a start winning occurs and the CPU 103 determines that a specific variation pattern in which a start warning is executed is present, a specific presentation control command specifying specific information regarding the specific variation pattern (for example, a winning presentation specification command specifying the execution of a start warning) may be transmitted, and the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to be able to change the execution period of the initial operation based on the specific presentation control command so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part begins as a result of the start warning.

For example, if a start winning occurs during a specified variable display and it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a start warning is executed will be used, a winning effect designation command (specific information) specifying that it is a specific variable pattern (with start warning) will be sent.

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed statically based on the transmission of the performance pattern confirmation designation command, and after the pattern confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern confirmation command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command specifying a specific fluctuation pattern (with warning at start) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation currently being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with an operating period shorter than the initial operation currently being performed (e.g., 5 seconds).

In more detail, the initial operation involves sequentially performing the maximum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (moving back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while the shortened initial operation involves simultaneously performing the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (e.g., returning to the origin immediately after passing through the origin position). Furthermore, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one moving body is in the middle of a maximum extension movement, that movement is interrupted and a retraction movement is performed, and once it returns to the origin position, the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body, including the one moving body, are simultaneously performed. Furthermore, if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation occurs immediately before the end of the initial operation (e.g., 5 seconds before the end), the operation should not switch to the shortened initial operation even if a specific movement pattern designation command is received.

For example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation begins, and also to vibrate the chance button 631B when the active hold turns red in Figure 321 (B6) (for entertainment purposes), and at least one of the vibration period, cycle, and light emission pattern of the button LED during vibration is different between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration when the color turns red. If the button vibration when the color turns red is performed during the initial operation, the button vibration when the color turns red is limited, and the limited button vibration is performed after the initial operation is completed.

For example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation starts, and it is also possible to give a button vibration warning (indicating a different level of expectation than the warning at the start) in Figure 321 (B1), with the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration warning differing in at least one of the vibration period, cycle, and the illumination pattern of the button LED during vibration. If a button vibration warning is given during the initial operation, the button vibration warning is limited, and limited button vibration is given after the initial operation has finished.

Form 15 (power interruption just before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-continuous notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-sequential announcement is executed will be described based on Figure 369. Figure 369 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-sequential announcement is executed.

As shown in Figure 369, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing variable pattern has begun, if a power outage occurs just before the variable display ends when a losing symbol combination is displayed statically in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, approximately 5,000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as during the period when the losing symbol combination is temporarily displayed statically, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when decorative symbols are displayed statically in the variable display until the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the next variable display), and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), if there is a pending memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will begin.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after the power outage recovery command and the symbol determination command transmitted based on the CPU 103's recovery are received, and until the next command, the variable display start command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 370), and the fact that power is being restored is notified until the next command is received, i.e., during the symbol determination display period.

After that, based on receiving the variable display start command and the variation pattern command, the variable display will begin in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern (pseudo-consecutive) in which the pseudo-consecutive preview indicating whether the variable display will resume will be executed and the determined preview effect (movable object preview), and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable object LED 9d, lower board movable object LED 9e, upper frame movable object LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner corresponding to the background (variation), and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the background (variation) will begin. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power outage recovery command, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 will end, and the display of an effect image corresponding to the background (variation) will begin.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each moving body is initiated. After that, once the initial operation of each moving body is completed, the result notification part begins, in which the results of the pseudo-continuous preview are announced.

In the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part), as shown in Figures 322 (C6), (C10), and (C9), results such as whether the variable display has resumed are notified. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part starts, the visibility of the result notification part, such as whether the variable display has resumed, will be hindered by the movable body moving due to the initial movement, and there is a risk that the player will misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation prior to the variation in which the pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part) begins, thereby preventing the movable body performing the initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part).

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the pseudo-continuous prediction is executed, the period from the start of the variation to the start of the pseudo-continuous prediction (result notification part) and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the pseudo-continuous prediction (result notification part) starts (see Figures 321 (B2) to (B6)).

In this embodiment, the execution of the movable object prediction is determined together with the execution of the pseudo consecutive prediction, so the movable object prediction is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display began. However, since operation confirmation control is being executed, as explained in the first embodiment, the performance operations of the on-board movable object 32A and chance button 631B at the timing of the execution of the movable object prediction may be restricted, and only the effect display and sound effect corresponding to the movable object prediction may be output (see Figure 339). Also, in the first embodiment, the performance operations of the on-board movable object 32A and chance button 631B are executed after the initial operation is completed, but since the pseudo consecutive prediction (introduction part) has begun, the performance operations of the movable object prediction are restricted, but the performance operations of the movable object prediction may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and then, when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed and the next variable display begins, it is decided that a pseudo-consecutive preview will be executed in that variable display.If it is decided to execute a pseudo-consecutive preview at the start of the variable display, the time from the start of the variable display to the execution of the result notification part of the pseudo-consecutive preview is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, approximately 20 seconds).Therefore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation before which the pseudo-consecutive preview (result notification part) is executed, the pseudo-consecutive preview (result notification part) will be executed. Although an example has been given in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the notification part of the pseudo consecutive announcement is started, the present invention is not limited to this. When a start winning occurs and the CPU 103 determines that a specific variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed is present, a specific presentation control command specifying specific information regarding the specific variation pattern (for example, a winning presentation specification command specifying the execution of a pseudo consecutive announcement) is sent, and based on the specific presentation control command, the presentation control CPU 120 may be able to change the execution period of the initial operation so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part of the result of the pseudo consecutive announcement is started.

For example, if a start winning occurs during a specified variable display and it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed will be used, a winning effect designation command (specific information) specifying that this is the specific variable pattern (with pseudo consecutive announcement) will be sent.

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed statically based on the transmission of the performance pattern confirmation designation command, and after the pattern confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern confirmation command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command specifying a specific fluctuation pattern (with pseudo-consecutive warning) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation currently being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with a shorter operating period (e.g., 5 seconds) than the initial operation currently being performed.

In more detail, the initial operation involves sequentially performing the maximum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (moving back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while the shortened initial operation involves simultaneously performing the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (e.g., returning to the origin immediately after passing through the origin position). Furthermore, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one moving body is in the middle of a maximum extension movement, that movement is interrupted and a retraction movement is performed, and once it returns to the origin position, the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body, including the one moving body, are simultaneously performed. Furthermore, if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation occurs immediately before the end of the initial operation (e.g., 5 seconds before the end), the operation should not switch to the shortened initial operation even if a specific movement pattern designation command is received.

Also, for example, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the one in which a moving object announcement or pseudo consecutive announcement is executed, and then the power is turned on, the performance action in the moving object announcement that was executed or limited during the initial operation will be performed during the introductory part of the pseudo consecutive performance (a short initial operation is performed in Figure 322 (C4), and the performance action in the limited moving object announcement is performed in Figure 322 (C5)).

Form 16 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery from normal fluctuation)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery from normal fluctuation will be explained with reference to Figures 370 and 371. Figure 370 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during normal fluctuation and operation confirmation control is started based on the subsequent power-on. Figure 371 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the above-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the below-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in Figure 370 (A), if a power outage occurs during the variable display of the normal game state and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start, the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of start-up disappears, and then the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored, please wait" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored, and it is notified that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

If, while the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, the game ball is detected by a detection switch such as the gate switch 21 located in the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5, and it is detected that the player is playing with a right-handed shot, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a left-handed shot promotion display 132SG530 in the upper right corner of the display screen, consisting of the words "Please return to left-handed shot" and a left-pointing arrow, encouraging the player to shoot the game ball into the game area (first path) on the left side of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 370 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Furthermore, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the left-hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in a position where part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform their initial operations will be explained based on Figures 371(A) and (B). Figures 371(A) and (B) show the relationship between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the left-hit prompt display 132SG530, and also allow comparison with the relationship with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figures 357 and 366), which is not actually displayed.

As shown in Figure 371 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap either the recovery display 132SG510 or the left-hit prompt display 132SG530, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 370 (A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, part of the effect unit 32a and the support unit 32b overlap in front of the left hit prompt display 132SG530, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (see Figure 370 (B)). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes by and the left hit prompt display 132SG530 becomes visible, but when it descends to the effect position, part of the effect unit 32a overlaps in front of part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (see Figure 370 (C)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 371 (A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 371 (A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the left-hit prompt display 132SG530, recovery in progress display 132SG510, and right-hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of these displays (see Figure 370 (A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and after it has reached the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap with the left hit prompt display 132SG530, the player can see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (see Figures 370 (D) and (E)). The same situation occurs when the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during normal variable display, and then the initial operation is performed when the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shortened. Specifically, the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 only when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position, and does not overlap for the period during which the on-board movable body 32A is stopped at the presentation position or origin position, so the visibility of the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is less likely to be obstructed by the on-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation of the left-hit prompt display 132SG530.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 371 (A), the period during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is longer than the period during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430. However, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed during time-saving states and jackpot game states that are advantageous to the player, and if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the on-board movable body 32A performing its initial operation, the player may miss the opportunity to generate a win by performing a right-hit operation and suffer a disadvantage. Therefore, it is preferable that the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 maintains better visibility than the left-hit prompt display 132SG530.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 can display the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 and output a left-hit prompt sound as a left-hit operation prompt notification. When operation confirmation control is performed based on a cold start after a power outage, the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen, while the left-hit operation prompt sound is restricted. When operation confirmation control is performed based on a hot start after a power outage, the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen, while the left-hit operation prompt sound is output. In this way, it is possible to provide an appropriate left-hit operation prompt notification that takes into account the situation at power-on.

In addition, in normal operation, a left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued when a gaming ball enters the gate switch 21, etc., located on the right gaming area side. In normal operation, a special left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued, which has a higher priority than a left-hit operation promotion notification, based on a specific number of gaming balls (e.g., five) entering the gate switch 21. The special left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued for a longer period than the period (e.g., 20 seconds) during which the movable body operates due to operation confirmation control. This prevents the special left-hit operation promotion notification from being obstructed by a movable body that operates due to operation confirmation control.

Forms 17 and 18 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery during a jackpot)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery during a jackpot will be explained based on Figures 372 and 373. Figure 372 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during a jackpot and operation confirmation control is started based on the subsequent power-on. Figure 373 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body on the board and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body below the board and various displays.

As shown in Figure 372 (A), if a power outage occurs during a round of play in the jackpot game state and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start, the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of start-up disappears, and then the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored, and it is announced that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

In addition, if a control command indicating a jackpot game state, such as an open command or an after-open command, is received along with a power outage recovery command, a right-hit prompt display 132SG430 will be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen while the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, encouraging the player to shoot the game ball into the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 370 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Furthermore, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In detail, the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the upper and lower movable bodies 32A and 32B perform their initial operations will be explained based on Figures 373(A) and (B).

As shown in Figure 373 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the recovery display 132SG510 or the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 372 (A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the support part 32b overlaps the front side of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 (not shown). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes by and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 becomes visible, but when it descends to the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (see Figure 372 (B)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 373 (A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 373 (A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap either the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 or the recovery in progress display 132SG510, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 372 (A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and after it has reached the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, the player can see the right hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 372 (C)). Note that the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display remains the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during round play in a jackpot game state, and then the initial operation is performed when the device is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so as not to overlap in front of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 displayed in operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed in front of the specified area (see Figure 356 (A)) where information corresponding to the round play (e.g., number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed, thereby making it less likely that the visibility of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 will be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which information corresponding to round play (for example, round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball count display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball count display 132SG454, etc.) overlaps in front of the specified area (see Figure 356 (A)) where it is displayed is shorter than the period during which it overlaps in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed during operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round-play movable body effect is performed at the start of a round play, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on be performed in an operating mode that does not include the effect operation of the round-play movable body effect (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position).

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during round play in a jackpot game state, and then the initial operation is performed when the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so that it does not overlap in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed in front of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it less likely that the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 will be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which it overlaps in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is shorter than the period during which it is superimposed in front of the recovery in progress display 132SG510.

Furthermore, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round-play movable body effect is performed at the start of a round play, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on be performed in an operating mode that does not include the effect operation of the round-play movable body effect (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position).

In addition, the time that the under-board movable body 32B spends in the presentation position overlapping the recovery display 132SG510 during initial operation may be shorter than the presentation operation of the movable body presentation. For example, when a power outage occurs while the variable display is not being executed and then the power is turned on, the time T1 that the movable body spends in the presentation position during initial operation and the time T2 that the movable body spends in the presentation position during the movable body presentation are preferably longer than the time T3 that the movable body spends in the presentation position during initial operation when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs while the variable display is being executed (T1 = T2 > T3). In this way, a movable body that operates due to the operation confirmation control that is performed when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs during an advantageous state is not superimposed on the recovery display 132SG510 for a long period of time, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not interfere with determining whether or not the machine is undergoing recovery.

Form 19 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery during time reduction)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery during time reduction will be explained based on Fig. 374. Fig. 374 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on afterwards.

As shown in Figure 374 (A), if a power outage occurs during variable display in the time-saving mode and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start, the start-up preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of start-up disappears, and then the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored, please wait" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored, and notifying the user that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

As shown in Figure 374 (A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Furthermore, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In detail, the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap (see Figure 374 (C)).

As shown in Figure 374 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the recovery display 132SG510 or the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of the displays.

Next, when the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A begins, the variable display is stopped based on the transmission of a pattern confirmation command, the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 ends, and the second background display 132SG320 is displayed. As the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, the support portion 32b first overlaps the front side of the right hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (not shown). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes through and the area where the right hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed becomes visible, but when it descends to the presentation position, the presentation portion 32a overlaps the front side of part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (see Figure 374 (B)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when moving from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when moving from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 374 (A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 or the recovery in progress display 132SG510, so the player can see all of the displays.

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and after it has reached the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, the player can see the right hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 374 (C)). Note that the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display remains the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during the variable display in the time-saving state, and then the initial operation is performed when the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so as not to overlap in front of the specific area (see Figure 374 (A)) in which the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 displayed during operation confirmation control is displayed, rather than being superimposed in front of the specified area (see Figure 374 (B) (C)) in which information corresponding to the time-saving state (e.g., presentation mode display 132SG221, remaining time-saving display 132SG201, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls issued display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed.As a result, when the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 ends and the normal state is restored, the visibility of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, the presentation mode display 132SG221, the remaining time-saving display 132SG201, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) overlaps in front of the specified area (see Figures 374 (B) (C)) where it is displayed) is shorter than the period during which it overlaps in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed during operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round-play movable body effect is performed at the start of a round play, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on be performed in an operating mode that does not include the effect operation of the round-play movable body effect (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position).

Furthermore, in embodiments 17 to 19, the overlap between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the recovery in progress display 132SG510, and information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, the performance mode display 132SG221, the remaining time-saving display 132SG201, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) was described. In this embodiment, the operation confirmation control compares the total overlap time with the various displays actually displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation. However, regardless of whether the various displays are displayed, it is sufficient that the overlap time with the display area in which the various displays are displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation satisfies the above relationship.

Forms 21 to 24 (Start-up order when initial operation control is executed)
In the characteristic part 132SG, as shown in Figures 334 and 335, when power is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start or hot start), an example is given in which the special symbol lamps that constitute the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B and each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are simultaneously lit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the special symbol lamps light up when power is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the timing at which each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) light up may be different.

For example, as shown in Figures 375 (A) to (G), when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the start-up preparation display 132SG500 first begins to be displayed on the image display device 5. After a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, as in Figures 334 and 335) has elapsed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 began to be displayed, the special symbol lamps that make up the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B begin to light up (see Figures 375 (A) and (B)).

At this timing, the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized again, causing the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 7 to return to their power-off states. That is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a normal or time-saving mode and no normal wins have occurred and then power is cut off before starting a hot start, or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a jackpot gaming mode and then power is cut off during the interval period and then power is cut off before starting a hot start, the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 7 are again in their closed states. Also, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a normal or time-saving mode and then powers off while a normal win has occurred and then powers off before starting a hot start, the variable prize ball device 6B is in its open state. Also, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a jackpot gaming mode and then powers off before starting a hot start while the special variable prize ball device 7 (large prize opening) is open, the special variable prize ball device 7 is in its open state.

After these special chart lamps light up and the variable winning ball device 6B and special variable winning ball device 7 are in their power-off state, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begin to light up.

After this, as an initialization notification, the image display device 5 displays an initialization notification image, each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper panel movable body LED 9d, lower panel movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) lights up in an initialization notification manner, and speakers 8L, 8R start to output an initialization notification sound. After that, confirmation operations are performed on the upper panel movable body 32A, lower panel movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as initial operation control (Fig. 375 (D) to (G)).

In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down and starts up by a cold start while in normal mode or time-saving mode and no variable display is being executed, as shown in FIG. 376 (A), after power is cut off, a power-on command is first sent from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120 (the performance control CPU 120 receives the power-on command) three seconds after the start of display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5. At this time, the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B are energized, causing the special symbol lamps that make up these special symbol display devices 4A, 4B to begin lighting up, and the solenoids 81, 82 are energized, causing the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to return to their initial state (closed state).

At this time, the special symbol lamps that make up the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B initially light up in the manner in which the variable display result is a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol lamps that make up the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may light up in the manner in which the variable display result is a miss or in the manner in which the variable display result is different from any other variable display result.

In addition, after these special chart lamps are lit and the variable winning ball device 6B and special variable winning ball device 7 are reset to their initial states, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begin to light up.

Then, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power-on command (five seconds have passed since the startup preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 begins displaying the initialization notification display 132SG600, replacing the startup preparation display 132SG500. After the initialization notification display 132SG600 begins displaying, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begin emitting light in an initialization notification mode, and confirmation operations are performed for the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as initial operations.

By doing this, the startup preparation display 132SG500 makes it easier for players and staff at the amusement parlor where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed to recognize that power has been turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it also enables players and staff at the amusement parlor where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed to confirm that the special symbol lamp is lit, which has a significant impact on gameplay, without being distracted by the operation of checking each moving part.

Furthermore, in the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down and hot started while in normal or time-saving mode and variable display is being executed, as shown in FIG. 376 (B), after power is lost, first, three seconds after the start preparation display 132SG500 begins to be displayed on the image display device 5, the CPU 103 sends a power outage recovery designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command). At that time, the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B are energized, which starts the lighting of the special symbol lamps that make up these special symbol display devices 4A, 4B (and the variable display of special symbols by the flashing of the special symbol lamps), and the solenoids 81, 82 are energized, which returns the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to the state they were in before power was lost. Furthermore, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power outage recovery command (five seconds have passed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 begins to display the recovery in progress display 132SG510, replacing the start-up preparation display 132SG500. After that, the various LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) light up, and the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B are checked as initial operations.

In addition, if the variable display that was running before the power outage stops while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, and a new variable display is started, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 will end when the new variable display stops, as shown in Figure 376 (B).

In other words, if the variable display of the special symbol is resumed when the launch preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 with a state in which the number of pending memories is 0, and the resumed variable display stops while the launch preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, when a new variable display begins due to a new launch winning, the launch preparation display 132SG500 will switch to displaying the recovery display 132SG510 during the new variable display. Furthermore, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 will end when the new variable display stops.

In the example shown in Figure 376 (B), while the recovery display 132SG510 is being displayed and the variable display is in progress, confirmation operations for the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are started as an initial operation.

As shown in Figure 376 (B), even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down and hot started while the variable display is running in the normal or time-saving mode, if the variable display that was running before the power was cut off does not stop while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5, then as shown in Figure 377 (A), the image display device 5 will start displaying the recovery display 132SG510 in place of the start-up preparation display 132SG500, and then the variable display will stop (at the same time, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 will end).

Also, as in Figure 376 (B), even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down and hot started while the variable display is running in normal or time-saving mode, and the variable display that was running before the power was cut off stops while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5, if there is pending memory when the variable display stops, a new variable display will start based on the pending memory after the variable display stops while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, as shown in Figure 377 (B). In this case, the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 will end when the new variable display stops.

As described above, in the examples shown in Figures 376 (A), (B) and 377 (A), (B), the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B will not be initiated when a background image or effect image corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the image display device 5, so it is possible to prevent the confirmation operation from being hindered by the background image or effect image corresponding to the variable display on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 377 (A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and the variable display is being executed, and the power is cut off and the machine is started with a hot start, if the variable display does not stop while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the lighting of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) and the confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as an initial operation are simultaneously started. The explanation is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off and hot started while the variable display is running in normal or time-saving mode, if the variable display does not stop while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the lighting of each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) and the confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as an initial operation may start at different times.

For example, as shown in FIG. 378 (A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in normal mode or time-saving mode and the variable display is running, if the power is cut off and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a hot start, if the variable display does not stop while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) can be made to light up in a manner corresponding to the restoration being carried out while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed (more precisely, for two seconds after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage restoration command from the CPU 103), and the confirmation operations of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B can be started as an initial operation while the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed.

In addition, the lighting of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, upper panel movable body LED 9d, lower panel movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) in a manner corresponding to the restoration in progress may continue even after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 has ended, and may be ended, for example, when the confirmation operation for each movable body has ended.

In the example shown in Figure 378 (A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and the variable display is being executed, and the power is cut off and the machine is started with a hot start, if the variable display stops while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and a new variable display does not start, as shown in Figure 378 (B), the image display device 5 starts displaying a background image corresponding to the variable display being stopped from the timing when the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends, and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is lit in a manner corresponding to the background image.

In addition, the examples shown in Figures 376 to 378 describe a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start mode after a power outage occurs when the gaming state is normal or time-saving, that is, when variable display can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and power outages can also occur in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when it is in a jackpot gaming state in which variable display is not executed.

When a pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down during a jackpot game and starts up in a hot start mode, if the power outage occurs while the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is open due to round play, as shown in Figure 379 (A), after the power outage, the CPU 103 first sends a power outage recovery command to the presentation control CPU 120 (the presentation control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command) three seconds after the start of display of the start preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5. At that time, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are powered up, causing the special symbol lamps that make up these special symbol display devices 4A and 4B to light up (and the special symbol lamps to flash to display the special symbols variably), and the solenoids 81 and 82 are powered up, causing the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to return to the state they were in before the power outage. In other words, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is open.

Furthermore, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power outage restoration command (five seconds have passed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 will begin displaying the restoration in progress display 132SG510 in place of the start-up preparation display 132SG500, and each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) will begin lighting up in a manner corresponding to the restoration being carried out.

While the recovery display 132SG510 is still displayed, confirmation operations are performed on the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operations.

After the initial operation is complete and the round of play ends, the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from an open state to a closed state in response to the end of the round of play. Then, in response to the start of the next round of play, the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from a closed state to an open state, the image display device 5 begins to display an image corresponding to the round of play, and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begins to light up in a manner corresponding to the round of play.

In the example of Figure 379 (A), a power outage occurs during a round of play, and when the pachinko gaming machine is started up in a hot start, the round of play before the power outage ends after the start-up preparation display 132SG500 has finished displaying. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figure 379 (B), when a power outage occurs during a round of play, and when the pachinko gaming machine is started up in a hot start, the round of play before the power outage ends while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, and the next round of play begins (special variable winning ball equipment In the case where the device 7 changes from an open state to a closed state and then to an open state again, even after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 has finished, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) can be lit in a manner corresponding to the recovery in progress until the confirmation operations of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as the initial operation are completed.

As shown in Figures 379 (A) and (B), if a power outage occurs when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state (during a round of play) during a jackpot game, the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, and when each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is lit in a manner corresponding to the round of play, the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132 Since the confirmation operations for SG101 and chance button 631B are not executed, it is possible to prevent the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) from lighting up in a manner appropriate to the round of play, which would interfere with the work of checking whether the confirmation operations for above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, above-frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B are being executed correctly.

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 376 to 378, we have described a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs when the gaming state is normal or time-saving. However, as shown in Figure 380 (A), if the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state before the power outage occurs, and the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed (in the example of Figure 380 (A), during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command until the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends), If a game ball enters ball device 6B, that is, if a second start-up win occurs while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, after the start-up preparation display 132SG500 has finished displaying, the image display device 5 will display the recovery display 132SG510 until the timing at which the variable display corresponding to the second start-up win is stopped, and while the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, confirmation operations for the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, above-frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B will be started as initial operation control.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 380 (A), the variable winning ball device 6B was in an open state before the power outage occurred, and a gaming ball entered the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was being displayed (in the example of Figure 380 (A), during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 received the power outage recovery command until the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ended). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case where the variable display of normal symbols was being executed before the power outage occurred, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started up with a hot start, and a normal symbol win occurred on the image display device 5 while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was being displayed, as shown in Figure 380 (B), the initial operation control can be performed by controlling the variable winning ball device 6B to be in an open state from the timing before the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B begin.

As described above, by executing the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in Figures 380(A) and 380(B), it is possible to preferably execute the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operation control.

In the example of Figure 380 (A), the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is switched to the display of the recovery display 132SG510 after a gaming ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 may also be switched to the display of the recovery display 132SG510 at the time a gaming ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state.

In addition, Figures 379 (A) and (B) illustrate a case where the power is interrupted when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a jackpot game state and starts up in a hot start, with the power interruption occurring when the special variable prize ball device 7 (large prize opening) is in an open state due to round play. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figure 381, in a case where the power is interrupted when the special variable prize ball device 7 (large prize opening) is in an open state due to round play, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start. As a result, while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 (in the example shown in FIG. 381, during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command until the start-up preparation display 132SG500 finishes displaying), if the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from the closed state to the open state again for the next round of play, the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 should begin after the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 finishes displaying.

By executing the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in Figure 381, it is possible to preferably execute the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operation control.

In addition, in form 3, a portion of the fanfare effect that starts while the launch preparation display 132SG500 is displayed is invisible to the player, and when the launch preparation display 132SG500 is no longer displayed, the fanfare effect can be seen from the continuation of the portion that was not visible. In contrast, in forms 21 to 24, the effect display corresponding to the variable display that started while the launch preparation display 132SG500 was displayed is made invisible because a restoration indicator is displayed. In other words, the variable display is intentionally made invisible because important information related to whether or not a jackpot will be hit must not be inaccurate. However, the fanfare effect is intentionally made visible because it includes an operation direction notification part that encourages right-hand hits, which are necessary for subsequent jackpot play.

Form 25 (Relationship between initialization notification image and initial operation) <Modification>
Next, the relationship between the initialization notification display 132SG600 and the operation confirmation control will be described with reference to Figs. 383 and 384. Fig. 383 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the initialization notification display 132SG600 and the operation confirmation control. Fig. 384 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the initialization notification display 132SG600 and the operation confirmation control.

In the above embodiment, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up using cold start processing after a power outage occurs, a power-on command, a game status background command (normal background), and a customer waiting demo command are transmitted based on the CPU 103 being restored after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start-up timing and the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed on the image display device 5. Then, based on receiving these effect control commands, the presentation control CPU 120 determines that power-on with initialization has occurred (started up using cold start processing), and causes the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g to light up in a predetermined initialization notification mode, and begins outputting an initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L, 8R (see Figures 334 and 335).

In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed on the image display device 5, the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is hidden and the first background display 132SG310 is displayed based on the game status background designation command (normal background). However, in this modified example, when power is turned on with initialization, the initialization notification display 132SG600 as described in FIG. 375 is displayed when the initialization notification begins.

In this case, after the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 begins, the initial operation is initiated by the operation confirmation control, and after the initial operation is completed, the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends. This allows the user to quickly confirm that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been initialized without being distracted by the moving body operating under the operation confirmation control, and prevents the moving body operating under the operation confirmation control from interfering with the confirmation of whether the visual initialization notification has ended.

In addition, the period from power-on with initialization (startup with cold start processing) until operation check control is performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization (startup with hot start processing) until operation check control is performed. This prevents the initialization notification display 132SG600 from becoming invisible due to operation check control being performed immediately after power-on with initialization.

Furthermore, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (e.g., 30 seconds) and is hidden after the predetermined execution period has ended. Even if a start-up win occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed, it is preferable that the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden and the variable display is not initiated. This allows for optimal operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, if the execution period of the variable display that begins upon the occurrence of a start winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initialization display may be configured to continue to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display. This allows for optimal operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, if a start-up win occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 may be immediately hidden and an effect image corresponding to the variable display may be displayed.

Furthermore, after power-on without initialization (startup using hot start processing), the initialization notification display 132SG600 may not be displayed, and the background may be displayed based on the game status background designation command. This allows for optimal operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, in this modified example, when power is turned on with initialization (startup with cold start processing), the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 begins, followed by initial operation via operation confirmation control, and after the initial operation is completed, the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 382, if a start-up win occurs after the initialization notification display 132SG600 has ended and it is decided that a movable object preview will be executed, while as shown in FIG. 383, if a start-up win occurs during the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600 and it is decided that a movable object preview will be executed, as described in embodiment 1, not only the performance operation due to the movable object preview but also the output of effect displays and sound effects are restricted, and the performance operation due to the movable object preview is carried out after the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 has ended.

Mode 26 (Operation Confirmation Control) <Modification>
Next, an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control executed by the presentation control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Figs. 384 to 386. Fig. 384 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing as a modified example. Fig. 385 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of the presentation operation of the win/lose button presentation as a modified example.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in Figures 330(A) to (J), when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 begins (when the power is turned on), the operation confirmation control executed by the performance control CPU 120 based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up through cold start processing (or hot start processing) is as follows: first, the chance button 631B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 330(B)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 330(C)). Next, after the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 330(D)), the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 330(E)). Next, the under-board movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 330(F)), after which the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 330(G)). Next, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 330(H)), after which the under-board movable body 32B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position, and the operation confirmation control ends (see Figure 330(I)). After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., approximately 10 seconds) has elapsed, the initialization notification ends and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends, but the operation mode of each movable body can be changed in various ways.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 384(A), when the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body is located at the origin position and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body is located at the origin position, the distance L1 between the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B is shorter than the distance L2 between the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body when the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body is located at the performance position and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body is located at the performance position, as shown in Figure 384(B).

In this modified example, the on-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B, which have the above-mentioned relationship, may be configured such that during operation confirmation control, the chance button 631B and on-board movable body 32A simultaneously begin moving from the origin position to the performance position so that their respective initial operation periods overlap (see Figure 384 (B)). Thereafter, the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 384 (C)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 384 (D)), so that their respective initial operation periods do not overlap.

By doing this, it is possible to simultaneously confirm that the first movable body (e.g., chance button 631B) can operate normally in the presentation position, and that the second movable body (e.g., on-board movable body 32A) can operate normally in the presentation position, thereby simplifying the confirmation process, and at the same time making it possible to individually confirm the movement of the first movable body (e.g., chance button 631B) from the presentation position to the origin position, and the movement of the second movable body (e.g., on-board movable body 32A) from the presentation position to the origin position, which are difficult to confirm.

In this modified example, the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A simultaneously start moving from the origin position to the performance position, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as their initial operation periods overlap, for example, during the period from when one of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A starts moving from the origin position to when it stops at the performance position, the other starts moving from the origin position to the performance position. In other words, it is sufficient that at least a portion of the advancement operation periods of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A overlap.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of the form in which the movable body below the board 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position during the win/lose button performance, but it is also possible to use a first movable body (e.g., the movable body above the board 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., the movable body below the board 32B). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 385(A), in the win/lose button effect, when the operation prompt effect is being executed during the valid operation period or when the valid operation period has elapsed, the above-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the effect position (see FIG. 385(B)), and the below-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the effect position to lift the above-board movable body 32A, so that the effect operation periods of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B do not overlap (see FIG. 385(C)). After that, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B may simultaneously move from the effect position to the origin position so that the effect operation periods of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B overlap (see FIG. 385(D)).

For the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B that perform a performance in which the first movable body and the second movable body come into contact (or overlap) in this manner, it is preferable that the initial operation be performed in the operation confirmation control in an operation mode that does not include the performance operations described in Figures 385 (B) to (D) (for example, a mode in which the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform an advance operation separately). This makes it possible to perform the operation confirmation control in an optimal manner.

In addition, a performance position sensor 132SG134 (see FIG. 275) is provided that can detect that a second movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) is positioned at the performance position, and the movement of a first movable body (e.g., above-board movable body 32A) positioned at the performance position during operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) has been detected by the performance position sensor 132SG134, thereby enabling operation confirmation control to be performed optimally.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on, if the movable bodies including the first movable body and the second movable body are not positioned at the origin position before the long initial operation control is started in the operation confirmation control, return control is performed to move the movable bodies to their initial positions (for example, short initial operation control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101), thereby enabling the operation confirmation control to be performed optimally.

Mode 27 (operation confirmation control)
Also, as shown in Figure 330, the under-board movable body 32B provided on the game board 2 and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a are capable of performing initial operations, and when the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position and stops at the performance position (see Figure 330 (F)), the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and then moves from the performance position to the origin position (see Figures 330 (G) to (I)).

By doing this, the first movable body (e.g., under-board movable body 32B) placed at the performance position during the operation confirmation control indicates that the operation confirmation control has not ended, and by starting the operation of the second movable body (e.g., above-frame movable body 132SG101) when the first movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) is placed at the performance position, it is possible to prevent the operation confirmation control of the second movable body (e.g., above-frame movable body 132SG101) from being overlooked.

Specifically, frame-side movable bodies such as the frame-top movable body 132SG101 and chance button 631B are easily tampered with because they can be touched by players. Therefore, if they fail to operate normally, just like board-side movable bodies such as the board-top movable body 32A and the board-bottom movable body 32B, and the board-side movable body is forced to start over from its initial operation, the board-side movable body can be intentionally put into a dead-end state (see Figure 386 (A)).

Therefore, for example, as shown in Figure 386 (B), if the frame-side movable body is unable to operate normally, the board-side movable body is retracted, and an error image regarding the malfunction of the frame-side movable body (for example, a caption such as "Please check the frame-side movable body", which is erased once the frame-side movable body is able to operate normally) is displayed on the background image on the display screen of the image display device 5, and if the frame-side movable body is unable to operate normally even after performing the initial operation (frame-side movable body only; operating mode is the same as when the power is turned on) upon error determination up to five times (more times than for the board-side movable body, and the conditions leading up to the dead end are stricter in consideration of the ease of tampering), only the frame-side movable body can be transitioned to a dead end state.

In addition, a performance position sensor 132SG104 (see FIG. 275) is provided that can detect that a second movable body (e.g., an above-frame movable body 132SG101) is positioned at a performance position, and the movement of a first movable body (e.g., an under-board movable body 32B) positioned at a performance position during operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., an under-board movable body 32B) has been detected by the performance position sensor 132SG104, thereby enabling operation confirmation control to be performed optimally.

As described above, the present invention provides
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a sound output means;
A movable body and
A movable body control means;
A performance control means,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
the performance control means is capable of performing a demonstration display control to cause a demonstration display to be displayed on the display means when the power is turned on;
the movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power outage occurs and the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the demonstration display control is performed;
The performance control means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the success or failure notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be made,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are a time when a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character and a time when a dialogue subtitle is not displayed,
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance,
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
It is characterized by:
This invention has a unique advantage in that it can make the series of effects performed more appealing both when the variable display is being performed and when the variable display is not being performed. For example, when the variable display is not being performed, the visibility of the demonstration display is not obstructed by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control, thereby maximizing the effect of the effects performed when the variable display is not being performed. Furthermore, since the series of effects performed when the variable display is being performed includes an introduction part and an epilogue part, the player can feel a sense of contrast between the uplifting feeling in the introduction part and the celebratory feeling in the epilogue part. Furthermore, since the dialogue subtitles are easily displayed in the epilogue part in response to the dialogue sounds, the epilogue part is more likely to feel a sense of celebratory feeling. In this way, it is possible to add contrast to the series of effects performed when the variable display is being performed, making the flow of the series of effects performed more apparent, thereby improving the presentation effect.

This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Each configuration related to the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be combined as appropriate with some or all of the configurations related to other features. Such combined features, or individual uncombined features, may be combined as appropriate with some or all of the configurations related to other features.

The above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 is a payout gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed gaming machines in which a predetermined number of gaming balls are enclosed and circulatable inside the gaming machine, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a player's loan request and the number of prize balls awarded when a prize is won are added, while the number of gaming balls used in play is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, players are awarded points or scores rather than balls, and these awarded points or scores correspond to the gaming value.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol showing "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing that symbol. Furthermore, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, that symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not show the symbol showing "-").

Furthermore, while spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) have been used as an example of gaming media, this is not limited to spherical gaming media and may also be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In the above explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.)) that can execute a game in which medals are inserted, a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player. Furthermore, a gaming machine is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and can be a general gaming machine as long as it is something that at least allows play, so the present invention can also be applied to general gaming machines.

In this specification, expressions used to compare various percentages, such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high," "low," and "different") may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%."

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered in all respects to be illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not the above description, and is intended to include all modifications that are equivalent in meaning to and within the scope of the claims.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 5 Image display device 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative pattern display area 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General winning port 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 13 Sound control board 15 Relay board 20 Special pattern LED board 21 Gate switch 22A First start port switch 22B Second start port switch 23 Count switch 24 V winning switch 30 Ball hitting operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 35A Controller sensor unit 35B Push sensor 41 Passing gate 50 Fourth pattern unit 81, 82, 83 Solenoid 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU
101,121 ROM
102,122 RAM
104, 124 Random number circuit 106 RTC
110 Switch circuit 111 Output circuit 123 Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can perform variable display and be controlled to an advantageous state,
a transmitting means capable of transmitting start information corresponding to a variable display pattern including a specific variable display pattern capable of performing an operation effect by a performance operation by a player;
receiving means for receiving the start information;
A movable body and
A movable body control means;
A performance control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
A predetermined display relating to the advantageous state can be displayed in a predetermined display area,
A special display whose appearance can be changed during the special state can be displayed in the special display area,
The predetermined display regarding the advantageous state in the predetermined display area does not change in appearance during the special state,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation operation control to operate the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally after power is turned on,
the confirmation operation control is a control for operating the movable body so that an area where the movable body overlaps with the special display area becomes smaller than the predetermined display area,
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part until the operation performance is executed;
a second part that is executed after the first part and that notifies the result of the operation performance;
The invention comprises:
The movable body control means
The confirmation operation control can be performed using a first operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a first period and a second operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a second period that is shorter than the first period,
a first movable body control pattern in which, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display and when the remaining time until the end of the predetermined variable display is shorter than the length of the second period, and when the power is subsequently turned on and the receiving means does not receive start information corresponding to the specific variable display pattern, the confirmation operation control is performed using the first operation control pattern;
a second movable body control pattern in which, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display when the remaining time until the end of the predetermined variable display is shorter than the length of the second period, and thereafter the power is turned on and the receiving means receives start information corresponding to the specific variable display pattern, the confirmation operation control is performed using the second operation control pattern during the execution of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern, and the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation operation control ends before the period corresponding to the second part;
The confirmation operation control can be performed in a plurality of patterns including
During the variable display, it is possible to execute a movable body effect using the movable body, and to display an effect display corresponding to the movable body effect,
When the variable display that executes the movable body performance is started while the confirmation operation control is being performed, the confirmation operation control is continued, and the effect display is displayed without executing the movable body performance during the confirmation operation control ;
The performance control means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
A gaming machine characterized by: